इंटरनेट मानक

Disclosure to Promote the Right To Information

Whereas the Parliament of India has set out to provide a practical regime of right to
information for citizens to secure access to information under the control of public authorities,
in order to promote transparency and accountability in the working of every public authority,
and whereas the attached publication of the Bureau of Indian Standards is of particular interest
to the public, particularly disadvantaged communities and those engaged in the pursuit of
education and knowledge, the attached public safety standard is made available to promote the
timely dissemination of this information in an accurate manner to the public.

“जान1 का अ+धकार, जी1 का अ+धकार” “प0रा1 को छोड न' 5 तरफ”

Mazdoor Kisan Shakti Sangathan Jawaharlal Nehru
“The Right to Information, The Right to Live” “Step Out From the Old to the New”

SP 30 (2011): National Electrical Code 2011 [ETD 20:

Electrical Installation]

“!ान $ एक न' भारत का +नम-ण”

Satyanarayan Gangaram Pitroda
“Invent a New India Using Knowledge”

“!ान एक ऐसा खजाना > जो कभी च0राया नहB जा सकता ह”

है”
ह
Bhartṛhari—Nītiśatakam
“Knowledge is such a treasure which cannot be stolen”
 jk"Vªh; fo|qr lafgrk 2011
( izFke iqujh{k.k )

NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE 2011

( First Revision )

Hkkjrh; ekud C;w j ks

BUREAU OF INDIAN STANDARDS
SP 30 : 2011

FIRST PUBLISHED AUGUST 1985

FIRST REVISION FEBRUARY 2011

© BUREAU OF INDIAN STANDARDS

ICS 01.120; 91.160.01

PRICE Rs. 4070.00

PUBLISHED BY BUREAU OF INDIAN STANDARDS, MANAK BHAVAN, 9 BAHADUR SHAH ZAFAR

MARG, NEW DELHI 110 002, PRINTED BY THE GENERAL MANAGER, GOVT. OF INDIA PRESS, NASIK

ii
 INTRODUCTION

India is on the path of development and its infrastructure sector has grown progressively. The buildings and
services so constructed depend on power for their construction and effective utilization. In fact, power is one of
the prime movers of development and electrical energy is the predominant form of energy being used due to ease
of generation/conversion, transmission, and final utilization.
Specific regulations to be adhered to in the supply and use of electrical energy had been laid down by the Indian
Electricity Act, 1910 and the Indian Electricity Rules, 1956 framed thereunder. However, a need was felt to
elaborate upon these regulations since the agencies involved have varied practices in view of their diverse interests
and different accessibility levels to technological developments. In order to rationalize these practices, India’s
first National Electrical Code, formulated in 1985, was a compendium of several well established codes of practice
which provided assistance on economic selection, installation and maintenance of electrical equipment employed
in the usage of electrical energy. The code complemented and elaborated on the Indian Electricity Rules, 1956
for the ease of application by the system engineers by recommending the best practices for electrical installations
in a consolidated form in order to provide for unified practices and procedures along with consideration for
safety and economic usage of energy in the design, execution, inspection and maintenance of electrical installations
of various locations.
During the formulation of the National Electrical Code in 1985, it was realized that the referred codes, for
example, those on wiring practice, earthing, lightning protection etc need to be revised in line with the practice
and technology available at that time. It had also been planned that after the relevant codes are revised, the
National Electrical Code would also need to be revised. After the publication of NEC 1985, the referred Codes
were revised. However, the task of revision of NEC could not be taken up in earnest immediately after the
revision of various codes of practice. Over the years, there have been yet more changes in the technology; new
practices have evolved and got modified. There have been tremendous socio-economic changes, and corresponding
change in the pattern of the usage of electricity. Electricity Act 2003 has been notified and power sector reforms
have been firmly established. During the Ninth Plan, it was realized that it is necessary to have an Energy
Conservation Act. Accordingly, the Government has enacted the Energy Conservation Act, 2001 to meet the legal
requirement needed to enforce energy efficiency and conservation measures. Due to all such changes, the present
scenario is at great variance with that of 1985, when the Code was first formulated. Therefore, an urgent need was
felt to revise the NEC at the earliest to maintain its relevance in the present context.
The task for revision of NEC was taken up by the Electrical Installations Sectional Committee, ETD 20 considering
the above factors. This revision follows the earlier structure of NEC, with modifications and additions being
incorporated in line with IEC 60364 series on ‘Electrical Installations’ as well as the changes and developments
that took place since the publication of NEC 1985. It is visualized that in future, further harmonization with
international codes may be considered.
Electrical installation should be carried out in accordance with the Indian Electricity Rules, 1956 and relevant
regulations as amended or brought into force from time to time. All material, accessories, appliances etc., used in
an electrical installation should conform to Indian Standards wherever they exist. There should be good
workmanship and proper coordination and collaboration between the architect, building engineer and the electrical
engineer from the planning stage itself. The design of electrical installation is required to take into account the
characteristics of available supply, nature of demand, environmental conditions, type of wiring and methods of
installations, protective equipment, emergency control, disconnecting devices, preventing of mutual influence
between electrical and non electrical installations, accessibility etc.
The Code is divided into eight parts, which are further divided into sections. Part 1 covers the General and
common aspects, which would apply to all types of electrical installations. Wiring installations are an important

iii
aspect of any electrical installation. These have been revised to align with international practice and it is proposed
to revise the relevant code of practice for wiring installations also. The Sections related to Earthing and Lightning
protection have been modified and corresponding modification is also being initiated to respective codes. Aspect
of voltage surges has also been included. Energy conservation aspects had been emphasized in NEC 1985.
Meanwhile, Energy Conservation Act, 2001 has been notified. Therefore, energy conservation aspects have been
further elaborated and energy audit has also been included.
This Code excludes the requirements coming under the purview of utilities, namely, the large generating stations,
distribution substations and associated transmission system, or captive generator sets of very large capacity. It
covers the requirements relating to standby or emergency generating stations and captive substations intended
for serving an individual occupancy and intended to serve a building or a group of buildings normally housed in
and around it. It gives guidelines on layout and building construction aspects, selection of equipment, transformer
installations, switching stations and station auxiliaries. Reference to pollution norms as laid down in Environment
Protection Act 1986 for diesel generator sets has now been included.
Non-industrial buildings include domestic dwellings, office buildings, shopping and commercial centers and
institutions, recreational & assembly buildings, medical establishments, hotels and sports buildings etc. Optimum
benefits from the use of electricity can be obtained only if the installation is of sufficient capacity and affords
enough flexibility. Safety, economy, efficiency, reliability, convenience as well as provision for future expansion
are major considerations in planning the electrical layout. Guidelines are provided based on general characteristics
of installations, supply characteristics and parameters. Switchgear for control and protection, service lines, metering,
earthing, building services, fire protection and miscellaneous provisions have been covered. Miscellaneous
provisions include telephone wiring, call bell system, clock system, group control, audio visual systems, closed
circuit TV where applicable, emergency lights for critical areas of the dwelling. Provision of increased number of
points for residential units in order to accommodate the gadgets available and to avoid overloading of points by
consumer and reference to miniature circuit breakers in addition to fuses under requirement of switchgear for
control and protection has been made.
Electrical networks in industrial buildings serve the purpose of distributing the required power to the consuming
points where it is used for a multitude of purposes in the industry. The design of electrical installation in industrial
premises is therefore more complicated than those in non-industrial buildings. Industrial installation has to take
care of load requirements and supply limitations in a simple and economic manner, ensuring at the same time full
protection to human life and loss of property by fire. The network layout should also facilitate easy maintenance
and fault localization. A particular feature of electrical installations in industrial buildings is the reliability of
supply to essential operations for which standby and emergency supply sources/networks are available. The
needs of such systems would depend on the type and nature of the industrial works.
Locations in industrial buildings which are by their nature hazardous, require special treatment in respect of
design of electrical installations therein. Industrial installations have been classified depending on the specified
criteria therein in order to help identify the specific nature of each industry and the locations therein, for assisting
the design engineer in the choice of equipment and methods.
Electrical installations are often required to be designed and erected for use for short periods of time ranging
from a few hours to few months and are connected to the supply source in open ground. Such installations are
generally unprotected from environmental hazards as compared to installations in buildings. Major risks in the
use of power in such installation arise from short circuit resulting in fire accidents and exposure to live wire
resulting in shock. Outdoor installations are required to comply not only with the general requirements, but also
additional requirements regarding supply intake arrangements, control of circuits, earthing, and protection against
overload, short circuit and earth leakage.
There is increased use of electricity for essential purposes in agriculture with the increase in sophistication in
organising the farm output of the country. Installations in agricultural premises are different as the external
influences on the electrical services are quite different from those encountered elsewhere. Even though the overall
power requirements for such installations could be small, the presence of livestock and other extraneous factors
necessitate laying down specific requirements to ensure safety. Specific requirements of electrical installations in
agricultural premises which include premises where livestock are present and farm produce are handled or stored
have been covered. Agricultural processing at the farm premises has now been included.
Any area, where during normal operations a hazardous atmosphere is likely to occur in sufficient quantity to
constitute a hazard had to be treated in a special manner from the point of the design of electrical installation.
iv
Many liquids, gases and vapours which in industry are generated, processed, handled and stored are combustible.
When ignited these may burn readily and with considerable explosive force when mixed with air in the appropriate
proportions. With regard to electrical installations, essential ignition sources include arcs, sparks or hot surfaces
produced either in normal operation or under specified fault conditions. NEC provides guidelines for electrical
installations and equipment in locations where a hazardous atmosphere is likely to be present with a view to
maximizing electrical safety. When electrical equipment is to be installed in or near a hazardous area, effort is to
be made to locate much of the equipment in less hazardous or non-hazardous areas and thus reduce the amount
of special equipment required. Hazardous areas can be limited in extent by construction measures, that is, walls
or dams. Ventilation or application of protective gas also reduces the probability of the presence of explosive gas
atmosphere so that areas of greater hazard can be transformed to areas of lesser hazard or to non-hazardous areas.
A number of product standards offering different types of protection are available. Regulatory requirements are
to be adhered to for such installations. Standards pertaining to classification of hazardous areas having flammable
gases and vapours for electrical installation and guide for selection of electrical equipment for hazardous area
have been revised and the changes have been incorporated in the NEC.
Excessive reliance on fossil fuel resources to meet the energy requirement of the country is considered unsustainable
in the long-run and has an adverse impact on the environment and ecology. This has resulted in the quest of
renewable sources of energy as a viable option to achieve the goal of sustainable development. Harnessing of
solar energy is one such area which is expected to supplement energy supply efforts. Hence a new part on solar
photovoltaic installations has been added.
The Code excludes guidance on tariff. Product details are also excluded from the Code as separate product
standards are available for these. When these standards are revised subsequent to the revision of NEC, there
could be instances where the latest Codes differ from the revised NEC. It is therefore recommended to follow the
provisions of the latest standards/codes of practice. In order to avoid instances where the Indian Standards and
provisions of this Code differ, attention has been drawn to the relevant standard. However, for certain provisions
in this Code, the relevant requirements from corresponding Indian Standards have been extracted and reproduced.
In all cases, for detailed guidance, reference should be made to the individual standard and should any contradiction
be observed between the provisions in individual standard and those reproduced herein, the provisions of the
former shall be considered accurate. As a general rule, technological innovations such as better materials or new
and better method also proved as ‘good practice’ would first be introduced in the individual standard as appropriate
than in the National Electrical Code. In order to keep pace with such changes and to incorporate the additional
knowledge that will be gained through the implementation of the Code, a continuous review is envisaged. Thus,
the users of this Code are encouraged to bring to the notice of Bureau of Indian Standards, need of modifications
that may be required in the light of changes in technology or other factors, as this is a continuous process.
The National Electrical Code (hereafter referred to as the Code) is intended to be advisory. It contains guidelines,
which can be immediately adopted for use by the various interests concerned. Its provisions are presently not
mandatory but are expected to serve as a model for adoption in the interest of safety and economy and with the
intent to keep our electrical installation practices at par with the best practices in the world.

v
 COMMITTEE COMPOSITION
Electrical Installations Sectional Committee, ETD 20

Chairman
SHRI N. NAGARAJAN
Chief Engineer
Central Public Works Department, New Delhi
Organization Representative(s)
Areva Transmission and Distribution, Noida SHRI BISWAJIT SAHA
BEST Undertaking, Mumbai SHRI S. A. PURANIK
SHRI P. R. B. NAIR (Alternate)
BSES Rajdhani Power Ltd, New Delhi SHRI SHANTANU DASTIDAR
Central Electricity Authority, New Delhi SHRI R. K. VERMA
SHRI B. R. SINGH (Alternate)
Chief Electrical Inspectorate (Kerala), Thiruvananthapuram SHRI K. S. BEENA
SHRI K. K. UNNI (Alternate)
Chief Electrical Inspectorate (Madhya Pradesh), Bhopal SHRI S. S. MUJALDE
SHRI A. K. DUBEY (Alternate)
Chief Electrical Inspectorate (Orissa), Behrampur SHRI G. C. CHOUDHURY
SHRI S. H. RAHMAN (Alternate)
Chief Electrical Inspectorate (Tamil Nadu), Chennai SHRI R. SUBRAMANIYAN
SHRI S. APPAVOO (Alternate)
Chief Electrical Inspectorate (Uttranchal), Nainital SHRI ANUPAM KUMAR
SHRI GIRISH CHAND (Alternate)
Central Public Works Department, New Delhi SHRI M. K. VERMA
SHRI S. CHOPRA (Alternate)
Development Consultant Limited, Kolkata SHRI JIBAN K. CHOWDHURY
SHRI RANJIT K. DAS (Alternate)
Director General Factory Advisory Services & Labour Institute, Mumbai SHRI V. B. SANT
SHRI S. C. SHARMA (Alternate)
Department of Telecommunications, New Delhi SHRI PRADEEP NETTUR
SHRI J. S. YADAV (Alternate)
Electrical Contractors Association of Maharashtra, Mumbai SHRI U. S. C HITRE
SHRI ANIL GACHKE (Alternate)
Electrical Contractors Association of Tamil Nadu, Chennai SHRI A. K. VENKATASWAMY
SHRI T. M. BHIKKAJI (Alternate)
Engineers India Ltd, New Delhi SHRI J. M. SINGH
SHRI NEERAJ SETHI (Alternate)
Gujarat Electricity Board, Vadodara SHRI R. O. GANDHI
SHRI K. M. DAVE (Alternate)
Indian Electrical and Electronics Manufacturers’ Association, Mumbai SHRI AMITABHA SARKAR
SHRIMATI ANITA GUPTA (Alternate)
Larsen & Toubro Ltd, Chennai SHRI S. RAJAVEL
SHRI D. MAHESWARAN (Alternate)
Metallurgical & Engineering Consultants (I) Ltd, Ranchi SHRI G. MISHRA
Ministry of Defence, New Delhi SHRI A. K. MITTAL
SHRI R. K. TYAGI (Alternate)
National Thermal Power Corporation Ltd, Noida SHRI ATUL SHRIVASTAVA
SHRI RAHUL AGGARWAL (Alternate I)
SHRI VIKRAM TALWAR (Alternate II)
Nuclear Power Corporation, Mumbai SHRI M. L. JADHAV

vi
 Organization Representative(s)
Power Grid Corporation of India Ltd, Gurgaon SHRI S. V. SARMA
SHRI SUBIR SEN (Alternate)
Rural Electification Corporation Ltd, New Delhi SHRI DINESH KUMAR
SHRI P. S. HARIHARAN (Alternate)
Siemens Ltd, Chennai SHRI T. PRABHAKAR
SHRI K. GURUMURTHY (Alternate)
Tariff Advisory Committee, Ahmedabad SHRI M. M. BHUSKUTE
SHRI P. K. ROY CHOWDHURY (Alternate)
Tata Consulting Engineers, Mumbai SHRI MURLI MUTHANA
SHRI UTPAL PRIYADARSHI (Alternate)
Tamil Nadu Electricity Board, Chennai SHRI SUKUMARAN
SHRI S. KABBAB (Alternate)
BIS Directorate General SHRI R. K. TREHAN Scientist ‘F’ & Head (Electrotechnical)
Representing Director General (Ex-officio Member)

Member Secretary
SHRIMATI NISHAT S. HAQUE
Scientist E (Electrotechnical)

vii
 CONTENTS
Page No.

INTRODUCTION iii
COMPOSITION vi

PART 1 GENERAL AND COMMON ASPECTS 1

Section 1 Scope of the National Electrical Code 4
Section 2 Definitions 6
Section 3 Graphical Symbols for Diagrams, Letter Symbols and Signs 13
Section 4 Guide for Preparation of Diagrams, Charts, Tables, and Marking 19
Section 5 Units and Systems of Measurement 23
Section 6 Standard Values 25
Section 7 Fundamental Principles 27
Section 8 Assessment of General Characteristics of Buildings 31
Section 9 Wiring Installations 37
Section 10 Short-Circuit Calculations 101
Section 11 Electrical Aspects of Building Services 110
Section 12 Selection of Equipment 130
Section 13 Erection and Pre-commissioning Testing of Installations 131
Section 14 Earthing 136
Section 15 Lightning Protection 163
Section 16 Protection Against Voltage Surges 171
Section 17 Guidelines for Power-Factor Improvement 180
Section 18 Energy Efficiency Aspects 184
Section 19 Safety in Electrical Work 186
Section 20 Tables 190

PART 2 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS IN STAND-BY GENERATING STATIONS 195

AND CAPATIVE SUBSTATIONS
PART 3 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS IN NON-INDUSTRIAL BUILDINGS 201
Section 1 Domestic Dwellings 204
Section 2 Office Buildings, Shopping and Commercial Centres and Institutions 214
Section 3 Recreational, Assembly Buildings 220
Section 4 Medical Establishments 224
Section 5 Hotels 250
Section 6 Sports Buildings 259
Section 7 Specific Requirements for Electrical Installations in Multi-storeyed Buildings 265

ix
PART 4 ELECTRICAL lNSTALLATlONS IN INDUSTRIAL BUILDINGS 271
PART 5 OUTDOOR INSTALLATIONS 301
Section 1 Public Lighting Installations 304
Section 2 Temporary Outdoor Installations 325
Section 3 Permanent Outdoor Installations 330

PART 6 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATlONS IN AGRICULTURAL PREMlSES 343

PART 7 ELECTRlCAL INSTALLATIONS IN HAZARDOUS AREAS 351
PART 8 SOLAR PHOTOVOLTAIC (PV) POWER SUPPLY SYSTEMS 379

x
NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE
PART 1
 SP 30 : 2011

PART 1 GENERAL AND COMMON ASPECTS

0 FOREWORD
Electrical installations require adequate planning right from concept stage to layout and designing, selection of
proper equipment, their installation and their maintenance. Fundamental aspects of installation practice are common
for most of the types of electrical installations. Part 1 of the National Electrical Code covers these aspects under
its various Sections.
An account has been taken of the Indian Standards existing on different aspects of electrical installation practice.
However, some practices have changed over time and corresponding Codes of practice either do not exist or are
yet to be modified. An attempt has been made through this Code to refer to the present good practices. A reference
has also been made to product standards in order to inform the user of the Code about the availability and
desirability to use them.
Aspects concerning specific occupancies are covered in other Parts and Sections of this Code. The fundamental
principles of installation practice covered under Part 1 of this Code generally apply, unless modified or
supplemented by subsequent Parts. This Part 1 would also be a useful reference for occupancies not explicitly
covered by the scope of subsequent Parts of the Code.

PART 1 GENERAL AND COMMON ASPECTS 3

SP 30 : 2011

SECTION 1 SCOPE OF THE NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

0 FOREWORD various items of electrical equipment forming

part of power systems;
Each Part/Section of the National Electrical Code
covers the requirements relating to electrical b) Recommendations concerning safety and
installations in specific occupancies. The fundamental related matter in the wiring of electrical
and general principles governing electrical installation installations of buildings or industrial
practice together with common aspects applicable to structures, promoting compatibility between
all types of installations has been brought out in a such recommendations and those concerning
separate Part in order to serve as a reference document the equipment installed;
on such matters. c) General safety procedures and practices in
electrical work; and
The details enumerated in this Part are generally
d) Additional precautions to be taken for use of
applicable to all types of occupancies and are to be
electrical equipment for special environmental
read as modified or supplemented with the information
conditions like explosive and active
provided in the relevant Parts of the Code.
atmosphere.
Effort has been made to make this part self-contained,
3.2 The Code applies to electrical installations such as
so that users of the Code can derive utmost advantage
those in:
in using it for application in the field even for
occupancies not explicitly covered by the scope of a) Standby/emergency generating plants and
subsequent Parts of the Code. Efforts have also been building substations;
made to ensure that all the relevant details required for b) Domestic dwellings;
the understanding of the Code are available to the extent c) Office buildings, shopping and commercial
possible within Part 1 and effort has been made to keep centres and institutions;
the references of individual standards to the minimum.
d) Recreation and other public premises;
1 SCOPE e) Medical establishments;
f) Hotels;
This Part 1/Section 1 of the Code describes the scope
of the National Electrical Code. g) Sports buildings;
h) Industrial premises;
2 REFERENCES j) Temporary and permanent outdoor
The National Electrical Code takes into account the installations;
stipulations in several Indian Standards dealing with k) Agricultural premises;
the various aspects relating to electrical installation m) Installations in hazardous areas; and
practice. Several product standards also exist, and n) Solar photovoltaic installations.
compliance with relevant Indian Standards is
desirable. It is therefore recommended that individual NOTES
1 Any type of installation not covered by the above shall be
Parts/Sections of the Code should be read in
classified in the group which most nearly resemble its existing
conjunction with the relevant Indian Standards. List or proposed use.
of such Indian Standards is given at relevant Part/ 2 Where change in the occupancy places it under the scope
Section of the Code. of a different Section of the Code, the same installation shall
be made to comply with the requirements of the Code for
At the time of publication, the editions indicated were the new occupancy.
valid. All standards are subject to revision, and parties
3.3 The Code applies to circuits other than the internal
to agreements based on this standard are encouraged
wiring of apparatus.
to investigate the possibility of applying the most recent
editions of the standards. 3.4 The Code does not apply to traction, motor vehicles,
installations in rolling-stock, on board-ships, aircraft
3 SCOPE OF THE NATIONAL ELECTRICAL or installations in underground mines.
CODE
3.5 The Code covers only electrical aspects of lightning
3.1 The National Electrical Code covers the following: protection of buildings and in so far as the effects of
a) Standard good practices for selection of lightning on the electrical installations are concerned.

4 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

It does not cover lightning protection aspects from b) Power generation and transmission for such
structural safety point of view. systems.
3.6 The Code is also not intended to apply to, 3.7 The Code also does not cover guidelines on the
payment for electrical work done in installations.
a) Systems of distribution of energy to public;
and

PART 1 GENERAL AND COMMON ASPECTS 5

SP 30 : 2011

SECTION 2 DEFINITIONS

0 FOREWORD 3.1.4 Electrode — A conducting element used for

conveying current to and from a medium.
Each Part of the Code gives, where necessary,
definitions of terms and phrases relevant for the 3.1.5 Current — The elementary quantity of electricity
comprehension of the requirements stipulated therein. flowing through a given section of a conductor divided
Users may find it convenient to refer to a detailed list by the corresponding indefinitely small time.
of terms and their definitions contained in this section
3.1.6 Electric Circuit — An arrangement of bodies or
that are relevant to electrical installation practice. It
media through which a current can flow.
may however be noted that for further guidance,
recourse should be made to IS 1885 (series) on 3.1.7 Electric Current — The movement of electricity
electrotechnical vocabulary containing a compendium in a medium or along a circuit. The direction of the
of terms in the field. current is accepted as opposite to that of the motion of
negative electricity.
The definitions contained in the Code are based on the
current international terminology as far as possible. 3.1.8 Voltage, Potential Difference — The line of
Some definitions are based on the terminology drawn integral from one point to another of an electric field,
up by the relevant expert groups under the taken along a given path.
Electrotechnical Division Council with the object of
3.1.9 Arc — A luminous discharge of electricity across
striking a correct balance between absolute precision
a gas, characterized by a large current and a low voltage
and simplicity. The principal object of this exercise is to
gradient, often accompanied by partial volatilization
provide definitions which are sufficiently clear so that
of the electrodes.
each term is understood with the same meaning by all
concerned. It may sometimes be felt that the definitions 3.1.10 Flashover — The passage of a disruptive
are not identical with those which may be found in other discharge round in insulating material.
publications designed with different objectives and for
3.1.11 Spark — A brilliantly luminous phenomenon
other readers. Such differences are inevitable and should
of short duration which characterized a disruptive
be accepted in the interest of clarity.
discharge.
1 SCOPE 3.1.12 Connection of Circuits
This Part 1/Section 2 of the Code covers definitions of 3.1.12.1 Series — An arrangement of elements so that
terms. they all carry the same current or flux.
2 REFERENCES 3.1.12.2 Parallel — An arrangement of elements so
that they all carry a portion of total current or flux
A list of Indian Standards on electrotechnical
through them
vocabulary relevant for the purpose of the Code is given
at Annex A. 3.1.12.3 Series parallel — An arrangement of elements
of which some are connected in series and others in
3 TERMINOLOGY parallel.
3.0 For the purpose of the National Electrical Code, 3.1.13 Earth Fault — Accidental connection/contact
the following definitions shall apply, in addition to of a conductor to earth. When the impedance is
those contained in individual Parts/Sections and negligible, the connection is called a dead earth.
relevant Indian Standards.
3.1.14 Earth Leakage Current — The current flowing
3.1 Fundamental Definitions to earth on account of imperfect insulation.
3.1.1 Capacitor — A system of two conductors (plates) 3.1.15 Insulation Fault — An abnormal decrease in
separated over the extent of their surfaces by an insulation resistance.
insulation medium which is capable of storing electrical
3.1.16 Overload — Operating conditions in an
energy as electrical stress.
electrically undamaged circuit which causes an
3.1.2 Conductor — A substance or body which allows overcurrent.
current of electricity to pass continuously.
3.1.17 Short-circuit — The intentional or accidental
3.1.3 Dielectric — A material medium in which an connection of two points of a circuit through a
electric field can exist in a stationary state. negligible impedance. The term is often applied to the

6 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

group of phenomena which accompany a short circuit 3.2.13 Relay (Including Gas-operated Relay) — A
between points at different potentials. device designed to produce sudden pre-determined
changes in one or more physical systems on the
3.2 Equipment appearance of certain conditions in the physical system
3.2.1 Electrical Equipment — The electrical machines, controlling it.
apparatus and circuits forming part of an electrical 3.2.14 Switchgear and Controlgear — A general term
installation or a power system. covering switching devices and their combination with
NOTES associated control, measuring, protective and
1 Outdoor electrical equipment are those suitable for regulating equipment, also assemblies of such devices
installation in open air. and equipment with associated inter-connections,
2 For the purpose of this Code, the term electrical equipment accessories, enclosures and supporting structures
can in general be used to any item used for such purposes as
intended in principle for use in connection with
generation, conversion, transmission, distribution or utilization
of electrical energy such as machines, transformers, apparatus, generation, transmission, distribution and conversion
measuring instruments, protective devices, wiring material and of electric energy. Controlgears are switching devices
appliances. intended in principle for the control of electrical energy
3.2.2 Current Using Equipment — Equipment intended consuming equipment.
to convert electrical energy into another form of energy, 3.2.15 Switch (Mechanical) — A mechanical switching
for example, light, heat or motive power. device capable of making carrying and breaking
3.2.3 Portable Equipment — Equipment which is currents under normal circuit conditions which may
moved while in operation or which can easily be moved include specified operating overload conditions and
from one place to another while connected to the also carrying for a specified time currents under
supply. specified abnormal circuit conditions such as those of
a short-circuit.
3.2.4 Hand-held Equipment — Portable equipment
intended to be held in the hand during normal use, in 3.2.16 Switch-fuse — A switch in which one or more
which the motor, if any, forms an integral part of the poles have a fuse in series in a composite unit.
equipment. 3.2.17 Fuse-switch — A switch in which a fuse-link
3.2.5 Stationary Equipment — Either fixed equipment or a fuse-carrier with fuse-link forms the moving
or equipment not provided with a carrying handle and contact of the switch.
having such a mass that it cannot easily be moved. 3.2.18 Circuit-Breaker (Mechanical) — A mechanical
3.2.6 Fixed Equipment — Equipment fastened to a switching device capable of making carrying and
support or otherwise secured in a specific location. breaking currents under normal circuit conditions and
also making, carrying for a specified time and breaking
3.2.7 Generator — A machine for converting mechanical currents under specified abnormal circuit conditions
energy into electrical energy. such as those of a short-circuit.
3.2.8 Electric Motor — A machine for converting 3.2.19 Fuse — device that, by the fusing of one or
electrical energy into mechanical energy. more of its specially designed and proportioned
3.2.9 Induction Motor — An alternating current motor components, opens the circuit in which it is inserted
without a commutator in which one part only, the rotor by breaking the current when this exceeds a given value
or a stator, is connected to the supply network, the other for a sufficient time
working by induction. NOTE — The fuse comprises all the parts that form the
complete device.
3.2.10 Motor Generator Set — A machine which
consists of an electric motor mechanically coupled to 3.2.20 Enclosed Distribution Fuse-board — An
a generator. enclosure containing bus-bars, with fuses, for the
purposes of protecting, controlling or connecting more
3.2.11 Auto-transformer — A transformer in which the than one outgoing circuit fed from one or more
primary and secondary windings have common part incoming circuits.
or parts.
3.2.21 Enclosed Fuse-link — Fuse-link in which the
3.2.12 Transformer — A piece of apparatus, without fuse-element is totally enclosed, so that during
continuously moving parts, which by electromagnetic operation within its rating it cannot produce any
induction transforms variable voltage and current in harmful external effects, for example, due to
one or more other windings usually at different values development of an arc, the release of gas or the ejection
of voltage and current and at the same frequency. of flame or metallic particles.

PART 1 GENERAL AND COMMON ASPECTS 7

SP 30 : 2011

3.2.22 Fuse-link — Part of a fuse including the fuse- supported by insulators above the ground and is directly
element(s) intended to be replaced after the fuse has exposed to the weather.
operated. NOTE — The following four classes of aerial conductors are
recognized:
3.2.23 Miniature Circuit-breaker — A compact
a) Bare aerial conductors,
mechanical device for making and breaking a circuit
b) Covered aerial conductors,
both in normal conditions and in abnormal conditions
c) Insulated aerial conductors, and
such as those of overcurrent and short-circuit.
d) Weatherproof neutral-screened cable.
3.2.24 D-Type Fuse — A non-interchangeable fuse
3.3.4 Bunched — Cables are said to be ‘bunched’ when
comprising a fuse-base a screw type fuse-carrier, a
two or more are contained within a single conduit, duct
gauge piece and a fuse-link.
or groove or, if not enclosed, are not separated from
3.2.25 Distribution Pillar — A totally enclosed each other.
structure cubicle containing bus-bars connected to
3.3.5 Cable — A length of single-insulated conductor
incoming and outgoing distribution feeders controlled
(solid or stranded), or two or more such conductors,
through links fuses.
each provided with its own insulation, which are laid
3.2.26 Interconnecting Bus-bar — A conductor other up together. The insulated conductor or conductors may
than cable, used for external connection between or may not be provided with an overall mechanical
terminals of equipment. protective covering.
3.2.27 Bimetallic Connector — A connector designed 3.3.6 Cable, Armoured — A cable provided with a
for the purpose of connecting together two or more wrapping of metal (usually in the form of tape or wire)
conductors of different materials (normally copper and serving as a mechanical protection.
aluminium) for preventing electrolytic corrosion.
3.3.7 Cable, Flexible — A cable containing one or more
3.2.28 Fuse-element (Fuse-wire in Rewirable Fuse) — cores, each formed of a group of wires, the diameters
That part of a rewirable fuse, which is designed to melt of the cores and of the wires being sufficiently small
when the fuse operates. to afford flexibility.
3.2.29 Fuse-base (Fuse-mount) — The fixed part of a 3.3.8 Circuit — An arrangement of conductor or
fuse provided with contacts and terminals for conductors for the purpose of conveying energy and
connection to the system. The fuse-base comprises all forming a system or a branch of a system.
the parts necessary for insulation.
3.3.9 Circuit, Final, Sub — An outgoing circuit
3.2.30 Fuse-carrier — The movable part of a fuse connected to one-way distribution fuse-board and
designed to carry a fuse-link. The fuse-carrier does not intended to supply electrical energy at one or more
include any fuse-link. points to current-using appliances, without the
intervention of a further distribution fuse-board other
3.2.31 Lightning Arrester (Surge Diverter) — A device
than a one-way board. It includes all branches and
designed to protect electrical apparatus from high
extensions derived from that particular way in the
transient to protect electrical apparatus from high
board.
transient voltage and to limit the duration and
frequently the amplitude of follow-current. The term 3.3.10 Cleat — An insulated incombustible support
‘lightning arrester’ includes any external series gap normally used for insulated cable.
which is essential for the proper functioning of the
3.3.11 Conductor, Bare — A conductor not covered
device as installed for service, regardless of whether
with insulating material.
or not it is supplied as an integral part of the device.
3.3.12 Conductor, Earthed — A conductor with no
3.3 Wiring Practice provision for its insulation from earth.
3.3.1 Accessory — Any device, associated with the 3.3.13 Conductor, Insulated — A conductor adequately
wiring and electrical appliance of an installation, for covered with insulating material of such quality and
example, a switch, a fuse, a plug, a socket-outlet, a thickness as to prevent danger.
lamp holder, or a ceiling rose.
3.3.14 Connector Box or Joint Box — A box forming
3.3.2 Apparatus — Electrical apparatus including all a part of wiring installation provided to contain joints
machines, appliances and fittings in which conductors in the conductors of cables of the installation.
are used for of which they may form a part.
3.3.15 Conductor for Portable Appliances — A
3.3.3 Aerial Conductor — Any conductor which is combination of a plug and socket arranged for

8 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

attachment to a portable electrical appliance or to a 3.3.28 Disconnector — A device used to open (or close)
flexible cord. a circuit when either negligible current is interrupted
(or established) or when the significant change in the
3.3.16 Consumer’s Terminals — The ends of the
voltage across the terminal of each of the pole of the
electrical conductors situated upon any consumer’s
disconnector occurs; in the open position it provides
premises and belonging to him at which the supply of
an isolating distance between the terminals of each
energy is delivered from the service line.
pole.
3.3.17 Cord, Flexible — A flexible cable having
3.3.29 Double Insulation
conductor of small cross-sectional area. Two flexible
cords twisted together are known as ‘Twin Flexible a) Of a conductor — A conductor is said to have
Cord’. double insulation when insulating material
NOTE — For the maximum diameter and minimum number
intervenes not only between the conductor and
of wires for flexible cord, see relevant standard. its surrounding envelope (if a cable) or
immediate support (if bare), but also between
3.3.18 Cut-out — Any appliance for automatically the envelope or support and earth.
interrupting the transmission of energy through any
b) Of an appliance — An appliance having
conductor when the current rises above a
accessible metal part is doubly insulated when
predetermined amount, for example, fusible cut-out.
protective insulation is provided in addition
3.3.19 Dead — At or about earth potential and/or to the normal functional insulation, in order
disconnected from any live system. to protect against electric shock in case of
breakdown of the functional insulation.
3.3.20 Direct Earthing System — A system of earthing
in which the parts of an installation are so earthed as 3.3.30 Live or Alive — Electrically charged so as to
specified but are not connected within the installation have a potential difference from that of earth.
to the neutral conductor of the supply system or to earth
3.3.31 Multiple Earthed Neutral System — A system
through the trip coil of an earth leakage circuit-breaker.
of earthing in which the parts of an installation,
3.3.21 Distribution Fuse-board — An assemblage of specified, to be earthed are connected to the general
parts including one or more fuses arranged for the mass of earth and, in addition, are connected within
distribution of electrical energy to final sub-circuits. the installation to the neutral conductor of the supply
system.
3.3.22 Earth — A connection to the general mass of
earth by means of an earth electrode. An object is said 3.3.32 Neutral or Neutral Conductor — Includes the
to be ‘earthed’ when it is electrically connected to an neutral conductor of a three-phase four-wire system,
earth electrode; and a conductor is said to be ‘solidly the conductor of a single-phase or dc installation which
earthed’ when it is electrically connected to earth is earthed by the supply undertaking (or otherwise at
electrode without a fuse, switch, circuit-breaker, the source of the supply), and the middle wire or
resistance or impedance in the earth connection. common return conductor of a three-wire dc or single-
phase ac system.
3.3.23 Earth Continuity Conductor — The conductor,
including any clamp, connecting to the earthing lead 3.3.33 Point — A point shall consist of the branch
or to each other those parts of an installation which wiring from the branch distribution board, together
are required to be earthed. with a switch as required, as far as and including the
ceiling rose or socket-outlet or suitable termination. A
3.3.24 Earth Electrode — A metal plate, pipe or other
three-pin socket-outlet point shall include, in addition,
conductor electrically connected to the general mass
the connecting wire or cable from the earth pin to the
of the earth.
earth stud of the branch distribution board.
3.3.25 Earthing Lead — The final conductor by which
3.3.34 Service — The conductors and equipment
the connection to the earth electrode is made.
required for delivering energy from the electric supply
3.3.26 Fitting, Lighting — A device for supporting or system to the wiring system of the premises served.
containing a lamp or lamps (for example, fluorescent
3.3.35 Socket-outlet and Plug — A device consisting
or incandescent) together with any holder, shade, or
of two portions for easily connecting portable lighting
reflector, for example, a bracket, a pendant with ceiling
fittings or other current-using appliances/devices to the
rose, or a portable unit.
supply. The socket-outlet is an accessory having socket
3.3.27 Flammable — A material capable of being easily contacts designed to engage with the pins of a plug
ignited. and having terminals for the connection of cable(s).

PART 1 GENERAL AND COMMON ASPECTS 9

SP 30 : 2011

The plug portion has pins designed to engage with the approximates a double exponential form. Other forms
contacts of a socket-outlet, also incorporating means are sometimes used for special purposes.
for the electrical connection and mechanical retention
3.4.5 Clearance — The distance between two
of flexible cable(s).
conducting parts along a string stretched the shortest
3.3.36 Switchboard — An assemblage of switchgear way between these conducting parts.
with or without instruments but the term does not apply
3.4.6 Creepage Distance — The shortest distance
to a group of local switches or a final sub-circuit where
between two conducting parts along the surface of the
each switch has its own insulating base.
insulating material or along the joint of two insulating
3.3.37 Voltage, Low — The voltage which does not bodies.
normally exceed 250 V.
3.4.7 Simultaneously Accessible Parts — Conductors
3.3.38 Voltage, Medium — The voltage which normally or conductive parts that can be touched simultaneously
exceeds 250 V but does not exceed 650 V. by a person or where applicable by livestock.
3.3.39 Voltage, High — The voltage which normally NOTE — Simultaneously accessible parts may be;
exceeds 650 V (but less than 33 kV). a) live parts,
b) exposed conductive parts,
3.3.40 Voltage, Extra-High — The voltage exceeding c) extraneous conductive parts,
33 kV under normal conditions. d) protective conductors, and
NOTE — The Indian Electricity Rules, 1956 define four ranges e) earth electrodes.
of voltages, namely, low (up to 250 V), medium (250-650 V),
high (650 V-33 kV) and extra-high (greater than 33 kV). The
3.4.8 Arm’s Reach — A zone extending from any point
definitions given in 3.3.37 to 3.3.40 are based on the provisions on a surface where persons usually stand or move about
of IE Rules. It may however, be noted that voltage ranges as to the limits which a person can reach with the hand in
defined internationally are at variance with the above any direction without assistance.
definitions.
3.4.9 Enclosure — A part providing protection of
3.4 Miscellaneous Terms equipment against certain external influences and, in
3.4.1 Building — Any structure for whatsoever purpose any direction, protection against direct contact.
and of whatsoever materials constructed and every part 3.4.10 Barrier — A part providing protection against
thereof whether used as human habitation or not and direct contact from any usual direction of access.
includes foundation, plinth, walls, floors, roofs,
chimneys, plumbing and building services, fixed 3.4.11 Obstacle — A part preventing unintentional
platforms, verandah, balcony, cornice or projection, direct contact, but not preventing deliberate action.
part of a building or any thing affixed thereto or any 3.4.12 Leakage Current (in an Installation) — A
wall enclosing or intended to enclose any land or space current which flows to earth or to extraneous
and signs and outdoor display structures. Tents, conductive parts in a circuit in the absence of a fault.
shamianahs, tarpaulin shelters, etc, erected for
temporary of the Authority shall not be considered as NOTE — This current may have a capacitive component
building. including that resulting from the deliberate use of capacitors.

3.4.2 Occupancy or Use Group — The principal 3.4.13 Nominal Voltage (of an Installation) — Voltage
occupancy for which a building or a part of a building by which an installation or part of an installation is
is used or intended to be used; for the purposes of designated.
classification of a building according to occupancy, NOTE — The actual voltage may differ from the nominal
an occupancy shall be deemed to include the subsidiary voltage by a quantity within permitted tolerances.
occupancies which are contingent upon it.
3.4.14 Supply Terminals — The point at which a
3.4.3 Room Height — The vertical distance measured consumer received energy.
from the finished floor surface to the finished ceiling
3.4.15 Service Line, Service — A line for connecting a
surface. Where a finished ceiling is not provided, the
current consuming installation to the distribution
underside of the joints or beams or tie beams shall
network.
determine the upper point of measurement for
determining the head room. 3.4.16 Distribution Undertaking — The party
supplying electricity to consumers entirely from
3.4.4 Impulse — Usually an aperiodic transient voltage
external sources of power via a distribution network.
or current which rises rapidly to a peak value and then
falls, generally more slowly, to zero. Ideally it 3.4.17 Consumer or Customer — The party who

10 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

receives electricity from the supply or distribution 3.4.25 Industrial Tariff — A tariff applicable
undertaking for his own needs or for further exclusively to industrial consumers.
distribution.
3.4.26 Lighting Tariff — A tariff applicable to
3.4.18 Demand — The magnitude of electricity supply, electricity supplies taken mainly for lighting and other
expressed in kW or kVA. small appliances, for example, fans and radios.
3.4.19 Installed Load — The sum of the rated inputs 3.4.27 Heating Tariff — A tariff applicable to electricity
of the electrical apparatus installed on the consumer’s supplies taken for space heating or for thermal
premises. applications or for both.
3.4.20 Connected Load — The part of the installed 3.4.28 Power Factor Clause — A clause setting out
load of consumer supplied by the supply undertaking. increase in charges to be applied if the ratio of the kWh
to kVAh consumed by a consumer during a specified
3.4.21 Kilowatthour Rate (kWh Rate) — The amount
period below a set limit; the same clause may provide
to be paid per unit of energy (kWh) consumed.
for a decrease in charges in the opposite case.
3.4.22 Meter Rent — An amount to be paid for a NOTE — The power factor is generally measured by the ratio
specified period for metering, and associated of kWh to kVAh consumed during the specified period.
equipment installed.
3.4.29 Load Factor — The ratio, expressed as a
3.4.23 Tariff — A statement setting out the components numerical value or as a percentage, of the energy
to be taken into account and the methods to be consumption within a specified period (year, month,
employed in calculating the amounts to be charged by day, etc) to the energy consumption that would result
the supply/distribution undertaking to the consumer, from continuous use of the maximum kW demand
according to the characteristics of the supply. occurring within the same period.
3.4.24 Domestic Tariff — A tariff applicable NOTE — The load factor for a given demand is also equal to
particularly or exclusively to domestic consumers. the ratio of the utilization time to the time in hours within the
same period.

ANNEX A
(Clause 2)
LIST OF INDIAN STANDARDS ON ELECTROTECHNICAL VOCABULARY

IS No. Title IS No. Title

1885 Electrotechnical vocabulary: (Part 16/Sec 2) : Lighting, Section 2 General
(Part 1) : 1961 Fundamental definitions 1968 illumination, lighting fittings and
(Part 8) : 1986 Secondary cells and batteries (first lighting for traffic and signalling
revision) (Part 16/Sec 3) : Lighting, Section 3 Lamps and
(Part 9) : 1992/ Electrical relays (second revision) 1967 auxiliary apparatus
IEC 60050 (446) : (Part 17) : 1979 Switchgear and controlgear (first
1983 revision)
(Part 10) : 1993/ Power system protection (first (Part 27) : 1993/ Power electronics (second
IEC 60050 (448) : revision) IEC 60050 (551) : revision)
1986 1982
(Part 11) : 1966 Electrical measurements (Part 28) : 1993/ Instrument transformers (first
(Part 14) : 1967 Nuclear power plants IEC 60050 (321) : revision)
(Part 15) : 2003/ Primary cells and batteries (first 1986
IEC 60050 (481) : revision) (Part 29) : 1971 Mining terms
1996 (Part 30) : 1971 Overhead transmission and
(Part 16/Sec 1) : Lighting, Section 1 General aspects distribution of electrical energy
1968

PART 1 GENERAL AND COMMON ASPECTS 11

SP 30 : 2011

IS No. Title IS No. Title

(Part 32) : 1993/ Electric cables (first revision) (Part 71) : 1993/ Generation, transmission and
IEC 60050 (461) : IEC 60050 (605) : distribution of electricity —
1984 1983 Substations
(Part 34) : 1972 Cinematography (Part 72) : 1993/ Mathematics
(Part 35) : 1993/ Rotating machinery (first revision)
IEC 60050 (101) :
IEC 60050 (411) :
1977
1996
(Part 37) : 1993/ Part 37 Tariffs for electricity (first (Part 73/Sec 1) : Physics and chemistry, Section 1
IEC 60050 (691) : revision) 1993/IEC60050 physical concepts
1973 (111-1) : 1984
(Part 38) : 1993/ Power transformers and reacto (Part 73/Sec 2) : Physics and chemistry — Section
IEC 60050 (421) : (second revision) 1993/IEC 60050 2 Electrotechnical concepts
1990 (111-2) : 1984
(Part 43) : 1977 Electrical equipment used in (Part 73/Sec 3) : Physics and chemistry — Section 3
medical 1993/IEC 60050 : Concepts related to quantities and
(Part 51) : 1993/ Industrial electro-heating (111-3) : 1977 units
IEC 60050 (841) : (Part 74) : 1993/ Electrical and magnetic devices
1983
IEC 60050 (151) :
(Part 53) : 1980 Mica
1978
(Part 54) : 1993/ Insulators (first revision)
IEC 60050 (471) : (Part 75) : 1993/ Automatic control
1984 IEC 60050 (351) :
(Part 55) : 1981 Electric fans 1975
(Part 57) : 1993/ Electric and magnetic circuits (first (Part 77) : 1993/ Overhead lines
IEC 60050 (131) : revision) IEC 60050 (466) :
1978 1990
(Part 60) : 1993/ Electrical apparatus for explosive (Part 78) : 1993/ Generation, transmission and
IEC 60050 (426) : atmospheres (first revision) IEC 60050 (601) : distribution of electricity —
1990 1985 General
(Part 61) : 1985 Nuclear medical instruments (Part 79) : 1993/ Generation, transmission and
(Part 62) : 1993/ Solid insulating materials (first
IEC 60050 (603) : distribution of electricity — Power
IEC 60050 (212) : revision)
1986 system planning and management
1990
(Part 69) : 1993/ Generation, transmission and dis- (Part 80) : 1994/ General terms on measurements
IEC 60050 (602) : tribution of electricity — Generation IEC 60050 (301) : in electricity
1993 1983
(Part 70) : 1993/ Generation, transmission and dis- (Part 81) : 1993/ Electrical measuring instruments
IEC 60050 (604) : tribution of electricity — IEC 60050 (302) :
1987 Operation 1983

12 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

SECTION 3 GRAPHICAL SYMBOLS FOR DIAGRAMS, LETTER

SYMBOLS AND SIGNS

0 FOREWORD b) Alternating current, three-phase, 415 V.

50 Hz
Several graphical symbols are used for installation
diagrams. Considerable amount of standardization has
been achieved in the field of
symbols for electrotechnology that it is now possible c) Alternating current, three-phase with neutral.
to device electrical network schematics using them so 50 Hz
that these schematic diagrams could be uniformly
understood by all concerned.
The symbols contained in this Section of the Code have
been drawn up by individual expert groups under the 3.1.3 Neutral
Electrotechnical Division Council. They represent a
consensus of opinion in the discipline and are
recommended for direct adoption. Assistance has also
been drawn from International Electrotechnical 3.1.4 Positive Polarity
Commission (IEC) database IEC 60617 ‘Graphical
symbols for diagrams’.
It has also been felt essential for the purposes of this 3.1.5 Negative Polarity
Section to draw the attention of practicing engineers
to standardized letter symbols and signs.

1 SCOPE 3.1.6 Direct Current, 2 Conductors 110 V

This Part 1/Section 3 of the Code covers graphical
symbols for diagrams, letter symbols and signs which
may be referred to for further details. 3.1.7 Direct Current, 3 Conductors including Neutral,
220 V
2 REFERENCES
A list of relevant Indian Standards on graphical
symbols is given at Annex A. 3.1.8 Underground Cable

3 GRAPHICAL SYMBOLS
3.0 For the purposes of the Code, the graphical symbols
given below shall apply. 3.1.9 Overhead Line
NOTE — A list of Indian Standards on graphical symbols used
in electrotechnology relevant to the Code is given in Annex A.

3.1 Fundamental Symbols 3.1.10 Winding, Delta

3.1.1 Direct Current

3.1.2 Alternating Current, General Symbol 3.1.11 Winding, Star

a) Alternating current, single-phase, 50 Hz

3.1.12 Terminals

PART 1 GENERAL AND COMMON ASPECTS 13

SP 30 : 2011

3.1.13 Resistance/Resistor 3.2.3 Motor

3.1.13.1 Variable resistor

3.2.4 Synchronous Motor

3.1.14 Impedance

3.2.5 Mechanically Coupled Machines

3.1.15 Inductance/Inductor

3.1.16 Winding
3.2.6 Induction Motor, Three-Phase, Squirrel Cage

3.1.17 Capacitance, Capacitor

3.1.18 Earth 3.2.6.1 Induction motor with wound rotor

3.1.19 Fault

3.2.7 Transformers with Two Separate Windings

3.2 Equipment
3.2.1 Flexible Conductor

3.2.8 Auto-Transformer
3.2.2 Generator

3.2.2.1 AC generator 3.2.9 3-Phase Transformer with Three Separate

Windings—Star—Star—Delta

3.2.2.2 DC generator

14 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

3.2.10 Starter 3.2.19 Isolator

3.2.11 Direct-on-Line Starter for Reversing Motor

3.2.20 Earth Leakage Circuit Breaker

3.2.12 Star-Delta Starter

3.2.21 Residual Current Circuit Breaker

3.2.22 Surge Protective Device

3.2.13 Auto-Transformer Starter

3.2.23 Fuse
3.2.14 Rheostatic Starter

3.2.15 Switch
3.2.24 Signal Lamp

3.2.16 Contactor
3.2.25 Link

3.2.17 Relay

3.2.26 Distribution Board, Cubicle Box, Main Fuse

Board with Switches

3.2.18 Circuit-Breaker 3.2.27 Socket Outlet, 5A

PART 1 GENERAL AND COMMON ASPECTS 15

SP 30 : 2011

Socket Outlet, 15A 3.2.36 Recording Instrument (general symbol)

3.2.28 Plug 3.2.37 Integrating Meter

3.2.38 Watthour Meter

3.2.29 Voltmeter

3.2.39 Clock

3.2.30 Ammeter

3.2.40 Master Clock

3.2.31 Wattmeter

3.2.32 Varmeter 3.2.41 Current Transformer

3.2.33 Power Factor Meter 3.2.42 Voltage Transformer

3.2.34 Ohmmeter 3.2.43 Wiring on the Surface

3.2.44 Wiring in Conduit

3.2.35 Indicating Instrument (general symbol)

3.2.45 Lamp

16 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

3.2.46 Lamp Mounted on a Ceiling 3.2.57 Aerial

3.2.47 Emergency Lamp

3.2.58 Radio Receiving Set

3.2.48 Spot Light

3.2.59 Television Receiving Set

3.2.49 Flood Light

3.2.60 Manually Operated Fire Alarm

3.2.50 Heater

3.2.61 Automatic Fire Detector Switch

3.2.51 Storage Type Water Heaters

4 LETTER SYMBOLS AND SIGNS

3.2.52 Bell
4.0 General
4.0.1 Quantities and units used in electrotechnology
cover in addition to electricity and magnetism other
subjects such as radiation and light, geometry,
kinematics, dynamics and thermodynamics. Several
3.2.53 Buzzer disciplines interact with the result that terminology used
in one discipline becomes closely interrelated with that
of the other. In order to enable uniform understanding
of the meaning they represent, the letter symbols and
signs used in abbreviations for denoting quantities, their
functions and units shall conform to those recommended
3.2.54 Ceiling Fan in IS 3722 (Part 1) and IS 3722 (Part 2).
4.0.2 Guidance on the choice of alphabet and their type,
representation of vector quantities, symbols of units,
3.2.55 Exhaust Fan numerical values, and guidance on the use of subscripts
are covered in IS 3722 (Part 1).
Ready reference tables for symbols and subscripts are
contained in IS 3722 (Part 2). For the purposes of this
Code, a list of symbols, names of quantities and of
constants and subscripts referred to frequently is given
3.2.56 Fan Regulator in 4.1.

4.1 Symbols and Subscripts

4.1.1 Table 1 of IS 3722 (Part 2) gives a reference list
of symbols and subscripts used in electrotechnology.
PART 1 GENERAL AND COMMON ASPECTS 17
SP 30 : 2011

ANNEX A
(Clause 2)
LIST OF INDIAN STANDARDS ON GRAPHICAL SYMBOLS

IS No. Title IS No. Title

2032 Graphical symbols used in electro- symbols having general
technology: application
(Part 15) : 1976 Aircraft electrical symbols 12032 (Part 3) : Graphical symbols for diagrams
(Part 19) : 1977 Electrical equipment used in in the field of electrotechnology:
medical practice Part 3 Conductors and connecting
(Part 25) : 1980 Electrical installations in ships devices
3722 Letter symbols and signs used in
12032 (Part 4) : Graphical symbols for diagrams in
electrical technology:
1987/IEC the field of electrotechnology:
(Part 1) : 1983 General guidelines on symbols
60617-4 (1984) Part 4Passive components
and subscripts
(Part 2) : 1983 Reference tables for symbols and 12032 (Part 6) : Graphical symbols for diagrams in
subscripts 1987/IEC the field of electrotechnology:
10381 : 1982 Terms (and their Hindi 60617-6 (1983) Part 6 Production and conversion
equivalents) commonly used for of electrical energy
name plates and similar data of 12032 (Part 7) : Graphical symbols for diagrams in
electrical power equipment 1987/IEC the field of electrotechnology:
11353 : 1985 Guide for uniform system of 60617-7 (1983) Part 7 Switchgear, controlgear and
marking and identification of protective
conductors and apparatus terminals 12032 (Part 8) : Graphical symbols for diagrams in
12032 (Part 1): Graphical symbols for diagrams in 1987/IEC the field of electrotechnology: Part 8
1987/IEC the field of electrotechnology: 60617-8 (1983) Measuring instruments, lamps
60617-1 (1985) Part 1 General information, general and signalling devices
index, cross reference table
12032 (Part 11) : Graphical symbols for diagrams in
12032 (Part 2): Graphical symbols for diagrams in
1987/IEC the field of electrotechnology: Part
1987/IEC the field of electrotechnology:
60617-2 (1983) Part 2 Symbols elements, 60617-11 (1983) 11 Architectural and topographical
qualifying symbols and other installation plans and diagrams

18 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

SECTION 4 GUIDE FOR PREPARATION OF DIAGRAMS,

CHARTS, TABLES AND MARKING

0 FOREWORD a) Explanatory diagrams,

Various types of diagrams and charts are required to be b) Explanatory charts or tables,
prepared during the planning and execution stages of c) Wiring diagrams or wiring tables, and
an electrical installation work. It is therefore necessary d) Location diagrams or tables.
to define the different types of diagrams, charts and
3.1.1 Explanatory Diagrams
tables, their purposes and format and the guiding
principles for preparing them for the sake of uniformity. Explanatory diagrams are intended to facilitate the
study and understanding of the functioning of an
This Section 4 of the Code covers general guidelines
installation or equipment. Three types are defined
on the subject. A list of relevant Indian Standards is
below:
given at Annex A.
a) Block diagram — Relatively simple diagram
The guidelines for marking of conductors given in 3.6.
to facilitate the understanding of the principle
Table 1 are in line with the guidelines accepted
of operation. It is a diagram in which an
internationally on such matters. They provide for a
installation or equipment together with its
common basis for understanding and identifying
functional interrelationships are represented
conductors and apparatus terminals, but more
by symbols, block symbols or pictures
important, ensure safety to operating, maintenance
without necessarily showing all the
personnel.
connections.
1 SCOPE b) Circuit diagram — Explanatory diagram
intended to facilitate the understanding of the
This Part 1/Section 4 of the Code covers guidelines
functioning in detail. It shows by symbols an
for preparation of diagrams, charts and tables in
installation or part of an installation and the
electrotechnology and for marking of conductors.
electrical connections and other links
2 REFERENCES concerned with its operation.
c) Equivalent circuit diagram — Special type
A list of Indian Standards on general guidelines on various of circuit diagram for the analysis and
types of diagrams and charts is given at Annex A. calculation of circuit characteristics.
3 PREPARATION OF DIAGRAMS, CHARTS 3.1.2 Explanatory Charts or Tables
AND TABLES
Explanatory charts or tables are intended to facilitate
3.0 General the study of diagrams and to give additional
information. Two examples are given below:
3.0.1 Diagram
a) Sequence chart or table — gives the
A diagram may show the manner in which the various successive operation in a specified order, and
parts of a network, installation, group of apparatus or items
b) Time sequence chart or table — is one which
of an apparatus are interrelated and or interconnected.
in addition takes account of the time intervals
3.0.2 Chart between successive operations.
A chart may show the interrelation between; 3.1.3 Wiring Diagrams or Wiring Tables
a) different operations. Wiring diagrams are intended to guide the making and
b) operations and time. checking of the connection of an installation or
c) operations and physical quantities, and equipment. For an equipment, they show the internal
or external connections or both. The diagrams may
d) states of several items.
sometimes show the layout of the different parts and
3.0.3 Table accessories, such as terminal blocks and the wiring
between them.
A table replaces or supplements a diagram or a chart.
3.1.3.1 Unit wiring diagram
3.1 Classification According to Purpose
Diagram is representing all connections within a unit
3.1.0 The main classifications are: of an installation.

PART 1 GENERAL AND COMMON ASPECTS 19

SP 30 : 2011

3.1.3.2 Interconnection diagram Several similar items of apparatus may

accordingly be represented by a single
Diagram representing the connections between the
symbol.
different units of an installation.
b) Multi-line representation — Each conductor
3.1.3.3 Terminal diagram is represented by an individual line.
Diagram showing the terminals and the internal and/or 3.2.1.2 Arrangement of symbols
external conductors connected to them.
According to the arrangement of the symbols
NOTE — Any of the wiring diagram may be replaced or representing the elements or parts of an item of
supplemented by a table.
apparatus on the diagram, the methods of
3.1.4 Location Diagrams or Tables representation are given below:
A location diagram or table contains detailed a) Assembled representation — The symbols for
information about the location of parts of the the different parts of an item of apparatus or
equipment, for example, terminal blocks, plug-in units, of an installation or equipment are drawn in
sub-assemblies, modules, etc. It shows the item close proximity on the diagram.
designations used in related diagrams and tables. b) Semi-assembled representation — The
NOTES symbols for the different parts of an item of
1 A location diagram need not necessarily be to scale. apparatus or of an installation are separated
2 Several types of diagrams may be combined into a single and arranged in such a way that the symbols
diagram, forming a mixed diagram. The same drawing may for mechanical linkages between the parts
form both an explanatory and wiring diagram. which work together may be drawn easily.
3.2 Classification According to Method of c) Detached representation — The symbols for
Representation the different parts of an item of apparatus or
3.2.1 The method of representation is distinguished by: of an installation are separated and arranged
in such a way that the circuits may easily be
a) the number of conductors, devices or elements followed.
represented by a single symbol (see 3.2.1.1);
3.2.1.3 Topographical representation
b) the arrangement of the symbols representing
the elements or parts of an item of apparatus The positions of the symbols on the diagram
(for example, detached or assembled) (see correspond wholly or partly to the topographical
3.2.1); and (physical) location of items represented.
c) the placing of the symbols to correspond with The following are examples where topographical
the topographical layout of the devices (see representation may be used.
3.2.1.3).
a) Wiring diagrams,
3.2.1.1 Number of conductors
b) Architectural diagrams, and
According to the number of conductors, devices or c) Network diagrams.
elements represented by a single symbol, the two
NOTE — Several of these methods of representation may be
methods of representation as given below may be used on the same diagram.
distinguished.
3.3 Item Designation
a) Single-line representation — Two or more
conductors are represented by a single line. 3.3.1 Item is a term used for component equipment,
plant, unit, etc, which is represented by a graphical
In particular, a single line may represent:
symbol on a diagram. The item designation is shown
1) circuits of a multi-phase system, at an appropriate place near the graphical symbol of
2) circuits which have a similar electrical the item. This designation correlates the item on
function, different diagrams, parts list, circuit descriptions and
3) circuits or conductors which belong to in the equipment.
the same signal path, 3.3.2 An item designation may be used for general or
4) circuits which follow the same physical special purposes depending on the kind of information
route, and required. Guidelines on assignment of item
5) conductor symbols which would follow designation, groups together with standard letter codes
the same route on the diagram. for the same are covered in IS 8270 (Part 2).

20 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

3.4 General Rules for Diagrams conductors irrespective of their electrical function.
Supplementary marking is used as supplement to a
3.4.1 Paper sizes for drawings shall preferably be
main marking based on the electrical function of each
according to the international A-series (see IS 1064).
conductor or group of conductors.
The choice of drawing sizes should be decided after
taking into account the necessary factors enumerated 3.6.0.2 The various methods of marking applicable to
in 2.2 of IS 8270 (Part 2). electrical installations and the equipment which form
part of them are covered in IS 5578.
3.4.2 In IS 2032, different kinds of symbols as well as
symbols of different forms are shown. All the possible 3.6.1 Identification of Insulated and Bare Conductors
examples are also not covered there. Any symbol may
For the purposes of this Code, the provisions of Table 1
be composed using the guidance from relevant Part of
shall apply for the general application of marking
IS 2032 and Part 1/Section 3 of the Code. The basic
conductors in installation. The rules also apply for
rules for the choice of symbols shall be:
marking conductors in assembles, equipment and
a) to use the simplest form of symbol adequate apparatus. Reference is also drawn to the provision
for the particular purpose, contained in relevant Indian Standard.
b) to use a preferred form wherever possible, and 3.6.2 Arrangement of Conductors
c) to use the chosen form consistently
throughout the same set of documentation. 3.6.2.0 Bus-bars and main connections which are
substantially in one plane shall be arranged in the order
3.4.3 Specific guidelines on the application of IS 2032 given in either 3.6.2.1 or 3.6.2.2 according to the
(All parts) from the point of view of choice of system. The relative order remains applicable even if
alternative symbols, symbol sizes, line thickness, any poles of the system are omitted.
orientation of symbols and methods of indicating
symbol location are covered in IS 8270 (Part 3). 3.6.2.1 AC systems
The order of phase connection shall be red, yellow and
3.5 Interconnection Diagrams and Tables
blue:
3.5.1 Interconnection diagrams and tables provide
a) When the run of the conductors is horizontal,
information on the external electrical connections
the red shall be on the top or on the left or
between equipment in an installation. They are used
farthest away as viewed from the front.
as an aid in the fabrication of wiring and for
b) When the run of the conductors is vertical,
maintenance purposes. Information on the internal
the red shall be on the left or farthest away as
connections of units are normally not provided but
viewed from the front.
references to the appropriate circuit diagram [see
IS 8270 (Part 4)] may be provided. c) When the system has a neutral connection in
the same place as the phase connections, the
3.5.2 The diagrams may employ single or multiple neutral shall occupy an outer position.
representation and may be combined with or replaced
d) Unless the neutral connection can be readily
by tables, provided clarity is maintained. Tables are
distinguished from the phase connections, the
recommended when the number of interconnections
order shall be red, yellow, blue and black.
is large.
3.6.2.2 DC systems
3.5.3 Guidance on layout, identification and types of
interconnection diagrams and tables are given in The arrangement shall be as follows:
IS 8270 (Part 5).
a) When the run of the conductors is horizontal,
3.6 Marking and Arrangement of Conductors the red shall be on the top or on the left or
farthest away as viewed from the front.
3.6.0 General b) When the run of the conductors is vertical,
3.6.0.1 The purpose of marking is to provide a means the red shall be on the left or farthest away as
whereby conductors can be identified in a circuit and viewed from the front.
also after they have been detached from the terminals c) When the system is 3-wire with the
to which they are connected. Main marking is a system conductors in the same place, the neutral shall
of marking characterizing each conductor or group of occupy the middle position.

PART 1 GENERAL AND COMMON ASPECTS 21

SP 30 : 2011

Table 1 Alphanumeric Notation, Graphical Symbols and Colours

(Clause 3.6.1)

Sl No. Designation of Conductors Identification by

Alphanumeric Graphical Colour
Notation Symbol
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
Phase 1 L1 Red
i) Supply ac system Phase 2 L2 Yellow
Phase 3 L3 Blue
Neutral N Black
Phase 1 U Red
Phase 2 V Yellow
ii) Apparatus ac system
Phase 3 W Blue
Neutral N Black
Positive L+ + Red
iii) Supply dc system Negative L– – Blue
Midwire M Black
iv) Phase L Red
Supply dc system (single phase)
Neutral N Black
v) Protective conductor PE Green and Yellow
vi) Earth E No colour other than the colour of the
bare conductor. If insulated, the
colour for insulation so chosen to
avoid those listed above for
designation of other conductors
vii) Noiseless (clean earth) TE Under consideration
viii) Frame or chassis MM —
ix) Equipotential Terminal CC —

ANNEX A
(Clause 2)
LIST OF INDIAN STANDARDS ON DIAGRAMS, CHARTS, TABLES AND MARKING

IS No. Title IS No. Title

1064 : 1980 Specification for paper standard 8270 Guide for the preparation of
sizes diagrams, charts and tables for
2032 Graphical symbols used in electrotechnology:
electrotechnology: (Part 1) : 1976 Definitions and classification
(Part 15) : 1976 Aircraft electrical symbols (Part 2) : 1976 Item designation
(Part 19) : 1977 Electrical equipment used in (Part 3) : 1977 General requirements for diagrams
medical practice (Part 4) : 1977 Circuit diagram
(Part 25) : 1980 Electrical installations in ships (Part 5) : 1976 Interconnection diagrams and
5578 : 1984 Guide for marking of insulated tables
conductors (Part 6) : 1983 Unit wiring diagrams and tables

22 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

SECTION 5 UNITS AND SYSTEMS OF MEASUREMENT

0 FOREWORD plates, when it is charged with a quantity of electricity

of one coulomb.
The International System of Units (SI) have received
worldwide acceptance and are accepted in most of the 3.1.4 Henry (Unit of Electric Inductance)
countries. It had been introduced in India under the
The inductance of a closed circuit in which an emf of
Weights and Measures Act, 1976. Use of SI Units in
one volt is produced when the current in the circuits
matters relating to electrical engineering practice has
varies at the uniform rate of one ampere per second.
many advantages.
3.1.5 Ohm (Unit of Electrical Resistance)
This Section 5 of the Code for reasons of brevity is
restricted to electrical units only. The electrical resistance between two points of a
conductor when a constant potential difference of one
1 SCOPE volt, applied to these points, produces a current of one
This Part 1/Section 5 of the Code covers units and ampere in the conductor, provided no emf is generated
systems of measurement in electrotechnology. in the conductor.
3.1.6 Volt (Unit of Electric Potential Difference)
2 REFERENCE
The difference of electric potential which exists
The following Indian Standard may be referred for
between two points of a conductor carrying a constant
further information:
current of one ampere, when the power dissipated
‘IS 10005 : 1994/ISO 1000 : 1992 SI units and between these points is one watt.
recommendations for the use of their multiples and of
3.1.7 Weber (Unit of Magnetic Flux)
certain other units’.
The magnetic flux which, linked with a circuit
3 UNITS AND SYSTEMS OF MEASUREMENT composed of a single turn produces in it an emf of one
volt if it is uniformly reduced to zero in one second.
3.1 Absolute Units
3.1.8 Watt (Unit of Electric Power)
3.1.1 Ampere (Unit of Electric Current)
The power which results in the production of energy
A constant current which, maintained in two parallel
at the rate of 1 J/s.
straight conductors of infinite length, of negligible
circular cross-section an placed at a distance of one 3.1.9 Siemens (Unit of Electric Conductance)
metre apart in a vacuum will produce a force of
The conductance of a conductor of resistance 1 ohm
2 × 10 –7 Newton per metre length between the
and is numerically equal to 1 ohm–1.
conductors.
3.1.10 Tesla
3.1.2 Coulomb (Unit of Quantity of Electricity)
The tesla is a magnetic flux density of 1 Wb/m2.
The quantity of electricity conveyed in one second by
a current of one ampere. 3.2 The electrical units defined in 3.1, together with
their expression in terms of other units,
3.1.3 Farad (Unit of Electric Capacitance)
recommendations on the selection of their multiples
The capacitance of an electric capacitor having a and submultiples and supplementary remarks (if any)
difference of electric potential of one volt between the are enumerated in Table 1.

PART 1 GENERAL AND COMMON ASPECTS 23

SP 30 : 2011

Table 1 Electrical Units of Measurement

(Clause 3.2)

Sl Quantity Name Symbol Expression in Terms Expression in Terms Selection of Multiples

No. of Other Units of SI Base Units
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)
i) Electric current ampere A — — kA, mA, µA, nA, pA
ii) Power watt W J/s m2.kgs–3 GW, MW, kW, mW, µW
iii) Quantity of electricity, coulomb C — s.A kC, µC, nC, pC
electric charge
iv) Electric potential, volt V W/A m2.kgs–3.A–1 MV, kV, mV, µV
potential difference,
electromotive force
v) Capacitance farad F C/V m2.kg.s–1.A–1 mF, µF, nF, pF
vi) Electrical resistance ohm Ω V/A m2.kg.s–1.A–2 GΩ, MΩ. KΩ, mΩ, … µΩ
–2. –1 –1
vii) Conductance siemens S A/V m kg .s kS, mS, µS
2. –2 –1
viii) Magnetic flux weber Wb V.s m kg.s .A mWb
2 –1 –1
ix) magnetic flux density tesla T Wb/m kg.s .A mT, µT. nT
2. –2 –2
x) Inductance henry H Wb/A m kg.s .A mH, µH, nH, pH
1. –1 1 1
xi) Conductivity siemens/metre S/m — m kg .S , A MS/m, kS/m
xii) Electric field strength volt/metre V/m — m.kg.s–1.A–1 MV/m, kV/m or V/mm, V/m,
mV/m, µV/m
xiii) Permeability henry/metre H/m — m.kg.s–2.A–2 µH/m, nH/m
–1 –1 4 2
xiv) Permittivity farad per metre F/m — m .kg .s .A µF/m, nF/m, pF/m
–1 –2. –1 2 2
xv) Reluctance 1 per henry H — m kg .s .A —
xvi) Resistivity ohm/metre Ω.m — 1.
m kg.s .A –1 –2
GΩm, MΩ m, kΩm, Ωcm,
mΩm, µΩm, nΩm

24 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

SECTION 6 STANDARD VALUES

0 FOREWORD recommendations and accordingly revise the values

of ac nominal system voltages from 240/415 to
Standardization of basic parameters such as voltage,
230/400 with the tolerance of ± 10 percent and it was
currents and frequency is one of the primary exercizes
also decided to effect the complete transition by
undertaken at the national level. This standardization
31 December 2009, as given in IS 12360. IS 12360
helps in laying a sound foundation for further work
may be referred for the latest values.
relating to product or installation engineering. The
values of voltages recommended as standard in this 3.0.3 In the case of voltages above 1 kV, the importance
Section are based on the contents of IS 12360 : 1988 of highest system voltage, which are generally 10
‘Voltage bands for electrical installations including percent above the corresponding nominal voltages
preferred voltages and frequency’. given in 2.1.2.1 is recognized and product standards
relate the voltage rating of equipment with respect to
This history of standardization of system voltages
highest system voltages only.
particularly those of systems operating below medium
voltage levels is enumerated in IS 12360. Reference 3.1 Standard Declared Voltage
to Indian Electricity Rules may also be made.
3.1.1 Single-phase, Two-Wire System
1 SCOPE
The standard voltage shall be 240 V(see 3.0.2).
This Part 1/Section 6 of the Code covers standard values
3.1.2 Three-phase System
of ac and dc distribution voltages, preferred values of
current ratings and standard system frequency. 3.1.2.1 The standard voltages for three-phase system
shall be as under:
2 REFERENCES
415 V (see 3.0.2) (Voltage to neutral—
This Part 1/Section 6 of the Code may be read in 240 V) (see 3.0.2)
conjunction with the following Indian Standards:
3.3 kV 66 kV
IS No. Title 6.6 kV 110 kV
1076 (Part 1) : 1985/ Preferred numbers: Part 1 Series 11 kV 132 kV
ISO 3 : 1973 of preferred numbers 22 kV 220 kV
12360 : 1988 Voltage bands for electrical 33 kV 400 kV
installations including preferred NOTES
voltages and frequency 1 However, in view of the latest international developments,
it was decided to align Indian Standards nominal system
3 STANDARD VALUES OF VOLTAGES voltages with IEC recommendations and accordingly revise
the values of a.c. nominal system voltages from 240/415 to
3.0 General 230/400 with the tolerance of ± 10 percent and it was also
decided to effect the complete transition by 31 December 2009,
3.0.1 For the sake of completeness, all the standard as given in IS 12360
values of voltages given in IS 12360 relating to ac 2 These voltages refer to the line-to-line voltage.
transmission and distribution systems are reproduced 3 110 kV is not a standard voltage for transmission purposes
in this Section. However, it is noted that for most of the but this value has been included for the sake of equipment that
types of installations covered in subsequent parts of the are required for use on the 110 kV systems already in existence.
It is realized that because of economic and other considerations,
Code, only the lower voltage values would be relevant. extensions to existing systems at this voltage may have to be
made at the same voltage.
3.0.2 For medium and low voltage of distribution
system, the original recommended standard values of 3.1.3 The standard dc distribution voltage shall be
nominal voltages were 230 V for single-phase 220/440 V.
and 230/400 V for three-phase system. However,
during 1959, to align with IEC recommendations and 3.2 Voltage Limits for ac Systems
in view of the economic advantages they offered, 3.2.1 The voltage at any point of the system under
values of 240 V single-phase and 240/415 V three- normal conditions shall not depart from the declared
phase had been adopted with a tolerance of ± 6 percent. voltage by more than the values given below:
However, in view of the latest international
developments, it was decided to align Indian a) 6 percent in the case of low or medium voltage
Standards nominal system voltages with IEC (see 3.0.2); or

PART 1 GENERAL AND COMMON ASPECTS 25

SP 30 : 2011

NOTE — Supply variation will become 230 V ± 10 percent

with effect from 31 December 2009. See IS 12640 : 1988 for
System Voltage Highest Voltage Lowest Voltage
the latest provision. (Un) (Um)
(1) (2) (3)
b) 6 percent on the higher side or 9 percent on
the lower side in the case of high voltage; or 132 kV 145 kV 120 kV
c) 12.5 percent in the case of extra high voltage. 220 kV 245 kV 200 kV
400 kV 420 kV 380 kV
NOTE — The permissible variations given above are in
accordance with Indian Electricity Rules, 1956, and are NOTES
applicable to the supply authorities. 1 This variation in voltage should not be confused with the
permissible variation from the declared voltage as given
3.2.2 For installation design purposes, the limits of in 3.2.1.
voltage between which the system and the equipment 2 For system voltage 230/400 highest voltage and lowest
used in the system shall be capable of operating voltage shall be ±10 percent.
continuously are as follows:
4 PREFERRED CURRENT RATINGS
System Voltage Highest Voltage Lowest Voltage
4.1 The preferred current ratings shall be selected from
(Un) (Um)
the R5 series. If intermediate values are required, the
(1) (2) (3)
same shall be selected from R10 series [see IS 1076
240 V 264 V 216 V (Part 1)].
415 V 457 V 374 V
3.3 kV 3.6 kV 3.0 kV 5 STANDARD SYSTEM FREQUENCY
6.6 kV 7.2 kV 6.0 kV 5.1 The standard system frequency shall in 50 Hz.
11 kV 12 kV 10 kV
22 kV 24 kV 20 kV 5.2 The limits within which the frequency is to be
33 kV 36 kV 30 kV maintained are governed by the Indian Electricity
66 kV 72.5 kV 60 kV Rules.

26 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

SECTION 7 FUNDAMENTAL PRINCIPLES

0 FOREWORD 3.0.3 Workmanship

The basic criteria in the design of electrical Good workmanship is an essential requirement for
installation are enumerated in this Section which compliance with this Code. Unless otherwise exempted
could be taken note of in the planning stages. The under the Indian Electricity Rules, the work on
specific nature of each occupancy calls for additional electrical installations shall be carried out under the
information which are summarized in the respective supervision of a person holding a certificate of
Sections of the Code. competency issued by a recognized authority. The
Assistance has been derived for this Section from IEC workmen shall also hold the appropriate certificate of
60364-1 ‘Low-voltage electrical installations—Part 1: competency.
Fundamental principles, assessment of general
characteristics, definitions’ issued by the International 3.1 Coordination
Electrotechnical Commission. Measures for achieving 3.1.1 Exchange of Information
protection against the various hazards are under
consideration by the National Electrical Code Sectional 3.1.1.1 Proper coordination and collaboration between
Committee. It may be added that subsequent the architect, building engineer and the electrical
requirements of the Code would, however, provide engineer shall be ensured from the planning stage of
sufficient guidelines in respect of achieving the desired the installation. The provisions that would have to be
level of safety. made for the accommodation of substation, transformer
switchgear rooms, lift wells and other spaces required
1 SCOPE to be provided for service cable ducts, openings, etc.
This Part 1/Section 7 of the Code enumerates the in the civil work, and such other relevant data shall be
fundamental principles of design and execution of specified in advance.
electrical installations. 3.1.1.2 In all cases, that is, whether the proposed
2 REFERENCE electrical work is a new installation or an extension to
the existing one, or a modification, the relevant
Reference has been made to the following Indian authority shall be consulted. In all such cases, it shall
Standard: also be ensured that the current carrying capacity and
IS No. Title the condition of the existing equipment and accessories
IS 3792 : 1978 Guide for heat insulation of non- are adequate.
industrial buildings 3.1.1.3 Sufficient coordination shall be ensured with
3 FUNDAMENTAL PRINCIPLES the civil architect in the initial stages itself to ensure
that sufficient building space be allotted for electrical
3.0 General installation purposes such as those required for sub-
3.0.1 Conformity with Indian Electricity Rules station installation, from the point of safety.

The installation shall generally be carried out in 3.1.1.4 The building services plan shall also include
conformity with the requirements of the Indian at the early stages all the details of services that
Electricity Rules, 1956 as amended from time to time, utilize electrical energy and the requirements of the
and also the relevant regulations of the electric supply electrical installation in order to enable the designers
authority concerned. and others involved to decide the coordination to
be ensured.
3.0.2 Materials
All materials, fittings, equipment and their accessories, 3.2 Distance from Electric Lines
appliances, etc, used in an electrical installation shall No building shall be allowed to be erected or re-
conform to Indian Standards wherever they exist. In erected, or any additions or alterations made to the
case an Indian Standard does not exist, the materials existing building, unless the following minimum
and other items shall be those approved by the clearances are provided from the overhead electric
competent authority. supply lines:

PART 1 GENERAL AND COMMON ASPECTS 27

SP 30 : 2011

Sl Type of Voltage Clearance a) Need for and location and requirements of

No. Supply building substation.
Line Vertical Hori- b) Load centre and centre of gravity of buildings,
m zontal, m c) Layout,
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) d) Room/spaces required for electrical utility,
i) Low and 2.5 1.2 e) Location and requirements of switch rooms,
medium f) Levels of illumination, and
voltage g) Ventilation.
Up to and 3.7 1.2
including 4 DESIGN OF ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
11 000 V
ii) High
Above 11 kV up 3.7 2.0 4.0 General
voltage
to and including
33 kV 4.0.1 The design of the electrical installation shall take
iii) Extra high 3.7 2.0 into account the following factors:
voltage (see (see a) The protection of persons, livestock and
Note) Note) property in accordance with 4.1, and
NOTE — For extra high voltage lines apart from the minimum b) The proper functioning of the electrical
clearances indicated, a vertical and horizontal clearance of
0.30 m for every additional kV or part thereof shall be provided. installation for the use intended.
4.0.2 The following factors shall therefore be kept in
3.3 Lighting and Ventilation view:
From the point of view of conserving energy, it is a) Characteristics of the available supply or
essential to consider those aspects of design of supplies,
buildings as vital, which would enable use of natural b) Nature of demand,
lighting and ventilation to the maximum. Attention is, c) Emergency supply or supplies,
however, drawn to the general requirements stipulated d) Environmental conditions,
in Part 1/Section 14. e) Cross-section of conductors,
3.4 Heat Insulation f) Type of wiring and methods of installations,
g) Protective equipment,
3.4.1 For information regarding recommended limits
h) Emergency control,
of thermal transmittance of roofs and walls and
transmission losses due to different constructions, j) Disconnecting devices, and
reference shall be made to IS 3792. k) Preventing of mutual influence between
electrical and non-electrical installations.
3.4.2 Proper coordination shall be ensured to provide
for necessary arrangements to install and serve the 4.1 Protection for Safety
electrical equipment needed for the air-conditioning 4.1.0 The requirements stated in 4.1.1 to 4.1.6 are
and heating services in the building. intended to ensure the safety of persons, livestock and
property against dangers and damage which may arise
3.5 Lifts and Escalators in the reasonable use of electrical installations.
For information of the electrical engineer, the lift/ NOTE — In electrical installations, two major types of risks
escalator manufacturer in consultation with the building exist.
planners, shall advise of the electrical requirements a) Shock currents; and
necessary for the lifts and escalators to be installed in b) Excessive temperatures likely to cause burns, fires and other
injurious effects.
the building. General provisions are outlined in
Part 1/Section 14. 4.1.1 Protection Against Direct Contact
3.6 Location and Space for Electrical Equipment Persons and livestock shall be protected against danger
that may arise from contact with live parts of the
Even though specific provisions regarding the choice installation.
of location and space requirements for electrical
installation in buildings have been provided in the The protection can be achieved by one of the following
relevant parts of the Code. The following aspects shall methods:
be taken note of in general while planning the building a) Preventing a current from passing through the
design: body of any person or any livestock, and

28 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

b) Limiting the current which can pass through any excessive voltages likely to arise due to other
a body to a value lower than the shock causes (for example, atmospheric phenomena or
current. switching voltages).
4.1.2 Protection Against Indirect Contact 4.1.6 Methods for Protection for Safety
Persons and livestock shall be protected against dangers While the general principles of protection against
that may arise from contact with exposed conductive hazards in an electrical installation are given in 4.1.1
parts. to 4.1.6 guidelines on the methods for achieving
This protection can be achieved by one of the following protection and the choice of a particular protective
methods: measure are under consideration.

a) Preventing a fault current from passing 4.2 Other Factors of Design

through the body of any person or any 4.2.1 Characteristics of the Available Supply or Supplies
livestock.
b) Limiting the fault current which can pass a) Nature of current: ac and/or dc,
through a body to a value lower than the shock b) Nature and number of conductors:
current. 1) For ac:
c) Automatic disconnection of the supply on the i) phase conductors(s),
occurrence of a fault likely to cause a current ii) neutral conductor, and
to flow through a body in contact with iii) protective conductor.
exposed conductive parts, where the value of
2) For dc:
that current is equal to or greater than the
shock current. i) conductors equivalent to those listed
above.
4.1.3 Protection Against Thermal Effects in Normal
c) Values and tolerances:
Service
1) voltage and voltage tolerances (see
The electrical installation shall be so arranged that there Part 1/Section 6),
is no risk of ignition of flammable materials due to
2) frequency and frequency tolerances (see
high temperature or electric arc. Also, during normal
Part 1/Section 6),
operation of the electrical equipment, there shall be
no risk of persons or livestock suffering burns. 3) maximum current allowable, and
4) prospective short-circuit current (see
4.1.4 Protection Against Overcurrent Part 1/Section 13).
Persons or livestock shall be protected against injury, d) Protective measures inherent in the supply,
and property shall be protected against damage due to for example, earthed (grounded) neutral or
excessive temperatures or electromechanical stresses mid-wire.
caused by any overcurrents likely to arise in live e) Particular requirements of the supply
conductors. undertaking.
This protection can be achieved by one of the following 4.2.2 Nature of Demand
methods: The number and type of the circuits required for
a) Automatic disconnection on the occurrence lighting, heating, power, control, signalling,
of an overcurrent before this overcurrent telecommunication, etc, are to be determined by:
attains a dangerous value taking into account a) locations of points of power demand,
its duration, and
b) loads to be expected on the various circuits,
b) Limiting the maximum overcurrent to safe
c) daily and yearly variation of demand,
value and duration.
d) any special conditions,
4.1.5 Protection Against Overvoltage e) requirements for con trol, signaling,
Persons or livestock shall be protected against injury telecommunication, etc.
and property shall be protected against any harmful 4.2.3 Emergency Supply or Supplies (see also Part 2
effects of a fault between live parts of circuits supplied of the Code)
at different voltages.
a) Source of supply (nature, characteristics), and
Persons or livestock shall be protected against injury b) Circuits to be supplied by the emergency
and property shall be protected against damage from source.
PART 1 GENERAL AND COMMON ASPECTS 29
SP 30 : 2011

4.2.4 Environmental Conditions ( see Part 1/Section 8) c) overvoltage, and

4.2.5 Cross-section of Conductors d) undervoltage and no-voltage.

The cross-section of conductors shall be determined The protective devices shall operate at values of current,
according to: voltage and time which are suitably related to the
characteristics of the circuits and to the possibilities of
a) their admissible maximum temperature, danger.
b) the admissible voltage drop,
4.2.8 Emergency Control
c) the electromechanical stresses likely to occur
due to short-circuits, Where in case of danger, there is necessity for
d) other mechanical stresses to which the immediate interruption of supply, in interrupting
conductors may be exposed, and device shall be installed in such a way that it can be
e) the maximum impedance stresses to which the easily recognized and effectively and rapidly
conductors of the short-circuit protection. operated.

4.2.6 Type of Wiring and Methods of Installations 4.2.9 Disconnecting Devices

The choice of the type of wiring and the methods of Disconnecting devices shall be provided so as to permit
installation depend on: disconnection of the electrical installation, circuits or
individual items of apparatus as required for
a) nature of the location, maintenance, testing, fault detection or repair.
b) nature of the walls or other parts of the
building supporting the wire, 4.2.10 Prevention of Mutual Influence Between
Electrical and Non-electrical Installations
c) accessibility of wiring to persons and livestock,
d) voltage, The electrical installation shall be arranged in such a
e) electromechanical stresses likely to occur due way that no mutual detrimental influence will occur
to short-circuits, and between the electrical installation and non-electrical
f) other stresses to which the wiring may be installations of the building.
exposed during the erection of the electrical 4.2.11 Accessibility of Electrical Equipment
installation or in service.
The electrical equipment shall be arranged so as to
4.2.7 Protective Equipment afford as may be necessary:
The characteristics of protective equipment shall be a) sufficient space for the initial installation and
determined with respect to their function which may later replacement of individual items of
be, for example, protection against the effects of: electrical equipment, and
a) overcurrent (overload, short-circuit) b) accessibility for operation, testing, inspection,
b) earth-fault current, maintenance and repair.

30 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

SECTION 8 ASSESSMENT OF GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS

OF BUILDINGS

0 FOREWORD c) Supply characteristics such as nature of

current, nominal voltage, prospective short-
An assessment of the general characteristics of circuit currents.
buildings is essential before planning for the needs
NOTE — This assessment shall include those
of an electrical installation. This Part 1/Section 8 characteristics of main, standby and safety supply
covers a checklist of various factors that require services.
assessment.
d) Division of installation from the point of view
This Part 1/Section 8 follows the internationally of control, safe operation, testing and
recommended method of identification of the external maintenance.
influences on the electrical installation such as
environment, utilization and method of construction of 2.2 Identification of External Influences on the
the building. Out of these influences, those which are Electrical Installation
specifically important for specific occupancies are listed 2.2.1 The characteristics of the following external
at the relevant Sections of the Code. However, it is hoped influences shall be assessed:
that this Section 8 would also enable understanding of
installations not explicitly covered by the Code. a) Environments
1) Ambient temperature,
The contents of this Part 1/Section 8 are primarily
intended for installations inside buildings though to 2) Atmospheric humidity,
the extent possible they could be utilized for outdoor 3) Altitude,
sites. However more severe conditions may prevail 4) Presence of water,
at outdoor sites and these require special 5) Presence of foreign solid bodies,
considerations. 6) Presence of corrosive or polluting
substances,
1 SCOPE
7) Mechanical stresses,
This Part 1/Section 8 of the Code covers guidelines 8) Presence of flora and/or mould growth,
for assessing the characteristics of buildings and the
9) Presence of fauna,
electrical installation therein.
10) Electromagnetic, electrostatic or ionizing
2 ASSESSMENT OF GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS influences,
OF BUILDINGS 11) Solar radiation,
12) Seismic effects,
An assessment of the general characteristics of
buildings as enumerated below is essential from the 13) Lighting, and
point of view of design and protection for safety of the 14) Wind.
electrical installation. These characteristics when b) Utilization
assessed shall also be taken into consideration in the
selection and erection of equipment. 1) Capability of persons,
2) Electrical resistance of human body,
2.1 Identification of General Characteristics 3) Contact of persons with earth potential,
2.1.1 Purposes, Supplies and Structure 4) Conditions of evacuation in an
emergency, and
The following shall be assessed:
5) Nature of processed or stored material.
a) Maximum demand and diversity from the c) Construction of Buildings
point of view of economic and reliable design
(see 3.2.2 of Part 1/Section 7). 1) Constructional materials, and
b) Type of distribution system, which includes, 2) Building design.
types of systems of live conductors and types 2.2.2 Table 1 suggests the classification and
of system earthing. codification of external influences which require
NOTE — For types of system earthing, see Part 1/ assessment in the design and erection of electrical
Section 14. installation.

PART 1 GENERAL AND COMMON ASPECTS 31

SP 30 : 2011

Table 1 Assessment of General Characteristics of Buildings

(Clause 2.2.2)

Sl Class Designation Characteristics Application and Examples Code

No.
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)

i) Environment
1) Ambient The ambient temperature to be considered for
temperature the equipment is the temperature at the place
where the equipment is to the installed
resulting from the influence of all other
equipment in the same location, when
operating, not taking into account the thermal
contribution of the equipment to be installed.
Lower and upper limits of range of ambient
temperature:
Lower Limits Upper Limits
a) –60°C +5ºC AA1
b) –40°C +5ºC AA2
c) –25°C +5ºC AA3
d) –5°C +40ºC AA4
e) +5°C +40ºC AA5
f) –5°C +60ºC AA6
The average temperature over a 24 hour period
must not exceed 5ºC below the upper limits.
Combination of two ranges to define some
environments may be necessary. Installation
subject to temperatures outside the ranges
require special consideration.
2) Atmospheric humidity Under consideration

3) Altitude < 2 000 m AC1

> 2 000 m AC2
4) Presence of water:
a) Negligible Probability of presence of water is negligible Locations in which the walls do not AD1
generally show traces of water but may do so
for short periods, for example, in the form of
vapour which good ventilation dries rapidly
b) Free-falling drops Possibility of vertically falling drops Locations in which water vapour AD2
occasionally condenses as drops or where
steam may occasionally be present
c) Sprays Possibility of water falling as spray at an Locations in which sprayed water forms a AD3
angle up to 60ºC from the vertical continuous film on floors and/or walls
d) Splashes Possibility of splashes from any direction Locations where equipment may be AD4
subjected to splashed water, this applies, for
example, to certain external lighting fittings,
construction site equipment, etc
e) Jets Possibility of jets of water from any direction Locations where hosewater is used regularly AD5
(yards, car-washing bays)
f) Waves Possibility of water waves Seashore locations such as piers, beaches AD6
quays, etc
g) Immersion Possibility of intermittent partial or total Locations which may be flooded and or AD7
covering by water where water may be at least 150 mm above
the highest point of equipment, the lowest
part of equipment being not more than 1 m
below the water surface
h) Submersion Possibility of permanent and total covering by Locations such as swimming pools where AD8
water electrical equipment is permanently and
totally covered with water under a pressure
greater than 0.1 bar
5) Presence of foreign
solid bodies:
a) Negligible The quantity of nature of dust or foreign solid AE1
bodies is not significant
b) Small objects Presence of foreign solid bodies where the Tools and small objects of which the smallest AE2
smallest dimension is not less than 2.5 mm dimension is at least 2.5 mm
c) Very small objects Presence of foreign solid bodies where the Wires are examples of foreign solid bodies AE3
smallest dimension is not less than 1 mm of which the smallest dimension is not less
than 1 mm

32 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

Table 1 — (Continued)

Sl Class Designation Characteristics Application and Examples Code

No.
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)

NOTE — In conditions AE1 and AE3, dust

may be present but is not significant to
operation of the electrical equipment
d) Dust Presence of dust in significant quantity AE4
6) Presence of corrosive
or polluting substances:
a) Negligible The quantity or nature of corrosive or AF1
polluting substances is not significant
b) Atmospheric The presence of corrosive or polluting Installation situated by the sea or industrial AF2
substance of atmospheric origin is significant zones producing serious atmospheric
pollution, such as chemical works and
cement works; this type of pollution arises
especially in the production of abrasive,
insulating or conductive dusts
c) Intermittent or Intermittent or accidental subjection to Location where some chemical products are AF3
accidental corrosive or polluting chemical substances handled in small quantities and where these
being used or produced products may come only accidentially into
contact with electrical equipment; such
conditions are found in factory, laboratories,
other laboratories or in locations where
hydro-carbons are used (boiler-rooms,
garages, etc)
d) Continuous Continuously subject to corrosive or polluting For example, chemical works AF4
chemical substances in substantial quantity
7) Mechanical stresses:

a) Impact
Low severity Household and similar conditions AG1
Medium severity Usual industrial conditions AG2
High severity Severe industrial conditions AG3
NOTE — Provisional classification.
Quantitative expression of impact severities is
under consideration.
b) Vibration Household and similar conditions where the
Low severity effects of vibration are generally negligible AH1
Medium severity Usual industrial conditions AH2
High severity Industrial installations subject to severe AH3
conditions
NOTE — Provisional classification.
Quantitative expression of vibration severities
is under consideration.
c) Other mechanical Under consideration AJ
stresses
8) Presence of fungus
and/or mould growth:
a) No hazard No hazard of fungus and/or mould growth AK1
b) Hazard hazard of fungus and/or mould growth The hazard depends on local conditions and AK2
the nature of fungus. Distinction should the
made between harmful growth of vegetation
or conditions for promotion of mould growth
9) Presence of vermin:
a) No hazard No hazard AL1
b) Hazard Hazard from fauna (insects, birds, small The hazard depends on the nature of the AL2
animals) vermin. Distinction should be made
between:
a) presence of insects in harmful quantity or
of an aggressive nature.
b) presence of small animals or birds in
harmful quantity or of an aggressive
nature
10) Electro magnetic,
electrostatic or ionizing
influences:

PART 1 GENERAL AND COMMON ASPECTS 33

SP 30 : 2011

Table 1 — (Continued)

Sl Class Designation Characteristics Application and Examples Code

No.
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)

a) Negligible No harmful effects from stay currents, AM1

electromagnetic radiation, electrostatic fields,
ionizing radiation or induction
b) Stray currents Harmful hazards of stray currents AM2
c) Electromagnetics Harmful presence of electromagnetic radiation AM3
d) Ionization Harmful presence of ionizing radiation AM4
e) Electrostatics Harmful presence of electrostatic fields AM5
f) Induction Harmful presence of induced currents AM6
11) Solar radiation:
a) Negligible AN1
b) Significant Solar radiation of harmful intensity and/or AN2
duration
12) Seismic effects:
a) Negligible Up to 30 gal (1 gal = 1 cm/s2) AP1
b) Low severity Over 30 up to and including 300 gal AP2
c) Medium severity Over 300 up to and including 600 gal AP3
d) High severity Greater than 600 gal Vibration which may cause the destruction AP4
of the building is outside the classification.
Frequency is not taken into account in the
classification; however, if the seismic wave
resonates with the building, seismic effects must
be specially considered. In general, the frequency
of seismic acceleration is between 0 and 10 Hz
13) Lightning:
a) Negligible AQ1
b) Indirect exposure Hazard from supply arrangements Installations supplied by overhead lines. AQ2
c) Direct exposure Hazard from exposure of equipment Part of installations located outside AQ3
buildings. The risks AQ2 and AQ3 relate to
regions with a particularly high level of
thunderstorm activity
14) Wind
(Under consideration)

ii) Utilization
1) Capability of persons:
a) Ordinary Uninstructed persons BA1
b) Children Children in locations intended for their Nurseries BA2
occupation.
NOTE — This class does not necessarily apply to
family dwellings
c) Handicapped Persons not in command of all their physical and Hospitals BA3
intellectual abilities (sick persons, old persons)
d) Instructed Persons adequately advised or supervised by Electrical operating areas BA4
skilled persons to enable them to avoid
dangers which electricity may create
(operating and maintenance staff)
e) Skilled Persons with technical knowledge or Closed electrical operating areas BA5
sufficient experience to enable them to avoid
dangers which electricity may create
(engineers and technicians)
2) Electrical resistance of
the human body
classification BB
(Under consideration)
3) Contact of persons with
earth potential:
a) None Persons in non-conducting situations Non-conducting locations BC1
b) Low Persons do not in usual conditions make BC2
contact with extraneous conductive parts or
stand on conducting surfaces
c) Frequent Persons are frequently in touch with Locations with extraneous conductive parts, BC3
extraneous conductive parts or stand on either numerous or of large area
conducting surfaces
d) Continuous Persons are in permanent contact with Metallic surroundings such as boilers and BC4
metallic surroundings and for whom the tanks
possibility of interrupting contact is limited

34 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

Table 1 — (Concluded)
Sl Class Designation Characteristics Application and Examples Code
No.
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)

4) Conditions of Low density occupation, easy conditions of Buildings of normal or low height used for BD1
evacuation in an evacuation habitation
emergency Low density occupation, difficult conditions High-rise buildings BD2
of evacuation
High density occupation, easy conditions of Locations open to the public (theatres, BD3
evacuation cinemas)
High density occupation, difficult conditions High-rise buildings open to the public (hotels, BD4
of evacuation hospitals, etc)
5) Nature of processed or
stored materials
a) No significant risks BE1
b) Fire risks Manufacture, processing or storage of Barns, wood-working shops, paper factories BE2
flammable materials including presence of dust
c) Explosion risk Processing or storage of explosive or low Oil refineries, hydrocarbon stores BE3
flashpoint materials including presence of
explosive dusts
d) Contamination Presence of unprotected foodstuffs, pharma- Foodstuff industries, kitchen
risks ceutics, and similar products without protection
NOTE — Certain precautions may be necessary in
the event of fault, to prevent processed materials
being contaminated by electrical equipment, for
example, by broken lamps
iii) Constructions of
Building
1) Constructional
materials:
a) Non-combustible — — CA1
b) Combustible Buildings mainly constructed of Wooden buildings CA2
combustible materials
2) Building Design:
a) Negligible risk — — CB1
b) Propagation of fire Buildings of which the shape and High-rise buildings, Forced ventilation CB2
dimensions facilitate the spread of fire (for systems
example, chimney effects)
c) Movement Risks due to structural movement (for Buildings of considerable length or erected on CB3
example, displacement between a building unstable ground.
and the ground, or settlement of ground or Contraction or expansion joints
building foundations)
d) Flexible or unstable Structures which are weak or subjects to Tents, air-support structures, false ceilings, CB4
movement (for example, oscillation) removable partitions
Flexible wiring, Installations needing support

NOTES
1 Each condition of external influence is designated by a code comprising a group of two capital letters and a number as follows:
The first letter relates to the general category of external influence
A = environment
B = utilization
C = construction of buildings
The second letter relates to the nature of the external influence
A…
B…
C…
The number relates to the class within each external influence
1…
2…
3…
For example, the code AC2 signifies:
A = environment
AC = environment altitude, and
AC2 = environment altitude > 2 000 m.
The Code given here is not intended to be used for marking equipment.
2 The characteristics defined for electrical installations are those accepted by the IEC and as applicable for electrical installations in
buildings. Influences on outdoor installations are separately defined in the respective parts of the Code.

PART 1 GENERAL AND COMMON ASPECTS 35

SP 30 : 2011

For the time being, the characteristics of influences 2.4 Maintainability

(Table 1, col 3) are given in descriptive language only.
An assessment shall be made of the frequency and
Codification for the same (see Note 1), as
quality of maintenance the installation can reasonably
recommended by IEC are given at Table 1 col 5 for
be expected to receive during its intended life. Where
information.
an authority is to be responsible for the operation of
2.3 Compatibility the installation, that authority shall be consulted. Those
characteristics are to be taken into account in applying
An assessment shall be made of any characteristics of the requirements of this Code so that, having regard to
equipment likely to have harmful effects upon other the frequency and quality of maintenance expected,
electrical equipment or other services or likely to impair
the supply. Those characteristics include, for example: a) Any periodic inspection and testing and
maintenance and repairs likely to be necessary
a) Transient overvoltages, during the intended life can be readily and
b) Rapidly fluctuating loads, safely carried out,
c) Starting currents, b) Effectiveness of the protective measures for
d) Harmonic currents, safety during the intended life is ensued, and
e) dc feedback, c) Reliability of equipment for proper
f) High-frequency oscillations, and functioning of the installation is appropriate
g) Earth leakage currents. to the intended life.

36 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

SECTION 9 WIRING INSTALLATIONS

0 FOREWORD 3.5 Conduit System — A closed wiring system

consisting of conduits and conduit fittings for the
A major portion of fixed installation design in a
protection and management of insulated conductors
building relates to wiring installation. This Section of
and/or cables in electrical or communication
the Code is primarily intended to cover guidelines on
installations, allowing them to be drawn in and/or
design and construction of wiring installations which
replaced, but not inserted laterally.
are commonly applicable to all types of occupancies.
The requirements specified in this Section are based NOTE — Within the conduit system there shall be no sharp
edges, burrs or surface projections which are likely to
on safety and reliability considerations.
damage insulated conductors or cables or inflict injury to
The general design guidelines for wiring given in this the installer or user. The manufacturer shall be responsible
for providing guidelines to assist the safe installation of the
Section have to be carefully considered while applying conduit system.
them to specific occupancies and a proper selection of
the method is to be decided depending on local 3.6 Distribution Board — A unit comprising one or
conditions. Guidance on such matters is covered in more protective devices against over current and
respective Sections of the Code. ensuring the distribution of electrical energy to the
circuits.
Assistance for this Section has been derived from
IEC 60364-5-52 (20001) ‘Electrical installations 3.7 Luminaire — Apparatus which distributes, filters
of buildings — Part 5-52: Selection and erection of or transforms the light transmitted from one or more
electrical equipment — Wiring systems’. lamps and which includes all the parts necessary for
supporting, fixing and protecting the lamps, but not
1 SCOPE the lamps themselves, and where necessary circuit
auxiliaries together with the means for connecting them
This Section 9 of the Code covers the essential design
to the supply.
and constructional requirements for electrical wiring
installations. 4 GENERAL AND COMMON ASPECTS FOR
SELECTION OF WIRING SYSTEMS
2 REFERENCES
A list of relevant Indian Standards on electrical wiring 4.1 Cable and Conductors for Low/Medium Voltage
is given at Annex A. Every non-flexible cable cord for use at low/medium
voltage, busbar trunking system, and every conductor
3 TERMINOLOGY
other than a cable for use as an overhead line operating
For the purpose of this Part 1/Section 9, the definitions at low medium voltage shall comply with the
given in Part 1/Section 2 of this Code and the following appropriate Indian Standards.
shall apply.
Flexible cable or flexible cord shall be used for fixed
3.1 Cable Ducting System — A system of closed wiring only where the relevant provisions of this Code
enclosure of non-circular sections for insulated are met.
conductors, cable and cords in electrical installations,
4.1.1 Cable for ac Circuits — Electromagnetic Effects
allowing them to be drawn in and replaced.
Single-core cables armoured with steel wire or tape
3.2 Conduit Fitting — A device designed to join or
shall not be used for ac circuits. Conductors of ac
terminate one or more components of a conduit system,
circuits installed in ferromagnetic enclosure shall be
or change direction.
arranged so that the conductors of all phases and the
3.3 Conduit Joint — An interface between two or more neutral conductor (if any) and the appropriate
components of a conduit system, or between a conduit protective conductor of each circuit are contained in
system and other equipment. the same enclosure.
3.4 Cable Trunking System — A system of closed Where such conductors enter a ferrous enclosure they
enclosures comprising a base with a removable cover shall be arranged so that the conductors are not
intended for the complete surrounding of insulated individually surrounded by a ferrous material, or other
conductors, cables, cords and/or for the provision shall be made to prevent eddy (induced)
accommodation of other electrical equipment. currents.

PART 1 GENERAL AND COMMON ASPECTS 37

SP 30 : 2011

4.1.2 Electromechanical Stresses or more of the following methods, or an equally

effective method, shall be used to-protect the wiring
Every conductor or cable shall have adequate strength
system:
and be so installed as to withstand the
electromechanical forces that may be caused by any a) shielding.
current, including fault current it may have to carry in b) placing sufficiently far from the source of
service. heat.
c) selecting a system with due regard for the
4.2 Conduits and Conduit Fittings
additional temperature rise which may occur.
A conduit or conduit fitting shall comply with the d) reducing the current-carrying capacity.
appropriate Indian Standard.
e) local reinforcement or substitution of
4.3 Trunking, Ducting and Fittings insulating material.
NOTE — Heat from external sources may be radiated,
Where applicable, trunking, ducting and their fittings convected or conducted, for example
shall comply with IS 14927. Where IS 14927 does not
a) from hot water systems,
apply, non-metallic trunking, ducting and their fittings
b) from plant appliances and luminaires,
shall be of insulating material complying with the
c) from manufacturing process,
ignitability characteristic ‘P’ of relevant Indian
e) through heat conducting materials,
Standard.
f) from solar gain of the wiring system or its surrounding
medium.
4.4 Lighting Track Systems
Parts of a cable or flexible cord within an accessory,
A lighting track system shall comply with relevant
appliance or luminaire shall be suitable for the
Indian Standard
temperatures likely to be encountered, or shall be provided
4.5 Methods of Installation of Cables and with additional insulation suitable for those temperatures.
Conductors
4.6.3 Presence of Water (AD) or High Humidity (AB)
The methods of installation of a wiring system for
A wiring system shall be selected and erected so that
which the Code specifically provides are at 6. Other
no damage is caused by high humidity or ingress of
methods can be used provided that compliance with
water during installation, use and maintenance. Where
the Code is maintained.
water may collect or condensation may form in a wiring
A bare live conductor shall be installed on insulators. system provision shall be made for its harmless escape
Non-sheathed cables for fixed wiring shall be enclosed through suitably located drainage points. Where a
in conduit, ducting or trunking. Where cables having wiring system may be subjected to waves (AD6),
different temperature ratings are installed in the same protection against mechanical damage shall be afforded
enclosure, all the cables shall be deemed to have the by one or more of the methods given in 4.6.6 to 4.6.8.
lowest temperature ratings.
4.6.4 Presence of Solid Foreign Bodies (AE)
4.6 Selection and Erection in Relation to External
A wiring system shall be selected and erected to
Influences
minimize the ingress of solid foreign bodies during
Table 1 of Part 1/Section 8 contains a concise list of installation, use and maintenance. In a location where
external influences which need to be taken into account dust or other substance in significant quantity may be
in the selection and erection of wiring systems. present (AE4: Light dust, AE5: Moderate dust or AE6:
Heavy Dust) additional precautions shall be taken to
4.6.1 Ambient Temperature (AA)
prevent its accumulation in quantities which could
A wiring system shall be selected and erected so as to adversely affect the heat dissipation from the wiring
be suitable for the highest and lowest local ambient system.
temperature likely to be encountered. The components
4.6.5 Presence of Corrosive or Polluting Substances
of a wiring system, including cables and wiring
(AF)
enclosures shall be installed or handled only at
temperatures within the limits stated in the relevant Where the presence of corrosive or polluting substances
product specification or as recommended by the is likely to give rise to corrosion or deterioration, parts
manufacturer. of the wiring system likely to be affected shall be
suitably protected or manufactured from materials
4.6.2 External Heat Sources
resistant to such substances. Metals liable to initiate
To avoid the effects of heat from external sources one electrolytic action shall not be placed in contact with

38 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

each other. Materials liable to cause mutual or Where compliance as above is impracticable, the
individual deterioration or hazardous degradation shall concealed cable shall incorporate an earthed metallic
not be placed in contact with each other. covering which complies with the requirements of this
Code for a protective conductor of the circuit
4.6.6 Impact (AG)
concerned, or shall be enclosed in earthed conduit,
A wiring system shall be selected and erected so as to trunking or ducting satisfying the requirements of this
minimize mechanical damage. In a fixed installation Code for a protective conductor, or by mechanical
where an impact of medium severity (AG2) or high protection sufficient to prevent penetration of the cable
severity (AG3) can occur, protection shall be afforded by nails, screws and the like.
by:
4.6.7 Vibration (AH)
a) the mechanical characteristics of the wiring
A wiring system supported by, or fixed to, a structure
system, or
or equipment subject to vibration of medium severity
b) the location selected, or
(AH2) or high severity (AH3) shall be suitable for the
c) the provision of additional local or general conditions and in particular shall employ cable with
mechanical protection, fixings and connections suitable for such a situation.
or by any combination of the above. 4.6.8 Other Mechanical Stresses (AJ)
Except where installed in a conduit or duct which A wiring system shall be selected and erected so as to
provides equivalent mechanical protection, a cable minimize during installation, use and maintenance,
buried in the ground shall be of a construction damage to the sheath and insulation of cables and
incorporating an armour or metal sheath or both, or be insulated conductors and their terminations.
of insulated concentric construction. Such cable shall
be marked by cable covers or a suitable marking tape Where the wiring system is designed to be
or by suitable identification of the conduit or duct and withdrawable there shall be adequate means of access
be buried at a sufficient depth to avoid being damaged for drawing cable in or out and, if buried in the
by any disturbance of the ground reasonably likely to structure, a conduit or cable ducting system for each
occur. circuit shall be completely erected before cable is
drawn in. The radius of every bend in a wiring system
A wiring system buried in a floor shall be sufficiently shall be such that conductors and cables shall not suffer
protected to prevent damage caused by the intended damage. Where a conductor or a cable is not
use of the floor.
continuously supported it shall be supported by suitable
Where a cable is installed under a floor or above a means at appropriate intervals in such a manner that
ceiling it shall be run in such a position that it is not the conductor or cable does not suffer damage by its
liable to be damaged by contact with the floor or the own weight. Every cable or conductor used as fixed
ceiling or their fixings. Where a cable passes through wiring shall be supported in such a way that it is not
a timber joist within a floor or ceiling construction or exposed to undue mechanical strain and so that there
through a ceiling support ( for example, under is no appreciable mechanical strain on the terminations
floorboards), the cable shall be at least 50 mm measured of the conductors, account being taken of mechanical
vertically from the top, or bottom as appropriate, of strain imposed by the supported weight of the cable or
the joist or batten. Alternatively, cable shall incorporate conductor itself. A flexible wiring system shall be
an earthed metallic sheath suitable for use as a installed so that excessive tensile and torsional stresses
protective conductor or shall be protected by enclosure to the conductors and connections are avoided.
in earthed steel conduit securely supported, or by
4.6.9 Presence of Flora and/or Mould Growth (AK)
equivalent mechanical protection sufficient to prevent
penetration of the cable by nails, screws, and the like. Where expected conditions constitute a hazard (AK2),
the wiring system shall be selected accordingly or
Where a cable is to be concealed within a wall or
special protective measures shall be adopted.
partition at a depth of less than 50 mm from the surface
its method of erection shall be that the cable shall be 4.6.10 Presence of Fauna (AL)
installed within 150 mm of the top of the wall or
Where expected conditions constitute a hazard (AL2),
partition within 150 mm of an angle formed by two
the wiring system shall be selected accordingly or
adjoining walls or partitions. Where the cable is
special protective measures shall be adopted.
connected to a point or accessory on the wall or
partition, the cable may be installed outside these zones 4.6.11 Solar Radiation (AN)
only in straight runs, either horizontally or vertically,
Where significant solar radiation (AN2) is experienced
to the point or accessory or switch gear.
PART 1 GENERAL AND COMMON ASPECTS 39
SP 30 : 2011

or expected, a wiring system suitable for the conditions normal voltage of the supply.
shall be selected and erected or adequate shielding shall
A greater voltage drop maybe accepted for a motor
be provided.
during starting periods and for other equipment with
4.6.12 Building Design (CB) high inrush currents provided it is verified that the
voltage variations are within the limits specified in the
Where structural movement (CB3) is experienced or
relevant Indian Standards for the equipment or, in the
expected, the cable support and protection system absence of a Indian Standard, in accordance with the
employed shall be capable of permitting relative manufacturer’s recommendations. Temporary
movement so that conductors are not subjected to conditions such as voltage transients and voltage
excessive mechanical stress. variation due to abnormal operation may be
For flexible or unstable structures (CB4) flexible wiring disregarded.
systems shall be used.
4.9 Cross-sectional Areas of Conductors
4.7 Current — Carrying Capacity of Conductors 4.9.1 Phase Conductors in ac Circuits and Live
The current to be carried by any conductor for sustained Conductors in dc Circuits
periods during normal operation shall be such that the The nominal cross-sectional area of phase conductors
appropriate temperature limit specified is not exceeded. in ac circuits and of live conductors in dc circuits shall
See various parts of IS 3961 for details. be not less than the values specified in Table 1.
4.8 Voltage Drop in Consumer’s Installations 4.10 Neutral Conductors
Under normal service conditions the voltage at the For a polyphase circuit in which imbalance may occur
terminals of any fixed current-using equipment shall in normal service, through significant inequality of
be greater than the lower limit corresponding to the loading or of power factor in the various phases, or
Indian Standard relevant to the equipment wherever through the presence of significant harmonic currents
existing. In the absence of such a standard, then the in the various phases, the neutral conductor shall have
Voltage at the terminals shall be such as not to impair a cross-sectional area adequate to afford compliance
the safe functioning of the equipment. with permissible conductor operating temperature for
The voltage drop between the origin of the installation the maximum current likely to flow in it.
(usually the supply terminal) and the fixed current- For a polyphase circuit in which serious imbalance is
using equipment should not exceed 4 percent of the unlikely to occur in normal service, other than a

Table 1 Minimum Nominal Cross-sectional Area of Conductor

(Clause 4.9.1)
Sl Type of Wiring System Use of the Circuit Conductor
No.
Material Minimum permissible nominal
cross-sectional area
mm2
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
i) Cables and insulated conductors Lighting circuits Cu 1.5
Cu 2.5
Power Circuits Al 10 (see Note 1)
Signalling and control circuits Cu 0.5 (see Note 2)
ii) Bare conductors Power circuits Cu 10
Al 16
Signalling and control circuits Cu 4
iii) Flexible connections with For a specific appliance Cu As specified in the relevant
insulated conductors and cables Indian Standard
For any other application 0.5 (see Note 2)
Extra low voltage circuits for special 0.5
applications
NOTES
1 Connectors used to terminate aluminium conductors shall be tested and approved for this specific use.
2 In multicore flexible cables containing 7 or more cores and in signalling control circuits intended for electronic equipment a
minimum nominal cross-sectional area of 0.1 mm is permitted.

40 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

discharge lighting current, multi-core cables with the relevant glow wire test requirements
incorporating a reduced neutral conductor in of IS 11000 (Part 2/Sec 1).
accordance with the appropriate Indian Standard may d) an enclosure formed or completed with
be used. Where single — core cables are used in such building material considered to be non-
circuits, the neutral conductor shall have a combustible when tested appropriate Indian
cross-sectional area appropriate to the expected value Standard relating to IS 3808.
of the neutral current. e) an enclosure formed or completed by part of
In a discharge lighting circuit the neutral conductor the building structure, having the ignitability
shall have a cross-sectional area not less than that of characteristic ‘P’ as specified in appropriate
the phase conductor(s). Indian Standard.
Cores of sheathed cables from which the sheath has
4.11 Electrical Connections
been removed and non-sheathed cables at the
4.11.1 Connections Between Conductors and Between termination of conduit, ducting or trunking shall be
a Conductor and Equipment enclosed as per specified enclosure at (b) above.
Every connection between conductors and between a 4.11.4 Accessibility of Connections
conductor and equipment shall provide durable
Except for the following, every connection and joint
electrical continuity and adequate mechanical strength
shall be accessible for inspection, test and maintenance:
(see 4.6.8).
a) a compound-filled or encapsulated joint.
4.11.2 Selection of Means of Connection
b) a connection between a cold tail and a heating
The selection of the means of connection shall take element (for example, a ceiling and floor
account, as appropriate, of the following: heating system, a pipe trace-heating system).
a) material of the conductor and its insulation. c) a joint made by welding, soldering, brazing
b) number and shape of the wires forming the or compression tool.
conductor.
4.12 Selection and Erection to Minimize the Spread
c) cross-sectional area of the conductor. of Fire
d) number of conductors to be connected
together. 4.12.1 Risk of Spread of Fire
e) temperature attained by the terminals in The risk of spread of fire shall be minimized by
normal service such that the effectiveness of selection of an appropriate material and erection in
the insulation of the conductors connected to accordance with this Code. The wiring system shall
them is not impaired. be installed so that the general building structural
f) where a soldered connection is used the design performance and fire safety are not materially reduced.
shall take account of creep, mechanical stress A part of a wiring system which complies with the
and temperature rise under fault current requirements of the relevant Indian Standard, which
conditions. standard has no requirement for testing for resistance
g) provision of adequate locking arrangements to the propagation of flame, shall be completely
in situations subject to vibration or thermal enclosed in non-combustible building material having
cycling. the ignitability characteristic “P”.

4.11.3 Enclosed Connections Where a wiring system passes through elements of

building construction such as floors, walls, roofs,
Where a connection is made in an enclosure. The ceilings, partitions or cavity barriers, the openings
enclosure shall provide adequate mechanical protection remaining after passage of the wiring system shall be
and protection against relevant external influences. sealed according to the degree of fire resistance
Every termination and joint in a live conductor or a required of the element concerned (if any).
PEN conductor shall be made within one of the
following or a combination thereof: Where a wiring system such as conduit, cable ducting,
cable trunking, busbar or busbar trunking penetrates
a) a suitable accessory complying with the elements of building construction having specified fire
appropriate Indian Standard. resistance it shall be internally sealed so as to maintain
b) an equipment enclosure, complying with the the degree of fire resistance of the respective element
appropriate Indian Standard. as well as being externally sealed to maintain the
c) a suitable enclosure of material complying required fire resistance. A non-flame propagating

PART 1 GENERAL AND COMMON ASPECTS 41

SP 30 : 2011

wiring system having a maximum internal 4.13.1.2 A low voltage circuit shall be separated from
cross-section of 710 mm2 need not be internally sealed. an extra-low voltage circuit.
Except for fire resistance over one hour, this 4.13.1.3 Where an installation comprises circuits for
requirement is satisfied if the sealing of the wiring telecommunication, fire-alarm or emergency lighting
system concerned has been type tested by the method systems as well as circuits operating at low voltage
specified in relevant Indian Standard. and connected directly to a mains supply system,
appropriate precautions shall be taken to prevent
Each sealing arrangement used as above shall comply
electrical contact between the cables of the various
with the following requirements:
types of circuit.
a) It shall be compatible with the material of the
4.13.1.4 Fire alarm and emergency lighting circuits
wiring system with which it is in contact, and
shall be segregated from all other cables and from each
b) It shall permit thermal movement of the other.
wiring system without reduction of the sealing
quality, 4.13.1.5 Where a common conduit, trunking, duct or
c) It shall be removable without damage to ducting is used to contain cables of category 1 and
existing cable where space permits future category 2 circuits, all cables of category 1 circuits
extension to be made, and shall be effectively partitioned from the cables of
category 2 circuits, or alternatively the latter cables
d) It shall resist relevant external influences to
shall be insulated in accordance with the requirements
the same degree as the wiring system with
of the clauses for the highest voltage present in the
which it is used.
category 1 circuits (see also 4.13.1.8).
4.12.2 Erection Conditions
4.13.1.6 Where a category 3 circuit is installed in a
During the erection of a wiring system temporary channel or trunking containing a circuit of any other
sealing arrangements shall be provided as appropriate. category, the circuits shall be segregated by a
During alteration work sealing which has been continuous partition such that the specified integrity
disturbed shall be reinstated as soon as practicable. of the category 3 circuit is not reduced. Partitions shall
also be provided at any common outlets in a trunking
4.12.3 Verification
system accommodating a category 3 circuit and a
Each sealing arrangement shall be visually inspected circuit of another category. Where mineral-insulated
at an appropriate time during erection to verify that it cable, or cable whose performance complies with
conforms to the manufacturer’s erection instructions appropriate Indian Standard relating to specification
and the details shall be recorded. for performance requirements for cables required to
maintain circuit integrity under fire conditions, is used
4.13 Proximity to Other Services for the category 3 circuit such a partition is not normally
4.13.1 Proximity to Electrical Services required.

4.13.1.1 Neither an extra-low voltage nor a low voltage 4.13.1.7 In conduit, duct, ducting or trunking systems,
circuit shall be contained within the same wiring system where controls or outlets for category l and category 2
as a circuit of nominal voltage exceeding that of low circuits are mounted in or on a common box,
voltage unless every cable is insulated for the highest switchplate or block, the cables and connections of the
voltage present or one of the following methods is two categories, of circuit shall be segregated by a
adopted: partition which, if of metal, shall be earthed. .

a) each conductor in a multicore cable is 4.13.1.8 Where cores of a category 1 and a category 2
insulated for the highest voltage present in circuit are contained in a common multicore cable,
the cable, or is enclosed within an earthed flexible cable or flexible cord, the cores of the category
metallic screen of current-carrying capacity 2 circuit shall be insulated individually or collectively
equivalent to that of the largest conductor as a group, in accordance with the requirements of this
enclosed within the screen, or Code, for the highest voltage present in the category 1
circuit, or alternatively shall be separated from the cores
b) the cables are insulated for the irrespective
of the category 1 circuit by an earthed metal screen of
system voltages and installed in a separate
equivalent current-carrying capacity to that of the cores
compartment of a cable ducting or cable
of the category 1 circuit. Where terminations of the
trunking system, or have an earthed metallic
two categories of circuit are mounted in or on a
covering.

42 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

common box, switchplate, or block, they shall be Breaker (MCB) Board System’ is most commonly
segregated in accordance with 4.13.1.7. adopted for distribution of electrical energy in a
building. Appropriate protection shall be provided at
4.13.2 Proximity to Non-electrical Services
distribution boards and at all levels of panels and
4.13.2.1 Where a wiring system is located in close switchboards for all circuits and sub-circuits against
proximity to a non-electrical service both the following short circuit, over-current and other parameters as
conditions shall be met: required. The protective device shall be capable of
interrupting maximum prospective short circuit current
a) the wiring system shall be suitably protected
that may occur, without danger. The ratings and settings
against the hazards likely to arise from the
of fuses and the protective devices shall be co-ordinated
presence of the other service in normal use, and
so as to afford selectivity in operation. Where circuit-
b) protection against indirect contact shall be breakers are used for protection of a main circuit and
afforded in accordance with Part 1/Section 7 of the sub-circuits derived there from, discrimination
of this Code. in operation may be achieved by adjusting the
4.13.2.2 A wiring system shall not be installed in the protective devices of the sub-main circuit breakers to
vicinity of a service which produces heat, smoke or operate at lower current settings and shorter time-lag
fume likely to be detrimental to the wiring, unless than the main circuit-breaker. It is recommended to
protected from harmful effects by shielding arranged provide residual current device (RCD) of 300/500 mA
so as not to affect the dissipation of heat from the wiring. rating as part of the main board at the entry of the
building and of 30 mA rating as part of the sub-
4.13.2.3 Where a wiring system is routed near a service distribution board.
liable to cause condensation (such as water, steam or
gas services ) precautions shall be taken to protect the Where high rupturing capacity (HRC) type fuses are
wiring system from deleterious effects. used for back-up protection of circuit breakers, or
where HRC fuses are used for protection of main
4.13.2.4 Where a wiring system is to be installed in
circuits, and circuit-breakers for the protection of sub-
proximity to a non-electrical service it shall be so
circuits derived therefrom, in the event of short-circuits
arranged that any foreseeable operation carried out on
protection exceeding the short-circuits protection
either service will not cause damage to the other. exceeding the short-circuits capacity of the circuit
4.13.2.5 Any metal sheath or armour of a cable breakers, the HRC fuses shall operate earlier than the
operating at low voltage, or metal conduit, duct, ducting circuit-breakers; but for smaller overloads within the
and trunking or bare protective conductor associated short-circuit capacity of the circuit-breakers, the circuit-
with the cable which might make contact with fixed breakers shall operate earlier than the HRC fuse blows.
metalwork of other services shall be either segregated If rewireable type fuses are used to protect sub-circuits
from it, or bonded to it. derived from a main circuit protected by HRC type
fuses, the main circuit fuse shall normally blow in the
4.13.2.6 No cable shall be run in a lift (or hoist) shaft
event of a short-circuit or earth fault occurring on sub-
unless it forms part of the lift installation as defined in
circuit, although discrimination may be achieved in
the appropriate Indian Standard relating to Lifts and
respect of overload currents. The use of rewireable
Service Lifts.
fuses is restricted to the circuits with short-circuit level
4.14 Selection and Erection in Relation to of 4 kA; for higher level either cartridge or high
Maintainability, Including Cleaning rupturing capacity (HRC) fuses shall be used.
Where any protective measure must be removed in A fuse carrier shall not be fitted with a fuse element
order to carry out maintenance, reinstatement of the larger than that for which the carrier is designed. The
protective measure shall be practicable without current rating of a fuse shall not exceed the current
reducing the original degree of protection. Provision rating of the smallest cable in the circuit protected by
shall be made for safe and adequate access to all parts the fuse. Every fuse shall have its own case or cover
of the wiring system which may require maintenance. for the protection of the circuit and an indelible
indication of its appropriate current rating in an
5 MAINS INTAKE AND DISTRIBUTION OF adjacent conspicuous position.
ELECTRICAL ENERGY IN CONSUMERS’ In Fig. 1, the two copper strips (busbars) fixed in a
PREMISES distribution board of hard wood or metal or other non-
metal insulating case are connected to the “supply
5.1 Distribution Board System
mains” through a linked switch with fuse or linked
Distribution board system, also known as ‘Distribution circuit breaker on each live conductor, so that the
Fuse Board System’ or ‘Distribution Miniature Circuit installation can be switched off as whole from both

PART 1 GENERAL AND COMMON ASPECTS 43

SP 30 : 2011

FIG. 1 A T YPICAL DISTRIBUTION BOARD SYSTEM

poles of the supply, if required. A fuse or MCB is shall be connected to a common link and be capable
inserted in the phase pole of each circuit, so that each of being disconnected individually for testing purposes.
circuit is connected up through its own particular fuse At least one spare circuit of the same capacity shall be
or MCB. The lamps, fans, socket outlets for other provided on each branch distribution board. Further,
domestic appliances consisting each circuit need not the individual branching circuits (outgoing) shall be
necessarily be in the same room or even on the same protected against overcurrent with miniature circuit
floor in case of a small building and simply allocated breaker of adequate rating. In residential/industrial
to each circuit in such a way that the raceways or runs lighting installations, the various circuits shall be
for connecting them is most convenient and separated and each circuit shall be individually
economical. The distribution board has 4 ways for four protected so that in the event of fault, only the particular
circuits but the number of ways and the circuits can be circuit gets disconnected.
more, provided the cable feeding the board is large
5.1.1.2 Functionally the residential installation wiring
enough to carry the total load current.
shall be separate for ceiling and higher levels in walls,
The practice in residential and similar commercial portable or stationery plug in equipments. For devices
buildings is to restrict the maximum number of points consuming high power and which are to be supplied
of lights, fans and socket outlets in a final circuit. In through supply cord and plug, separate wiring shall be
order to ensure safety, in case more points are required done. For plug-in equipment provisions shall be made
to be connected to the supply, then it is to be done by for providing ELCB protection in the sub-distribution
having more than one final circuits. board. It is preferable to have additional circuit for
kitchen and bathrooms. Such sub-circuit shall not have
5.1.1 Main and Branch Distribution Board Systems more than a total of ten points of light, fans and 6A
5.1.1.1 The rating or setting of over-current protection socket outlets. The load of such circuit shall be
devices shall be so chosen as to be suitable for restricted to 800 W. If a separate fan circuit is provided,
protection of cables and conductors used in the circuit. the number of fans in the circuit shall not exceed ten.
Main distribution board shall be provided with a circuit- Power sub-circuit shall be designed according to the
breaker on each pole of each circuit, or a switch with a load but in no case shall there be more than two 16A
fuse on the phase or live conductor and a link on the outlets on each sub-circuit. The circuits for lighting of
neutral or earthed conductor of each circuit. The common area shall be separate. For large halls 3-wire
switches shall always be linked. Main and branch control with individual control and master control shall
distribution boards shall be provided, along with surge be made for effective conservation of energy.
protective device and earth leakage protective device 5.1.1.3 In industrial and other similar installations
(incoming), with a fuse or a miniature circuit breaker requiring the use of group control for switching
or both of adequate rating/setting on the live conductor operation circuits for socket outlets may be kept
of each sub-circuit and the earthed neutral conductor separate from fans and lights. Normally, fans and lights

44 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

may be wired on a common circuit, however, if need b) sub-distribution boards, also called branch
is felt separate circuits may be provided for the two. distribution boards or final circuit distribution
The load on any low voltage sub-circuit shall not exceed boards.
3 000 W. In a case of new installation, all circuits and c) final circuits to loads, are decided as per the
sub-circuits shall be designed by making a provision number of points to be wires and load to be
of 20 percent increase in load due to any future connected per circuit and total load to be
modification. Power sub-circuits shall be designed connected to the supply system.
according to the load but in no case shall there be more
than four outlets on each sub-circuit. In industrial 5.1.1.7 For determination of load of an installation,
installations the branch distribution board shall be the following ratings may be assumed, unless the values
totally segregated for single-phase distribution and are known or specified:
wiring.
Connected Device Rating for Calculating
5.1.1.4 In wiring installations at special places like Connected Load
construction sites, stadium, shipyards, open yards in
Fluorescent lamp 40 W
industrial plants, etc, where a large number of high
Incandescent lamp, fan 60 W
wattage lamp may be required, there shall be no
6A socket outlet 100 W unless the actual
restriction of load on any circuit but conductors used value of loads are
in such circuits shall be of adequate size for the load specified
and proper circuit protection shall be provided. 16A socket outlet 1 000 W unless the
5.1.1.5 In large buildings, however, if only one actual value of loads are
distribution board were used, some of the points would specified
be at a considerable distance from it and in such cases Exhaust fans, fluorescent according to their
it is advisable to employ sub-distribution boards lamps other than single capacity, control gear
(known as final circuit distribution boards) known as lamp, compact fluorescent losses shall be also
lamps, HVMV lamps, considered as applicable
branch distribution boards either to save cable or to
HVSV lamps
prevent too great voltage drop at the more distant points
(lamps, fans or other appliances). In such cases, the
main distribution board controls the distribution circuits 5.2 Distribution Boards
to each sub-distribution board from which the final
circuits to loads are taken as shown in Fig. 2. Distribution boards which provide plenty of wiring
space having terminals of adequate size to
5.1.1.6 The number of, accommodate the cables which will be connected to
a) sub-main circuits (also called distribution them should be selected. Very often it is necessary to
circuits) from main distribution board to sub- install a cable which is larger than would normally be
distribution boards. required, in order to limit voltage drop, and take

FIG. 2 T YPICAL HOUSE-WIRING CIRCUIT

PART 1 GENERAL AND COMMON ASPECTS 45

SP 30 : 2011

account of the presence of harmonics, variation of a) those fitted with rewirable fuse links;
voltage; and sometimes the main terminals are not of b) those fitted with HBC fuse links; and
sufficient size to accommodate these larger cables. c) those fitted with circuit-breakers.
Therefore distribution boards should be selected with
main terminals of sufficient size for these larger cables. Refer to Fig. 3 for the above mantioned protective
devices.
5.2.1 Branch Distribution Boards
There are several reservations to the use of rewirable
Branch distribution boards shall be provided, along fuses. It is difficult to prevent the replacement of
with surge protective device and earth leakage rewirable fuse link by a larger size fuse link than the
protective devices (incoming), with a fuse or a fuse link chosen at the time of the installation. If the
miniature circuit breaker or both of adequate rating / fuse links are not of appropriate size to match the
setting chosen in accordance with IS 732 on the live current carrying capacity of the installed circuit, it
conductor of each sub-circuit and the earthed neutral would lead to short-circuit and earth fault.
conductor shall be connected to a common link and be
capable being disconnected individually for testing Distribution boards can be fitted with MCBs or HBC
purposes. At least one spare circuit of the same capacity fuse links. Distribution boards fitted with miniature
shall be provided on each branch distribution board. circuit-breakers are more expensive in their first cost,
Further the individual branching circuits (outgoing) but they have an advantage that they can incorporate
shall be protected against over current with miniature an earth leakage trip. Miniature circuit-breakers are
circuit-breaker of adequate rating. In residential / obtainable in ratings from 6 A to 63A, all of which are
industrial lighting installation, the various circuits shall of the same physical size, and are therefore easily
be separated and each circuit shall be individually interchangeable. However, they must not be
protected so that in the event of fault, only the particular interchanged without first making sure that are of the
circuit gets disconnected. correct rating for the circuits they protect. Another
advantage of using MCBs is that they can easily be
There are three types of distribution boards, reset after operation.

3A Semi-enclosed Rewirable Fuses

3B High Breaking Capacity (HBC) Fuse

FIG. 3 PROTECTIVE DEVICES (Continued)

46 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

3C High Breaking Capacity (HBC) Fuse

3D Miniature Circuit Breaker

FIG. 3 PROTECTIVE DEVICES

5.2.2 Installation of Distribution Boards controls and the current rating of the circuit and size
of fuse element. If a distribution board is recessed into
5.2.2.1 The distribution boards shall be located as near
a wall which is constructed of combustible materials
as possible to the centre of the load they are intended
such as wood, the case must be of metal or other non-
to control. The location should be convenient and
combustible material.
economical for installation and use. Where two and/or
more distribution fuse-boards feeding low voltage 5.2.2.3 Distribution boards shall be of either metal-
circuits are fed from a supply of medium voltage, these clad type, or air insulated type. But, if exposed to
distribution boards shall be: weather or damp situations, these shall be of the
weatherproof type and, if installed where exposed to
a) arranged so that it is not possible to open two
explosive dust, vapour or gas, these shall be of
at a time, namely, they are interlocked and
flameproof type in accordance with IS 5571. In
the metal case is marked ‘Danger 415 Volts’
corrosive atmospheres, these shall be treated with anti-
and identified with proper phase marking and
corrosive preservative or covered with suitable plastic
danger marks; or
compound.
b) installed in a room or enclosure accessible to
only authorized persons. 5.2.3 Wiring of Distribution Boards
5.2.2.2 In wiring branch distribution board, total load 5.2.3.1 The wiring shall be done on a distribution
of consuming devices shall be divided as far as possible system through main and/or branch distribution boards.
evenly between the number of ways in the board Main distribution board shall be controlled by a linked
leaving spare circuits for future extension. All low circuit-breaker or linked switch with fuse. Each
voltage distribution boards shall be marked ‘Lighting’ outgoing distribution circuit or sub-main circuit from
or ‘Power’ or ‘Lighting and Power’, as the case may main distribution board to sub-distribution boards shall
be, and also marked with the voltage and number of be provided with linked disconnector switch or linked
phases of the supply. Each shall be provided with a MCB. Each outgoing final circuit from a main
circuit list giving diagram of each circuit which it distribution board or branch distribution board shall

PART 1 GENERAL AND COMMON ASPECTS 47

SP 30 : 2011

be controlled by a miniature circuit-breaker (MCB) or distribution boards depends on the availability of

a fuse on the phase or line conductor as in the case of suitable stanchions or walls, the case with which circuit
single phase neutral (SPN) distribution board or three wiring can be run to the position chosen, accessibility
phase neutral distribution board. The branch for replacement of fuselinks, and freedom from
distribution board shall be controlled by a linked dampness and adverse conditions (if exposed to the
switchfuse or linked circuit-breaker. Each outgoing weather or damp conditions, a distribution board must
circuit shall be provided with a fuse or miniature circuit be of the weather proof type) The distribution boards
breaker (MCB) of specified rating on the phase or live shall not be more than 2 m above room floor level.
conductor.
5.2.4.2 Where distribution boards (which are fed from
5.2.3.2 Three pole neutral (TPN) distribution boards a supply exceeding 230 V) feed circuits with a voltage
are not generally recommended to be used for single not exceeding 230 V then precautions must be taken
phase 2 wire final circuit distribution. However, the to avoid accidental shock at the higher voltage between
use of TPN fuse distribution boards or TPN MCB the terminals of two lower voltage boards. Where the
distribution boards for single phase 2 wire final circuit voltage exceeds 230 V, a clearly visible warning label
distribution have come to practice and the same is must be provided, worded “400/415 V BETWEEN
permissible, provided the size of the neutral conductor ADJACENT ENCLOSURES”. These warning notices
wire is carefully designed, taking the unbalanced load should be fixed on the outside of busbar chambers,
condition, harmonic generation of loads etc. distribution boards or switchgear, whenever voltage
exceeding 230 V exists.
5.2.3.3 The neutral conductors (incoming and
outgoing) shall be connected to a common link (multi- 5.2.5 Feeding Distribution Board
way connector) in the distribution board, and be
When more than one distribution board is fed from a
capable of being disconnected individually for testing
single submain cable or from a rising bus bar trunking,
purposes. The wiring throughout the installation shall
it is advisable to provide local isolation near each
be such that there is no break in the neutral wire except
distribution board (see Fig 4). It is also good practice
in the form of a linked switchgear.
to provide a local isolator for all distribution boards
5.2.3.4 There shall be at least two ring circuits — one which are situated remote from the main switchboard
for light current (known as light power) 6A socket (see Fig. 5). If the main or submain cables consist of
outlets and another for heavy current (known as heavy bare or insulated conductors in metal trunking, it is
power) 16A socket outlets to connect heavy current very often convenient to fit the distribution board
domestic appliances. Similarly, heavy current wiring adjacent to the rising trunking, and to control each with
shall be kept separate and distinct from “light current” fusible cutouts or switchfuse.
wiring, from the level of circuits, that is, beyond the
5.2.6 Circuit Charts and Labelling
branch distribution boards. Lights, fans and call bells
shall be wired in the light current circuits. The diagrams, charts or tables shall be provided to
indicate for each circuit:
5.2.3.5 Wiring shall be separate or essential loads, that
is, those fed through standby supply and non essential a) The outlets served,
loads throughout. Wiring for the safety services shall b) Size and type of cable, and
be separate and distinct. Unless and otherwise c) Rating of fuse or protective device.
specified, wiring shall be done only by the “Looping
System”. Phase or live conductors shall be looped at These should be fixed in, or in the vicinity of the
the switch boxes and neutral conductors at the point distribution board, and fitted in glazed frames or in
outlets. Where “joint box system” is specified for plastic envelops for protection.
installation, all joints in the conductors shall be made 5.2.7 Marking Distribution Boards
by means of approved mechanical connector in suitable
and approved junction boxes. a) All distribution boards should be marked with
a letter or number, or both, preferably with
5.2.3.6 The balancing of circuits in three wire or poly the prefix ‘L’ for lighting, ‘S’ for socket and
phase installations shall be arranged before hand. ‘P’ for power.
5.2.4 Location of Distribution Boards b) They should also be marked with the voltage
and the type of supply, and if the supply exceeds
5.2.4.1 Distribution boards should preferably be sited
230V a DANGER notice must be fixed.
as near as possible to the centre of the loads they are
intended to control. This will minimize the length and c) When planning an installation, a margin of
cost of final circuit cables, but this must be balanced spare fuseways should be provided usually
against the cost of submain cables. Best location of about 20 percent of the total.

48 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

NOTE — The cables feeding the ring will share the load and may therefore be reduced accordingly. This arrangement enables the ring
to be broken by one of the isolators in the event of a fault a one end of the ring, in which case the load must be reduced.

FIG. 4 SINGLE L INE DIAGRAM OF A TYPICAL RING MAIN F EEDING SIX D ISTRIBUTION BOARDS

NOTE — It is recommended that distribution boards located remote from main switchgear be provided with local isolators.

FIG. 5 SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM SHOWING SIX FINAL D ISTRIBUTION BOARDS FED BY
RADIAL S UBMAINS FROM A MAIN DISTRIBUTION BOARD
PART 1 GENERAL AND COMMON ASPECTS 49
SP 30 : 2011

d) Metal distribution boards should be provided The above applies to ordinary dwelling-house, but not
with plugged holes to enable additional to all buildings. Three-fourths of the total wattage is to
conduits or multicore cables to be easily be considered for hotels, boarding houses etc, and nine-
connected in future. tenths for office etc. For the auditorium of cinema, theatre
etc, cables suitable for full connected load are to used.
5.3 Approximate Estimates of Allowable Voltage
Drop in Different Parts of Wiring System of a Large 5.4.2 If in a house there is electric cooker or electric
Building oven, full load up to 10 A and one-half of any extra
load (in excess of 10 A) should be taken into account.
There is no hard and fast rule in this respect. Ordinarily, The load of every sub-circuit is thus calculated, and
however, in a lighting circuit containing lights and fans, the current drawn by a sub-distribution board is
the total voltage drop is kept within 3 percent of the determined.
declared voltage. The maximum allowable voltage drop
is 1 V from main fuse to main distribution board, 4.5 V 5.4.3 The load of wall-plug connected to a sub-
from main distribution board to each sub-distribution distribution board in a dwelling house where there are
board and 1.5 V in each final sub-circuit. The voltage wall-plugs of various sizes will be the full-load of the
drop in the connection line of a pump motor in a house plug drawing maximum current plus four-tenths of all
may go up to 7.5 percent of the declared voltage, but the remaining plugs. In hotels etc, three-fourths of the
as is the case with a lighting circuit, it is recommended total load of all the remaining plugs have to be added
to keep this drop within 3 percent, if possible. to the full-load of the plug drawing maximum current.
a) At first currents for the sub-circuits are to be
5.4 Correct Estimation of Sizes of Cables
determined, one by one.
5.4.1 If the size of cable is determined on the basis of b) Sizes of fuse should be determined according
total load connected in the circuit, that is, on the basis to capacity to continuously carry the
of sum of wattage of all lamps, fans, wall-plugs, etc, respective current.
the size will be very large. However, all lamps, fans, c) The size of cable for each sub-circuit is
wall-plugs etc, may not be in use simultaneously at a determined according to the current drawn by
given time, and it is possible that all the points are not that sub-circuit.
loaded to their full capacity. For these reasons it is
d) Finally, the sizes of flexible cord and wall-
considered to be sufficiently accurate if an estimate is
socket for the respective sub-circuit to be
prepared according to 5.1.1.7 and the criteria of
determined.
considering two-thirds of total wattage of the circuit,
that is, the total wattage of every final sub-circuit is 5.5 Diversity and Maximum Demand
obtained by adding up the wattage of individual loads
connected to that circuit and two-thirds of this total In determining the maximum demand of an installation
wattage should be taken into consideration for or parts thereof, diversity may be taken into account.
determining the size of cable to be used for this sub- Table 2 gives guidance on diversity, but it is emphasized
circuit. But the current corresponding to this wattage that the calculation of diversity would have to take into
must not be less than the current drawn by the single account several factors which would need special
maximum wattage point. If a sub-circuit has only one knowledge and experience. By consulting Table 2, a
point, cable suitable for full load current of that point reasonable estimate can be obtained as to what the
is to be used. However, if a sub-circuit has three 6 A maximum load is likely to be, but it must be stressed
plug-sockets, the size of the cable can be determined that each installation must be dealt with on its own
on the basis of two-thirds of 180 W (that is, 120 W). merits.

Table 2 Typical Allowances for Diversity

(Clause 5.5 )
Sl Purpose of Final Circuit Fed from Type of Premises
No. Conductors or Switchgear to
which Diversity Applies Individual house- hold Small shops, stores offices Small hotels, boarding houses
installations, including and business premises etc
individual dwelling of a block
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
i) Lighting 66 percent of total current 90 percent of total current 75 percent of total current
demand demand demand

50 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

Table 2 — (Concluded)
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
ii) Heating and power [also see Sl. No. 100 percent of total current 100 percent of full load of 100 percent of full load of
(iii) to (iv) below] demand upto 10 A largest appliance largest appliance
+50 percent of any current +75 percent of remaining +80 percent of second largest
demand in excess of 10A appliances appliances
+60 percent of remaining
appliances
iii) Cooking appliances 10A 100 percent of full load of 100 percent of largest
+30 percent of full load of largest appliance appliance
connected cooking appliances +80 percent of full load of +80 percent of full load l of
in excess of 10 A + 6 A if second largest appliance second largest appliance
socket-outlet incorporated in+60 percent of full load of +60 percent of full load of
unit remaining appliances remaining appliances
iv) Motors (other than lift motors which 100 percent of full load of 100 percent of full load of
are subject to special consideration) largest motor largest motor
+80 percent of full load of +50 percent of full load of
second largest motor remaining motors.
+60 percent of full load of
remaining motors
v) Water heater (instantaneous type1) ) 100 percent of full load of 100 percent of full load of 100 percent of full load of
largest appliance largest appliance largest appliance
+100 percent of full load of +100 percent of full load of +100 percent of full load of
second largest appliance second largest appliance second largest appliance
+25 percent of full load of +25 percent of full load of +25 percent of full load of
remaining appliances remaining appliances remaining appliances
vi) Water heaters (thermostatically No diversity allowable 2) +25 percent of full load of
controlled) remaining appliances
vii) floor warming installations No diversity allowable 2)
viii) Water heaters thermal storage space No diversity allowable 2)
heating installations
ix) Standard arrangements of final 100 percent of current demand 100 percent of current
circuits in accordance with IS 732 of largest circuit demand of largest circuit
+40 percent of current demand +50 percent of current
of every other circuit demand of every other circuit
x) Socket outlets other than those 100 percent of current demand 100 percent of current 100 percent of current demand
included in Sl No. (ix) above and of largest point demand of largest point of largest point
stationary equipment other than +40 percent of current demand +75 percent of current +75 percent of current demand
those listed above of every other point demand of every other of every point in main rooms
point (dinning rooms, etc)
+40 percent of current demand
of every other point
1)
For the purpose of the table an instantaneous water heater is deemed to be a water heater of any loading which heats water only while
the tap is turned on and therefore uses electricity intermittently.
2)
It is important to ensure that the distribution boards are of sufficient rating to take the total load connected to them without the
application of any diversity.

An example of estimation of maximum demand for a ###

domestic installation with a single tariff is given below:

Connected Load Expected Maximum Demand

Installed lighting— 10A 66 percent of installed load = 6.6A

Installed fixed heating— 30A 100 percent of first 10 A plus = 20A
50 percent of excess of 10 A
Installed general-purpose socket-outlet— 40A 100 percent current demand of largest = 28A
circuit (20A) plus 40 percent current
demand of other circuits (8A)
Installed cooker— 45A 10A plus 30 percent of full load of = 22A
remaining connected appliances plus 6A
for socket in unit
Total 125A 76.6A

PART 1 GENERAL AND COMMON ASPECTS 51

SP 30 : 2011

In this case a 100A main switch should be provided. installation including 2-wire final circuits (see Fig. 6).
Unless it is anticipated to increase the load considerably This means that no fuses may be inserted in the neutral
in the foreseeable future, in which case a larger switch or common return wire and the neutral should consist
fuse should be installed. of a bolted solid link, or part of a linked switch which
completely disconnects the whole system from the
However, for a small restaurant where electric lighting
supply. This linked switch must be arranged so that
and heating is installed, it would be most likely that
the neutral makes before, and breaks after the phases.
the whole load will be switched on at one time and
therefore the main switchgear must be suitable for the 5.8 General Design of Feeder Circuit, Distribution
total installed load. Circuit and Final Circuit
5.6 MV/LV Busbar Chambers (400/230V) 5.8.1 Every distribution board must be connected to
either a main switch fuse or a separate way on a main
Bus bar chambers which feed two or more circuits must
switch board. Every final circuit must be connected to
be controlled by a main disconnector (TP and N), or
either a switch fuse, or to one way of a distribution
isolating links, or (three) fuses and neutral link, to
board. In either case the rating of the protective device
enable them to be disconnected from the supply.
must not exceed the current rating of the circuit cable.
5.7 Earthed Neutrals 5.8.2 The circuit which is connected to single-way of
To comply with Indian Electricity Rules, 1956 no fuses switch board/sub-switch board or fuse/MCB distribution
or circuit-breakers other than a linked circuit-breaker board for supplying current to one or more load point
shall be inserted in an earthed neutral conductor, and a known as ‘final circuit’. In the case of domestic and
linked switch or linked circuit-breaker shall be arranged commercial supply, the suppliers’ line or cable comes
to break all the related phase conductors. If this neutral to the energy meter through supplier’s scaled cut-out
point of the supply system is connected permanently and from the meter it goes to consumer’s main switch.
to earth, then the above rule applies throughout the This line is called ‘supply main’ or ‘main line’.

NOTE — When the neutral point of a supply or one pole of transformer on consumer’s premises is earthed permanently, a fuse, non-
linked switch or circuit-breaker is not permitted in the line connected to earth.

FIG. 6 SINGLE POLE FUSING

52 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

5.8.3 On account of heavy load in big factories of kept together properly in order in the distribution board
horizontal distribution, very often feeder line is drawn for the convenience of testing or disconnecting current
from the main incomer switch to busbar chamber of flowing towards load points must not exceed the circuit-
main switch board and the feeder line is called ‘supply carrying capacity of wires used for final circuit.
main’ or ‘main feeder’. If sub-switch board or
5.8.8 Use of Plug Point with Lamp Circuit
distribution board is installed next in sequence to
another sub-main switch, the feeder line upto sub- In a house wiring, usually lamp, wall-plug etc., are
switch board or main distribution, the line from main connected to the same circuit. The actual limit of the
switch board up to sub switch board or main current that the cables used in the wiring can safely
distribution board is called ‘sub-main feeder’. If main carry should be known. Considering the final circuit
distribution board is installed next in sequence to sub- which includes discharge lamps, the sum total of
(main) switch board, the line upto main distribution currents taken by all discharge lamps together must
board is called ‘main distribution feeder’ line. And from not exceed the current carrying capacity of the final
there line is drawn through different sub-busbar circuit. If the lamps are lighted by means of only the
chambers of sub-switch boards to distribution boards, normal circuit, current carrying capacity of the final
or from the main switch board and direct to main circuit should be 1.256 times the total current of all
distribution boards. the lamps together.

5.8.4 Also on account of heavy load in large buildings If in a final circuit both incandescent lamps and
of vertical distribution, very often main feeder line is inductor-lighted discharge lamps are used,
drawn from the main incomer switch to main busbar (Power taken by inductor- + (Power taken by incan-
chambers and from there upto different sub-busbar
lighted discharge lamps × 2) descent lamps × 1)
chambers and or main distribution boards, the feeder
line from consumer’s main switch to busbar chamber Line voltage
that rises from the ground floor upto the top most floor
in multistoried building is known as ‘main raising Must not exceed the current carrying capacity of the
main’. If sub-(main) busbar chamber or main final circuit.
distribution board is installed next in sequence in 5.8.9 Exception in Case of Temporary Wiring
different floors through another submain switch, feeder
line upto sub-(main) busbars or main distribution In case of temporary load points where bayonet holders
boards is called ‘sub-main raising bars’ and considered for lamps have been used, total power demand of load
sub-main feeder line. If main distribution is installed must not exceed 1 000 W per final circuit.
next in sequence to sub-main busbars, the line upto 5.8.10 Splitter Unit
main distribution board is called ‘distribution busbar’
This kind of distribution board is very much in use
and considered main distribution feeder line. Circuit
now-a-days. This board can be installed anywhere and
lines drawn from main distribution boards upto final
is known as ‘splitter unit’ or ‘splitter box’. The unit is
circuit fuse districution boards /MCB distribution
prepared by setting a pair of main switches as well as
boards may be as ‘sub-main distribution feeder’.
a pair of main fuses or a single fuse inside a cast iron
5.8.5 Every circuit line which runs from final circuit box. An external handle is attached to the body of the
fuse distribution board towards load points is called box. It is so arranged that the cover of the box cannot
‘final circuit’. Sometimes a circuit line may go to a be opened when the switch is in the on position or the
load point from a main distribution board/main switch cannot be switched on when the cover is open,
distribution busbar chamber, a sub-main switch board/ that is the cover cannot by any means be opened unless
sub-main rising main, a main switch board /main rising the switch is off. It is for this arrangement that the unit
main etc; in that case every line is regarded as a final is quite good from the point of view of safety. The box
circuit. is also known as Iron-clad Switch-Fuse Box. The
switch-fuse box is installed at a point where from
5.8.6 Every final circuit must come out of a separate
consumer’s zone starts. Cables are drawn from the
way of a (final circuit) distribution board. Where there
switch and connected to the bus-bars of a fuse board.
is only one final circuit, it may be connected directly
This is the main distribution board. Now-a-days iron-
to the main switch board.
clad fuse-box is very much in use. A screw is attached
5.8.7 Wiring of every final circuit will be completely to the body of this box. The risk of electric shock is
separated from that of another final circuit which can avoided by connecting earth wires to that screw. The
be on or off with a single-pole switch. Care must be box is to be earthed by two separate and distinct earth
taken to see that every pair of live or neutral wires are connections.

PART 1 GENERAL AND COMMON ASPECTS 53

SP 30 : 2011

5.8.11 Lamps of the Same Room are Supplied from arrangements is suitable (for a particular case) is to be
More Than One Final Circuit Distribution Boards adopted for the wiring and its protection:
When outlets from a sub-distribution board or a fuse If the distance between the house in which the main
board are divided into ‘ways’ and each final sub-circuit meter board has been installed and the other house (for
is connected to a separate way, the advantage is that in example garage, servant’s room etc) does not exceed
the event of a short-circuit in anyone sub-circuit, the 3 m and if there be no thoroughfare between the two
other sub-circuits remain unaffected and continue to houses, electric lines may be drawn from the former to
function normally. But if a fault occurs in a distribution the latter through a galvanized iron (G.I.) pipe of
board, all the sub-circuits coming out of it are affected. suitable dimensions at a height of at least 2.5 m above
There are some places such as hospital, operation the ground level. Also the G.I. pipe has to be properly
theatre; cash room in a bank, engine room, workshop earthed. But in case the distance between the two houses
etc, where the entire room cannot be allowed to be exceeds 3 m or if there is a thoroughfare between them,
dark under any circumstance. A lot of risks may have a separate main or sub-main has to be drawn from one
to be faced if such places suddenly become totally dark. house to another by means of weather-proof cables tied
Wherever special attention must be paid to avoid any up with G.I. bearer wire (see Fig. 7A).
inconvenience in business, every room is equipped with
If current is to be taken from one house to another by
more than one lamp and these are invariably taken from
means of cleat wiring, the cable used in the wiring will
different ways. Even sometimes these lamps are
be weather-proof. This is also known as H.S.O.S.
supplied from fully separate distribution board.
(House Service Overhead System) cable. Use of cable
Suppose the wiring of a three-storeyed building is to
with ‘polychloroprine’ sheath or PVC cable or cable
be done in such a way that no room of that building
with PVC sheath is also approved by many. This
shall be totally dark (except in the event of discontinuity
arrangement of drawing a supply line is allowed up to
of supply). In that case there must be a separate sub-
a distance of 3 m between two buildings. Using cables
distribution board in each floor. But it is not that the
as described above and drawing these cables over a
sub-distribution board will control the load points of
separate catenary wire or using those cables which have
that floor only. Depending on the convenience of a
in-built bearer wires (at the time of manufacture), the
circuit, sub-distribution board in the lower floor will
supply line may be drawn.
supply power to some lamps etc, of the lower floor
and to some lamps etc, of the upper floor. Every room Other methods of drawing cables over bearer wires
will be provided with two sets of cables — one set will are also in use, one of these methods is shown in
be supplied from sub-distribution board of the upper Fig. 7B. In this method a piece of leather strap loops a
floor and the other set will be supplied from sub- hard rubber-sheathed cable at certain intervals for
distribution board of the lower floor. With these hanging it, while the upper part of the strap is fastened
arrangements if a fault develops in a sub-distribution to the catenary wire by means of wire hook. This is
board, there is no possibility of any room becoming also an arrangement for taking a supply cable from
totally dark. In such cases, operation theatre etc, are one building to another. If such a cable, as has in-built
provided not only with connection from separate bearer wire, is used, the limit of distance between two
distribution boards but with alternative source of supply buildings will depend upon the load-bearing capacity
such as gas plant or charged battery. of the bearer wire.
5.8.12 Pilot Lamp Besides these a cable may be drawn from one house to
another as shown in Fig. 7C. Main earth pit should be
Arrangements should be made for fixing a bracket
at least 1.5 m away from the building.
above each main board and for connecting a 20 W lamp
on it. Cables connecting this lamp will come out 5.8.14 Identification of Cables and Conductors
directly from the bus bars of the board through a
IS 11353 gives guidance on uniform system of marking
separate switch arid fuse. This lamp is called a Pilot
and identification of conductors and apparatus
Lamp. The purpose behind this arrangement is to keep
terminals (see Table 3). Colours of the cores shall be
the main board always illuminated so that fuse etc, can
as per relevant Indian Standard for cables. The
easily be changed.
following shall be ensured:
5.8.13 Arrangements for Taking Cable Connections
a) Non-Flexible Cables and Bare Conductors —
from One House to Another
Every single core non-flexible cable, and
If wiring is to be done to supply current from one house every core of twin or multicore non-flexible
in which consumer’s main switch has been installed to cable used as fixed wiring shall be identifiable
another house, whichever of the following throughout its length by appropriate methods.

54 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

7A GI Bearer Wire Stretched Between Two Houses and Supply Cable Tied-
Up with this Wire by Means of Link Clips

7B Leather Strap Loops for Hanging Hard Rubber-sheathed Cable at Intervals

NOTE — Leather strap loops are used for hanging hard rubber-sheathed cable at intervals while the upper part of the strap is fastened
to the catenary wire by means of wire hook

7C Drawing of Supply Cable from One House to Another

FIG. 7 A RRANGEMENTS FOR TAKING CABLE CONNECTIONS FROM O NE HOUSE TO A NOTHER

b) Rubber or PVC Insulated Cables — Core f) Colour coding of fixed wiring cables applies
colours to be in accordance with respective to all wiring up to the final distribution board,
Indian Standard or colour sleeves at the and also for circuit wiring, except that red may
termination of these cables. be used for any phase.
c) Multicore PVC Cables — If colouring of g) When wiring to motors the colours specified
cores is not used, then cores to be identified in Indian Standard should be used right up to
in accordance with relevant Indian Standards. the motor terminal box. For slipring motors
d) M I Cables — At the termination of these the colours for the rotor cables should be the
cables, sleeves shall be fitted. same as those for the phase cables, or could
e) Bare Conductors — To be fitted with sleeves be all of one colour except black or green.
or painted. h) For star delta connections between the starter

PART 1 GENERAL AND COMMON ASPECTS 55

SP 30 : 2011

and the motor, use red for A1 and A0, yellow 5.8.15 Sub-main Cables
for B1 and B0, and blue for C1 and C0. The
Sub-main (feeder) cables are those which connect
“1” cables should be marked to distinguish
between a switch fuse/MCCB feeding sub distribution
them from the “0” cables.
boards of main switchboard, to incomer of subsidiary
j) For 2-wire circuits, such as for lighting or main switch board or direct to a main distribution
sockets, the neutral of middle wire must board. The size of these cables will be determined by
always be black, and the phase or outer wire the total connected load which they supply, with due
(whichever phase it is derived from) should consideration for diversity and voltage drop, and the
be red. other factors described in Wiring Regulations.
k) For lighting the red wire will always feed the Sub-main cables may be arranged to feed more than
switch, and a red wire must be used from the one distribution board if desired; they may be arranged
switch to the lighting point. to form a ring circuit, looping from one main
For flexible cables and cords the distinctive colours distribution board to another. Where a sub-main cable
are not the same as for fixed wiring, and the colours of feeds more than one distribution board in a ring circuit,
these are given in Table 4. its size must not be reduced when feeding the second

Table 3 Colour Identification of Cores of Non-flexible Cables and Bare Conductors for Fixed Wiring
(Clause 5.8.14 )
Sl No. Function Colour Identification of Core of Rubber or PVC
Insulated Non-flexible Cable, or of Sleeve or Disc to
be Applied to Conductor or Cable Code
(1) (2) (3)
i) Protective or earthing Green and yellow
ii) Phase of ac single-phase circuit Red [or yellow or blue (see Note 1)]
iii) Neutral of ac single or three-phase circuit Black
iv) Phase R of 3-phase ac circuit Red
v) Phase Y of 3-phase ac circuit Yellow
vi) Phase B of 3-phase ac circuit Blue
vii) Positive of dc 2-wire circuit Red
viii) Negative of dc 2-wire circuit Black
ix) Outer (positive or negative) of dc 2-wire circuit derived from 3 wire Red
system
x) Positive of 3-wire system (positive of 3-wire dc circuit) Red
xi) Middle wire of 3-wire dc circuit Black
xii) Negative of 3-wire dc circuit Blue
xiii) Functional earth-telecommunication Cream

NOTES
1 As alternative to the use of red, if desired in large installations, up to the final distribution board.
2 For armoured PVC-insulated cables and paper-insulated cables, see relevant Indian Standard.

Table 4 Colour, Identification of Cores of Flexible Cables and Flexible Cords

(Clause 5.8.14 )
Sl No. Number of Cores Function of Core Colour(s) of Core
(1) (2) (3) (4)
i) 1 Phase Brown1)
Neutral (Light) Blue
Protective or earthing Green and yellow
ii) 2 Phase Brown
Neutral (Light) Blue1)
iii) 3 Phase Brown
Neutral (Light) Blue1)
Protective or earthing Green and yellow
iv) 4 or 5 Phase Brown or black1)
Neutral (Light) Blue1)
Protective or earthing Green and yellow

1)
Certain alternatives are allowed in Wiring Regulations.

56 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

or subsequent board, because the cable must have a Wiring from plugs or spur units to lamps and
current rating not less than the fuse or circuit breaker appliances shall be carried out by a phase
protecting the sub-main. If a fuse or circuit-breaker is conductor, a conductor and a separate earth
inserted at the point where a reduction in the size of conductor.
the cable is proposed, the reduced size of cable may f) There shall be electrical continuity of the
be used, providing that the protective device is rated neutral earth sheathing of multicore armoured
to protect the cable it controls. cables. All connections and joints shall be
5.8.16 Protective Multiple Earthing (PME) made in accordance with the
recommendations of the cable manufacturer.
5.8.16.1 Protective multiple earthing system uses the At every joint in the outer conductor (that is
protective conductor as a combined earth/neutral neutral earth) and at terminations, the
conductor. It is sometimes used where there is overhead continuity of the conductor shall be ensured
distribution, and where it is difficult to obtain a by bonding conductor additional to the means
sufficiently low earth resistance from supply used for sealing and clamping the outer
transformer to the consumer’s terminal. In such a case conductor.
the neutral conductor is also the earth conductor and it
is bonded to earth, not only at the transformer position, 5.8.16.2 The use of a PME system in petrol filling
but also at the consumer terminal position. The stations is specifically prohibited. The reason for the
condition of approval for this system contain very prohibition is to prevent the risk of electrical return
stringent requirements. The wiring for consumers currents flowing back to earth through the metallic
installations, including sub-mains and circuits wiring parts of the underground supply pipes and storage
may (if approved) be carried out on the PME system. tanks. Special armoured multicore cables may be used
Some of the requirements for consumer’s installation for the PME system. Such cables may be with XLPE
are as follows: (cross linked polyethylene) insulation, Aluminium
conductors and sheath are used, and the cables have a
a) The supply undertaking shall be consulted to PVC oversheath. The armouring in these cables is laid
determine any special requirements upon such a way that sufficient amount can be pulled
concerning the size of protective conductors. away from the cable without the necessity of cutting
b) All precautions must be taken to avoid the it, to enable access to the phase conductor for the
possibility of an open circuit in the neutral purpose of jointing. These special cables are only
conductor. manufactured in minimum lengths of about 200 m, and
c) Bonding leads must be connected to the it may not be economical to employ the PME system
earthing terminals of all metal structures, for sub-main cables when only short runs are involved.
metal pipes and other metal services that are 5.8.16.3 Circuit wiring
(or may reasonably be expected to become)
in electrical contact with the general mass of a) Circuit ring for PME system may also use a
earth, and that are so situated that common neutral earth (CEN) conductor, but
simultaneous contact may reasonably be in some instances this may not result in any
expected to be made by any person with such cost savings.
structures, pipes or other metal work on the b) For mineral-insulated copper sheathed
one hand, and with the exposed non-current- systems the outside sheathing lends itself
carrying metalwork of the consumer’s readily to the system, but special glands
installation, or any metal work in electrical should be used to ensure satisfactory low
contact therewith, on the other hand. impedance in the earth conductor.
d) Earth electrodes shall be provided at points c) For screwed-conduit systems it is sometimes
not less remote from the transformer than the difficult to guarantee satisfactory low
most remote service line or connection point, impedance in the conduit system during the
and at such other points as will ensure that life of the installation, and it is recommended
the resistance to earth in the neutral conductor that a circuit protective conductor (CPC)
is satisfactory and the protection system neutral conductor be drawn into the conduit.
operative. The overall resistance shall not d) The same recommendation applies to wiring
exceed 20 times. is steel trunking, because it is imperative that
e) There shall be a wire connection from the there be no risk during the life of the
neutral earth conductor to both the neutral and installation that an open circuit, or a high
the earth terminal of every socket outlet. resistance joint, could occur.

PART 1 GENERAL AND COMMON ASPECTS 57

SP 30 : 2011

e) Before planning any PME installation careful provide oval conduit or capping over the cables.
study must be made of the actual conditions Although PVC has a much longer anticipated life than
of approval issued by the concerned the previously used rubber covered cables, MICC is a
regulatory authority. suitable alternative which has an even longer life. It is
not commonly used on very small installations except,
5.9 Computer Data Transmission and Control possibly, for exterior lighting or feeds to remote
System buildings.
Cables required for data transmission and control 5.11.2 To avoid undue disruption and damage to
systems are those that are required between the existing floorboards, plastering, etc, a number of
computer and the outstations and those used between enclosed surface systems are available which
the machine and the associated peripheral equipment. incorporate mini-trunking, dado-trunking and cornice-
Generally, the field wiring is multicore and may have trunking. For each system, accessories are available
screening applied to each core, to each pair or, simply, for accommodating different types of outlet and for
overall. There is a large range of cables used by different negotiating corners, doorways, etc, a correctly designed
computer manufacturers. One of the commonly used installation is effective and relatively inconspicuous,
cables for peripheral equipment is the ribbon form although even where obvious, such as across ceilings,
which is also produced as multicore cable, with and it presents an aesthetically pleasing appearance.
without screening and various types of insulation.
Although ribbon cables are produced in widths upto 5.12 Telephone Cables
approximately 80 mm and with over 60 cores, they are
extremely thin and, therefore, flexible. As the user finds it more convenient to install his own
internal telephone systems, a large range of cables
5.10 Multiplex Systems available for the purpose. The conventional type of
multipair or multitriple cable consists of tinned copper
One of the advantages gained by the use of electronic conductors, PVC-insulated and sheathed with, in some
equipment is that the amount of field wiring required cases, a non-metallic rip-cord laid under the sheath to
is far less, in both quantity and size, than for the earlier simplify stripping while, for under-the-carpet
power circuitry entailed by mechanical relay systems. installations or situations where the conventional round
Even further improvements are made possible by the cables are inconvenient or too bulky, ribbon cables are
use of multiplexing systems, that is, the ability to again available with upto 50 ways. Where such cables
convey a large number of signals each way along the
may be subject to damage or heavy traffic, such as
same conductor, and these are, therefore, particularly
under floor coverings, ribbon cables insulated with
suitable for installations requiring a large number of
cross-linked PVC (XLPVC) which is more robust than
outstations, whether for data transmission or process
standard PVC may be used. XLPVC are different from
control. Optical fibre cables provide further advantages
XLPE-insulated cables which, among other
for light-current installations of all types; they have
advantages, have fire-retardant properties.
low attenuation and high bandwidth, which reduces
the necessity for repeaters, and are not subject to 5.13 Cable Jointing and Termination
interference from heavy electrical equipment. In
hazardous areas, optical fibres give even greater safety 5.13.1 Although the methods employed for jointing
than intrinsically safe circuits as the form of energy and terminating cables of all types have been
transmitted is, of course, light waves and not current. simplified, largely due to the use of improved materials
for insulation and sheathing, the importance of utilizing
5.11 Domestic Systems correct techniques and methods cannot be too strongly
emphasized. All joints and terminations introduce
5.11.1 The smaller domestic type of installation is
potentially dangerous points; in power circuits a faulty
adequately catered for with twin and circuit protective
joint will lead to local hot-spots with ultimate failure
conductor (CPC) PVC cables or single-core PVC cable
of the cable, while in light-current installations for
in some form of enclosure; the installation of the first
process control, data transmission and
is less labour-intensive than conduit work although the
communications, a high resistance connection (dry
second provides better mechanical protection. Due to
joint) can prevent equipment from operating
the amount of space that is occasionally available
satisfactorily.
between floorboards and ceilings (modern construction
methods include solid floors) and in lofts, installation 5.13.2 Multicore cables, whether for mains, voltages
is relatively simple and protection is rarely necessary or light-current duty, generally present the greater
for horizontal runs. Where droppers are required for problem as the crutch, that is, the point at which
switches and wall-fittings, however, it is essential to conductors are splayed out from the normal formation,

58 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

constitutes a naturally weak area in which air may be currents during switching operations may have more
trapped if a termination or joint is not correctly formed, drastic effects by causing a cable to disintegrate
leading to breakdown at a later stage. completely. Some cables are susceptible to current and
voltage surges which may be avoided by the use of
5.13.3 Single-core cables should, preferably, never be
current limiting devices. Where electrical equipment
jointed, but where this is essential it should be effected
in normal operation has a surface temperature sufficient
only in purpose-made joint boxes equipped with
to cause a risk of fire, suitable methods of protection
suitable mechanical or compression-type connectors.
should be adopted.
These may be of the ferrule type with pinching screws
or, as with terminators, bolted clamps requiring the 5.14.2 Emergency Lighting
bare conductor to be either wound around the bolt
Emergency lighting is very critical for at hospitals,
between shaped washers or enclosed in crimped type
theatres, hotels, factories, offices, shops, cinemas and
terminals which are then threaded over the screw thread
certain specified places of entertainment and practically
and clamped. It is essential with all types of stranded
all types of premises excluding houses. Generally, the
cable to ensure that every strand is included in the joint
cable installation for an emergency lighting system
or termination and, particularly with aluminium
should comply with Wiring Regulations but care must
conductors, to follow cable manufacturers’
be taken to ensure that all wiring possesses inherently
recommendations for tightening torques. Aluminium,
high resistance to attack by fire and adequate
although lighter in weight and less expensive than
mechanical strength. This allows the use of various
copper, unfortunately has a higher co-efficient of
standard types of cable, provided that suitable means
expansion and this has, at times, caused connections
of protection are employed. When emergency
to slacken shortly after commissioning. It is therefore
luminaries are supplied from a remote source, the
advisable for the installer of aluminium cables to
wiring system must be mechanically separated from
recheck all clamp-type connections after electrical load
other systems by rigid and continuous partitions of
has been applied. This does not imply, however, that a
non-combustible materials. Consequently,
similar procedure is unnecessary with copper
multicompartment enclosures are suitable, also mineral
conductors but that it may not be so essential provided
insulated copper clad cables without further
that connections are fully checked in the first instance.
precautions. Segregation is not a requirement when
5.13.4 Crimped terminals are quite adequate for the self-contained luminaries are installed, as a failure of
smaller, relatively lightly loaded cables but, otherwise, the supply will only cause them to operate. Precautions
compression sleeves and lugs, provided that the to be taken at the source of supply for an emergency
recommended torques are applied, are unlikely to give lighting system are that cables between the source and
rise to problems during the life of a cable under the a battery charger combination should be a fixed
most arduous circumstances. installation, which precludes plugs and sockets, while
those cables from the battery to a protective device,
5.14 Special Cabling Requirements that is the load circuit cables, must be separated from
5.14.0 Although PVC insulated cables are suitable for each other and not enclosed within metal conduit,
most of the general wiring requirements in domestic, ducting or trunking. Segregation must also be applied
commercial and industrial situations, circumstances between the dc and any ac cables.
may dictate, either through technical necessity or 5.14.3 Fire Alarms and Detection
statutory demands, that further precautions are
necessary to prevent the possibility of danger or to give The requirements in the previous section regarding
increased security, as detailed below. mechanical protection, high fire resistance and
segregation, etc apply. Where high frequency circuits
5.14.1 Lighting
are installed, adequate screening is applied between
The two main areas of concern are related to heat build- the different circuits in order to avoid false alarms.
up in luminaries and surges created by discharge
5.14.4 Power System
lighting. In totally enclosed luminaries, high
temperatures may arise due to the lack of ventilation. 5.14.4.1 Some of the problems arising in the installation
Though luminaires complying with the relevant Indian of power cables are high or low ambient temperatures,
Standards take into account the temperature rise, grouping, thermal insulation, type of protective device
however, during installation of luminaires it should employed and voltage drop considerations. Under
ensured that wiring in proximity to the fittings is normal circumstances, correctly chosen protective
suitable. Discharge-type fittings may entail the use of devices are adequate to deal with disruptions such as
higher current rated cables to avoid unnecessary overloads, short-circuits and earth-faults on low voltage
temperature rises. The effects of high discharge systems but, on high voltage networks, transients may

PART 1 GENERAL AND COMMON ASPECTS 59

SP 30 : 2011

occur which create high stresses on cable insulation Different degrees of hazard exist and, consequently,
and therefore, it may be advisable to install screened these affect the type of electrical installation,
cables which have the effect of grading such stresses particularly with regard to equipment. It is essential,
between cores or between cores and earth. therefore, to ascertain which zone is applicable before
commencing the electrical design, this information
5.14.4.2 The handling and installation of all types of
generally being available from the process plant user.
cable is an important consideration. Some PVC cables,
See also Part 7 of the Code.
for instance, should not be installed during
temperatures below 0°C as flexing will damage the 6 WIRING SYSTEMS
insulation, while high temperatures will soften the
PVC, causing it to strip if pulled into conduit, ducting, 6.0 General
etc. Damage may also be caused to cables by drawing
6.0.1 The following systems are usually adopted for
them into rough-edged enclosures, for example burred
house wiring:
conduits, over stony surfaces or bending them tighter
than the recommended radii. Large armoured cables a) Cleat wiring;
are impressively strong, but even these, when being b) Casing and capping wiring;
drawn into ducts, may be damaged if the correct type c) Metal sheathed wiring (for example lead-
of grip-sleeve (or sock) and hauling equipment is not covered wiring);
used, as too high a torque may stretch the cable cores
d) Cab tyre sheathed (C.T.S.) or tough rubber
or strip off the insulation and sheathing.
sheathed (T.R.S.) wiring;
5.14.4.3 Particularly with the smaller armoured cables, e) PVC sheathed wiring;
if armouring is to be used as the protective conductor, f) All insulated wiring — surface wiring and
the impedance must be checked to ensure that it concealed wiring;
complies with the relevant requirements; otherwise
g) Enclosed wiring system — conduit wiring and
additional conductive material must be incorporated
cable trunking; and
in the protective circuit.
h) Conduit wiring — steel, plastic and flexible.
5.14.5 Control and Instrumentation
A particular type of wiring is selected for a particular
Modern systems for control and instrumentation utilize place on the basis of type of work, place and expenses
electronic means (rather than power circuitry) which involved. Insulated wires are used in all systems of
are more likely to be affected by low voltage systems, wiring. These systems have been named according to
and precautions such as segregation and screening must either constructional details of wires or modes of fixing
be employed. Cables are available to suit all types of these wires on the wall. The voltage grade of wires
system but, as requirements vary between depends on supply voltage of the circuit, that is, the
manufacturers of electronic equipment, advice should voltage grade of wires must not be less than the highest
be sought at an early stage. The increasing use of root mean square or effective value of supply voltage.
multiplex systems and fibre-optics cables simplify In case of house wiring where working voltage
installation work by reducing the number of cores normally does not exceed 250 V, wires of 250 V grade
required for the most complex systems and, in the case can be used.
of the latter, eliminate completely the possibility of
interference from other circuits. 6.0.2 Size of Wires

5.14.6 Hazardous Areas The wire used should have such cross-sectional area that
when the maximum current drawn by the circuit flows
Danger in a hazardous area arises initially from the continuously through it, the voltage drop between main
type of materials being processed rather than from the distribution board and the farthest point of the lighting
electrical installation, but a great degree of circuit does not exceed 3 percent of the supply voltage
responsibility rests upon the designer to ensure that (in a 230 V circuit this drop is 3/100 × 230 = 6.9 ≈ 7.0
the installation does not contribute to the hazard by V). At the same time it should be ensured that the wire
the introduction of flammable materials, high surface is not excessively heated when the maximum current
temperatures, arcs or sparks to the atmosphere. For flows continuously through it. Normally, the wire is not
these reasons, every care must be taken to avoid the excessively heated when the amount of voltage drop
overloading of cables or the inclusion of sheathing remains within the limited value.
materials which easily burn and give off toxic gases.
If the size of a wire in a circuit has to be increased with a
See IS 5572 for classification of hazardous areas and view to reduce the drop of voltage, it may be noted that
IS 5571 for selection of equipment in hazardous areas. the wire will carry as much current as has been determined

60 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

for the circuit to carry. Further, the size of a wire specified excessive heat, should not be used in places where the
for a circuit must be suitable for continuous flow of current temperature may exceed the limit given in Table 5.
which is not less than the current-carrying capacity of the
In cases where the temperature of lamp fittings and
fuse of that circuit. Recommended current ratings for
other accessories are excessively high, cables and
cables are as per IS 3961.
flexible cords which are not specially made to
6.0.3 Protection of Wiring from Damage withstand such high temperatures should not be
brought near these fittings and accessories. Where there
V.I.R.(vulcanized rubber) wire, plastic-insulated wire
is probability of temperature exceeding 60°C, high
with or without braided cotton cover, C.T.S. (or T.R.S.)
temperature resisting cables like flexible cord, specially
wire normally need not be further covered with separate
covered with conditioned asbestos, must be used.
covering. But situations and circumstances have to be
Further, they should be so connected that their
taken into account, and if necessary, the outermost
temperatures do not exceed 85°C. If however, the
insulation has to be protected from probable damage.
flexible cord is connected with a portable heater with
Where there is probability of conduit, duct, casing, etc, which there is not possibility of excessive rise of
becoming hurtful, adequate arrangements have to be temperature, a temperature rise up to 66°C may be
made to protect them. Where metal-sheathed wire or allowed, provided that the insulation of wires should
armoured cable is installed inside concrete or plaster, remain covered with beads or insulating sleeves
there is usually no need for further protection. However, suitable for high temperature, and there is no
depending upon site condition, sometimes additional dependence on rubber insulation of cable for the
arrangements may have to be made. prevention of earth fault of cable conductors or short-
circuit among them. These arrangements are to be
Wires used for lift, hoist (an electrically operated
specially provided for lamps rated 200 W or more and
machine used for lifting goods), etc, must be metal-
for immersion heater.
sheathed [see also IS 4289 (Part 1) and IS 4289 (Part 2].
Where the wiring will pass under the floor, the wire Where a cable with rubber, PVC or polythene insulation
should be so installed that it will not be damaged as a or a flexible cord remains connected with bare
result of coming in contact with the floor or some fitting. conductor or a busbar, the insulation of the cable or
cord should be peeled off and wires should remain bare
Where a cable will enter the iron part of a house or the
for a length of about 15 cm from the point of connection
shed of a factory, every such entry should be provided
even when the temperature of the bare conductor or
with a bush in such a manner that the cable will not
the bus bar is 90°C. But in places where this cannot be
suffer abrasion from rubbing.
done, the current flowing through the bare conductor
Where the sheath of a C.T.S. cable made of rubber or or the busbar should be so reduced as not to allow a
some compound mixed with rubber will be exposed to rise of temperature above 90°C.
direct sunlight, arrangements must be made to cover it
with some special covering. If the sunlight comes 6.1 Cleated Wiring System
through glass panes of windows, it is not a direct sunlight. 6.1.0 Cleat wiring is one of the most economical
Wiring should be done in as dry a place as possible. methods of wiring. The wires remain exposed to view,
6.0.4 Permissible Temperature Rise of Ordinary and these wires are drawn through cleats made of
Insulated Wires and Flexible Cables porcelain or plastic or some other approved material.
Cleat wiring is most suitable for temporary wiring. The
Ordinary insulated cables and flexible cables, which wiring can be completed quickly and the wiring
are not specially manufactured for withstanding materials can be recovered easily while dismantling.

Table 5 Permissible Maximum Temperature of Surrounding Space for Ordinary Insulated Cables
(Clause 6.0.4 )
Sl No. Types of Insulation Maximum Temperature of Surrounding
Space or Space Inside Conduit Pipes
Cable Flexible Cable (°C)
(1) (2) (3) (4)
i) Rubber Rubber 45
ii) PVC PVC 45
iii) Polythene — 45
iv) Oil-soaked Paper — 75
v) Cloth impregnated with varnish — 75
vi) — Rubber or cloth mixed with 80
conditioned asbestos

PART 1 GENERAL AND COMMON ASPECTS 61

SP 30 : 2011

Moreover, additions and alterations as well as e) Wiring should be enclosed in a conduit when
inspection of wiring system can be easily made. Cleat passing through a wall or a floor. The wires
wiring is not recommended for damp places and also should run through a conduit upto a height of
for permanent wiring. After a certain period of 1.5 m level. In case of a metallic conduit, it
installation the wires sag at some places, dust and dirt should be properly earthed. Wooden bushings
collect over them and the whole of the wiring system are to be provided at both ends of the conduit,
may look shabby. otherwise insulation of the wires may be
spoiled when drawn through it.
6.1.1 The wires used are either vulcanized rubber
insulated cables, single-core PVC or polyethylene f) When two wires cross each other, they should
cables, which can be used without further protection. be separated by an insulating bridge piece
Conductors should be visible all throughout a cleat which should maintain a distance of atleast
wiring. 1.3 cm between the wires.
g) The wires should not run near water or gas
6.1.2 The cleats are made in two parts, called base pipes or structural work.
and cap. The base is grooved to receive the wire and
h) A special pattern of cleat may be used where
the cap is placed over it, and the whole of it is placed
conductors pass round corners, so that there
on a wooden plug which is fixed into the wall. The
may be no risk of the conductors touching
cleats are tightened up on wooden plugs by means of
the walls owing to sagging or stretching.
wooden screws which also tighten the grip of the wires
j) Cleats shall be fixed at distances not greater
between two halves of the cleat. The cleats are usually
than 60 cm apart and at regular intervals.
of two types having two or three grooves so as to
receive two or three wires. These cleats are shown in 6.1.4 In temporary installations wiring is often done
Fig. 8. over bobbin or knob insulators in place of cleats.
Whenever the wires pass through a floor or through a
6.1.3 Installation of Cleats
space where some damage is apprehended, they should
a) Wooden plugs are to be properly cemented in be provided with an additional protection of a special
the wall or ceiling, and the distance between strong covering upto a height of 1.5 m above the floor
two adjacent plugs should be such that the level. For this purpose, while the wiring passes through
cleats are not more than 60 cm apart a wall or a partition, it should be taken inside a tube or
horizontally or vertically. a pipe or a conduit made of non-inflammable and non-
hygroscopic material. Porcelain wall-pipe, lead wall-
b) Cleats shall be of such dimensions that for
tube, iron conduit, etc, are the examples of this type of
low voltage installation the distance between
covering. Various components of cleat wiring are
two wires shall not be less than 2.5 cm centre
described below.
to centre for branch lines and 4 cm for sub-
main lines. 6.1.5 Installation of Cleat Wiring
c) In no case two wires shall be placed in the 6.1.5.1 Cleat wiring is installed along the wall below
same groove of the cleats. Also the wires shall the beam. If there are wooden beams in a house, cleats
be laid stretched between the cleats so that may be directly fixed on the beam for drawing wires
they do not touch the wall. up to ceiling roses. But if there is an iron beam, then
d) Joint cut-outs or fuse cut-outs shall not be used space permitting, a piece of wood may be tightly fitted
in this type of wiring. Where joints become on one side of the beam and cleat is fitted on this piece
unavoidable, wooden junction boxes with of wood. This is shown in Fig. 9. If space is not
porcelain connectors inside should be used. sufficient for fixing a piece of wood on the side of the

(i) Cleat with two grooves (ii) Cleat with three grooves

FIG. 8 TYPES OF CLEAT

62 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

iron beam, at first pieces of wood are clamped at 6.1.5.2 Spacing between wires in cleat wiring
intervals to the bottom of the beam and then the cleats
are fixed on these wood pieces. This is shown in Fig. 10. The spacing between wires drawn through the cleats
The spacing between two consecutive pieces of wood depends upon the line voltage, and the type of circuit
should be such that the wiring must not sag due to its as given at Table 6. An example of cleat wiring system
own weight. If wiring is to be taken from one room is given at Fig. 12.
into the next, a hole is drilled into the common wall
and wiring is taken through porcelain or metal tube Table 6 Spacing of Wires in Cleat Wiring
(wall-tube) set into the hole. (Clause 6.1.5.2 )
Sl Voltage Type of Centre to Centre
No. Circuit Distance Between
Two Adjacent Wires
(1) (2) (3) (4)
i) Not exceeding 250 V Branch Not less than 2.5 cm
Sub-main Not less than 4 cm
Main Not less than 7.0 cm
ii) Exceeding 250 V — 10.0 cm distance;
2.5 cm spacing all
around

6.1.5.3 Drawing a wire through wall

FIG. 9 C LEAT IS FIXED ON AN WOOD PIECE WHICH IS Wall tube or pipe is usually set near the ceiling corner
T IGHTLY ATTACHED oN ONE SIDE OF AN IRON BEAM (see Fig. 13). The space within the pipe should be
sufficient to accommodate with comfortable inter-
space the maximum number of wires to be drawn
through it. With too many number of wires more than
one tube may be necessary. In that case pipes are set
together at one place side by side. Such a tube may be
made of porcelain or metal. Among metals lead, iron
or steel is used. The pipe is set inside the wall by means
of cement. If conduit is used, its two rough ends are
properly filed and two bushes made of hard wood or
ebonite are fitted at these ends. This eliminates the
possibility of damage of the insulation of wires when
drawn through the pipes. In case of ac wiring all the
wires must be drawn through the same metal conduit.
FIG. 10 ARRANGEMENT FOR D RAWING WIRES
Where wires are drawn outside from a room, the outer
UNDER IRON BEAM
end of the pipe should be a bit more widened. Also
this end should have a downward bend so that rain
If the wires are to be drawn under the iron beam from
water or water from other sources may not get inside
one cleat to the next, arrangements are provided as
the pipe along the wires.
shown in Fig. 11B using hoop iron or flat iron clamp.
For heavy wiring or for lasting and durable job, two 6.1.5.4 Drawing of wires through floors
wrought iron clamps are used as shown in Fig. 11A.
If the wires are to be drawn through a hole made in the
floor, these must be drawn through a conduit pipe upto
a height of 1.5 m above the floor level, and the lower
end of the conduit should be flush with the ceiling
A below. As usual two ends of the conduit must be fitted
with insulating bushes.

6.2 Casing Wiring

B In this system of wiring narrow grooved planks of hard
wood are fixed on wooden plugs grouted in the wall
instead of cleats and wires drawn along the grooves.
These narrow planks are called wood casing. Usually
two long grooves are made in each casing, although
F IG. 11 USE OF C LAMPS three-grooved casing is also available. The top of the

PART 1 GENERAL AND COMMON ASPECTS 63

SP 30 : 2011

F IG. 12 AN EXAMPLE OF CLEAT WIRING SYSTEM

F IG. 13 U SE OF W ALL-TUBE FOR DRAWING W IRES FROM ONE ROOM

INTO THE O THER THROUGH PARTITION W ALL

64 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

casing is covered by a rectangular strip of wood of the thickness of capping should be about 7 mm. The
same width as that of casing. It is known as capping following precautions need to be taken:
which remains screwed to the casing (see Fig. 14). On
a) Any number of wires of the same polarity may
the surface of the capping a bouble bed is cut to show
be laid in the same groove, but in no case wires
the position of wires so that the screws may not be
of opposite polarities are laid in one groove.
driven through wrong position damaging the insulation
of the cables laid under the capping. Casing wiring is b) Casing should be fixed on dry wall and
generally adopted for low voltage installations such as ceiling. Casing shall not be embedded into
office and residential buildings. This type of wiring is cement or plaster. It shall neither be so set as
not suitable for places exposed to rain or sun or having to get contact with a water pipe, nor it shall
dampness. It should not also be used in places where be laid just below a water pipe. It shall not
acids and alkalies are likely to be present. also be used in a place where moisture
accumulates and drips.
6.2.1 The wood used for casing and capping must be c) A clear space of 3 mm shall be kept between
first class seasoned teak wood or any other hard wood wall or ceiling and the casing. This could be by
free from knots, shakes and saps. The sides should be means of porcelain insulators (spacing insulator)
well varnished both inside and outside with pure shellac or cleats (either upper half or lower half).
varnish. The size of casing and capping depends upon
d) Wooden plugs of approved sizes shall be fixed
the number of wires drawn through the grooves in a
at a distance of 90 cm apart for casing of sizes
particular length of run.
upto 63.5 mm. For higher sizes of casing this
distance shall not exceed 60 cm.
e) While passing through floors or walls, heavy
gauge conduit of approved sizes shall be used.
The conduit should be securely entered into
casing, and it should be extended upto a height
of 1.5 m above floor level.
f) All joints shall be made with good
workmanship as per IS 732.
FIG.14 WOODEN CAPPING AND CASING g) After the wires are laid in the grooves, the
capping is attached to casing by brass screws
6.2.2 The size of wood casing and capping and number in a proper way. The screws must not be so
of cables that may be drawn in one groove of the casing fixed as to pierce through the insulation of
is given in Table 2 of Part 1/Section 20 of this Code. the wires.
6.2.3 Installation of Casing Wiring h) Capping should be fixed on the casing only
by screws. The screw used for fixing the casing
Casing generally used for installation is about 44 mm must be long enough to pass through the
wide and 16 mm in thickness (height). However, for casing, capping, central hole in the bobbin
cables of higher sizes, 80-100 mm wide and insulator or spacing insulator and the wooden
proportionally higher in thickness casings are also in plug in the wall. The capping is fixed on the
use. Casings may be 5.5 m to 6.0 m long, but smaller casing by means of small screws. If the width
lengths are also available. Lengths of about 2.5 m to of the casing is less than 50 mm, a series of
3.0 m are convenient for handling. Very good screws are fixed on the central line of the
workmanship is required to make the job perfect, and capping, and in case the width is more, two
this results in costlier installation. There is also risk of rows (or columns) of screws are fixed on two
fire from wood. sides of the capping. For this reason the width
There are two grooves in each casing. The width of of the strips of wood on both sides of the casing
the strip of wood separating the two grooves should shall not be less than 10 mm. Screws used for
be carefully observed so that it is not less than 13 mm, fixing the capping may be made of brass.
and the portion of wood below each groove shall not j) Provision must be there for easy insertion of
be less than 7 mm in thickness. In case the cable has a cables into the casing. Before fixing the
large cross-section or a number of cables are to be casing, it is necessary to smear its sides and
drawn, the size of casing should increase accordingly. back properly with two coats of shellac
At the time of wiring the cables laid in the grooves are varnish. Further protection is provided by
covered by a very thin and long strip of wood which is painting or varnishing the casing wiring once
as wide as the casing. This is known as capping. The again on all sides after the wiring is finished.

PART 1 GENERAL AND COMMON ASPECTS 65

SP 30 : 2011

k) Spacing insulators may be used at a place

where the casing is passing below an iron
beam. Preferred sizes of casings is given in
Part 1/Section 20.
6.2.4 Joints in Casing Wiring
In casing wiring work starts from the farthest point of 16A Joint of Casing
the load circuit, gradually proceeds towards the main
board and finally ends there.
a) Joint while fixing lamp — The ceiling rose of
the lamp bracket is set on a round wooden
block. This block should have a thickness
(height) of 4 cm with two coats of varnish 16B Joint of a Caping with Another
applied on it. It has a saw-cut on one side in Caping Out in Oblique
such a manner that the tip of the casing closely
fits on to it (see Fig. 15). FIG. 16 JOINTS FOR CASING /CAPPING

screwed to each other. The corners of the

grooves should be flush with each other
so as to prevent any damage to the
insulation of the cables. The general
appearance of the joint where the casing
is taken from one wall to another is at
Fig. 18 or somewhat similar. The shape
of such a joint should be such that the
radius of curvature of the joint should not
be less than 75 mm so that the insulation
of cables is not damaged due to twist etc.
For a corner joints, the piece of casing
can be abtained as shown in Fig. 19.

FIG. 15 JOINT FOR FIXING LAMP

b) Joints for casing/capping — When two pieces

of casing or of capping are to be joined together,
the joint should be completed as shown F IG. 17 J OINT AT A CORNER
in Fig. 16A (Lap Joint). The joint of capping
shall be an oblique one (see Fig. 16B). Care
must be taken to see that cappings are not joined
together at a point where there is already a joint
of casing, and also no screw for fixing the
capping pierces any side wall of the casing.
1. Joint at the corner — The kind of joint
necessary at the corner round is shown
CORNER JOINT
in Fig. 17. The two tips of casings that
are to be joined together are placed on FIG. 18 SHAPE OF JOINT AT A CORNER
the floor, cut at an angle of 45° and finally

66 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

4) Bridge — When it is required to draw

one circuit over another, a small piece of
casing, named ‘bridge’, is used so that
the cable of one circuit does not come in
touch with that of another. At first the
bridge is fixed on the casing and then the
second cable is drawn over it. Where a
FIG. 19 HOW A SMALL P IECE OF CASING IS T-joint is necessary, a one-half bridge is
OBTAINED FOR A C ORNER JOINT fixed there along with a full bridge. This
additional one-half portion is known as
2) Bending on cables — To bend a VIR or ‘half-bridge’. A bridge is also used where
PVC cable, the internal radius of bend cable of one circuit crosses that of another
shall be atleast four times the diameter circuit. Figure 22 depicts ‘half bridge’
of the cable. Where the casing will go and ‘bridge’. The joint of casings at this
from one wall to another on the external point is called ‘cross joint’. T-joint and
side, the joint should be as per Fig. 20. cross-joint of casings are shown in
Fig. 23 and Fig. 24 respectively.

FIG. 22 HALF BRIDGE AND BRIDGE

F IG. 20 J OINT OF C ASING ON THE E XTERNAL

SIDES OF WALLS

3) T-Joint — From a point in the continuous

run of the casing, sometimes connection
is to be taken out for lamp point, fan
point, etc, through a joint of the casing,
known as T-Joint. Where such a joint is
to be adopted, a V-shaped piece of casing FIG. 23 T-JOINT OF CASING WITH B RIDGES
is to be cut off upto the middle of the
casing used in the continuous run.
Later, the tip of another casing to be
joined to it is cut off in the shape of V
and is made flush with the V-groove of
the former casing as shown in Fig. 21.

FIG. 24 CROSS -JOINT OF C ASINGS WITH B RIDGE

6.2.5 Installation of Wiring

a) Leading a cable from one room to another
— When leading from one room to another,
a cable may be drawn either through a casing
or through a wall-tube. If casing is used, the
FIG. 21 T-JOINT hole in the wall must be large enough to leave

PART 1 GENERAL AND COMMON ASPECTS 67

SP 30 : 2011

a clearance of at least 25 mm all around the system is adopted, another extra conduit is to
casing. The purpose of this clearance is to be provided for drawing earth continuity
keep the casing dry through ventilation of air. conductor. At the ceiling of the lower floor all
If a wall-tube is to be used, the two ends of conduits must project atleast 25 mm. At both
the tube project a little from the wall. The ends of a conduit insulating bushes are to be
partition wall between the grooves at the end fitted. In the upper floor conduit will rise up
of casing remaining in contact with the wall- to a height of 1.5 m above the floor level. At
tube must be cut off to the same extent as the this end of the conduit one end of a casing
amount of projection of the tube from the wall should remain properly fitted. For proper
(see Fig. 25). This will keep the wall-tube fitting the lower end of the casing is cut to size
properly fitted with the casing. But in case as shown in Fig. 26. If necessary, the spacing
the diameter of the tube is larger than the of the casing from the wall may be increased
height of the casing or where more than one by using a half bridge. Besides, every piece of
wall-tubes are used, it will not be possible to conduit should remain well-earthed.
fix the capping over the casing. In such cases,
the height of the casing is increased with the
help of a half bridge.
For continuous earthing system a single
galvanized iron wire is drawn continuously
outside the casing along with the cables and
finally earthed. This is called ‘Earth continuity
conductor’. The outer metallic covers of fan
regulator iron-clad distribution box, earth
terminal of the wall socket etc, remain
connected with this wire. Usually a separate
wall-tube is used for leading earth continuity
conductor through the wall. For this work a
half bridge on the casing near the wall is
indispensable.

F IG. 26 LEADING OF C ABLE THROUGH THE FLOOR

c) Utility of looping-in-system — Like cleat

wiring, casing wiring can also be done by
means of connectors inside junction boxes as
well as by looping-in-system. Loop wiring has
many advantages. No joint is necessary and
the insulation resistance is better retained by
FIG. 25 CUTTING OFF A PORTION OF CASING IN O RDER this system than any other system of wiring.
TO F IT IT WITH A W ALL - TUBE The reason for no joint is that, one piece of
cable is joined with another piece only
There should be three sockets instead of two through brass screws of switches and ceiling
in every wall socket and three pins instead of roses. What is meant by jointing of cables does
two with every wall plug. Also the flexible not at all happen in this system. Its main
cables used in this system must have three disadvantage, however, is that the length of
lengths of insulated wires instead of two. cable required for wiring is somewhat more.
b) Leading a cable through the floor — In the 6.3 Metal-sheathed Wiring
casing wiring if cables are to be drawn from a
lower floor to a upper floor, a piece of conduit 6.3.1 The wiring system completed with wires having
is pushed through a hole made in the floor. metallic (for example lead) covering over rubber
The sizes of wires of all the circuits to be drawn insulation is known as ‘metal-sheathed’ or ‘lead-
from lower to upper floor are calculated at first, covered’ wiring. Here the conductors are rubber
and then the size and number of conduits are insulated and covered with an outer sheath of lead alloy
determined accordingly. If continuous earthing containing about 95 percent lead which provides

68 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

protection against mechanical injury. Lead sheath made of PVC or bakelite in place of porcelain.
should be properly earthed. But as an insulator the use of porcelain is
better than PVC or bakelite.
6.3.2 The cables may remain exposed to sun or rain,
but it should not be used where acids and alkalies are b) Thimbles — Thimble is made of porcelain or
likely to be present. The cables are laid on wooden plastic and looks like a cap as shown in
battens and remain fixed on it by means of brass or Fig. 27. A thimble is threaded inside and it
aluminium link clips spaced at intervals not exceeding becomes pointed towards the upper end.
10 cm horizontally and 15 cm vertically. The thickness Where two or more wires are to be connected
of the batten should not be less than 10 mm. together, about 6.4 mm of end insulation of
each wire is taken off and all the ends are then
6.3.3 Installation of Metal Sheath twisted together. The combination is then put
a) Sharp bends should be avoided. A round bend inside a thimble which is turned like a screw
of radius not less than 10 cm may be adopted driver. As a result the thimble pulls the
for a change of direction. combination of twisted ends in by means of
threads and thus holds it tightly.
b) Supporting clips used for the cables must not
set up any chemical reaction with the metal
sheath.
c) Lead sheath must be electrically continuous
and properly earthed. For maintaining
electrical continuity, bonding of sheaths is
necessary at joint-boxes and switch boards.
d) When passing through a floor or crossing a
wall, the cable must be drawn through
conduits. Conduits should go up to a height
of 1.5 m above the floor level. Both ends of
the conduit should be fitted with ebonite,
plastic or hard rubber bushings in order to
protect metal sheath and rubber insulation of
cables from being damaged. FIG. 27 WIRES C ONNECTED WITH THIMBLE

6.3.4 Joints for Metal Sheathed Wiring c) T-Joint — Where T-connection is taken for a
a) Connectors — Some special types of point, connectors used there and the mode of
connector are used for jointing wires or for a connection are shown in Fig. 28. A small box,
T-joint to lead a cable to switch board etc. called ‘joint-box’, is used to cover the joint.
These types of connector are more or less the The box may be made of metal or wood. The
same for almost all types of wiring. As per box shall prevent access of insects, dust or
requirement two, three or four holes are lime-water (during white washing). The
provided in small pieces of porcelain or advantage of a metal box is that the speciality
plastic, and inside those holes there are of a lead-sheathed wiring to maintain
connectors in the form of brass tubes. At the electrical continuity of metal sheath of the
two ends of the connector there are brass cables everywhere beginning from the main
screws for fixing the wires. The porcelain or board upto the farthest point of the load circuit
plastic portion acts as insulators. When only is automatically retained in it, whereas in case
one piece of wire is to be joined with another of a wooden box it is not so. If a wooden box
piece, the smallest size connector with a single is to be used, an additional bonding clamp
piece of brass tube is used. For jointing twin- must be provided in the box and the lead
wire (2-core) from a single cable, a connector sheaths of all the cables taken in for
with two pieces of brass tubes is needed. In connection shall remain fixed with this clamp
place of junction cut-outs connector is used so that electrical continuity is established
even in cleat and casing wirings. There are among them. If metal sheath of the cable is to
holes on the top of all connectors with screws be used as an earth continuity conductor, then
to connect wires with the connector (the left in case of non-metal box, a strip of metal is to
hand one shows single-joint connector). be used for maintaining continuity of metal
sheath, and the resistance of such metal strip
Sometimes the outer cover of a connector is
shall be negligible in comparison to that of

PART 1 GENERAL AND COMMON ASPECTS 69

SP 30 : 2011

the largest size of cable coming into the box cables having a single earth wire provided
(see Fig. 29). Joint-box must not be installed along with insulated copper wire or wires
in a damp place due to possibility of leakage within the same lead sheath can be made.
of current in the joint-box installed in a damp While jointing two or more wires, a separate
place. Arrangement for maintaining connector should also joint all related earth
continuity between wires near a ceiling rose wires. If the outer cover and inner lever is
is shown in Fig. 30. In this way, maintaining made of metal, the switch should also be
continuity and electrical connections among earthed as per rule. In such cases lead-
lead sheaths, finally the sheath is connected sheathed cables with earth wire inside is used.
to earth at the main distribution board. If this Connection of earth wire of a circuit with earth
is not done, the insulation of the cable gets in the distribution board is shown in Fig. 31.
damaged in a very short time in metal- Descriptions of different methods and systems
sheathed wiring. If two or more lead-covered of wiring (for example cleat or casing wiring)
wires are laid side by side and one wire has are also applicable to metal-sheathed system.
leakage and its sheath is not well-bonded, Looping-in-system of wiring may also be
there will be sparking between them, causing adopted with lead-sheathed cables where
damage to the cable. In metal-sheathed necessary.
wiring, electrical continuity of sheath must
be maintained, and this sheath must not only
be well-earthed, but the earth connection must
also be well-maintained.

F IG. 30 M AINTENANCE OF CONTINUITY

OF W IRES N EAR A C EILING R OSE

FIG. 28 HOW WIRES ARE DRAWN AND HOW THESE ARE

CONNECTED IN A T-JOINT

FIG. 29 U SE OF BONDING METAL STRIP IN F IG. 31 EARTH CONTINUITY BAR AND ARRANGEMENT
A W OODEN J OINT - BOX FOR C ONNECTION OF E ARTH W IRES

d) Lead-sheathed cables with earth wire — OF D IFFERENT C IRCUITS

Continuous earthing system ensures safety of

circuits. According to this system metallic 6.3.5 Installation of Wiring
covers of table fan, electric iron, electric a) Drawing of Cables through the Floor — The
heater, table lamp etc, are to be earthed. In lead-sheathed cable should be drawn through
case of cleat or casing wiring a single G.I. a heavy gauze conduit pipe when the cable is
wire is to be drawn as the earth wire along drawn from lower floor to upper floor. The
with the wiring throughout the house. Use of conduit length shall remain extended upto a

70 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

height of 1.5 m above the floor level in the wider than the cable is screwed to these plugs. Tinned
upper floor, while the lower end of the conduit brass or aluminium link clips are then fixed on this
shall remain flush with the ceiling of the lower batten with the help of iron pins at intervals not
floor. Both ends of the conduit should be fitted exceeding 10 cm horizontally and 15 cm vertically.
with bushes made of wood or ebonite or some For the sake of convenience of work, sometimes clips
other insulating material. are fixed on the batten at equal intervals in a straight
b) Drawing of cables through partition wall line first and then the batten is screwed to the wooden
between two adjacent rooms — Like other plugs. Finally the cable is laid neatly on the clips which
systems of wiring metal-sheathed cable are then folded. In some cases a batten with clipped
should also be drawn through porcelain wall- cable is screwed to the wooden plugs. A single clip
tube or steel conduit or hard PVC conduit as may be used to fix upto two twin-core, 0.019 4 cm2
straight as possible. cables. If the cross-section of the cable is greater than
c) Concealed wiring through the wall — Lead- this, a single clip may hold only one cable. Where there
sheathed cable cannot be laid direct under are fumes from acids etc, clips are made of lead strips
plaster. For concealed wiring it should be cut out from then lead sheets and iron pins are already
either drawn through conduit pipe or by some painted with acid-proof paint. This prevents the iron
other means after which the whole thing is pins being rusted when in contact with acid fumes.
covered with plaster. For a neat and clean look of C.T.S. wiring or for saving
it from mechanical injury, the wiring may be covered
6.4 Cab-Tyre Sheathed (C.T.S.) or Tough Rubber- by wooden channeling or any other suitable cover. Also
Sheathed (T.R.S.) Wiring C.T.S. cables may be drawn through conduit pipes, if
necessary. During installation of C.T.S. wiring the
6.4.0 This type of wiring is adopted only for low voltage
following points are to be kept in mind:
circuits. C.T.S. wiring is used in open space in place
of drawing bare conductors. This system of wiring is a) C.T.S. cables should be laid on well seasoned,
very useful in workshops or places where fumes are well varnished and perfectly straight hard
generated continuously from acids etc, which may wood of thickness 10 mm and width sufficient
damage the insulation of ordinary cables or wear out enough to carry the required number of
conduits etc, or corrode the lead sheath of cables. No cables.
other insulation is applied on the conductor except hard b) Wooden batten should remain fixed to rawl
rubber sheath, and in the wiring system cable may not or phil plugs grouted in the wall or ceiling by
be drawn through conduit, casing etc. The advantages means of wood screws at an interval not
of this system is that wiring can be done very easily exceeding 75 cm.
and quickly. As a result wiring is economical on the c) C.T.S. cables shall never be turned at right
whole, although the cable may cost more. C.T.S. wiring angles. Wherever there is a bend, the radius
can be used with a variety of fittings and also in case of curvature shall not be less than six times
of concealed wiring. The T.R.S. (C.T.S.) system has the outer diameter of the cable. While passing
however, now become almost obsolete; as it has been through wall or floor, cable must be drawn
replaced by the PVC insulated and sheathed system. through conduit pipes. Metal conduit should
6.4.1 Installation of C.T.S. Wiring be properly earthed.
d) C.T.S. cables shall never be buried under
When the sheath of C.T.S. cable made of rubber or
plaster. These should be drawn through
some other compound mixed with rubber remains
conduit or wooden channeling.
exposed to direct sunlight, arrangement must be
e) While taking through a floor, the cable shall
provided to cover it up properly. It should, however,
be drawn through a heavy conduit. The two
be noted that when sunlight comes through the glass
ends of the conduit should be fitted with
of a window, it is not regarded as direct sunlight. Where
bushes made of wood or rubber or any other
weather proof or lead-sheathed cable is to be drawn
suitable insulating material. The bottom of the
with the help of catenary wire, either the cable should
conduit should be flush with the ceiling of
be taken by binding it continuously with the catenary
the lower floor, while its top must rise upto a
wire or it should remain fixed with catenary wire by
height of 1.5 m above the floor level of the
means of link clips at intervals of about 15 cm. C.T.S.
upper floor. Porcelain tubes may also be used
cable is drawn over the wall in the same way as lead-
when the cables are drawn through a wall.
sheathed cable. At first wooden plugs are grouted or
cemented in the wall at intervals of about 75 cm and
polished thin batten of teak wood as wide as or a little

PART 1 GENERAL AND COMMON ASPECTS 71

SP 30 : 2011

6.5 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Sheathed Wiring angle but shall be rounded off at the corners
to a radius not less than six times the overall
6.5.0 PVC sheathed cable is used extensively in house
diameter of the cable.
wiring. This cable is available in single-core, twin-core
or three-core, and its cost is comparatively less than b) Keeping cables away from pipework —
that of other wires. PVC cable may be used for wiring Insulated cables must not be allowed to come
in open space in place of bare conductor or C.T.S. cable. into direct contact with gas pipes or non-
The rubber sheath of C.T.S. cable deteriorates quickly earthed metal work, and very special care
in places where there is oil, but PVC insulation is highly must be exercised to ensure they are kept away
suitable in such places. PVC insulation can withstand from hot water pipes.
acid, alkali, ozone and also direct sunlight. Owing to c) Precautions for cables passing through walls,
gaps in the sheath it does not dry up, harden and crack ceiling, etc — Where the cables pass through
like rubber. But at higher temperatures PVC softens walls, floors, ceilings, partitions, etc, the holes
because of which it should not be used at places where shall be made good with incombustible
it is expected to get excessively heated. Also, PVC material to prevent the spread of fire. It is
insulation becomes brittle in very cold atmosphere advisable to provide a short length of pipe or
therefore it should not be used in places where there is sleeving suitable bushed at these positions and
ice or snow fall. Wiring systems of PVC wire is similar the space left inside the sleeve should be
to that of C.T.S. wiring. However, as the PVC wire is plugged with incombustible material. Where
comparatively lighter than C.T.S. wire, link clips are the cables pass through holes in structural
to be fixed on wooden battens at comparatively closer steelwork, the holes must be bushed so as to
intervals. The distance between two adjacent link clips prevent abrasion of the cable. Where run
should be 6 cm horizontally and 7.5 cm vertically. For under wood floors, the cables should be fixed
conduit wiring as well as for concealed wiring, PVC to the side of the joists, and if across joists,
cables are drawn through conduit pipes in place of should be threaded through holes drilled
V.I.R. wires. The first all-insulated wiring system through the joists in such a position as to avoid
consisted of vulcanized insulated conductors with a floorboard nails and screws. In any case,
tough cables sheath (T.R.S.). When first introduced the screwed ‘traps’ should be left over all joint
system was known as “cab-type” system (C.T.S.). The boxes and other positions where access may
T.R.S. (C.T.S.) system has now become almost be necessary.
obsolete; as it has been replaced by the PVC insulated d) Fixing cables by suspension on catenary wires
and sheathed system. PVC and similar sheathed cables — Cables can be taken across a lofty building,
if exposed to direct sunlight shall be of a type resistant or outside between buildings, if protected
to damage by ultraviolet light. PVC cable should not against direct sunlight by suspending them on
be exposed to contact with oil, creosote and similar catenary wires. Galvanized steel wires should
hydrocarbons, or should be of a type capable of be strained tight and the cables clipped to the
withstanding such exposure. The cables may be wire with wiring clips. Alternatively, they can
installed without further protection, except where be suspended from the wire with ‘rawhide’
exposed to mechanical damage, in which case they hangers; this provides better insulation
must be suitably protected. The all-insulated wiring although not so neat as the former method.
system is used extensively for lighting and socket The catenary wire must be bonded to earth.
installation in small dwellings, and is one of the most e) Multicore cables have cores of distinctive
economical methods of wiring for this type of work. colours, the red should be connected to phase
See IS 14772 for joint boxes and IS 371 for ceiling terminals, the black to neutral or common
roses. An alternative method for wiring with PVC return and the protective conductor to the
sheathed cables for lighting is to use 2-core and circuit earth terminal. Clips are much neater than
protective conductor cables with 3 plate ceiling roses saddles, but when more than two cables are
instead of joint boxes. At the positions of joint boxes, run together it is generally best to use large
switches, sockets and luminaries the sheathing must saddles. If a number of cables have to be run
terminate inside the box or enclosure, or could be partly together on concrete or otherwise where the
enclosed by the building structure if constructed of fixings are difficult to obtain, it is advisable
combustible material. to fix a wood batten and then to clip or saddle
6.5.1 Installation of PVC Wiring the cables to the batten. Cable runs should be
planned so as to avoid cables having to cross
a) Bends in Wiring — The wiring shall not in one another, and additional saddles should be
any circumstances be bent so as to form a right provided where there is change in directions.

72 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

PVC sheathed cables should not be used for or into a block or recess lined with incombustible
any systems where the normal voltage exceed materials, or into a plastic patress. For vertical-run
1 000 V. cables which are installed in accessible positions and
f) Wiring to socket outlets — When PVC cables unlikely to be disturbed, support shall be provided at
is used for wiring to socket outlets of other the top of the cable, and then at intervals of not less
outlets demanding an earth connection, it is than 5 m. For horizontal runs the cables may rest with-
usual to provide 2-core and circuit protective out fixing in positions which are in accessible and are
conductor cables. These consist of two not likely to be disturbed, provided that the surface is
insulated conductors and one uninsulated dry, reasonably smooth and free from sharp edges. For
conductor, the whole being enclosed in the cables installed in accessible portions the fixing space
PVC sheathing. The protective conductor for cable is 100 to 250 mm for horizontal runs and
shall comply with IS 3043. When wiring to 150 to 400 mm for vertical runs.
16-amps standard domestic sockets, the cable Link clips for electrical wiring shall be used for fixing
will have to be taken into standard box which the cables installed in accessible positions. Link clips
is designed for these sockets and which shall be so arranged that one single clip shall not hold
includes an earth terminal. more than two twin-core T.R.S. or PVC-sheathed
6.6 All-Insulated Wiring cables up to 1.5 mm2 above which single clips shall
hold a single twin-core cable. The clips shall be fixed
The first all-insulated wiring system consisted of on varnished wood battens with any rust resisting pins
vulcanized insulated conductors with a tough cables or screws. For the wiring and runs of mains exposed to
sheath (T.R.S.). The system was initially know as “cab- heat and rain, clip specially made for outdoor use from
type” system (C.T.S.). The T.R.S. (C.T.S.) system has a durable metal, resistant to weather and atmospheric
now become almost obsolete; as it has been replaced corrosion shall be used (see IS 2412 for link clips).
by the PVC insulated and sheathed system. The PVC
system has many advantages over the old T.R.S. system 6.6.2 Concealed Wiring
because it is not so inflammable, and will stand up PVC wiring, concealed in ceiling partition, is an
better to direct sunlight and chemical action. The cables effective method of providing a satisfactory installation
may be installed without further protection, except where appearance is of prime importance as in
where exposed to mechanical damage, when they must domestic, display or office situations. Where it is
be suitably protected. This all-insulated wiring system impractical to run concealed wiring at these locations,
is used extensively for lighting and socket installation special precautions are necessary, appropriate
in small dwellings, and is probably the most protection must be provided. This may take the form
economical method of wiring for this type of work. It of a cable incorporating an earthed metal sheath, or by
is customary to use 2 and 3-core cables with an integral enclosing the cables in earthed metallic conduit,
protective or 4-terminal ceiling roses for making the trunking or ducting. PVC sheathed cables shall not be
necessary connections. buried direct in cement or plaster. The disadvantage is
An alternative method for wiring with PVC sheathed that cables once buried in cement or plaster cannot be
cables for lighting is to use 2-core and CPC cables withdrawn should any defect occur. It is better to
with 3 plate ceiling roses instead of joint boxes. provide a plastic conduit to the switch or outlet
Terminations of joints in these cables must be enclosed positions, so that the PVC cables can be drawn into
in non-ignitable material, such as a box complying with the conduit, and withdrawn should the need arise. Such
IS 14772. an arrangement must also comply with the location
NOTE — An accessory is a device, other than current using
constraints. Whichever construction is employed, it is
equipment associated with such equipment or with the wiring necessary to provide a box at all light, switch and socket
of installation. outlet position. The boxes must be provided with
At the positions of joint boxes, switches, sockets and earthing terminals to which the protective conductor
luminaries the sheathing must terminate inside the box in the cable must be connected. If the protective
or enclosure, or could be partly enclosed by the conductor is a bare wire in multicore cable, a green/
building structure if constructed of combustible yellow sheath must be applied where the cable enters
material. the box.

6.6.1 Surface Wiring 6.7 Enclosed Wiring System

When cables are run on the surface, a box is not 6.7.0 Many of the original installations consisted of
necessary at outlet positions providing the outer single-core cable supported in cleats. With increasing
sheathing is brought into the accessory or luminaries, awareness of the possibility of hazard, the necessity

PART 1 GENERAL AND COMMON ASPECTS 73

SP 30 : 2011

for greater protection created the demand for shall be preferably according to Table 7 and points of
enclosures such as conduit and, later, trunking of which support in accordance with Table 8. Classification
there are many different types now available to suit coding of conduit systems is given at Annex B.
different situations.
6.7.1.1 Types of Conduits
6.7.1 Conduit Wiring Systems
a) Steel conduit system — IS 9537 (Part 2)
6.7.1.0 Wiring done by insulated wires drawn through specifies the requirement of rigid steel
iron or steel pipes is known as conduit wiring. Conduit conduits. The screwed steel conduit system
systems, when assembled in accordance with the is used extensively for permanent wiring
manufacturer’s instructions, shall have adequate installations, especially for modern
resistance to external influences according to the commercial and industrial buildings (see
classification declared by the manufacturers with a Fig. 32). Its advantages are that it affords the
minimum requirement of IP 30. A conduit system conductors good mechanical protection,
which conforms to IS 14930 (Part 1) is deemed safe permits easy rewiring when necessary and
for use. To ensure safety in electrical installations, use minimizes fire risks. The disadvantages are
of metallic conduits as earth continuity conductor is that it is expensive compared with other
not permitted. systems, is difficult to install under wood
NOTES
floors in houses and flats, and is liable to
1 Certain conduit systems may also be suitable for use in corrosion when subjected to acid, alkali and
hazardous atmosphere. Regard should be taken for the extra other fumes. Moreover, under certain
requirement necessary for equipment to be installed in such conditions, moisture due to condensation may
condition. form inside the conduit. Solid drawn conduit
2 Earthing conductors may or may not be insulated. Earthing is much more expensive than welded conduit,
conductors may or may not be insulated if laid outside, but
invariably be insulated. due to which its use is generally restricted to
gas-tight and explosion-proof installation
See IS 14930 (Part 2) for requirements and tests for work. Welded screwed conduit is, therefore,
conduit systems buried underground, including generally used for most installation.
conduits and conduit fittings for the protection and
management of insulated conductors and/or cables in b) Copper conduit — At some places, copper
electrical installations in communication systems and conduit is used as it resists corrosion and
IS 9537 (various parts) for conduits. Conduit diameters provides excellent continuity. However, the

Table 7 Outside Diameters — Preferred Values

( Clause 6.7.1.0 )
Sl No. Nominal Size Outside Diameter Tolerance Inside Diameter, Min
mm mm Mm
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
i) 25 25 +0.5 18
ii) 32 32 +0.6 24
iii) 40 40 +0.8 30
iv) 50 50 +1.0 37
v) 63 63 +1.2 47
vi) 75 75 +1.4 56
vii) 90 90 +1.7 67
viii) 110 110 +2.0 82
ix) 120 120 +2.2 90
x) 125 125 +2.3 94
xi) 140 140 +2.6 106
xii) 160 160 +2.9 120
xiii) 180 180 +3.3 135
xiv) 200 200 +3.6 150
xv) 225 225 +4.1 170
xvi) 250 250 +4.5 188
NOTES
1 Tolerance on outside diameters are given as follows:
a) Outside diameter specified are nominal dimensions.
b) Outside diameter maximum is nominal outside diameter + (0.018 × nominal outside diameter values) rounded off to + 0.1 mm.
c) Minimum inside diameter is nominal outside diameter divided by 1.33.
2 Any other sizes other than those mentioned in Table 7 shall be as per the agreement between the buyer and the seller.

74 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

use is limited because the cost could prove to weak, greatly affected by changes in
be prohibitive. Copper conduit can be screwed temperature, did not retain sets, maintained
in the same manner as steel conduit although combustion (and emitted toxic fumes) and
the screwing of copper is more difficult than tended to separate at joints. These problems
mild steel. Connections are generally made have now been overcome and, in some
by soldering. Bronze junction boxes should respects, plastics conduits have many
preferably be used. advantages over steel. It is much lighter and,
therefore, easier to handle and install, provides
a smoother surface for the drawing of the
cables, is not subject to corrosion and rusting,
and the super high impact materials now used
make it suitable for most applications.
d) Flexible conduit — Several different types of
flexible conduit are available, ranging from
convoluted plastics to reinforced corrugated
steel covered both internally and externally
with self-extinguishing plastics, the latter
being the most appropriate for general use. It
is particularly useful for final connections to
machinery subject to vibration in place of the
32A With Smooth Bore Bush and Coupling alternative methods of flexible cable or coiled
mineral insulated copper cables (MICCs).
Flexible conduit shall conform to relevant
Indian Standard.
6.7.1.2 Cables in conduits
The types of cables which may be installed in conduits
are PVC single-core insulated, butyl or silicone rubber
insulated, with copper or aluminium conductors. PVC
insulated and sheathed cables are sometimes installed
in conduits when the extra insulation and protection is
desirable. Under no circumstances may ordinary
flexible cords be drawn into conduit.
32B With Brass Ring Bush and Back Nut
6.7.1.3 Selection of correct size of conduit
FIG. 32 METHODS OF FIXING SCREWED CONDUIT AT
CLEARANCE ENTRIES IN METAL CASING OR BOXES After selection of the correct size of cables for a given
electrical load is made, the selection of the appropriate
c) PVC conduit — When first introduced, such size of conduit to accommodate these cables is to be
conduits had many disadvantages compared done. The number of cables which may be drawn into
to steel — the material was mechanically any conduit must be such that it allows easy drawing

Table 8 Spacing of Supports for Conduits

(Clause 6.7.1.0)
Sl No. Nominal Size of Maximum Distance between Supports
Conduit
mm Rigid Metal Rigid Insulation Pliable

Horizontal Vertical Horizontal Vertical Horizontal Vertical

m m m m m m
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)
i) Not exceeding 16 0.75 1.0 0.75 1.0 0.3 0.5
ii) Exceeding 16 and not 1.75 2.0 1.5 1.75 0.4 0.6
exceeding 25
iii) Exceeding 25 and not 2.0 2.25 1.75 2.0 0.6 0.8
exceeding 40
iv) Exceeding 40 2.25 2.5 2.0 2.0 0.8 1.0
NOTE — A flexible conduit is not normally required to be supported in its run.

PART 1 GENERAL AND COMMON ASPECTS 75

SP 30 : 2011

in, and in no circumstances may it be in excess of the should be used. Circular boxes are not suitable
maximum given in Part 1/Section 20 of this Code. For for conduits larger than 32 mm, and for these
larger cables it is preferable to install cables in trunking. larger sizes rectangular boxes should be used
As the number of cables or circuits in a given conduit to suit the size of cables to be installed. The
or trunking increase, the current-carrying capacities inspection sleeve is a very useful draw-in
of the cables decrease. Therefore it is advisable not to fitting, because its length permits the easy
increase the size of the conduit or trunking in order to drawing in of cables and its restricted width
accommodate more cables, but to use two or more enable conduits to be run in close proximity
conduits. The conduit installation must be complete without the need to ‘set’ the conduits at draw-
before cables are drawn in. This is to ensure that in points. Where two or more conduits run in
subsequent wiring can be carried out just as readily as parallel, it is a good practice to provide at
the original. Also the installation must be arranged so draw-in points an adaptable box which
that cables are not drawn round more than two rigid- embraces all of the conduits. This presents a
angle bends. This conduit is complete and ready for much better appearance than providing
wiring, and will be concealed when the wall panels separate draw-in boxes and has the advantage
are fitted. of providing junctions in the conduit system
which might prove useful if alterations have
6.7.1.4 Conduit system
to be made at a later date. Where two or more
There are two distinct conduit systems, the surface conduits are run in parallel, it is good practice
system, and the concealed system. to embrace all conduits with an adaptable box
as shown in Fig. 35. An advantage of the
6.7.1.4.1 Surface system
conduit system is that the cables can be
a) Choice of runs — The most suitable ‘run’ renewed or altered easily at any time. It is,
should be chosen for the conduits. When there therefore, necessary that all draw-in boxes
are several conduits running in parallel, they should be readily accessible, and subsequently
must be arranged to avoid crossing at the point nothing should be fixed over or in front of
where they take different directions. The them so as to render them inaccessible. The
routes should be chosen so as to keep the need for the conduit system to be complete
conduits as straight as possible, only deviating for each circuit, before cables are drawn in,
if the fixings are not good. The ‘runs’ should is to ensure that subsequent wring can be
also be kept away from gas and water pipes carried out just as readily as the original; it
and obstructions which might prove difficult prevents cables becoming damaged where
to negotiate. Locations where they might they protrude from sharp ends of conduit, and
become exposed to dampness or other adverse avoids the possibility of drawing the conduit
conditions should be avoided. over the cables during the course of erection.
b) Conduit fittings — Bends, inspection tees and c) Radius of conduit bends — Facilities such as
elbows, made in accordance with relevant draw-in boxes, must be provided so that cables
Indian Standards may be used. However, are not drawn round more than two right-angle
bends can be made by setting the conduit, and bends or their equivalent. The radius of bends
where there are several conduits running in must not be less than the standard normal bend
parallel which change direction, it is necessary (see also Fig. 36 and Table 9).
for these bends to be made so that the conduits
follow each other symmetrically which is not d) Methods of fixing conduit — There are several
possible if manufactured bends are used. The methods of fixing conduit, and the one chosen
use of inspection elbows and tees is not good generally depends upon what the conduit has
practice, as there is insufficient room for to be fixed to.
drawing in cables and, in addition, the 1) Conduit clips — Conduit clips take the
installation presents a shoddy appearance. form a half saddle, and have only one
Round boxes in accordance with relevant fixing lug. The reason for using clips
Indian Standards may, instead be used. These instead of saddles is to save an additional
boxes have a much better appearance, provide fixing screw. They are not satisfactory if
plenty of room for drawing in cables, and can the conduit is subjected to any strain.
accommodate some slack cable which should
2) Ordinary saddles — Ordinary saddles
be stowed in all draw-in points. For conduits
provide a very secure fixing (see Fig. 37).
up to 25 mm diameter, the small circular boxes
They should be fixed by means of two

76 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

FIG. 33 B ENDING OF C ONDUIT

F IG. 34 FITTINGS OF CONDUITS

NOTE — Where two or more conduits are run in parallel it is good practice to embrace all conduits with an adaptable box.

FIG. 35 CONDUITS RUN IN PARALLEL

NOTE — Cable must not be drawn round more than two right angle bends or their equivalent. The four bends in the lower diagram are
each 45° making a total of 180° in all.

F IG. 36 DRAWING OF C ABLES IN BENDS

PART 1 GENERAL AND COMMON ASPECTS 77

SP 30 : 2011

Table 9 Minimum Internal Radii of Bends in Cables for Fixed Wiring

[Clause 6.7.1.4.1 (c)]
Sl No. Insulation Finish Overall Diameter Factor to be Applied to
Overall Diameter1) of Cable
to Determine Minimum
Internal Radius of Bend
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
i) XLPE, PVC or rubber (circular, or Non-armoured Not exceeding 10 mm 3(2)2)
circular stranded copper or aluminium Not exceeding 25 mm 4(3) 2)
conductors) Exceeding 25 mm 6
Armoured Any 6
ii) XLPE, PVC or rubber (solid aluminium Armoured or non-armoured Any
or shaped copper conductors) 8
iii) Mineral Copper of aluminium sheath 6
with or without PVC overing

1)
For flat cables the factor is to be applied to the major axis.
2)
The figure in brackets relates to single-core circular conductors of stranded construction installed in conduit, ducting or trunking.

screws and should be spaced not more making intimate contact with damp
than 1.3 m apart. Nails must not be used plaster and cement walls and ceilings
for fixing (see Fig. 37). The conduit which would result in corrosion of the
boxes to which luminaries are to be fixed conduit and discoloration of the
should be drilled at the back and fixed, decorations. When conduit is fixed to
otherwise a saddle should be provided concrete a high percentage of the
close to each side of the box (see Fig. 38). installation time is spent in plugging for
fixing, and the use of the spacer-bar
saddle which has only a one-hole fixing
in its centre has an advantage over the
ordinary saddle. Some types of spacer bar
saddles are provided with saddles having
slots instead of holes. The idea is that the
small fixing screws need only be loosened
to enable the saddle to be removed,
slipped over the conduit and replaced (see
Fig. 31 and 40). This advantage is offset
F IG. 37 SPACING S ADDLES WITH OVAL HOLES
by the fact that when the saddle is fixed
under tension there is tendency for it to
slip sideways clear of its fixing screws,
and there is always a risk of this
happening during the life of the
installation if a screw should be come
slightly loose. For this reason holes rather
than slots are generally more satisfactory
in these saddles. When selecting the larger
sizes of spacer-bar saddles it is important
to make sure that the slotted hole which
F IG. 38 S ADDLE accommodates the counter-sunk fixing
screw is properly proportioned.
3) Spacer bar saddles — Spacer bar saddles 4) Distance saddles — These are designed
are ordinary saddles mounted on a to space conduits approximately 10 mm
spacing plate. This spacing plate is from the wall or ceiling. Distance saddles
approximately the same thickness as the are generally made of malleable cast iron.
sockets and other conduit fittings and, They are much more substantial than other
therefore, serves to keep the conduit types of saddles, and as they space the
straight where it leaves these fittings as conduit from the fixing surface they
well as to prevent the conduit from provide better protection against

78 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

corrosion. The use of this type of saddle on devices and if it is intended to run
eliminates the possibility of dust and dirt number of conduits on a particular route
collecting behind and near the top of the and standard clips are not suitable, it may
conduit where it is generally inaccessible. be advisable to make these to suit site
For this reason distance saddles are usually conditions, multiple girder clips can be
specified for hospitals, kitchens, and other made to take a number of conduits run in
situation where dust traps must be avoided. parallel. As an alternative to girder clips,
5) Multiple saddles — Where two or more multiple saddles can be welded to
conduits follow the same route it is steelwork, or the steelwork could be
generally an advantage to use multiple drilled in case there is no adverse effect
saddles as it saves a considerable amount on its structural properties.
of fixing time because only two screws are When conduits are suspended across
required, and also all conduits are properly trusses or steel work there is a possibility
and evenly spaced (see Fig. 39 and 42). of sagging, especially if luminaries are
suspended from the conduit between the
trusses. These conduits should either be
of sufficient size to prevent sagging, or
be supported between the trusses. They
can sometimes be supported by iron rods
from the roof above (see Fig. 42 and 43).
If the trusses are spaced 3 mm or more
F IG. 39 MULTIPLE SADDLE apart it is not very satisfactory to attempt
to run any conduit across them, unless
there is additional means of support. It is
far better to take the extra trouble and run
the conduit at roof level where a firm
fixing may be found.

FIG. 40 INSTALLATION OF CONDUIT

WITH S PACING S ADDLE

F IG. 41 MULTIPLE SADDLE

6) Girder clips — Where conduits are run

along or across girders, trusses or other
steel frame work, standard spring clips FIG. 42 A U-SECTION F ASTENED TO A CONCRETE
may be used for be quick and easy fitting. CEILING WITH RAG-BOLTS USED TO CARRY A
Other methods include a range of bolt- NUMBER OF SADDLES OF THE REQUIRED S IZE

PART 1 GENERAL AND COMMON ASPECTS 79

SP 30 : 2011

e) Avoidance of gas, water and other pipes — being moved or slung into position. Protection
All conduits must be kept clear of gas and can be afforded by threading a water pipe over
water pipes, either by spacing or insulation. the conduit during erection, or by screening
They must also be kept clear of cables and it with sheet steel or channel iron. Another
pipes which feed telephones, bells and other method of protection is, of course, to fix the
services, unless these are wired to the same conduit behind the surface of the wall.
standard as lighting, heating or power circuits.
One exemption to this is that conduits may
be fitted to electrically operated gas valves,
and the like, if they are constantly under
electrically skilled supervision. Another is that
conduits may make contact with water pipes
if they are intentionally bonded to them. They
must not make casual contact with water
pipes. If conduits have to be run near gas or
water pipes and there is a risk of their making
contact, they should be spaced apart with
wood or other insulating material. If the
conduit system reaches a high potential due
to defective cables in the conduit and
ineffective earth continuity, and this conduit
makes casual contact with a gas or water pipe,
either of which would be at earth potential,
then arcing would take place between the
conduit and the other pipe. This might result
in puncturing the gas pipe and igniting the
gas. There is greater likelihood of this
happening if the gas or water pipe is of lead.
NOTE — The conduit is fixed to the ceiling with spacer bar
saddles.

F IG. 44 A S UPPORTING FITTING FROM

T ANGENT TEE BOX

FIG. 43 SUPPORTING SEVERAL CONDUITS FROM

ANGLE IRON TRUSS
f) Protection of conduits — Although heavy
gauge conduit affords excellent mechanical F IG. 45 A CONDUIT SUSPENDED ACROSS
protection to the cables it encloses, it is ROOF T RUSSES
possible for the conduit itself to become
damaged if stuck by heavy objects. Such g) Termination of conduit at switch positions —
damage is liable to occur in workshops where At switch positions the conduit must terminate
the conduit is fixed near the floor level and with a metal box or into an accessory or recess
may be struck by trolley or heavy equipment lined with incombustible material.

80 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

h) Termination of conduit at other than switch and should be free from burrs. When there is a
positions — Where conduit terminates a danger of condensation forming inside conduit
ceiling or wall points other than at switch (for example, where there may be changes of
positions, it must terminate with a meal box, temperature) suitable precautions should be
or recess, or a block of incombustible material. taken. Holes may be drilled at the lowest points
of the conduit system or, alternatively, conduit
boxes with drainage holes should be fitted.
Drainage outlets should be provided where
condensed water might otherwise collect.
When ever possible conduit runs should
designed so as to avoid traps for moisture.
m) Continuity of the conduit system — A screwed
conduit system must be mechanically and
electrically continuous across all joints so that
the electrical resistance of the conduit,
together with the resistance of the earthing
lead, measured from the earth electrode to any
position in the conduit system shall be
sufficiently low so that the earth fault current
operates the protective device. To achieve this
it is necessary to ensure that all conduit
connections are tight and that the enamel is
removed form adaptable boxes and other
NOTE — At switch positions, conduit must terminate with conduit fittings where screwed entries are not
metal box or other suitable enclosure. provided. To ensure the continuity of the
FIG. 46 T YPICAL M ETHODS OF TERMINATING SURFACE protective conductor throughout the life of the
AND C ONCEALED SYSTEMS
installation, a separate circuit protective
conductor is drawn into the conduit for each
circuit in the conduit. Conduits must always
be taken direct into distribution boards,
switchfuses, switches, isolators, starters,
motor terminal boxes, etc, and must be
electrically and mechanically continuous
throughout. Conduits must not be terminated
with a bush and unprotected cables taken into
NOTE — A box or suitable enclosure must be fitted at all outlet
positions. Terminations as shown at B, C and D are not
permitted.

FIG. 47 OUTLET POSITIONS

j) Removal of burrs from ends of conduit —

When steel conduit is cut by a hacksaw, a burr
is formed upon the inner bore of the conduit.
If this burr were not removed it would cause
considerable damage to the insulation of the
cables drawn into the conduit. Ends of lengths
of conduit should be free from burrs, and
where they terminate at boxes, trunking and
accessories not fitted with spout entries, should
be treated so as to eliminate damage to cables.
k) Conduit Installed in damp conditions — If
metallic conduits are installed externally or in
damp situations, they should either be
galvanized, sherardized, or be made of copper,
FIG. 48 CONNECTING TWO LENGTHS OF CONDUIT
and all clips and fixings (including fixing
NEITHER OF WHICH CAN BE TURNED, BY USE OF
screws) shall be of corrosion-resisting material
COUPLER AND LOCKOUT
PART 1 GENERAL AND COMMON ASPECTS 81
SP 30 : 2011

switchgear and other equipment. The

switchgear must be connected mechanically
either with solid conduits, or with flexible
metallic conduits.
n) Flexible metallic conduit — Flexible metallic
conduits are used for final connections to
motors so as to provide for the movement of
the motor if fixed on slide rails. It also prevents
any noise or vibration being transmitted from
the motor, or the machine to which it may be
coupled, to other parts of the building through
the conduit system (see Fig. 49). These
flexible conduits should preferably be of the
watertight pattern and should be connected
to the conduit by means of brass adaptors.
These adaptors are made to screw on to the
flexible tubing and also into the conduit. It is
good practice to braze the adaptor to the
metallic tubing, otherwise it is likely to
become detached and expose the cables to F IG. 50 SURFACE CONDUIT SYSTEM WHEN F ITTING/
mechanical damage. The use of flexible ACCESSORY MUST BE FLUSH ON WALL OR CEILING
metallic tubing which is covered with PVC
sleevings is recommended as this outer q) Drawing cables into conduits
protection prevents oil from causing damage
to the rubber insertion in the joints of the 1) Cables must not be drawn in to conduits
tubing. until the conduit system for the circuit
concerned is complete, except for
prefabricated flexible conduit systems
which are not wired in-situ.
2) When drawing in cables they must first
of all be run off the reels or drums, or the
reels must be arranged to revolve freely,
otherwise if the cables are allowed to
spiral off the reels they will become
twisted, and this would cause damage to
the insulation. If only a limited quantity
of cable is to be used it may be more
convenient to dispense it direct from one
A B of the boxed reels which are now on the
NOTE — Figure 49A shows the wrong method, which is market.
frequently adopted because proper conduit outlets are not 3) Cable must not be allowed to spiral off
always provided on starters and motors. The lengths of
reels or it will become twisted and the
unprotected cable are subject to mechanical damage which may
lead to electrical breakdown. Figure 49B illustrates the right insulation damaged.
method. Conduit is either taken direct into the equipment or 4) If a number of cables are being drawn
terminated with flexible metallic conduit and a suitable c.p.c.
into conduit at the same time, the cable
FIG. 49 T ERMINATION C ONDUIT AT reels should be arranged on a stand or
SWITCH AND STARTER support so as to allow them to revolve
freely.
p) Surface conduit feeding luminaires and clocks 5) In new buildings and in damp situations
— When surface conduit run to feed wall or the cable should not be drawn into
ceiling accessory like luminaries/clock etc conduits until it has been made certain
which are fixed direct to the wall or ceiling, it that the interiors of the conduits are dry
is advisable, if possible, to set the conduit into and free from moisture. If in doubt, a draw
the wall a short distance from the position of wire with a swab at the end should be
the accessory as shown in Fig. 50. drawn through the conduit so as to

82 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

remove any moisture that may have in a particular conduit run, to determine
accumulated due to exposure or building the size of conduit to be used. Each cable
operations. and conduit size is allocated a factor and
6) It is usual to commence drawing in cables by summing the factors for all the cables
from a mid-point in the conduit system to be run in a conduit route, the
so as to minimize the length of cable appropriate conduit size to use can be
which has to be drawn in. A draw-in tape determined.
should be used from one draw-in point 6.7.1.4.2 Concealed conduit system
to another and the ends of the cables
attached. The ends of the cables must be 6.7.1.4.2.1 Screwed metal conduit is particularly
bared for a distance of approximately suitable for concealed wiring. The conduit can be
50 mm and threaded through a loop in installed during building operations and can be safely
the draw tape. When drawing in a number buried in floors and walls whether the floors or walls
of cables they must be fed in very are constructed of wood, brick, hollow tiles or solid
carefully at the delivery end whilst some concrete, in such a manner that the cables can be drawn
one pulls them at the receiving end. in at any time after the completion of the building. The
7) The cables should be fed into the conduit conduit system, if property installed, can be relied upon
in such a manner as to prevent any cables adequately to protect the cables and allows them to be
crossing, and also to avoid them being replaced at any time if desired. Most modern buildings,
pulled against the sides of the opening including blocks of flats, are constructed with solid
of the draw-in box. In hot weather or floors and solid walls and it is necessary for the conduit
under hot conditions, the drawing-in can (if concealed) to be erected during the construction of
be assisted by rubbing French chalk on the building. In other types of building where there
the cables. Always leave some slack are wooden joists and plaster ceilings, conduit will have
cable in all draw-in boxes and make sure to be run between and across the joists.
that cables are fed into the conduit so as a) Running conduit in wooden floors — Where
not to finish up with twisted cable at the conduit is run across the joists, they will have
draw-in point. to be slotted to enable the conduit to be kept
8) This operation needs care and there must below the level of the floor boards. When slots
be synchronization between the person are cut in wooden joists they must be kept as
who is feeding and the person who is near as possible to the bearings supporting
pulling. If in sight of each other this can the joists, and the slots should not be deeper
be achieved by a movement of the head, than absolutely necessary, otherwise the joists
and if with in speaking distance by word will be unduly weakened (see Fig. 51). The
of command given by person feeding the slots should be arranged so as to be in the
cables. If the two persons are not with in centre of any floorboards, if they are near the
earshot, then the process is somewhat edge there is the possibility of nails being
more difficult. A good plan is for the driven through the conduit. The slots cut in
individual feeding the cables to give pre- the joists should be no deeper than necessary
arranged signals by tapping the conduit and kept as near as possible to the bearing of
with a pair of pliers. the joints so as not to weaken them unduly.
9) In some cases, it may be necessary for a ‘Traps’ should be left at the position of all
third person to be stationed midway junction boxes. These traps should consist of
between the tow positions to relay the a short length of floor board, screwed down
necessary instructions from the person and suitably marked.
feeding to the person pulling. Otherwise
cables may become crossed and this
might result in the cables becoming
jammed inside the conduit.
10) The number of cables drawn into a
particular size conduit should be such that
no damage is caused to either the cables
or to their enclosure during installation.
It will be necessary, after deciding the FIG. 51 RUNNING CONDUIT IN WOOD FLOORS TO FEED
number and size of cables to be placed LIGHTING POINTS

PART 1 GENERAL AND COMMON ASPECTS 83

SP 30 : 2011

b) Running conduits in solid floors — Where c) Conduit runs to outlets in walls — Sockets
there are solid floors, it is impossible to leave near skirting level should preferably be fed
junction boxes in the floors, unless there is a from the floor above rather than the floor
cavity above the top of the floor slab, in which below, because in the latter case it would be
case the conduits may be run in the cavity difficult to avoid traps in the conduit (Fig. 54).
and inspection boxes arranged so as to be When the conduit is run to switch and other
accessible below the floor boards. Otherwise positions in walls it is usually run in a chases
the conduit needs to be arranged so that cables in the wall. These chases must be deep
can be drawn in through ceiling or wall points. enough to allow at least 10 mm of cement
This methods is known as the’ looping-in and plaster covering; otherwise rust from the
system’, and it is shown in Fig. 52 and Fig. 53 conduit may come through to the surface.
and conduit boxes are provided with holes at Conduits buried in plaster should be given a
the back to enable the conduit to be looped coat of protective paint, or should be
from one box to another. These boxes are galvanised. The plaster should be finished
made with two, three or four holes so that it neatly round the outside edges of flush switch
is possible also to tee off to switches and and socket boxes, otherwise the cover plates
adjacent ceiling or wall points. If the floors may not conceal any deficiencies in the
are of reinforced concrete, it may be necessary plaster finish. When installing flush boxes
to erect the conduit system on the shuttering before plastering, it is advisable to stuff the
and to secure it in position before the concrete boxes with paper to prevent their being filled
is poured. Wherever conduit is to be buried with plaster.
by concrete, special care must be taken to d) Ceiling points — At ceiling points the conduit
ensure that all joints are tight, otherwise liquid boxes will be flush with the finish of the
cement may enter the conduit and form a solid concrete ceiling. If the ceiling is to have a
block inside. Preferably the joints should be plaster rendering, this will leave the front of
painted with bitumastic paint, and the conduit the boxes recessed above the plaster finish.
itself should also be painted where the enamel To overcome this it is possible to use extension
has been removed during threading of setting. rings for standard conduit boxes. At the
Sometimes the conduits can be run in chases position of ceiling points pit is usual top
cut into concrete floors; these should be provide a standard found conduit box, with
arranged so as to avoid traps in the conduit an earth terminal, but any metal box or
where condensation may collect and damage incombustible enclosure may be used,
the cables. although an earth terminal must be provided.

FIG. 52 TYPICAL ARRANGEMENT OF CONCEALED CONDUITS FEEDING LIGHTING POINTS BY LOOPING THE C ONDUIT
INTO THE B ACK OF O UTLET B OXES

84 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

F IG. 53 DETAILS OF CONDUIT BOX AND M ETHOD OF HASTENING C ONDUIT

NOTE — If the sockets are fed from the floor below, it is difficult to avoid a trap for moisture.

FIG. 54 RIGHT AND WRONG METHODS OF FEEDING SOCKET NEAR SKIRTING LEVEL

e) Running sunk conduits to surface distribution in the wall behind the distribution board and
boards — Where surface mounted to take the flush conduits directly into it. Holes
distribution boards are used with a sunk can be drilled in the back of the distribution
conduit, the problems arises as to the best board and bushed. Spare holes should be
method of terminating flush conduits into the provided for future conduits. Alternatively, an
surface boards. One method is to ‘set’ the adaptable box can be fitted at the top of the
conduits out to the required distance into the distribution board, partly sunk into the wall
surface boards but this is not recommended. to receive the flush conduits, and partly on
A better method is to fit a flush adaptable box the surface to bolt on the top of the distribution

PART 1 GENERAL AND COMMON ASPECTS 85

SP 30 : 2011

board. Distribution boards must be bonded to connection with Class 2 equipment, that is,
the adaptable boxes. equipment having double insulation. In this
f) Before wiring sunk conduit — Before wiring, case a protective conductor must not be
the conduits for each circuit must be erected provided. Flexible PVC conduits are also
complete. Not only should they be complete available, and these can be used with
but they must be clean and dry inside advantage where there are awkward bends,
otherwise the cables may suffer damage. No or under floorboards where rigid conduits
attempt should be made to wire conduits would be difficult to install.
which are buried in cement until the building 6.7.1.4.2.2 Installation of plastic conduit
has dried out and then the conduits should be
swabbed to remove any moisture or Plastic conduits and fittings can be obtained from a
obstruction which may have entered them. number of different manufacturers and the techniques
g) The light mechanical stress unscrewed conduit needed to install these are not difficult to apply. Care
system — The light mechanical stress conduit is however needed to assemble a neat installation and
system consists of conduits, the walls of which the points given below should be borne in mind. As
are not of sufficient thickness to allow them with any other installation good workmanship and the
to be threaded. Instead of screwed sockets and use of good quality materials is essential.
fittings grip type fittings are used. It should be noted that the thermal expansion of plastic
h) Insulated conduit system — Non-metallic conduit is about six times that of steel, and so whenever
conduits are now being increasingly used for surface installation of straight runs exceeding 6 m is
all types of installation work, both for to be employed, some arrangement must be made for
commercial and house wiring. The PVC rigid expansion. The saddles used have clearance to allow
conduit is made in various sizes and there are the conduit to expand. Joints should be made with an
various types of conduit fittings, including expansion coupler, which is attached with solvent
boxes available for use with this conduit. The cement to one of the lengths of tube, but allowed to
type of universal conduit box is made of a move in the other.
plastic material, and fitted with special
sockets, and enable the conduit to be merely Cutting the conduit can be carried out with a fine tooth
slipped into position, and secured by locking saw or using the special tool. As with steel conduit, it
ring. No cement is required, except that it is is necessary to remove any burrs and roughness at the
recommended in damp situations. The end of the cut length.
advantage of the insulated conduit system is Bending the small sizes of plastic conduit up to 25 mm
that it can be installed much more quickly than diameter can be carried out cold. A bending spring is
steel conduit, it is non-corrosive, impervious inserted so as to retain the cross sectional shape of
to most chemicals, weatherproof, and it will the tube. It is important to use the correct size of
not support combustion. The disadvantages bending spring for the type of tube being employed.
are that it is not suitable for temperatures
With cold bending, the tube should initially be bent
below –5 ° C or above 60 ° C, and where
to about double the required angle, and then returned
luminaries are suspended from PVC conduit
to the angle required, as this reduces the tendency of
boxes, precautions must be taken to ensure
the tube to return to its straight form. To bend larger
that the heat from the lamp does not result in
sizes of tube, 32 mm diameter and above, judicious
the PVC box reaching a temperature
application of heat is needed. This may be applied by
exceeding 60°C. For surface installations it is
blowlamp, electric fire or boiling water. If a naked
recommended that saddles be fitted at
flame is used, extreme care must be taken to avoid
intervals of 800 mm for 20 mm diameter
overheating the conduit. Once warm, insert a bending
conduit, and intervals of 1 600 mm to
spring and bend the tube round a suitable former. A
2 000 mm for larger sizes. The special sockets
and saddles for this type of conduit must have bucket is suitable, but do not use a bending machine
provision to allow for longitudinal expansion former, as this conduits away the heat too rapidly. The
that may take place with variations in ambient formed tube should as soon as possible be saddled
temperature. It is necessary to provide a circuit after bending.
protective conductor in all insulated conduit, Joints are made using solvent adhesives, which can be
and this must be connected to the earth obtained specifically for the purpose. These adhesives
terminal in all boxes for switches, sockets and are usually highly flammable and care is needed in
luminaries. The only exception is in handling and use. Good ventilation is essential, and it

86 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

is important not to inhale any fumes given off. The for electrical purposes is generally made of 1.2 mm
manufacturers’ instructions for use of the solvent sheet steel, and is available is size ranging from 50 mm
adhesive should be strictly followed. If sealing is × 50 mm to 600 mm × 150 mm, common sizes being
needed to waterproof the joint, use a special non-setting 50 mm × 50 mm, 75 mm × 100 mm, 150 mm × 75 mm
adhesive or grease. Threaded adaptors are available and 150 mm × 150 mm although 50 mm × 100 mm
for use when it is required. Drawing in cables is carried and 100 mm × 100 mm are also available. See Table
out by making use of a nylon draw-in tape. The smooth 12 for spacing of supports for trunking and Table 13
bore of the plastic tube aids the pulling in operation. for preferred dimensions of cable trunking and
Liquid soap or French chalk maybe used to provide ducting.
lubrication to help the pulling in process. Capacities
of plastic conduits maybe calculated in a similar way 6.7.2.1 Types of trunking
to that used for steel systems. Each type of cable is a) Metallic trunking — Trunking for industrial
allocated a factor, and corresponding factors are and commercial installations is often used in
allocated for various sizes of conduit. Table 10 and place of the larger sizes of conduit. It can be
Table 11 give the factors applicable to cables and used with advantage in conjunction with 16
conduits. This requires that when cables are drawn into mm to 32 mm conduits, the trunking forming
conduit damage to both cables and conduit is avoided. the background or framework of the system
The use of plastic conduit is suitable when cable runs with conduits running from the trunking to
require to be located in pre-cast concrete. As will be lighting or socket outlet points. For example,
appreciated it is essential that sound joints are made in a large office building, trunking can be run
so that when the concrete is cast, the conduit runs do above the suspended ceiling along the
not separate. The maximum permissible number of corridors to feed corridor points, and rooms
1.1 kV grade cables that can be drawn into rigid steel on either side can be fed from this trunking
conduits are given at Table 3 of Part 1/Section 20 of by conduit.
this Code. The maximum permissible number of
1.1 kV grade single-core cables that may be drawn into In multistoreyed buildings trunking of suitable
rigid non-metallic conduits are given in Table 4 of capacity, and with the necessary number of
Part 1/Section 20 of this Code. Table 1 of Part 1/ compartments, is to be provided and run
Section 20 gives diameter and maximum allowable vertically in the riser ducts and connected to
resistance of fusewires of tinned copper. distribution boards; it can also accommodate
circuit wiring, control wiring, also cables
6.7.2 Cable Trunking and Ducting Systems
feeding fire alarms, telephones, emergency
6.7.2.0 General lighting and other services associated with a
modern building.
Cable trunking and cable ducting systems are used for
the accommodation, and where necessary for the Cables feeding fire alarms and emergency
segregation of conductors, cables or cords and/or other circuits need to be segregated by fire-resisting
electrical equipment in electrical installations barriers from those feeding low-voltage
(see Fig. 55). The systems are mounted directly on walls circuits (that is 50 V to 1 000 V ac). It is usual
or ceilings , flush or semi-flush or indirectly on walls or for telecommunications companies to insist
ceilings, or on structures away from on walls or ceilings. that their cables are completely segregated
See IS 14927 (Part 1) for general requirements of the from all other wiring systems. It may therefore
cable trunking and ducting systems. For general use, be necessary to install 3 or 4 compartment
cable trunking is now available in various materials such trunking to ensure the requirements for data
as steel, PVC, aluminium and phenylene oxide (Noryl), and telecommunications circuits are complied
in a wide range of sizes of both square and rectangular with. Cables feeing emergency lighting and
cross-section. Steel cable trunking is supplied in various fire alarm must also be segregated from the
standard lengths with provision for slotting together and wiring of any other circuits by means of rigid
bolting to maintain electrical continuity for bonding. If and continuous partitions of non-combustible
required, trunking is available with pin supports at material.
regular intervals for separating circuits and, where it is b) Non-metallic trunking — A number of
essential to completely segregate wiring, such as safety versatile plastic trunking systems have been
services and extra-low voltage, continuous barriers are developed in recent years and these are often
provided. suitable for installation work in domestic or
Where a large number of cables has to be run together, commercial premises, particularly where
it is often convenient to put them in trunking. Trunking rewiring of existing buildings is required.

PART 1 GENERAL AND COMMON ASPECTS 87

88
Table 10 Conduit Factors for Runs Incorporating Bends
(Clause 6.7.1.4.2.2)
Sl No. Length of Run Straight One Bend Two Bends Three Bends Four Bends
SP 30 : 2011

m 16 20 25 32 16 20 25 32 16 20 25 32 16 20 25 32 16 20 25 32
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12) (13) (14) (15) (16) (17) (18) (19) (20) (21) (22)
i) 1 188 303 543 947 177 286 514 900 158 256 463 818 130 213 388 692
ii) 1.5 182 294 528 923 167 270 487 857 143 233 422 750 111 182 333 600
iii) 2 177 286 514 900 158 256 463 818 130 213 388 692 97 159 292 529
iv) 2.5 171 278 500 878 150 244 442 783 120 196 358 643 86 141 260 474
v) 3 167 270 487 857 143 233 422 750 111 182 333 600
vi) 3.5 179 290 521 911 162 263 475 837 136 222 404 720 103 169 311 563
vii) 4 177 286 514 900 158 256 463 818 130 213 388 692 97 159 292 529
viii) 4.5 174 282 507 889 154 250 452 800 125 204 373 667 91 149 275 500
ix) 5 171 278 500 878 150 244 442 783 120 196 358 643 86 141 260 474
x) 6 167 270 487 857 143 233 422 750 111 182 333 600
xi) 7 162 263 475 837 136 222 404 720 103 169 311 563
xii) 8 158 256 463 818 130 213 388 692 97 159 292 529
xiii) 9 154 250 452 800 125 204 373 667 91 149 275 500
xiv) 10 150 244 442 783 120 196 358 643 86 141 260 474

NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

FIG. 55 C ABLE TRUNKING

Table 11 Cable Factors for Long Straight Runs, Mini-trunking and cove-trunking are
or Runs Incorporating Bends in Conduit particularly suitable for areas which may be
( Clause 6.7.1.4.2.2 ) subject to changes of layouts, or for rewiring,
to avoid major unheavals in addition to new
Type of Conductor Conductor, Cross- Factor
installations. The simplicity of installations
Sectional Area
and the degree of accessibility provided by
1.0 16 these systems can reduce labour costs
Solid or stranded 1.5 22 tremendously.
2.5 30
4.0 43 d) Lighting trunking system — Steel or alloy
6.0 58 lighting trunking was originally designed to
10.0 105 span trusses other supports in order to provide
an easy an economical method of supporting
c) Mini trunking — For domestic or similar small
luminaries in industrial premises at high level.
installations, mini-trunking systems similar in
form to cable trunking but of less obstructive e) Underfloor trunking system/Floor distribution
cross-section, ranging from 16 mm to 75 mm system — Open plan office and other types of
wide by 12 mm to 30 mm deep can be used. commercial buildings may well need power
There are numerous accessories for bends, and data wiring to outlets at various points in
junctions and outlets and, with the exception the floor area. The most appropriate way of
of the outlets which are usually surface providing this is by one of the underfloor
mounted. A complete installation can be made wiring systems now available. Both steel and
quite inconspicuously by close fitting to plastic construction trunking can be obtained,
skirtings, picture rails and door architraves. and if required ‘power poles’ can be inserted
Because of the small section, runs on walls or at appropriate locations to bring the socket
across ceilings can be used without spoiling the outlets to a convenient hand height. With the
aesthetics of an area. increasing use being made of computers, and

Table 12 Spacing of Supports for Trunking

(Clause 6.7.2.0)
Sl No. Cross-sectional Area, mm2 Maximum Distance Between Supports

Metal Insulating

Horizontal Vertical Horizontal Vertical

m m m m
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
i) Exceeding 300 and not exceeding 700 0.75 1.0 0.5 0.5
ii) Exceeding 700 and not exceeding 1 500 1.25 1.5 0.5 0.5
iii) Exceeding 1 500 and not exceeding 2 500 1.75 2.0 1.25 1.25
iv) Exceeding 2 500 and not exceeding 5 000 3.0 3.0 1.5 2.0
v) Exceeding 5 000 3.0 3.0 1.75 2.0

PART 1 GENERAL AND COMMON ASPECTS 89

SP 30 : 2011

other electronic data transmission systems, the In addition, for cable trunking and ducting systems
flexibility of the underfloor wiring can be intended for mounting on walls or ceilings, the
used to good advantage. manufacturer’s instruction on classification of the CT/
f) Steel floor trunking — Under floor trunking DS and on installation of the system should be
made of steel is used extensively in commercial followed. If the system is intended for the suspension
and similar buildings, and it can be obtained of loads, the manufacturers on the maximum load and
in very shallow sections with depth of only method of suspension should be followed.
22 mm, which is very useful where the The sizes of the cable trunking and ducting other than
thickness of the floor screed is limited. those specified are also acceptable as per the agreement
g) Plastic underfloor trunking — Plastic between the purchasers and the manufacturers provided
materials are now often used instead of their that the height and width are from the combination of
metal counterparts for the enclosures of the following dimensions having tolerances of ±0.2
underfloor systems. Under floor trunking mm on both height and width dimensions. 12 mm,
systems made with this material can be 16 mm, 20 mm, 25 mm, 32 mm, 38 mm, 50 mm,
divided into two main types, these being 75 mm and 100 mm.
raised floor systems and underfloor systems.
Wall thickness for cable trunking and ducting for any
h) Carpet trunking system — A carpet trunking
type of combination with respect to height and width
is provided for fixing to a finished floor, which
as given in clause shall be as follows:
has a total depth of 9.6 mm. It is complete
with a snap on overlapping lid which, when a) Any combination where size is up to 32 mm
it place, forms a retainer for abutting carpet. the wall thickness shall be at least 1.20 mm.
NOTE — There are many different designs, the b) Any combination where size is up to 38 mm,
particular requirements of which are covered in other the wall thickness shall be at least 1.30 mm.
parts of IS 14927. c) Any combination where size is up to 50 mm
6.7.2.2 Trunking and ducting systems shall be so the wall thickness shall be atleast 1.50 mm.
designed and constructed that where required they d) Any combination where size is above 50 mm
ensure reliable mechanical protection to the conductors the wall thickness shall be at least 1.80 mm.
and/or cables contained therein. Where required, the
system shall also provide adequate electrical protection. 6.7.2.3 Access to live parts
In addition, the system components shall withstand the Trunking/ducting systems shall be so designed that
stresses likely to occur during transport, storage, when they are installed and fitted with insulated
recommended installation practice and usage. System conductors and apparatus in normal use, parts are not
Components are parts used within the system, which accessible.
include lengths of trunking or ducting, trunking or
ducting fittings, fixing devices, apparatus mounting 6.7.2.4 Designs of conduit system
devices, and other accessories. A schematic of trunking and ducting systems for wall,
NOTE — The above mentioned components may not ceiling installation and floor installation is given at
necessarily be included all together in a system. Different Fig. 56.
combinations of components may be used.

Table 13 Preferred Dimensions of Cable Trunking and Ducting

(Clause 6.7.2.0 )
Size Approximate Internal Cross- Outer Outer Wall Thickness
Sectional Width Height Min
mm mm2 mm mm mm
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
12 × 12 119.50 12.0 ± 0.2 12.0 ± 0.2 1.20
16 × 12 153.00 16.0 ± 0.2 12.0 ± 0.2 1.20
16 × 16 196.00 16.0 ± 0.2 16.0 ± 0.2 1.20
25 × 12 239.10 25.0 ± 0.2 12.0 ± 0.2 1.20
25 × 16 307.40 1.20
25.0 ± 0.2 16.0 ± 0.2
25 × 25 510.80 1.20
38 × 16 474.40 25.0 ± 0.2 25.0 ± 0.2 1.30
38 × 25 793.00 38.0 ± 0.2 16.0 ± 0.2 1.30
50 × 16 611.00 38.0 ± 0.2 25.0 ± 0.2 1.50
50 × 50 20209.00 50.0 ± 0.2 16.0 ± 0.2 1.50
75 × 75 50098.00 50.0 ± 0.2 50.0 ± 0.2 1.80
100 × 50 40473.00 75.0 ± 0.2 75.0 ± 0.2 1.80
100.0 ± 0.2 50.0 ± 0.2

90 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

NOTE — No. 5 represents an apparatus in a trunking system.

a) Types and Application of Trunking and Ducting System for Wall and Ceiling Installation
No. on Definition For Mounting
Fig. 56
(1) (2) (3) (4)
1 Trunking and Insulated conductors, cables, Surface on wall and ceiling, on walls
7 accessories cords mounted horizontally or vertically, ceiling
11 suspended
12
13
15

3 Trunking and Insulated conductors, cables, Flush in wall and ceiling, in walls mounted
9 accessories cords horizontally or vertically

5 Trunking and Insulated conductors, cables, Surface on wall and ceiling, on walls
accessories cords, mounting devices for mounted horizontally or vertically
apparatus (switches, socket-
outlets, circuit-breakers, etc

2 Ducting and Insulated conductors, cables, Surface on wall and ceiling, on walls
10 accessories cords mounted horizontally or vertically, ceiling
8 suspended

4 Ducting and Insulated conductors, cables, Embedded in wall and ceiling, in walls
accessories cords mounted horizontally or vertically

PART 1 GENERAL AND COMMON ASPECTS 91

SP 30 : 2011

b) Trunking and Ducting Systems for Floor Installation

No. on Definition For Mounting
Fig. 56
(1) (2) (3) (4)
1 Trunking and accessories Insulated conductors, cables, cords Flush floor

1 Trunking and accessories Insulated conductors, cables, cords Surface on floor

5
6

2 Ducting and accessories Insulated conductors, cables, cords, Flush floor

3 Ducting and accessories Insulated conductors, cables, cords In floor (embedded)

7 Electrical service unit Apparatus Flush floor

8 Electrical service unit Apparatus Surface on floor

Skirting systems

6 Skirting trunking and accessories Insulated conductors, cables, cords Surface on wall and ceiling
15
Not shown Skirting trunking and accessories Insulated conductors, cables, cords, Surface on wall and ceiling
counting devices for apparatus

Not shown Socket plinth Mounting apparatus (socket-outlets) Surface on wall

F IG. 56 TYPES OF TRUNKING AND DUCTING SYSTEMS

7 EQUIPMENT, FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES Similar part of all switches, lampholders, distribution
fuse-boards, ceiling roses, brackets, pendants, fans and
7.0 An important stage of electrical installation work
all other fittings shall be so chosen that they are of the
is the fixing of accessories, such as ceiling roses,
same type and interchangeable in each installation.
holders, switches, socket outlets and luminaries. This
Electrical equipment which form integral part of wiring
work requires experience and a thorough knowledge
intended for switching or control or protection of
of the regulations which are applicable, because
wiring installations shall conform to the relevant Indian
danger from shock frequently results from the use of
Standards wherever they exist.
incorrect accessories or accessories being wrongly
connected. 7.1 Ceiling Roses
All equipment shall be suitable for the maximum power 7.1.1 Ceiling rose shall not be used on a circuit the
demanded by the current using equipment when it is voltage of which normally exceeds 250 V. Ceiling
functioning in its intended manner. In wiring other than roses may be of the 2-plate pattern and must have an
conduit wiring, all ceiling roses, brackets, pendants and earth terminal. The 3-plate type is used to enable the
accessories attached to walls or ceilings shall be feed to be looped at the ceiling rose rather than to use
mounted on substantial teak wood blocks twice an extra cable which would be needed to loop it at the
varnished after all fixing holes are made in them. switch. Figure 57 gives different types of ceiling roses.
Blocks shall not be less than 4 cm deep. Brass screws
shall be used for attaching fittings and accessories to 7.1.2 For PVC sheathed wiring it is possible to
their base blocks. Where teak or hardwood boards are eliminate the need for joint boxes if 3-plate ceiling roses
used for mounting switches, regulators, etc, these are employed. No ceiling rose may be used on a circuit
boards shall be well varnished with pure shellac on all having a voltage normally exceeding 250 V. Not more
four sides (both inside and out side), irrespective of than two flexible cords may be connected to any one
being painted to match the surroundings. The size of ceiling rose unless the later is specially designed for
such boards shall depend on the number of accessories multiple pendants.
that could conveniently and neatly be arranged. Where 7.1.3 Special 3 and 4-pin fittings rated at 2 or 6 A
there is danger of attack by white ants, the boards shall may be obtained and these can be installed where
be treated with suitable anti-termite compound and lighting fittings need to be removed or rearranged.
painted on both sides. The ability to remove lighting easily can assist in

92 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

57A Porcelain Ceiling Rose 57B Porcelain Ceiling Rose 57C Ceiling Rose Made of
with Two Plates with Three Plates Bakelite or Plastic

FIG. 57 CEILING ROSE

carrying our maintenance. Although the fitting is a cords, if not properly installed and maintained, can
socket outlet, it cannot be used for supplying hand become a cause of fire and shock. Flexible cords must
held equipment. not be used for fixed wiring. Flexible cords must not
be used where exposed to dampness or immediately
7.1.4 For the conduit system of wiring it is usual to fit
below water pipes. They should be open to view
ceiling roses which screw direct on to a standard
through out their entire length, except where passing
conduit box, the box being fitted with an earth
through a ceiling when they must be protected with a
terminal.
properly bushed non-flammable tube. Flexible cords
7.2 Luminaries must never be held in position by means of insulated
staples. Connections between flexible cords and cables
7.2.1 Every luminaire or group of luminaries must be shall be effected with an insulated connector, and this
controlled by a switch or a socket outlet and plug, connector must be enclosed in a box or in part of a
placed in a readily accessible position. Luminaire luminaire. If an extension of a flexible cord is made
should conform to relevant Indian Standard where with a flexible cord connector consisting of pins and
existing. sockets, the sockets must be fed from the supply, so
7.2.2 In damp situations, every luminaire shall be of that the exposed pins are not alive when disconnected
the water proof type, and in situations where there is from the sockets. All flexible cords used for portable
likelihood of presence of flammable or explosive dust, appliances shall be of the sheathed circular type and,
vapour, or gas, the luminaries must be of the flameproof therefore twisted cords must not be used for portable
type in accordance with the recommendation of Part 7 handlamps, floor and table lamps, etc. All flexible cords
of this Code and relevant Indian Standard (see IS 5571). should be frequently inspected, especially at the point
Flammable shade shall not form a part of lighting where they enter lampholders and other accessories,
fittings unless such shade is well protected against all and renewed if found to be unsatisfactory. Flexible
risks of fire. Celluloid shade or lighting fittings shall cords used in workshops and other places subjected to
not be used under any circumstances. General and risk of mechanical damage shall be sheathed or
safety requirements for electrical lighting fittings shall armoured.
be in accordance with good practice. The lighting 7.2.3.2 Where flexible cords support luminaries the
fittings shall conform to relevant Indian Standards maximum weight which may be supported is as
where they exist. follows:
The use of fittings-wire shall be restricted to the internal
wiring of the lighting fittings. Where fittings wire is Nominal Cross-sectional Maximum
used for wiring fittings, the sub-circuit loads shall Area of Flexible Cord Permissible Weight
mm2 kg
terminate in a ceiling rose or box with connectors from
(1) (2)
which they shall be carried into the fittings
0.5 2
7.2.3 Flexible Cords and Cables
0.75 3
7.2.3.1 The conductor of flexible cords and cables shall 1.0 5
be according to flexibility Class 5 of IS 8130. Flexible

PART 1 GENERAL AND COMMON ASPECTS 93

SP 30 : 2011

If necessary two or more flexible cords shall be used room. Lamp holder should conform to relevant Indian
so that the weight supported by any cord does not Standards.
exceed the above values.
7.3.2 Lamp holders for use on brackets and the like
7.2.3.3 In kitchens and sculleries, and in rooms with a shall be in accordance with Indian Standards and all
fixed bath, flexible cords shall be of the PVC sheathed those for use with flexible pendants shall be provided
or an equally waterproof type. with cord grip. All lampholders shall be provided with
shade carriers. The outer screwed contact of Edison
7.2.3.4 In industrial premises luminaries shall be
screw-type lampholders must always be connected to
supported by suitable pipe/conduits, brackets fabricated
the neutral of the supply. Small Edison screw
from structural steel, steel chains or similar materials
lampholders must have a protective device not
depending upon the type and weight of the fittings.
exceeding 6 A, but the larger sizes may have a protective
Where a lighting fitting is supported by one or more
device not exceeding 16 A. The small Bayonet Cap (BC)
flexible cords, the maximum weight to which the twin
lampholder must have a protective device not exceeding
flexible cords may be subjected shall be as follows:
6 A, and for the larger BC lampholders the protective
Nominal Cross-sectional Maximum Permissible device must not exceed 16 A. Figure 58 shows different
Area of Twin Cord Weight types of BC lamp holders.
mm2 kg 7.3.3 No lampholder may be used on circuits exceeding
(1) (2) 250 V and all metal lampholders must have an earth
0.5 2 terminal. In bathrooms and other positions where there
0.75 3 are stone floors or exposed extraneous conductive parts,
1.0 5 lampholders should be fitted with insulated skirts to
1.5 5.3 prevent inadvertent contact with live pins when a lamp
2.5 8.8 is being removed or replaced.
4.0 14.0
7.4 Lamps
7.2.3.5 Where the temperature of the luminaire is likely 7.4.1 All lamps unless otherwise required and suitably
to exceed 60° C, special heat-resisting flexible cords protected, shall be hung at a height of not less than
should be used, including for pendant or enclosed type 2.5 m above the floor level. All electric lamps and
luminaries. The flexible cord should be insulated with accessories shall conform to relevant Indian Standards.
heatproof insulation such as butyl or silicone rubber. Portable lamps shall be wired with flexible cord. Hand
Ordinary PVC insulated cords are not likely to lamps shall be equipped with a handle of moulded
withstand the heat given off by tungsten filament lamps. composition or other material approved for the purpose.
Flexible cords feeding electric heaters must also have Hand lamps shall be equipped with a substantial guard
heatproof insulation such as butyl or silicone rubber. attached to the lamp holder or handle. Metallic guards
shall be earthed suitably.
7.3 Lamp Holders
7.4.2 A bushing or the equivalent shall be provided
7.3.1 Insulated lampholders should be used wherever where flexible cord enters the base or stem of portable
possible. Lampholders fitted with switches must be lamp. The bushing shall be of insulating material unless
controlled by a fixed switch or socket outlet in the same a jacketed type of cord is used. All wiring shall be free

58A Pendant Holder 58B Bracket Holder 58C Batten Holder 58D Push-pull Holder
FIG. 58 DIFFERENT TYPES OF BAYONET HOLDERS

94 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

from short-circuits and shall be tested for these defects the live side of the line. Ordinary socket-outlet may be
prior to being connected to the circuit. Exposed live fixed at any convenient place at a height above 20 cm
parts within porcelain fixtures shall be suitably recessed from the floor level and shall be away from danger of
and so located as to make it improbable that wires will mechanical injury. Socket outlets installed in old
come in contact with them. There shall be a spacing of people’s homes and in domestic premises likely to be
atleast 125 mm between live parts and the mounting occupied by old or disabled people, should be installed
plane of the fixture. at not less than 1 m from floor level.
7.4.3 External and road lamps shall have weatherproof In situations where a socket-outlet is accessible to
fittings of approved design so as to effectively prevent children, it is necessary to install an interlocked plug
the ingress of moisture and dust. Flexible cord and cord and socket or alternatively a socket-outlet which
grip lamp holders shall not be used where exposed to automatically gets screened by the withdrawal of plug.
weather. In verandahs and similar exposed situations In industrial premises socket-outlet of rating 16 A and
where pendants are used, these shall be of fixed rod above shall preferably be provided with interlocked
type. type switch. Socket outlets should conform to relevant
Indian Standards.
7.5 Socket Outlets and Plugs
7.5.2 In an earthed system of supply, a socket-outlet
7.5.1 Socket outlets are used for circuits not exceeding
with plug shall be of three-pin type with the third
250 V. Figure 59 shows various accessories and their
terminal connected to the earth. When such socket-
use. Each 16A socket-outlet provided in buildings for
outlets with plugs are connected to any current
the use of domestic appliances shall be provided with
consuming device of metal or any non-insulating
its own individual fuse or miniature circuit-breaker
material or both, conductors connecting such current-
(MCB), with suitable discrimination with back-up fuse
consuming devices shall be of flexible cord with an
or miniature circuit-breaker provided in the
earthing core and the earthing core shall be secured by
distribution/sub-distribution board. The socket-outlet
connecting between the earth terminal of plug and the
shall not necessarily embody the fuse or MCB as an
body of current-consuming devices.
integral part of it. Each socket-outlet shall also be
controlled by a switch which shall preferably be located In industrial premises three phase and neutral socket-
immediately adjacent thereto or combined therewith. outlets shall be provided with a earth terminal either
The switch controlling the socket-outlet shall be on of pin type or scrapping type in addition to the main

FIG. 59 PLUG SOCKET OUTLET AND ASSOCIATED A CCESSORIES

PART 1 GENERAL AND COMMON ASPECTS 95

SP 30 : 2011

pins required for the purpose. In wiring installations, 7.6.3 In damp situations, every switch shall be of the
metal clad switch, socket-outlet and plugs shall be used waterproof type with suitable screwed entries or glands
for power wiring. to prevent moister entering the switch. To prevent
A recommended schedule of socket-outlets in a residential condensed moisture from collecting inside a watertight
building is given at Table 2 of Part 3 of this Code. switchbox, a very small hole should be drilled in the
lowest part of the box to enable the moisture to drain
Although 16 A socket-outlet is extensively used in away.
industrial premises, other industrial type socket-outlets
include single-phase and three-phase sockets with 7.6.4 Flame proof switches must be fitted in all
ratings up to 125 A. positions exposed to flammable or explosive dust,
vapour, gas.
The low voltage electrical equipment (safety) standards
require equipment to be safe. Any part intended to be 7.7 Fans
electrified should be adequately protested such that it
is not accessible to a finger, including that of a child. 7.7.1 Ceiling Fans
This protection can be achieved by partly shrouding Ceiling fans including their suspension shall conform
the live pins of plugs so that when the plug is in the to Indian Standards. The following should be adhered
process of being inserted even the smallest finger to during installation:
cannot make contact with live metal.
a) Control of a ceiling fan shall be through its
When installing socket outlets the cables must be own regulator as well as a switch in series.
connected to the correct terminals, which are;
b) All ceiling fans shall be wired with normal
a) red wire (phase or outer conductor) to wiring to ceiling roses or to special connector
terminal marked L. boxes to which fan rod wires shall be
b) black wire (neutral or middle conductor) to connected and suspended from hooks or
terminal marked N. shackles with insulators between hooks and
c) yellow/ green earth wire to terminal marked suspension rods. There shall be no joint in the
E. suspension rod, but if joints are unavoidable
then such joints shall be screwed to special
7.5.3 If wrong connections are made to socket outlets couplers of 50 mm minimum length and both
it may be possible for a person to receive an electric
ends of the pipes shall touch together within
shock from an appliance when it is switched off.
the couplers, and shall in addition be secured
Socket-outlet adaptors which enable two or more
by means of split pins; alternatively, the two
appliances to be connected to a single socket should
pipes may be welded. The suspension rod shall
contain fuses to prevent the socket-outlet from
be of adequate strength to withstand the dead
becoming overloaded.
and impact forces imposed on it. Suspension
7.6 Switches rods should preferably be procured along with
the fan.
7.6.1 There are various types of switches available, the
most common being the 6 A switch which is used to c) Fan clamps shall be of suitable design
control lights. There is also the 16 A switch for circuits according to the nature of construction of
carrying heavier currents. For ac circuits the micro- ceiling on which these clamps are to be fitted.
gap switch is also being used; it is much smaller than In all cases fan clamps shall be fabricated from
the older type and more satisfactory for breaking new metal of suitable sizes and they shall be
inductive loads. as close fitting as possible. Fan clamps for
reinforced concrete roofs shall be buried with
Quick-make and slow-break switches are the casting and due care shall be taken that
recommended for ac. A quick-break switch connected they shall serve the purpose. Fan clamps for
to an ac supply and loaded near to its capacity will wooden beams, shall be of suitable flat iron
tend to break down to earth when used to switch off an fixed on two sides of the beam and according
inductive load (such as fluorescent lamps). to the size and section of the beam one or two
7.6.2 In a room containing a fixed bath, switches must mild steel bolts passing through the beam shall
be fixed out of reach of the person in the bath, hold both flat irons together. Fan clamps for
preferably out side the door, or be of the ceiling type steel joist shall be fabricated from flat iron to
operated by a cord. All single pole switches shall be fit rigidly to the bottom flange of the beam.
fitted in the same conductor though out the installation, Care shall be taken during fabrication that the
which shall be the phase conductor of the supply. metal does not crack while hammer to shape.

96 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

Other fan clamps shall be made to suit the of a building, which control fan point locations, play
position, but in all cases care shall be taken to an important part. Fans normally cover an area of 9 m2
see that they are rigid and safe. to 10 m2 and therefore in general purpose office
d) Canopies on top and bottom of suspension buildings, for every part of a bay to be served by the
rods shall effectively conceal suspensions and ceiling fans, it is necessary that the bays shall be so
connections to fan motors, respectively. designed that full number of fans could be suitably
e) The lead-in-wire shall be of nominal cross- located for the bay, otherwise it will result in ill-
sectional area not less than 1.0 mm2 copper or ventilated pockets. In general, fans in long halls may
1.5 mm2 aluminium and shall be protected be spaced at 3 m in both the directions. If building
from abrasion. modules do not lend themselves for proper positioning
of the required number of ceiling fans, such as air
f) Unless otherwise specified, the clearance circulators or bracket fans would have to be employed
between the bottom most point of the ceiling for the areas uncovered by the ceiling fans. For this,
fan and the floor shall be not less than 2.4 m. suitable electrical outlets shall be provided although
The minimum clearance between the ceiling result will be disproportionate to cost on account of
and the plane of the blades shall be not less fans.
than 300 mm.
7.7.3.2 Proper air circulation could be achieved either
NOTE — All fan clamps shall be so fabricated that fans
revolve steadily. by larger number of smaller fans or smaller number of
larger fans. The economics of the system as a whole
7.7.2 Exhaust Fans should be a guiding factor in choosing the number and
For fixing of an exhaust fan, a circular hole shall be type of fans and their locations.
provided in the wall to suit the size of the frame which Exhaust fans are necessary for spaces, such as
shall be fixed by means of rag-bolts embedded in the community toilets, kitchens, canteens and godowns to
wall. The hole shall be neatly plastered with cement provide the required number of air changes
and brought to the original finish of the wall. The (see Part 1/Sec 11 of this Code). Since the exhaust fans
exhaust fan shall be connected to exhaust fan point are located generally on the outer walls of a room
which shall be wired as near to the hole as possible by appropriate openings in such walls shall be provided
means of a flexible cord, care being taken that the for in the planning site.
blades rotate in the proper direction.
Positioning of fans and light fittings shall be chosen to
7.7.3 Fannage make these effective without causing shadows and
7.7.3.1 Where ceiling fans are provided, the bay sizes stroboscopic effect on the working planes.

ANNEX A
(Clause 2)
LIST OF INDIAN STANDARDS RELATED TO INSTALLATION
IS No. Title IS No. Title
371 : 1999 Ceiling roses — Specification 2412 : 1975 Link clips for electrical wiring
732 : 1989 Code of practice for electrical wiring 2667 : 1988 Fittings for rigid steel conduits for
installations electrical wiring
1255 : 1983 Code of practice for installation and 3043 : 1987 Code of practice for earthing
maintenance of power cables upto 3419 : 1988 Fittings for rigid non-metallic
and including 33 kV rating conduits
1293 : 2005 Plugs and socket-outlets of rated 3480 : 1966 Flexible steel conduits for electrical
voltages up to and including 250 V wiring
and rated current up to and including 3808 : 1979 Method of test for non-
16 A — Specification combustibility of building materials
1646 : 1997 Code of practice for fire safety of 3837 : 1976 Accessories for rigid steel conduits
buildings (general): Electrical for electrical wiring
installations
PART 1 GENERAL AND COMMON ASPECTS 97
SP 30 : 2011

IS No. Title IS No. Title

3854 : 1997 Switches for domestic and similar (Part 6) : 2000 Pliable conduits of metal or
purposes composite materials
3961 Recommended current ratings for (Part 8) : 2003 Rigid non-threadable conduits of
cables: aluminium alloy
(Part 1) : 1967 Paper insulated lead sheathed cables 11000 (Part2/ Fire hazard testing: Part 2 Test
(Part 2) : 1967 PVC insulated and PVC sheathed Sec1) : 1984 / methods, Section 1 Glow-wire test
heavy duty cables IEC 695-2-1 : and guidance
(Part 3) : 1968 Rubber insulated cables 1980
(Part 5) : 1968 PVC insulated light duty cables 11353 : 1985 Guide for uniform system of marking
4289 Specification for flexible cables for and identification of conductors and
lifts and other flexible connections: apparatus terminals
(Part 1) : 1984 Elastomer insulated cables 13703 (Part 1) : LV Fuses for voltages not exceeding
(Part 2) : 2000 PVC insulated circular cables 1993 /IEC 269- 1000 V ac or 1500 V dc: Part 1
4649 : 1968 Adaptors for flexible steel conduits 1 : 1986 General requirements
5571 : 2000 Guide for selection of electrical 14255 : 1995 Aerial bunched cables for working
equipment for hazardous areas voltages upto and including 1 100 V
5572 : 1994 Classification of hazardous areas
— Specification
(other than mines) having flammable
14763 : 2000 Conduits for electrical purposes —
gases and vapours for electrical
Outside diameters of conduits for
installation
electrical installation and threads for
6946 : 1990 PVC insulated cables for working
conduits and fittings — Specification
voltages upto and including 1100 V
14768 (Part 1) : Conduit fittings for electrical
8130 : 1984 Conductors for insulated electric
2000 installations — Specification: Part 1
cables and flexible cords
8623 Specification for low-voltage General requirements
switchgear and controlgear assemblies: 14772 : 2000 General requirements for enclosures
(Part 1) : 1993/ Requirements for type-tested and of accessories for household and
IEC 60439-1 : partially type-tested assemblies similar fixed electrical installations
1985 — Specifications for an accessory or
(Part 2): 1993/ Particular requirements for busbar luminaries
IEC 60439-2 : trunking systems (busway) 14927 Cable trunking and ducting systems
1987 for electrical installations:
(Part 3) : 1993/ Particular requirements for (Part 1) : 2001 General requirements
IEC 60439-3 : equipment where unskilled persons (Part 2) : 2001 Cable trunking and ducting systems
1990 have access for their use intended for mounting on walls or
9537 Conduits for electrical installations: ceilings
(Part 2) : 1981 Rigid steel conduits 14930 Conduit systems for electrical
(Part 3) : 1983 Rigid plain conduits of insulating installations:
materials (Part 1) : 2001 General requirements
(Part 4) : 1983 Pliable self-recovering conduits of (Part 2) : 2001 Particular requirements — Conduit
insulating materials systems buried underground
(Part 5) : 2000 Pliable conduits of insulating SP 69 : 2000 Banking and related financial
material services — Information security
guidelines

98 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

ANNEX B
(Clause 6.7.1.0 )
CLASSIFICATION CODING FOR CONDUIT SYSTEMS
The classification coding format for declared properties f) Sixth digit — Electrical characteristics
of the conduit system which may either be incorporated
[See 6.3 of IS 14930 (Part 1)]
in the manufacturer’s literature or marked on the
product shall be as shown below. When the conduit is None declared 0
marked with the classification code, it includes at least With electrical continuity characteristics 1
the first four digits. With electrical insulating characteristic 2
With electrical continuity and insulating 3
a) First digit — Resistance to compression characteristics
[See 6.1.1 of IS 14930 (Part 1)]
g) Seventh digit — Resistance to ingress of solid
Very light compression strength 1 objects
Light compression strength 2
[See 6.4.1 of IS 14930 (Part 1)]
Medium compression strength 3
Heavy compression strength 4 Protected against solid foreign objects 3
Very heavy compression strength 5 2.5 mm diameter and greater
Protected against solid foreign objects 4
b) Second digit — Resistance to impact 1.0 diameter and greater
[See 6.1.2 of IS 14930 (Part 1)] Dust protected 5
Dust tight 6
Very light impact strength 1
Light impact strength 2 h) Eight digit — Resistance to ingress of water
Medium impact strength 3
[See 6.4.2 of IS 14930 (Part 1)]
Heavy impact strength 4
Very heavy impact strength 5 None declared 0
Protected against vertically falling water drops 1
c) Third digit — Lower temperature range Protected against vertically falling water drops 2
[See Table 1 of IS 14930 (Part 1)] when conduit system tilted up to an angle of 15°
Protected against spraying/ water 3
+ 5°C 1 Protected against splashing water 4
– 5°C 2 Protected against water jets 5
–15°C 3 Protected against powerful water jets 6
–25°C 4 protected against the effects of temporary 7
–45°C 5 immersion in water
d) Fourth digit — Upper temperature range j) Ninth digit — Resistance against corrosion
[See Table 2 of IS 14930 (Part 1)] [See 6.4.3 of IS 14930 (Part 1)]
+ 60°C 1 Low protection inside and outside 1
+ 90°C 2 Medium protection inside and outside 2
+ 105°C 3 Medium protection inside, high protection outside 3
+ 120°C 4 High protection inside and outside 4
+ 150°C 5
+ 250°C 6 k) Tenth digit — Tensile strength
+ 400°C 7
[See 6.1.4 of IS : 14930 (Part 1)]
e) Fifth digit — Resistance to bending None declared 0
[See 6.1.3 of IS 14930 (Part 1)] Very light tensile strength 1
Light tensile strength 2
Rigid 1 Medium tensile strength 3
Pliable 2 Heavy tensile strength 4
Pliable/Self recovering 3 Very heavy tensile strength 5
Flexible 4

PART 1 GENERAL AND COMMON ASPECTS 99

SP 30 : 2011

m) Eleventh digit — Resistance to flame None declared 0

propagation Very light suspended load capacity 1
Light suspended load capacity 2
[See 6.5 of IS 14930 (Part 1)]
Medium suspended load capacity 3
Non-flame propagating 1 Heavy suspended load capacity 4
Flame propagating 2 Very heavy suspended load capacity 5

n) Twelfth digit — Suspended load capacity p) Thirteenth digit — Fire effects

[See 6.1.5 of IS 14930 (Part 1)] (Under consideration)

100 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

SECTION 10 SHORT-CIRCUIT CALCULATIONS

0 FOREWORD 3 GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS

Circuit calculations are performed for checking the 3.0 General
adequacy of the electrical equipment for any electrical
system that is characterized by the type of distribution 3.0.1 This subject of circuit calculations covers the
system comprising of transformers, bus, cables etc. guidelines relating to the short circuit withstand
capability of the electrical equipment and to check
The essential requirements and methods associated permissible voltage drop in cables and flexible cords
with following calculations are covered in this Section: upto the equipment terminals.
a) Short circuit calculations in 3 phase ac systems. 3.0.2 The objective of the circuit calculation is to ensure
b) Current carrying capacity and Voltage drop that the selection of equipment under consideration is
calculations for cables and flexible cords. designed for safe and reliable long period of operation.
Assistance for this Section has been derived from the 4 CIRCUIT CALCULATIONS
following standards:
4.1 Short Circuit Calculations
IS No. Title
13234 : 1992 Guide for short circuit calculation 4.1.1 Design Considerations
in three phase ac systems 4.1.1.1 A complete calculation of the short-circuit
13235 : 1991/ Calculation of the effects of short currents should give the currents as a function of time
IEC 865 (1986) circuit currents at the short circuit location from the initiation of the
short circuit up to its end, corresponding to the
1 SCOPE
instantaneous value of the voltage at the beginning of
This Part 1/Section 10 covers guidelines and general the short-circuit.
requirements associated with circuit calculations,
4.1.1.2 In most of the practical cases it is sufficient to
namely, short circuit calculations and voltage drop
determine the r.m.s value of symmetrical AC
calculations for cables and flexible cords.
component and the peak value ip of the short-circuit
2 REFERENCES current following the occurrence of a short circuit. The
value of ip depends on time constant of the decaying
The following Indian Standards have been referred in aperiodic component iDC with frequency depending on
this Section: the X/R ratio of the short-circuit impedance.
IS No. Title 4.1.1.3 For determination of asymmetrical short-circuit
2086 : 1993 Carriers and bases used in breaking current, the decaying aperiodic component
rewirable type electric fuses for iDC may be calculated with sufficient accuracy by:
voltages upto 650V
9926 : 1981 Fuse wires used in rewirable type iDC = 2 I k′′e −2π ftτ
electric fuses upto 650 V where
13703 (Part 2/ Specification for low-voltage
Sec 1) : 1993/IEC fuses for voltages not exceeding I"k = initial symmetrical short circuit current (A),
60269-2 : 1986 1 000 V ac or 1 500 V dc : Part 2 f = nominal system frequency (Hz),
Fuses for use by authorized t = time duration of fault(s), and
persons, Section 1 Supplementary
requirements τ = time constant based on system X/R.
13703 (Part 2/ LV fuses for voltages not 4.1.1.4 The calculation of maximum and minimum
Sec 2) : 1993/IEC exceeding 1000 V ac or 1500 V dc: short circuit current are based on the following
60269-2 : 1987 Part 2 Fuses for use by authorized considerations:
persons, Section 2 Examples of a) For the duration of the short-circuit there is
standardized fuses no change in the number of circuits involved,
IS/IEC 60898-1 : Electrical accessories—Circuit that is, a three phase short-circuit remains as
2002 breakers for over protection for three phase and similarly a line-to-earth short-
household and similar installations: circuit remains line-to-earth during the short
Part 1 Circuit breakers for ac circuit.
operation

PART 1 GENERAL AND COMMON ASPECTS 101

SP 30 : 2011

b) Tap changers of the transformer are at a) The ac component with constant amplitude
nominal position. during the whole short-circuit.
c) Arc resistances are not taken into account. b) The aperiodic component beginning with
initial value A and decaying to zero.
4.1.1.5 In situations where there will be no significant
change in ac component decay due to far distance from 4.1.1.6 For the systems where there will be significant
generator (see Fig. 1), short-circuit current can be change in ac component decay due to close location
considered as the sum of the following two near Generator (see Fig. 2), short circuit-current can be
components: considered as the sum of the following two components:

FIG. 1 SHORT-CIRCUIT CURRENT AT A SYSTEM FAR-FROM-GENERATOR

I’ k = initial symmetrical short-circuit current

ip = peak short-circuit current
Ik = steady-state short-circuit current
iDC = decaying (aperiodic) component of short-circuit current
A = initial value of the aperiodic component iDC

FIG. 2 S HORT-CIRCUIT CURRENT AT A SYSTEM NEAR -TO-GENERATOR

102 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

a) The ac component with decaying amplitude a) line-to-line short-circuit without earth

during the whole short circuit. connection
b) The aperiodic component beginning with b) line-to-line short-circuit with earth connection
initial value A and decaying to zero. c) line-to-earth short-circuit
4.1.2 Calculation Methods
Normally, the three-phase short-circuit current is the
4.1.2.1 General largest among the above listed type of faults. In the
event of a short-circuit near to a transformer with
Equivalent circuits are to be drawn for the system
neutral earthing or a neutral earthing transformer, the
before calculation of short-circuit current with example
line-to-earth short-circuit current may be greater than
as per Fig. 3.
the three-phase short-circuit current. This applies in
4.1.2.1.1 Balanced short-circuit particular to transformers of vector group Yz, Dy and
Dz when earthing the y- or z-winding on the low
The balanced three-phase short-circuit of a three-phase
voltage side of the transformer.
ac system often leads to the highest values of
prospective (available) short-circuit current and the In three-phase systems the calculation of the current
calculation becomes particularly simple on account of values resulting from unbalanced short-circuits is
the balanced nature of the short circuit. simplified by the use of the method of symmetrical
components which requires the calculation of three
In calculating the short-circuit current, it is sufficient
independent system components, avoiding any
to take into account only the positive sequence short-
coupling of mutual impedances.
circuit impedance, Z(l) = Zk as seen from the fault
location. Using this method, the currents in each line are found
by superposing the currents of three symmetrical
4.1.2.1.2 Unbalanced short-circuit
component systems:
The following types of unbalanced (asymmetrical)
a) positive-sequence current I(1),
short-circuits are to be considered:

3A System Diagram

3B Equivalent Circuit Diagram (Positive Sequence System)

F IG. 3 I LLUSTATION FOR CALCULATING THE INITIAL SYMMETRICAL SHORT-CIRCUIT CURRENT I"K IN COMPLIANCE
WITH THE PROCEDURE FOR THE EQUIVALENT V OLTAGE S OURCE

PART 1 GENERAL AND COMMON ASPECTS 103

SP 30 : 2011

b) negative-sequence current I(2), and currents. As the current is a function of time, the force
c) zero-sequence current I(0). will also be a function of time. In the case of a short-
circuit current without a dc component the force will
Taking the line L1 as reference the currents IL1, IL2 and vary with twice the frequency of the current. A dc
IL3are given by: component in the short-circuit current will give rise to
IL1 = I(1) + I(2) + I(0) (1a) an increase of the peak value of the force and to a
IL2 = a2 I(1) + a I(2) + I(0) (1b) component of force varying with the same frequency
as the current. The peak value of the force is of
IL3 = a I(1) + a2 I(2) + I(0) (1c)
particular interest in the case of mechanically rigid
Each of the three symmetrical component systems has structures.
its own impedance.
The force will result in bending stress on rigid
The method of the symmetrical components postulates conductors, tension stress and deflection in flexible
that the system impedances are balanced, for example conductors and bending, compression or tension loads
in the case of transposed lines. The results of the short- on the supports.
circuit calculation have an acceptable accuracy also in
4.1.3.1.2 Stresses in rigid conductors and forces on
the case of un-transposed lines.
supports
4.1.2.1.3 Short-circuit impedances
The conductors may be supported in different manners,
While calculating the impedances, there shall be either fixed or simple or in a combination of both, and
clear distinction between short-circuit impedances may have two, three, four or several supports.
at the short-circuit location and short-circuit Depending on the kind of support and the number of
impedances of individual electrical equipment. supports, the stress in the conductors and the forces on
Accordingly the calculations with symmetrical the supports will be different for the same short-circuit
components namely, positive-sequence, negative- current.
sequence and zero-sequence short-circuit
The stresses in the conductors and the forces on
impedances to be performed.
supports also depend on the ratio between the natural
4.1.3 Effects Due to Short Circuit frequency of the mechanical system and the frequency
of the electromagnetic force. Especially in the case of
4.1.3.1 The electromagnetic effect on rigid and slack
resonance, or near to resonance, the stresses and forces
(line) conductors
in the system may be amplified.
With the calculation methods, forces on insulators,
4.1.3.1.3 Tensile forces in slack conductors (line
stresses in rigid conductors and tensile forces in slack
conductors)
conductors are to be estimated.
A short-circuit current in a slack conductor will cause
4.1.3.1.1 Mechanical forces due to short-circuit
a tensile force in the conductor which will affect
currents
insulators, support structures and apparatus. It is
Currents in parallel conductors will induce necessary to distinguish between the tensile force
electromagnetic forces between the conductors. When during short-circuit and the tensile force after short-
the parallel conductors are long compared to the circuit, when the conductor falls back to its initial
distance between them, the forces will act evenly position.
distributed along the conductors.
4.1.3.2 Thermal effect on bare conductors
When the currents are in opposite directions the
The heating of conductors due to short-circuit currents
electromagnetic force is a repulsion which tends to
involves several phenomena of a non-linear character
induce deformations that would increase inductance
and other factors that have to be either neglected or
of the circuit.
approximated in order to make a mathematical
The value of the force in a given direction can be approach possible.
calculated by considering the work done in the case of
For the purpose of this calculation, the following
a virtual displacement in the actual direction. As the
assumptions can been made:
work is done by the electromagnetic force, it must be
equal to the change in the energy in the magnetic field a) Proximity-effect (magnetic influence of nearby
caused by this virtual displacement. parallel conductors) has been disregarded.
The force between two conductors is proportional to b) Resistance-temperature characteristic has
the square of the current, or to the product of the two been assumed linear.

104 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

c) The specific heat of the conductor is and

considered constant. n
d) The heating is generally considered adiabatic. Tk = ∑ Tki
i =1
4.1.3.2.1 Calculation of temperature rise
The loss of heat from a conductor during the short- 4.1.3.2.3 Calculation of temperature rise and rated
circuit is very low, and the heating can generally be short-time current density for conductors
considered adiabatic. Hence the calculation for this can The temperature rise in a conductor caused by a short-
also be based on adiabatic conditions. circuit is a function of the duration of the short-circuit
When repeated short-circuits occur with a short-time current, the thermal equivalent short-circuit current and
interval between them (that is rapid auto-reclosure) the the conductor material.
cooling down in the short dead-time is of relatively NOTE — The maximum permitted temperature of the support
low importance, and the heating can still be considered has to be taken into account.
adiabatic. In cases where the dead-time interval is of 4.1.3.2.4 Calculation of the thermal short-circuit
longer duration (that is delayed auto-reclosure) the heat strength for different durations of the short-circuit
loss may be taken into account. current
The calculation need not take into account the skin Electrical equipment has sufficient thermal short-circuit
effect, that is the current is regarded as evenly strength as long as the following relations hold for the
distributed over the conductor cross-section area. This thermal equivalent short-circuit current Ith:
approximation is not valid for large cross-sections, and
therefore for cross-sections above 600 mm2 the skin Ith ≤ Ithr for Tk ≤ Tkr
effect shall be taken into account.
Tkr
NOTE — If the main conductor is composed of sub-conductors, I th < I thr for Tk > Tk
uneven current distribution between the sub-conductors will Tk
influence the temperature rise of sub-conductors.
where Ithr is the rated short-time current and Tkr the
4.1.3.2.2 Calculation of thermal equivalent short-
rated short-time.
circuit current
The thermal short-circuit strength for a bare conductor
The thermal equivalent short-circuit current is to be
is sufficient when the thermal equivalent short-circuit
calculated using the short-circuit current r.m.s. value
current density Sth satisfies the following relation:
and the factors m and n for the time-dependent heat
effects of the dc and ac components of the short-circuit
current Tkr
Sth < Sthr
Tk
The thermal equivalent short-circuit current can be
expressed by: With Tkr =1 s and for all Tk, the rated short time current
density Sthr is shown in Fig 4.
Ith = I’’k m+n
4.2 Calculations for Current Carrying Capacity and
where m and n are numerical factors, I’’k the r.m.s. value
Voltage Drop for Cables and Flexible Cords
of the initial symmetrical short-circuit current; in a
three-phase system, the balanced three-phase short- 4.2.1 Conductor Operating Temperature
circuit is decisive. The values m and n are usually
The current to be carried by any conductor for sustained
defined as functions of the duration of the short-circuit
periods during normal operation shall be such that the
current. For a distribution network usually n = 1.
conductor operating temperature given in the
NOTE — The relation I’’k /Ik is dependent on the impedance appropriate table of current-carrying capacity in this
between the short-circuit and the source.
section is not exceeded.
When a number of short-circuits occur with a short
Where a conductor operates at a temperature
time interval in between, the resulting thermal
exceeding 70 °C it shall be ascertained that the
equivalent short-circuit current is obtained from:
equipment connected to the conductor is suitable for
the conductor operating temperature.
n
1
Ith = Tk
∑ I thi2 Tki 4.2.2 Cables Connected in Parallel
i =1
Except for a ring final circuit, cables connected in

PART 1 GENERAL AND COMMON ASPECTS 105

SP 30 : 2011

a) Full lines: Copper

Dotted lines: Flat product of unalloyed steel and steel cables.
b) Aluminium, aluminium alloy, aluminium conductor steel reinforced (ACSR).

F IG. 4 RELATION BETWEEN RATED SHORT-TIME CURRENT DENSITY (Tkr =1 S ) AND CONDUCTOR T EMPERATURE

106 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

parallel shall be of the same construction, cross- 4.2.6 Correction Factors for Current-Carrying
sectional area, length and disposition, without branch Capacity
circuits and arranged so as to carry substantially equal
The current-carrying capacity of cable for continuous
currents.
service is affected by ambient temperature and by
4.2.3 Cables Connected to Bare Conductors or Bus frequency. This Clause provides correction factors in
Bars these respects as follows.
Where a cable is to be connected to a bare conductor 4.2.6.1 Ambient temperature
or busbar its type of insulation and/or sheath shall be
In practice the ambient air temperatures may be
suitable for the maximum operating temperature of the determined by thermometers placed in free air as close
bare conductor or busbar. as practicable to the position at which the cables are
4.2.4 Cables in Thermal Insulation installed or are to be installed, subject to the proviso
that the measurements are not to be influenced by the
Where a cable is to be run in a space to which thermal heat arising from the cables; thus if the measurements
insulation is likely to be applied, the cable shall are made while the cables are loaded, the thermometers
wherever practicable be fixed in a position such that it should be placed about 0.5 m or ten times the overall
will not be covered by the thermal insulation. Where diameter of the cable whichever is the lesser, from the
fixing in such a position is impracticable the cross- cables, in the horizontal plane, or 150 mm below the
sectional area of the cable shall be appropriately lowest of the cables.
increased.
Where cables are subject to such radiation due to solar
For a single cable likely to be totally surrounded by or other infra-red, the current-carrying capacity may
thermally insulating material over a length of more need to be specially calculated.
than 0.5 m, the current-carrying capacity shall be taken,
4.2.6.2 Grouping
in the absence of more precise information, as 0.5 times
the current-carrying capacity for that cable clipped Appropriate correction factors to be applied to the
direct to a surface and open. manufacture declared current-carrying capacity where
cables or circuits are grouped.
Where a cable is to be totally surrounded by thermal
insulation for less than 0.5 m the current-carrying 4.2.7 Effective Current-Carrying Capacity
capacity of the cable shall be reduced appropriately
The current-carrying capacity of cable corresponds to
depending on the size of cable, length insulation and
the maximum current that can be carried in specified
thermal properties of the insulation. The de-rating conditions without the conductors exceeding the
factors have to be appropriate to conductor sizes. permissible limit of steady state temperature for the
4.2.5 Metallic Sheaths and/or Non-Magnetic Armour type of insulation concerned.
of Single-Core Cables The values of current calculated represent the effective
The metallic sheaths and/or non-magnetic armour of current-carrying capacity only where no correction
single-core cables in the same circuit shall normally factor is applicable. Otherwise the current-carrying
bonded together at both ends of their run (solid corresponds to the value multiplied by the appropriate
bonding). Alternatively the sheaths or armour of such factors for ambient temperature, grouping and thermal
cables having conductors of cross-sectional area insulation, as applicable.
exceeding 50 mm 2 and a non-conducting outer sheath Irrespective of the type of over current protective device
may be bonded together at one point in their run (single associated with the conductors concerned, the ambient
point bonding) with suitable insulation at the un- temperature correction factors to be used when
bonded ends, in which case the length of the cables calculating current-carrying capacity (as opposed to
from the bonding point shall be limited so that, at full those used when selecting cable size).
load, voltages from sheaths and/or armour to Earth,
4.2.8 Overload Protection
a) do not exceed 25 V
Where overload protection is required, the type of
b) do not cause corrosion when the cables are protection provided does not affect the current-carrying
carrying their full load current, and capacity of a cable for continuous service (Iz) but it
c) do not cause danger or damage to property may affect the choice of conductor size. The operating
when the cables are carrying short-circuit conditions of a cable are influenced not only by the
current. limiting conductor temperature for continuous service,
but also by the conductor temperature which might be

PART 1 GENERAL AND COMMON ASPECTS 107

SP 30 : 2011

attained during the conventional operating time of the Where the fixed current-using equipment concerned
overload protection device, in the event of an overload. is not the subject of Indian Standard the voltage at the
terminals shall be such as not to impair the safe
This means that the operating current of the protective
functioning of the equipment.
device must not exceed 1.45Iz. Where the protective
device is a fuse as per IS 13703 (Part 2/Section 1) The requirements are deemed to be satisfied for a
and IS 13703 (Part 2/Section 2) or IS 2086 or a supply given if the voltage drop between the origin of
miniature circuit breaker as per IS/IEC 60898, this the installation (usually the supply terminal) and the
requirement is satisfied by selecting a value of Iz not fixed current-using equipment does not exceed
less than In. 5 percent of the normal voltage of the supply.
In practice, because of the standard steps in nominal A greater voltage drop may be accepted for a motor
rating of fuse and circuit breakers, it is often necessary during starting periods and for other equipment with
to select a value of In exceeding Ib. In that case, because high in-rush currents provided it is verified that the
it is also necessary for Iz in turn to be not less than the voltage variations are within the limits specified in the
selected value of In, the choice of conductor cross- relevant Indian Standards for the equipment or, in the
sectional area maybe dictated by the over load absence of an Indian Standard, in accordance with the
conditions and the current-carrying capacity (Iz) of the manufacturer’s recommendations.
conductors will not always by fully used.
4.2.10.2 Calculation of voltage drop
The size needed for a conductor protected against
overload by a IS 9926 fuse fix in rewirable type fuse For a given run, to calculate the voltage drop (mV/A/m)
can be obtained by the use of a correction factor, the value for the cable concerned has to be multiplied
1.45/2 = 0.725 which results in the same degree of by the length of the run in metres and by the current
protection as that afforded by other overload protective the cable is intended to carry, namely the design current
devices. This factor is to be applied to the nominal of the circuit (Ib) in amperes.
rating of the fuse as a divisor, thus indicating the For three-phase circuits the calculated mV/A/m values
minimum value of It required of the conductor to be relate to the line voltage and balanced conditions have
protected. In this case also, the choice of conductor to be assumed.
size is dictated by the overload conditions and the
current carrying capacity (Iz) of the conductors can not The direct use of the calculated (m/V/A/m) r or
be fully used. (mV/A/m) z values, as appropriate may lead to
pessimistically high calculated values of voltage drop
4.2.9 Determination of the Size of Cable to be Used or, in other words, to unnecessarily low values of
permitted circuit lengths.
Having established the design current (Ib) of the circuit
under consideration, the conductor size has to be sized Where the design current of a circuit is significantly
necessarily from consideration of the conditions of less than the effective current-carrying capacity of the
normal load and overload is then determined. All cable chosen, the actual voltage drop would be less
correction factors affecting Iz (that is, the factor for than the calculated value because the conductor
ambient temperature, grouping and thermal insulation) temperature (and hence its resistance) will be less than
can, if desired, be applied to the values of I t as that on which the calculated mV/A/m had been based.
multipliers. This involves a process of trial and error In some cases it may be advantageous to take account
until a cross-sectional area is reached which ensures of the load power factor when calculating voltage drop.
that Iz is not less than Ib and not less than In of any
protective device it is intended to select. In any event, 4.2.10.3 Correction Factor for operating temperature
if a correction factor for protection by a semi-enclosed For cables having conductors of cross-sectional area
fuse is necessary, this has to be applied to In as a divisor. 16 mm2 or less the design value of mV/A/m is obtained
It is therefore more convenient to apply all the by multiplying the calculated value by a factor Ct, given by
correction factors to In as divisors. ⎛ I 2⎞
4.2.10 Voltage Drop in Consumers’ Installations ⎝ It ⎠
(
230 + t p − ⎜ Ca2 Cg2 − b2 ⎟ t p − 30 )
Ct =
4.2.10.1 Acceptable values of voltage drop 230 + t p
Under normal service conditions the voltage at the where t p = maximum permitted normal operating
terminals of any fixed current-using equipment shall temperature, in ° C.
be greater than the lower limit corresponding to the
NOTE — For convenience, the above formula is based on the
Indian Standard relevant to the equipment. resistance-temperature coefficient of 0.004 per °C at 20°C for
both copper and aluminum conductors.

108 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

For very large conductor sizes where the resistive values apply to the outer cables and may under-estimate
component of voltage drop is much less than the for the voltage drop between an outer cable and the
corresponding reactive part (that is when x/r ≥ 3) this centre cable for cross-sectional areas above 240 mm2
correction factor need not be considered. and power factors greater than 0.8.
4.2.10.4 Correction for load power factor 4.2.10.5 Combined correction for both operating
temperature and load power factor
For cables having conductors of cross-sectional area
of 16 mm2 or less the design value of mV/A/m is Where it is considered appropriate to correct the
obtained approximately by multiplying the calculated calculated mV/A/m value so for both operating
value by the power factor of the load, cos ϕ. temperature and load power factor, the design values
of mV/A/m are given by:
For cables having conductors of cross-sectional area
greater than 16 mm2 the design value of m/V/A/m is a) for cable having conductors of 16 mm2 or less
approximately: cross-sectional area
Cos ϕ [Calculated (m/V/A/m)r] + sin ϕ [Calculated Ct cos ϕ (Calculated mV/A/m)
(m/V/A/m)x] b) for cables having conductors of cross-
sectional area greater than 16 mm2
For single-core cables in flat formation the calculated
Ct cos ϕ (Calculated mV/A/m)r) + sin ϕ

PART 1 GENERAL AND COMMON ASPECTS 109

SP 30 : 2011

SECTION 11 ELECTRICAL ASPECTS OF BUILDING SERVICES

0 FOREWORD 3.2 Orientation of Building

Most of the modern day services in buildings depend 3.2.1 The chief aim of orientation of buildings is to
on electrical energy. These services, broadly; are: provide physically and psychologically comfortable
living inside the buildings by creating conditions which
a) Lighting and ventilation,
suitably and successfully ward off the undesirable
b) Air-conditioning and heating, and effects of severe weather to a considerable extent by
c) Lifts and escalators. judicious use of the recommendations and knowledge
of climatic factors.
From the point of view of conservation of energy and
safety in its use, it is found essential to draw attention 3.2.2 From the point of view of lighting and ventilation,
to essential design principles for building services. the following climatic factors influence the optimum
orientation of the buildings:
Apart from the three major power consuming services
in a building there are other functional/safety services a) Solar radiation and temperature,
that are basically light current installations, whose b) Clouds,
proper functioning is important. These are: c) Relative humidity, and
a) Electrical audio systems, d) Prevailing winds.
b) Fire-alarm and fighting systems, IS 7662 (Part 1) gives recommendations on orientation
c) Electric call-bell systems, of buildings.
c) Electric clock systems,
4 ASPECTS OF LIGHTING SERVICES
d) Computer system,
e) Telephone systems, and 4.1 Principles of Good Lighting
f) Building management systems. 4.1.1 Good lighting is necessary for all buildings and
Attention should be paid to the requirements to be has three primary aims. The first is to promote the work
complied within the design and construction of and other activities carried on within the buildings; the
building services. This Section provides basic second is to promote the safety of people using the
information on the electrical aspects of building building; and the third is to create, in conjunction with
services. Further details can be had from the relevant the structure and decoration, a pleasing environment
Indian Standards. conducive to interest and a sense of well-being.
Realization of these aims involves:
1 SCOPE
a) Careful planning of the brightness and colour
This Part 1/Section 11 of the Code covers requirements
patterns within the working area and the
for installation work relating to building services that
surroundings so that attention is drawn
use electric power.
naturally to the important areas, detail is seen
NOTE — SP 7 ‘National Building Code of India’ should be quickly and accurately and the room is free
referred for non-electrical aspects of building services. from any sense of gloom or monotony.
2 REFERENCES b) Using directional lighting, where appropriate,
to assist preception of task detail and to give
A list of Indian Standards related to building services good modelling.
is given at Annex A. c) Controlling direct and reflected glare from
3 GENERAL GUIDELINES light sources to eliminate visual discomfort,
d) In artificial lighting installations, minimizing
3.1 Extensive guidelines on building design aspects flicker from certain types of lamp and paying
have been covered in SP 7 from the point of view of attention to the colour rendering properties
ensuring economic services in an occupancy. These of the light.
shall be referred to from the point of view of ensuring e) Correlating lighting throughout the building
good design of building services and early coordination to prevent excessive differences between
amongst all concerned. adjacent areas and so as to reduce the risk of
accidents, and

110 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

f) Installing emergency lighting systems where the maintenance of heat balance of the body in order
necessary. to prevent discomfort and injury to health of the
occupants.
4.1.2 Good lighting design shall take into account the
following: 5.0.2 The following govern design considerations:
a) Planning the brightness pattern from the point a) Supply of fresh air for respiration,
of view of visual performance, safety and b) Removal of combustion products or other
amenity and surroundings; contaminants and to prevent vitiation by body
b) Form of texture in the task area and odours,
surroundings;
c) Recommended schedule of values of air
c) Controlling glare, stroboscopic effect and flicker; changes for various occupancies, and
d) Colour rendering; d) The limits of comfort and heat tolerance of
e) Lighting for movement; the occupants.
f) Provision for emergency;
5.1 Methods of Ventilation
g) Maintenance factors in lighting installation;
and General ventilation involves providing a building with
h) Maximum energy effectiveness of the lighting relatively large quantities of outside air in order to
system used consistent with the specific needs improve general environment of building. This may
of visual tasks performed. be achieved in one of the following ways:
4.1.3 Guidelines on principles of good lighting design a) Natural supply and natural exhaust of air,
can be had from IS 3646 (Part 1). Reference should be b) Natural supply and mechanical exhaust of air,
made to National Lighting Code, which covers all c) Mechanical supply and natural exhaust of air,
aspects of lighting.
and
4.2 Design Aspect d) Mechanical supply and mechanical exhaust
of air.
4.2.1 Illumination Levels
5.2 Mechanical Ventilation
The level of illumination for a particular occupation
depends on the following criteria: Reference should be made to IS 3103 and IS 3362
which cover methods of mechanical ventilation.
a) Adequacy for preventing both strain in seeing
and liability to accidents caused by poor 6 ASPECTS OF AIR-CONDITIONING AND
visibility, HEATING SERVICES
b) Adequacy for realizing maximum visual
capacity, 6.1 General
c) Adequacy for the performance of visual tasks The object of air-conditioning facilities in buildings
at satisfactory high levels of efficiency, and shall be to provide conditions under which people can
d) Adequacy for pleasantness or amenity. live in comfort, work safely and efficiently. It shall aim
4.2.2 Designing for Daylight at controlling and optimizing factors in the building
like air purity, air movement, dry bulb temperature,
Reference shall be made to IS 2440 and National relative humidity, noise and vibration, energy efficiency
Lighting Code. and fire safety.
4.2.3 Lighting Problems and Economics 6.1.1 The design of the system and its associated
Reference is drawn to Annexes C and D of IS 3646 controls should take into account the following:
(Part 1) and National Lighting Code. a) The nature of the application,
5 ASPECTS OF VENTILATION b) The type of construction of building,
c) External and internal load patterns,
5.0 General
d) Desired space conditions,
5.0.1 Ventilation of buildings is required to supply fresh e) Permissible control limits,
air for respiration of occupants, to dilute inside air to
f) Control methods for minimizing use of
prevent vitiation by body odours and to remove any primary energy,
products of combustion or other contaminants in air
g) Opportunities for heat recovery,
and to provide such thermal environments as will assist

PART 1 GENERAL AND COMMON ASPECTS 111

SP 30 : 2011

h) Economic factors (including probable future of heating, such as steam or electricity by means of a
cost and availability of power), thermostat or some other device, as soon as the
j) Outdoor air quality, temperature of the room reaches a predetermined high
k) Energy efficiency, level not exceeding 44ºC, unless a higher temperature
is required for an industrial process carried on in the
m) Filteration standard,
air-conditioned enclosure.
n) Hours of use,
p) Outdoor air quality, and 6.2.3 In case of air-conditioning plants where heating
by means of an electric heater designed to operate in
q) Diversity factor.
an air current is used, a safety device shall be
6.1.2 The operation of the system in the following incorporated in the installation to cut off the supply of
circumstances should be considered when assessing electricity to the heating device whenever there is
the complete design: failure of the air current in which the heater is required
to operate. Serious harm to the plant and sometimes
a) In summer;
fires may be caused by negligence in this respect.
b) In monsoon;
The surface temperature of all electric heaters used in
c) In winter; an air-conditioned plant should be limited, preferably
to 400°C, and in any case it shall not exceed 538°C,
d) In intermediate seasons;
when measured in still air.
e) At night;
6.2.4 Air-conditioning and ventilating systems
f) At weekends and holidays; circulating air to more than one floor or fire area shall
be provided with dampers designed to close
g) Under frost conditions, where applicable;
automatically in case of fire and thereby prevent
h) If electricity supply failure occurs and when spread of fire or smoke. Such system shall also be
the supply is restored; and provided with automatic controls to stop fans in case
of fire, unless arranged to remove smoke from a fire,
j) If extended low voltage conditions persist.
in which case these shall be designed to remain in
6.1.3 Consideration should be given to changes in operation.
building load and the system design so that maximum
6.2.5 Air-conditioning system serving large places of
operational efficiency is maintained under part load
assembly (over 1 000 persons), large departmental
conditions. Similarly, the total system should be
stores or hotels with over 100 rooms in a single block
separated into smaller increments having similar load
shall be provided with effective means for preventing
requirements so that each area can be separately
circulation of smoke through the system in the case of
controlled to maintain optimum operating conditions.
a fire in air filters or from other sources drawn into the
6.2 Electrical Requirements system even though there is insufficient heat to actuate
heat sensitive devices controlling fans or dampers. Such
6.2.1 Conduits means shall consist of suitable photo-electric or other
Where conduits are used for carrying insulated effective smoke sensitive controls, or may be manually
electrical conductors and when such conduits pass from operated controls.
a non-air-conditioned area into an air-conditioned area
7 ELECTRICAL ASPECTS OF LIFTS AND
or into a fan chamber of duct, a junction box shall be
ESCALATOR SERVICES
installed or other means shall be adopted to break the
continuity of such conduit at the point of entry or just 7.0 General
outside, and the conduit should be sealed round the
7.0.1 For the information of the electrical engineer,
conductors to prevent air being carried from one area
the lift/escalator manufacturer should advise the
into the other through the conduit and thereby giving
architect/engineer of the building of his structural and
rise not only to leakage and inefficiency but also to the
electrical requirements. This should be available early
risk of condensation of moisture inside the conduits.
in the planning stage to ensure proper electrical
The same method applies equally to other types of
provisions to be made for the service and suitable cables
wiring, like wood sheathing or ducts which allow air
and switchgears. During preliminary planning of the
to pass through around the conductors.
building, the aspect of lifts and escalators installation
6.2.2 In case of air-conditioning plants where re- shall be discussed with all concerned parties namely,
heating is used, a safety device shall be incorporated client, architect, consulting engineer and/or lift
in the installation to cut off automatically the source manufacturer.

112 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

7.0.2 The following aspects shall be taken into account from the intake room should be separate from
to decide the electrical requirements for lifts: other building service.
a) Number of lifts, size, capacity and position; Each lift should be capable of being isolated
from the mains supply. This means of
b) Number of floors served by the lift;
isolation should be lockable.
c) Height between floor levels;
b) For banks of interconnected lifts, a separate
d) Provisions for machine room and proper sub-circuit is required for the common
access to it; supervisory system, in order that any car may
e) Provisions for ventilation and lighting; be shut down without isolating the
f) Electric supply required; supervisory control of the remainder.
g) Details of wiring and apparatus required; c) Lighting — Machine rooms and all other
h) Quantity/quality of service; rooms containing lift equipment should be
j) Occupant load factors; provided with adequate illumination and with
a switch fixed adjacent to the entrance. At least
k) Car speed;
one socket outlet, suitable for lamps or tools,
m) Control system; should be provided in each room.
n) Operation and maintenance;
The car lighting supply should be independent of the
p) Provision for lift and depth;
power supply mains and should be connected to the
q) Number of entrances; inverter system with battery backup.
r) Provision of telephone or alarm bell inside
the lift car; Pits should be provided with a light, the switch for
which should be in the lift well, and accessible from
s) Provision of battery backup emergency light
the lower terminal floor entrance.
inside the lift car; and
t) Providing battery backup automatic rescue When the alarm system is connected to a transformer
device or uninterrupted power supply (UPS). or trickle-charger, the supply should be taken from the
machine room lighting.
7.1 Design and Operation
7.2.2 Electrical Wiring and Apparatus
Reference is drawn to IS 14665 (Part 2/Sec 1), IS 14665
7.2.2.1 All electrical supply lines and apparatus in
(Part 2/Sec 2), IS 14665 (Part 3/Sec 1) and IS 14665
connection with the lift installation shall be so
(Part 3/Sec 2).
constructed and shall be so installed, protected, worked
7.2 Electrical Installation Requirements and maintained that there may be no danger to persons
therefrom.
7.2.1 General
7.2.2.2 All metal casings or metallic coverings
The requirements for main switches and wiring with containing or protecting any electric supply lines of
reference to relevant regulations may be adhered to. apparatus shall be efficiently earthed.
The lift maker should specify, on a schedule, particulars
of full load current, starting current, maximum 7.2.2.3 No bare conductor shall be used in any life car
permissible voltage drop, size of switches and other as may cause danger to persons.
details to suit requirements. For multiple lifts a diversity 7.2.2.4 All cables and other wiring in connection with
factor may be used to determine the cable size and the lift installation shall be of suitable grade for the
should be stated by the lift manufacturer. voltage at which these are intended to be worked and if
It is important that the switches at the intake and in the metallic covering is used it shall be efficiently earthed.
machine room which are provided by the electrical 7.2.2.5 Suitable caution notice shall be affixed near
contractor are of correct size, so that correctly rated every motor or other apparatus operating at a voltage
fuses can be fitted. No form of ‘No Volt’ trip relay exceeding 250 V.
should be included anywhere in the power supply of
the lift. 7.2.2.6 Circuits which supply current to the motor shall
not be included in any twin or multicore trailing cable
The lift maker should provide overcurrent protection used in connection with the control and safety devices.
for power and control circuits, either on the controller
or by a circuit-breaker, but the following are not 7.2.2.7 A single trailing cable for lighting control and
included in the contract. signal circuit shall be permitted, if all the conductors
of this trailing cable are insulated for maximum voltage
a) Power supply mains — The lift sub-circuit running through any one conductor of this cable.

PART 1 GENERAL AND COMMON ASPECTS 113

SP 30 : 2011

7.2.2.8 Emergency signal or telephone the fitting and such length of flexible conduit shall be
effectively earthed.
It is recommended that lift car should be provided either
with an emergency signal that is operative from the One side of the secondary winding of bell transformers
lift car and audible outside the lift well or with a and their cases shall be earthed.
telephone.
7.3 Additional Requirements for Escalators
When an alarm bell is to be provided, each car is fitted
with an alarm push which is wired to a terminal box in 7.3.1 Connection Between Driving Machine and Main
the lift well at the ground floor by the lift maker. This Drive Shaft
alarm bell, to be supplied by the lift maker (with The driving machine shall be connected to the main
indicator for more than one lift), should be fixed in an drive shaft by toothed gearing, a coupling, or a chain.
agreed position and wired to the lift well. The supply
may be from a battery (or transformer) fixed in the 7.3.2 Driving Motor
machine room or, when available, from the building An electric motor shall not drive more than one
fire alarm supply. escalator.
When a telephone is to be provided in the lift car, the 7.3.3 Brake
lift maker should fit the cabinet in the car and provide
wiring from the car to a terminal box adjacent to the Each escalator shall be provided with an electrically
lift well. released, mechanically applied brake capable of
stopping the up or down travelling escalator with any
7.2.2.9 Building Management System — Interface for load up to rated load. This brake shall be located either
Lifts on the driving machine or on the main drive shaft.
Where more than three lifts are provided in a building
Where a chain is used to connect the driving machine
and especially when these are provided at different
to the main drive shaft, a brake shall be provided on
locations in the building, a form of central monitoring
this shaft. It is not required that this brake be of the
may be provided. Such central monitoring may be
electrically released type, if an electrically released
through a Building Management System, if provided
brake is provided on the driving machine.
in the building or through a display panel.
7.2.2.10 Earthing 7.3.4 No bare conductor shall be used in any escalator
as may cause danger to persons.
The terminal for the earthing of the frame of the motor,
the winding machine, the frame of the control panel, 7.3.5 Electrical conductors shall be encashed in rigid
the cases and covers of the tappet switch and similar conduits, electrical tubings or wireways which shall
electric appliances which normally carry the main be security fastened to the supporting structure.
current shall be at least equivalent to a 10 mm diameter 7.3.6 All electrical supply lines and apparatus in the
bolt, stud or screw. The cross-sectional area of copper escalator shall be of suitable construction and shall be
earthing conductor shall be not smaller than those so installed, protected, worked and maintained that
specified in Part 1/Sec 14 of the Code. there is no danger to persons from them.
The terminal for the earthing of the metallic cases and
All metal casings or metallic coverings, containing or
covers of doors interlocks, door contacts, call and
protecting any electric supply line or apparatus shall
control buttons, stop buttons, car switches, limit
be efficiently connected with earth.
switches, junction boxes and similar electrical fittings
which normally carry only the control current shall 7.3.7 Disconnect Switch
be, at least equivalent to a 5 mm brass screw, such
An enclosed, fused switch or a circuit-breaker shall be
terminal being specially provided for this purpose.
installed and shall be connected into the power supply
The earthing conductor shall be secured to earthing line to the driving machine motor. Disconnecting
terminal in accordance with the recommendations switches or circuit-breakers shall be of the manually
made in IS 3043 and also in conformity with the closed multi-pole type. The switch shall be so placed
provisions of Indian Electricity Rules 1956. that it is closed to and visible from the escalator
machine to which the supply is controlled.
Where screwed conduit screws into electric fittings
carrying control current and making the case and cover With dc power supplies the main disconnecting switch
electrically continuous with the conduit, the earthing and any circuit-breaker shall be so arranged and
of the conduit may be considered to earth the fitting. connected that the circuit of brake magnet coil is
Where flexible conduit is used for leading into a fitting, opened at the same time that the main circuit is opened.

114 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

7.3.8 Enclosure of Electrical Parts of loudspeakers installed at chosen locations. The

design of this installation shall be such that, depending
All electric safety switches and controllers shall be
on the nature of occupancy, the quality of reproduction
enclosed to protect against accidental contact.
is as desired. Reference is drawn to 5.2 of IS 1881 and
7.3.9 Caution Notice IS 1882 on the quality of reproduction suitable for
different purposes, and the acoustic power
Suitable ‘CAUTION’ notice shall be affixed near every
motor or other apparatus operating at a voltage requirements therein. The choice of equipment such
exceeding 250 V. as these for input signals, amplifying equipment/system
and loudspeaker shall be governed by the
7.3.10 Insulation considerations enumerated in IS 1881 and IS 1882.
The electrical parts of starting and stopping devices, 8.2.1 Wiring for Audio System
other operating and similar devices, controllers and
similar other parts shall be efficiently insulated and 8.2.1.0 All equipments shall be securely installed in
the insulation shall be capable of withstanding for a rooms guarded against unauthorized access.
period of one minute the continuous application of a Precautions shall be taken to keep dust away.
ac test voltage equal to ten times the voltage at which 8.2.1.1 All present controls should be mounted behind
these electrical parts are energized, subject to a cover plates and designed for adjustment only with the
maximum voltage of 2 000 V when the test voltage is help of tools. All controls shall be mechanically and
applied between contacts or similar parts in the open electrically noiseless.
position, and between such contacts and earthed parts.
8.2.1.2 The positioning of equipment shall be such that
8 ELECTRICAL ASPECTS OF AUDIO SYSTEM the lengths of the interconnecting cables is kept to the
SERVICES minimum.
8.0 General 8.2.1.3 In case the number of the equipment is large, they
8.0.1 This clause covers essential installation design shall be mounted on racks of suitable dimensions of metal
aspects of electrical audio systems for indoor and or wood, in such a manner that the controls are within
outdoor use both for temporary and permanent easy reach. The patch cords shall be neatly arranged.
installations. 8.2.1.4 In determining the positioning of the
8.0.2 This applies to sound distribution systems and microphones and loudspeakers in the installation,
public address systems but does not cover installations advice of an acoustical expert shall be sought for best
in conference halls where both microphones and accuracy and reproducibility.
loudspeaker are distributed amongst the audience. 8.2.1.5 For outdoor installations, the line-matching
8.0.3 Specific requirements if any, for individual transformers shall be mounted in weather-proof
occupancies are covered in individual Sections of the junction boxes.
Code. 8.2.1.6 In large open grounds such as an outdoor
8.0.4 For guidance on selection of equipment and their stadium, care shall be taken to ensure that the sound
installation and maintenance, reference shall be made heard from different loudspeakers do not have any
to IS 1881 and IS 1882. noticeable time lag.
8.2.1.7 The plugs and sockets used in electrical audio
8.1 Exchange of Information
systems shall not be interchangeable with those meant
8.1.1 The initial and ultimate requirements of the for power currents.
installations should be ascertained as accurately as
8.2.1.8 Microphone and gramophone cables shall
possible by prior consultations. Plans shall show,
preferably use twisted pairs of conductors with
a) details of the installation proposed, sufficient insulation screened continuously with a close
b) accommodation and location of the central mesh of tinned-copper braid. The copper braiding
amplifier equipment, and should be sheathed with an insulating covering. These
c) ducts and overhead lines required for wiring. shall be isolated from power, loudspeaker and
telephone cables. Joints in the cables shall be avoided.
8.2 Design Requirements Microphone cables shall be laid without sharp bends.
Indoor cables can be laid on the floor along the walls
8.2.0 The output from the microphone, gramophone, or under the carpet. When laid in the open, they shall
tape-recorder or radio receiver or CD player from a be either buried in the ground at a depth not less than
sound film is amplified and presented through a system 20 cm, or inside an iron-pipe at that depth if heavy

PART 1 GENERAL AND COMMON ASPECTS 115

SP 30 : 2011

mechanical movement is expected above. This may a) Heat detectors (see IS 2175):
also be laid overhead at a height not less than 3.5 m, 1) ‘Point’ or ‘spot’ type detector
clipped securely to a bearer wire. Any wiring required 2) Line type detector.
to be run along corridors or outside walls below 1.8 m NOTE — These may be of fixed temperature
shall be protected by a conduit. detector or rate of rise detector.

8.2.1.9 The loudspeaker cables shall be so chosen that b) Smoke detectors:

the line losses do not exceed the values given in Table 1
1) Optical detectors.
of IS 1882.
2) Ionization chamber detector,
8.2.2 Power Supplies 3) Chemically sensitive detector.
8.2.2.1 The equipment should normally operate from c) Flame detectors.
230 V, single phase 50 Hz ac mains supply. A voltage 9.1.2 For guidance on their choice and siting in the
regulating device shall be provided if the regulation is installation, see SP 7.
poorer than ±5 percent. In the absence of ac mains
supply the system shall be suitable for operating from 9.2 Wiring for Fire Alarm Systems
a storage battery.
9.2.1 The equipment and wiring of the fire alarm system
8.2.2.2 The supply mains shall be controlled by a MCB shall be independent of any other equipment or wiring,
of adequate capacity. and shall be spaced at least 5 cm away from each other
8.2.3 Earthing and other wiring. The wiring of the fire alarm systems,
shall be in metallic conduits. The wiring shall be kept
Proper earthing of the equipment shall be made in away from lift shafts, stair cases and other flue-like
accordance with good practice. opening.
8.3 Inspection and Testing 9.2.2 Alarm sounders shall be of the same kind in a
The completed installation shall be inspected and tested particular installation.
by the engineer to ensure that the work has been carried 9.2.3 For large or intricate premises, it is necessary
out in the manner specified. that the origin of a call be indicated. For this, the
8.4 Miscellaneous Provisions premises shall be divided into sections zones. All call
points in a section shall be connected to the same
Where necessary, that is in installations where the indicator. The various drops or lamp indicators shall
breakdown of the sound distribution systems should be grouped together on the main indicator board or
be restored instantaneously or within a limited time, control panel. When the premises are extensive, a
the stand-by equipment shall be readily available. number of main indicator boards may be used covering
different sectors. These shall be supplemented by sector
9 ELECTRICAL ASPECTS OF FIRE ALARM indicators for the various sectors at a central control
AND FIGHTING SYSTEMS point.
9.0 General 9.2.4 At the control point the indicator board or the
9.0.1 This clause covers the electrical aspects of the zone and section indicating boards and all common
installation of fire alarm/protection system in buildings. control apparatus and supervisory equipment shall be
located. For every installation a control point shall be
9.0.2 This clause is applicable in general to all types provided, where it can be under constant observation.
of occupancies, while specific requirements if any or The main control centre shall be located on the ground
individual situations are covered in the respective floor and should be segregated from the rest of the
sections of the Code. building by fire-break wall.
9.0.3 For total requirements for fire protection of 9.2.5 No section shall have more than 200 fire detectors
buildings, including non-electrical aspects such as connected together.
choice and disposition of fire-fighting equipment,
depending on the nature of occupancy installation and 9.2.6 The origin of the calls may be indicated by the
maintenance aspects, etc., reference shall be made to use of lamp indicators. Each indicator shall include:
SP 7 and the relevant Indian Standards. a) two lamps connected in parallel associated
9.1 Fire Detectors with each indication, so arranged that failure
of either of the lamps is readily apparent, or
9.1.1 The following types of fire detectors are available b) one lamp glowing during normal operation
for installation in buildings: of the system for each section and the alarm

116 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

indicated by the extinguishing of the lamp for 9.3.1.2 Sufficient power shall be made available for
the section where the call originates. Alarms the purpose and the power source shall be entirely
should not sound on the failure of the independent of all other equipment in the premises and
indicator. shall not be interrupted at any time by the main switch
controlling supply to the premises. An indicator lamp
9.2.7 The arrangement of the circuits and the electrical
connections shall be such that a call or fault in any shall continuously glow in a prominent position to
circuit does not prevent the receipt of calls on any other indicate status of power in the substation and in the
circuit. fire-pump room.

9.2.8 The indicating device associated with the various 9.3.1.3 Pumping sets shall be direct coupled type, and
call points and sections shall be grouped together on shall work satisfactorily at varying load.
the main indicator board. If necessary remote indicating 9.3.1.4 All motors and electrical equipment shall be
panel, with audible alarms in the night quarters of the continuously rated, drip-proof with air inlets and outlets
caretaker of the building should be provided. protected with meshed wire panels where required
9.2.9 The silencing switches/push buttons in their off motors shall have a suitable fixed warming resistance
position shall give an indication of this fact on the main to maintain them in dry condition.
control panel operation of silencing switches shall not 9.3.1.5 The starting equipment of the set shall
prevent sounding of alarm from any other zone incorporate an ammeter and clearly marked to show
simultaneously, or cancel the other indications of the full load current. They shall not incorporate no-volt
alarm or fault. trips.
9.2.10 For fire alarm systems, cables of the following 9.3.1.6 The electric circuit for fire fighting system shall
types shall be used: be provided at its origin with a suitable switch for
a) Mineral insulated aluminium sheathed cables; isolation, but overload and no-volt protection shall not
b) PVC insulated cables, be provided in the switch.
c) Rubber insulated braided cables, 10 ELECTRICAL CALL BELL SERVICES
d) PVC or rubber insulated armoured cables, and
e) Hand metal sheathed cables. 10.0 General

The laying of the cables shall be done in accordance 10.0.1 Guidance on installation of electric bells and
with Part 1/Section 1 of the Code. call systems are covered in IS 8884.

9.2.11 The source of supply for the alarm system shall 10.0.2 On the basis of information collected on the
be a secondary battery continuously trickle/float extent of installation of electric bells and buzzers, or
charged from ac mains, with facilities for automatic indicator call system in the building, the following
recharging in 8 h sufficiently to supply the maximum aspects shall be ascertained in collaboration with the
alarm load at an adequate voltage for at least 2 h. The parties concerned:
capacity of battery shall be such that it is capable of a) Accommodation required for control
maintaining the maximum alarm load on the system at apparatus, location and distribution points;
an adequate voltage for at least 1 h plus the standing and
load or losses for at least 48 h. Suitable overload b) Details of chases, ducts and conduits required
protective devices shall be provided to prevent for wiring.
discharging of the batteries through the charging
equipment. 10.1 Equipment and Materials
9.3 Fire Fighting Equipment 10.1.1 If wooden bases are used for bells and buzzers,
the component parts shall be rigidly held together
9.3.0 The choice of fire fighting equipment and their independently of the base, so that they are unaffected
installation details shall be governed by the by any warping.
requirements specified in SP 7.
10.1.2 Bells and buzzers which have a make or break
9.3.1 Requirements for Electrical Drives for Pumps in contact shall be provided with means of adjusting the
Hydrant and Sprinkler Systems contact gap and pressure and means for locking the
9.3.1.1 Full details of the electric supply shall be arrangement.
furnished together with details of generator plant to 10.1.3 Equipment for outdoor use shall be suitably
the appropriate authorities. protected against the environmental conditions.

PART 1 GENERAL AND COMMON ASPECTS 117

SP 30 : 2011

10.1.4 Bell push switches shall be of robust 10.2 Choice of Call Bell System
construction. Terminals shall be of adequate size and
The following guidelines are recommended:
should be so arranged that the loosening of a terminal
screw does not disturb the contact assembly. Any a) Simple call bell system — For dwellings and
flexible chords attached to them should be covered with small offices (see Fig. 1).
hard wearing braid. b) Multiple call bell system — Hotels, hospitals
10.1.4.1 Relays may be required for the following or similar large buildings where call points
situations: are numerous (see Fig. 2).
c) Time bell system — Factories, schools.
a) Where mains operated device is to be
controlled by a circuit operating at a voltage 10.3 Power Supply
not exceeding 24 V,
The system may be operated at the normal mains
b) For repeating a call indication until at a distant voltage, though it is preferable for the control circuit
point or points, and to be operated at a voltage not exceeding 24 V.
c) For maintaining a call indication until an
indication is reset. 10.4 Wiring

10.1.5 The indications shall be one of the following The wiring shall be done in accordance with
types: Part 1/Section 9 of the Code.

a) Lamp type — where sound of bell is 11 CLOCK SYSTEMS

undesirable; for example in hospitals or in
noisy locations such as forges, mills, etc. 11.1 Design Considerations
b) Flag type — where positive indication is 11.1.1 Reference is drawn to 5.1 of IS 8969. A
required which remain in position until schematic diagram is shown in Fig. 3.
restored.
11.1.2 The enclosure of the clocks shall have no
c) Pendulum type — for small installations
openings giving access to live parts or functional
having up to 20 call points.

FIG. 1 SIMPLE ELECTRIC CALL BELL SYSTEM

118 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

FIG. 2 MULTIPLE CALL BELL S YSTEM

insulated parts or functional insulation other than the 11.2 Location of Clocks
openings necessary for the use and working of the
11.2.1 The master clock shall be placed in a room not
clocks. Where such openings are necessary, sufficient
smaller than 2.4 m × 3.6 m.
protection against accidental contact with live parts
shall be provided. 11.2.2 The location and size of slave clocks may
frequently depend upon aesthetic requirements, but
11.1.3 To ensure necessary continuity of supply, direct
from the point of view of readability, a ratio of
connection of the system to the supply mains is not
0.30 m diameter of dial to every 2.7 m of height is
recommended. Batteries should always be provided.
acceptable. The following is adequate:
The capacity of the battery shall be at least sufficient
to supply the installation for 48 h, not less than 10 Ah.
Dia of Clock Height from Floor
11.1.3.1 Where the supply is ac, single battery on 0.30 m 2.70 m
constant trickle charge is recommended, means being 0.45 m 3.30 m
provided for charging at a higher rate when necessary. 0.60 m 4.50 m
11.1.3.2 Where the supply is dc, two batteries should
be provided with changeover switch.

PART 1 GENERAL AND COMMON ASPECTS 119

SP 30 : 2011

11.3 Wiring commercial, industrial, public, medical establishments

and industrial premises. The requirements differ
The wiring shall be done in accordance with Part 1/
according to the particular purpose of the building. The
Section 9 of the Code. Special conductor shall be
complexities of the services also relate to the
provided, or the conduit may be colour coded for
requirements and additionally to the size and class-
distinction from other circuits.
type of the building.
12 ELECTRICAL ASPECTS OF COMPUTER
12.1 Exchange of Information
CONTROL OF ENVIRONMENTAL SYSTEMS
12.1.0 The architect should exchange information with
12.0 General the engineer concerned when the building plans are
12.0.1 Building users require services to meet the being prepared. The chief purpose of such an exchange
environmental and functional needs associated with a is to obtain information regarding the architectural and
particular type of building, and these services vary electrical features of the building so that due provision
considerably according to the type of building involved. may be made to retain the aesthetic features and the
However, the basic requirements are for comfort, safety essential services while planning the locations of the
security, efficiency, reliability and operational utilities. various devices and equipment of the environmental
The increased application requirement calls for services. Information may also be obtained at an early
coordinated and efficient control of the various systems stage regarding other services, such as electrical
and their sub-systems. Configuration of these systems installation, gas and water pipes etc.
in a computer programme is a necessicity now. 12.1.1 Scale drawings showing plans and elevations
12.0.2 General building classifications are residential, of the structure, electrical wirings shall be obtained

FIG. 3 IMPULSE MASTER CLOCK SYSTEM

120 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

and the nature and location of the devices, sensors and subject to the approval of the local fire prevention
controllers of the environmental services shall be authority. It is possible to keep the fire protection
indicated on them. system panel separate while still providing
communication links with the BMS for alarm and
12.1.2 The initial and final requirements of the
reporting purposes.
installations should be ascertained as accurately as
possible by prior consultations. Plans shall show, 12.3.2 Back-up power supplies such as the UPS
systems, although required for any BMS, need more
a) details of the installations proposed;
consideration for centralized intelligence systems. A
b) accommodation and locations of the central parallel systems structure and duplication of equipment
control units, server, monitor, etc; and to provide redundancy facilities may also be necessary,
c) ducts and cable routing required for wiring. depending on the level of reliability required or the
12.2 Building Management System (BMS) importance of the functions.

12.2.0 Thermal comfort, lighting, ventilation, air- 12.4 Design Requirements

conditioning, security, safety, fire detection and control
12.4.1 The BMS shall include all workstation software
system and electrical power are always required, and
and hardware, Process Control Units (PCU), Terminal
residential building represents this basic level of need.
Controllers, Local Controller, Local Area Network
12.2.1 The management of building services systems (LAN), sensors, control devices, actuators, system
for a larger establishment is more difficult due to the software, Interconnecting cable, installation and
variety, increased complexity, lack of individual calibration, supervision, Distributed intelligence
responsibility and high capital and operating costs for systems also have a central computer, with the addition
the systems involved. The more complex control of remote intelligent outstations capable of carrying
systems are termed building management systems out all control functions independent of the main
(BMS). They are employed in commercial, public and computer. Outstations are located near to the building
industrial buildings and control the services of heating, zone which they serve, as in the earlier systems, and
ventilation, air-conditioning, steam, refrigeration, gas, are programmed to perform the required control
water, general and emergency lighting, emergency functions. The outstation can, however, be interrogated
electrical systems, power distribution, mechanical and reset from the main computer and also
transportation, fire detection alarm and fighting communicate routine information and alarms as
systems, general and noxious fume ventilation, security required by the plant operator.
and waste disposal.
12.4.2 System administration shall be available from
12.2.2 The building management systems (BMS) the Workstation in Control Room on Ethernet LAN
means that all services can be monitored and reset from (Local Area Network) WAN (Wide Area Network) in
a central location without delay or movement by the the system. The system specifically must have the
engineer. BMS can also advise on preventative capability to support multiple workstations, depending
maintenance schedules, thereby improving overall on complexity and magnitude of the services,
plant reliability and operating efficiency. Consequently, connected on the LAN or WAN network at the same
plant operation is greatly simplified by allowing an time. The building management system shall allow all
engineer to reset any control level, monitor energy con- connected workstations to function in a true multi-user,
sumption, organize maintenance and make fault multi-tasking environment employing user-friendly
diagnosis from a central location. Remedial action is Windows platform using TCP/IP Protocol or any other
quicker and can often be carried out by a smaller open protocol.
engineering staff than would be required otherwise.
12.4.3 The system architecture shall be capable of
12.3 BMS Architecture supporting single site and/or campuses as well as
multiple sites located in different geographical
12.3.1 BMS architecture and performance locations.
requirements shall be based on a distributed system of
intelligent, stand alone controllers, operating BMS 12.4.4 The system shall be capable of modular
incorporates control and monitoring of all systems such expansion without software upgrades or wiring
as environmental, fire and security but, in some cases, revisions.
separate dedicated fire protection systems are favoured
12.5 General Characteristic of Software
by the authorities and reference to local fire codes and
regulations is essential. The integration of fire 12.5.1 Software shall be modular in design for
protection and security systems into BMS shall be flexibility in expansion or revision of the system.

PART 1 GENERAL AND COMMON ASPECTS 121

SP 30 : 2011

12.5.2 The software shall include a General Purpose using a twisted pair in either a ring, star or tree network.
Operating System, which will be based on a user-
12.6.2.3 Optic fibre transmission is currently being
friendly open platform. The architecture of the system,
installed and allows very fast and high bandwidth
and the application software/firmware shall generally
be compiled for faster execution speeds. transmission. As BMS becomes more widely accepted,
it is likely that system capacities will increase to a level
12.6 Hardware Requirements that will make optic fibre technology an attractive
proposition.
12.6.0 The BMS consists of many subsystems and
equipment, sensors and peripheral devices. However, 12.6.2.4 For transmission distances within the building
the servers provide a single interface point for or site up to about 1.6 km, telephone lines are usually
operations, maintenance and management analysis. employed. The computer and outstations are connected
Various subsystems and systems are connected to to the telephone line via a modem, which converts the
provide information on different parameters at different input signals to pulses which are transmittable on the
locations. telephone line, thus enabling information to be
12.6.1 The on-site operator workstation shall be user transmitted and received.
friendly, operator interface with the complete system. 12.6.2.5 In many cases, particularly for remote sites
As an example, the requirements of a workstation an autodial modem restricts the use and cost of
equipment are given below: telephone lines by automatically communicating only
a) Workstation equivalent to Pentium-IV 1GHz when required. Autodial modems are therefore used
or higher processor, for large or multiple sites and the telephone lines are
b) 256 MB Random Access Memory, accessed through the existing telecom system. Modems
c) 40 GB Hard Disk or better, generally operate over a range of speeds (baud rate)
with generally increased cost for the higher speed, for
d) 3.5 IN, 1.44 MB Diskette Drive,
example, 9 600 baud is now common. (1 baud = 1 bit/
e) Read/Write CD ROM 52X or Faster; second.) The baud rate is software set to suit the
f) Serial Port, particular system, and some manufacturers use higher
g) Parallel Printer Port, transmission rates for directly wired systems.
h) USB Port,
12.6.2.6 Autodial communication with the computer
j) 19" SVG Colour Monitor, can be either direct dialling by the operator,
k) Colour Graphics Card with at least 6 MB programmed down-loading of data at predetermined
RAM, times, or priority alarm reports.
m) 101 Keyboard,
12.6.2.7 It is advisable to have more than one line per
n) 3 button track ball with scroll wheel/optical
station, one of which is dedicated to priority reporting
mouse,
and the other to routine reporting and monitoring. This
p) 3COM Etherlink III with modem, and allows each function to be effective without conflict
q) Printer. with the other.
12.6.2 System Controllers 12.6.3 Control Monitoring Stations
It is desirable to monitor and/or control all points in 12.6.3.1 A typical control monitoring station consists
the system through ‘Intelligent’ Distributed Control of a microcomputer, visual display unit (VDU),
Units. Each Distributed Control Unit in the system shall backing store and printer. One station is usually
contain its own microprocessor and memory with a installed in a central location, but systems with several
minimum 300 h battery backup. Each distributed stations working on a master/slave principle can be
control unit shall be a completely independent stand- obtained for large sites.
alone ‘master’ with its own hardware clock calendar 12.6.3.2 Buildings under phased development can be
and all firmware and software to maintain complete provided with a distributed intelligence system without
on an independent basis. a central computer. Under these circumstances, the
12.6.2.1 Communication backbone outstation can be programmed and interrogated directly
by portable hand-held microcomputers, which are
12.6.2.2 The central computer communicates with the taken around the site by personnel and plugged into
outstations through a standard interface and either a the outstation as required. A central computer can be
dedicated line, a leased line or a telephone switched added to the system at a later date, when the
line. Smaller systems on one site are usually connected development is complete or finances allow.

122 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

12.6.3.3 The location of the central computer requires c) Cables

careful consideration and should be provided with a
1) LAN
clean power supply with back-up, as referred to
previously. If connected to fire safety systems, it should 22 AWG (0.324 mm) shielded, twisted
be located where it can be easily accessed and pair (Belden 9184), 5 000' (1 500 mm)
interrogated by the fire brigade. The fire alarm maximum or 24 AWG (0.206 mm)
protection system may be connected directly to the fire shielded, twisted pair (Belden 9841)
brigade, but the information supplied at the control 4 000' (1 200 mm) maximum per
station is likely to be more comprehensive and useful segment.
for directing fire-fighting operations and controlling 2) Communication ports
services that may affect safety or the spread of fire. i) Controller LAN: RS-485; 19,200 or
Smoke removal and staircase pressurization systems
9 600 baud, SDLC, token-passing.
for high rise buildings are often an integral part of the
mechanical ventilation or air conditioning system. ii) Hand Held Console Port: RJ11
When this is the case, ready access by the fire brigade Modular, 1 200 baud, TTL.
for system status and control is essential. iii) RS-232 Port: PC @ 9 600 baud
(7801 TAP function), or Hayes direct
12.6.4 VDUs and Key Boards
dial asynchronous modem @ 1 200,
12.6.4.1 High resolution VDUs enable text and 2 400 baud or 9 600 baud.
graphics to be displayed. Communication with the iv) RS-232 Expansion Board Port:
system software can be through keyboard, mouse or Supports synchronous modem,
touch screen. The touch screen is the simplest but least direct or two-way dial SDLC (78061
flexible method and has not been widely adopted by or 78035 TAP functions) @ baud
BMS manufacturers. rates of 1 200 to 9 600 baud.
12.6.5 Printers Requires optional plug on module.
12.6.5.1 The output of data and information from the 3) Network wiring requirements
system is transferred to paper copy by a printer. This Cable Supported: Twisted pair, shielded.
is essential so that a readable log of the system 22 AWG (0.324 mm2) or larger, 30 pF/ft.
performance is available for distribution to other or less between conductors, 55 pF/ft. or
interested members of the engineering and less conductor to shield, 85 to 150 Ohm
management team. impedance Belden 9841 or equivalent.
12.6.6 LANs 4) Controller LAN length
i) 1 500 m per segment.
12.6.6.1 The Controller LAN utilizes a peer-to-peer,
token passing protocol to communicate between nodes ii) 7 600 m with repeaters
on the network. The Process Control Unit shall provide 5) Controller LAN
direct control and monitoring of process functions from RS-485; 19 200 or 9 600 baud, SDLC,
a ‘Peer-to-Peer’ LAN based controller. These process token-passing.
functions include environmental control, trending, 6) Door controller LAN
energy management, and process control, which may
RS-485; 9 600 baud, asynchronous,
be executed locally in a stand-alone mode or
polling.
‘globalized’ across the Token Passing LAN, reports.
7) Hand held console port
12.6.7 Data Communications
RJII Modular; 1 200 baud, TTL.
12.6.7.1 The standard specifications of generally 8) RS-232 port
acceptable ratings are indicated hereunder: PC @ 9 600 baud (7801 TAP function)
a) PC port or Hayes direct-dial a synchronous
modem @ 1.200, 2 400 or 9 600 baud.
1) Protocol: Asynchronous, Polling, RS-232
9) RS-232 expansion board port
2) Baud Rate: 300, 1 200, 2 400 or 9 600
Bps Supports synchronous modem, direct or
b) Host LAN two-way dial SDLC (78061 or 78035
TAP functions) @ baud rate of 1 200 to
1) Protocol: Token Passing, RS-485 9 600 baud, Requires optional plug on
2) Baud Rate: 9 600 or 19 200 Bps module.

PART 1 GENERAL AND COMMON ASPECTS 123

SP 30 : 2011

10) Network wiring requirements 12.7.1.2 Cables on trays and ladders

i) Controller LAN length Cables shall be fixed neatly to trays and ladders in
1 500 m per segment; 7 600 m with single layers and parallel to the tray edge to avoid
repeaters unnecessary crossovers. Cables shall be fixed at
ii) Micro controller sub-LAN length intervals not exceeding 48" by means of non-corrosive
1 500 m fastening materials.
1) Cable supported 12.7.1.3 Segregation
Twisted pair, shielded, 22 AWG
(0.324 mm2) or larger, 30 pF/ft. Data cabling shall be physically segregated from power
or less between conductors, 55 and SMS input/output cabling and mains cabling.
pF/ft. or less conductor to
12.7.2 Panels
shield, 85 to 150 ohm
impedance. 12.7.2.1 General
2) Auto dial support telephone Panels and Controllers shall be installed within a
numbers dedicated metal enclosure.
8; stored in NOVRAM, Number
of Digits — 31 per phone 12.7.2.2 Documentation
number; Supported — Phone, Terminal numbers, points list, point addresses and short
Beeper, Pager. and long descriptions shall be described inside a plastic
12.6.8 Input/Output Sensors fade-free in a pocket.

The input devices, depending on application and usage 12.7.3 Small Point Controllers
are:
Small point controllers shall be installed adjacent to
a) Space air temperature sensor, the controlled device, accessible for maintenance and
b) Relative humidity sensor, contained in a suitable enclosure.
c) Air flow switch, 12.7.4 Transmission Systems
d) Water flow switch,
e) Water flow measuring transducer, 12.7.4.1 The BMS shall utilize the above LAN
architecture to allow all of the Control Units to share
f) Tank float switch,
data as well as to globalize alarms. The Controller LAN
g) Current sensor, shall be based on a peer-to-peer, token passing
h) kWh transducer, technique with a data speed of not less than 19.2 kB.
j) Current, voltage and watt transducers, The turnaround time for a global point to be received
k) Occupancy sensor, by any node, including operator stations, shall be less
m) Personal attendance sensor, than 3 s.
n) Motion detector, 12.7.4.2 Fiber Optic Pathways, Fiber Optic Media shall
p) Electronic door lock, be used, as required, between buildings for the
q) Card reader, Controller LANs. Wherever the Optical Fiber enters
r) Access controller, or leaves the building, provide a fiber to hard copper
s) Damper and valve and their actuators, and interface device. The FOI shall regenerate data prior
to transmitting this data to either the fiber or hard
t) Electronic to pneumatic transducers.
copper channels, so as not to result in the degradation
12.7 Installation of signal and to minimize the accumulation of errors
between multiple FOIs. The FOI shall include “jabber”
All devices shall be installed in pre-engineering protection, such that continuous data from a defective
locations to be shown on the drawings in accordance component will not destroy communications on the
with standard industry practice.
LAN. Provide visual indication of receiving and
12.7.1 Cables transmitting data activity on the hardwired drop.
Provide visual indication of data transmission on the
12.7.1.1 Cables in conduits
fiber media, jabber presence of fiber and hard copper
It shall be secured from building structure, not from channels, and bad signal quality on the hard copper
other services. channel.

124 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

12.8 Testing and Commissioning EPABX system. This means that information on
number of subscribers in the building, distribution of
12.8.1 General
the phones in the floors and other areas, nature of traffic
The contractor shall perform all tests submitted in the etc are to be collected.
Test Procedure and remain on site until the BMS is
13.1.2 The initial and final requirements of the
fully operational.
installations should be ascertained as accurately as
12.8.2 Factory Testing possible by prior consultations. Plans shall show:
Demonstrate such control loop shall be demonstrated a) details of the installations proposed;
including all calculations and global functions. Analog b) the accommodation and location of the
values shall be simulated, if required. Attendance by EPABX console, monitor, etc; and
three (3) persons nominated by the Owner shall be c) the ducts and cable routing required for
allowed. After Test, summary of results and necessary wiring.
modifications shall be submitted.
12.8.3 Final Acceptance Test 13.2 Design Requirements

Acceptance of the system shall require a demonstration 13.2.1 The basic architecture and performance
of the standby of the system. This test shall not start requirements of the modern day communication system
until the customer has obtained 30 days beneficial use is microprocessor-based pulse code modulated (PCM)/
of the system. Time Division Multiplexing (TDM) technology.
13.2.2 The environmental conditions for the EPABX
13 TELEPHONE SYSTEMS should preferably be controlled so that the room air
13.0 General temperature is maintained between 10 oC and 40 oC
and relative humidity between 50 percent and
13.0.1 Telephone systems are classified as 95 percent.
communications systems. Telephone communication
through the public network is in most countries the 13.2.3 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) is
responsibility of the Telecom administrations. These a common requirement now-a-days for commercial
are systems, which must meet more stringent buildings since it is possible to handle simultaneous
requirements for reliability of transmission. calls of different types namely voice, data and images
transfer (Tele & Video conferencing) without any loss
13.0.2 Electronic Private Automatic Branch Exchanges of data, at a minimum speed of 64 kBps, which can be
(EPABX) increased further depending on requirement. EPABX
Electronic private branch exchanges are connected to system shall be capable of interfacing with other
the public exchanges through exchange lines. EPABX system through appropriate protocol.
Operationally they form part of the subscriber 13.2.4 Hardware Requirement
equipment of the public telephone system. EPABX
permit internal communication between the extensions 13.2.4.1 Electronic private automatic branch exchange
of a system and external communication, for approved In EPABX system the individual call stations are
branch systems, over the exchange lines. connected each by a twisted pair of wires to the
Communication within the private branch system, automatic exchange (see Fig.4). This is also the
normally, does not attract charges. termination for the exchange lines and, where
13.0.3 Backbone Cabling necessary.

Generally the inter-floor/inter-building backbone 13.2.4.2 Power supply

cabling is included in the scope of main building Depending on the size and type of installation, the
design. The backbone cabling should accommodate telephone system requires for its operation a dc power
analog voice signal alone or analog and data signals supply of 24 V or 48 V, which is obtained from the
simultaneously, as the case may be. It is the speed of power mains through a rectifier. The rectifiers, provided
data transmission and bandwidth, which matter most with closed-loop control and for small and medium
in the design of the communication backbone. sized systems, are accommodated in the exchange
housing. For large systems rectifiers (controlled) are
13.1 Exchange of Information supplied in separate cabinets.
13.1.1 The exact requirement of the subscribers shall 13.2.5 Standby Batteries
be assessed before drawing out the specification of the
Standby batteries can be provided as an adjunct to the

PART 1 GENERAL AND COMMON ASPECTS 125

SP 30 : 2011

rectifier. These are necessary for important installations depending on functional requirement. Some of the most
such as police stations, fire stations, etc, to cover common features included are Abbreviated Dialing,
possible main supply failures. Recorded Announcement System, Last number redial,
Executive override, multi-party conference, call
13.2.6 Space Requirements forwarding, Direct Inward Dialing (DID), Automatic
13.2.6.1 The switching equipment for the telephone alarm make-up call, STD barring, group hunting,
systems and small EPABX’s takes up little room. Apart networking facility.
from the telephones, only relatively small wall-
13.3 Installation
mounted junction boxes or exchange units are required.
The exchanges, furthermore, produce little or no noise, 13.3.1 Wiring Installation
so that they can be accommodated in an office if For wiring within buildings, wire is mainly installed in
desired. For large systems a separate room should be embedded PVC conduit, or wiring cables with
provided for the exchange equipment, and similarly conductors of 0.6 mm or 0.8 mm diameter for surface
for the answering panel. Space should be allowed in wiring.
planning for additional cabinets or racks, exchange
equipment platforms etc that may be necessitated by 13.3.1.1 In running the wires it is important to maintain
a separation of at least 10 mm between the
future enlargement of the systems. The size of the
communications wiring and power cables.
battery room depends upon the type of power supply
equipment used. 13.3.1.2 If conductors belonging to different
communications systems are run together — for
13.2.7 Features
example, telephone wires and loudspeaker wires, or
There are various features available with the present heavily loaded slave clock circuits — there is a risk of
day EPABX with introduction of concerned cards and mutual interference between them. In such cases it is
features to be incorporated have to be decided advisable to use screened cables.

FIG. 4 EXAMPLE OF THE ARRANGEMENT OF A BASIC EPABX SYSTEM IN LARGE BUILDING

126 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

13.3.1.3 In communication cables the cores are twisted conduit from floor to floor, horizontal branches in the
together either in pairs or in star quad formation. For floors up to the distribution boxes in the apartments,
speech transmission — to avoid crosstalk — either a and between the distribution boxes in the apartments
twisted pair or, in the case of the star quad a pair of and the flush-type junction boxes.
opposite cores — should be used.
13.3.3 Connection of Telephones
13.3.2 Ducts, Apertures and Channels
13.3.3.1 At the positions allocated for the telephones
In the course of constructing the shell of the building the the conduit should be terminated in flush-type boxes.
appropriate channels and ducts should be formed in the For junction boxes and socket outlets for the connection
masonry and lead-through apertures provided in walls, of telephones, flush-type boxes (switch boxes) to
ceilings, joists and pillars. Suitable accommodation should standards are adequate. A maximum of two telephones
be provided for the distribution boards in large can be connected to a junction box.
communications system (for example recesses, shafts
13.3.3.2 In most cases the telephone is connected
etc).
permanently to the subscriber’s line through a junction
13.3.2.1 Conduits box. If it is required to be able to use it in a number of
rooms, socket outlets and plugs should be provided.
PVC conduit can be used for the individual sections of
Units for flush and surface mounting are available for
conduit networks in residential buildings for the riser
both methods of connection.

FIG. 5 TYPICAL CONDUIT WIRING S YSTEM

PART 1 GENERAL AND COMMON ASPECTS 127

SP 30 : 2011

13.3.4 Installation of Telephone Wiring 14 SUPPLIES FOR SAFETY SERVICES

13.3.4.1 Wiring in residential building 14.0 General
In residential buildings a concealed wiring arrangement 14.0.1 For a safety service, a source of supply shall be
is most conveniently and economically installed in an selected which will maintain a supply of adequate
adequately dimensioned conduit network. It has been duration.
found satisfactory to provide riser conduits or cable
14.0.2 For a safety service required to operate in fire
ducts and horizontal branch conduits to the apartments,
conditions, all equipment shall be provided, either by
with distribution boxes at the junctions (Fig. 5). With
construction or by erection, with protection providing
a concealed installation of this kind it is possible at
fire resistance of adequate duration.
any time to alter the wiring or add to it without
inconvenience to the occupier. 14.0.3 A protective measure against indirect contact
without automatic disconnection at the first fault is
13.3.4.2 Wiring in non-residential buildings
preferred. In an IT system, continuous insulation
In office buildings, manufacturing plants, department monitoring shall be provided to give audible and visible
stores etc. particular importance is attached to flexible indications of a first fault.
arrangement and utilisation of the accommodation. To 14.0.4 Equipment shall be arranged to facilitate
this end the, communication wiring can be run in periodic inspection, testing and maintenance.
underfloor trunking systems or window-sealed
trunking rather than on the walls. 14.1 Sources
13.3.5 Accessory Installation 14.1.1 A source for safety services shall be one of the
following:
13.3.5.1 Main distribution board
a) A primary cell or cells.
All the lines are collected in the main distribution board.
b) A storage battery.
The main distribution board should be located in the
c) A generator set capable of independent
same part of the building in the immediate vicinity of
operation.
the telephone equipment. If the telephone equipment
d) A separate feeder effectively independent of
extends over several buildings, each building is the normal feeder (provided that an
connected to the main distribution board by a main assessment is made that the two supplies are
cable. unlikely to fail concurrently).
13.3.5.2 Floor distribution board 14.1.2 A source for a safety service shall be installed
The floor distribution boards should be accommodated as fixed equipment and in such a manner that it cannot
close to the stair well. The rising mains are run be adversely affected by failure of the normal source.
vertically to the floors. 14.1.3 A source for a safety service shall be placed in
13.3.5.3 Preventive fire precautions (for example a suitable location and be accessible only to skilled or
fireproof barriers) should be considered at an early instructed persons.
stage of planning 14.1.4 A single source for a safety service shall not be
13.3.5.4 Riser cables used for another purpose. However, where more than
one source is available, such sources may supply stand-
The ducts and ceiling apertures for the riser cables by systems provided that, in the event of failure of one
should be sufficiently large to permit the later addition source, the energy remaining available will be sufficient
of cables or PVC conduits without great expense. for the starting and operation of all safety services;
this generally necessitates the automatic off-loading
13.3.5.5 Spare conduits
of equipment not providing safety services.
In addition at least one extra conduit should be provided
14.1.5 Clauses 14.1.3 and 14.1.4 do not apply to
from one floor distribution board to the next.
equipment individually supplied by a self-contained
13.4 Inspection and Testing battery.

13.4.1 The completed installation shall be inspected 14.1.6 The location of the source shall be properly and
and simulation testing to be done to ensure that all the adequately ventilated so that any exhaust gases, smoke
designed functions are available as per the standards or fumes from the source cannot penetrate, to a
and norms of specified by the manufacturer. hazardous extent, areas occupied by persons.

128 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

14.2 Circuits a fault occurring in one circuit shall not impair the
protection against electric shock nor the correct
14.2.1 The circuit of a safety service shall be
operation of the other circuit.
independent of any other circuit and an electrical fault
or any intervention or modification in one system shall 14.4 Special Requirements for Safety Services
not affect the correct functioning of the other. Having Sources not Capable of Operation in
14.2.2 The circuit of a safety service shall not pass Parallel
through any location exposed to abnormal fire risk unless 14.4.1 Precautions shall be taken to prevent the
the wiring system used is adequately fire resistant. paralleling of the sources, for example by both
14.2.3 The protection against overload in the circuit mechanical and electrical interlocking.
may be omitted. 14.4.2 The requirements of the regulations for
14.2.4 Every over-current protective device shall be protection against fault current and against indirect
selected and erected so as to avoid an over-current in contact shall be met for each source.
one circuit impairing the correct operation of any other
14.5 Special Requirements for Safety Services
safety services circuit.
Having Sources Capable of Operation in Parallel
14.2.5 Switchgear and control gear shall be clearly
14.5.1 The requirements of the regulations for
identified and grouped in locations accessible only to
protection against short-circuit and indirect contact
skilled or instructed persons.
shall be met whether the installation is supplied by
14.2.6 Every alarm, indication and control device shall either of the two sources or by both in parallel.
be clearly identified.
14.5.2 Precautions shall be taken, where necessary, to
14.3 Utilization Equipment limit current circulation, particularly thereof third
harmonics or multiples thereof, in the connection
14.3.1 In equipment supplied by two different circuits, between the neutral points of sources.

ANNEX A
(Clause 2)
LIST OF INDIAN STANDARDS RELATED TO BUILDING SERVICES
IS No. Title IS No. Title
1881 : 1998 Code of practice for indoor instal- 8969 : 1978 Code of practice for installation
lation of public address systems and maintenance of impulse and
1882 : 1993 Code of practice for outdoor instal- electronic master and slave
lation of public address system electric clock systems
2175 : 1988 Specification for heat sensitive 14665 (Part 2/ Electric traction lifts: Part 2
fire detectors for use in automatic Sec 1) : 2000 Code of practice for installation,
fire alarm system operation and maintenance,
2440 : 1975 Guide for daylighting of buildings Section 1 Passenger and goods
3103 : 1975 Code of practice for industrial lifts
ventilation 14665 (Part 2/ Electric traction lifts: Part 2
3043 : 1987 Code of practice for earthing
Sec 2) : 2000 Code of practice for installation,
3362 : 1977 Code of practice for natural
operation and maintenance,
ventilation of residential buildings
Section 2 Service lifts
3646 (Part 1): 1992 Code of practice for interior
14665 (Part 3/ Electric traction lifts: Part 3
illumination: Part 1 General
requirements and recommenda- Sec 1) : 2000 Safety rules, Section 1 Passenger
tions for welding interiors and goods lifts
7662 (Part 1): 1974 Recommendations for orientation 14665 (Part 3/ Electric traction lifts: Part 3
of buildings: Part 1 Non-industrial Sec 2) : 2000 Safety rules, Section 2 Service
buildings lifts
8884 : 1978 Code of practice for the installation SP 7 : 2005 National Building Code of India
of electric bells and call system SP 72 : 2010 National Lighting Code

PART 1 GENERAL AND COMMON ASPECTS 129

SP 30 : 2011

SECTION 12 SELECTION OF EQUIPMENT

FOREWORD of protective devices, if any) during which it may be

expected to flow.
Several Indian Standards exist, which cover details of
selection, installation, and maintenance of electric 2.2.3 Frequency
power equipment. This Part 1/Section 12 of the Code
If frequency has an influence on the characteristics of
is formulated in such a manner as to bring out only the
electrical equipment, the rated frequency of the
essential criteria for selection of equipment, and users
equipment shall correspond to the frequency likely to
of the Code are recommended to make reference to
occur in the circuit.
individual product codes for detailed guidelines.
2.2.4 Power
1 SCOPE
All electrical equipment to be selected on the basis of
This Part 1/Section 12 of the Code covers general its power characteristics, shall be suitable for the duty
criteria for selection of equipment. demanded of the equipment, taking into account the
NOTE — This Part 1/Section 12 shall be read in conjunction load factor and the normal service conditions.
with the Indian Standard/Codes on individual equipment.
2.3 Conditions of Installation
2 SELECTION OF EQUIPMENT
All electrical equipment shall be selected so as to
2.1 Conformity to Indian Standards withstand safely the stresses and the environmental
conditions (see 3.2 of Part 1/Section 7 of this Code)
Every item of electrical equipment used in the
characteristic of its location to which it may be exposed.
installation shall conform to the relevant Indian
The general characteristics of building installations are
Standards, wherever available.
assessed according to the guidelines given in Part 1/
2.2 Characteristics Section 8 of this Code. If, however, an item of
equipment does not have by design the properties
Every item of electrical equipment selected shall have corresponding to its location it may be used on
suitable characteristics appropriate to the values and condition that adequate additional protection provided
conditions on which the design of the electrical as part of the completed electrical installation.
installation (see 3.2 of Part 1/Section 7) is based and
shall, in particular, fulfill the requirements given 2.4 Prevention of Harmful Effects
to 2.2.1 to 2.2.4.
All electrical equipment shall be selected so that it will
2.2.1 Voltage not cause harmful effects on, other equipment or impair
Electrical equipment shall be suitable with respect to the supply during normal service including switching
the maximum steady voltage (rms value for ac) likely operations. In this context, the factors which may have
to be applied, as well as overvoltages likely to occur. an influence include;

NOTE — For certain equipment, it may be necessary to take a) Power factor,

account of the lowest voltage likely to occur. b) Inrush current,
2.2.2 Current c) Asymmetrical load, and
d) Harmonics.
All electrical equipment shall be selected with respect
to the maximum steady current (rms value for ac) 2.5 Guidelines on the selection of specific equipment
which it has to carry in normal service, and with respect are covered in the relevant Indian Standards. Guidelines
to the current likely to be carried in abnormal on selection of protective devices are given at Part 1/
conditions and the period (for example, operating time Section 14 of this Code.

130 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

SECTION 13 ERECTION AND PRE-COMISSIONING TESTING

OF INSTALLATION
0 FOREWORD 3.5 All electrical equipment shall be installed in such
a manner that the designed cooling conditions are not
Testing and ensuring that the installation conforms to
impaired.
the predetermined conditions before the installation
could be energized, is a necessary prerequisite under 3.6 All electrical equipment likely to cause high
the statutory provisions. Several aspects/parameters are temperatures or electric arcs shall be placed or guarded
required to be verified before an installation could be so as to eliminate the risk of ignition of flammable
certified as ready for energizing and use. materials. Where the temperature of any exposed parts
of electrical equipment is likely to cause injury to
While a general check list of items to be checked and
persons, these parts shall be so located as to prevent
necessary tests to be done are included in this Section,
accidental contact therewith.
individual product standards and individual Codes of
practice cover more detailed guidelines on 3.7 Several Indian Standards exist on installation of
pre-commissioning checks for individual equipment. specific electrical equipment. These shall be adhered
to during erection of the installation.
In addition to initial testing, periodic testing and
preventive maintenance checks are necessary, the 4 INSPECTION AND TESTING
nature and frequency of such measures depending on
the nature of the electrical installation in question. 4.1 General Requirements
Guidelines on such aspects are outside the purview of
4.1.1 Before the completed installation, or an addition
the Code. However, a reference could be made to
to the existing installation, is put into service, inspection
individual equipment codes which cover maintenance
and testing shall be carried out in accordance with the
schedules.
Indian Electricity Rules, 1956. In the event of defects
1 SCOPE being found, these shall be rectified, as soon as
practicable, and the installation retested.
This Part 1/Section 13 of the Code covers general
principles of erection of installation and guidelines on 4.1.2 After putting the installation into service periodic
initial testing before commissioning. inspection and testing shall be carried out in order to
maintain the installation in a sound condition.
2 REFERENCES
4.1.3 Where an addition is to be made to the fixed
A list of relevant Indian Standards is given at wiring of an existing installation the latter shall be
Annex A. examined for compliance with recommendations of
this Code.
3 ERECTION
4.2 Inspection of the Installation
3.1 For the erection of the electrical installation, good
workmanship by suitably qualified personnel and the 4.2.0 General
use of proper materials shall be ensured.
At the completion of wiring, a general inspection shall
3.2 The characteristics of the electrical equipment, as be carried out by competent personnel to verify that
determined in accordance with Part 1/Section 12 shall the provisions of this Code and that of Indian Electricity
not be impaired in the process of erection. Rules, 1956 have been complied with. This, among
other things, shall include checking whether all
3.3 Protective conductors and neutral conductors shall
equipment, fittings, accessories, wires and cables, used
be identifiable at least at their terminations by colouring
in the installation are of adequate rating and quality to
or other means. These conductors in flexible cords or
meet the requirements of the load. General
flexible cables shall be identifiable by colouring or
workmanship of the electrical wiring with regard to
other means throughout their length (see 3.6 of
the layout and finish shall be examined for neatness
Part 1/Section 4).
that would facilitate easy identification of circuits of
3.4 Connections between conductors and between the system, adequacy of clearances, soundness of
conductors and other electrical equipment shall be termination with respect to tightness, contact pressure
made in such a way that safe and reliable contacts are and contact area. A complete check shall also be made
ensured. For electrical wiring installation, IS 732 of all the protective devices, with respect to the rating,
should be followed. Also see Part 1/Section 14 of the range of settings and for co-ordination between the
Code. various protective devices.

PART 1 GENERAL AND COMMON ASPECTS 131

SP 30 : 2011

4.2.1 Substation Installations barriers, bus bar covers/shrouds, automatic

safety shutters/doors interlock, handle
In substation installation it shall be checked whether,
interlock for safe and reliable operation in all
1) the installation has been carried out in panels and cubicles;
accordance with the approved drawings; 21) clearances in the front, rear and sides of the
2) phase-to-phase and phase-to-earth clearances switchboards, are adequate;
are provided as required; 22) the gap in the horngap fuse and the size of
3) all equipments are efficiently earthed and fuse adequate;
properly connected to the required number 23) the switch operates freely, all the blades make
of earth electrodes; contact at the same time. The arcing horns
4) the required ground clearance to live terminals contact in advance, and the handles are
is provided; provided with locking arrangements;
5) suitable fencing is provided with gate with 24) Insulators are free from cracks, and are clean;
lockable arrangements; 25) in the case of transformers, there is any oil leak;
6) the required number of caution boards, fire- 26) connections to bushings in transformers are
fighting equipments, operating rods, rubber tightened and have good contact;
mats, etc, are kept in the substation; 27) bushings are free from cracks and are clean;
7) in case of indoor substation, sufficient 28) accessories of transformers like breathers,
ventilation and draining arrangements are vent pipe, buchholz relay, etc, are in order;
made;
29) connections to gas relay in transformers are
8) all cable trenches are provided with non- in order;
flammable covers;
30) oil and winding temperature are set for
9) free accessibility is provided for all equipment specific requirements in transformers;
for normal operation;
31) in case of cable cellars, adequate
10) all name-plates are fixed and the equipment arrangements to pump out water that has
are fully painted; entered due to seepage or other reason is
11) all construction materials and temporary provided; and
connections are removed; 32) all incoming and outgoing circuits of panels
12) oil levels, bus bar tightness, transformer tap are clearly and indelibly labelled for
position, etc, are in order; identifications both at the front and at the rear.
13) earth pipe troughs and cover slabs are
4.2.2 Installation at Voltage not exceeding 650 V
provided for earth electrodes/earth pits.
Neutral and lightning arrester earth pits are It shall be checked whether:
marked for easy identification;
a) all blocking materials that are used for safe
14) earth electrodes are of GI pipes or CI pipes or transportation in switchgears, contractors,
MS rods or copper plates. For earth relays, etc, are removed;
connections, brass bolts and nuts with lead
b) all connections to the earthing system are
washers are provided in the pipes/plates;
feasible for periodical inspection;
15) earth pipe troughs, oil sumps/pits are free
c) sharp cable bends are avoided and cables are
from rubbish and dirt and stone jelly and the
taken in a smooth manner in the trenches or
earth connections are visible and easily
alongside the walls and ceilings using suitable
accessible;
support clamps at regular intervals;
16) Panels and switchgears are all vermin and
d) suitable linked switch or circuit-breaker or
damp proof and all unused openings or holes
lockable push button is provided near the
are blocked properly;
motors/apparatus for controlling supply to the
17) the earth bus bars for tightness and for motor apparatus in any easily accessible
corrosion free joint surface; location;
18) control switchfuses are provided at an e) two separate and distinct earth connections
accessible height from ground; are provided for the motor apparatus;
19) adequate head room is available in the f) control switchfuse is provided at an accessible
transformer room for easy topping up of oil, height from ground for controlling supply to
maintenance, etc; overhead travelling crane hoists, overhead bus
20) safety devices, horizontal and vertical bar trunking;

132 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

g) the metal rails on which the crane travels are d) the operation of the circuit-breakers shall be
electrically continuous and earthed and tested from all control stations,
bonding of rails and earthing at both ends are e) indication/signalling lamps shall be checked
done; for working,
h) four core cables are used for overhead f) the operation of the circuit-breakers shall be
travelling crane and portable equipments, the tested for all interlock,
fourth core being used for earthing, and g) the closing and opening timings of the circuit-
separate supply for lighting circuit is taken; breakers shall be tested wherever required for
j) if flexible metallic house is used for wiring autotransfer schemes,
to motors and equipments, the wiring is h) contact resistance of main and isolator
enclosed to the full lengths, and the hose contacts shall be measured, and
secured properly; j) the specific gravity of the electrolyte and the
k) the cables are not taken through areas where voltage of the control battery shall be
they are likely to be damaged or chemically measured.
affected;
4.3.2 Transformers
m) the screens and armours of the cables are
earthed properly; All commissioning tests as listed in IS 10028 (Part 2)
n) the belts of the belt driven equipments are shall be carried out.
properly guarded; 4.3.3 Cables
p) adequate precautions are taken to ensure that
Cable installations shall be checked as laid down in
no live parts are so exposed as to cause danger;
IS 1255.
q) ammeters and voltmeters are tested and
calibrated; 4.3.4 Motors and Other Equipment
r) the relays are inspected visually by moving The following tests are made on motor and other
covers for deposits or dusts or other foreign equipment:
matter;
a) The insulation resistance of each phase
s) flat washers backed up by spiring washers are
winding against the frame and between the
used for making end connections; and windings shall be measured. Megohm-meter
t) number of wires in a conduit conform to of 500 V or 1 000 V rating shall be used. Star
provisions of this Code. points should be disconnected. Minimum
acceptable value of the insulation resistance
4.3 Testing of Installation
varies with the rated power and the rated
4.3.0 General voltage of the motor.
The following relation may serve as a
After inspection, the following tests shall be carried
reasonable guide:
out, before an installation or an addition to the existing
installation is put into service, any testing of the 20 × En
electrical installation in an already existing installation Ri =
1 000 + 2P
shall commence after obtaining permit to work from
the engineer-in-charge and after ensuring the safety where
provisions.
Ri = insulation resistance in MΩ at 25ºC,
4.3.1 Switchboards En = rated phase-to-phase voltage, and
Switchboards shall be tested in the manner indicated P = rated power kW.
below: If the resistance is measured at a temperature
a) all switchboards shall be tested for di-electric different from 25ºC, the value shall be
test in the manner recommended in IS 8623 corrected to 25ºC.
(Part 1), b) The insulation resistance as measured at
b) all earth connections shall be checked for ambient temperature does not always give a
continuity, reliable value, since moisture might have been
c) the operation of all protective devices shall absorbed during shipment and storage. When
be tested by means of secondary or primary the temperature of such a motor is raised, the
injection tests, insulation resistance will initially drop

PART 1 GENERAL AND COMMON ASPECTS 133

SP 30 : 2011

considerably, even below the acceptable be not less than that specified in the relevant
minimum. If any suspicion exists on this Indian Standard or where there is no such
score, motor winding shall be dried out. specification shall be not less than 0.5 MΩ.
4.3.5 Energymeters d) The insulation resistance shall also be
measured between all conductors connected
IS 15707 should be followed in case of energymeters. to one pole or phase conductor of the supply
4.3.6 Wiring Installation and all the conductors connected to the middle
wire to the neutral on to the other pole of phase
The following tests shall be done: conductors of the supply. Such a test shall be
a) The insulation resistance shall be measured by made after removing all metallic connections
applying between earth and the whole system between the two poles of the installation and
of conductor or any section thereof with all in these circumstances the insulation
fuses in place and all switches closed, and resistance between conductors of the
except in earthed concentric wiring, all lamps installation shall be not less than that specified
in position or both poles of installation in (b).
otherwise electrically connected together, a dc e) On completion of an electrical installation (or
voltage of not less than twice the working an extension to an installation) a certificate
voltage, provided that it does not exceed 500 V shall be furnished by the contractor,
for medium voltage circuits. Where the supply countersigned by the certified supervisor
is derived from three-wire (ac or dc) or a under whose direct supervision the
polyphase system the neutral pole of which is installation was carried out. this certificate
connected to earth either direct or through shall be in a prescribed form as required by
added resistance, the working voltage shall be the local electric supply authority.
deemed to be that which is maintained between 4.3.7 Earthing
the outer or phase conductor and the neutral.
b) The insulation resistance in megohms of an For checking the efficiency of earthing the following
installation measured as in (a) shall be not less tests are recommended (see IS 3043):
than 50 divided by the number of points on a) The earth resistance of each electrode is
the circuits, provided that the whole measured.
installation need not be required to have an b) The earth resistance of earthing grid is
insulation resistance greater than 1MΩ. measured.
c) Control rheostats, heating and power c) All electrodes are connected to the grid and
appliances and electric signs, may, if desired, the earth resistance of the entire earthing
he disconnected from the circuit during the system is measured.
test, but in that event the insulation resistance
between the case or framework, and all live These tests shall preferably be done during the summer
parts of each rheostat, appliance and sign shall months.

134 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

ANNEX A
(Clause 2)
LIST OF INDIAN STANDARDS ON INSTALLATION

IS No. Title IS No. Title

732 : 1989 Code of practice for electrical for type-tested and partially type-
wiring installations tested assemblies
1255 : 1983 Code of practice for installation 10028 (Part 2) : Code of practice for selection,
and maintenance of power 1981 installation and maintenance of
cables upto and including 33 kV transformers: Part 2 Installation
rating 14927 Cable trunking and ducting
1646 : 1997 Code of practice for fire safety of systems for electrical installations :
buildings (general): Electrical (Part 1) : 2001 General requirements
installations (Part 2) : 2001 Cable trunking and ducting
3043 : 1987 Code of practice for earthing systems intended for mounting on
4051 : 1967 Code of practice for installation walls or ceilings
and maintenance of electrical 14930 Conduit systems for electrical
equipment in mines installations:
5571 : 2000 Guide for selection of electrical (Part 1) : 2001 General requirements
equipment for hazardous areas (Part 2) : 2001 Particular requirements —
8623 (Part 1) : 1993/ Specification for low-voltage Conduit systems buried
IEC 60439-1 : switchgear and controlgear underground
1985 assemblies: Part 1 Requirements 15707 : 2006 Testing, evaluation, installation
and maintenance of ac electricity
meters — Code of practice

PART 1 GENERAL AND COMMON ASPECTS 135

SP 30 : 2011

SECTION 14 EARTHING

FOREWORD 3 GENERAL REMARKS

Earthing provides safety of persons and apparatus 3.0 General
against earth faults. Any system is characterised by
the type of distribution system, which include types of 3.0.1 The subject of earthing covers the problems
systems of live conductors and types of system relating to the conduction of electricity through earth.
earthing. The different types of earthing systems are The terms earth and earthing have been used in this
also covered under this Part 1/Section 14 of the Code. Code, irrespective of reliance being placed on the earth
The choice of one system or the other would depend itself, to denote a low impedance return path of the
on several considerations as each offer different degree fault current. As a matter of fact, the earth now rarely
of performance/safety. serves as a part of the return circuit but is being used
mainly for fixing the voltage of system neutrals. The
This Part 1/Section 14 of the Code summarises the earth connection improves service continuity and avoids
essential requirements associated with earthing in damage to equipment and danger to human lives.
electrical installations. These relate to general conditions
of soil resistivity, design parameters of earth electrode, 3.0.2 The object of an earthing system is to provide as
earth bus and earth wires and methods of measurements. nearly as possible a surface under and around a station
Particular requirements for earthing depending on the which shall be at a uniform potential and as nearly
type of installation are covered in respective Sections of zero or absolute earth potential as possible. The purpose
the Code. of this is to ensure that in general all parts of apparatus,
other than live parts, shall be at earth potential, as well
1 SCOPE as to ensure that operators and attendants shall be at
This Part 1/Section 14 of the Code covers general earth potential at all times. Also by providing such an
requirements associated with earthing in electrical earth surface of uniform potential under and
installations. Specific requirements for earthing in surrounding the station, as nearly as possible, there
individual installations are covered in respective Parts can exist no difference of potential in a short distance
of the Code. big enough to shock or injure an attendant when short-
circuits or other abnormal occurrence take place.
NOTES
1 This Section shall be read in conjunction with the provisions 3.0.3 Earthing associated with current-carrying
of IS 3043. conductor is normally essential to the security of the
2 Additional rules applying to earth leakage circuit-breaker system and is generally known as system earthing,
systems are covered in Annex A.
while earthing of non-current carrying metal work and
2 REFERENCES conductor is essential to the safety of human life, of
animals and of property and is generally known as
For further details, the following standards may be equipment earthing.
referred:
3.0.4 Earthing shall generally be carried out in
IS No. Title accordance with the requirements of Indian Electricity
732 : 1989 Code of practice for electrical Rules, 1956 as amended from time to time, and the
wiring installations (third revision) relevant regulations of the electricity supply authority
3043 : 1987 Code of practice for earthing (first concerned. The following clauses of The Indian
revision) Electricity Rules, 1956 are particularly applicable:
IS 8437(Part 1) : Guide on effects of current passing
32, 51, 61, 62, 67, 69, 88 (2) and 90.
1993 through human body: Part 1
General aspects 3.0.5 Al medium voltage equipment shall be earthed
IS 8437(Part 2) : Guide on effects of current passing by two separate and distinct connections with earth
1993 through human body: Part 2 through an earth electrode. In the case of high and extra
Special aspects high voltages the neutral points shall be earthed by
IS/IEC 60947-2 : Low voltage switchgear and not less than two separate and distinct connections with
2006 controlgear: Part 2 Circuit breakers earth each having its own electrode at the generating
IS/IEC 60947-4-1: Low-voltage switchgear and station or sub-station and may be earthed at any other
2002 controlgear: Part 4 Contactors and point provided no interference is caused by such
motor-starters, Section 1 Electro- earthing. If necessary, the neutral may be earthed
mechanical contactors and motor- through a suitable impedance.
starters
136 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE
 SP 30 : 2011

3.0.5.1 In cases where direct earthing may prove consistent with the levels of insulation applied. Distinct
harmful rather than provide safety (for example, high connection with the earth shall be provided for
frequency and mains frequency coreless induction lightning protection system for buildings or other
furnaces), relaxation may be obtained from the installations. Distinct earthing system shall be provided
competent authority. for centralized electronic system of any building.
3.0.6 Earth electrodes shall be provided at generating 3.1.1.2 The earth system resistance should be such that
stations, substations and consumer premises in when any fault occurs against which earthing is
accordance with the requirements. designed to give protection, the protective gear will
operate to make the faulty portions of plant harmless.
3.0.7 All far as possible all earth terminals shall be
In most cases such operation involves isolation of the
visible.
faulty main or plant by circuit-breaker or fuses. In the
3.0.8 All connections shall be carefully made; if they cases of underground system there may be no difficulty,
are poorly made or inadequate for the purpose for but in the case of overhead line system protected only
which they are intended, loss of life or serious personal by fuses there may be difficulty in so arranging the
injury may result. value of the earth resistance that a conductor falling
and making good contact with earth shall cause the
3.0.9 Each earth system shall be so devised that the
fuses in the supply to operate.
testing of individual earth electrode is possible. It is
recommended that the value of any earth system NOTE — Earthing may not give protection against faults which
are not essentially earth faults. For example, if a phase
resistance shall not be more than 5.0, unless otherwise
conductor of an overhead spur line breaks, and the part remote
specified. from the supply falls to the ground, it is unlikely that any
protective gear relying on earthing will operate since the major
3.0.10 It is recommended that a drawing showing the fault is the open-circuit against which earthing gives no
main earth connection and earth electrodes be prepared protection.
for each installation.
3.1.2 Equipment Earthing
3.0.11 No addition to the current-carrying system either
temporary or permanent, shall be made, which will The object of equipment earthing is to ensure effective
increase the maximum available earth fault current or operation of the protective gear in the event of leakage
its duration until it has been ascertained that the existing through such metal work, the potential of which with
arrangement of earth electrodes, earth busbar, etc, are respect to neighbouring objects may attain a value
capable of carrying the new value of earth fault current which would cause danger to life or risk or fire.
which may be obtained by this addition. 3.1.3 Soil Resistivity
3.0.12 No cut-out, link or switch other than a linked 3.1.3.1 The resistance to earth of an electrode of given
switch arranged to operate simultaneously on the dimensions is dependent on the electrical resistivity of
earthed or earthed neutral conductor and the live the soil in which it is installed. It follows, therefore,
conductors shall be inserted on any supply system. This that an overriding consideration in deciding which of
however, does not include the case of a switch for use the alternative method of protection is to be adopted
in controlling a generator or a transformer or a link for for a particular system or location is the soil resistivity
test purposes. in the area concerned.
3.0.13 All materials, fittings, etc, used in earthing shall 3.1.3.2 The type of soil largely determines its resistivity
conform to Indian Standards wherever these exist. In and representative values for soils generally found in
the case of materials for which Indian Standard India are given at Annex B. Earth conductivity is,
specifications do not exist, the materials shall be however, essentially electrolytic in nature and is
approved by the competent authority. affected therefore by moisture content of the soil and
its chemical composition and concentration of salts
3.1 Design Considerations dissolved in the contained water. Grain size and
3.1.1 System Earthing distribution and closeness of packing are also
contributory factors since they control the manner in
3.1.1.1 The regulations that every medium, high and which the moisture is held in soil. Many of these factors
extra high voltage equipment shall be earthed by not vary locally and some seasonally and, therefore, the
less than two separate and distinct connections with values given in Annex B should be taken only as a
earth is designed primarily to preserve the security of general guide. Local values should be verified by actual
the system by ensuring that the voltage on each live measurement and this is especially important where
conductor is restricted to such a value with respect to the soil is stratified, as owing to the disposition of earth
the potential of the general mass of the earth as is current, the effective resistivity depends not only on

PART 1 GENERAL AND COMMON ASPECTS 137

SP 30 : 2011

the surface layers but also on the underlying geological case of a single plate covering the sub-station area. This
formation. problem may be serious in small stations where the grid
may cover only a limited area. Attempts should be made
3.1.3.3 The soil temperature also has some effect on
to design a substation so as to eliminate the possibility
soil resistivity but is important only near and below
of touch contact beyond the earth-system periphery,
freezing point, necessitating the installation of earth
when the limitations on step potential become less
electrode at depths to which frost will not penetrate.
exacting. While assessing the touch potential, the
3.1.3.4 While the fundamental nature and properties method of earthing of the object touched, for example,
of a soil in a given area cannot be changed, use can be whether it is earthed directly below or remotely should
made of purely local conditions in choosing suitable be kept in view in order to consider the possibility of
electrode sites and of methods of preparing the site occurrence of large potential differences.
selected, to secure optimum resistivity. Reference is
Special attention should be paid to the points near the
drawn to IS 3043.
operating handles of apparatus and, if necessary,
3.1.4 Potential Gradients potential equalizer grillages of closer mesh securely
bonded to the structure and the operating handle should
It is necessary to ensure, especially in case of large
be buried below the surface where the operator may
electrical installations, that a person walking on the
stand when operating the switch.
ground or touching an earthed objects, in or around the
premises shall not have large dangerous potential 3.1.5 At consumer’s premises where the apparatus is
differences impressed across his body in case of a fault protected by fuses, the total earth circuit impedance
within or outside the premises. Such danger may arise shall not be more than that obtained by graphs given
if steep potential gradients exist within the premises or in Fig. 1.
between boundary of the premises and an accessible
point outside. For this the step potential and touch 4 EARTH ELECTRODES
potential should be investigated and kept within safe
4.1 Material
limits. Within an earthing grid, the step and touch
potentials may be lowered to any value by reducing 4.1.1 Although electrode material does not affect initial
the mesh interval of the grid. The situation is more earth resistance, care should be taken to select a
difficult in the zone immediately outside the periphery material which is resistant to corrosion in the type of
where the problems may exist even for the theoretical soil in which it will be used.

FIG. 1 RECOMMENDED EARTH CIRCUIT IMPEDANCE OF RESISTANCE FOR D IFFERENT V ALUES OF FUSE RATING

138 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

4.1.2 Under ordinary conditions of soil, use of copper, 4.4 Types of Earth Electrodes
iron or mild steel electrodes is recommended.
The following types of earth electrodes are considered
4.1.3 In cases where soil conditions point to excessive standard:
corrosion of the electrode and the connections, it is
recommended to use either copper electrode or copper a) Rod and pipe electrodes,
clad electrode or zinc coated (galvanized) iron b) Strip or conductor electrodes,
electrodes. c) Plates electrodes, and
4.1.4 In direct current system, however, due to d) Cable sheaths.
electrolytic action which causes serious corrosion, it For details regarding their design, reference shall be
is recommended to use only copper electrodes. made to IS 3043.
4.1.5 The electrode shall be kept free from paint,
enamel and grease. 4.5 Design Data on Earth Electrodes

4.1.6 It is recommended to use similar material for earth 4.5.1 The design data on the various types of earth
electrodes and earth conductors or otherwise electrodes is given in Table 1.
precautions should be taken to avoid corrosion. 4.5.2 Effect of Shape on Electrode Resistance
4.2 Current Loading The resistance of any electrode buried in the earth is in
4.2.1 An earth electrode should be designed to have a fact related to the capacitance of that electrode and its
loading capacity adequate for the system in which it image in free space. The relationship is given by:
forms a part, that is, it should be capable of dissipating
100 r
without failure, energy in the earth path at the point at R=
which it is installed under any condition of operation 4p C
of the system. Failure is fundamentally due to excessive
rise of temperature at the surface of the electrode and where
is thus a function of current density and duration as R = resistance in an infinite medium;
well as electrical and thermal properties of soil.
ρ = resistivity of the medium (soil); in ohm-
4.2.2 Two conditions of operation occur in system metre; and
operation, namely; C = capacitance of the electrode and its image
a) Long duration overloading as with normal in free space.
system operation, and
In practical case, the capacitance is divided into two
b) Short time overloading as under fault by the plane of earth’s surface so that,
conditions in directly earthed system.
100 r
4.3 Voltage Gradient R=
4p C
4.3.1 Under fault conditions the earth electrode is raised
to a potential with respect to the general mass of the a) For rod or pipe electrodes, the formula is
earth. This results in the existence of voltages in the
soil around the electrode which may be injurious to 100 r log e 2l ohms
R=
telephone and pilot cables whose cores are substantially 4p C d
at earth potential owing to the voltage to which the
sheaths of such cables are raised. The voltage gradient where
at the surface of the earth may also constitute danger l = length of rod or pipe, in cm; and
to life.
d = diameter of rod or pipe, in cm.
4.3.2 Earth electrodes should not be installed in
proximity to a metal fence to avoid the possibility of b) For strip or round conductor electrodes,
the fence becoming live, and thus dangerous at points 100 r log e 4l ohms
remote from the substation, or alternatively giving rise R=
4p C d
to danger within the resistance area of the electrode
which can be reduced only by introducing a good
connection with the general mass of the earth. If the where
metal fence is unavoidable, it should be earthed. l = length of the strip, in cm; and

PART 1 GENERAL AND COMMON ASPECTS 139

SP 30 : 2011

t = width (strip) or twice the diameter 5.0.2 All earth wires and earth continuity conductors
(conductors), in cm. shall be of copper, galvanized iron, or steel or
aluminium.
c) For plate electrodes,
NOTE — Bare aluminium shall not be used underground.
ρ π ohms
R= 5.0.3 They shall be either stranded or solid bars or flat
4 A
rectangular strips and may be bare provided due care
is taken to avoid corrosion and mechanical damage to
where
it. Where required, they shall be run inside metallic
A = area of both sides of plate, in m2. conduits.
4.5.3 Effect of Depth of Burial 5.0.4 Interconnections of earth-continuity conductors
To reduce the depth of burial without increasing the and main and branch earth wires shall be made in such
resistance, a number of rods or pipes shall be connected a way that reliable and good electrical connections are
together in parallel (see Fig. 4). The resistance in this permanently ensured.
case is practically proportional to the reciprocal of the NOTE — Welded, bolted and clamped joints are permissible.
number of electrodes used so long as each is situated For stranded conductors, sleeve connectors (for example,
indented, riveted or bolted connectors) are permissible. Bolted
outside the resistance area of the other. The distance
connectors and their screws shall be protected against any
between two electrodes in such a case shall preferably possible corrosion.
be not less than twice the length of the electrode.
5.0.5 The path of the earth wire shall, as far as possible,
5 EARTH BUS AND EARTH WIRES be out of reach of any person.

5.0 General 5.0.6 If the metal sheath and armour have been used
as an earth continuity conductor the armour shall be
5.0.1 The minimum allowable size of earth wire is bonded to the metal sheath and the connection between
determined principally by mechanical consideration for the earth wire and earthing electrode shall be made to
they are more liable to mechanical injury and should the metal sheath.
therefore be strong enough to resist any strain that is
likely to be put upon them. 5.0.7 If a clamp has been used to provide connection

Table 1 Design Data on Earth Electrodes

(Clause 4.5.1 )
All dimensions in millimetres.

Sl No. Measurement Type of Electrodes

Rod Pipe Strip Round Conductor Plate

(see Note 1) (see Note 2)
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)
i) Diameter 16 mm1) 38 mm1)
(not less than) 12.5 mm2) 100 mm2)
ii) Length of 3 500 mm 3 500 mm 500 mm 15 000 mm 1 500 mm
conductor/rod
iii) Depth upto 3 750 mm 3 550 mm 3 200 mm
which buried
iv) Size 25 mm × 1.60 mm2) 3.0 mm2 2) 1 200 mm × 1200 mm3)
25 mm × 4 mm1) 6 mm2 1) 600 mm × 600 mm1)
v) Thickness 3.15 mm1) 6.30 mm2)
3.5 mm1)
1)
Steel or galvanized iron.
2)
Copper.
3)
Cast iron.

NOTES
1 A typical illustration of pipe earth electrode is given in Fig. 2.
2 A typical illustration of plate electrode is given in Fig. 3. If two or more plates are used in parallel, they shall be separated by not less
than 3.0 m.
3 Adequate quantity of water to be poured into sump every few days to keep the soil surrounding the earth pipe permanently moist.

140 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

NOTES
1 All dimensions in millimetres.
2 After laying the earth from the earth bus to the electrode through the PVC conduits at the pit entry conduits should be sealed with
bitumin compound.

FIG. 2 A TYPICAL I LLUSTRATION OF PIPE EARTH ELECTRODE

PART 1 GENERAL AND COMMON ASPECTS 141

142
SP 30 : 2011

All dimensions in millimetres.

3A Earthing with GI Plate

NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

FIG. 3 A TYPICAL ILLUSTRATION OF PLATE EARTH ELECTRODE — Continued
PART 1 GENERAL AND COMMON ASPECTS
All dimensions in millimetres.

3B Earthing with Copper Plate

F IG. 3 A TYPICAL I LLUSTRATION OF P LATE EARTH ELECTRODE

143
SP 30 : 2011
SP 30 : 2011

FIG. 4 RESISTANCE OF ELECTRODE AT VARIOUS D EPTHS AND SOIL RESISTANCES

between the earth wire and the metal sheath and armour,
it shall be so designed and installed as to provide reliable
connection without damage to the cable.
5.0.8 The neutral conductor shall not be used as earth
wire.
5.0.9 The minimum sizes of earth-continuity
conductors and earth wires shall be as given in the
relevant part of the Code.
FIG. 5 METHOD OF M EASUREMENT OF EARTH
6 MEASUREMENT OF EARTH ELECTRODE E LECTRODE RESISTANCE
RESISTANCE
6.1.1 If the test is made at power frequency, that is,
6.1 Fall of Potential Method 50 Hz, the resistance of the voltmeter should be high
In this method two auxiliary earth electrodes, compared to that of the auxiliary potential electrode
besides the test electrode, are placed at suitable ‘B’ and in no case should be less than 20 000 Ω.
distances from the test electrode (see Fig. 5). A NOTE — In most cases there will be stray currents flowing in
measured current is passed between the electrode the soil and unless some steps are taken to eliminate their effect,
they may produce serious errors in the measured value. If the
‘A’ to be tested and an auxiliary current electrode testing current is of the same frequency as the stray current,
‘C’ and the potential difference between the this elimination becomes very difficult and it is better to use
electrode ‘A’ and the auxiliary potential electrode an earth tester incorporating a hand-driven generator. These
‘B’ is measured. The resistance of the test electrode earth testers usually generate direct current and have rotary
current-reverser and synchronous rectifier mounted on the
‘A’ is then given by: generator shaft so that alternating current is supplied to the
test circuit and the resulting potentials are rectified for
V
R= measurement by a direct-reading moving-coil ohm-meter. The
I presence of stray currents in the soil is indicated by a wandering
where of the instrument pointer, but an increase or decrease of
generator handle speed will cause this to disappear.
R = resistance of the test electrode, in ohms;
6.1.2 The source of current shall be isolated from the
V = reading of the voltmeter, in V; and supply by a double by a double wound transformer.
I = reading of the ammeter, in amperes.

144 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

6.1.3 At the time of test, where possible, the test the event of an earth fault, the total permissible
electrode shall be separated from the earthing system. impedance of the earth fault path may be computed
from the following formula (for a normal three-phase
6.1.4 The auxiliary electrodes usually consist of
system with earthed neutral).
12.5 mm diameter mild steel rod driven up to 1 m into
the ground. Phase-to-earth voltage of system
Z=
6.1.5 All the test electrodes and the current electrodes Minimum fusing current off ues × Factor of safety
shall be so placed that they are independent of the
resistance area of each other. If the test electrode is in where
the form of rod, pipe or plate, the auxiliary current Z = permissible impedance, in ohm.
electrode ‘C’ shall be placed at least 30 m away from NOTE — The factor of safety in calculating the permissible
it and the auxiliary potential electrode ‘B’ shall be impedance should be left to the discretion of the designer.
placed midway between them.
7.1.1 The factor of safety in the above formula ensures
6.1.6 Unless three consecutive readings of test electrode that in most cases the fuse will blow in a time which is
resistance with different spacings of electrodes agree, sufficiently short to avoid danger and allowing for a
the test shall be repeated by increasing the distance number of circumstances, such as the grading of fuse
between electrodes ‘A’ and ‘C’ up to 50 m and each rating, increase of resistance due to drying out of the
time placing the electrode ‘B’ midway between them. earth electrodes in dry weather, inevitable extensions
to installations involving increase in length of the circuit
6.2 Alternative Method conductors and the earth-continuity conductors, etc.
6.2.1 The method described in 6.1 may not give 7.1.2 It will be observed that this requirement
satisfactory results if the test electrode is of very low determines the overall impedance and does not contain
impedance (1 ohm or less). This applies particularly a specific reference to any part of the circuit such as
while measuring the combined resistance of large the conduit or other earth-continuity conductor together
installations. In these cases, the following method may with the earthing lead. In fact, in large installations the
be adopted. overall impedance permissible may be less than 1 ohm,
6.2.1.1 Two suitable directions, at least 90o apart, are so that considerably less than this might be allowable
for the earth-continuity system.
first selected. The potential lead is laid in one direction
and an electrode is placed 250 to 300 m from the fence. 7.2 It is desirable when planning an installation to
The current lead is taken in the other direction and the consult the supply authority or an electrical contractor
current electrode located at the same distance as the having knowledge of local conditions, in order to
potential electrode. A reading is taken under this ascertain which of the two, namely, the use of fuses of
condition. The current electrode is then moved out in overload circuit-breakers, for protection against earth-
30 m steps until the same reading is obtained for three leakage currents is likely to prove satisfactory.
consecutive locations. The current electrode is then left
7.3 It is recommended that the maximum sustained
in the last foregoing position and the potential electrode
voltage developed under fault conditions between
is moved out in 30 m steps until three consecutive
exposed metal required to be earthed and the
readings are obtained without a change in value. The
consumer’s earth terminal shall not exceed 32 V rms.
last readings then correspond to the true value of earth
resistance. 7.4 Only pipe, rod or plate earth electrodes are
recommended and they shall satisfy the requirements
7 EARTHING OF INSTALLATIONS IN of 4.5.
BUILDINGS
7.5 Earth-Continuity Conductors
7.1 The earthing arrangements of the consumer’s
installation shall be such that on occurrence of a fault 7.5.1 Connection to earth of those parts of an
of negligible impedance from a phase or non-earthed installation which require to be earthed shall be made
conductor to adjacent exposed metal, a current by means of an earth-continuity conductor which may
corresponding to not less than three-and-a-half times be a separate earth conductor, the metal sheath of the
the rating of the fuse or one-and-a-half times the setting cables or the earth continuity conductor contained in a
of the overload earth leakage circuit-breaker will flow cable, flexible cable or flexible cord.
except where residual current operated devices or
7.5.2 Earth-Continuity Conductors and Earth Wires
voltage operated earth leakage circuit-breakers are used
not Contained in the Cables
and make the faulty circuit dead. Where fuses are used
to disconnect the faulty section of an installation in The size of the earth-continuity conductors should be

PART 1 GENERAL AND COMMON ASPECTS 145

SP 30 : 2011

correlated with the size of the current carrying 8 MEASUREMENT OF EARTH LOOP
conductors, that is, the sizes of earth-continuity IMPEDANCE
conductors should not be less than half of the largest
8.1 The current which will flow under earth fault
current carrying conductors, provided the minimum
conditions and will thus be available to operate the
size of earth-continuity conductors is not less than overload protection depends upon the impedance of
1.5 mm2 for copper and 2.5 mm2 for aluminium and the earth return loop. This includes the line conductor,
need not be greater than 70 mm2 for copper and fault, earth-continuity conductor and earthing-lead,
120 mm 2 for aluminium. As regards the sizes of earth electrodes at consumer’s premises and substations
galvanized iron and steel earth-continuity conductors, and any parallel metallic return to the transformer
they may be equal to size of current-carrying neutral as well as the transformer winding. To test the
conductors with which they are used. The size of earth- overall earthing for any installation depending for
continuity conductors to be used along with aluminium protection on the operation of overcurrent devices, for
current-carrying conductors should be calculated on example, fuses, it is necessary to measure the
the basis of equivalent size of the copper current- impedance of this loop under practical fault conditions.
carrying conductors. After the supply has been connected this shall be done
7.5.3 Earth-Continuity Conductors and Earth Wires by the use of an earth loop impedance tester as shown
in Fig. 6. The neutral is used in place of the phase
Contained in the Cables
conductor for the purpose of the test. The open-circuit
For flexible cables, the size of the earth-continuity voltage of the loop tester should not exceed 32 V.
conductors should be equal to the size of the current-
carrying conductors and for metal sheathed, PVC and 9 TYPES OF SYSTEM EARTHING
tough rubber sheathed cables the sizes of the earth- 9.1 Internationally, it has been agreed to classify the
continuity conductors shall be in accordance with earthing systems as TN System, TT System and IT
relevant Indian Standards. System.
7.5.4 Cable Sheaths Used as Earth-Continuity 9.1.1 TN System
Conductors
This type of system has one or more points of the source
Where the metal sheaths of cables are used as earth- of energy directly earthed, and the exposed and
continuity conductors, every joint in such sheaths shall extraneous conductive parts of the installation are
be so made that its current-carrying capacity is not less connected by means of protective conductors to the
than that of the sheath itself. Where necessary, they earthed point(s) of the source, that is, there is a metallic
shall be protected against corrosion. path for earth fault currents to flow from the installation
to the earthed point(s) of the source. TN systems are
Where non-metallic joint boxes are used, means shall
further sub-divided into TN-C, TN-S and TN-C-S
be provided to maintain the continuity, such as a metal
systems.
strip having a resistance not greater than that of the
sheath of the largest cable entering the box. 9.1.2 TT System
7.5.5 Metal Conduit Pipe Used as on Earth-Continuity This type of system has one or more points of the source
Conductor of energy directly earthed and the exposed and
extraneous conductive parts of the installation are
Metal conduit pipe should generally not be used as an connected to a local earth electrode or electrodes and
earth-continuity conductor but where used as very high are electrically independent of the source earth(s).
standard of workmanship in installation is essential.
Joints shall be so made that their current-carrying 9.1.3 IT System
capacity is not less than that of the conduit itself. This type of system has the source either unearthed or
Slackness in joints may result in deterioration and even earthed through a high impedance and the exposed
complete loss of continuity. Plain slip or pin-grip conductive parts of the installation are connected to
sockets are insufficient to ensure satisfactory electrical electrically independent earth electrodes.
continuity of joints. In the case of screwed conduit,
lock nuts should also be used. 9.1.4 It is also recognized that, in practice, a system
may be an admixture of types. For the purpose of this
7.5.6 Pipes and Structural Steel Work Code, earthing systems are designated as follows:
Pipes, such as water pipe, gas pipe, or members of a) TN-S system (for 240 V single-phase domestic/
structural steel work shall not be used as earth- commercial supply) — Systems where there
continuity conductor. are separate neutral and protective conductors

146 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

A = ammeter F = supply fuse

B = neon indicator P = polarity switch
C = main switch S = substation earth electrode
D = test switch V = voltmeter
E = consumer's earth electrode

At FF, jacks are provided for insertion of plugs for connection to external neutral and/or earth conductors, if desired.
NOTES
1 Arrows shows current flow in neutral or earth loop.
2 Supply system is shown in dotted.

FIG. 6 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM OF EARTH LOOP IMPEDANCE T ESTER

throughout the system. A system where the d) TN-C-S System — The neutral and protective
metallic path between the installation and the functions are combined in a single conductor
source of energy is the sheath and armouring but only in part of the system (see Fig. 7D).
of the supply cable (see Fig. 7A). e) T-TN-S System (for 6.6/11 kV three-phase bulk
b) Indian TN-S System (for 415 V three-phase supply) — The consumers installation, a TN-
domestic commercial supply) — An S system receiving power at a captive
independent earth electrode within the substation through a delta connected
consumer’s premises is provided (see Fig. 7B). transformer primary (see Fig. 7E).
c) Indian TN-C System — The neutral and f) TT System (for 415V three-phase industrial
protective functions are combined in a single supply) — Same as 9.1.2 (see Fig. 7F)
conductor throughout the system (for example g) IT System — Same 9.1.3 (see Fig. 7G).
earthed concentric wiring (see Fig. 7C).

NOTE — The protective conductor (PE) is the metallic covering

(armour or load sheath of the cable supplying the installation
NOTE — For 415 V Three Phase Domestic/Commercial
or a separate conductor). All exposed conductive parts of an
Supply Having 3-Phase and 1-Phase Loads. All exposed
installation are connected to this protective conductor via main
conductive parts of the installation are connected to protective
earthing terminal of the installation.
conductor via the main earthing terminal of the installation.
7A TN-S System Separate Neutral and Protective An independent earth electrode within the consumer’s premises
Conductors Throughout the System, 230V Simple is also provided.
Phase. Domestic/Commercial Supply for 3 ~ TN-S 7B Indian TN-S System

FIG. 7 T YPES OF SYSTEM EARTHING — (Continued)

PART 1 GENERAL AND COMMON ASPECTS 147

SP 30 : 2011

415 V Three phase industrial supply having 3-phase and

NOTE — All exposed conductive parts are connected to the
1-phase loads.
PEN conductor. For 3~ consumer, local earth electrode has to
be provided in addition. NOTE — All exposed conductive parts of the installation are
connected to an earth electrode which is electrically
7C Indian TN-C System (Neutral and Protective
independent of the source earth. Single phase TT system are
Functions Combined in a Single Conductor not present in India.
Throughout System)
7F TT System

NOTE — The usual form of a TN-C-S system is as shown, NOTE — All exposed conductive parts of an installation are
where the supply is TN-C and the arrangement in the connected to an earth electrode.
installations in TN-S. This type of distribution is known also
as Protective Multiple Earthing and the PEN conductor is The source is either connected to earth through a deliberately
referred to as the combined neutral and earth (CNE) conductor. introduced earthing impedance or is isolated from earth.
The supply system PEN conductor is earthed at several points 7G IT System
and an earth electrode may be necessary at or near a consumer’s
installation. All exposed conductive parts of an installation are FIG. 7 TYPES OF SYSTEM EARTHING
connected to the PEN conductor via the main earthing terminal
and the neutral terminal, these terminals being linked together. 10 SELECTION OF DEVICES FOR
The protective neutral bonding (PNB) is a variant of TN-C-S AUTOMATIC DISCONNECTION OF SUPPLY
with single point earthing.
10.1 General
7D TN-C-S System, Neutral and Protective
Functions Combined in a Single Conductor in a In general, every circuit is provided with a means of
Part of the System overcurrent protection. If the earth fault loop
impedance is low enough to cause these devices to
operate within the specified times (that is, sufficient
current can flow to earth under fault conditions), such
devices may be relied upon to give the requisite
automatic disconnection of supply. If the earth fault
loop impedance does not permit the overcurrent
protective devices to give automatic disconnection of
the supply under earth fault conditions, the first option
is to reduce that impedance. It may be permissible for
this to be achieved by the use of protective multiple
earthing or by additional earth electrodes. There are
practical limitations to both approaches.
In case of impedance/arcing faults, series protective
devices may be ineffective to clear the faults. An
6.6/11 kV Three phase bulk supply.
alternate approach is to be adopted for the complete
7E T-TN-S System safety of the operating personnel and equipment from
FIG. 7 T YPES OF SYSTEM EARTHING — (Continued) the hazards that may result from earth faults. This is to

148 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

use residual current devices with appropriate settings The maximum earth fault loop impedance
to clear the faults within the permissible time, based corresponding to specific ratings of fuse or miniature
on the probable contact potential. This method is circuit-breaker that will meet the criteria can be
equally applicable where earth loop impedances cannot calculated on the basis of a nominal voltage to earth
be improved. (Uo) and the time current characteristics of the device
assuming worst case conditions, that is, the slowest
In TT systems, there is an additional option of the use
operating time accepted by the relevant standards.
of fault voltage operated protective devices; whilst
Thus, if these values are not exceeded, compliance with
these devices will always give protection against shock
this Code covering automatic disconnection in case of
risk, provided they are correctly installed, the presence
an earth fault is assured.
of parallel earths from the bonding will reduce the
effectiveness of the fire risk protection they offer. These Where it is required to know the maximum earth fault
are, therefore, more suited for isolated installations that loop impedance acceptable in a circuit feeding, a fixed
do not have interconnections to other installations. It appliance or set of appliances and protected by an over
should also be remembered that every socket outlet current device, the minimum current that may be
circuit that do not have earthing facility in a household necessary to ensure operation of the overcurrent device
or similar installation should be protected by a residual within the permissible time of 10 s for a contact
current device having a rated residual operating current potential of 65 V is found from the characteristic curve
not exceeding 30 mA. of the device concerned. Application of the Ohm’s Law
then enables the corresponding earth fault loop
On all other systems where equipment is supplied by
impedance to be calculated.
means of a socket outlet not having earthing facility or
by means of a flexible cable or cord used outside the For circuits supplying socket outlets, the corresponding
protective zone created by the main equipotential earth fault loop impedance can be found by a similar
bonding of the installation such equipment should be calculation for earthed equipment. When equipment
protected by a residual current operated device having are not earthed and connected to socket outlets without
an operating current of 30 mA or less. earthing facility, disconnection should be ensured for
NOTE — Information on cascading, limitation and
30 mA within 10 s and with appropriate decrements in
discrimination is given at Annex C. time for higher currents.
10.2 Use of Over-Current Protective Devices for This method requires a knowledge of the total earth
Earth Fault Protection loop impedance alone (rather than individual
components) and is, therefore, quick and direct in
Where over-current protective devices are used to give application. Its simplicity does exclude some circuit
automatic disconnection of supply in case of earth fault arrangements that could give the required protection.
in order to give shock risk protection, the basic
requirement is that any voltage occurring between While calculations give the maximum earth fault loop
simultaneously accessible conductive parts during a or protective conductor impedance to ensure shock risk
fault should be of such magnitude and duration as not protection under fault conditions it is also necessary to
to cause danger. The duration will depend on the ensure that the circuit protective earth conductor is
characteristic of the overcurrent device and the earth protected against the thermal effects of the fault current.
fault current which, in turn, depends on the total earth The earth fault loop impedance should, therefore, be low
fault loop impedance. The magnitude will depend on enough to cause the protective device to operate quickly
the impedance of that part of the earth fault loop path enough to give that protection as well. This consideration
that lies between the simultaneously accessible parts. places a second limit on the maximum earth loop
impedance permissible and can be checked by
The basic requirement can be met if, superimposing on the time current characteristic of the
a) a contact potential of 65 V is within the overload device, the ‘adiabatic’ line having the equation:
tolerable limits of human body for 10 s. Hence
protective relay or device characteristic should k 2 A2 I t
t= 2
or A =
be such that this 65 V contact potential should I k
be eliminated within 10 s and higher voltages
with shorter times. Details of the maximum permissible earth loop
b) a voltage of 250 V can be withstood by a impedance for the thermal protection of cables by fuses
human body for about 100 ms, which requires can also be computed. However, the time current
instantaneous disconnection of such faults, characteristics of a miniature circuit-breaker are such
giving rise to potential rise of 250 V or more that if the loop impedance is low enough to give
above the ground potential. automatic disconnection within safe disconnecting time

PART 1 GENERAL AND COMMON ASPECTS 149

SP 30 : 2011

so providing shock risk protection, it will also give I t = earth fault current.
the necessary thermal protection to the earth conductor For a given application, the maximum permitted earth
likely to be used with a breaker of that specific rating. fault loop impedance would be the lower of the two
Figure 8 shows the relationship between the adiabatic values calculated for shock risk protection or thermal
line and the characteristic of fuses and miniature circuit- restraint respectively.
breaker.
It will be noted that the adiabatic line crosses the
characteristic curve for a miniature circuit-breaker at
a second point B. This denotes the maximum fault
current for which a breaker will give thermal protection
but it will generally be found in practice that this value
is higher than the prospective short circuit current that
occurs in the circuit involved and cannot, therefore, be
realized.

10.3 Earth Fault Protective Devices

There are two basic forms of such devices that can be
used for individual non-earthed/earthed (with limited
application) equipment as follows:
8A Fuses 10.3.1 Residual Current Operated Devices (RCD)
An RCD incorporates two component items. A core
balance transformer assembly with a winding for each
recognizing the out of balance current that the fault
produces in the main conductors. This induces a current
that is used to operate the tripping mechanism of a
contact system. For operating currents of 0.5 A or more,
the output from such a transformer assembly can
operate a conventional trip coil directly. For lower
values of operating current, it is necessary to interpose
a delay device, either magnetic or solid state.
Devices for load currents greater than 100 A usually
comprise a separate transformer assembly with a circuit-
breaker or contact relay, mounted together within a
8B Miniature Circuit-breaker common enclosure. Devices for load currents below
100 A usually include the transformer and contact
FIG. 8 RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN ADIABATIC LINES system within the same single unit, which is then
AND C HARACTERISTICS described as a residual current operated circuit- breaker
(RCB). Such an RCB should be considered a particular
In order that the devices will give thermal protection type of RCB although it is the most usual form.
to the protective conductor, operation has to be A wide choice of operating currents is available (typical
restricted to the area to the right of point A where these values are between 10 mA and 20 A ) RCB’s are normally
curves cross. Thus, the maximum earth fault loop non-adjustable whilst RCD’s are often manufactured so
impedance for thermal protection of the cable is that that one of several operating currents may be chosen.
corresponding to the minimum earth fault current for Single phase and multiphase devices with or without
which the device gives protection. The value of this integral overcurrent facilities are available.
current can be read from the curve and the
corresponding loop impedance can be calculated from: Where residual current breakers of 30 mA operating
current or less are being used, there is a choice between
Uo devices that are entirely electromechanical in operation
Zs = and those that employ a solid state detector. The
It
electromechanical types are generally small and compact
where and will operate on the power being fed to the fault alone
Zs = earth fault loop impedance, whereas the solid state type which tend to be bulkier to
require a power supply to ensure operation. Where this
Uo = nominal voltage to earth, and
power supply is derived from the mains, it may be
150 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE
 SP 30 : 2011

necessary to take added precaution against failures of be noted that it cannot restrict the voltage in magnitude
part of that mains supply. Devices suitable for time only in duration.
grading are more likely to be of the solid state form as
10.3.3 Current Operated Earth Leakage Circuit -Breakers
are those having higher through fault capacity.
For industrial applications, earth leakage circuit-
A test device is incorporated to allow the operation of
breakers operating on milliampere residual currents or
the RCD to be checked. Operation of this device creates
working on fault voltage principle are of little use, since
an out of balance condition within the device. Tripping
milliamperes of earth leakage current for an extensive
of the RCD by means of the test device establishes the
industrial system is a normal operating situation.
following:
Tripping based on these currents will result in nuisance
a) The integrity of the electrical and mechanical for the normal operation. Milliamperes of current in a
elements of the tripping device; and system, where exposed conductive parts of equipments
b) That the device is operating at approximately are effectively earthed and fault loop impedance is
the correct order of operating current. within reasonable values, will give rise only to a ground
potential/contact potential rise of a few millivolts. This
It should be noted that the test device does not provide will in no way contribute to shock or fire hazard. Here
a means of checking the continuity of the earthing lead objectionable fault currents will be a few or a few tenths
or the earth continuity conductor, nor does it impose of amperes. In such cases, residual current operated
any test on the earth electrode or any other part of the devices sensitive to these currents must be made use
earthing circuit. of for earth fault current and stable operation of the
Although an RCD will operate on currents equal to or plant without nuisance tripping. This is achieved either
exceeding its operating current, it should be noted that by separate relays or in-built releases initiating trip
it will only restrict the time for which a fault current signals to the circuit-breakers
flows. It cannot restrict the magnitude of the fault percent
10.4 Selection of Earth Fault Protective Devices
current which depends solely on the circuit conditions.
In general, residual current operated devices are
10.3.2 Fault Voltage Operated Earth Leakage Circuit
preferred and may be divided into two groups
Breakers (ELCB)
according to their final current operating
A voltage operated earth leakage circuit-breaker characteristics.
comprises a contact switching system together with a
10.4.1 RCDs having Minimum Operating Currents
voltage sensitive trip coil. On installations, this coil is
Greater than 30 mA
connected between the metal-work to be protected and
as good a connection with earth as can be obtained. These devices are intended to give indirect shock risk
Any voltage rise above earth on that metal-work protection to persons in contact with earthed metal.
exceeding the setting of the coil will cause the breaker
10.4.2 RCDs having Minimum Operating Current of
to trip so giving indirect shock risk protection.
30 mA and Below
Tripping coils are designed so that a fault voltage
These devices are generally referred to as having ‘high
operated device will operate on a 40 V rise when the
sensitivity’ and can give direct shock risk protection
earth electrode resistance is 500 W or 24 V on a 200 W
to persons who may come in contact with live
electrode. Single and multiphase units, with or without
conductors and earth provided that the RCD operating
overcurrent facilities, are available for load currents
times are better than those given in IS 8437 (Part 1)
up to 100 A.
and IS 8437 (Part 2). It should be noted that such RCDs
A test device is provided on a voltage operated unit to can only be used to supplement an earth conductor
enable the operation of the circuit breaker to be and not replace one.
checked, operation of the device applies a voltage to
In addition to giving protection against indirect contact
the trip coil so simulating a fault. Tripping of the circuit
or direct contact RCDs may also give fire risk
breaker by means of the test device shows the integrity
protection, the degree of protection being related to
of the electrical mechanical elements that the unit is
the sensitivity of the device.
operating with the correct order of operating voltage
and, in addition, proves the conductor from the circuit An RCD should be chosen having the lowest suitable
breaker to the earth electrode. It can not prove other operating current. The lower the operating current the
features of the installation. greater the degree of protection given, it can also
introduce possibilities of nuisance tripping and may
Whilst the voltage operated ( ELCB ) will operate when
become unnecessarily expensive. The minimum
subjected to a fault voltage of 20 V or more, it should
operating current will be above any standing leakage

PART 1 GENERAL AND COMMON ASPECTS 151

SP 30 : 2011

that may be unavoidable on the system. A further there are some designs being developed that will detect
consideration arises if it is intended to have several and operate under such conditions. On installations
devices in series. It is not always possible to introduce with several RCDs, care should be taken to ensure that
time grading to give discrimination whereas a limited neutral currents are returned via the same device that
amount of current discrimination can be obtained by carries the corresponding phase current and no other.
grading the sensitivities along the distribution chain. Failure to observe this point could result in devices
tripping even in the absence of a fault on the circuit
The maximum permitted operating current depends on
they are protecting.
the earth fault loop impedance. The product of the net
residual operating current loop impedance should not When using fault voltage operated ELCBs, the
exceed 65 V. metal-work to be protected should be isolated from
earth so that any fault current passes through the
It is often acceptable on commercial grounds to have
tripping coil gives both shock and fire risk protection.
several final circuits protected by the same residual
However, this isolation is not always practicable and
current devices. This, however, does result in several
the presence of a second parallel path to earth will
circuits being affected if a fault occurs on one of the
reduce the amount of fire risk protection offered.
circuits so protected and the financial advantages have
Because the coil is voltage sensitive, the presence of
to be weighed against the effects of loosing more than
such a parallel path will not reduce the shock risk
one circuit.
protection offered provided that this second path goes
It should also be noted that different types of RCD in to earth well clear of the point at which the earth
different circuits may react differently to the presence leakage circuit-breaker trip coil is earthed. It is required
of a neutral to earth fault on the load side. Such an that the earthing conductor is insulated to avoid contact
earth connection together with the earthing of the with other protective conductors or any exposed
supply at the neutral point will constitute a shunt across conductive parts or extraneous conductive parts so as
the neutral winding on the RCD transformer. to prevent the voltage sensitivity element from being
Consequently, a portion of the neutral load current will shunted, also the metal-work being protected should
be shunted away from the transformer and it may result be isolated from that associated with other circuits in
in the device tripping. On the other hand, such a shunt order to prevent imported faults.
may reduce the sensitivity of the device and prevent NOTE — For hybrid Indian TN-S system it is recommended
its tripping even under line to earth fault conditions. that RCD protection is provided in addition to the overcurrent
In general, therefore, care should be taken to avoid a protection provided for earth fault protection. This will ensure
neutral to earth fault where RCDs are in use, although required protection in case of any break in continuity of the
protective earth conductor.

ANNEX A
(Clause 1)
ADDITIONAL RULES FOR EARTHINGS
A-1 ADDITIONAL RULES APPLYING TO THE All parts required to be earthed shall be connected to
DIRECT EARTHING SYSTEM an earth electrode through the coil of an earth leakage
circuit-breaker which controls the supply to all those
Where a driven or buried electrode is used, the earth
parts of the installation which are to be protected; and
resistance shall be as low as possible.
to a separate earth electrode.
NOTE — The value of earth resistance is under consideration.
A-3.2 Selective Protection
A-2 ADDITIONAL RULES APPLYING TO THE If selective operation of earth leakage circuit-breaker
MULTIPLE EARTH NEUTRAL SYSTEM is required, the circuit-breaker, electrodes and earthing
This system shall be used only where the neutral and conductors shall be installed in one of the following
earth is low enough to preclude the possibility of a ways:
dangerous rise of potential in the neutral. a) Arrangement Giving Complete Selectivity —
All metal frames, conduits, earthing
A-3 ADDITIONAL RULES APPLYING TO THE
conductors, etc, which are to be protected as
EARTH LEAKAGE CIRCUIT-BREAKER SYSTEM
a unit shall be electrically separated from all
A-3.1 Installation of the Earth Leakage Circuit- other such parts and from any other earthed
Breaker System (see Fig. 9) metal. Each part to be protected as a unit shall
152 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE
 SP 30 : 2011

FIG. 9 CONNECTION OF EARTH LEAKAGE CIRCUIT -BREAKER SIMPLE INSTALLATION

10A Complete Separation of the Exposed Metal of 10B By Use of a Double-Insulated Wiring System,
One Installation from that of Other Installation Where There are no Conduits to be Earthed

FIG. 10 CONNECTION OF EARTH LEAKAGE C IRCUIT-BREAKER FOR C OMPLETE SELECTIVITY

PART 1 GENERAL AND COMMON ASPECTS 153

SP 30 : 2011

be connected to an earth electrode through active conductors supplying the whole or

the coil of an earth leakage circuit-breaker. portions of the installations concerned. Each
(see Fig. 10) part to be protected as a unit shall be
All the separately protected portions of the connected to an earth electrode through the
installations may be connected to one coil of a separate earth leakage circuit-breaker
electrode to the earth leakage circuit-breaker. which controls all the active conductors
supplying that portion of the installation only.
b) Arrangement Giving Partial Selectivity All these portions may be connected to one
(Complete Selectivity with Respect to Faults electrode, but this electrode shall be separated
in Apparatus, but no Selectivity with Respect from the electrode to which the conduits are
to Faults in Wiring in Conduit) (see Fig. 9) — connected.
All the conduits and associated fittings shall
be bonded together and connected to an earth NOTES
1 A double-insulated wiring system is used, for example,
electrode, all shall also be connected to
tough rubber-sheathed cables. Any conduit used does
another earth electrode through an earth not then need to be earthed.
leakage circuit-breaker which controls all the 2 The earthing conductor is insulated from the conduit.

ANNEX B
(Clause 3.1.3.2)
REPRESENTATIVE VALUES OF SOIL RESISTIVITY IN VARIOUS PARTS OF INDIA
Sl Locality Type of Soil Order of Remarks
No. Resistivity
Ωm
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
1. Kakarapar, Distt Surat, Gujarat Clayey black soil 6-23 Underlying bedrock-Deccan
trap
2. Taptee Valley Alluvium 6-24 do
3. Narmada Valley Alluvium 4-11 Underlying bedrock-sand-
stone shale and lime-stones,
Deccan trap and gneisses
4. Purna Valley (Deogaon) Agricultural 3-6 Underlying bedrock-Deccan
trap
5. Dhond, Mumbai Alluvium 6-40 do
6. Bijapur Distt, Karnataka a) Black cotton soil 2-10 do
b) Moorm 10-50 do
7. Garimenapenta, Distt Nellore Alluvium (highly 2 Underlying bedrock-gneisses
Andhra Pradesh clayey)
8. Kartee a) Alluvium 3-5 Underlying bedrock-sand-
b) Alluvium 9-21 stone, trap or gneisses
9. Delhi
a) Najafgarh a) Alluvium 75-170 do
(dry sandy soil)
b) Loamy to clayey 38-50 do
soil
c) Alluvium (saline) 1.5-9 do
b) Chhatarpur Dry soil 36-109 Underlying bedrock-
quartzites

154 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 ### SP 30 : 2011

Sl Locality Type of Soil Order of Remarks

No. Resistivity
Ωm
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
10. Korba, M.P. a) Moist clay 2-3 Underlying bedrock-sand-
stone or shale
b) Alluvium soil 10-20
11. Cossipur, Kolkata Alluvium 25 —
(approx)
12. Bhagalpur, Bihar a) Alluvium 9-14 Underlying bedrock-traps,
sand-stone or gneisses
13. Kerala (Trivandrum Distt) Lateritic clay 2-5 Underlying bedrock-laterite,
charnockite or granites
14. Bharatpur Sandy loam (saline) 6-14 —
15. Kalyadi, Mysore Alluvium 60-150 Underlying bedrock-gneisses
16. Kolar Gold Fields Sandy surface 45-185 do
17. Wajrakarur, Andhra Pradesh Alluvium 50-150 do
18. Koyana, Satara Distt Lateritic 800-1 200 Underlying bedrock-sand-
(dry) laterite or trap
19. Kutch-Kandla (Amjar Area) a) Alluvium (clayey) 4-50 Underlying bedrock-sand-
stone, shale or tap
b) Alluvium (sandy) 60-200 do
20. Villupuram, Chennai Clayey sands 11 Underlying bedrock-granite
21. Ambaji, Banaskantha, Gujarat Alluvium 170 Underlying bedrock-granites
and gneisses
22. Ramanathapuram Distt, Chennai a) Alluvium 2-5 Underlying bedrock-sand-
stones and gneisses
b) Lateritic soil 300 do
(approx)
NOTE — The soil resistivities are subject to wide seasonal variation as they depend very much on the moisture content.

PART 1 GENERAL AND COMMON ASPECTS 155

SP 30 : 2011

ANNEX C
(Clause 10.1)
CASCADING, DISCRIMINATION AND LIMITATION

C-1 CASCADING As soon as the two circuit-breakers trip (as from point
IB), an arc voltage UAD1 on separation of the contacts
The utilization of the current limiting capacity of a
of D1 is added to voltage UAD2 and helps, by additional
circuit-breaker at a given point to enable installation
limitation, circuit-breaker D2 to open.
of lower-rated circuit-breakers in branch is known as
‘cascading’ or ‘back-up protection’. The main The association D 1 + D 2 allows an increase in
(upstream) circuit-breakers acts as a barrier against performance of D2 as shown in Fig. 12, which depicts,
short-circuit currents and branch (downstream) circuit-
limitation curve of D2,
breakers with lower breaking capacities than the
prospective short-circuit (at their point of installation) enhanced limitation curve of D2 by D1,
operate under their normal breaking conditions. The
Icu D2 enhanced by D1.
limiting circuit-breaker helps the circuit-breaker placed
downstream by limiting high short-circuit currents thus Annex A of IS/IEC 60947-2 defines coordination under
enabling use of downstream circuit-breaker with a short-circuit conditions between circuit-breaker and
breaking capacity lower than the short-circuit current another short-circuit protective device (SCPD)
calculated at its installation point thus enabling associated in the same circuit and the tests to be
economical selection of circuit-breakers. performed. Cascading is normally verified by tests for
critical points. The tests are performed with an
Cascading concerns all devices installed downstream
upstream circuit-breaker D 2 with a maximum
of the circuit-breaker, and can be extended to several
overcurrent setting and a downstream circuit-breaker
consecutive devices, even if they are used in different
D2 with a minimum setting.
switchboards. The upstream device must have an
ultimate breaking capacity greater than or equal to the C-2 LIMITATION
assumed short-circuit current at the installation point.
For downstream circuit-breakers, the ultimate breaking C-2.1 The technique of limitation allows the circuit-
capacity to be considered is the ultimate breaking breaker to considerably reduce short-circuit currents.
capacity enhanced by coordination. It ensures attenuation of the harmful electromagnetic,
thermal and mechanical effects of short-circuits and is
The association of the upstream and downstream circuit- the basis of the cascading technique.
breakers allows an increase in performance of the
breakers. Thus, the electromagnetic, electrodynamic and The assumed fault current Isc is the short-circuit current
thermal effects of short-circuit currents are reduced. that would flow at the point of the installation where
Installation of a single limiting circuit-breaker alongwith the circuit-breaker is placed, if there were no limitation.
lower rated circuit-breakers results in considerable Since the fault current is eliminated in less than one
economy and simplification of installation work. half-period, only the first peak current (asymmetrical
peak I) is considered. This is a function of the
D1 and D2 are the two circuit-breakers (see Fig. 11). installation fault cos θ. Reduction of this peak I to

FIG. 11 OPERATION OF CIRCUIT -BREAKERS IN CASCADE

156 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

how it reduces the let through current in short-circuit

conditions (see Fig. 14 and 15). The thermal stress of the
limited current is the area (shaded) defined by the curve
of the square of the limited current I sc2 (t) . If there is no
limitation, this stress would be the area, far larger, that
would be defined by the curve of the square of the assumed
current. For an assumed short-circuit current I sc, limitation
of this current to 10 percent results in less than 1 percent
of assumed thermal stress. The cable temperature rise is
directly proportional to the thermal stress.
NOTE — On a short-circuit, adiabatic temperature-rise of
conductors occurs (without heat exchange with the outside due
to the speed of the energy supply). The increased temperature
for a conductor with a cross-section S is:

F IG. 12 LIMITATION CURVES FOR C IRCUIT-BREAKERS K 1 2

Be = Vo I dt
S2
where I2 dt is the thermal stress (A2s)

FIG. 14 CURRENT L IMITATION

FIG. 13 EFFECT OF LIMITATION ON FAULT CURRENT

limited IL characterizes circuit-breaker limitation.

Limitation consists of creating a back-electromotive
force opposing the growth of the short-circuit current.
Effectiveness of limitation depends on intervention
time, that is the time ts when the back-electromotive
force (bemf) appears, the rate at which bemf increases FIG. 15 T HERMAL STRESS LIMITATION
and the value of bemf. The back-electromotive force is
the arc voltage Ua due to the resistance of the arc Limitation considerably attenuates the harmful effects
developing between the contacts on separation. Its of short-circuits on the installation. Consequently,
speed of development depends on the contact separation limitation contributes to the durability of electrical
speed. As shown in Fig. 13, as from the time ts when installations. Due to limitation, the harmful effects of
the contacts separate, the back less than the assumed short-circuits on a motor feeder are greatly attenuated.
fault current flow through when a short-circuit occurs. Proper limitation ensures easy access to a Type 2
coordination as per IS/IEC 60947-4-1, without
C-2.2 Circuit-Breaker Limitation Capacity
oversizing of components. This type of coordination
The circuit-breaker limitation capacity defines the way ensures optimum use of their motor feeders.

PART 1 GENERAL AND COMMON ASPECTS 157

SP 30 : 2011

C-2.3 Limitation Curves C-3.2 Discrimination Quality

A circuit-breaker’s limiting capacity is expressed by The value Is is compared with assumed Isc (D2) at point
limitation curves that give, D2 of the installation.
a) the limited peak current as a function of the a) total discrimination: I s > I sc(D 2 );
rms current of the assumed short-circuit discrimination is qualified as total, that is
current. For example on a 160 A feeder where whatever the value of the fault current, D2 only
the assumed lsc is 90 kA rms, the non-limited will eliminate it.
peak lsc is 200 kA (asymmetry factor of 2.2) b) partial discrimination: I s < I sc (D 2 );
and the limited Isc is 26 kA peak. discrimination is qualified as partial, that is
b) the limited thermal stress (in A2s) as a up to Is, only D2 eliminates the fault. Beyond
function of the rms current of the assumed Is, both D1 and D2 open.
short-circuit current. For example, on the
where
previous feeder, the thermal stress moves from
more than 100 × 106 A2s to 6 × 106 A2s. Isc (D1): short-circuit current at the point where
D1 is installed,
C-3 DISCRIMINATION
Icu D1: ultimate breaking capacity of D1.
C-3.1 Discrimination is the co-ordination of the
operating characteristics of two or more over-current C-3.3 Types of Discriminations
protective devices such that, on the incidence of over- C-3.3.1 Current Discrimination
currents within stated limits, the device intended to
operate within these limits does so, while the other(s) This technique is directly linked to the staging of the
does (do) not (see Fig. 16). Long Time (LT) tripping curves of two serial-connected
circuit-breakers (see Fig. 17).
Distinction is made between series discrimination
involving different over-current protective devices
passing substantially the same over-current and
network discrimination involving identical protective
devices passing different proportions of the over-
current. In LV networks, discrimination is
recommended in order to obtain higher levels of supply
continuity and protection, ensuring better safety of
installations and minimum cost overruns.
Cascading principle in limiting CBs can enhance the
discrimination levels. It is recommended that the
manufacturer provide the relevant data in terms of
discrimination charts and cascading levels for various
combination of CBs (upstream and downstream) and
fault current as per the laboratory test results.
A discrimination current Is is defined such that if;
a) Ifault > Is: both circuit-breakers trip, and
FIG. 17 CURRENT DISCRIMINATION
b) Ifault < Is: only D2 eliminates the fault.
The discrimination limit Is is,
a) Is = Isd2 if the thresholds Isd1and Isd2 are too close
or merge, and
b) I s = I sd1 if the thresholds I sd1 and I sd2 are
sufficiently far apart.
Current discrimination is achieved when,
a) Ir1 / Ir2 < 2
b) Isd1 / Isd2 > 2
The discrimination limit being
F IG. 16 D ISCIMINATION AND SEQUENCE OF TRIPPING

158 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

Is = Isd1 NOTE — Use of B category circuit-breakers means that the

installation must withstand high electrodynamic and thermal
C-3.3.1.1 Discrimination quality stresses. Consequently, these circuit-breakers have a high
instantaneous threshold Ii that can be adjusted and disabled in
Discrimination is total if Is > Isc(D2), that is Is d1 > Isc(D2). order to protect the busbars if necessary.

This normally implies, C-3.4 Enhancement of Current and Time

a relatively low level Isc(D2), Discrimination
a large difference between the ratings of circuit- C-3.4.1 Enhancement by Limiting Downstream
breakers D1 and D2. Circuit-Breakers
Current discrimination is normally used in final Use of a limiting downstream circuit-breaker enables
distribution. the discrimination limit to be pushed back.
C-3.3.2 Time Discrimination
This is the extension of current discrimination and is
obtained by staging over time of the tripping curves.
This technique consists of giving a time delay of t to
the Short Time (ST) tripping of D1 (see Fig. 18).

FIG. 19 E NHANCEMENT OF DISCRIMINATION

On referring to Fig. 19, a fault current Id will be seen

by D1,
equal to Id for a non-limiting circuit-breaker, and equal
to ILd < Id for a limiting circuit-breaker.
The limit of current and time discrimination Is of the
F IG. 18 TIME DISCRIMINATION association D1 + D2 is thus pushed back to a value that
increases when the downstream circuit-breaker is rapid
The thresholds (Ir1, Isd1) of D1 and (Ir2, Isd2) comply and limiting.
with the staging rules of current discrimination. The
discrimination limit Is of the association is at least equal C-3.4.2 Discrimination Quality
to Ii1, the instantaneous threshold of D1. Use of a limiting circuit-breaker is extremely effective
C-3.3.2.1 Discrimination quality for achievement of total discrimination when threshold
settings (current discrimination) and/or the
For discrimination on final and/or intermediate feeders, instantaneous tripping threshold (time discrimination)
A category circuit-breakers can be used with time- of the upstream circuit-breaker D1 are too low with
delayed tripping of the upstream circuit-breaker. This respect to the fault current Id in D2– Isc(D2).
allows extension of current discrimination up to the
instantaneous threshold Ii1 of the upstream circuit- C-3.4.2.1 Logic discrimination or “Logic
breaker: Is > Ii1. If Isc(D2) is not too high (case of a Discrimination Zone (ZSI)”
final feeder) total discrimination can be obtained. This type of discrimination can be achieved with
On the incomers and feeders of the MSB, as continuity circuit-breakers equipped with specially designed
of supply takes priority, the installation characteristics electronic trip units. Only the Short Time Protection
allow use of B category circuit-breakers designed for (STP) and Ground Fault Protection (GFP) functions
time-delayed tripping. These circuit-breakers have a of the controlled devices are managed by Logic
high thermal withstand (Icw > 50 percent Icn for t = Is): Discrimination. In particular, the Instantaneous
Is > Icw1. Even for high Isc(D2), time discrimination Protection function (inherent protection function) is
normally provides total discrimination: Icw1 > Isc(D2). not concerned.

PART 1 GENERAL AND COMMON ASPECTS 159

SP 30 : 2011

C-3.4.2.5 Discrimination quality

This technique enables easy achievement as standard
of discrimination on 3 levels or more, easy achievement
of downstream discrimination with non-controlled
circuit-breakers, elimination of important stresses on
the installation, relating to time-delayed tripping of the
protection device, in event of a fault directly on the
upstream busbars. All the protection devices are thus
virtually instantaneous.

C-3.5 Discrimination Rules

C-3.5.1 Overload Protection
For any overcurrent value, discrimination is guaranteed
on overload if the non-tripping time of the upstream
FIG. 20 LOGIC DISCRIMINATION(ZSI) circuit-breaker D 1 is greater than the maximum
breaking time of circuit-breaker D2.
C-3.4.2.2 Settings of controlled circuit-breakers The condition is fulfilled if the ratio of Long Time (LT)
a) Time delay: staging (if any) of the time delays and Short Time (ST) settings is greater than 2. The
of time discrimination to be applied (t D1 > discrimination limit Is is at least equal to the setting
t D2 > t D3) threshold of the upstream Short Time (ST) time delay.
b) Thresholds: natural staging of the protection C-3.5.2 Short-circuit Protection
device ratings must be complied with (IcrD1 >
IcrD2 > IcrD2). C-3.5.2.1 Time discrimination
NOTE — This technique ensures discrimination even with Tripping of the upstream device D1 is time delayed by
circuit-breakers of similar ratings. t, the conditions required for current discrimination
C-3.4.2.3 Principles must be fulfilled and the time delay t of the upstream
device D1 must be sufficient for the downstream device
Activation of the Logic Discrimination function is via to be able to eliminate the fault. Time discrimination
transmission of information on the pilot wire for ZSI increases the discrimination limit I s up to the
input, instantaneous tripping threshold of the upstream
a) Low level (no downstream faults): the circuit-breaker D1 (see Fig. 21).
Protection function is on standby with a Discrimination is always total if circuit-breaker D1 is
reduced time delay (< 0.1) of category B, has an Icw characteristic equal to its Icu.
b) High level (presence of downstream faults):
the relevant Protection function moves to the Discrimination is total in the other cases if the
time delay status set on the device. instantaneous tripping threshold of the upstream
circuit-breaker D1 is greater than the assumed Isc in D2.
Activation of the Logic Discrimination function is via
transmission of information on the pilot wire for ZSI C-3.5.2.2 Logic discrimination
output, Discrimination is always total.
a) Low level: the trip unit detects no faults and C-3.5.2.3 General case
sends no orders.
b) High level: the trip unit detects a fault and There are no general discrimination rules. The time/
sends an order. current curves clearly supply a value of Isc (limited or
assumed) less than the Short Time tripping of the
C-3.4.2.4 Operation upstream circuit-breaker; discrimination is then total.
A pilot wire connects in cascading form the protection If this is not the case, only tests can indicate
devices of an installation (see Fig. 20). When a fault discrimination limits of coordination, in particular
occurs, each circuit-breaker upstream of the fault when circuit-breakers are of the limiting type. The
(detecting a fault) sends an order (high level output) discrimination limit Is is determined by comparison of
and moves the upstream circuit-breaker to its natural curves,
time delay (high level input). The circuit breaker placed a) in tripping energy for the downstream circuit-
just above the fault does not receive any orders (low breaker, and
level input) and thus trips almost instantaneously.
160 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE
 SP 30 : 2011

b) in non-tripping energy for the upstream C-3.6.2.1.1 Current condition

circuit-breaker.
The RCD must trip between In and In /2, where In is the
The potential intersection point of the curves gives the declared operating current. There must therefore exist
discrimination limit Is. The manufacturers indicate in a minimum ratio of 2 between the sensitivities of the
tables the tested performance of coordination. upstream device and the downstream device. In
practice, the standardized values indicate a ratio of 3.
C-3.6 Earth Leakage Protection Discrimination
C-3.6.2.1.2 Time condition
C-3.6.1 According to the Earthing System,
discrimination only uses coordination of overcurrent The minimum non-tripping time of the upstream device
protection devices. When the insulation fault is treated must be greater than the maximum tripping time of
specifically by earth leakage protection devices (for the downstream device for all current values.
example in the TT system), discrimination of the NOTE — The tripping time of RCDs must always be less than
residual current devices (RCDs) with one another must or equal to the time specified in the installation standards to
also be guaranteed. Discrimination of earth leakage guarantee protection of people against indirect contacts.
protection devices must ensure that, should an
insulation fault occur, only the feeder concerned by
the fault is de-energized. The aim is to optimize energy
availability.

F IG. 22 VERTICAL D ISCRIMINATION

For the domestic area, standards IS 12640 (Part 1)
(residual current circuit-breakers) and IS 12640 (Part
2) (residual current devices) define operating times.
The values in the table correspond to curves G and S.
Curve G (General) correspond to non-delayed RCDs
and S (Selective) to those that are voluntarily delayed
(see Fig. 23).

FIG. 21 D ISCRIMINATION AT VARIOUS FAULT CURRENTS FIG. 23 OPERATING TIME CURVES

C-3.6.2 Types of Earth Leakage Protection C-3.6.2.2 Horizontal discrimination

Discrimination
Sometimes known as circuit selection, it allows savings
C-3.6.2.1 Vertical discrimination at the supply end of the installation of an RCD placed
In view of requirements and operating standards, in the cubicle if all its feeders are protected by RCDs.
discrimination must simultaneously meet both the time Only the faulty feeder is de-energized, the devices
and current conditions (see Fig. 22). placed on the other feeders do not see the fault (see
Fig. 24).

PART 1 GENERAL AND COMMON ASPECTS 161

SP 30 : 2011

F IG. 24 HORIZONTAL DISCRIMINATION

Table 2 Standardized Values of Operating Times

Type In IΔ n Standardized Values of Operating Time and Non-operating Time (in s) at:

IΔn 2IΔn 5IΔn 500A

General instantaneous All values All values 0.3 0.15 0.04 0.04 Maximum operating time
Selective >25 >0.030 0.5 0.2 0.15 0.15 Maximum operating time
0.13 0.06 0.05 0.04 Maximum operating time

162 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2010

SECTION 15 LIGHTNING PROTECTION

0 FOREWORD protective system that are intended to collect the

lightning discharges from the atmosphere.
For the purposes of the National Electrical Code, the
fixed installation for lightning protection is considered 3.2 Bonds — Electrical connection between the
part of the electrical installation design and constitutes lightning protective system and other metal work, and
a major area where the installation design engineer has between various portions of the latter.
to ensure proper coordination.
3.3 Down Conductors — Conductors which connect
This Section covers the essential design and the air terminations with the earth terminations.
construction details of lightning protective systems. It 3.4 Earth Terminations or Earth Terminations
is, however, intended to serve only as a guide of general Network — Those part of the lightning protective
nature on the principles and practices in the protection system which are intended to distribute the lightning
of structures against lightning, and account has to be discharges into the general mass of the earth. All parts
taken of several other local conditions such as below the testing point in a down conductor are
variations in the architecture, topography of the region, included in this term.
atmospheric conditions, etc.
3.5 Earth Electrodes — A metal plate, pipe or other
Lightning protection of industrial installations which conductor or any array of conductors electrically
are categorized as hazardous, require special connected to the general mass of the earth; these
considerations. These are summarised in Part 7 of the include those portions of the earth terminations that
Code. make direct electrical contact with the earth.
Assistance has been derived from IS 2309 : 1989 ‘Code 3.6 Fasteners — Devices used to fasten the conductors
of practice for the protection of buildings and allied to the structures.
structures against lightning (second revision)’ for this
Section. 3.7 Isoceraunic Level — It is the number of days in a
year on which the thunder is heard in the particular
1 SCOPE region averaged over a number of years.
1.1 This (Part 1/Section 15) of the Code covers 3.8 Joints — The mechanical and electrical junctions
guidelines on the basic electrical aspects of lightning between two or more portions of the lightning
protective systems for buildings and the electrical protective system or other metal bonded to the system
installation forming part of the system. or both.
1.2 Additional guidelines if any, for specific 3.9 Lightning Protective System — The whole system
occupancies from the point of lightning protection are of interconnected conductors used to protect a structure
covered in respective sections of the Code. from the effects of lightning.
3.10 Metal-clad Building — A building with sides
2 REFERENCES
made of or covered with sheet metal.
The following Indian Standards on lightning protection
3.11 Metal-roofed Building — A building with roof
may be referred for further details:
made of or covered with sheet metal.
IS No. Title
3.12 Side Flash — A spark occurring between nearby
IS 2309 : 1989 Code of practice for the protection metallic objects or between such objects and the
of buildings and allied structures lightning protective system or to earth.
against lightning (second revision)
IS 15086 : Part 5/ Surge arresters : Part 5 Selection 3.13 Testing Points — Joints in down conductors or
IEC 60099-5 : 1996 and application recommen- in bonds or in earth conductors connecting earth
dations electrodes, so designed and situated as to enable
resistance measurements to be made.
3 TERMINOLOGY 3.14 Zone of Protection — The space within which
the lightning conductor is expected to provide
For the purposes of this Section, the following protection against a direct lightning stroke.
definitions shall apply.
4 EXCHANGE OF INFORMATION
3.1 Air Termination (Lightning Conductor) or Air
Termination Network — Those parts of a lightning 4.1 The architect should exchange information with

PART 1 GENERAL AND COMMON ASPECTS 163

SP 30 : 2010

the engineer concerned when the building plans are The rate of rise of current in conjunction with the
being prepared. The primary object of such an inductance of the discharge path produces an inductive
exchange is to obtain information regarding the voltage drop which would be added, with due regard
architectural features of the structure so that due to the time relationship, to the resistive (ohmic) voltage
provision may be made to retain the aesthetic features drop across the earthing system.
of the building while planning the location of the
lightning conductors and down conductors of the 5.3 Thermal Effects
lightning protective system. Information may also be The thermal effect of lightning discharge results in rise
obtained at an early stage regarding other services, such in temperature of the conductor through which the
as electrical installation, gas and water pipes as well lightning current is discharged to the earth. Although
as climatic and soil conditions. the amplitude of the lightning current may be very high,
4.2 Scale drawings showing plans and elevations of its duration is so short that the thermal effect on a
the structure should be obtained, and the nature, size lightning protective system is usually negligible. This
and position of all the metal component parts of the ignores the fusing or welding effects which occur
lightning protective system should be indicated on locally consequent upon the rupture of a conductor
them. In addition, a ground plan should show all the which was previously damaged or was of inadequate
tall objects, such as, buildings, masts, transmission cross-sectional area. In practice the cross-sectional area
towers, tall trees, etc, within the zone of protection. of a lightning conductor is determined primarily by
mechanical considerations.
5 CHARACTERISTICS OF LIGHTNING
DISCHARGES 5.4 Mechanical Effects

5.1 The principal effects of lightning discharge to When a high electric current is discharged through
structure are electrical, thermal and mechanical. These parallel conductors which are in close proximity to each
effects are determined by the current which is other, these are subjected to large mechanical forces.
discharged into the structure. These currents are The lightning conductors should, therefore, be
unidirectional and may vary in amplitude from a few provided with adequate mechanical fixings.
hundred amperes to about 200 kA. The current in any 5.4.1 A different mechanical effect exerted by a
lightning discharge rises steeply to its crest value in a lightning discharge is due to the fact that the air channel,
few microseconds and decays to zero in a few that is, the space between the thunder cloud and the
milliseconds. Many lightning discharges consist of a lightning conductor, along which the discharge is
single stroke but some others involve a sequence of propagated, is suddenly raised to a very high
strokes which follow the same path and which temperature. This results in a strong air pressure wave
discharge separate currents of amplitude and duration which is responsible for damages to buildings and other
as mentioned above. A complete lightning discharge structures. It is not possible to provide protection
may thus last a second or even longer. against such an effect.
5.2 Electrical Effects 6 DETERMINATION OF THE NEED FOR
The principal electrical effects of a lightning discharge PROTECTION
are two-fold.
6.1 Risk Index
5.2.1 The lightning current which is discharged to earth
In determining how far to go in providing lightning
through the resistance of the lightning conductor and
protection for specific cases or whether or not it is
earth electrode provided for a lightning protective
needed at all, it is necessary to take into account the
system, produces a resistive voltage drop which
following factors:
momentarily raises the potential of the protective
system with respect to the absolute earth potential to a a) Usage of structure,
very high value. The lightning current also produces, b) Type of construction,
around the earth electrode, a high voltage gradient c) Contents or consequential effects,
which may be dangerous to persons and animals.
d) Degree of isolation,
5.2.2 The lightning current rises steeply to its crest e) Type of isolation,
value (approximate at the rate of 10 kA/ms) and as a f) Height of structure, and
first approximation may be regarded as equivalent to
g) Lightning prevalance.
high frequency discharge. A vertical conductor of the
dimensions generally used in a lightning protective 6.1.1 IS 2309 gives the details of various factors that
system has an inductance of about 16 × 10–5 H/100 m. affect the risk of the structure being struck and the

164 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2010

consequential effects of a stroke. Certain values called aluminium, galvanized steel of the same
‘index figures’, have been assigned to these factors cross section as recommended for copper
which help in arriving at an overall ‘risk index’ to serve may be used, in line with the provisions
as an aid to judging whether lightning protection. The of IS 2309. Where steel is used it shall
examples of such structures are: be thoroughly protected against corrosion
by a zinc coating. Galvanized steel may
a) those in or near which large number of people
be preferred for some short life
congregate.
installations, such as exhibitions. Copper
b) those concerned with the maintenance of is preferred to galvanized iron where
essential public services, corrosive gases, industrial pollution or
c) those in areas where lightning strokes are saltaden atmospheric conditions are
prevalent, encountered.
d) very tall or isolated structures, d) Aluminium — Aluminium wire and strips
e) structures of historic or cultural importance, are increasingly finding favour for use as
and lightning conductors in view of the fact
f) structures containing explosives and highly that aluminium has a conductivity almost
flammable materials. double that of copper mass for mass.
When used, it shall be least 99 percent
7 ZONE OF PROTECTION pure, of sufficient mechanical strength
and effectively protected against
7.1 The zone of protection of a lightning conductor
corrosion.
denotes the space within which a lightning conductor
provides protection against a direct lightning stroke e) Alloys — Where alloys of metals are used
by diverting the stroke to itself. Examples of the they shall be substantially as resistant to
protection of different types and shapes of buildings corrosion as copper under similar
along with zone of protection provided by their conditions.
lightning protective systems are given in 8.2 of NOTE — Aluminium should not be used
underground or in direct contact with walls.
IS 2309.
8.2 Shapes and Sizes
8 MATERIALS AND DIMENSIONS
The recommended shape and minimum sizes of
8.1 Materials conductors for use above ground and below ground
The materials of lightning conductors, down are given in Table 1 and Table 2 respectively.
conductors, earth termination network, etc, of the
protective system shall be reliably resistant to corrosion Table 1 Shapes and Minimum Sizes of Conductors
or be adequately protected against corrosion. The for Use Above Ground
following materials are recommended: (Clause 8.2)

a) Copper — When solid or stranded copper Sl Material and Shape Minimum Size
wire or flat copper strips are used, they No.
(1) (2) (3)
shall be of grade ordinarily required for
commercial electrical work, generally i) Round copper wire or 6 mm diameter
designated as being of 98 percent copper-clad steel wire
ii) Stranded copper wire 50 mm2 (or 7/3.00 mm diameter)
conductivity when annealed. They shall iii) Copper strip 20 mm × 3 mm
conform to relevant Indian Standards. iv) Round galvanized iron wire 8 mm diameter
v) Galvanized iron strip 20 mm × 3 mm
b) Copper-clad Steel — Where copper-clad vi) Round aluminium wire 9 mm diameter
steel is used, the copper covering shall vii) Aluminium strip 25 mm × 3.15 mm
be permanently and effectively welded
to the steel core. The proportion of copper
and steel shall be such that the 8.3 Corrosion
conductance of the material is not less Where corrosion due to atmospheric, chemical,
than 30 percent of the conductance of electrolytic or other causes is likely to impair any part
solid copper of the same total cross- of the lightning protective system, suitable precautions
sectional area. should be taken to prevent its occurrence. The contact
c) Galvanized Steel — If there is any of dissimilar metals is likely to initiate and accelerate
difficulty in the use of copper or corrosion unless the contact surfaces are kept

PART 1 GENERAL AND COMMON ASPECTS 165

SP 30 : 2010

completely dry and protected against the ingress of single horizontal and vertical conductors for the
moisture. protection of bigger buildings.
9.1.1 A vertical air termination need not have more
Table 2 Shapes and Minimum Sizes of Conductors
than one point and shall project at least 30 cm above
for Use Below Ground
the object, salient point or network on which it is fixed.
(Clause 8.2)
9.1.2 Horizontal air terminations should be so
Sl Material and Shape Minimum Size interconnected that no part of the roof is more than 9
No.
(1) (2) (3) m away from the nearest horizontal conductor except
that an additional 30 cm may be allowed for each 30 cm
i) Round copper wire or copper-clad 8 mm diameter
steel wire
by which the part to be protected is below the nearest
ii) Copper strip 32 mm × 6 mm protective conductor. For a flat roof, horizontal air
iii) Round galvanized iron wire 10 mm diameter terminations along the outer perimeter of the roof are
iv) Galvanized iron strip 32 mm × 6 mm
used. For a roof of building with larger horizontal
dimensions a network of parallel horizontal conductors
8.3.1 Dissimilar metal contacts can exist where a should be installed as shown in IS 2309.
conductor is held by fixing devices or against external
NOTE — Salient points even if less than 9 m apart should each
metal surfaces. Corrosion can arise also where water be provided with an air termination.
passing over one metal comes into contact with another.
Run-off water from copper, copper alloys and lead can 9.1.3 Horizontal air terminations should be coursed
attack aluminium alloys and zinc. The metal of the along contours, such as ridges, parapets and edges of
lightning protective system should be compatible with flat roofs, and where necessary over flat surfaces in
the metal or metals used externally on the structure such a way as to join each air termination to the rest
over which the system passes or with which it may and should themselves form a closed network.
make contact. 9.1.4 The layout of the network may be designed to
9 DESIGN suit the shape of the roof and architectural features of
the buildings.
9.0 General
9.1.5 The air termination network should cover all
Lightning protective systems should be installed with salient points of the structure.
a view to offering least impedance to the passage of
9.1.6 All metallic finials, chimneys, ducts, vent pipes,
lightning current between air-terminals and earth.
railings, gutters and the like, on or above the main
There shall be at least two parts, and more if practicable.
surface of the roof of the structure shall be bonded to,
This is done by connecting the conductors to form a
cage enclosing the building. The basic design and form part of, the air termination network. If
considerations for lightning protective systems are portions of a structure vary considerably in height, any
given in IS 2309. necessary air termination or air termination network
of the lower portions should, in addition to their own
The principal component of a lightning protective conductors, be bonded to the down conductors of the
system are: taller portions.
a) air terminations, 9.1.7 All air terminals shall be effectively secured
b) down conductors, against overturning either by attachment to the object
c) joints and bends, to be protected or by means of substantial braces and
d) testing points, fixings which shall be permanently and rigidly attached
e) earth terminations, to the building. The method and nature of the fixings
f) earth electrodes, and should be simple, solid and permanent, due attention
being given to climatic conditions and possible
g) fasteners.
corrosion.
9.1 Air Terminations
9.2 Down Conductors
For the purpose of lightning protection, the vertical
and horizontal conductors are considered equivalent The number and spacing of down conductors shall
and the use of pointed air terminations or vertical finials largely depend upon the size and shape of the building
is, therefore, not regarded as essential except when and upon aesthetic considerations. The minimum
dictated by practical considerations. An air termination number of down conductors may, however, be decided
may consist for a vertical conductor as for a spire, a on the following considerations:

166 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2010

a) A structure having a base area not exceeding 9.2.7 In deciding on the routing of the down conductor,
100 m2 may have one down conductor only if its accessibility for inspection, testing and maintenance
the height of the air termination provides should be taken into account.
sufficient protection. However, it is advisable
to have at least two down conductors except 9.3 Joints and Bonds
for very small buildings. 9.3.1 Joints
b) For structures having a base area exceeding
The lightning protective system shall have as few joints
100 m2 , the number of down conductors
in it as necessary. In the down conductors below ground
required should be worked out as follows:
level these shall be mechanically and electrically
1) One for the first 100 m2 plus one more effective and shall be so made as to exclude moisture
for every additional 300 m 2 or part completely. The joints may be clamped, screwed,
thereof, or bolted, crimped, riverted or welded. With overlapping
2) One for every 30 m of perimeter. joints the length of the overlap should not be less
The small of the two shall apply. than 20 mm for all types of conductors. Contact
surfaces should first be cleaned and then inhibited from
c) For a structure exceeding 30 m in height
oxidation with a suitable non-corrosive compound.
additional consideration as given in IS 2309
Joints of dissimilar metal should be suitably protected
shall apply.
against bimetallic action and corrosion.
9.2.1 Down conductors should be distributed round
9.3.1.1 In general, joints for strips shall be tinned,
the outside walls of the structure. They shall preferably
soldered, welded or brazed and at least double-riveted,
be run along the corners and other projections, due
welded or brazed and at least double-riveted. Clamped
consideration being given to the location of air
or bolted joints shall only be used on test points or on
terminations and earth terminations. Lift shaft shall not
bonds to existing metal, but joints shall only be of the
be used for fixing down conductors.
clamped or screwed type.
9.2.2 It is very important that the down conductors shall
9.3.2 Bonds
follow the most direct path possible between the air
termination and the earth termination, avoiding sharp External metal on or forming part of a structure may
bends, upturns and kinks. Joints shall as far as possible have to discharge the full lightning current. Therefore,
be avoided in down conductors. Adequate protection the bond to the lightning protective system shall have
may be provided to the conductors against mechanical a cross-sectional area not less than that employed for
damage. Metal pipes should not be used as protection the main conductors. On the other hand, internal metal
for the conductors. is not so vulnerable and its associated bonds are, at
most, only likely to carry a portion of the total lightning
9.2.3 Metal pipes leading rainwater from the roof to current, apart from their function of equalizing
the ground may be connected to the down conductors potential. These latter bonds may, therefore, be smaller
but cannot replace them. Such connections shall have in cross-sectional area than those used for the main
disconnecting joints for testing purposes. conductors. All the bonds should be suitably protected
9.2.4 Where the provision of suitable external routes against corrosion. Bonds shall be as short as possible.
for down conductors is impracticable or inadvisable, 9.4 Testing Points
as in buildings of cantilever construction, from the first
floor upwards, down conductors may be used in an air Each down conductor shall be provided with a testing
space provided by a non-metallic non-combustible point in a position convenient for testing but
internal duct. Any covered recess not smaller inaccessible for interference. No connection, other than
than 75 mm × 15 mm or any vertical service duct one direct to an earth electrode, shall be made below a
running the full height of the building may be used for testing point. Testing points shall be phosphorbronze,
this purpose, provided it does not contain an gunmetal, copper or any other suitable material.
unarmoured or non-metal-sheathed cable.
9.5 Earth Terminations
9.2.5 Any extended metal running vertically through Each down conductor shall have an independent earth
the structure should be bonded to the lightning termination. It should be capable of isolation for testing
conductor at the top and the bottom unless the clearance purposes. Suitable location for the earth termination
are in accordance with IS 2309 for tall structures. shall be selected after testing and assessing the specific
9.2.6 A structure on bare rock, should be provided with resistivity of the soil and with due regard to reliability
at least down conductors equally spaced. of the sub-soil water to ensure minimum soil moistness.

PART 1 GENERAL AND COMMON ASPECTS 167

SP 30 : 2010

9.5.1 Water pipe system should not be bonded to the 9.6.4 When plate electrodes are used they shall be
earth termination system. However, if adequate buried into the ground so that the top edge of the plate
clearance between the two cannot be obtained, they is at a depth not less than 1.5 m from the surface of the
may be effective bonded and the bonds should be ground. If two plate electrodes are to be used in parallel
capable of isolation and testing. The gas pipes, the distance between the two shall not be less than 8 m.
however, should in no case be bonded to the earth
9.6.5 In the neighbourhood of structure where high
termination system.
temperatures are likely to be the encountered in the
9.5.2 It is recommended that all earth terminations sub-soil, for example brick kilns, the earth electrodes
should be interconnected. Common earthing, besides may have to be installed at such a distance from the
equalizing the voltage at various earth terminations also structure where the ground is not likely to be dried
minimizes any risk to it of mechanical damage. The out.
condition for limiting earthing resistance given in 12
does not apply and in such a case no provision need be 9.7 Fasteners
made for isolation in earth. Conductors shall be securely attached to the building
9.5.3 A structure standing on bare rock should be or other object to be protected by fastners which shall
equipped with a conductor encircling and fixed to the be substantial in construction, not subject to breakage,
structure at ground level and following reasonably and shall be made of galvanized steel or other suitable
closely the contour of the ground. This conductor material. If fasteners are made of steel, they should be
should be installed so as to minimize any risk to it of galvanized to protect them against corrosion. If they
mechanical damage. The condition for limiting are made of any other material suitable precautions
earthing resistance given in 12 does not apply and in should be taken to avoid corrosion. Some samples of
such a case no provision need be made for isolation in fasteners are shown in IS 2309.
earth termination for testing. Where there is a risk to
9.8 Earth Resistance
persons or to valuable equipment, expert advice should
be sought. Each earth termination should have a resistance in
ohms to earth not exceeding numerically the product
9.6 Earth Electrodes of 10 and the number of earth terminations to be
Earth electrodes shall be constructed and installed in provided. The whole of the lightning protective system
accordance with Part 1/Section 14 of the Code. should have a combined resistance to earth not
exceeding 10 ohms before any bonding has been
9.6.1 Earth electrodes shall consist of rods, strips or effected to metal in or on the structure or to surface
plates. Metal sheaths of cables shall not be used as below ground.
earth electrodes.
10 ISOLATION AND BONDING
9.6.2 When rods or pipes are used they should be driven
into the ground as close as practicable but outside the 10.0 When a lightning protective system is struck with
circumference of the structure. Long lengths in sections a lightning discharge, its electrical potential with
coupled by screwed connectors or socket joints can be respect to earth is raised, and unless suitable
built up where necessary to penetrate the substrate of precautions are taken, the discharge may seek
low resistivity. Where ground conditions are more alternative paths to earth by side flashing to other metal
favourable for the use of shorter lengths of rods in in the structure. Side flashing may be avoided by the
parallel, the distance between the rods should following two methods:
preferably be not less than twice the length of the rods.
a) Isolation, and
The arrangement of earth electrodes are given in Fig. 24
of IS 2309. b) Bonding.

9.6.3 When strips are used, these should be buried in 10.1 Isolation
trenches or beneath the structure at a suitable depth,
Isolation requires large clearances between the
but not less than 0.5 m deep to avoid damage by
lightning protective system and other metal parts in
building or agricultural operations. The strips should
the structure. To find out the approximate clearances,
preferably be laid radially in two or more directions
the following two factors should be taken into account:
from the point of connection to a down conductor. But
if this is not possible they may extend in one direction a) The resistive voltage drop in the earth
only. However, if the space restriction requires the strips termination, and
to be laid in parallel or in grid formation the distance b) The inductive voltage drop in the down
between two strips should not be less than 2 m. conductors.

168 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2010

10.1.1 The resistive voltage drop requires a clearance reinforcement. Where regular inspection is not
of 0.3 m ohm of earthing resistance while the inductive possible, it is recommended that a corrosion resistant
voltage drop requires a clearance of 1 m for each 15 m material be used for bonding to the steel or to the
of structure height. For two or more down conductors reinforcement and this should be brought out for
with a common air termination this distance should be connection to the air termination. Down conductor and
divided by the number of down conductors. The total earth terminations will, of course, be required if the
clearance required is the sum of the two distances and inherent resistance of the structure is found to be
may be expressed by the following simple equation: unsatisfactory when tested.
10.2.4 Where metal exists in a structure as
H
D = 0.3 R reinforcement which cannot be bonded into a
15n continuous conducting network, and which is not or
where cannot be equipped with external earthing connections,
its presence should be disgarded. The danger
D = required clearance in m; inseparable from the presence of such metal can be
R = combined earthing resistance of the earth minimized by keeping it entirely isolated from the
termination, in ohms; lightning protective system.
H = structure height in m, and 10.2.5 Where the roof structure is wholly or partly
n = number of down conductors connected to a covered by metal, care should be taken that such metal
common air termination. is provided with a continuous conducting path to earth.
10.1.2 The above clearance may be halved if a slight 10.2.6 In any structure, metal which is attached to the
risk of occurrence of a side flash can be accepted. outer surface or projects through a wall or a roof and
has insufficient clearance from the lightning protective
10.1.3 The drawback of isolation lies in obtaining and
system, and is unsuitable for use as part of it, should
maintaining the necessary safe clearance and in
preferably be bonded as directly as possible to the
ensuring that isolated metal has no connection via the
lightning protectives system. If the metal has
water pipes or other services with the earth. In general,
considerable length (for example, cables, pipes, gutters,
isolation can be practised only in small buildings. rain-water pipes, stair-ways, etc) and runs
10.2 Bonding approximately parallel to a down conductor or bond,
it should be bonded at each and but not below the test
In structures which contain electrically continuous point. If the metal is in discontinuous lengths, each
metal, for example, a roof, wall, floor or covering, this portion should be bonded to the lightning protective
metal, suitably bonded, may be used as part of the system; alternatively, where the clearance permits, the
lightning protective system, provided the amount and presence of the metal may be disregarded.
arrangement of the metal render it suitable for use in
10.2.7 Bonding of metal entering or leaving a structure
accordance with 9.
in the form of sheathing or armouring of cable, electric
10.2.1 If a structure is simply a continuous metal frame conduit, telephone, steam, compressed air or other
without external coverings it may not require any air services with earth termination system, should be
termination or down conductors provided it can be avoided. However, if they are required to be bonded,
ensured that the conducting path is electrically the bonding should be done as directly as possible to
continuous and the base of the structure is adequately the earth termination at the point of entry or exist
earthed. outside the structure on the supply side of the service.
The gap pipes should in no case be bonded with other
10.2.2 A reinforced concrete structure or a reinforced
metal parts. However, water pipes may be bonded to
concrete frame structure may have sufficiently low
other metal parts, if isolation and adequate clearance
inherent resistance to earth to provide protection cannot be obtained. In this operation all the statutory
against lightning and if connections are brought out rules or regulations which may be in force should be
from the reinforcement at the highest points during followed and the competent authority should be
construction, a test may be made to varify this at the consulted for providing lightning protection in such
completion of the structure. cases.
10.2.3 If the resistance to earth of the steel frame of a 10.2.8 Masses of metal in a building, such as bell-frame
structure or the reinforcement of a reinforced concrete in a tower, should be bonded to the nearest down
structure is found to be satisfactory a suitable air conductor by the most direct route available.
termination should be installed at the top of the
structure and bonded to the steel frame or to the 10.2.9 Metal clading or curtain walling having a

PART 1 GENERAL AND COMMON ASPECTS 169

SP 30 : 2010

continuous conducting path in all directions may be 12.2.4 The actual procedure adopted for the test shall
used as part of a lightning protective system. be recorded in detail so that future tests may be carried
10.2.10 In bonding adjacent metalwork to the lightning out under similar conditions. The highest value of
protective system careful consideration should be given resistance measured shall be noted as the resistance of
to the possible effects such bonding would have upon the soil and details of salting or other soil treatment,
metalwork which may be cathodically protected. should be recorded.
12.2.5 The record shall also contain particulars of the
11 PROTECTION OF SPECIAL STRUCTURES
engineer, contractor or owner responsible for the
For guidance on design of lightning protection systems installation or upkeep or both of the lightning protective
for special structures, reference shall be made to system. Details of additions or alterations to the system,
IS 2309. Guidance for the appropriate authorities shall and dates of testing together with the test results and
also be obtained. reports, shall be carefully recorded.
12 INSPECTION AND TESTING 12.3 Deterioration
12.1 Inspection If the resistance to earth of a lightning protective system
All lightning protective systems shall be examined by or any section of it exceeds the lowest value obtained
a competent engineer after completion, alteration or at the first installation by more than 100 percent,
extensions, in order to verify that they are in accordance appropriate steps shall be taken to ascertain the causes
with the recommendations of the Code. A routine and to remedy defects, if any.
inspection shall be made at least once a year.
12.4 Testing Continuity and Efficacy of Conductors
12.2 Testing and Joints
12.2.1 On completion of the installation or of any 12.4.1 The ohmic resistance of the lightning protective
modification, the resistance of each earth termination system complete with air termination, but without the
or section thereof, shall, if possible, be measured and earth connection should be measured and this should
the continuity of all conductors and the efficiency of be a fraction of an ohm. If it exceeds 1 ohm, then there
all bonds and joints shall be verified. shall be some fault either electrical or mechanical,
12.2.2 Normally annual measurement of earth resistance which shall be inspected and the defect rectified.
shall be carried out but local circumstances in the light 12.4.2 For this system is best divided into convenient
of experience may justify increase or decrease in this sections at testing points by suitable joints. A
interval but it should not be less than once in two years. continuous current of about 10 A shall be passed
In the case of structures housing explosives or flammable
through the portion of the system under test and the
materials, the interval shall be six months.
resistance verified against its calculated or recorded
12.2.3 Earth resistance shall be measured in accordance value. Suitable portable precision testing sets for this
with Part 1/Section 14 of the Code. purposes should be used.

170 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

SECTION 16 PROTECTION AGAINST VOLTAGE SURGES

FOREWORD NOTE — A disruptive discharge in a solid dielectric produces

permanent loss of electrical strength; in a liquid or gaseous
A sudden change in the established operating dielectric the loss maybe only temporary.
conditions in an electrical network causes transient 3.3 Flashover — A disruptive discharge over a solid
phenomena to occur. Transients may be generated surface.
outside of the home or business by lightning, other
utility customers, animals, and even normal utility 3.4 Impulse — A unidirectional wave of voltage or
switching operations. Inside the home or business, current which, without appreciable oscillations, rises
transients are generated by motors starting and rapidly to a maximum value and falls, usually less
stopping, flourescent lighting, copiers, vending rapidly, to zero with small, if any, loops of opposite
machines, welders, and many other sources. In a dry polarity. The parameters which define a voltage or
environment, electrical charges accumulate and create current impulse are polarity, peak value, front time,
a very strong electrostatic field. Protection to mitigate and time to half value on the tail.
the larger transients coming from outside the home or 3.5 Impulse Current (Iimp) — It is defined by a current
business, and point-of-use surge protection for peak value Ipeak and the charge a tested according to
equipment sensitive to transients generated within the the test sequence of the operating duty test. This is
building need to be considered. used for the classification of the SPD for Class I test.
Assistance for this Section has been derived from 3.6 Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage (Uc)
IEC 61643-12-2008 ‘Low-voltage surge protective — The maximum r.m.s. or d.c. voltage which may be
devices — Part 12: Surge protective devices connected continuously applied to the SPDs mode of protection.
to low-voltage power distribution systems — Selection This is equal to the rated voltage.
and application principles’.
3.7 Maximum Discharge Current for Class II Test
1 SCOPE (IMax ) — Crest value of a current through the SPD
1.1 This Part 1/Section 16 covers the protection having an 8/20 waveshape and magnitude according
requirements in low voltage electrical installation of to the test sequence of the Class II operating duty test.
buildings. IMax is greater than In.

1.2 This part does not cover the primary protection 3.8 Nominal Discharge Current (In) — The crest
against lightning which is covered under Part 1/ value of the current through the SPD having a current
Section 15. waveshape of 8/20. This is used for the classification
of the SPD for the Class II test and also for
2 REFERENCES pre-conditioning of the SPD for Class I and II tests.
A list of Indian Standards relevant to protection against 3.9 Puncture — A disruptive discharge through a solid.
voltage surges is given at Annex A. 3.10 Rated Network Voltage (Un) — The rated voltage
3 TERMINOLOGY of the network.

The definitions given in Part 1/Section 2 of this Code 3.11 Residual Voltage (Ures) — The peak value of the
and the following shall apply. voltage that appears between the terminals of an SPD
due to the passage of discharge current.
3.1 Continuous Operating Current (Ic) — Current
that flows in an SPD when supplied at its permament 3.12 Sparkover of an Arrester — A disruptive
full withstand operating voltage (Uc) for each mode. Ic discharge between the electrodes of the gaps of an
corresponds to the sum of the currents that flow in the arrester.
SPD’s protection component and in all the internal 3.13 Surge Arrester — A device designed to protect
circuits connected in parallel. electrical apparatus from high transient voltage and to
3.2 Disruptive Discharge — The phenomena limit the duration and frequently the amplitude of
associated with the failure of insulation under electrical follow-current. The term ‘surge arrester’ includes any
stress which include a collapse of voltage and the external series gap which is essential for the proper
passage of current; the term applies to electrical functioning of the device as installed for service,
breakdown in solid, liquid and gaseous dielectrics and regardless of whether or not it is supplied as an integral
combinations of these. part of the device.

PART 1 GENERAL AND COMMON ASPECTS 171

SP 30 : 2011

NOTE — Surge arresters are usually connected between the 4 GENERAL

electrical conductors of a network and earth although they may
sometimes be connected across the windings of apparatus or 4.1 Voltage Surges
between electrical conductors.
A voltage surge disturbs equipment and causes
3.14 Surge Protective Device (SPD) — A device that
electromagnetic radiation. Furthermore, the duration
limits transient voltage surges and runs current waves
of the voltage surge (T) causes a surge of energy in the
to ground to limit the amplitude of the voltage surge
electrical circuits which is likely to destroy the
to a safe level for electrical installations and
equipment. There are four types of voltage surges
equipment. Surge protective devices (SPDs) are used
which may disturb electrical installations and loads:
to protect, under specified conditions, electrical
systems and equipment against various overvoltages a) Atmospheric voltage surges,
and impulse currents, such as lightning and switching b) Operating voltage surges,
surges. c) Transient overvoltage at industrial frequency,
3.15 Switching Overvoltages — These stresses are and
usually lower than lightning stresses in terms of peak d) Voltage surges caused by electrostatic
current and voltage, but may have longer duration. discharge.
However, in some cases, particularly deep inside a
4.1.1 Atmospheric Voltage Surges
structure or close to switching overvoltage sources, the
switching stress can be higher than the stresses caused Atmospheric voltage surges, that is, lightning, comes
by lightning. The energy related to these switching from the discharge of electrical charges accumulated
surges needs to be known to permit the choice of in the cumulo-nimbus clouds which form a capacitor
appropriate SPDs. The time duration of the switching with the ground. Storm phenomena cause serious
surges, including transients due to faults and fuse damage. Lightning is a high frequency electrical
operations, can be much longer than the lightning surge phenomenon which produces voltage surges on all
duration. conductive elements, and especially on electrical loads
and wires. Protection against lightning is covered under
3.16 Temporary Overvoltages (UTOV) — Any SPD Part 1/Section 15.
can be exposed to a temporary overvoltage UTOV during
its lifetime that exceeds the maximum continuous 4.1.2 Operating Voltage Surges
operating voltage of the power system. A temporary A sudden change in the established operating
overvoltage has two dimensions, magnitude and time. conditions in an electrical network causes transient
The time duration of the overvoltage primarily depends phenomena to occur. These are generally high
upon the earthing of the supply system (this includes frequency or damped oscillation voltage surge waves
both the high-voltage supply system as well as the low- (see Fig. 1).
voltage system to which the SPD is connected). In
determining the temporary overvoltages, consideration They are said to have a slow gradient — their frequency
should be given to the maximum continuous operating varies from several ten to several hundred kilohertz.
voltage of the power system (Ucs). Operating voltage surges may be created by:
3.17 Voltage Protection Level (Up) — A parameter The opening of protection devices (fuse, circuit-
that characterizes the performance of the SPD in breaker), and the opening or closing of control devices
limiting the voltage across its terminals, which is (relays, contactors, etc).
selected from a list of preferred values. This value shall
be greater than the highest value of the measured Inductive circuits due to motors starting and stopping, or
limiting voltages. the opening of transformers such as MVILV substations

The most common values for a 230/400 V network Capacitive circuits due to the connection of capacitor
are: banks to the network

1 kV -1.2 kV -1.5 kV -1.8 kV - 2 kV - 2.5 kV All devices that contain a coil, a capacitor or a transformer
at the power supply inlet: relays, contactors, television
3.18 Voltage Surge — A voltage impulse or wave sets, printers, computers, electric ovens, filters, etc.
which is superposed on the rated network voltage (see
4.1.3 Transient Overvoltages at Industrial Frequency
Fig. 1). A voltage surge disturbs equipment and causes
electromagnetic radiation. The duration of the voltage These overvoltages (see Fig. 2) have the same
surge (T) causes a surge of energy in the electrical frequency as the network (50, 60 or 400 Hz); and can
circuits which is likely to destroy the equipment. be caused by:

172 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

FIG. 1 VOLTAGE S URGE EXAMPLES

FIG. 2 TRANSIENT O VERVOLTAGE AT INDUSTRIAL FREQUENCY

a) Phase/frame or phase/earth insulating faults on kilovolts. If the person walks close to a conductive
a network with an insulated or impedant neutral, structure, he will give off an electrical discharge of
or by the breakdown of the neutral conductor. several amperes in a very short rise time of a few
When this happens, single phase devices will nanoseconds. If the structure contains sensitive
be supplied in 400 V instead of 230 V. electronics, a computer for example, its components
b) A cable breakdown, for example a medium or circuit boards may be damaged.
voltage cable which falls on a low voltage line. 4.2 Main Characteristics of Voltage Surges
c) The arcing of a high or medium voltage
protective spark-gap causing a rise in earth The surge protective device includes one or several
potential during the action of the protection non-linear components. The surge protective device
devices. These protection devices follow eliminates voltage surges:
automatic switching cycles which will a) In common mode: Phase to earth or neutral to
recreate a fault, if it persists. earth.
4.1.4 Voltage Surges Caused by Electrical Discharge b) In differential mode: Phase to phase or phase
to neutral.
In a dry environment, electrical charges accumulate
and create a very strong electrostatic field. For example, When a voltage surge exceeds the Uc threshold, the
a person walking on carpet with insulating soles will surge protective device (SDP) conducts the energy to
become electrically charged to a voltage of several earth in common mode. In differential mode the

PART 1 GENERAL AND COMMON ASPECTS 173

SP 30 : 2011

diverted energy is directed to another active conductor devices connected to low-voltage power distribution
(see Annex B). Table 1 sums up the main characteristics systems:
of voltage surges.
a) Class I tests: They are conducted using
The surge protective device has an internal thermal nominal discharge current (I n), voltage
protection device which protects against burnout at its impulse with 1.2/50 µs waveshape and
end of life. Gradually, over normal use after impulse current Iimp.
withstanding several voltage surges, the SPD degrades The Class I tests is intended to simulate
into a conductive device. An indicator informs the user partial conducted lightning current impulses.
when end-of-life is close. SPDs subjected to Class I test methods are
Some surge protective devices have a remote generally recommended for locations at
indication. In addition, protection against short-circuits points of high exposure, for example line
is ensured by an external circuit-breaker. entrances to buildings protected by lightning
protection systems.
4.3 Basic Functions of Surge Protection Devices b) Class II tests: They are conducted using
(SPDs) nominal discharge current (I n), voltage
impulse with 1.2/50 µs waveshape.
The functions of surge protection devices are as
follows: c) Class III tests: They are conducted using the
combination waveform (1.2/50 and 8/20 µs).
a) In power systems in the absence of surges:
the SPD shall not have a significant influence 4.4.2 SPDs tested to Class II or III test methods are
on the operational characteristics of the subjected to impulses of shorter duration. These SPDs
system to which it is applied. are generally recommended for locations with lesser
exposure. SPDs are classified in the following three
b) In power systems during the occurrence of
categories:
surges: the SPD responds to surges by
lowering its impedance and thus diverting a) Type 1: SPD tested to Class I,
surge current through it to limit the voltage b) Type 2: SPD tested to Class II, and
to its protective level. The surges may initiate c) Type 3: SPD tested to Class III.
a power follow current through the SPD.
c) In power systems after the occurrence of 4.4.3 The SPD is characterised by Uc, Up, In and IMax
surges: the SPD recovers to a high-impedance (see Fig. 3).
state after the surges and extinguishes any 4.4.4 To test the surge arrester, standardized voltage
possible power follow current. and current waves have been defined Voltage wave for
The characteristics of SPDs are specified to achieve example, 1.2/50 µs (see Fig. 4) Current wave for
the above functions under normal service conditions. example, 8/20 µs (see Fig. 5).
The normal service conditions are specified by the Other possible wave characteristics 4/10 µs, 10/1 000 µs,
frequency of the power-system voltage, load current, 30/60 µs, 10/350 µs.
altitude (that is, air pressure), humidity and ambient
air temperature. Comparison between different surge protective devices
must be carried out using the same wave characteristics,
4.4 Surge Protective Device Tests in order to get relevant results.
4.4.1 Three test classes are defined for surge protective

Table 1 Characteristics of Voltage Surges

(Clause 4.2)
Sl No. Type of Voltage Surge Voltage Surge Coefficient Duration Front Gradient or
Frequency
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
i) Industrial frequency (insulation fault) ≤ 1.7 Long Industrial frequency
30 to 1 000 ms (50-60-400 Hz)
ii) Operation 2 to 4 Short Average
1 to 100 ms 1 to 200 kHz
iii) Atmospheric >4 Very short Very high
1 to 100 µs 1 to 1 000 kV/µs

174 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

5.3 Choice of Disconnector

The disconnector is necessary to ensure the safety of
the installation.
One of the surge arrester parameters is the maximum
current (IM ax 8/20 µs wave) that it can withstand without
degradation. If this current is exceeded, the surge
arrester will be destroyed; it will be permanently short
circuited and it is essential to replace it.
The fault current must therefore be eliminated by an
external disconnector installed upstream.
The disconnector provides the complete protection
FIG. 3 VOLTAGE/C URRENT CHARACTERISTICS required by a surge arrester installation, that is:
a) it must be able to withstand standard test
waves:
1) it must not trip at 20 impulses at In, and
2) it can trip at IM ax without being destroyed.
b) the surge arrester disconnects if it short-
circuits.
Surge arrester/disconnection circuit breaker
correspondence table are generally supplied by
FIG. 4 1.2/50 µS W AVE manufacturers.

5.4 Additional Requirements

5.4.0 Depending upon the application of the SPD,
additional requirements may be needed such as
protection of SPDs against direct contact, safety in the
event of SPD failures etc. An SPD may fail subjected to
a surge greater than its designed maximum energy and
discharge current capability. Failure modes of SPDs are
usually divided into open-circuit and short circuit mode.
5.4.1 End-of-life Indication of the Surge Arrester
FIG. 5 8/20 µS W AVE
In the open-circuit mode the system to be protected is
5 SELECTION OF PROTECTION DEVICE no longer protected. In this case, failure of an SPD is
usually difficult to detect since it has almost no
5.1 For the selection of protection device, the value of
influence on the system. To ensure that the failed SPD
the equipment to be protected should be estimated. To
is replaced before the next surge, an indication function
estimate its value, the cost of the equipment in financial
may be required. Various indication devices are
terms and the economic impact if the equipment goes
provided to warn the user that the loads are no longer
down needs to be taken into account. Protection devices
protected against voltage surges. Many surge arresters
shall be selected according to their environmental
have a light indicating that the module is in good
conditions and the acceptable failure rate of the
working order.
equipment and the protective device. These factors
include equipment to be protected and system 5.4.2 Use of Disconnecting Devices
characteristics, insulation levels, overvoltages, method
In the short-circuit mode, the system is severely
of installation, location of SPDs, co-ordination of
influenced by the failed SPD. The short-circuit current
SPDs, failure mode of SPDs and equipment failure
flows through the failed SPD from the power source.
consequences etc.
Energy dissipated during the conduction of short circuit
5.2 Rated residual voltage Ures of protection devices current may be excessive and cause a fire hazard. The
must not be higher than the value in the voltage impulse short-circuit withstand capability test of covers this
withstand category II (see Table 2). problem. In cases where the system to be protected
has no suitable device to disconnect the failed SPD

PART 1 GENERAL AND COMMON ASPECTS 175

SP 30 : 2011

Table 2 Selection of Equipment for the Installation

(Clause 5.2)
Sl No. Nominal Voltage of the Installation Required Impulse Withstand Voltage for
V kV

Three-Phase Single-Phase Equipment at the Equipment at the Appliances Specially Protected

Systems System with Origin of the Origin of the Equipment
Middle Point Installation Installation
(Impulse Withstand (Impulse Withstand (Impulse Withstand (Impulse Withstand
Category IV) Category III) Category III) Category I)
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)
i) 120-240 4 2.5 1.5 0.8
ii) 230/400 — 6 1.5
277/480
(see Note 1)
iii) 400/690 — 8 6 4 2.5
iv) 1 000 — Values subject to system engineers

NOTES
1 For voltages to earth higher than 300 V, the impulse withstand voltage corresponding to the next higher voltage in col (2) applies.
2 Category I is addressed to particular equipment engineering.
3 Category II is addressed to equipment for connection to the mains.
4 Category III is addressed to installation material and some special products.
5 Category IV is addressed to supply authorities and system engineers.

from its circuit, a suitable disconnecting device may

be required to be used in conjunction with a SPD which
has a short-circuit failure mode.

6 INSTALLATION OF SURGE PROTECTION

DEVICES
When installing surge protective devices, several
elements must be considered, such as the earthing
system, positioning with respect to residual current
FIG. 6 2P, 3P, 4P SURGE ARRESTERS
devices, the choice of disconnection circuit-breakers
and cascading. b) 1P+N, 3P+N surge arresters (see Fig. 7):
They provide protection against common-mode
6.1 Protection Devices According to the Earthing
and differential-mode overvoltages and are
System
appropriate for TT, TN-S, and IT earthing systems.
a) Common mode overvoltage: Basic protection
involves the installation of a common mode
surge arrester between phase and PE or phase
and PEN, whatever type of earthing system
is used.
b) Differential mode overvoltage: In the IT and
TN-S earthing systems, earthing the neutral
leads to dissymmetry due to earthing
impedances, which causes differential mode
voltages to appear, whereas the overvoltage
induced by a lightning strike is a common
mode voltage. FIG. 7 1P+N, 3P+N SURGE ARRESTERS
6.2 Internal Architecture of Surge Arresters c) Single-pole (1P) surge arresters (see Fig. 8).
a) 2P, 3P, 4P surge arresters (see Fig. 6): They are used to satisfy the demand of different
assemblies (according to the manufacturer’s
They provide protection against common-mode
instructions) by supplying only one product.
overvoltages only and are appropriate for TN-C
and IT earthing systems.

176 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

However, special dimensioning will be required for distance of at least 10 m between the two protection
N-PE protection. devices. This is valid whatever the field of application,
domestic, tertiary or industrial.
In Fig. 10, the fine-protection device P2 is installed in
parallel with the incoming protection device P1.
If the distance L is too small, at the incoming
overvoltage, P2 with a protection level of U2 = 1 500 V
will operate before P1 with a level of U1 = 2 000 V. P2
will not withstand an excessively high current. The
protection devices must therefore be coordinated to
ensure that P1 activates before P2. This depends on
length L of the cable, that is the value of the self-
inductance between the two protection devices. This
self-inductance will block the current flow to P2 and
cause a certain delay, which will force P1 to operate
before P2. A metre of cable gives a self inductance of
F IG. 8 CONNECTION EXAMPLE approximately 11 JH.
6.3 Installation of Protection Devices The rule ΔU= Ldi/dt causes a voltage drop of
approximately 100 V/m/kA, 8/20 µs wave.
The overvoltage protection study of an installation may
show that the site is highly exposed and that the For L = 10 m, we get UL1 = UL2 = 1 000 V.
equipment to be protected is sensitive. The surge
To ensure that P2 operates with a level of protection of
arrester must be able to discharge high currents and
1 500 V requires
have a low level of protection. This dual constraint
cannot always be handled by a single surge arrester. A U1 = UL1 + UL2 + U2 = 1 000 V + 1 000 V + 1 500 V
second one will therefore be required (see Fig. 9). = 3 500 V.
The first device, P 1 (incoming protection) will be Consequently, P1 operates before 2 000 V and therefore
placed at the incoming end of the installation. protects P2.
NOTE — If the distance between the surge arrester at the
incoming end of the installation and the equipment to be
protected exceeds 30 m, cascading the surge arresters is
recommended, as the residual voltage of the surge arrester may
rise to double the residual voltage at the terminals of the
incoming surge arrester; as in the above example, the fine
protection surge arrester must be placed as close as possible to
the loads to be protected. It should be ensured that the
connection between the surge arrester and its disconnection
circuit breaker does not exceed 50 cm.

6.4 Surge Protection Device Installation Conditions

a) According to supply system configuration:
The maximum continuous operating voltage
Uc of SPDs shall be equal to or higher than
FIG. 9 CASCADING OF SURGE ARRESTERS shown in Table 3.
Its purpose will be to discharge the maximum amount b) At the origin of the installation: If the surge
of energy to earth with a level of protection = 2 000 V arrester is installed at the source of an
electrical installation supplied by the utility
that can be withstood by the electrotechnical equipment
distribution network, its rated discharge
(contactors, motors, etc).
current may be lower than 5 kA.
The second device (fine protection) will be placed in a If a surge arrester is installed downstream from
distribution enclosure, as close as possible to the an earth leakage protection device, an RCD of
sensitive loads. It will have a low discharge capacity the S type, with immunity to impulse currents
and a low level of protection that will limit overvoltages of less than 3 kA (8/20 µs), must be used.
significantly and therefore protect sensitive loads c) Protection against overcurrent at 50 Hz and
( = 1500 V). Cascading protection requires a minimum consequences of a SPD failure: Protection

PART 1 GENERAL AND COMMON ASPECTS 177

SP 30 : 2011

FIG. 10 COORDINATION OF SURGE ARRESTERS

against SPDs short-circuits is provided by the recommended rating for the overcurrent
overcurrent protective devices which are to protective device given in the manufacturer’s
be selected according to the maximum SPD instructions.

Table 3 Minimum Required Uc of the SPD Dependent on Supply System Configuration

(Clause 6.4)
Sl SPDs Connected System Configuration of Distribution Network
No. Between
TT TN-C TN-S IT with Distributed IT without
Neutral Distributed Neutral
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)
i) Line conductor and neutral 1.1 Uo Not applicable 1.1 Uo 1.1 Uo Not applicable
conductor
ii) Each line conductor and PE 1.1 Uo Not applicable 1.1 Uo 3 Uo Line-to-the voltage
conductor (see Note 3) (see Note 3)
iii) Neutral conductor and PE Uo Not applicable Uo (1) Uo Not applicable
conductor (see Note 3) (see Note 3)
iv) Each line conductor and PEN Not applicable 1.1 Uo NA NA Not applicable
conductor (see Note 3)

NOTES
1 Uo is the line-to-neutral voltage of the low-voltage system.
2 These values are related to worst case fault conditions, therefore the tolerance of 10 percent is not taken into account.
3 In extended IT systems, higher values of Uc may be necessary.

178 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

ANNEX A
(Clause 2)
LIST OF INDIAN STANDARDS RELEVENT TO PROTECTION AGAINST VOLTAGE SURGES

IS No. Title
732 : 1989 Code of practice for electrical wiring IS No. Title
installations QC 420100 : Varistors for use in electronic
2309 : 1989 Code of practice for the protection 1994 /IEC QC equipment — Sectional specification
of buildings and allied structures 420100 : 1991 for surge suppression varistors
against lightning QC 420101 Varistors for use in electronic
11548 : 1986 Capacitors for surge protection for : 1994 /IEC QC equipment — Blank detail
use in voltage system above 650 V 420101 : 1991 specification for silicon carbide surge
and upto 33 kV suppression varistors assessment
15086 (Part 1) : Surge arresters: Part 1 Non-linear level E
2001 resistor type gapped surge arresters QC 420102 : Varistors for use in electronic
for ac systems 1993 /IEC QC equipment — Blank detail
15086 (Part 3) : Surge arresters: Part 3 Artificial 420102 : 1991 specification for zinc oxide surge
2003/IEC pollution testing of surge arresters suppression varistors — Assessment
60099-3 : 1990 level E
15086 (Part 5) : Surge arresters: Part 5 Selection
2001/IEC and application recommendations
60099-5 : 1996

ANNEX B
(Clause 4.2)
DIFFERENT PROPAGATION MODES OF VOLTAGE SURGE

B-1 COMMON MODE B-2 DIFFERENTIAL MODE

Common mode voltage surges occur between the live Differential mode voltage surges circulate between live
parts and the earth: phase/earth or neutral/earth conductors: Phase to phase or phase to neutral
(see Fig. 11). They are especially dangerous for devices (see Fig. 12). They are especially dangerous for
whose frame is earthed due to the risk of dielectric electronic equipment, sensitive computer equipment, etc.
breakdown.

FIG. 11 COMMON MODE F IG. 12 D IFFERENTIAL MODE

PART 1 GENERAL AND COMMON ASPECTS 179

SP 30 : 2011

SECTION 17 GUIDELINES FOR POWER-FACTOR IMPROVEMENT

0 FOREWORD transformers, cables, transmission lines, etc. System

components have fixed parameters of inductance,
The various advantages of maintaining a high power
capacitance and resistance. The choice of these
factor of a system reflects on the national economy of
components to bring up the power factor depends on
a country. The available resources are utilized to its
economics.
fullest possible extent. More useful power is available
for transmission and utilization without any extra cost. 3.3 In case of ac supply, the total current taken by
Moreover, the life of individual apparatus is almost every item of electrical equipment, except that
considerably increased and the energy losses reduced. of incandescent lighting and most forms of resistance
heating, is made up of two parts, namely:
Guidance to the consumers of electrical energy who
take supply of low and medium voltage for a) in-phase component of the current (active or
improvement of power factor at the installation in their useful current) which is utilized for doing
premises is provided in this Section. The guidelines work or producing heat; and
provided are basically intended for installation b) quadrature component of the current (also
operating at voltages below 650 V. For higher voltage called ‘idle’ or ‘reactive’ current) and used
installations, additional or more specific rules apply. for creating magnetic field in the machinery
Assistance has been derived from IS 7752 or apparatus. This component is not
(Part 1) : 1975 ‘Guide for the improvement of power convertible into useful output.
factor in consumer installations: Part 1 Low and
4 POWER FACTOR
medium supply voltages’.
4.1 The majority of ac electrical machines and
1 SCOPE equipment draw from the supply an apparent power
This Part 1/Section 17 of the Code covers causes for (kVA) which exceeds the required useful power (kW).
low power factor and guidelines for use of capacitors This is due to the reactive power (kVAR) necessary
to improve the same in consumer installations. for alternating magnetic field. The ratio of useful power
(kW) to apparent power (kVA) is termed the power
1.2 Specific guidelines, if any, for individual factor of the load. The reactive power is indispensable
installation on improvement of power factor are and constitutes an additional demand on the system.
covered in the respective sections of the Code.
4.2 The power factor indicates the portion of the current
2 REFERENCE in the system performing useful work. A power factor
of unity (100 percent) denotes 100 percent utilization
The following Indian Standard on power factor
of the total current for useful work whereas a power
improvement may be referred for details:
factor of 0.70 shows that only 70 percent of the current
IS 7752 (Part 1) : Guide for the improvement of is performing useful work.
1975 power factor in consumer
installations: Part 1 Low and 4.3 Principle Causes of Lower Power Factor
medium supply voltages 4.3.1 The following electrical equipment and apparatus
have a lower factor:
3 GENERAL
a) Induction motors of all types particularly
3.1 Conditions of supply of electricity boards or
when they are underloaded,
licensees stipulate the lower limit of power factor which
b) Power transformers and voltage regulators,
is generally 0.85 and consumer is obliged to improve
and maintain the power factor of his installation to c) Arc welders,
conform to these conditions. d) Induction furnaces and heating coils,
e) Choke coils and magnetic systems, and
3.1.1 When the tariffs of Electricity Boards and the
licensees are based on kVA demand or kW demand f) Fluorescent and discharge lamps, neon signs,
with suitable penalty rebate for low high power factor, etc.
improvement in the power factor would effect savings 4.3.2 The principal cause of a low power factor is due
in the energy bills. to the reactive power flowing in the circuit. The reactive
3.2 Power factor is dependent largely on consumers’ power depends on the inductance and capacitance of
apparatus and partly on system components such as the apparatus.

180 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

4.4 Effect of Power Factor to Consumer 4.5.5 In case of two port tariff with kVA demand
charged, the value of economic improved power factor
4.4.1 The disadvantages of low power factor are as
(cos φ2) may be obtained as follows:
follows:
Let the tariff be Rs. A per kVA of maximum demand
a) Overloading of cables and transformer,
per annum plus Rs. P per kWh.
b) Decreased line voltage at point of application,
c) Inefficient operation of plant, and cos φ1 is the initial power factor,
d) Penal power rates. cos φ2 is the improved power factor after installing the
capacitors
4.4.2 The advantages of high power factor are as
follows: The economic power factor cos φ2 is obtained from
the expression
a) Reduction in the current;
b) Reduction in power cost;
B2
c) Reduced losses in the transformers and cables, cos φ = 1 −
d) Lower loading of transformers, switchgears, A2
cables, etc;
where
e) Increased capability of the ‘power system’
(additional load can be met without additional B = total cost per kVAR per year of capacitor
equipment); installation inclusive of interest, depreciation
f) Improvement in voltage conditions and and maintenance.
apparatus performance; and NOTE — The explanation for the derivation of the
formula for economic power factor cos f2 is given in
g) Reduction in voltage dips caused by welding Annex A of IS 7752 (Part 1).
and similar equipment.
5 USE OF CAPACITORS
4.5 Economics of Power Factor Improvement
5.1 In order to improve the power factor, the consumer
4.5.1 Static capacitors, also called static condensers, shall install capacitors where the natural power factor
when installed at or near the point of consumption, of this installation is low.
provide necessary capacitive reactive power, relieve
distribution system before the point of its installation 5.2 The average values of the power factor for different
from carrying the inductive reactive power to that types of 3 phase electrical installations as measured
extent. by one of major utilities in the country are given in
respective Sections of the Code.
4.5.2 The use of the static capacitors is an economical
way of improving power factor on account of their 5.3 Capacitors for power factor improvement may be
comparatively low cost, ease of installation loss arranged as described in IS 7752 (Part 1). The
successful operation of power factor improvement
maintenance, low losses and the advantage of extension
depends very largely on the positioning of the capacitor
by addition of requisite units to meet the load growth.
on the system. Ideal conditions are achieved when the
Installation of capacitors also improve the voltage
highest power factor is maintained under all load
regulation and reduces amperes loading and energy
conditions.
losses in the supply apparatus and lines.
4.5.3 When considering the economics connected with 5.4 Individual Compensation
power factor correction, it is most important to Wherever possible the capacitor should be connected
remember that any power factor improving equipment directly across the terminals of the low power factor
will, in general, compensate for losses and lower the appliance or equipment. This ensures the control to be
loadings on supply equipment, that is, cables, automatic through the same switching devices of the
transformers, switchgear, generating plant, etc. apparatus of appliance.
4.5.4 The minimum permissible power factor 5.5 Group Compensation
prescribed in the conditions of supply of Electricity
Boards or Licensees and the reduction in charges In industries where a large number of small motors or
offered in supply tariffs for further improvement of other appliances and machines are installed and whose
power factor shall, along with other considerations such operation is periodical it is economical to dispense with
as reduction of losses, etc, determine the kVAR individual installation of capacitors. A bank of
capacity of the capacitors to be installed. capacitors may be installed to connect them to the

PART 1 GENERAL AND COMMON ASPECTS 181

SP 30 : 2011

distribution centre of main bus-bars of the group of 6.2 Capacitors shall not be connected directly across
machines. motor terminals if solid state starters/soft starters are
used.
5.6 Central Compensation
6.3 Capacitors shall not be connected directly to motor
Capacitors may also be installed at a central point, terminals if variable speed drive is adopted.
that is, at the incoming supply or service position. In
order to overcome problems of drawing leading 6.4 Capacitors connected to same bus-bars discharge.
currents on light loads, these capacitors may be instantaneously to uncharged capacitors, at the time
operated manually or automatically as required. The of switching on, with high in-rush current. This shall
automatic control is preferred as it eliminates human be taken care of while providing central compensation
errors. Automatic operation may be arranged by with automatic power factor correction relay.
means of suitable relays in which a contractor controls 6.5 Harmonics may reduce life of capacitors.
the capacitors bank and maintains the correct amount
of kVAR in the circuit. 6.6 Switching/controlling devices for capacitors shall
have required capacitor switching duty.
5.7 Combined Compensation 6.7 Chances of resonating shall be considered.
Capacitors may be connected directly across the 6.8 Energy loss/Power consumption of capacitors shall
terminals of higher capacity inductive appliances or be taken care of.
equipments, in addition to the capacitors with
Automatic Power Factor Correction Relay for Central 6.9 Capacitor banks shall be properly ventilated.
Compensation connected at the incoming supply or 6.10 Chances of over voltage shall be looked into.
service position
6.11 Resistors shall be provided across capacitor
5.8 The methods of connecting power factor capacitors terminals for discharging.
to supply line and motors are given in Fig. 1 and Fig. 2.
7 POWER FACTOR IMPROVEMENT AND
6 SELECTION AND INSTALLATION OF CAPACITOR RATING
CAPACITORS
For calculating the size of the capacitor for power factor
6.1 Capacitor current shall not exceed magnetization improvement reference should be made to Table 5 of
current of the motor when directly connected across Part 1/Section 20 of the Code.
motor terminals.

FIG. 1 M ETHODS OF CONNECTING CAPACITORS TO MOTORS FOR IMPROVEMENT OF POWER FACTOR

182 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

FIG. 2 METHODS OF CONNECTING CAPACITORS TO SUPPLY LINE FOR I MPROVEMENT OF POWER FACTOR

PART 1 GENERAL AND COMMON ASPECTS 183

SP 30 : 2011

SECTION 18 ENERGY EFFICIENCY ASPECTS

0 FOREWORD labelling/rating standards for various equipment

proposed by Bureau of Energy Efficiency shall be
Efficient use of energy inputs acquires added
followed while selecting equipment. Provisions of the
significance since energy saved is energy generated.
Energy Conservation Act, 2001 may also be taken into
Economic growth is desirable for developing countries
account.
and energy is essential for economic growth. This
means commensurate input of energy is required. 4 EQUIPMENT SELECTION
However, due to the fact that our fossil fuel reserves
are limited, energy conservation is essential. Electrical The main criterion for equipment selection, from
energy input is utilized in various industrial plants, energy conservation point of view, is that the power
agricultural sector, commercial buildings and loss has to be minimum. In other words the operating
establishments, in the form of mechanical motive efficiency should be high. Proper sizing of equipment
is essential to ensure optimum utilization of energy. It
power, heating, lighting, air conditioning and
is also necessary to avoid over rating or under rating
ventilation etc. The Indian Industrial Sector accounts
the equipment. It should be ensured that operating
for half of the total commercial energy used in the
power factor of equipment is high.
country. Energy conservation aims at eliminating the
waste of energy and minimization of losses. In this Most commonly encountered equipments in electrical
context proper selection of electrical equipment systems are mentioned below:
assumes greater importance. The Energy Conservation
Act, 2001, also emphasises the need of energy 4.1 Motor
conservation. Motors should preferably be energy efficient motors,
This Section provides guidance to the consumers of conforming to IS 12615. Preferably, motors shall
electrical energy, with regard to the selection of conform to efficiency class ‘eff 1’ as per IS 12615 as
equipment from energy conservation point of view and these are more efficient than motors with efficiency
on energy audits. class ‘eff 2’. Motors with higher operating power factor
shall be considered during selection as this results in
1 SCOPE lower current and consequently lower losses. Use of
variable speed drives will bring substantial energy
This Part 1/Section 18 of the Code covers the aspects saving wherever different flow conditions/speeds are
to be considered for selection of equipment from encountered in the process industry. Use of variable
energy conservation point of view and guidance on speed drives is a highly efficient means of achieving
energy audit. flow control etc. as compared to throttling of valves,
dampers etc. or the use of stepped pulleys.
2 REFERENCE
The following Indian Standard has been referred to in 4.2 Transformers
this Section: While procuring transformers, normal loading shall be
IS No Title indicated so as to optimize transformer efficiency to
be maximum at projected load for minimizing losses
IS 12615 : 2004 Energy efficient induction motors
under normal operating conditions. Losses should be
— Three phase squirrel cage
accounted while selecting equipment, by way of loss
capitalization or specifying the minimum acceptable
3 GENERAL value for maximum efficiency.
Energy conservation aims at eliminating wastage of
4.3 Cables Equipment
energy and minimizing losses. The major factors to be
looked into in this regard include system design, Optimizing cable route/length can best reduce cable
selection of equipment, operation and maintenance losses. Though the losses can also be reduced by over
practices, capacity utilization factors etc. Improving sizing the conductors, this is not recommended due to
efficiency typically costs less than the energy tariffs. the practical problems encountered with termination
of over sized cables.
In order to standardize and benchmark the level of
efficiency of various electrical and other energy 4.4 Lighting
consuming equipment, the Bureau of Energy Efficiency
was instituted in March 2002. The standards and An efficient lighting system can substantially reduce

184 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

the energy consumption. The selection criteria for — Review of level of energy consumption.
lighting shall include among other factors, luminaries — Creating a data base.
with light sources of higher luminous efficiency such — Identifying energy conservation potential.
as tubular fluorescent as well as compact fluorescent — Preparation of norms/guidelines for
lighting. Street lighting and other tasks where colour implementation of energy conservation
rendering properties of light are not of significance measures.
can be more efficiently achieved by the use of sodium — Recommending the use of energy efficient
vapour lamps compared to mercury vapour lamps. The appliances.
use of incandescent lamps should be avoided except
for DC lighting in critical areas such as escape routes. 5.3 Energy Conservation Act, 2001 has been enacted
Newer technologies such as LED based lighting and the regulations issued under the said act shall be
systems, building automation systems for optimizing complied with, with reference to Energy Audit.
power consumption through natural lighting, reduction Accordingly, designated consumers as notified under
in HVAC load demand through the use of solar films, Energy Conservation Act, 2001, shall get the energy
lights controlled by sensors which get activated by audit carried out through an accredited energy auditor/
movement/human presence etc. which can significantly firms and implement techno-economic viable
optimize the use of electrical energy, also need to be recommendations/measures. Every designated consumer
promoted. The use of solar energy for lighting, heating shall appoint or designate a certified energy manager,
etc. also needs to be maximized. whose responsibility shall be to assist the designated
consumer in complying with the energy consumption
Low loss electronic ballasts can be employed, where norms and standards and other mandatory provisions.
feasible, after taking care that the harmonic distortion
is within permissible limits. 5.4 Energy Conservation Building Code formulated
by the Bureau of Energy Efficiency and prescribed by
5 ENERGY AUDIT the Central Government shall be implemented for new
buildings having connected load of 500 kW and above
5.1 ‘Energy Audit’ means the verification, monitoring
or contract demand of 600 kVA and above, once the
and analysis of the use of energy including submission
same or modified version has been notified by the
of a technical report containing recommendations for
respective State Governments. List of energy intensive
improving energy efficiency with cost benefit analysis
industries and other establishments specified as
and an action plan to reduce energy consumption.
designated consumers is given in the Energy
5.2 The function of an energy audit broadly includes: Conservation Act, 2001.

PART 1 GENERAL AND COMMON ASPECTS 185

SP 30 : 2011

SECTION 19 SAFETY IN ELECTRICAL WORK

0 FOREWORD any particular work ensure that the portion of the

installation where the work is to be carried out is
Safety procedures and practices are essential in
rendered dead and safe for working. All work shall be
electrical work. Basic approaches to electrical work
carried out under the personal supervision of a
from the point of view of ensuring safety which include
competent person. If more than one department is
inbuilt safety in procedures such as permit-to-work
working on the same apparatus, a permit-to-work
system, safety instructions and safety practices are
should be issued to the person-in-charge of each
covered in this Section.
department.
It is essential that safety should be preached and NOTE — The words ‘permit-to-work’ and ‘permit’ are
practiced at all times in the installation, operation and synonymous for the purpose of this Section.
maintenance work. The real benefit to be derived from
the guidelines covered in this Section will be realized 3.2 No work shall be commenced on live mains unless
only when the safety instructions it contains are it is specifically intended to be so done by specially
regarded as normal routine duty and not as involving trained staff. In such cases all possible precautions shall
extra and laborious operations. be taken to ensure the safety of the staff engaged for
such work, and also of others who may be directly or
1 SCOPE indirectly connected with the work. Such work shall
only be carried out with proper equipment provided
This Part 1/Section 19 of the Code covers guidelines
for the purpose and, after taking necessary precautions,
on safety procedures and practices in electrical work.
by specially trained and experienced persons who are
2 REFERENCES aware of the danger that exists when working on or
near live mains or apparatus.
A list of Indian Standards on safety in electrical work
are as follows: 3.3 On completion of the work for which the permit-
to-work is issued, the person-in-charge of the
IS No. Title
maintenance staff should return the permit duly
2551 : 1982 Specification for danger notice discharged to the issuing authority.
plates
3.4 In all cases, the issue and return of permits shall be
IS 5216 (Part 1) : Recommendations on safety
1982 procedures and practices in recorded in a special register provided for that purpose.
electrical work: Part 1 General 3.5 The permits shall be issued not only to the staff of
IS 5216 (Part 2) : Recommendations on safety the supply undertakings, but also to the staff of other
1982 procedures and practices in departments, contractors, engineers, etc, who might be
electrical work: Part 2 Life saving required to work adjacent to live electrical mains or
techniques apparatus.
8923 : 1978 Warning symbol for dangerous
voltages 3.6 A model form of permit-to-work certificate is given
SP 31 : 1986 Method of treatment of electric in IS 5216 (Part 1).
shock NOTES
1 The permit is to be prepared in duplicate by the person-in-
3 PERMIT-TO-WORK SYSTEM charge of operation on the basis of message, duly logged, from
the person-in-charge of the work.
3.1 All work on major electrical installations shall be
2 The original permit will be issued to the person-in-charge of
carried out under permit-to-work system which is now work and the duplicate will be retained in the permit book.
well established, unless standing instructions are issued For further allocation of work by the permit receiving officer,
by the competent authority to follow other procedures. tokens may be issued to the workers authorizing them
In extenuating circumstance, such as for the purpose individually to carry out the prescribed work.
of saving life or time in the event of an emergency, it 3 On completion of the work, the original shall be returned to
the issuing officer duly discharged for cancellation.
may become necessary to start the work without being
able to obtain the necessary permit-to-work; in such 3.7 Permit books should be treated as important
cases, the action taken shall be reported to the person- records. All sheets in the permit books and the books
in-charge as soon as possible. The permit-to-work themselves should be serially numbered. No page
certificate from the person-in-charge of operation to should be detached or used for any other except
the person-in-charge of the men selected to carry out bonafide work. If any sheet is detached, a dated and

186 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

initiated statement shall then and there be recorded in connections to the live parts shall be made last, and in
the book by the person responsible for it. all cases the phase sequence should be checked to
ensure that only like phases are connected together.
3.8 Permit books shall be kept only by the person-in-
Before inserting fuses or links in a feeder or distribution
charge of operation who shall maintain a record of the
pillar controlling the cable on which a fault has been
receipts and issues made by him.
cleared, each phase shall first be connected through a
4 SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS test switch fuse.

4.1 Safety Instructions for Working on Mains and 4.2 Safety Instructions for Working on Mains and
Apparatus Up to and Including 650 V Apparatus at Voltages Above 650 V

4.1.1 Work on Dead Low and Medium Voltage Mains 4.2.1 General
and Apparatus All mains and apparatus shall be regarded as live and
Unless a person is authorized to work on live mains a source of danger and treated accordingly, unless it is
and apparatus all mains and apparatus to be worked positively known to be dead and earthed.
upon shall be isolated from all sources of supply before a) No person shall work on, test or earth mains
starting the work, proved dead, earthed and short- or apparatus unless covered by a permit-to-
circuited. For earthing and short-circuiting, only work and after proving the mains dead except
recognized methods should be used. Measures shall for the purpose of connecting the testing
be taken against, the inadvertent energizing of the apparatus, etc. which is specially designed for
mains and apparatus. connecting to the live parts.
4.1.2 Work on Live Mains and Apparatus b) The operations of proving dead, earthing and
short-circuiting of any mains shall be carried
Only competent, experienced and authorized persons
out only by an authorized person under the
shall work on live mains and apparatus, and such
instructions of the person-in-charge of
persons should take all safety measures as may be
maintenance;
required.
c) While working on mains, the following
Warning boards shall be attached on or adjacent to the precautions shall be taken:
live apparatus and at the limits of the zone in which 1) No person, after receiving a permit-to-
work may be carried out. work, shall work on, or in any way
Immediately before starting work, rubber gauntlets, if interfere with, any mains or conduits or
used, shall be thoroughly examined to see whether they through containing a live mains except
are in sound condition. Under no circumstances shall under the personal instructions and
be person work with unsound gauntlets, mass, stools, supervision, on the site of work, of
platforms or other accessories and safety devices. competent person,
2) When any live mains is to be earthed, the
No live part should be within unsafe distance of a
procedure prescribed in 4.2.4 shall be
person working on live low and medium voltage mains
scrupulously followed, and
so that he does not come in contact with it unless he is
3) The earths and short-circuits, specified
properly protected.
on the permit-to-work shall not be
4.1.3 Testing of Mains and Apparatus removed or interfered with except by
authority from the person-in-charge of
No person shall apply test voltage to any mains unless
the work.
he has received a permit-to-work and has warned all
persons working on the mains of the proposed 4.2.2 Minimum Working Distance
application of test voltage. If any part which will thus No person shall work within the minimum working
become alive is exposed, the person-in-charge of the distance from the exposed live mains and apparatus.
test shall take due precautions to ensure that the The minimum working distance depends upon the
exposed live portion does not constitute danger to any actual voltages. It does not apply to operations carried
person. It should also be ensured before the application out on mains and apparatus which are so constructed
of test voltage, that no other permit-to-work has been as to permit sale operation within these distances.
issued for working on this mains. Exposed live equipment in the vicinity shall be
4.1.4 Connecting Dead Mains to Live Mains cordoned off so that persons working on the released
equipment in service. The cordoning off shall be done
When dead mains are connected to live mains, all in such a way that it does not hinder the movement of

PART 1 GENERAL AND COMMON ASPECTS 187

SP 30 : 2011

the maintenance personnel. If necessary, a safety NOTES

sergeant could be posted. 1 All the above operations shall be carried out at the same place
and at the same time, if no live parts are available on the site,
4.2.3 Isolation of Mains rods up to 11 kV may be tested by applying them to the top of
the spark plug in a running motor car engine. If the rod is in
Isolation of mains shall be effected by the following order the indicating tube will glow each time the plug sparks.
methods: Therefore, the glow will to intermittent, but the indicating tube
should glow on this test or the rod is useless as a means of
a) The electrical circuits shall be broken only by proving the mains or apparatus dead.
authorized persons by disconnecting switches, 2 The rod should be tested both before and after the use.
isolating links, unbolting connections or 4.2.4.4 Testing and marking of devices
switches which are racked out. Where possible,
the isolation should be visibly checked, and It shall be ensured that all devices for proving high
b) Where the means of isolation are provided voltage mains and apparatus dead are marked clearly
with a device to prevent their reclosure by with the maximum voltage for which they are intended
unauthorized persons, such a device shall be and should be tested periodically.
used. 4.2.4.5 Identification of cables to be worked upon
4.2.4 Devices for Proving Mains and Apparatus Dead A cable shall be identified as that having been proved
4.2.4.1 High voltage neon lamp contact indicators rods dead prior to cutting or carrying out any operation
are often used for proving exposed mains and apparatus which may involve work on or movement of the cable.
dead. Each rod is fitted with an indicating neon tube A non-contact indicating rod, induction testing set or
or other means which glows when the contact end of spiking device may be used for proving the cable dead.
the rod comes in contact with exposed live parts. Each 4.2.4.6 Earthing and short-circuiting mains
rod is clearly marked for the maximum voltage on
which it may be safely used and shall not, under any a) High voltage mains shall not be worked upon
circumstances, be used on higher voltages. unless they are discharged to earth after
making them dead and are earthed and short-
4.2.4.2 Contact indicator and phasing rods are provided circuited with earthing and short-circuiting
for phasing and proving exposed mains and apparatus equipment is adequate to carry possible short-
dead. A set consists of two rods connected in series by circuit currents and specially meant for the
a length of insulated cables. Both rods are fitted with purpose. All earthing switches wherever
contact tips and indicating tubes. When the contact tip installed should be locked up.
of one rod is applied to exposed live parts and that of b) If a cable is required to be cut, steel wedge
the other earth or other exposed live parts provided shall be carefully driven through it at the point
there is sufficient voltage difference between the two, where it is to be cut or preferably by means
the indicating tubes should glow. Each set of rods is of a spiking gun of approved design.
normally marked for the maximum voltage on which
c) After testing the cable with dc voltage, the
it may be used and shall not, under any circumstances,
cable shall be discharged through a 2 megohm
be used on higher voltages.
resistance and not directly, owing to dielectric
4.2.4.3 Use of contact indicator and phasing rods absorption which is particularly prominent in
the dc voltage testing of high voltage cables.
While using the high voltage contact indicator and
The cable shall be discharged for a sufficiently
phasing rods for proving the mains or apparatus dead,
long period to prevent rebuilding up of
following precautions should be taken:
voltage.
a) Ensure that the rod is clean and dry, d) The earthing device when used shall be first
b) Check the rod by applying it to known live connected to an effective earth. The other end
parts of the correct voltage, the indicating tube of the device shall then be connected to the
shall glow, conductors to be earthed.
c) Apply the rod to each phase required to be e) Except for the purpose of testing, phasing, etc,
proved dead, the indicating tube shall not the earthing and short-circuiting devices shall
glow. Be very careful to be in a position to remain connected for the duration of the work.
see the glow, if any, appearing in the indicating
4.2.4.7 Removing the earth connections
tube, and
d) Again check the rod by applying it to live parts On completion of work, removal of the earthing and
as in 4.2.4.3 (b). Again the indicating tubes short-circuiting devices shall be carried out in the
shall glow. reverse order to that adopted for placing them

188 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

(see 4.2.4.6), that is, the end of the earthing device between the mains and apparatus to be worked
attached to the conductors of the earthed mains or on and any source of supply.
apparatus shall be removed first and the other and e) In cases where duplicate feed is not available,
connected to earths shall be removed last. The the circuit opening device is between the
conductor shall not be touched after the earthing device mains to be worked on and any source of
has been removed from it. supply.
4.2.4.8 Safety precautions for earthing The circuit opening devices mentioned above shall be
The precautions mentioned below should be adopted locked in the open position before the work on the
to the extent applicable and possible: mains and apparatus is commenced. The locking
devices shall be removed only by a competent person
a) Examine earthing devices periodically and and not until the work has been completed, any short-
always prior to their use, circuiting and earthing removed and the permit-to-work
b) Use only earthing switches or any other form duly returned and cancelled.
special apparatus where provided for earthing,
4.2.4.10 Work on mains with two or more sections
c) Verify that the circuit is dead by means of
discharging rod or potential indicator. The When the mains to be worked upon are to be divided
indicator itself should first be tested on a live into two or more sections, the provisions of 4.2.3,
circuit before and after the verification, 4.2.4.6 and 4.2.4.9 shall be observed with regard to
d) Earthing should be done in such a manner that each section.
the persons doing the job are protected by
5 SAFETY PRACTICES
earth connections on both sides of their
working zone, and 5.1 In all electrical works, it is very necessary that
e) All the three phases should be effectively certain elementary safety practices are observed. It has
earthed and short-circuited though work may been found that quite a large number of accidents occur
be proceeding on one phase only. due to the neglect of these practices. The details of
such practices are given in Annex C of IS 5216 (Part 1).
4.2.4.9 Working on mains where visible isolation
cannot be carried out 5.2 Equipment, Devices and Appliances
Where the electrical circuit cannot be broken visibly General guidelines on equipment, devices and
as set out in 4.2.3 the circuit may be broken by two appliances are given in IS 5216 (Part 1).
circuit opening devices, one on each side of the work
zone, where duplicate feed is available and by one 6 SAFETY POSTERS
circuit opening device where duplicate feed is not 6.1 The owner of every medium, high and extra high
available provided the following conditions are fulfilled: voltage installation is required to fix permanently, in a
a) The position of the contacts of the circuit conspicuous position a danger notice in Hindi or
opening device(s) — ‘open’ or ‘closed’ — is English and the local language of the district on every
clearly indicated by the position of the motor, generator, transformer, all supports or high and
operating handle or by signal lights or by other extra high voltage etc. The danger notice plate shall
means. conform to IS 2551.
b) The circuit opening device(s) can be locked 6.2 It is also recognized as good practice to indicate by
mechanically in the open position. means of the symbol recommended in IS 8923 on
c) The mains and apparatus to be worked on are electrical equipment where the hazards arising out of
adequately earthed and short-circuited dangerous voltage exist.
between the circuit opening device and the
position of the work. 7 ACCIDENTS AND TREATMENT FOR
ELECTRIC SHOCK
d) In cases where duplicate feed is available,
both the circuit opening devices are in series See SP 31 and IS 5216 (Part 2).

PART 1 GENERAL AND COMMON ASPECTS 189

SP 30 : 2011

SECTION 20 TABLES

0 FOREWORD 2 REFERENCES
In electrical engineering work, frequent need arises to The following Indian Standards may be referred for
make reference to certain data, which, when made further details:
available in the form of ready reference tables facilitates
IS No. Title
the work. Those tables which basically provide
fundamental data not necessarily required for the 3961 Recommended current ratings for
understanding of the Code but are required to be cables:
referred to in designing the installation are given in (Part 1) : 1967 Paper insulated lead sheathed cables
this Section. (Part 2) : 1967 PVC insulated and PVC sheathed
heavy duty cables
1 SCOPE (Part 3) : 1968 Rubber insulated cables
This Part 1/Section 20 gives frequently referrred tables (Part 4) : 1968 Polyethylene insulated cables
in electrical engineering work. IS 11955 : 1987 Preferred current ratings

Table 1 Diameter and Maximum Allowable Resistance of Fuse-Wire, Tinned Copper

Sl No. Rated Current of Nominal Diameter Tolerance Permissible Resistance at 20ºC

Fuse-Wire Min
Max
A mm mm Ω/m Ω/m
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
i) 6 0.20 ± 0.003 0.564 4 0.525 0
ii) 10 0.35 ± 0.004 0.183 4 0.173 0
iii) 16 0.50 ± 0.005 0.089 8 0.084 8
iv) 20 0.63 ± 0.006 0.056 6 0.053 5
v) 25 0.75 ± 0.008 0.040 0 0.037 6
vi) 32 0.85 ± 0.009 0.031 1 0.029 3
vii) 40 1.25 ± 0.011 0.014 3 0.013 6
viii) 63 1.50 ± 0.015 0.009 9 0.009 4
ix) 80 1.80 ± 0.018 0.006 9 0.006 5
x) 100 2.00 ± 0.020 0.005 6 0.005 3

Table 2 Size of Wood Casing and Capping, and Number of Cables that may be
Drawn in One Groove of the Casing

Sl No. Width of Casing of Capping, mm 38 44 51 64 76 89 102

i) No. of grooves 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
ii) Width of grooves, mm 6 6 9 13 16 16 19
iii) Width of dividing fillet, mm 12 12 13 18 24 35 38
iv) Thickness of outer wall, mm 7 10 10 10 10 11 13
v) Thickness of casing, mm 16 16 19 19 25 32 32
vi) Thickness of capping, mm 6 6 10 10 10 13 13
vii) Thickness of the back under the groove, mm 6 6 6 10 10 10 13
viii) Length, m 2.5 to 3.0

190 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

Table 2 — (Concluded)

Size of Cable Number of Cables that may be Drawn in One Groove

Nominal Cross- Number and Diameter

Sectional Area, mm2 (in mm) of Wires
1.0 1/1.121) 2 2 3 3 9 12 12
1.5 1/1.40 1 1 2 2 8 12 12
2.5 1/1.80 1 1 2 2 5 10 10
3/1.601)
4 1/2.24 — — 2 2 5 8 9
7/1.851)
6 1/2.80 — — 1 1 4 6 6
7/1.06
10 1/3.552) — — 1 1 3 5 5
7/1.40
16 7/1.70 — — — — 1 2 2
25 7/2.24 — — — — 1 1 1
35 7/2.50 — — — — 1 1 1
50 7/3.002) — — — — 1 1 1

1)
For copper conductors only.
2)
For aluminium conductors only.

Table 3 Maximum Permissible Number of 1.1 kV Grade Cables that can be Drawn into
Rigid Steel Conduits

Size of Cable Size of Conduit, mm

Nominal Number and 16 20 25 32 40 50 63

Cross- Diameter
Sectional Area (in mm)
Number of Cables, Max
mm2 of Wires
S B S B S B S B S B S B S B
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12) (13) (14) (15) (16)
1.0 1/1.121) 5 4 6 5 13 10 20 14 — — — — — —
1.5 1/1.40 4 3 7 5 12 10 20 14 — — — — — —
2.5 1/1.80 3 2 0 5 10 8 18 12 — — — — — —
3/1.061)
4 1/2.24 3 2 4 3 7 0 12 10 — — — — — —
7/0.851)
6 11/2.80 2 — 3 2 6 5 10 8 — — — — — —
7/0.61)
10 11/3.552) — — 2 — 5 4 8 7 — — — — — —
7/1.401) — — 2 — 4 3 6 5 8 6 — — — —
16 7/1.70 — — — — 2 — 4 3 7 6 — — — —
25 7/2.24 — — — — — — 3 2 5 4 8 6 9 7
35 7/2.50 — — — — — — 2 — 4 3 7 5 8 6
60 19/1.80 — — — — — — — — 2 — 5 4 9 5
7/3.0072)

NOTE — The table shows the maximum capacity of conduits of the simultaneous drawing of cables. the table applies to 1.1 kV grade
cables. The columns headed S apply to runs of conduit which have distance not exceeding 4.25 m between draw-in-boxes, and which
do not deflect from the straight by an angle of more than 15º. The columns headed B apply to runs of conduit which deflect from the
straight by an angle of more than 15º.
1)
For copper conductors only.
2)
For aluminium conductors only.

PART 1 GENERAL AND COMMON ASPECTS 191

SP 30 : 2011

Table 4 Maximum Permissible Number of 1.1 kV Grade Single-Core Cables that may be Drawn into
Rigid Non-metallic Conduits

Size of Cable Size of Conduit, mm

Nominal Cross- Number and 16 20 25 32 40 50

Sectional Area Diameter of
mm2 Wires, mm Number of Cables, Max
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)
1)
1.0 1/1.12 5 7 13 20 — —
1.5 1/1.40 4 6 10 14 — —
2.5 1/1.80 3 5 10 14 — —
3/1.061)
4 1/2.24 2 3 6 10 14 —
7/0.851)
6 1/2.80 — 2 5 9 11 —
7/1.401)
10 1/3.552) — — 4 7 9 —
7/1.401)
16 7/1.70 — — 2 4 5 12
25 7/2.24 — — — 2 2 6
35 7/2.50 — — — — 2 5
50 7/3.002) — — — — 2 5
19/1.80

1)
For copper conductors only.
2)
For aluminium conductors only.

Table 5 Capacitor Sizes for Power Factor Improvement

Existing Improved Power Factor
Power
Factor 0.80 0.85 0.90 0.91 0.92 0.93 0.94 0.95 0.96 0.97 0.98 0.99 1.00
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12) (13) (14)

Multiplying Factors
0.40 1.537 1.668 1.805 1.832 1.861 1.895 1.924 1.959 1.998 2.037 2.085 2.146 2.288
0.41 1.474 1.605 1.742 1.769 1.798 1.831 1.860 1.896 1.935 1.973 2.021 2.082 2.225
0.42 1.413 1.544 1.681 1.709 1.738 1.771 1.800 1.836 1.874 1.913 1.961 2.022 2.164
0.43 1.356 1.487 1.624 1.651 1.680 1.713 1.742 1.778 1.816 1.855 1.903 1.964 2.107
0.44 1.290 1.421 1.558 1.585 1.614 1.647 1.677 1.712 1.751 1.790 1.837 1.899 2.041
0.45 1.230 1.360 1.501 1.532 1.561 1.592 1.626 1.659 1.695 1.737 1.784 1.846 1.988
0.46 1.179 1.309 1.446 1.473 1.502 1.533 1.567 1.600 1.636 1.677 1.725 1.786 1.929
0.47 1.130 1.260 1.397 1.425 1.454 1.485 1.519 1.552 1.588 1.629 1.677 1.758 1.881
0.48 1.076 1.206 1.343 1.370 1.400 1.430 1.464 1.497 1.534 1.575 1.623 1.684 1.826
0.49 1.030 1.160 1.297 1.326 1.355 1.386 1.420 1.453 1.489 1.530 1.578 1.639 1.782
0.50 0.982 1.112 1.248 .276 1.303 1.337 1.369 1.403 1.441 1.481 1.529 1.590 1.732
0.51 0.936 1.066 1.202 1.230 1.257 1.291 1.323 1.357 1.395 1.435 1.483 1.544 1.686
0.52 0.894 1.024 1.160 1.188 1.215 1.149 1.281 1.315 1.353 1.393 1.441 1.502 1.644
0.53 0.850 0.980 1.116 1.144 1.171 1.205 1.237 1.271 1.309 1.349 1.397 1.458 1.600
0.54 0.809 0.939 1.075 1.103 1.130 1.164 1.196 1.230 1.268 1.308 1.356 1.417 1.559
0.55 0.769 0.899 1.035 1.063 1.090 1.124 1.136 1.190 1.228 1.268 1.316 1.377 1.519
0.56 0.730 0.860 0.996 1.024 1.051 1.085 1.117 1.151 1.189 1.229 1.277 1.338 1.480
0.57 0.692 0.822 0.958 0.986 1.013 1.047 1.079 1.113 1.151 1.191 1.239 1.300 1.442
0.58 0.655 0.785 0.921 0.949 0.976 1.010 1.042 1.076 1.114 1.154 1.202 1.263 1.405
0.59 0.618 0.748 0.884 0.912 0.939 0.973 1.005 1.039 1.077 1.117 1.165 1.226 1.368
0.60 0.584 0.714 0.849 0.878 0.905 0.939 0.971 1.005 1.043 1.083 1.131 1.192 1.334
0.61 0.549 0.679 0.815 0.843 0.870 0.904 0.936 0.970 1.008 1.048 1.096 1.157 1.299

(table continued)

192 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

Table 5 — (Concluded)
Existing Improved Power Factor
Power
Factor 0.80 0.85 0.90 0.91 0.92 0.93 0.94 0.95 0.96 0.97 0.98 0.99 1.00
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12) (13) (14)

0.62 0.515 0.645 0.781 0.809 0.836 0.870 0.902 0.936 0.974 1.014 1.062 1.123 1.265
0.63 0.483 0.613 0.749 0.777 0.804 0.838 0.870 0.902 0.942 0.982 1.030 1.091 1.233
0.64 0.450 0.580 0.716 0.744 0.771 0.805 0.837 0.871 0.909 0.949 0.997 1.058 1.200
0.65 0.419 0.549 0.685 0.713 0.740 0.774 0.806 0.840 0.878 0.918 0.966 1.027 1.169
0.66 0.388 0.518 0.654 0.682 0.709 0.743 0.775 0.809 0.847 0.887 0.935 0.996 1.138
0.67 0.358 0.488 0.624 0.652 0.679 0.713 0.745 0.779 0.817 0.857 0.905 0.966 1.108
0.68 0.329 0.459 0.595 0.623 0.650 0.684 0.716 0.750 0.788 0.828 0.876 0.937 1.079
0.69 0.299 0.429 0.565 0.593 0.620 0.654 0.686 0.720 0.758 0.798 0.840 0.907 1.049
0.70 0.270 0.400 0.536 0.564 0.591 0.625 0.657 0.691 0.729 0.769 0.811 0.878 1.020
0.71 0.242 0.372 0.508 0.536 0.563 0.597 0.629 0.663 0.701 0.741 0.785 0.850 0.992
0.72 0.213 0.343 0.479 0.507 0.534 0.568 0.600 0.634 0.672 0.712 0.754 0.821 0.963
0.73 0.186 0.316 0.452 0.480 0.507 0.541 0.573 0.607 0.648 0.685 0.727 0.794 0.936
0.74 0.159 0.289 0.425 0.453 0.480 0.514 0.546 0.580 0.618 0.658 0.700 0.740 0.909
0.75 0.132 0.262 0.398 0.426 0.453 0.487 0.519 0.553 0.591 0.631 0.673 0.713 0.882
0.76 0.105 0.235 0.371 0.399 0.426 0.460 0.492 0.526 0.564 0.604 0.652 0.687 0.855
0.77 0.079 0.209 0.345 0.373 0.400 0.434 0.466 0.500 0.538 0.578 0.620 0.661 0.829
0.78 0.053 0.183 0.319 0.347 0.374 0.408 0.440 0.474 0.512 0.552 0.592 0.634 0.803
0.79 0.026 0.156 0.292 0.320 0.347 0.381 0.413 0.447 0.485 0.525 0.567 0.608 0.776
0.80 — 0.130 0.266 2.294 0.321 0.355 0.387 0.421 0.459 0.499 0.541 0.582 0.750
0.81 — 0.104 0.240 0.268 0.295 0.329 0.361 0.395 0.433 0.473 0.515 0.556 0.724
0.82 — 0.078 0.214 0.242 0.269 0.303 0.335 0.369 0.407 0.447 0.489 0.530 0.698
0.83 — 0.052 0.188 0.216 0.243 0.277 0.309 0.343 0.381 0.421 0.463 0.504 0.672
0.84 — 0.026 0.162 0.190 0.217 0.251 0.283 0.317 0.355 0.395 0.417 0.450 0.620
0.85 — — 0.136 0.164 0.191 0.225 0.257 0.291 0.329 0.369 0.417 0.450 0.620
0.86 — — 0.109 0.140 0.167 0.198 0.230 0.264 0.301 0.343 0.390 0.424 0.593
0.87 — — 0.083 0.114 0.141 0.172 0.204 0.238 0.275 0.317 0.364 0.395 0.567
0.88 — — 0.054 0.085 0.112 0.143 0.175 0.209 0.246 0.288 0.309 0.369 0.512
0.89 — — 0.028 0.059 0.086 0.117 0.149 0.183 0.230 0.262 0.309 0.369 0.512
0.90 — — — 0.031 0.058 0.089 0.121 0.155 0.192 0.234 0.281 0.341 0.484
0.91 — — — — 0.027 0.058 0.090 0.124 0.161 0.203 0.250 0.310 0.453
0.92 — — — — — 0.027 0.063 0.097 0.134 0.176 0.223 0.283 0.426
0.93 — — — — — — 0.032 0.066 0.103 0.145 0.192 0.252 0.395
0.94 — — — — — — — 0.034 0.071 0.113 0.160 0.220 0.363
0.95 — — — — — — — — 0.037 0.079 0.126 0.186 0.329
0.96 — — — — — — — — — 0.042 0.089 0.149 0.292
0.97 — — — — — — — — — — 0.047 0.107 0.250
0.98 — — — — — — — — — — — 0.060 0.203
0.99 — — — — — — — — — — — — 0.143
NOTE — The consumer is advised to make proper allowance for lower supply voltages where these exist during the working hours
and may choose slightly higher kVAR than recommended in the table for such cases.

PART 1 GENERAL AND COMMON ASPECTS 193

NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE
PART 2
 SP 30 : 2011

PART 2 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS IN

STAND-BY GENERATING STATIONS AND
CAPTIVE SUBSTATIONS
0 FOREWORD
This National Electrical Code (Part 2) is primarily intended to cover the requirements relating to stand-by generating
stations and captive substations intended for serving an individual occupancy. As the general provisions relating
to such installations are common and are themselves elaborate in nature, it was felt essential to cover them in a
separate part preceding the other parts which cover the requirements for specific installations.
Generating stations covered by this Part 2 are the stand-by or emergency supply and captive substations normally
housed in or around the building in question. This Code does not include the switching stations and other large
generating plants coming solely under the preview of the electric supply authority of a metropolis even though to
some extent the requirements stipulated herein could also be applicable to them.
Specific requirements if any, for generating and switching substations for individual buildings that might vary
depending on the nature of the occupancy or the size of the building are enumerated in the respective sections of
the Code.
In the formulation of this Code, note has been taken of the requirements stipulated in installation Codes of
individual equipment as well as the fire-safety Codes for generating stations and substations. It is generally not
feasible to draw very strict guidelines for the design and layout for such installations owing to the complexity of
the needs of building installations and hence only the essential safety considerations are listed out for compliance.
It is essential to take recourse to the assistance of local authorities for further details.
Specific requirements pertaining to stand-by generating stations and captive substations for multistoreyed/high-
rise buildings are covered in Part 3/Section 7 of this Code.

PART 2 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS IN STAND-BY GENERATING STATIONS AND CAPTIVE SUBSTATIONS 197
SP 30 : 2011

1 SCOPE stand-by generating plants and building substations in

a building, the assessment of characteristics of the
1.1 This Code (Part 2) covers essential requirements
buildings based on its occupancy shall be taken note
for electrical installations in stand-by generating
of as specified in individual Parts/Sections of this Code.
stations and captive substations intended to serve a
building or group of buildings. 4.2 Depending on the exact location of the station in
the building premises, and depending on whether the
1.2 This Part is not intended to cover ‘captive generator
equipment are installed indoor or outdoor, the degree
sets’ of very large capacities. This Part 2 covers only
of external influence of the environment shall
the stand-by generating sets upto the capacity of 5 MW.
be determined based on the guidelines given in
Similarly the substations upto the capacities of 10 MVA
Part 1/Section 8 of this Code.
and 33 kV are covered. This Part 2 also does not apply
to the generating stations coming under the jurisdiction 4.3 It is generally presumed that generating stations
of the Electric Supply Authority in a city or metropolis. and substations are restricted areas not meant for
unauthorized persons, and such electrical operating
2 REFERENCES areas fall under the category of BA4 utilization for
This Part 2 should be read in conjunction with the instructed personnel (see Part 1/Section 8), which are
following Indian Standards: adequately advised or supervised by skilled persons
to avoid dangers that may arise owing to the use of
IS No. Title electricity.
1641 : 1988 Code of practice for fire-safety of
buildings (general): General 5 EXCHANGE OF INFORMATION
principles of fire grading and 5.1 Information shall be exchanged amongst the
classification personnel involved regarding the size and nature of
1642 : 1989 Code of practice for fire safety of substation and supply station requirements to be
buildings (general): Details of provided for an occupancy so that the type of
construction (first revision) equipment and their choice, as well as their installation
1646 : 1997 Code of practice for fire-safety of shall be governed by the same. An assessment shall
buildings (general): Electrical also be made of the civil construction needs of the
installation (second revision) station equipment keeping in view a possible expansion
1946 : 1961 Code of practice for use of fixing in future.
devices in walls, ceilings and of
5.2 Before ordering the equipment, information shall
solid construction
be exchanged, regarding the installation and location
2309 : 1989 Code of practice for the protection
conditions, including such building features as access
of buildings and allied structures
doors, lifting beams, oil pumps, cable trenches,
against lightning (second revision).
foundation details for heavy equipment, ventilating
3034 : 1993 Fire-safety of industrial buildings:
arrangement, etc.
Electrical generating and
distributing stations — Code of 6 LAYOUT AND BUILDING CONSTRUCTION
practice (second revision) ASPECTS
3043 : 1987 Code of practice for earthing (first
revision) 6.1 The constructional features of all building housing
10028 (Part 2) : Code of practice for selection, the station installation shall comply with IS 1641,
1981 installation and maintenance of IS 1642 and IS 3034. Locating of substation in lowest
transformers: Part 2 Installations basement is not recommended.
10118 (Part 3) : Code of practice for selection, 6.2 Switchgears, circuit-breaker and transformers
1982 installation and maintenance of (except outdoor types) shall be housed preferably in
switchgear: Part 3 Installation detached single storey buildings of Type 1 construction.
In the case of built up areas in cities, multistoreyed
3 TERMINOLOGY construction may also be adopted. Construction of such
For the purpose of this Part, the definitions given in buildings shall conform to IS 1946.
Part 1/Section 2 of this Code shall apply. 6.3 Construction of fire separation walls shall conform
with the requirements of relevant Indian Standards.
4 GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS OF STATION
Doorway openings in separating walls of transformer
INSTALLATIONS
or switchgear rooms shall be provided with sills not
4.1 In determining the general characteristics of less than 15 cm in height. Reference is drawn to

198 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

IS 3034. Where risk of spread of possible fire exists, 8.6 All equipment of prime mover shall conform to
interconnecting doors should have a 2 h fire rating. relevant Indian Standard (where they exist) for
construction, temperature-rise, overload and
6.4 The foundation of the stand-by generating sets shall
performance.
preferably be isolated from that of the other structures
of the building so that vibrations are not carried over. 8.7 The diesel generator set should meet the pollution
norms of the Central and State Statutory Authorities.
6.5 The diesel generating (DG) set should be provided
with integral acoustic enclosure conforming to the 9 TRANSFORMER INSTALLATIONS
requirements as laid down in Environment Protection
Act. 9.1 Reference is drawn to the requirements given in
IS 10028 (Part 2).
7 SELECTION OF EQUIPMENT
9.2 Transformer of capacity up to 3 MVA may be
7.1 The selection of equipment shall be done in housed indoor or outdoor. The larger ones, because of
accordance with the guidelines provided in Part 1/ their size, are usually of outdoor type.
Section 9 of this Code.
9.3 Indoor transformer will require adequate ventilation
8 GENERATING SETS to take away as much heat as possible. Oil drainage
facilities and partition walls between transformers and
8.0 Stationary generating sets of 5 kVA and above are between transformer and other equipment such as oil
normally driven by diesel engine as this drive is most circuit-breakers are necessary to reduce the risk of
economical. Smaller sets are driven by petrol. During spread of fire.
the planning of the building, the dimensions of the
power plant room and the transport ways shall be agreed 9.4 As a transformer station normally has a high voltage
to between the architect and electrical contractor. and a low voltage switchgear, all such equipment
should be adequately separated.
8.1 In case of large capacity sets which generate
appreciable heat, the rooms shall be well ventilated 9.5 Only dry type transformer(s) shall be used for
and provided with air exhaust equipment. installation inside the residential/commercial buildings.
The transformer room should be located on ground
8.2 The capacity of the stand-by set for an installation floor inside a well ventilated room.
should be such that in an event of power failure, the
essential loads can be supplied power. For instance in 10 HIGH VOLTAGE SWITCHING STATIONS
case of hospitals such loads comprise operation theatres
Reference is drawn to the requirements stipulated in
and their supporting auxiliaries; intensive care units,
IS 10118 (Part 3).
cold storage in laboratories, emergency lifts, etc. In
the case of industries having continuous processes, 11 LOW VOLTAGE SWITCHING STATIONS
such loads are required to be supplied with power all AND DISTRIBUTION PANELS
the time. In commercial premises and high-rise
buildings, a few lifts and circulation area lights and Reference is drawn to the requirements stipulated in
fire-fighting equipment have to be kept working by IS 10118 (Part 3).
supply from stand-by sets. Similar is the case of
12 STATION AUXILIARIES
essential loads in large hotels. Such sets can either be
manually started and switched on to essential loads 12.0 Station auxiliaries could consist of:
with the use of changeover switches or they could be
a) batteries for stand-by generating sets,
auto-start on mains failure and loads autochanged over
b) batteries for short time emergency lighting,
to generator supply.
c) battery charging equipment,
8.3 In case of large electrical installation in which d) fuel oil pumps,
essential loads are widely scattered it becomes e) ventilating equipment, and
necessary to run the generating set supply cables to
f) fire-fighting equipment.
these essential loads and in the event of mains failure,
changeover to generator supply, either manually or 12.1 Batteries
through auto-changeover connectors.
12.1.1 Batteries shall have containers of glass or any
8.4 The fire safety requirements for fuel oil storage other non-corrosive, non-flammable materials.
shall conform to 5.3 of IS 3034.
12.1.2 Batteries shall be installed in a separate
8.5 The fire safety requirements for oil and gas fired enclosure away from any other auxiliary equipment or
installations shall conform to IS 3034. switchgear. The enclosure shall be free from dust and

PART 2 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS IN STAND-BY GENERATING STATIONS AND CAPTIVE SUBSTATIONS 199
SP 30 : 2011

well ventilated. Care shall be taken to ensure that direct 15 BUILDING SERVICES
sunlight does not fall on the batteries.
15.1 Lighting
NOTE — Provision shall be made for sufficient diffusion and
ventilation of gases from the battery to prevent the 15.1.1 The general principal of good lighting for any
accumulation of an explosive mixture. occupancy shall be as given in Part 1/Section 11 of
12.1.3 The batteries shall stand directly on durable, non- this Code. For the purpose of station installations the
ignitable, non-absorbent and non-conducting material, values of lumen level and limiting value of glare index
shall be as given in Table 1.
such as glass, porcelain or glazed earthenware. These
materials shall rest on a bench which shall be kept dry
Table 1 Recommended Values of Illumination
and insulated from earth. If constructed of wood it shall
and Glare Index
be slatted and treated with anti-sulphuric enamel.
12.1.4 The batteries shall be so arranged on the bench Sl Location Illumi- Laminating
No. nation, Glare
that a potential difference exceeding 12 V shall not lux Index
exist between adjoining cells. The batteries not
(1) (2) (3) (4)
exceeding 20V shall not be bunched or arranged in
circular formation. i) Indoor Locations
a) Stand-by generator hall 300 25
12.1.5 All combustible materials within a distance b) Auxiliary equipment; 25
of 60 cm measured horizontally from, or within 2.0 m battery room, blowers,
switchgear
measured vertically above, any battery shall be
c) Basements 100 25
protected with hard asbestos sheets.
d) Control rooms:
1) Vertical control panels 300 19
12.2 Battery Charging Equipment
2) Control desks 300 19
12.2.1 The battery charging equipment with necessary 3) Rear of control panel 150 19
switch and controlgear shall be mounted separately and ii) Outdoor Locations
away from the batteries. a) Fuel oil storage area 50 19
b) Transformers, outdoor 50 19
12.3 Fuel Oil Pump switchgear

12.3.1 Fuel oil pump shall be installed close to the

engine room or inside the engine room. 15.2 The luminaires used shall be of dust-proof
construction and shall be energy efficient with compact
12.3.2 The electric cable provided to run the pump fluorescent lamps (CFL)/fluorescent lamps with
motor shall be protected with oil-resistant outer sheath. electronic ballasts.
12.4 Ventilating Equipment 16 FIRE-SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
12.4.1 The engine room shall be fitted with hot-air 16.1 The provisions of IS 3034 and IS 1646 shall apply
extractors. for station installations.
12.4.2 The battery room shall be fitted with exhaust 16.2 All wiring for automatic fire-fighting installation
fans. The exhaust gases be let off to atmosphere where shall be of fire-resistant outer sheath.
no other equipment is installed.
17 LIGHTNING PROTECTION
13 WIRING IN STATION PREMISES
The provisions of IS 2309 shall apply.
All cabling and electrical wiring inside generation or
substation premises shall be done in accordance with 18 TESTING AND INSPECTION
the practice recommended in (Part 1/Section 9) of this
The guidelines provided in Part 1/Section 13 of this
Code.
Code shall apply. In the case of diesel sets which come
14 EARTHING into operation only in emergency as stand-by sets, it is
necessary that such sets are regularly checked run up
The provision of 17 of IS 3043 shall apply (see also and mechanical and electrical system tested to ensure
Part 1/Section 14). that the set is in operable conditions all the time.

200 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE
PART 3
 SP 30 : 2011

PART 3 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS IN

NON-INDUSTRIAL BUILDINGS
0 FOREWORD for major types of non-industrial occupations. It is
felt that a large number of occupancies would fall
For the purposes of this Code, electrical installations
in one of the categories, and for typical buildings
in buildings have been broadly classified as those in
which do strictly fall into any of these, recourse shall
non-industrial and industrial . While a majority of
be made to the general guidelines stipulated in
installations could be categorically classified as non-
Part 1.
industrial, an industrial complex would necessarily
incorporate sub-units such as offices, residential This Part consists of the following Sections:
quarters and support services which are either housed
Section 1 Domestic Dwellings
or fall in the category of non-industrial buildings. The
requirement stipulated in Part 3 and Part 4 of this Code Section 2 Office Building, Shopping and
would therefore require judicious application. Commercial Centres and Institutions
Section 3 Recreational, Assembly Building
With the current trend in power utilization, it would
Section 4 Medical Establishments
also be extremely difficult to classify electrical
installations based on power requirement or the Section 5 Hotels
voltage of supply, as large buildings for non-industrial Section 6 Sports Buildings
purposes consume sufficient power to consider them Section 7 Specific Requirements for Electrical
at par with the consumption of light industrial Installations in Multistoried Buildings
establishments. It is therefore necessary to consider
Sections 1-6 of this Part cover requirements applicable
for initial assessment of the installation the guidelines
to buildings which are of nominal heights less than
given in Part 1/Sec 8 this Code, which are better
15 m. It is recognized that from the point of view fire-
defined than the earlier terminology used for
safety of buildings more than 15 m height require
classifying installations.
specific considerations. These are summarized in
Part 3 of this Code, therefore covers requirements Section 7 of this Part.

PART 3 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS IN NON-INDUSTRIAL BUILDINGS 203

SP 30 : 2011

SECTION 1 DOMESTIC DWELLINGS

0 FOREWORD IS No. Title

Electrical installations in domestic dwellings and in 13450 (Part 1) : Medical electrical equipment —
buildings providing living accommodation for people 1994 /IEC Part 1: General requirements for
are by far the simplest form of installation. Use of 60601-1 : 1988 safety
electrical appliances, both portable and fixed has now 14665(Part 1) : Electric traction lifts — Part 1:
become very common and popular even in single 2000 Guidelines for outline dimensions
family dwellings. The optimum benefits from the use of passenger, goods, service and
of electricity can be obtained only if the installation hospital lifts
is of sufficient capacity and affords enough 15707 : 2006 Testing, evaluation, installation
flexibility. and maintenance of ac electricity
meters — Code of practice
The primary considerations in planning the electrical SP 7 : 2005 National Building Code of India
layout in domestic dwellings are economy and safety. SP 72 : 2010 National Lighting Code
Besides these, other considerations such as efficiency
and reliability, convenience and provisions for future 3 TERMINOLOGY
expansion are also valid.
For the purpose of this Section, the definitions given
Domestic installations are characterized mainly by a in Part 1/Section 2 of this Code shall apply.
circuit voltage of 250 V to earth except in the case of
large power consumers where three-phase supply is 4 CLASSIFICATION
given. A brief description of the type of installations 4.1 The electrical installations covered in this Section,
covered in this Section is given in 4. It may, however, are those in buildings intended for the following
be noted that lodging and rooming houses, though purposes:
utilized as living accommodation for short periods of
time (by different occupants) are covered under scope 4.1.1 Domestic Dwellings/Residential Buildings
of Part 3/Section 5 of this Code. These shall include buildings in which sleeping
Specific requirements for installations in rooms accommodation is provided for normal residential
containing a bath tub or shower basin, namely, (domestic) purposes with cooking and dining facilities.
bathrooms are separately covered in Annex A. These Such buildings shall be further classified as follows:
requirements also apply to similar locations in other
occupancies, such as hotels. For convenience, these a) One or two family dwellings — These shall
requirements are covered in this Section. include any private dwelling which is
occupied by members of a single family and
1 SCOPE has a total sleeping accommodation for not
more than 20 persons.
This Part 3/Section 1 of the Code covers requirements
for electrical installations in domestic dwellings. b) Apartment houses (flats) — These shall include
any building or structure in which living quarters
2 REFERENCES are provided for three or more families, living
independently of each other and with
This Part 3/Section 1 of the Code should be read in independent cooking facilities. For example
conjunction with the following Indian Standards: apartment houses, mansions and chawls.
IS No. Title NOTE — If accommodation is provided for more than
3646 (Part 2) : 1966 Code of practice for interior 20 persons, such buildings are considered lodging or
rooming houses, (dormitories) and the provisions of
illumination: Part 2 Schedule for Part 3/Section 5 shall apply.
values of illumination and glare
index 5 GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS OF
7689 : 1989 Guide for the control of INSTALLATIONS
undesirable static electricity
General guidelines on the assessment of characteristics
8061 : 1976 Code of practice for design,
of installations in buildings are given in Part 1/Sec 8
installation and maintenance of
of this Code. For the purposes of installations falling
service lines upto and including
under the scope of this Section, the characteristics
650 V
defined below specifically apply.

204 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

5.1 Environment 6 SUPPLY CHARACTERISTICS AND

PARAMETERS
The following environmental factors shall apply to
electrical installations in domestic dwellings: 6.0 Exchange of Information

Environment Characteristics Remarks 6.0.1 General aspects to be taken note of before

(1) (2) (3) designing the electrical installations are enumerated
in Part 1/Section 7 of this Code. However, the
Presence of Probability of —
following points shall be noted particularly in respect
water presence of water
of domestic dwellings.
is negligible
Presence of The quantity or — 6.0.2 Before starting wiring and installation of fittings
foreign solid nature of dust or and accessories, information should be exchanged
bodies foreign solid between the owner of the building or architect or
bodies is not electrical contractor and the local supply authority in
significant respect of tariffs applicable, types of apparatus that
Presence of The quantity and Applicable for may be connected under each tariff, requirement of
corrosive or nature of most of the space for installing meters, switches, service lines, etc,
polluting corrosive or locations except and for total load requirement of lights, fans and power.
substances polluting for dwellings
substances is not situated by sea or 6.0.3 While planning an installation, consideration
significant in industrial zone should be given to the anticipated increase in the use
in which case of electricity for lighting, general purpose socket-
categorization AF2 outlet, kitchen, heating, etc. It is essential that adequate
applies (see Part provision should be made for all the services which
1/Sec 8) may be required immediately and during the intended
Mechanical Impact and Household and useful life of the building, for the householder may
stresses vibration of low similar conditions otherwise be tempted to carry out extension of the
severity installation himself or to rely upon use of multiplug
Seismic effect Depends on the adaptors and long flexible cords, both of which are
and lighting location of the not recommended. A fundamentally safe installation
building may be rendered dangerous, if extended in this way.
5.2 Utilization 6.0.4 Electrical installation in a new building should
normally begin immediately on the completion of the
The following aspects utilization shall apply: main structural building work. For conduit wiring
system, the work should start before finishing work
Utilization Characteristics Remarks like plastering has begun. For surface wiring system,
(1) (2) (3) however, work should begin before final finishing work
Capability of Uninstructed Applies to all like white washing, painting, etc. Usually, no
persons persons domestic installation work should start until the building is
installations reasonably weatherproof, but where electric wiring is
Contact of Persons in to be concealed within the structures, the necessary
persons normally conduits and ducts should be positioned after the
conducting shuttering is in place and before the concrete is poured,
situations provision being made to protect conduits from damage.
Conditions of Low density Buildings of For this purpose, sufficient coordination shall be
evacuation occupation, easy normal or low ensured amongst the concerned parties.
during conditions of height used for
emergency evacuation one or two 6.1.1 Estimation of Load Requirements
family dwellings
The extent and form of electrical installations in
Low density Apartment
occupation, houses including domestic dwellings is basically designed to cater to
difficult high-rise flats light and fan loads and for electrical appliances and
conditions of gadgets. In estimating the current to be carried by any
evacuation branch circuit unless the actual values are known, these
Nature of No significant shall be calculated based on the following
processed of risks recommended ratings:
stored material

PART 3 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS IN NON-INDUSTRIAL BUILDINGS 205

SP 30 : 2011

Sl Item Recommended Table 2 Recommended Schedule of Socket-Outlets

No. Rating (Clause 6.1.3)
(W)
Sl No. Description Number of Socket-Outlets
(1) (2) (3)
i) Incandescent lamps 60 6A 16A
(1) (2) (3) (4)
ii) Ceiling fans 60
i) Bedroom 2-3 1
iii) Table fans 60
ii) Living room 2-3 2
iv) 6A, socket-outlet point unless 100 iii) Kitchen 1 2
the actual value of loads are
iv) Dining room 2 1
specified
v) Garage 1 1
v) Fluorescent tubes:
vi) For refrigerator — 1
Length 600 mm 25 vii) For air-conditioner — 1 (for each)
1 200 mm 50 viii) Verandah 1 per 10 m2 1
1 500 mm 90 ix) Bathroom 1 1
vi) Power socket outlet (16A) 1 000
unless the actual value of
6.1.6 Balancing of circuits in three-wire or polyphase
loads are specified
installation shall be planned beforehand. In each case,
it is recommended that all socket-outlets in a room are
6.1.2 Number of Points in Branch Circuits
connected to one phase. The conductors shall be so
The recommended yardstick for dwelling units for enclosed in earthed metal or incombustible insulating
determining the number of points is given in Table 1. material that it is not possible to have ready access to
them. If the points between which a voltage exceeding
Table 1 Number of Points for Dwelling Units 250 V is present are 2 m or more apart, the covers or
access doors shall be clearly marked to indicate the
Sl Description Area for the Main Dwelling Unit (m2) voltage present.
No.
35 45 55 85 140 6.1.7 It is recommended to provide at least two
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)
lighting sub-circuits in each house. It is also
i) Light points 7 8 10 12 17 recommended that a separate lighting circuit be
ii) Ceiling fans 2-2 3-2 4-3 5-4 7-5 utilized for all external lighting of steps, walkways,
iii) 6A Socket outlets 2 3 4 5 7 driveways, porch, car park, terrace, etc., with a master
iv) 16A Socket outlets — 1 2 3 4 double-pole switch for the sub-circuit in addition to
v) Call-bell (buzzer) — — 1 1 1
the individual switches.
NOTE — The figures in table against Sl No. (ii) indicate the
recommended number of points and the number of fans. 6.1.8 Wherever the load to be fed is more than 1 kW, it
Example — For main dwelling unit of 55 m2, 4 points with 3 shall be controlled by an isolator switch or miniature
fans are recommended. circuit-breaker.

6.1.3 Number of Socket-Outlets 6.2 Selection of Wiring

The recommended schedule of socket-outlets for the Any one of the following types of wiring may be used
various sub-units of a domestic are given in Table 2. in a residential building (see Part 1/Section 9 of this
Code).
6.1.4 Selection of Size of Conductors
a) Tough rubber sheathed or PVC insulated PVC
Provisions of Part 1/Section 9 of this Code shall apply. sheathed wiring on wood batten,
6.1.5 ‘Power’ sub-circuits shall be kept separate and b) PVC insulated wiring in steel/non-metallic
distinct from ‘lighting-and fan’ sub-circuit. All wiring surface conduits, and
shall be done on the distribution system with main and c) PVC insulated wiring in steel/non-metallic
branch distribution boards located at convenient recessed conduits.
physical and electrical load centres. All types of wiring,
whether recessed or surface should be capable of easy However, if aesthetics is the main consideration,
inspection. The surface wiring when run along the walls recessed conduit wiring system may be adopted.
should be as near the ceiling as possible. In all types The wiring for 16 A plug outlets (power circuits) shall
of wirings due consideration shall be given for neatness invariably be carried out either in surface/recessed conduit
and good appearance and safety. wiring system where general wiring is on wood batten.

206 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

Wiring for staircase lights and garage lights may be 7.2 General Requirements of Switchboards
done in recessed conduit wiring systems.
7.2.1 The various live parts, unless they are effectively
7 SWITCHGEAR FOR CONTROL AND screened by insulating material shall be so spaced that
PROTECTION an arc cannot be maintained between such parts and
earth.
7.1 Location
The arrangement of the gear shall be such that they
7.1.1 All main switches or miniature circuit-breakers shall he readily accessible and their connections to all
shall be either of metal-clad enclosed pattern or of any instruments and apparatus shall also be traceable.
insulated enclosed pattern which shall be fixed at close
7.2.2 In every case in which switches and fuses are
proximity to the point of entry of supply.
fitted on the same pole, these fuses shall be so arranged
7.1.2 Open type switch boards shall be placed only in that the fuses are not alive when their respective
dry situation and in well ventilated rooms. They shall switches are in the ‘off’ position.
not be placed in the vicinity of storage batteries and
7.2.3 No fuse other than fuses in instrument circuit
exposed to chemical fumes.
shall be fixed on the back of or behind a switchboard
7.1.3 Main switch boards shall be installed in rooms panel or frame.
or cupboards having provision for locking so as to
7.2.4 All metal switchgears and switchboards shall be
safeguard against operation by unauthorized persons.
painted and maintained during service.
7.1.4 In a damp situation or where inflammable or
7.2.5 All switchboards connected to medium voltage
explosive dust, vapour or gas is likely to be present,
and above shall be installed in accordance with
the switch boards shall be totally enclosed or made
flame-proof as may be necessitated by the particular Part 1/Section 9 of this Code.
circumstances. 7.2.6 The wiring throughout the installation shall be
7.1.5 Switch boards shall not be erected above gas such that there is no break in the neutral wire in the
stoves or sinks or within 2.5 m of any washing unit in form of a switch or fuse unit.
the washing room. 7.2.7 The neutral shall also be distinctly marked.
7.1.6 Switch boards, if unavoidably fixed in places 7.2.8 The main switch shall be easily accessible.
likely to be exposed to weather, to drip, or to abnormal
moist atmosphere, their outer casing shall be 7.3 Types of Switchboards
weatherproof and shall be provided with glands or 7.3.1 In dwelling units, the metal clad switchgears shall
bushings or adopted to receive screwed conduit preferably be mounted on any of the following types
according to the manner in which cables are run. PVC of boards:
and double flanged bushes shall be fitted in the holes
of the switches for entry and exit of wires. a) Hinged type metal boards — Such boards
shall be suitable for mounting of metal clad
7.1.7 A switch board shall not be installed so that its switchgear consisting of not more than one
bottom is within 1.25 m above the floor, unless the switchgear and ICDB 4 way or 6 way, 15 A
front of the switch board is completely enclosed by a per way.
door, or the switch board is located in a position to
b) Fixed type metal boards — Such boards shall
which only authorized persons have access.
be suitable for large switchboards for
7.1.8 Where so required, the switch boards shall be mounting large number of switchgears and
recessed in the wall. The depth of recess provided at or higher capacity switchgear.
the back for connection and the space at the front c) Wooden hoards — For small installations
between the switchgear mountings shall be adequate. connected to a single phase 240 V supply,
7.1.9 Equipment’s which are on the front of a these boards may be used as main board or
switchboard shall be so arranged that inadvertent sub-boards. These shall be of seasoned and
personal contact with live parts is unlikely during the durable wood with solid back impregnated
manipulation of switchgears, changing of fuses or with varnish with joints dove-tailed.
similar operations. NOTE — See also Part 1/Section 9 of this Code.

7.1.10 No mounting shall be mounted within 2.5 cm Where a board has more than one switchgear, each
of any edge of the panel and no hole other than the such switchgear shall be marked to indicate the section
holes by means of which the panel is fixed shall be of the installation it controls. The main switchgear shall
drilled closer than 1.3 cm from any edge of the panel. be marked as such. Where there is more than one main

PART 3 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS IN NON-INDUSTRIAL BUILDINGS 207

SP 30 : 2011

switchboard in the building, each switchboard shall 9.3 Means for isolating the supply to the building shall
be marked to indicate the section of the installation be provided immediately after the energymeter.
and building it controls.
10 EARTHING IN DOMESTIC INSTALLATIONS
7.4 Distribution Boards
10.0 Means shall be provided for proper earthing of
7.4.1 Distribution boards shall preferably be of metal all apparatus and appliances in accordance with
clad type. Part 1/Section 14 of this Code.
7.4.2 Main distribution boards shall be controlled by a 10.1 Plugs and Sockets
linked switchfuse or circuit-breaker. Each outgoing
circuit shall be provided with a fuse on the phase or All plugs and sockets shall be of three-pin type, one of
live conductor. the pins being connected to earth.

7.4.3 Branch distribution boards shall be controlled 10.2 Lighting Fittings

by a switchfuse or circuit-breaker. Each outgoing If the bracket type lamp holders are of metallic
circuit shall be provided with a fuse MCB on the phase construction, it is recommended that they should be
or live conductor. The earthed neutral conductor shall earthed. All pedestal lamp fittings of metallic
be connected to a common link and be capable of being construction shall be earthed.
disconnected individually for testing purposes. At least
one spare circuit of the same capacity shall be provided 10.3 Fans and Regulators
on each branch distribution board. Bodies of all table fans, pedestal fans, exhaust fans,
7.4.4 Triple pole distribution boards shall not etc., shall be earthed by the use of three-pin plugs. The
generally be used for final circuit distribution. Where covers of the regulators, if of metallic construction shall
use of triple pole distribution boards is inevitable, be earthed by means of a separate earth wire.
individual single phase circuit shall be controlled by 10.4 Domestic Electric Appliances
double pole isolator.
Bodies of hot-plates, kettles, toasters, heaters, ovens
7.4.5 All distribution boards shall be marked ‘Lighting’ and water boilers shall all be earthed by the use of
or ‘Power’ as the case may be and also with the voltage three-pin plugs. However, if fixed wiring has been used,
and number of phases of the supply. then a separate earth wire shall be used for earthing
7.4.6 The distribution boards for light and power these appliances.
circuits shall be different.
10.5 Bath Room
8 SERVICE LINES The body of automatic electric water heaters shall be
The relevant provisions of IS 8061 shall apply. earthed by the use of a three-pin plug or by a separate
earth wire, if fixed wiring has been done. All non-
9 METERING electrical metal work including the bath tub, metal
pipes, sinks and tanks shall be bonded together and
9.1 It is recommended to have two distinct circuits,
earthed.
one for lights and fans and the other for high wattage
(power) appliances particularly when the tariff is 10.6 Radio Sets
different for light and power.
From the point of view of good reception it is
9.2 Energymeters shall be installed at such a place recommended that radio sets should be earthed through
which is readily accessible to both the owner of the an electrode different from that of the main earth
building and the authorized representatives of the system for other electrical appliances. However, if it is
supply authority. These should be installed at a height not possible to have separate earth electrode, radio sets
where it is convenient to note the meter reading, it may be earthed through the main earth system.
should preferably not be installed at a height less than
1 m from the ground. The energymeters should either 10.7 Miscellaneous Apparatus
be provided with a protective covering, enclosing it Where appliances utilizing gas and electricity are in
completely, except the glass window through which use, for example, gas-heated electricity-driven washing
the readings are noted or should be mounted inside a machines, the inlet end of the gas supply shall be either
completely enclosed panel provided with a hinged or fitted with a strong insulating bush, substantial enough
sliding doors with arrangement for locking it. The to stand a flash test of 3 500 V and so designed as to
room/space where energy meters are installed shall be be difficult to detach, or, where it is desirable or
kept clear from any obstruction (see also IS 15707). necessary that metal work in proximity to electrical

208 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

apparatus be bonded to the earthed metal work of the and large, the following types of air-cooling equipment
latter, as for example, in kitchens, the gas supply shall are used:
be introduced through a non-conducting plastic pipe
a) Evaporative coolers,
from a point not in proximity to earthed metal work.
Where separation is not easily achieved, for example, b) Packaged air-conditioners, and
as in cases of direct-coupled motor-driven gas boosters c) Room air-conditioners.
and motorized gas valves, the metal work of the 11.2.2 The power requirements, layout and design of
electrical equipment, shall be bonded to the metal or electrical installation shall take into account the number
pipework of gas equipment. In such cases the addition and type of such equipment.
to the motor control gear of a differential or current-
balance type of circuit-breaker, designed to operate at 11.3 Lifts
low values of fault current, would afford a desirable
11.3.1 Whenever lifts are required to be installed in
safeguard against fault current transfer specially where
residential buildings, the general rules laid down in
the rating of the plant is of a size and capacity which
Part 1/Section 11 of this Code shall apply. However,
entails correspondingly high ratings for the normal
the design of lifts shall take into account the following
overload protective devices.
recommendations.
The refrigerators, air-conditioners and coolers, electric
11.3.1.1 Occupant load
radiators, electric irons, etc, shall all be earthed by the
use of three-pin plugs. For residential (domestic) dwellings, the occupant load
(the number of persons within any floor area) expressed
11 BUILDING SERVICES in gross area in m2/person shall not be less than 12.5.
11.1 Lighting 11.3.1.2 Passenger handling capacity (H)
The general rules laid down in Part 1/Section 11 of Expressed as the estimated population that has to be
this Code shall apply. The choice of lamps, lighting handled in the buildings in the 5-minute peak period,
fittings shall be based on the recommended values of the passenger handling capacity for residential
illumination given in Table 3. See SP 72 for detailed buildings shall be 5 percent.
guidance.
11.3.1.3 Car speed
Table 3 Recommended Levels of Illumination for Car speed for passenger lifts shall be as follows:
Different Parts of Domestic Dwellings
a) In low and medium class flats 0.5 m/s, and
(Clauses 11.1 and 14.3)
b) Large flats (No. of floors served 6-12)
Sl No. Location Illumination Level 0.75-1.5 m/s.
lux
(1) (2) (3) 11.3.2 Where a lift is arranged to serve two, three or
i) Entrances, hallways 100 four flats per floor, the lift may be placed adjoining
ii) Living room 300 the staircase, with the lift entrances serving direct on
iii) Dining room 150 to the landings. Where the lift is to serve a considerable
iv) Bedroom: number of flats having access to balconies or corridors,
a) General 300
b) Dressing tables, bed heads 200 it may be conveniently placed in a well ventilated tower
v) Games or recreation room 100 adjoining the building.
vi) Table games 300
vii) Kitchen 200 12 FIRE PROTECTION
viii) Kitchen sink 300
ix) Laundry 200 The following protection systems are recommended:
x) Bathroom 100
xi) Bathroom mirror 300 a) One or two family private dwellings — Fire
xii) Sewing 700 detection/extinguishing systems not required.
xiii) Workshop 200
b) Apartment houses/flats
xiv) Stairs 100
xv) Garage 70 1) Up to 2 storey — Not required.
xvi) Study 300
2) 3 storey and above
i) Floor area less than 300 m2 — Not
11.2 Air-conditioning required.
11.2.1 The general rules laid down in Part 1/Section 11 ii) Floor area more than 300 m 2 —
of this Code shall apply. For domestic dwellings, by Manually operated electric fire alarm.

PART 3 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS IN NON-INDUSTRIAL BUILDINGS 209

SP 30 : 2011

SP 7 may be referred for detailed guidance. c) The electrical outlets for appliances in the
bathrooms shall be away from the shower or
13 TESTING OF THE INSTALLATION sink (see Annex A).
The provisions of Part 1/Section 13 of this Code shall d) Wiring for power outlets in the kitchen shall
apply. be preferably done in metallic conduit wiring.
e) The electrical outlets shall not be located
14 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS above the gas stove.
14.1 Telephone Wiring f) The clearance between the bottom most point
of the ceiling fan and the floor shall be not
Facilities for telephone wiring shall be provided in all
less than 2.4 m.
residential buildings where telephones are likely to be
installed. In high rise residential buildings, a riser of g) The metallic body of the fan regulator if any,
adequate size shall be provided for telephone wiring shall be earthed effectively.
cables. h) Earth leakage circuit-breaker at the intake of
power supply at the consumer’s premises (see
14.2 Safety Requirements Part 1/Section 14 of this Code) shall be
Some of the important safety requirements in electrical provided.
installations in domestic dwellings are summarized 14.3 Guidelines on Power Factor Improvement in
below: Domestic Dwellings
a) All outlets for domestic electrical appliances General guidelines on principal causes of low power
shall be of three-pin socket type, third socket factor and methods of compensation are given in
being connected to the earth. Part 1/Section 17 of this Code. For guidance on natural
b) All the single pole switches shall be on phase power factor available for single phase appliances and
or live conductor only. equipment in domestic use, see Table 3.

ANNEX A
[Clause 14.2 (c)]
PARTICULAR REQUIREMENTS FOR LOCATIONS CONTAINING A BATH TUB OR
SHOWER BASIN

A-1 SCOPE 1) by the vertical plane circumscribing the

bath tub or shower basin, or for a shower
The particular requirements of this Annex apply to bath
without basin, by the vertical plane 0.6 m
tubs, shower basins and the surrounding zones where
from the shower head; and
susceptibility of persons to electric shock is likely to
be increased by a reduction in body resistance and 2) by the floor and the horizontal plane
contact with earth potential. 2.25 m above the floor.
c) Zone 2 — is limited:
A-2 CLASSIFICATION OF ZONES
1) by Zone 1 and the vertical parallel plane
A-2.1 The requirements given in this Annex are based 0.60 m external to Zone 1, and
on the dimensions of four zones as described in Fig. 1 2) by the floor and horizontal plane 2.25 m
and Fig. 2. above the floor.
a) Zone 0 — is the interior of the bath tub or d) Zone 3 — is limited:
shower basin.
1) by Zone 2 and the parallel vertical plane
b) Zone 1 — is limited: 2.40 m external to Zone 2, and

210 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

2) by the floor and the horizontal plane c) Zone 2 : IP X 4 IP X 5 in public baths

2.25 m above the floor. d) Zone 3 : IP X 1
NOTE — The dimensions are measured taking account
of walls and fixed partition. A-4.2 In Zones 0, 1 and 2, wiring systems shall be limited
to those necessary to the supply of appliances situated
A-3 PROTECTION FOR SAFETY in those zones. Junction boxes are not permitted in Zones
0, 1 and 2. In Zone 3, they are permitted if the necessary
A-3.1 Where safety extra low voltage is used, whatever
degree of protection is available.
the nominal voltage, protection against direct contact
shall be provided by: A-4.3 In Zones 0, 1 and 2 no switchgear and accessories
shall be installed.
a) barriers or enclosures affording at least the
degree of protection IP2X, or A-4.4 In Zone 3, socket-outlets are permitted, only if
b) insulation capable of withstanding a test they are either:
voltage of 500 V for 1 min. a) supplied individually by an isolating
A-3.2 A local supplementary equipotential bounding transformer, or
shall connect all extraneous conductive parts in Zones b) supplied by safety extra-low voltage, or
1, 2 and 3 with protective conductors of all exposed c) protected by a residual current protective device.
conductive parts situated in these zones.
A-4.5 Any switches and socket outlets shall be at a
A-4 SELECTION OF EQUIPMENT distance of at least 0.60 m from door of the shower
cabinet.
A-4.1 Electrical equipment shall have at least the
following degrees of protection: A-4.6 In Zone 0, only electrical appliances specially
intended for use in the bath tub are permitted. In Zone 1
a) Zone 0 : IP X 7 only water heaters may be installed. In Zone 2 only
b) Zone 1 : IP X 5 water heaters and Class II luminaries may be installed.

PART 3 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS IN NON-INDUSTRIAL BUILDINGS 211

SP 30 : 2011

Bath Tub

Shower Basin

Shower without Basin but with fixed partition

FIG. 1 ZONE DIMENSIONS (ELEVATION)

212 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

f)

FIG. 2 Z ONE DIMENSIONS (PLAN)

PART 3 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS IN NON-INDUSTRIAL BUILDINGS 213

SP 30 : 2011

SECTION 2 OFFICE BUILDINGS, SHOPPING AND COMMERCIAL CENTRES

AND INSTITUTIONS

0 FOREWORD 3 TERMINOLOGY
Office buildings, shopping and commercial centres can For the purpose of this Section, the definitions given
be of various types depending on the size of the civil in Part 1/Section 2 of this Code shall apply.
structure or the extent of activity involved in the
building. High-rise buildings housing office complexes 4 CLASSIFICATION
are common, calling for a coordinated planning while The electrical installations covered in this Section, are
designing the electrical services therein. those in buildings intended for the following purposes:
In small buildings with comparatively moderate loads, a) Office Buildings/Business Buildings — These
supply is normally at medium voltage and the include buildings for the transaction of business,
distribution of power is less complex. However, in the for the keeping of accounts and records and
case of multi-storied office-cum-commercial complex, similar purposes, professional establishments,
where the large number of amenities is to be provided offices, banks, research establishments, data
calls for a more complex distribution system. Some of processing installations, etc.
such buildings has to incorporate a standby/emergency
b) Shopping/Commercial Centres/Mercantile
power plant for essential service needs.
Buildings — These include buildings used as
For editorial convenience, and keeping in view the shops, stores, market, for display and sale of
similarly with the type of buildings covered in this merchandise, wholesale or retail,
section, educational and other institutional buildings departmental stores, etc.
are also covered here. Should any special provisions c) Educational Buildings — These include
apply to them, they are identified at the relevant clauses. buildings used for schools, colleges and
daycare purposes for more than 8 hours per
It is not possible to define strictly the type of buildings
week involving assembly of people for
covered in this Section except in broad terms, an
instruction and education (including
attempt has been made to identify the nature of the
incidental recreation), etc.
occupancy. Reference may, however, be made to 3
wherein a description is provided for the various types NOTE — Larger assembly buildings recreational
of installations covered in this Section. occupancies are covered in Part 3/Section 3 of this Code.

1 SCOPE 5 GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS OF

INSTALLATIONS
This Part 3/Section 2 of this Code covers requirements
for electrical installations in office buildings, shopping 5.0 General guidelines on the assessment of
and commercial centres and educational and similar characteristics of installations in buildings are given
institutional buildings. in Part 1/Section 8 of this Code. For the purpose of
installations falling under the scope of this Section the
2 REFERENCES characteristics defined below generally apply.
This Part 3/Section 2 of the Code should be read in 5.1 Environment
conjunction with the following Indian Standards:
The following environmental factors shall apply to
IS No. Title office buildings, shopping and commercial centres and
3646 (Part 2) : 1966 Code of practice for interior educational/institutional buildings.
illumination: Part 2 Schedule for
values of illumination and glare Environment Characteristics Remarks
index (1) (2) (3)
8061 : 1976 Code of practice for design, Presence of Probability of
installation and maintenance of water presence of water
service lines upto and including is negligible
650 V
Presence of The quantity or
15707 : 2006 Testing, evaluation, installation foreign solid nature of dust or
and maintenance of ac electricity bodies foreign solid
meters — Code of practice bodies is not
significant

214 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

Environment Characteristics Remarks Utilization Characteristics Remarks

(1) (2) (3) (1) (2) (3)
Presence of The quantity and Locations where conditions of shopping arcades,
corrosive or nature of some chemical evacuation etc
polluting corrosive or products are Nature of No significant Small shops
substances polluting handled in small processed of risks
substances is not quantities, (for
significant example, labora-
stored material
tories in schools Existence of In view of large
and colleges) will fire risk volume of paper
be categorized as and furniture, for
AF3. For office example, office
and other build- buildings, furni-
ings covered by ture shops, etc.
this Section
situated by the sea
6 SUPPLY CHARACTERISTICS AND
or in industrial
zones, producing PARAMETERS
serious pollution,
the categorization 6.0 Exchange of Information
AF2 applies (see 6.0.1 Proper coordination shall be ensured between the
Part 3/Section 8)
architect, building contractor and the electrical engineer
Mechanical Impact and on the various aspects of installations design. From
stresses vibration of low
the point of view of the design of the various
severity
installations, the following shall be considered.
Seismic effect Depends on the
and lighting location of the a) Maximum demand and diversity;
building b) Type of distribution system, mains and sub-
mains;
5.2 Utilization c) Nature of supply (current, frequency, nominal
The following aspects of utilization shall apply: voltages);
d) Prospective short-circuit current at the supply
Utilization Characteristics Remarks intake point;
(1) (2) (3) e) Division of the installation;
Capability of Uninstructed A major percentage f) Nature of the external influences (see 4);
persons persons of occupants g) Maintainability of the installations;
Children Applies to schools h) Nature and details of building services;
Persons Applies to areas
adequately such as building 1) Lighting,
advised or substations and for 2) Air-conditioning, and
supervised by operating and
3) Lifts.
skilled persons maintenance staff
Contact of Persons in non- j) Other details as relevant such as, pumps for
persons conducting fire fighting, lighting, fire-alarm systems,
situations telephones, call-bells, clock systems, etc;
Conditions of Low density Small offices and k) Telephone circuits including extensions and
evacuation occupation, easy shops intercom facilities;
during conditions of
emergency evacuation. m) CCTV for information display and security;
High density Departmental stores n) Computer installation facility where
occupation, applicable; and
difficult p) Metering system for different loads.
conditions of
evacuation NOTE — Fire protection system shall include such
High density High rise office details such as locations of detectors, zonal indicators,
central control console, public address system for fire
occupation, commercial centres,
fighting, cable runs and their segregation from the other
difficult underground cable system.

PART 3 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS IN NON-INDUSTRIAL BUILDINGS 215

SP 30 : 2011

A complete drawing of layout of the electrical concentration of power demand of the electrical loads.
installation shall be prepared together with associated Air-conditioning in office buildings absorbs an
floor plans indicating the details mentioned in (a) to especially high proportion of the total power used.
(p). This wiring diagram shall include outlets for lights, Consequently, such occupancies have to be provided
sockets, bells, ceiling fans, exhaust fans, location of with their own substation with vertical and horizontal
sectionalized control switches, distribution boards, etc. forms of power distribution.
In special occupancies such as school or college
6.3.1 If the load demand is high, requiring supply at
laboratories, the dc circuits be identifiable in the layout
high voltage, accommodation for substation equipment
diagram.
will be required. Main switch room will serve feeders
6.1 Branch Circuits to various load centres such as air-conditioning plant,
elevators, water pumps, etc. Other loads are taken to
6.1.1 The general design of wiring of branch circuits local distribution boards.
shall conform to those laid down in Part 1/Section 11
of this Code. However, for special cases such as for 6.3.2 The transformer power rating for the supply of
communication networks, fire-alarm system and wiring the building shall be sufficient to cater to the highest
for data-processing equipment, the recommendations simultaneous power requirements of the building.
of the manufacturer shall apply. Typical proportions of power usage are given as
follows:
6.1.2 The branch circuit calculations shall be done
according to the general provisions laid down in Part 3/ Part of Electrical Part of the Total Diversity
Section 1 of this Code. However, the specific demands Installation Power Requirement Factor
of the lighting, appliance and motor loads as well as Percent
special loads encountered in the types of buildings (1) (2) (3)
covered in this Section shall be taken into account.
Ventilation, heating 45 1.0
6.1.3 In offices and showrooms, the interior decoration (air-conditioning)
normally include false ceiling, carpets and curtails. Any Power plant (drives) 5 0.65
wiring laid above the false ceiling should be adequately Lighting 30 0.95
protected such as by drawing the wires in metallic Lifts 20 1.0
conduits and nor run in open. Wires shall not be covered
by carpets. They shall be run at skirting level and 6.3.3 The location and layout of building substation
encased for mechanical protection. shall conform to the general rules laid down in Part 2
6.1.4 Adequate number of socket-outlets shall be of this Code. The substation room shall be well
provided for electrically operated office machines such ventilated and inaccessible to birds and reasonably
as electrical typewriter, calculators, etc, to avoid reptile-, rodent- and insect-proof. Only authorized
training of wires and use of multiple outlets from one persons be allowed to enter the substation for
socket. operations/maintenance of any kind. Cables leading
from the substation to the main building shall
6.1.5 Areas where corrosive or polluting substance are
preferably be carried underground through ducts or
present intermittently or continuously, such as school
pipes of adequate dimensions. Such pipes shall be
laboratories and other buildings located in high
properly sealed at both ends to reduce the possibility
industrial pollution zones, socket-outlets shall
of rain water flowing through the pipes and flooding
preferably be of metal clad weatherproof type with
the trenches.
covers.
6.1.6 Lighting circuits shall preferably be combined 6.3.4 Emergency Supply
in switched groups so that lighting can be limited to Wherever emergency supply is considered necessary,
desks which are occupied. it can be in the form of separate and independent feeder
6.2 Service Lines from the undertaking terminated in equipment isolated
from the regular supply line. In case of standby supply
The general provisions laid down in IS 8061 shall from diesel generator set, it will be installed as per the
apply.
general rules laid down in Part 2 of this Code.
6.3 Building Substations 6.3.4.1 In office buildings, certain safety and essential
6.3.0 General services shall be supplied even in the case of mains
failure. These are governed by the rules and regulations
The designer of power supply for office buildings and of the respective authorities. Essential services include
commercial centres shall take into account the great amongst others, water-pressure pumps, ventilation

216 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

installations, essential lighting and lifts. The power professional establishments, etc, where the buildings
requirement of these essential loads is generally about 25 are more than 2 storey with floor area above 500 m2
percent of the total power requirement of the building. per floor, and for laboratories with delicate instruments
as well as computer installations.
6.3.5 Switchboards and Panel Boards
6.5.1.3 Mercantile buildings (Group F)
All current carrying equipment shall be totally
enclosed, dust-and vermin-proof and if mounted Besides fire-fighting equipment, automatic sprinkles
outdoor, shall be of weatherproof construction or and automatic fire alarm systems are recommended
housed in weatherproof kiosk or cabin. Switchboards for wholesale establishments, warehouses, transport
shall be of open type or cubicle type. Cubicle type booking agencies, etc, as well as for shopping areas
boards shall be with hinged doors interlocked with inside buildings with area more than 500 m2 on each
switch-operating mechanisms. All switches shall bear
floor. For other premises and shopping lines with
labels indicating their functions. Switchboards shall
central corridors open to sky, automatic fire-alarm
be located away from areas likely to be crowded by
systems shall be installed. Underground shopping
the public.
centres shall be provided with automatic sprinkles.
6.3.6 Selection of equipment shall be made according
to the guidelines laid down in Part 1/Section 9 of this 6.6 Building Services
Code. For the purposes of office buildings, shopping
6.6.1 Lighting
and commercial centres, miniature circuit-breakers of
adequate capacity shall be preferred to switchfuse units. 6.6.1.1 The general rules laid down in Part 1/Section 11
They can also be effectively used in place of fuses in a of this Code shall apply. The choice of lamps, lighting
distribution board. fittings and general lighting design together with power
requirement shall be planned based on the
6.4 Metering
recommended values of illumination and limiting
In multi-storied buildings, a number of offices, and values of glare index given in Table 1.
commercial centres occupy various areas. Electrical
load for each of them would have to be metered 6.6.1.2 In commercial premises, a fairly high level of
separately; the meter-room normally is situated in the glare free lighting on working planes and subdued
ground floor (see IS 15707 for further guidance). lighting in circulation areas are necessary. Aesthetics
and interior decoration also play a part. Lighting design
6.5 System Protection in showrooms includes high level of lighting in the
6.5.0 General vertical and horizontal planes, depending on the
merchandise exhibited and their layout. Colour
The general rules for protection for safety laid down
temperature characteristics of the light source shall
in Part 1/Section 7 of this Code shall apply. Reference
also be taken into account in the case of showroom
is also drawn to SP 7 on guidelines for fire protection
of buildings. The general rules given below shall apply. lighting.

6.5.1 The type of buildings covered in this Section fell 6.6.2 Air-conditioning
under Group B (educational buildings). Group E 6.6.2.1 The general rules laid down in Part 1/Section 14
(business buildings) and Group F (mercantile
of this Code shall apply. The design of the air-
buildings) from the point of view of fire safety
conditioning system, shall take into account the
classification (see SP 7). Typical fire fighting
installation requirements are also covered therein. The requirements stipulated in the following clauses.
electrical needs for the appropriate type of installation 6.6.2.2 In case of large air-conditioning installations
shall, therefore, be decided accordingly. (500 tonne and above) it is advisable to have a separate
6.5.1.1 Educational buildings (Group B) isolated equipment room together with electrical
controls. All equipment rooms shall have provision for
Educational buildings above 2-storeys having an area
mechanical ventilation.
of more than 500 m2 per floor shall have besides fire-
fighting equipment, manually operated electrical fire 6.6.3 Lifts and Escalators
alarm and automatic fire alarm systems.
6.6.3.1 The general rules laid down in Part 1/
6.5.1.2 Business buildings (Group E) Section 14, of this Code shall apply. However, the
Besides fire-fighting equipment, automatic fire alarm design of lifts shall take into account the following
systems are recommended for offices, banks, recommendations:

PART 3 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS IN NON-INDUSTRIAL BUILDINGS 217

SP 30 : 2011

Table 1 Recommended Values of Illumination and Glare Index

(Clause 6.6.1)

Sl No. Building Illumination Limiting Glare Index

lux
(1) (2) (3) (4)
i) Banks:
a) Counters, typing accounting book areas 300 19
b) Public areas 150 19
ii) Libraries:
a) Shelves 70-150 —
b) Reading rooms (newspaper, magazines) 150-300 19
c) Reading tables 300-700 22
d) Book repair and binding 300-700 22
e) Cataloging, sorting, stock rooms 150-300 19
iii) Offices:
a) Entrance halls and reception area 150 —
b) Conference rooms, executive offices 300 19
c) General offices 300 19
d) Business machine operation 450 19
e) Drawing offices 450 16
f) Corridors and lift cars 70 —
g) Stairs 100 —
h) Lift landings 100 —
j) Telephone exchanges;
1) Manual exchange rooms (on desk) 200 16
2) Main distribution frame room 150 25
iv) Schools and colleges:
a) Assembly halls:
1) General 150 16
2) When used for exams 300 16
3) Platforms 300 16
b) Class and lecture rooms:
1) Desks 300 16
2) Black board 200-300 —
c) Embroidery and sewing rooms 700 10
d) Art rooms 450 16
e) Libraries (see Sl No. ii above.)
f) Manual training [see appropriate trades in IS 3646 (Part 2)]
g) Offices 300 19
h) Staff rooms, common rooms 150 19
j) Corridors 70 —
k) Stairs 100 —
v) Shops and stores1):
a) General areas 150-300 22
b) Stock rooms 200 25
1)
Does not cover display (showroom lighting).

6.6.3.2 Occupant load 6.6.3.3 Passenger handling capacity (H)

These shall be as follows: These are expressed in terms of percent of the estimated
population that has to be handled in the building in the
Sl Occupancy Occupation 5 min peak period as follows:
No. Load Gross Area
in m2/Person Sl Occupancy H
(1) (2) (3) No. (Percent)
i) Educational 4 (1) (2) (3)
ii) Business 10 i) Diversified (mixed) office occupancy 10-15
iii) Mercantile: ii) Single purpose office occupancy 15-25
1) Ground floor and sales 3
2) Upper sale floor 6

218 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

6.6.3.4 Car speed — These shall be as follows: 8.3.2 A simple call bell system is suitable for small
offices whereby service staff may be called to a
Sl Occupancy No. of Car particular position by the caller. A visible-cum-audible
No. Floors Speed indicator/bell panel shall be used. When call points are
Served 20 m/s too numerous on a single indicator panel, such as in
(1) (2) (3) (4) large offices, multiple call system shall be preferred.
The layout in such a case would be determined by the
i) Office building 4-5 0.5-0.75
6-12 0.75-1.5 size of building and staff. Time bell systems shall be
13-20 Above 1.5 installed in schools to give Start-work and Stop-work
ii) Shops and departmental 2-2.5 signals.
stores
8.4 Clock Systems
6.6.3.5 For office buildings, it is desirable to have at 8.4.1 The general guidelines contained in Part 1/
least a battery of 2 lifts at two or more convenient Section 14 shall apply regarding installation and
points. If this is not possible, it is advisable to have at maintenance of master and slave clock systems.
least two lifts side by side at the main entrance and
8.4.2 In simple installations, impulse clocks designed
one lift each at different sections of the building for
to operate at the same current may be connected in
inter-communication. When two lifts are installed side
one series circuit, with a battery having sufficient
by side, the machine room shall be suitably planned.
voltage to ensure satisfactory operation. In a more
All machines and switchgear may be housed in one
complex installation like multi-storeyed office
machine room.
buildings with large number of slave clocks, the
7 TESTING OF INSTALLATION impulse clocks may be arranged in number of series
circuits. Each of which is connected to a pair of
The various tests on the installation shall be carried contact on a relay which is operated from the contacts
out as laid down in Part 1/Section 13 of this Code. of master clock.
8 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS 8.4.3 Master clock shall be placed in a dust free
location, readily accessible for maintenance at all
8.1 Group Control
times.
8.1.1 The lighting circuits shall preferably be combined
in switched groups as well as coordinated to functional 8.5 Closed Circuit TV
groups of desks in an open plan office. The switching 8.5.1 Commercial buildings may require the
points may be combined centrally at the entrance installations of CCTVs for one of more of the following
passageways. In order to ensure proper co-ordination purposes:
with design of the building for daylight use of devices
such as photoelectric switches shall be encouraged for a) Security, and
controlling lighting groups near windows. b) Information display.
Educational/institutional buildings may use CCTV as
8.2 Telephones/Intercoms
a teaching aid for pre-recorded educational
8.2.1 Adequate coordination shall be ensured right from programmes. Reference shall be made to good practice
the planning stages with the telephone authorities to for installations of such facilities.
determine the needs for the telephone system catering
to the various units in office buildings. For private 8.6 Emergency Lights for Critical Areas
intercom systems, entirely under the control of the user, Battery powered (at least 2 h rating) emergency lights
it is necessary to pre-plan the coordination of external should be installed at critical and strategic locations
and intercom systems. including emergency exit points. These will provide
illumination by self contained battery source even on
8.3 Electric Call Bell System failure of a.c. mains. On resumption of a.c. power supply,
8.3.1 The general guidelines laid down in Part 1/ they will switch back to mains automatically and
Section 11, regarding installation of electric bells and simultaneous recharge the battery to the required level.
call system shall be referred to. Depending on the final
8.7 Emergency Exit Signage
requirements of the type of occupancy, the type of
equipment to be used, wiring and other details shall be Photo luminescent safety signage should be provided
agreed to. at different strategic locations.

PART 3 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS IN NON-INDUSTRIAL BUILDINGS 219

SP 30 : 2011

SECTION 3 RECREATIONAL, ASSEMBLY BUILDING

0 FOREWORD 4 CLASSIFICATION
A variety of buildings are being used for public assembly 4.1 The electrical installations covered in this Section,
for purposes that are recreational, amusement, social or are those in buildings intended for the following purposes:
religious. These include cinema halls, theatres, auditoria
Assembly/Recreational Buildings — These shall
and the like, the primary feature being a congregation
include any building where groups of people
of people of all age groups for a short period of time
congregate or gather for amusement, recreation, social,
during a day or a group of days. Buildings such as those
religious, patriotic, civil and similar purposes, for
catering to display of regular programmes demands a
example, theatres, motion-picture (cinema) houses,
continuous power supply. In view of the nature of use
assembly halls, auditoria, exhibition halls, museums,
of such occupancies, certain specific safety and
restaurants, places of worship, dance halls, clubs, etc.
reliability considerations become necessary for the
electrical installations. NOTE — Theatres are also classified further as permanent (air-
conditioned and non-air-conditioned), temporary or traveling
The lighting design of such buildings are generally depending on the nature or construction of the premises.
sophisticated, required to be properly coordinated with Temporary installations shall also conform to the additional
provisions laid down in Part 5/Section 2 of this Code.
the electro-acoustic demands. On the physical aspects
of lighting and sound systems in recreational buildings, 5 GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS OF
it is recommended that assistance should be derived INSTALLATIONS
from specialists as such details are beyond the scope
of this Code. 5.0 General guidelines on the assessment of
characteristics of installations in buildings are given
Sports buildings, which are also basically assembly in Part 1/ Section 8 of this Code. For the purpose of
buildings, are covered separately under Part 3/Sec 6 installations falling under the scope of this section, the
of this Code, in view of their unique nature. The type characteristics defined below generally apply.
of buildings covered in this Section are enumerated
in 4. It shall also be noted that assembly buildings 5.1 Environment
forming part of other building complex, say,
The following environmental factors shall apply to
educational or office-commercial-cum-cinema
recreational and assembly buildings:
complex shall also comply with this Section.

1 SCOPE Environment Characteristics Remarks

(1) (2) (3)
1.1 This Part 3/Section 3 of the Code covers
requirements for electrical installation in buildings, Presence of Probability of —
such as those meant for recreational and assembly water presence of
purposes. water is
negligible
1.2 This Part 3/Section 3 does not cover sports Presence of The quantity or —
buildings. foreign solid nature of dust or
bodies foreign solid
2 REFERENCES
bodies is not
This Part 3/Section 1 of the Code should be read in significant
conjunction with the following Indian Standards: Presence of The quantity —
corrosive or and nature of
IS No. Title
polluting corrosive or
8061 : 1976 Code of practice for design, substances polluting
installation and maintenance of substances is
service lines upto and including not significant
650 V Mechanical Impact and —
SP 72 : 2010 National Lighting Code stresses vibration of low
severity
3 TERMINOLOGY Seismic effect — Depends on the
For the purpose of this Section, the definitions given and lighting location of the
in Part 1/Section 2 of this Code shall apply. building

220 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

5.2 Utilization 3) Lifts, and

The following aspects of utilization shall apply: 4) Additional power connections.
b) Lighting:
Utilization Characteristics Remarks 1) In front of the theatre, such as general
(1) (2) (3) lighting of outdoor, foyer, corridors and
Capability of Uninstructed persons Majority of stairs, and auditorium; and
persons the occupants 2) In the rear of the theatre for stage, work
Persons adequately Electrical place dressing rooms, workshops and
advised or supervised by operating storehouses.
skilled persons areas c) Emergency supply.
Conditions High density occupation, Small theatres
6.1.1 The electrical lighting of the main building shall
of evacuation easy conditions of and cinemas
have at least three separate and distinct main circuits
during evacuation
as follows:
emergency
High density occupation Multiple a) For the enclosures (cabin) and hence through
difficult conditions of cinema halls, a dimmer regulator to the central lighting of
evacuation cultural and the auditorium;
theatrical b) For one-half of the auditorium, passage ways,
buildings stairways, exit and parts of the building open
Nature of Existence of fire risk In view of to the public; and
processed of large quantum c) For the remaining half of the auditorium,
stored of furniture passage ways, stairways, exit and parts of the
material and drapings building open to the public.
6.1.2 The control of the circuits in respect of the two
6 SUPPLY CHARACTERISTICS AND halves of the auditorium referred to in 6.1.1 shall be
PARAMETERS remote from each other.
6.0 Exchange of Information 6.1.3 The cabin shall be provided with two separate
circuits, one feeding the cabin equipments and the other
6.0.1 Proper coordination shall be ensured between the
lights and fans.
architect, building contractor and the electrical engineer
on the various aspects of the installation design in a 6.1.4 Wiring shall be of the conduit type. Ends of
building intended for recreational or assembly conduits shall enter and be mechanically secured to the
purposes. For large projects, the advice of the switch, control gears, equipment terminal boxes, etc.
appropriate specialists shall be obtained, in particular Ends of conduits shall be provided with screwed bushes.
on the following aspects: Within the enclosure, all cables shall be enclosed in
screwed metal conduits adequately earthed. PVC
a) Audio-visual systems,
conduits may be used in the auditorium and other places.
b) Stage lighting and control, and
c) General auditorium lighting and other special 6.1.5 Temporary wiring shall not be allowed in cabin,
service needs. rewinding room, queue sheds and similar places.

6.0.2 The installation work shall conform to the 6.1.6 The cabin equipment shall be accessible at all
provisions of Indian Electricity Rules as well as other times. Nothing shall impede access to any part of the
Rules applicable for assembly buildings formulated by equipment or its controls.
the State Authorities. 6.1.7 Linked tumbler switches shall not be used for
the control of circuits.
6.1 Branch Circuits
6.1.8 Branch and main distribution boards shall be
6.1.0 The branch circuits shall in general cater to the mounted at suitable height not higher than 2 m from
following individual load groups: the floor level. A front clearance of 1 m should also be
a) Power installation: provided.
1) Stage machinery, 6.1.9 Wood work shall not be used for the mounting of
2) Ventilation and air-conditioning or construction of the framework for iron-clad switch
installation, and distribution boards and controlgear.

PART 3 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS IN NON-INDUSTRIAL BUILDINGS 221

SP 30 : 2011

6.1.10 All the lighting fittings shall be at a height of a) As there will be concentration and movement
not less than 2.25 m. of people, the substation should be located
away from the area where people and vehicles
6.1.11 The single pole switches for the individual lights
move about, preferably at the rear of the
and fans shall be mounted on sheet steel boards suitably
earthed. building.
b) The substation should not be in the way of
6.1.12 Suitable socket outlets with controls shall be people and fire-fighting vehicles and
provided on the side walls near the stage for tapping personnel where they are likely to attend to
supply to screen motor; stage focusing lights, audio an emergency.
systems and portable lights.
6.1.13 In the queue sheds, bulk head fittings shall be used. 6.5 System Protection

6.1.14 For outdoor lighting, water-tight fittings shall 6.5.0 The rules for protection for safety laid down in
be used and fittings may be so mounted without Part 1/Section 7 of this Code shall apply. Reference
spoiling the aesthetic view of the recreation buildings. may also be made to SP 7 on guidelines for fire
protection of buildings. The general rules given below
6.1.15 The installation in a traveling cinema should shall apply.
generally conform to the above requirements and the
building should be sufficiently away from the nearest 6.5.1 The type of occupancies covered in this Section
conductor of power lines (see 3.2 of Part 1/Section 7 fall under Group D (assembly buildings) from the point
of this Code). of view of fire safety classification. Such occupancies
can be further classified into groups depending on the
6.1.16 The plug points shall be provided at a height of capacity of the theatre [auditorium to hold the
about 1.5 m from the floor, in assembly buildings. congregation (see SP 7)]. Typical fire-fighting installation
6.1.17 In case of travelling cinemas, the wiring for the requirements are also covered therein. The following shall
open yard lighting shall be done with weather-proof be provided besides fire-fighting equipment:
cables threaded through porcelain reel insulators a) Building having a theatrical stage and fixed
suspended by earthed bearer wire at a height of not seats:
less than 5 m from ground level. The reel insulators 1) Stage — Automatic sprinkler; and
shall be spaced 0.5 m from each other.
2) Auditoria, corridor, green rooms, canteen
6.1.18 When a tapping is taken from the open yard and storage Automatic fire-alarm system.
wiring, it should be taken only at a point of support b) Buildings without a stage but no permanent
through porcelain connectors housed in a junction box, seating arrangement—Automatic fire alarm
fixed to the supporting pole. system.
c) All other structures designed for assembly —
6.2 Feeders
Manually operated electrical fire-alarm
6.2.1 Feeder circuits shall generally conform to the system.
requirements laid down in Part 1/Section 11 of this
Code. 6.6 Building Services

6.2.2 Separate feeders shall be taken to air-conditioning 6.6.1 Lighting

units, lifts and the lighting and fan circuits. The general rules laid down in Part 1/Section 11 of
this Code shall apply. The choice of lamps, lighting
6.3 Service Lines
fitting and general lighting design together with power
Service lines shall conform to IS 8061. requirement shall be planned based on the
recommended values of illumination and glare index
6.4 Building Substation given in Table 1 (see SP 72).
6.4.0 The electrical power demand of an assembly 6.6.2 Air-conditioning
building can vary from 30 kVA to more than 1 000 kVA
according to the size of the building. Usually, supply 6.6.2.1 The general rules laid down in Part1/Section 11
at voltages above 1 kV is given for large theatres and of this Code shall apply.
auditoria. Building substations shall conform to the 6.6.2.2 In air-conditioned assembly buildings, inside
general requirements specified in Part 2 of this Code. temperature shall be 22 ± 2°C.
6.4.1 The following aspects shall be taken note of while 6.6.2.3 Provisions shall be made to record the
deciding the location of substation: temperature inside the auditorium.

222 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

Table 1 Recommended Values of Illumination 8 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS

and Glare Index
8.1 Emergency Supply
(Clause 6.6.1)
See also Part 2 of this Code.
Sl Part of Building Illumination Limiting Value of
No. lux Glare Index 8.1.1 In all recreational and assembly buildings,
(1) (2) (3) (4) sufficient number of emergency lights in all the
1. Assembly and concert: locations which includes all the emergency exit.
a) Foyers, auditoria 100-150 —
b) Platforms 450 — 8.1.2 Battery powered (at least 2 h rating) emergency
c) Corridors 70 — lights should be installed at critical and strategic
d) Stairs 100 —
2. Cinemas: locations to avoid catastrophic in case of total power
a) Foyers 150 — failure. These will provide illumination by self
b) Auditoria 50 — contained battery source even on failure of a.c. mains.
c) Corridors 70 —
d) Stairs 100 — On resumption of a.c. power supply, they will switch
3. Museums: back to mains automatically and simultaneous recharge
a) General 150 16
b) Display Special lighting 16
the battery to the required level.
4. Art Galleries:
a) General 100 10
8.1.3 Depending on the total capacity required for
b) Paintings 200 10 standby supply for the occupancy, suitable standby
5. Theatres: generator set shall be installed. The location and
a) Foyers 150 —
b) Auditoria 70 —
installation of the standby DG set should be in
c) Corridors 70 — accordance with the norms specified in Part 2 of this
d) Stairs 100 — Code.
NOTE — The above is meant for general guidelines and
does not include special lighting effects. 8.2 Stage Lighting

6.6.2.4 In the event of a breakdown of the air- On the stage of a theatre, a great number of spotlights,
conditioning plant, alternate arrangements should be border lights, projectors, etc, are required for
available for ventilation and air circulation. illumination, including portable light sources. The
various possibilities of switching each fittings shall be
6.6.3 Lifts and Escalators kept in view while designing the lighting circuits. For
The general rules laid down in Part 1/Section 11 of same lighting schemes, dimmer-control equipment
this Code shall apply. However, the design of the lifts may be required.
shall take into account the following recommendations: 8.3 Group Control
a) Occupant load
The lighting in the auditorium shall be suitably
This shall be as follows: combined into control groups to facilitate group
Occupancy Occupant Load, Gross switching. In the special case of stage lighting control,
Area (m2/Person) the lighting operator shall have a good view of the stage
Assembly halls with 0.6 in order to be able to follow the performance.
fixed or loose seats Therefore, the control-room shall be situated in a
and dance floors convenient position.
Without seating 1.5 8.4 Audio-Visual System
facilities including
dining rooms Installation of amplifying and sound distribution
systems shall conform to the guidelines contained in
b) Passenger handling capacity and car speed —
As given in Part 3/Section 2 of this Code. Part 1/Section 11 of this Code.

7 TESTING OF INSTALLATIONS 8.5 Luminous Sign

The various tests on the installations shall be carried Photo luminescent safety signage should be provided
out as laid down in Part 1/Section 13 of this Code. at different strategic locations.

PART 3 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS IN NON-INDUSTRIAL BUILDINGS 223

SP 30 : 2011

SECTION 4 MEDICAL ESTABLISHMENTS

0 FOREWORD IS No. Title

Hospitals in the country vary in size from simple service lines upto and including
premises used for medical purposes in villages to a 650 V
well-equipped, multidisciplinary hospital in big cities. 13450 (Part 1) : Medical electrical equipment :
The lattser type will have several units functioning 1994 /IEC Part 1 General requirements for
simultaneously with a variety of support services to 60601-1 : 1988 safety
cater to the needs of doctors and patients. 14665 (Part 1) : Electric traction lifts : Part 1
2000 Guidelines for outline dimensions
Safety requirements for electrical equipment used in
of passenger, goods, service and
medical practice are covered IS 13450 series.
hospital lifts
Additional safety provisions in the electrical
SP 7 : 2005 National Building Code of India
installations of medically used rooms and medical
SP 72 : 2010 National Lighting Code
establishments are covered in this Section of the Code.
This Section 4 is based on the following 3 TERMINOLOGY
considerations: In addition to the definitions contained in Part 1/
a) The patient may not be in a condition to react Section 2 of this Code the following shall apply.
normally to the effects of hazardous events;
3.1 Rooms
b) The electrical resistance of the skin, which is
normally an important protection against 3.1.1 Anaesthetic Room — Medically used room in
harmful electric currents is bypassed in certain which general inhalation anesthetics are intended to
examinations or treatments; be administered.
c) Medical electrical equipment may often be NOTE — Anaesthetic room comprises for instance the actual
used to support or substitute vital body operating theatre, operating preparation room, operating plaster
functions, the breakdown of which may cause room and surgeries.
a dangerous situation; 3.1.2 Angiographic Examination Room — Room
d) Specific locations in medical establishments intended for displaying arteries or veins, etc, with
where flammable atmosphere exists, call for contrast media.
special treatment; and
3.1.3 Central Monitoring Room — Room in which the
e) Electric and magnetic interference may
output signals of several patient monitors are displayed,
disturb certain medical examinations or
stored or computed.
treatments.
NOTE — A central monitoring room is considered to be part
1 SCOPE of a Room Group, if a conductive connection (for example, by
signal transmission lines) between the rooms of such a group
This Part 3/Section 4 of this Code applies to the exists.
electrical installations in medical establishments. This
3.1.4 Central Sterilization Room — Room, not spatially
Section is also applicable to rooms for veterinary
connected to a medically used room, in which medical
medicine and dental practice.
equipment and utensils are sterilized.
2 REFERENCES 3.1.5 Delivery Room — Room in which the actual birth
This Part 3/Section 4 of the code should be read in takes place.
conjunction with the following Indian Standards: 3.1.6 Endoscopic Room — Room intended for
IS No. Title application of endoscopic methods for the examination
3646 (Part 2) : Code of practice for interior of organs through natural or artificial orifices.
1966 illumination : Part 2 Schedule for Examples of endoscopic methods are bronchoscopic,
values of illumination and glare laryngoscopic, cystoscopic, gastroscopic and similar
index methods, if necessary, performed under anaesthesia.
7689 : 1989 Guide for the control of
undesirable static electricity 3.1.7 Heart Catheterization Room — Room intended
8061 : 1976 Code of practice for design, for the examination or treatment of the heart using
installation and maintenance of catheters.

224 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

Examples of applied procedures are measurement of patients are prepared for an operation, for example,
action potentials of the haemodynamics of the heart, by administering anaesthetics.
drawing of blood samples, injection of contrast agents NOTE — Such a room belongs to the operating room group
or application of pacemakers. and is spatially connected to it.

3.1.8 Hemodialysis Room — Room in a medical 3.1.19 Operating Recovery Room — Room in which
establishment intended to connect patients to medical the patient under observation recovers from the
electrical equipment in order to detoxicate their blood. influence of anesthesia.
3.1.9 Hydrotherapy Room — Room in which patients NOTE — Such a room is usually very close to the operating
are treated by hydrotherapeutic methods. room group but not necessarily part of it.

Examples of such methods are therapeutic treatments 3.1.20 Operating Sterilization Room — Room in which
with water, brine, mud, slime, clay, steam, sand, water utensils required for an operation are sterilized.
with gases, brine with gases, inhalation therapy, NOTE — Such a room belongs to the operating room group
electrotherapy in water1), massage thermotherapy and and is spatially connected to it.
thermotherapy in water1). 3.1.21 Operating Theatre — Room in which surgical
Swimming pools for general use and normal bath- operations are performed.
rooms are not considered as hydrotherapy rooms. 3.1.22 Operating Wash Room — Room in which
3.1.10 Intensive Care Room — Room in which bed medical staff at an operation can wash for disinfection
patients are monitored independently of an operation purposes.
by means of electromedical equipment. Body actions NOTE — Such a room belongs to the operating room group
may be stimulated, if required. and is spatially connected to it.

3.1.11 Intensive Examination Room — Room in which 3.1.23 Physiotherapy Room — Room in which patients
patients are connected for the purpose of intensive are treated by physiotherapeutic methods.
examination, but not for the purpose of treatment, 3.1.24 Radiological Diagnostic Room — Room
simultaneously to several electromedical measuring or intended for the use of ionizing radiation for display
monitoring devices. of internal structures of the body by means of
3.1.12 Intensive Monitoring Room — Room in which radiography or fluoroscopy or by the use of radio-active
operated patients are monitored, using electromedical isotopes or for other diagnostic purposes.
equipment. Body actions (for example, heart 3.1.25 Radiological Therapy Room — Room intended
circulation, respiration) may be stimulated, if required. for the use of ionizing radiation to obtain therapeutic
3.1.13 Labour Room — Room in which patients are effects on the surface of the body or in internal organs
prepared (waiting) for delivery. by means of X-radiation, gamma radiation or
corpuscular radiation or by the use of radio-active
3.1.14 Medical Establishment — Establishment for isotopes.
medical care (examination, treatment, monitoring,
transport, nursing, etc) of human beings or animals. 3.1.26 Room Group — Group of medically used rooms
linked with each other in their function, by their
3.1.15 Medically Used Room — Room intended to be designated medical purpose or by interconnected
used for medical, dental or veterinary examination, medical electrical equipment.
treatment or monitoring of persons or animals.
3.1.27 Urology Room — Room in which diagnostic or
3.1.16 Minor Surgical Theatre — Room in which therapeutic procedures are performed on the urogenital
minor operations are performed on ambulant or non- tract using electromedical equipment, such as X-ray
ambulant patients, if necessary using anesthetics or equipment, endoscopic equipment and high-frequency
analgesics. surgery equipment.
3.1.17 Operating Plaster Room — Room in which 3.1.28 Ward — Medically used room or room group
plaster of Paris or similar dressings are applied while in which patients are accommodated for the duration
anaesthesia is maintained. of their stay in a hospital, or in any other medical
NOTE — Such a room belongs to the operating room group establishment.
and is usually spatially connected to it.
3.2 Zones of Risk (see also Annex A).
3.1.18 Operating Preparation Room — Room in which
3.2.1 Flammable Anaesthetic Atmosphere — Mixture
of a flammable anaesthetic vapour and/or a vapour of
1)
With or without additives. a flammable disinfection or cleaning agent with air in
PART 3 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS IN NON-INDUSTRIAL BUILDINGS 225
SP 30 : 2011

such a concentration that ignition may occur under The following hazard currents are recognized:
specified conditions.
a) Total hazard current — Hazard current of an
3.2.2 Flammable Anaesthetic Mixture — Mixture of a isolated system with all supplied equipment,
flammable anaesthetic vapour with oxygen or with including the line isolation monitor,
nitrous oxide in such a concentration that ignition may connected.
occur under specified conditions. b) Fault hazard current — Hazard current of an
isolated system with all supplied equipment,
3.2.3 Zone G — Volume in a medically used room in
except the line isolation monitor, connected.
which continuously or temporarily small quantities of
flammable anaesthetic mixtures may be produced, guided c) Monitor hazard current — Hazard current of
or used including the surroundings of a completely or the line isolation monitor.
partly enclosed equipment or equipment part up to a NOTE — This current is expressed in milliamperes
distance of 5 cm from parts of the equipment enclosure (mA).
where leakage may occur because such parts are: 3.3.5 Insulation Impedance Monitoring Device — A
a) unprotected and liable to be broken, device measuring the ac impedance at mains frequency
from either of the conductors of an isolated circuit to
c) subject to a high rate of deterioration, or
earth and predicting the hazard current that will flow
c) liable to inadvertent disconnection. when an earth fault occurs and providing an alarm when
Where the leakage occurs into another enclosure which a preset value of that current is exceeded.
is not sufficiently (naturally or forcedly) ventilated and 3.3.6 Insulation Monitoring Device — Instrument
enrichment of the leaking mixture may occur, such an indicating the occurrence of an insulation fault from a
enclosure and possibly the surroundings of it (subject live part of an isolated electrical supply system to the
to possible leakage) up to a distance of 5 cm from said protective conductor of the installation concerned.
enclosure or part of it is regarded as a Zone G.
3.3.7 Insulation, Resistance Monitoring Device —
3.2.4 Zone M — Volume in a medically used room in Instrument measuring the ohmic resistance between
which small quantities of flammable anaesthetic the monitored isolated circuit and earth providing an
atmospheres of flammable anaesthetics with air may alarm when the value of this resistance becomes less
occur. A Zone M may be caused by leakage of a than a given limit.
flammable anaesthetic mixture from a Zone G or by
3.3.8 Medical Isolating Transformer — Electrical
the application of flammable disinfection or cleaning
equipment used in medical practice intended to supply
agents. Where a Zone M is caused by leakage, it
isolated power to medical electrical equipment in order
comprises the space surrounding the leakage area of a
to minimize the likelihood of discontinuity of supply
Zone G up to a distance of 25 cm from the leakage
in case of a failure to earth in the isolated power source
point.
or in equipment connected to it.
3.3 Special Terms 3.3.9 Medical Safety Extra-Low Voltage (MSELV) —
3.3.1 Equipotential Bonding — Electrical connection Voltage not exceeding a nominal value of 25 V ac or
intended to bring exposed conductive parts or up to and including 60 V dc or peak value at rated
extraneous conductive parts to the same or supply voltage on the transformer or converter between
approximately the same potential. conductors is an earth-free circuit isolated from the
supply mains by a medical safety extra-low voltage
3.3.2 Essential Circuit — Circuit for supply of transformer or by a converter with separate windings.
equipment which is kept in operation during power
3.3.10 Operating Residual Current — Value of a
failure.
residual current causing a protective device to operate
NOTE — Provisions for supply of such circuit separately from under specified conditions.
the remainder of the electrical installation are present.
3.3.11 Patient Environment — Any area up to 1.5 m
3.3.3 Generator Set — Self-contained energy convertor
distance from the intended location of the patient in
including all essential components to supply electrical
which intentional or unintentional contact between
power (for example, engine driven generator).
patient and equipment or some other person touching
3.3.4 Hazard Current — Total current for a given set the equipment can occur (see Annex B).
of connections in an isolated power system that would
3.3.12 Touch Voltage — Voltage appearing, during an
flow through a low impedance if it were connected
insulation fault, between simultaneously accessible
between either — isolated conductor and earth.
parts.

226 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

4 CLASSIFICATION 5.2 Utilization

4.1 The electrical installations covered in this Section The following aspects of utilization shall apply:
are those in buildings intended for the following purposes:
a) Hospitals and sanatoria — This includes any Utilization Characteristics Remarks
building or group of buildings, which is used (1) (2) (3)
for housing treating persons suffering from Capability of Children in Applies to
physical limitations because of health, age, persons locations child-care homes,
injury or disease. This also includes intended for orphanages, etc.
infirmaries, sanatoria and nursing homes. their occupation
b) Custodial institutions — This includes any Handicapped Applies to
building or group of buildings which is used hospitals in
for the custody and care of persons, such as general, sanatoria,
children (excluding schools), convalescents nursing homes,
and the aged, for example, home for the aged etc, where the
and infirm, convalescent homes, orphanages, occupants are not
mental hospitals, etc. in command of all
their physical and
5 GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS OF intellectual
MEDICAL ESTABLISHMENTS abilities
5.0 General guidelines on the assessment of Persons Applies to areas
characteristics of installations in buildings are given adequately such as building
in Part 1/Section 8, of this Code. For the purpose of advised or substations,
installations falling under the scope of this Section, supervised by operations and
the characteristics given below apply. skilled persons maintenance staff
Contact of Persons do not in
5.1 Environment persons with usual conditions
The following environmental factors shall apply to earth potential make contact
hospitals: with extraneous
conductive parts
Environment Characteristics Remarks or stand on
(1) (2) (3) conducting
surfaces
Presence of Probability of Conditions of Difficult Applies in general
water presence of
evacuation conditions of to hospitals and
water is
negligible during evacuation similar buildings,
emergency irrespective of
Presence of The quantity or —
foreign solid nature of dust or density of
bodies foreign solid occupation
bodies is not Nature of Fire or risk Many locations in
significant process fire or hospital buildings
Presence of The quantity and Locations where risk or stored in general would
corrosive or nature of some chemical materials fall under
polluting corrosive or products are category BE 1 of
substances polluting handled (for no significant fire
substances is not example, or explosion risk,
significant laboratories in specific locations
hospitals) will be like, operation
categorized as in theatre, casualty
Part 1/Section 8
medicine store,
Mechanical Impact and — X-Ray block fall
stresses vibration of low
under BE 2 and
severity
BE 3
Seismic effect — Depends on the
(see Part 1/Section
and lighting location of the
building 8 of this Code)

PART 3 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS IN NON-INDUSTRIAL BUILDINGS 227

SP 30 : 2011

6 SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS In its completed form the equipotential

bonding network may consist partly of fixed
6.0 General
and permanently installed bonding and partly
6.0.1 In the context of this Section ‘installation’ means of a number of separate bondings which are
any combination of interconnected electrical made when the equipment is set up near the
equipment within a given space or location intended patient. The necessary terminals for these
to supply power to electrical equipment used in medical bonding connections should be present on
practice. equipment and in the installation.
6.0.2 As such, some parts of the installation may be e) Restriction of the duration of transient voltage
present in the patient’s environment, where potential difference by the application of residual
differences, that could lead to excessive currents current operated protective devices (earth
through the patient, must be avoided. For this purpose leakage circuit-breakers).
a combination of earthing of equipment and potential f) Continuity of power supply to certain
equalization in the installation seems to provide the equipment in the case of a first insulation fault
best solution. A disadvantage of such a system is that to earth and restriction of transient voltage
in the case of an insulation fault in circuits directly differences by application of isolating
connected to supply mains, the fault current may cause transformers.
a considerable voltage drop over the protective earth g) Monitoring of a first insulation fault to earth
conductor of the relevant circuit. Since a reduction of in an IT-system (the secondary side of an
such a voltage drop by the application of increased isolating transformer) with sufficiently high
cross-sectional areas of protective conductors is usually impedance to earth.
impractical, available solutions are the reduction of the h) Prevention of ignitions and fire in rooms
duration of fault currents to earth by special devices or where flammable anesthetics or flammable
the application of a power supply which is isolated cleaning or disinfection agents are used by
from earth. ventilation, anti-static precautions and careful
6.0.3 Generally a power supply system including a layout of the installation.
separated protective conductor is required (TN-S- j) Safety supply system for major parts of the
system). hospital, usually a diesel-powered generator.
Recommendations for essential circuits to be
In addition the following provisions may be required,
connected to it.
depending upon the nature of the examinations or
treatments performed: k) Special safety supply system for critical
equipment as life-supporting equipment and
a) Additional requirements concerning operating room lamps.
protective conductors and protective devices
The power supply is taken over by these
to restrict continuous voltage differences.
devices in a short time. The device may
b) Restriction of voltage differences by consist of rechargeable batteries possibly
supplementary equipotential bonding. During combined with converters or special
the application of equipment with direct contact generating sets.
to the patient, as least a potential equalized zone
m) Suppression of electromagnetic interference
around the patient shall be provided with a
achieved by the layout of the building and wiring
patient centre bonding bar to which the
and provision of screening arrangements.
protective and functional earth conductors of
the equipment are connected. All accessible Limits for magnetic fields of mains frequency
extraneous conductive parts in the zone shall are necessary for a number of sensitive
be connected to this potential equalization bar. measurements.
c) Restriction of the potential equalization zone
to the zone around one patient, meaning 6.1 Safety Provisions
practically around one operation table or 6.1.1 Safety measures are divided into a number of
around one bed in an intensive care room. provisions as given in Table 1.
d) If more than one patient is present in an area,
6.1.2 Provision P0 shall be applicable to all buildings
connection of the various potential
containing medically used rooms. Provision P1 shall
equalization centres to a central potential
be applicable for all medically used rooms.
equalization busbar, which should preferably
be connected to the protective earth system Other requirements of this Section, need not be
of the power supply for the given area. complied with if:

228 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

Table 1 Safety Provisions

(Clause 6.1.1)

Sl Provisions Principal Requirements Installation Measures

No.
(1) (2) (3) (4)

i) P0 Duration of touch voltages restricted to a safe limit TN-S, TT or IT system

ii) P1 As P0 but additionally: Touch voltages in patient Additional to P0: Supply system with additional
environment restricted to a safe limit requirements for protective earthing, etc.
iii) P2 As P1 but additionally: Resistance between extraneous Additional to P1: Supplementary equipotential
conductive parts and the protective conductor but bar of bonding
the room not exceeding 0.1Ù.
iv) P3 As P1 or P2 but additionally: Potential difference As P1 or P2: Measurement necessary, corrective
between exposed conductive parts, extraneous action possibly necessary
conductive parts and the protective conductor bus bar
not exceeding 10 mV in normal condition (see Note )
v) P4 As P1 or P2. Additional protection against electric shock Additional to P1 or P2: Residual current operated
by limitation of disconnecting time protective device
vi) P5 Continuity of the mains supply maintained in case of a Additional to P1, P2 or P3: Isolated supply system
first insulation fault to earth and currents to earth with isolation monitoring
restricted
vii) P6 Reduction of fault currents and touch voltages in case Additional P1 or P2: Medical isolating transformer
of a fault in the basic insulation supplying one individually piece of equipment
viii) P7 Prevention of dangerous touch voltages in normal Additional to P1 or P2: Supply with medical
condition and in single fault condition (see Note ) safety, extra low voltage
ix) GE No interruption of the power supply of the essential Safety supply system
circuits of the hospital for more than 15 s
x) E1 No interruption of the power supply of life-supporting Special safety supply system
equipment for more than 15 s
xi) E2 No interruption of the power supply of the operating Special safety supply system for operating lamp
lamp for more than 0.5 s
xii) A Prevention of explosions, fire and electrostatic charges Measures concerning explosion and fire hazards
xiii) I No exercise interference from electric and magnetic Layout of building and installation, screening
fields
NOTE — Normal condition means without any fault in the installation.

a) a room is not intended for the use of medical architect, building contractor and the electrical engineer
electrical equipment, or or the various aspects of installation design. The
b) patients do not come intentionally in contact necessary special features of installations shall be
with medical electrical equipment during ascertained beforehand with reference to Table 2.
diagnosis or treatment, or 7.1 Circuit Installation Measures for Safety
c) only medical electrical equipment is used which Provisions — See Table 1, col 3.
is internally powered or of protection Class II.
7.1.1 Provision P0 : General
The rooms mentioned under (a), (b) and (c) may be
massage rooms, general wards, doctor’s examining 7.1.1.1 All buildings in the hospital area which contain
room (office, consulting room), where medical medically used rooms shall have a TN-S, TT or IT
electrical equipment is not used. power system. The conventional touch voltage limit
(UL) is fixed at 50 V ac.
6.1.3 Guidance on the application of the provisions
NOTE — The use of TN-C-S system (in which the PEN-
are given in Table 2. conductor may carry current in normal condition) can cause
safety hazards for the patients and interfere with the function
6.1.4 A typical example of an installation in a hospital
of medical electrical equipment, data processing equipment,
is given in Annex C. signal transmission lines, etc.

7 SUPPLY CHARACTERISTICS AND 7.1.2 Provision P1: Medical TN-S System

PARAMETERS
7.1.2.1 The conventional touch voltage limit (UL) is
7.0 Exchange of Information fixed at 25 V ac.

7.0.1 Proper coordination shall be ensured between the 7.1.2.2 Protective conductors inside a medically used

PART 3 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS IN NON-INDUSTRIAL BUILDINGS 229

SP 30 : 2011

Table 2 Examples of Application of Safety Provisions

(Clause 6.1.3)

Sl Medically Used Room Protective Measures Safety Supply Explosions Measures

No. System and Fire Against
EM Fields
P0/P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6 P7 GE E1 E2 A I
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12) (13) (14)
i) Message room M O O X
ii) Operating wash room M X O X
iii) Ward general M O O X
iv) Delivery room M X X O O X O X O O
v) ECG, EEG, EMG room M X X O X X
vi) Endoscopic room M X X O X O
vii) Examination or treatment room M O X O O X O
viii) Labour room M X X O O X O
ix) Operating sterilization room M O X O X
x) Urology room (not being an M X X O X O
operating theatre)
xi) Radiological diagnostic and M X X O X
therapy room, other than
mentioned under Sl No. (xx) and
(xxiv)
xii) Hydrotherapy room M X X O O X
xiii) Physiotherapy room M X X O O X
xiv) Anaesthetic room M X X X1 X O X X X O O
xv) Operating theatre M X X X1 X O X X X X X
xvi) Operating preparation room M X X X1 X O X X X X X
xvii) Operating plaster room M X X1 X O X X X X X
xviii) Operating recovery room M X X X1 X O X X X X X
xix) Outpatient operating theatre M X X1 X O X X X X X
xx) Heart catheterization room M X X X1 X O X X X X
xxi) Intensive care room M X O X1 X O X X X X
xxii) Intensive examination room M X O X1 X O X O O X
xxiii) Intensive monitoring room M X O X1 X O X X X X
xiv) Angiographic examination room M X O X1 X O X O O O
xxv) Hemodialysis room M X X X1 X X
xxvi) Central monitoring room (see M X O X1 X O X O
Note)

NOTE — Only if such a room is part of a medical room group and therefore installed in the same way as an intensive monitoring room.
Central monitoring room having no conductive connection to the medically used room (for example, by use of isolating coupling
devices for signal transmission) may be installed as non-medically used room (provision P0 only).
Explanation: M = Mandatory measure.
X = Recommended measure.
X1 = As X, but only for equipment described in 7.1.6.7.
O = Additional measure, may be considered desirable.

room shall be insulated: their insulation shall be entrance. Connections shall be made to the following
coloured green-yellow (see Part 1/Section 4 of this parts by bonding conductors:
Code).
a) lightning-conductor;
7.1.2.3 Exposed conductive parts of equipment being b) earthing systems of the electric power
part of the electrical installation used in the same room distribution system;
shall be connected to a common protective conductor. c) the central heating system;
7.1.2.4 A main equipotential bonding with a main d) the conductive water supply line;
earthing bar shall be provided near the main service e) the conductive parts of the waste water line;

230 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

f) the conductive parts of the gas supply; and The values given in Table 3 are valid only if the
g) the structural metal framework of the building, protective conductor is made of the same metal as the
if applicable. phase conductors. If this is not so, the cross-sectional
area of the protective conductor is to be determined in
Main equipotential bonding conductors shall have a manner which produces a conductance equivalent to
cross-sectional areas not less than half the cross- that which results from the application of Table 3.
sectional area of the largest protective conductor of
the installation, subject to a minimum of 6 mm2. The The cross-sectional area of every protective conductor
cross-sectional area need not, however, exceed 25 mm2, which does not form part of the supply cable or cable
if the bonding conductor is of copper or a cross- enclosure shall be, in any case, not less than:
sectional area affording equivalent current-carrying a) 2.5 mm2, if mechanical protection is provided,
capacity in other metals. and
7.1.2.5 Each medically used room or room group shall b) 4 mm 2, if mechanical protection is not
have its own protective conductor bus bar, which should provided.
have adequate mechanical and electrical properties and 7.1.2.8 It may be necessary to run the protective
resistance against corrosion. conductor separate from the phase conductors, in order
This bus bar may be located in the relevant power to avoid measuring problems when recording
distribution box. The leads connected to terminals of bioelectric potentials.
such a protective conductor bar shall be identified and
7.1.3 Provision P2: Supplementary Equipotential
shall be similarly designated on drawings of the
Bonding
installation system.
7.1.3.1 In order to minimize the touch voltage, all
7.1.2.6 The impedance (Z) between the protective
extraneous conductive parts shall be connected to the
conductor bar and each connected protective conductor
system of protective conductors.
contact in wall sockets or terminals should not exceed
0.2 Ω, if the rated current of the overcurrent protective An equipotential conductor bar shall be provided. It
device is 16 A or less. In case of a rated current should be located near the protective conductor bar
exceeding 16 A the impedance should be calculated (see also 7.1.2.5). A combined protective conductor
using the formula: and equipotential bonding bar may be used, if all
conductors are clearly marked according to 7.1.2.5
25
Z= Ω in all cases Z shall not exceed 0.2 Ω. and 7.1.3.3 (e).
6.I r
where 7.1.3.2 Connections shall be provided from the
equipotential bonding bar to extraneous conductive
Ir = rated current of overcurrent protective parts, such as pipes for fresh water, heating, gases,
device in amperes (A). vacuum and other parts with a conductive surface area
NOTE — The measurement of the protective conductor larger than 0.02 m2 or a linear dimension exceeding
impedance should be performed with an ac current not less
than 10 A and not exceeding 25 A from a source of current
20 cm, or smaller parts that may be grasped by hand.
with a no-load voltage not exceeding 6 V, for a period of at Additionally the following requirements supply:
least 5 s.
a) Such connections need not be made to:
7.1.2.7 The cross-sectional area of the protective
conductor shall be not less than the appropriate value 1) Extraneous conductive parts inside of
shown in Table 3. walls (for example structural metal frame
work of buildings) having no direct
Table 3 Cross-sectional Area of Conductors
connection to any accessible conductive
Sl Cross-sectional Area of Minimum Cross-sectional part inside the room, and
No. Phase Conductor, S, Area of the Corresponding 2) conductive parts in a non-conductive
mm2 Protective Conductor, PE,
mm2 enclosure.
(1) (2) (3) b) In locations where the position of the patient
i) S ≤ 16 S can be predetermined this provision may be
ii) 16 < S ≤ 35 16 restricted to extraneous conductive parts
iii) S > 35 S/2 within the patient environment (see
NOTE — If the application of this table produces non- Annex B)
standard sizes, conductors having the nearest standard cross- c) In operating theatres, intensive care rooms,
sectional area are to be used.
heart catheterization rooms and rooms

PART 3 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS IN NON-INDUSTRIAL BUILDINGS 231

SP 30 : 2011

intended for the recording of bioelectrical Where the measuring device has an impedance and a
action potentials all parts should be connected frequency characteristics as given in Annex D, the
to the equipotential bonding bar via direct and current may also be indicated as a continuous voltage
separate conductors. with a limit of 10 mV between the parts mentioned
above.
7.1.3.3 The following requirements shall be fulfilled:
a) During the test it is assumed that fixed and
a) The impedance between extraneous
permanently installed medical electrical
conductive parts and the equipotential
equipment is operating.
bonding bar shall not exceed 0.1.
b) ‘Normal conditions’ means ‘without any fault
NOTE — The measurement of this impedance should in the installation and in the medical electrical
be performed with a current not less than 10 A and not
exceeding 25 A during not less than 5 s from a current equipment’.
source with a no-load potential not-exceeding 6 V ac.
Compliance with this requirement may be achieved
b) All equipotential bonding conductors shall be through one or more of the following methods:
insulated, the insulation being coloured green/
a) Extraneous conductive parts may be:
yellow.
NOTE — Insulation of the equipotential bonding
1) connected to the equipotential bonding
conductors is necessary, to avoid loops by contact and bar by a conductor of a large cross-
to avoid picking up of stray currents. sectional area in order to reduce the
voltage drop across such a conductor,
c) Equipotential conductors between
permanently installed extraneous conductive 2) insulated so that it is not possible to touch
parts and the equipotential bonding bar shall them unintentionally, and
have a cross-sectional area of not less than 3) provided with isolating joints at those
4 mm2 copper or copper equivalent. places where they enter and leave the
d) The equipotential bonding bar, if any, should room.
have adequate mechanical and electrical b) Exposed conductive parts of permanently
properties, and resistance against corrosion. installed equipment may be isolated from the
e) The conductors connected to the equipotential conductive building construction.
bonding bar shall be marked and shall be 7.1.5 Provision P4: Application of Residual-Current
similarly designated on drawings of the Protective Devices
installation system.
7.1.5.1 The use of a residual-current protective device
f) A separate protective conductor bar and an
is not recognized as a sole means of protection and
equipotential bonding bar in a medically used
does not obviate the need to apply the provisions P1
room or in a room group shall be inter-
and P2.
connected with a conductor having a cross-
sectional area of not less than 16 mm2 copper 7.1.5.2 Each room or each room group shall be
or its equivalent (see also 7.1.3.1). provided with at least one residual-current protective
g) An adequate number of equipotential bonding device.
terminals other than those for protective 7.1.5.3 A residual-current protective device shall have
conductor contacts or pins of socket outlets a standard rated operating residual-current I Δ ≤ 30 mA.
should be provided in each room for the
connection of an additional protective 7.1.5.4 A medical isolating transformer and the circuits
conductor of equipment or for reasons of supplied from it shall not be protected by a residual-
functional earthing of equipment. current protective device.
7.1.4 Provision P3: Restriction of Touch Voltage in 7.1.5.5 Electrical equipment such as general lighting
Rooms Equipped for Direct Cardiac Application luminaries, installed more than 2.5 m above floor level
need not be protected by a residual-current protective
7.1.4.1 The continuous current through a resistance of device.
1 000 connected between the equipotential bonding bar
and any exposed conductive part as well as any 7.1.5.6 Fixed and permanently installed electromedical
extraneous conductive part in the patient environment equipment with a power consumption requiring an
shall not exceed 10 µA in normal condition for overcurrent protective device of more than 63 A rated
frequencies from dc to 1 kHz. value may be connected to the supply mains by use of
a residual-current protective device with I Δ ≤ 300 mA.
For a description of patient environment, see Annex B.

232 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

7.1.6 Provision P5: Medical IT-System 7.1.6.3 Overcurrent protective devices shall be easily
accessible and shall be marked to indicate the protected
7.1.6.0 The use of a medical IT-system for the supply
circuit.
of medically used rooms for example operating
theatres, may be desirable for different reasons: 7.1.6.4 An insulation monitoring device shall be
provided to indicate a fault of the insulation to earth of
a) A medical IT-system increases the reliability
a live part of the medical IT-system.
of power supply in areas where an interruption
of power supply may cause a hazard to patient 7.1.6.5 Fixed and permanently installed equipment
or user; with a rated power input of more than 5 kVA and all
b) A medical IT-system reduces an earth fault X-ray equipment (even with a rated power input of
current to a low value and thus also reduces less than 5 kVA) shall be protected by provision P4.
the touch voltage across a protective Electrical equipment such as general lighting, more
conductor through which this earth fault than 2.5 m above floor level, may be connected directly
current may flow; to the supply mains.
c) A medical IT-system reduces leakage currents 7.1.6.6 General requirements for insulation monitoring
of equipment to a low value, where the devices
medical IT-system is approximately
symmetrical to earth; A separate insulation resistance or impedance
monitoring device shall be provided for each secondary
It is necessary to keep the impedance to earth
system. It shall comply with the requirements given
of the medical IT-system as high as possible.
below:
This may be achieved by:
a) It shall not be possible to render such a device
1) restriction of the physical dimensions of
inoperative by a switch. It shall indicate
the medical isolating transformer,
visibly and audibly if the resistance or
2) restriction of the system supplied by this impedance of the insulation falls below the
transformer. value given in 7.1.6.7 and 7.1.6.8.
3) restriction of the number of medical The arrangement may be provided with a stop
electrical equipment connected to such a button for the audible indication only.
system, and
b) A test button shall be provided to enable
4) high internal impedance to earth of the checking the response of the monitor to a fault
insulation monitoring device connected condition as described in 7.1.6.4.
to such a circuit.
c) The visible indication mentioned in (a) of the
If the primary reason for the use of medical IT-system insulation monitoring device shall be visible
is the reliability of the power supply, it is not possible in the monitored room or room group.
to define for such a system a hazard current and an
d) The insulation monitoring device should be
insulation resistance monitoring device should be used.
connected symmetrically to the secondary
If on the other hand the restriction of leakage current circuit of the transformer.
of equipment is the main reason for the use of the
7.1.6.7 Insulation resistance monitoring device
medical IT-system, an insulation impedance
monitoring device should be used. The ac resistance of an insulation resistance monitoring
device shall be at least 100 k. The measuring voltage
7.1.6.1 For each room or each room group at least one
of the monitoring device shall exceed 25 V dc, and the
fixed and permanently installed medical isolating
measuring current (in case of a short circuit of an
transformer shall be provided.
external conductor to earth) shall not exceed 1 mA.
7.1.6.2 A medical isolating transformer shall be The alarm shall operate if the resistance between the
protected against short circuit and overload. monitored isolated circuit and earth is 50 k or less,
setting to a higher value is recommended.
In case of a short circuit or a double earth fault in parts
of opposite polarity of the medical IT-system the 7.1.6.8 Insulation impedance monitoring device
defective system shall be disconnected by the relevant
An insulation impedance monitoring device shall give
overcurrent protective device.
readings calibrated in total hazard current with the
If more than one item of equipment can be connected value of 2 mA near the centre of the meter scale.
to the same secondary winding of the transformer, at
The device shall not fail to alarm for total hazard
least two separately protected circuits should be
currents in excess of 2 mA. In no case, however, shall
provided for reasons of continuity of supply.

PART 3 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS IN NON-INDUSTRIAL BUILDINGS 233

SP 30 : 2011

the alarm be activated until the fault hazard current a) earth, or

exceeds 0.7 mA. b) protective conductors or exposed conductive
During the checking of the response of the monitor to parts of another system, or
a fault condition the impedance between the medical c) extraneous conductive parts except that,
IT-system and earth shall not decrease. where electrical equipment is inherently
required to be connected to extraneous
NOTE — The values of 2 mA or 0.7 mA are based on practical
experience with 110 to 120 V power supplies. For a 220-240 V
conductive parts, it is ensured that those parts
power supply it may be necessary to increase these values to cannot attain a voltage exceeding medical
4 mA and 1.4 mA because of the higher leakage current safety extra-low voltage.
of equipment.
7.1.8.6 Live parts of circuits at medical safety extra-
7.1.7 Provision P6 : Medical Individual Electrical low voltage shall be electrically separated from other
Separation circuits. Arrangements shall ensure electrical
7.1.7.0 Individual electrical separation of a circuit is separation not less than required between the input and
intended to prevent shock currents through contact with output of a medical safety extra-low voltage
exposed conductive parts which may be energized by transformer.
a fault in the basic insulation. In particular, electrical separation not less than that
7.1.7.1 The source of supply shall be a medical isolating provided between the input and output windings of a
transformer. medical safety extra-low voltage transformer shall be
provided between the live parts of electrical equipment
7.1.7.2 Only one item of equipment shall be connected such as relays, conductors, auxiliary switches and any
to one source of supply. part of a circuit with a higher voltage.
7.1.7.3 The voltage of the secondary circuit shall not 7.1.8.7 Medical safety extra-low voltage circuit
exceed 250 V. conductors shall either be physically separated from
those of any other circuit or where this is impracticable,
7.1.7.4 Live parts of the separated circuit shall not be
one of the following arrangements is required:
connected at any point to any other circuit or to earth.
a) Medical safety extra-low voltage circuit
7.1.7.5 To avoid the risk of a fault to earth, particular
conductors shall be enclosed in a non-metallic
attention shall be paid to the insulation of such circuits
sheath additional to their basic insulation.
from earth, especially for flexible cables and cords.
b) Conductors of circuits at different voltages
7.1.7.6 Flexible cables and cords shall be visible shall be separated by an earthed metallic
throughout any part of their length where they are liable screen or an earthed metallic sheath.
to mechanical damage. c) Where circuits at different voltages are
7.1.7.7 All conductors shall be physically separated contained in a multi-conductor cable or
from those of other circuits. other grouping of conductors, medical
safety extra-low voltage circuits shall be
7.1.8 Provision P7: Medical Safely Extra-Low Voltage insulated, individually or collectively, for
(MSELV) the highest voltage present.
7.1.8.1 Medical safety extra-low voltage shall not NOTE — In the above arrangements, basic-insulation
exceed 25 V ac or 60 V dc peak value. of any conductor should comply only with the
requirements for the voltage of the circuit of which it
7.1.8.2 A supply transformer for medical safety extra- is a part.
low voltage shall comply with relevant Indian 7.1.8.8 Plugs and socket-outlets shall comply with the
Standards. following requirements:
7.1.8.3 A source of medical safety extra-low voltage a) Supply systems of different voltages or
other than a transformer shall have at least the same different kinds or nature shall not have
separation and insulation to other circuits and earth as interchangeable plugs and sockets, and
required for the transformer under 7.1.8.2.
b) Socket-outlets shall not have a protective
7.1.8.4 Live pans at medical safety extra-low voltage conductor contact.
shall not be connected to live parts or protective
conductors forming part of other circuits or to earth. 7.2 Wiring

7.1.8.5 Exposed conductive parts shall not intentionally 7.2.1 The general design of wiring shall conform to
be connected to: Part 1/Section 9 of this Code.

234 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

7.2.2 All panel boards and switchboards shall Table 4 Power Requirement
preferably be of dead front type, enclosed in metal (Clause 7.5.1)
cabinet. Where locked cabinets are provided, all locks
should be keyed alike. Switchboard and panel boards Sl No. Part of Electrical Proportion of Diversity
Installation Total Power Factor
shall be installed in non-hazardous locations. Requirement
Percent
7.2.3 Circuit-breakers are preferred to switchfuse units (1) (2) (3) (4)
in power and lighting feeders.
i) Lighting 25 0.9
7.2.4 Inside the wards only silent type wall mounted ii) Air-conditioning 15 1.0
switches should be used to reduce noise. The lighting iii) Kitchen 10 0.6
iv) Sterilizer 10 0.6
points shall be so grouped so that minimum lighting v) Laundry 5 0.6
may be switched on during night time. vi) Lifts 15 1.0
vii) Electromedical 20 0.6
7.2.5 Separate circuits shall be provided for X-ray, installations and
electrotherapy, diathermy, electrocardiograph, etc. other loads
Advice of equipment manufacturers shall also be
sought in their installation. 7.6 System Protection
7.2.6 In corridors and spaces accessible to public 7.6.0 General
provisions shall be made for lighted signs.
The general rules for protection for safety laid down
7.2.7 Special convenience outlets in corridors spaced in Part 1 of this Code shall apply. Reference should
about 12 m apart are desirable for portable treatment be made to SP 7 for guidelines for fire-protection of
equipment and cleaning machines. buildings. The additional rules given below shall
7.3 Feeders apply.
The general provisions laid down in Part 1/Section 9 7.6.1 The type of buildings covered in this Section fall
of this Code shall apply. under Group C1 (hospitals and sanatoria), C2 (custodial
institution), and C3 (panel institutions — for mental
7.4 Service Lines hospitals, and similar buildings) from the fire-safety
7.4.1 The general provisions laid down in IS 8061 shall classification point of view.
apply. 7.6.2 In hospitals and similar buildings, besides fire-
7.4.2 The main supply conductors shall preferably be fighting equipment manually operated electrical fire
brought into the building underground to reduce the alarm system and automatic fire-alarm system shall
possibility of interruption of power supply. be provided. Restricted paging system arrangement
with sound alarm/indicators in the duty rooms/nurses
7.5 Building Substation rooms shall be made.
7.5.0 General 7.6.3 For guidelines on selection of fire detectors, see
SP 7. The wiring for fire-fighting systems shall be
The design of power supply for hospital and similar segregated from other wiring to reduce risk of damage
buildings shall take into account the concentration of to them in the case of fire. For high-rise buildings, the
power demand for the various electrical loads. If the fire-fighting pump motors are generally large and they
load demand is high requiring supply at high voltage, draw heavy current. Sufficient care shall be taken to
accommodation of substation equipment will be ensure that the supply to such motors is maintained
required. Emergency and standby power-supply needs properly.
of hospital buildings shall also be taken into account
in designing the building substation. 7.7 Fire-protection
7.5.1 While calculating the power requirement, the Where electrical equipment contains pipes or tubes of
diversity factor for different electrical appliances and combustion supporting gases, such as oxygen or nitrous
installations shall be considered. For guidance, Table 4 oxide, the following additional requirements apply:
gives reference values of power requirement and a) Gas outlets shall be located at least 20 cm
diversity factor for the different parts in a hospital away from electrical components which, in
installation. normal use or in case of a fault, could generate
7.5.2 The location and layout of building sub-station sparks.
and emergency diesel generating set/s shall conform b) The gas-flow shall not be directed towards
to the general rules laid down in Part 2 of this Code. such electrical components.

PART 3 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS IN NON-INDUSTRIAL BUILDINGS 235

SP 30 : 2011

c) Electrical wiring shall only be allowed to be e) Mains plug connections, switches, power
run in a common enclosure, for example in a distribution boxes and similar devices, which
common conduit for channel, with tubes for may cause ignition shall be kept outside zones
combustion supporting gases, such as oxygen of risk.
or nitrous oxide, if in the relevant circuit the
product of the no-load voltage in volts (V) 8.2 Antistatic Floor
and the short-circuit current in amperes (A) 8.2.1 Antistatic floors shall be used in rooms where
does not exceed 10.
zones of risk occur.
d) If the requirements in (c) cannot be. fulfilled
gas-tight separation shall be provided between Where antistatic floors are used in conjunction with
the electrical wiring and the tubes for gases. non-antistatic floors marking should be provided,
The gas-tight separation shall be electrically which should be described in the application code.
conducting and shall be connected to the 8.2.2 The resistance of an antistatic floor shall not
protective earth busbar. exceed 25 MΩ at any time during the lifetime of the
e) Where electrical leads are close to a pipeline floor when measured according to IS 7689.
guiding ignitable gases or oxygen, a short-
NOTE — The fact that during the lifetime of the floor the
circuit of these leads or a short-circuit of one
resistance may changes should be taken into consideration. The
lead with a metal duct or pipeline shall not
resistance of terrazzo floors increases, while that of PVC floors
result in a temperature which may cause
decreases with time.
ignition.
8.2.3 If floors of low resistance (< 50 k) are used.
8 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS FOR Provision P4 and/or P5 shall be used to effectively limit
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS IN HOSPITALS the effects of fault currents.
8.1 Provision A: Explosion and Fire Protection
9 BUILDING SERVICES
8.1.1 Explosion Protection: General
9.1 Lighting
a) When the administration of flammable
anaesthetic atmospheres or flammable 9.1.1 The general rules laid down in Part 1/Section 11
anesthetics or flammable cleaning and/or of this Code shall apply. The choice of lamps, lighting
disinfection agents with air or oxygen and fittings and the general lighting design together with
nitrous oxide is intended, special measures to the power requirement shall be plane based on the
avoid ignitions and fire are necessary. These recommended values of illumination and glare index
measures include mainly the use of antistatic given in Table 5 (see also SP 72).
flooring. 9.2 Heating, Ventilation and Air-Conditioning
b) Effective ventilation and the application of a
suction system on anaesthesia equipment The provisions of Part 1/Section 11 of this Code shall
assists in reducing flammable concentrations apply. Provision shall be made to maintain positive
of flammable anaesthetic mixtures in the air pressure and induct increased quantity of fresh air
patient environment, the anaesthetists to avoid entry of gases from one room to another.
working-place and the operating table. The
9.3 Lifts
effectiveness of a ventilation, system may be
subjected to National Regulations. 9.3.1 The general rules laid down in Part 1/Section 11
c) Limits of zones of risk are given in Annex A. of this Code shall apply. However, the design of lifts
Zones of risk exist only when flammable in hospitals and similar buildings shall be made taking
anesthetics or flammable cleaning and/or into account the criteria given Table 5.
disinfection agents are used. 9.3.2 Dimensions
d) Requirements on construction, marking and
documentation of medical electrical The outline dimensions of hospitals lifts shall conform
equipment of category AP or APG are given to those laid down in Table 3 of IS 14665 (Part 1).
in IS 13450 (Part 1). 9.3.3 Occupant Load
Allocation of equipment of the categories AP
or AG to zones of risk in operating theatres For the types of buildings covered in this Section, the
or other anaesthetic rooms are under occupant load expressed as gross area in m2 per person,
consideration. shall be 15.

236 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

Table 5 Recommended Values of Illumination 9.3.5 Position

and Limiting Glare Index
It is convenient to position the hospital passenger lifts
(Clauses 9.1.1 and 9.3.1)
near the staircases. Hospital bed lifts shall be situated
Sl Buildings Illumination Limiting conveniently near the ward and operating theatre
No. Glare Index entrances. There shall be sufficient space near the
(1) (2) (3) (4) landing door for easy movement of stretcher/trolley.
i) Hospitals
a) Reception and waiting rooms 150 16
10 TESTING OF INSTALLATION
b) Wards 10.1 The various tests on the installation shall be carried
1)
1) General 100 13 out as laid down in Part 1/Section 13 of this Code.
2) Beds 150
10.2 The initial testing of the installation shall also
c) Operating theatres/Dental
surgeries
include:
1) General 300 10 a) Testing of the effectiveness of protective
2) Tables/chairs (Special — measures (provisions P0 to P1);
lighting)
b) Testing of the resistance of protective
d) Laboratories 300 19
conductors and of the equipotential bonding;
e) Radiology department 100 —
f) Casualty and outpatient 150 16
c) Testing of the insulation resistance between
department live conductors and earth in each separately
g) Stairs, corridors 100 — fused circuit;
h) Dispensaries 300 19 d) Testing of the resistance of antistatic floors;
ii) Doctor’s Surgeries e) Testing of the general safety supply system
a) Consulting rooms 150 — and
b) Corridors 70 — f) Testing of the special safety supply system.
c) Sight testing (acuity) wall 450 —
charts and near vision 11 STANDBY, SAFETY AND SPECIAL SAFETY
types
SUPPLY SYSTEM
iii) Laundries/Dry-cleaning Works
a) Receiving, sorting, washing, 200 25 11.1 Provision GE : Standby and Safety Supply
drying System
b) Dry-cleaning, bulk machine 200 25
work 11.1.1 Electrical systems for medical establishments
c) Ironing, pressing, mending, 300 25 shall comprise essential circuits capable of supplying
spotting, dispatch a limited amount of lighting and power service which
iv) Offices (see Part 3/Section 2 of this is considered essential for safety, life support and basic
Code) hospital operation during the time the normal electrical
v) Kitchens 2) 25
200 service is interrupted (see also Annex E).
1)
Care shall be taken to screen all bright light and areas from
view of patients in bed. 11.1.2 All medical establishments containing life-
2)
Special local lighting required over kitchen equipment. supporting equipment shall be provided with a safety
supply system.
9.3.4 Car Speed 11.1.3 Essential circuits shall provide facilities for
These shall be as follows: charging batteries of a special safety supply system.
11.1.4 Operation of a safety supply system shall not
Sl Type of Lift No. of Floors Car Speed impair the function of protective measures.
No. Served (m/sec)
(1) (2) (3) (4) 11.1.5 All parts of essential circuits shall be marked.
i) Hospital passenger 13-20 Above 1.5 11.1.6 An example of safety supply systems of a
lift 4-5 0.5 to 0.75 hospital is given in Annex F.
ii) Hospital bed lifts
11.1.7 A safety supply system shall be capable of
a) Short travel lifts in — 0.25
automatically taking over the load of essential circuits
small hospitals
in the event of a failure of the normal power supply.
b) Normal — 0.5
c) Long travel lifts in — 0.6-1.5 11.1.8 The taking-over procedure shall not start earlier
general hospitals than after a period of 2 s has elapsed during which the

PART 3 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS IN NON-INDUSTRIAL BUILDINGS 237

SP 30 : 2011

system voltage has dropped below 90 V of the nominal 11.2.3.3 Voltage deviations under normal conditions
value and shall be completed within 15 s after the shall be less than 10 percent for periods of time
starting of the taking-over procedure. exceeding 5s.
Return to normal power supply should be delayed. For 11.2.3.4 Frequency deviations shall be less than
diesel-generators the delay should be at least 30 min. 1 percent for periods of time exceeding 5 s.
11.1.9 To prevent simultaneous damage, the main 11.2.3.5 The special safety supply system source shall
feeders for the safety supply system shall be segregated be located outside the medically used rooms, if possible
from the normal system wherever possible. close to the relevant distribution point, so that physical
damage to the cables connecting the source to the
11.2 Provisions E1 and E2: Special Safety Supply
distribution point is unlikely.
System
11.2.3.6 Operation of the special safety supply system
11.2.1 Provision E1: Special Safety Supply System,
shall be indicated by visual means in all rooms
Medium Break
concerned.
11.2.1.1 A special safety supply system shall NOTE — It is recommended to provide additionally a total
automatically take over the load within 15 s after a load indicator in each room connected to the same special safety
failure of the power supply at the medical establishment supply system.
containing life-supporting equipment. 11.2.3.7 Automatic means shall be provided to keep
11.2.1.2 It shall be possible to resume operation of batteries optimally charged.
equipment for maintaining important body functions,
11.2.3.8 The charging device shall be designed so that,
in particular breathing equipment, or equipment for
starting from the fully charged conditions, it is possible
resuscitation, within 15 s and to maintain operation
to discharge continuously during 3 h at nominal output,
for a period of 3 h subsequently, for example, via a
and subsequently to re-change during 6 h after which
battery with inverter or via a motor driven generator.
it shall be possible to discharge once more for 3 h under
11.2.1.3 Where the rating of the special safety supply the conditions mentioned above.
system is sufficient the circuits of a medical IT-system
11.2.3.9 It shall be possible to supply the charging
according to 7.1.6 may be connected to it.
circuit of a special safety supply system from the safety
11.2.1.4 Where not all socket outlets in a medically supply system, so that the special safety supply system
used room are connected to the special safety supply batteries can be charged even during a failure of the
system the connected socket outlets shall be marked normal power supply.
clearly as such.
12 MEASURES AGAINST INTERFERENCE
11.2.2 Provision E2: Special Safely Supply System, PROVISION I
Short Break
12.1 Measures Against ac Interference
11.2.2.1 A special safety supply system shall
automatically take over the load within 0.5 s after a 12.1.1 In rooms where measurements of bioelectric
failure of the power supply at the operating lamp. potentials are performed measures against interference
in the room and in the surrounding area should be
11.2.2.2 Operation of at least one operating lamp shall
affected, if such interference may cause incorrect
be resumed after a switchover time not exceeding 0.5 s
measurements. Such rooms are:
and operation shall be maintained for at least 3 h.
a) rooms intended for measurement of bio-
11.2.3 Common Recommendations for the Provisions
electric potentials (EEG, ECG, etc);
E1 and E2
b) intensive examination rooms;
11.2.3.1 The rated power of the source of a special c) intensive care and monitoring rooms;
safety supply system shall not be less than required by
d) catheterization rooms;
the connected functions. At least the loads which
require continuity of supply shall be connected to the e) angiographic examination rooms; and
special supply system. f) operating theatres.

11.2.3.2 Operation of a special safety supply system 12.2 Measures Against Interference Caused by
shall not impair the function of protective measures. Mains-Induced Electric Fields
For diesel-generators the requirements of 11.1.8 shall 12.2.1 The electrical wiring on both sides of or inside
apply. walls, floor and ceiling of the rooms concerned should

238 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

be screened by means of metal shielding of cables or 12.4 Measures Against Interference from Radio
by metal conduits for cables and wiring. Frequency Electromagnetic Fields
If such metal shielding is applied it should be connected 12.4.0 Powerful radio frequency fields may cause
to protective earth at one point only. interference in sensitive electromedical equipment.
12.2.2 Metal enclosures or pans of enclosures of fixed 12.4.1 Normally such fields exist only where short-wave
and permanently installed electrical equipment of diathermy or surgical diathermy equipment is used and
Class II and III (such as of lighting fittings) should be close to transmitting aerials used for such purposes as
connected to the equipotential bonding system. staff location and ambulance communications. The
simplest measure against such interference is to locate
12.2.3 Where adequate measures according to 11.1
equipment which causes it well away from areas where
cannot be applied and ECG and EEG monitoring is to
sensitive equipment is used. Additional measures are
be undertaken, it is recommended to shield the room
the inclusion of radio frequency rejection circuits in
or a part of the room against electric fields by installing
sensitive equipment and the use of short-wave diathermy
a room screening within the wall structure.
equipment with a low modulation factor.
12.3 Measures Against Interference Caused by If the measures described here are not sufficiently
Mains-Induced Magnetic Fields effective it may be necessary to use sensitive equipment
12.3.1 It is recommended to provide sufficient distance with a screened room.
between electrical components and equipment which NOTE — The construction of such a screened room should be
may, cause magnetic interference and the place for the entrusted to a specialist. An attenuation of 40 dB over the
examination of patients. In practice the following frequency range 150 kHz to 30 MHz is considered to be
adequate.
values of magnetic field strength have been found to
be sufficiently low to avoid magnetic interference: 12.5 Electric Heating Cables
7
a) 4 × 10 Tpp for ECG recording, and 12.5.0 The following requirement applies to electric
b) 2 × 107Tpp for EEG recording. heating cables embedded in or attached to surfaces in
NOTE — Ballasts incorporated in fluorescent lamp fittings
buildings. It does not apply to removable appliances
generate an alternating magnetic field; those on the ceiling of which may be mounted on the surface of walls.
the room immediately below the examination room are the ones
most likely to cause interference. In some cases it may be 12.5.1 Electric heating cables of any type should not
necessary to remove ballasts of a certain type from the lighting be used in rooms where bioelectric potentials are
fitting and to mount them at sufficient distance. recorded.
12.3.2 Sufficient distance should be provided when NOTE — Due to the construction of such heating cables it is
installing units with strong stray magnetic fields such very likely, that the electric and magnetic fields will interfere
as transformers and motors. This applies also to the with the recording of bioelectric potentials. Appropriate
measures according to 12.2 and 12.3 should be taken.
isolating transformer of provision P5. The distance
should be 3 m or more. 13 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS
12.3.3 The rooms listed in 12.1 should not have large
13.1 Call Systems
power cables passing through or adjacent to them.
Suggested minimum distances are: 13.1.0 Electrical call and signal system when provided
in hospitals should comply with the requirements given
Conductor Cross- Distance, Min
in 13.1.1 to 13.1.4.1 The following are the important
Sectional Area m
call and signal system:
10 to 70 3
a) Nurses call,
95 to 185 6
240 ≥9 b) Doctors’ paging, and
c) In-and-out register.
NOTES
1 Cables, either single phase or three phase, will have a NOTE — It is recommended that electrical call and signal
negligible external field if the load is correctly distributed system should be provided in all hospitals so that patients may
between phase or between phase and neutral but in practice receive prompt service and the doctors, nurses and attendants
faults between neutral and earth or incorrectly distributed loads may work more efficiently.
between lines and neutral, and leakage currents will cause
alternating magnetic fields in the vicinity of power cables.
13.1.1 Nurses’ Call System
2 The values apply only to twisted cables. When bar systems The nurses call system should be a wired electrical
or separated single cables are used, the distances may have to
system whereby patients may signal for a nurse from
be substantially larger.
the bed site. Two types of systems are recommended:

PART 3 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS IN NON-INDUSTRIAL BUILDINGS 239

SP 30 : 2011

a) A simple one-way signal system which con- sounded or the flasher type which indicates the doctors’
nects the bed side call stations with a signal numbers. The loudspeaker and other audible calls
at the nurses’ station, utility room and floor should not be used as they may disturb the patients
pantry of the nursing unit. It simultaneously and attendants. The flasher system consists of a
lights a dome light over the door of the room keyboard and flasher at the telephone switchboard. The
from which the call originated. The signal at telephone operator may set the board to flash as many
the nurses’ station may be in the form of an as three doctors’ numbers automatically in rotation.
annunciator with a buzzer or a single light The numbers appear on annunciators located in all
with a buzzer. Two or more lights in the ceiling sections of the corridors. The same number of
of the corridor at the nurses’ station to indicate numerals, at least three, should be used for each doctor
the direction from which the call came are so that a burnt out lamp may be located.
desirable for the latter arrangement.
13.1.2.1 These paging systems could be used for calling
b) A central control panel should be set up pre-
interns, administrators, heads of departments and their
ferably on the ground floor incorporating a
assistants and engineers. These flashers may also be
set of indicating panels according to the
used for other general calls such as ‘fire’ with a red ‘F’
number of wards. Each indicating panel
should have a number of small lamps and buzzer. The flasher call system has its shortcomings
according to the number of beds. At each bed as the individual may fail to see the numbers when
there could be 4 push buttons. First for flashed. For this reason the flasher system should be
‘Calling Nurses’, second for ‘Nurse Present’, supplemented with loudspeakers at points where
third for ‘Setting Combination’ and fourth for interns, heads of departments and doctors may
‘Call for Doctor’. When any patient presses congregate, that is, in doctors’ lounge, staff dining
the push button the indication is at the central room, laboratory and engineers’ office and such other
control room from where intimation to nurses areas where the calls may not disturb the patients.
can be sent. After reaching the bed site the 13.1.3 VHF Paging System
nurse presses the ‘Nurse Present’ button which
gives an indication to operator at the central This system consists of a low powered transmitting
control panel that the nurse is available near station from which calls are broadcast throughout the
the particular bed. After attending the patient, hospital to miniature receiving sets which the doctors
the nurse presses the resetting button which and others may carry in their pockets.
puts the whole equipment to the original 13.1.4 In-and-Out Register
condition. If the patient needs further help of
a doctor then the nurse again presses the fourth The doctors’ in-and-out register permits the doctor to
push button and the central control panel register ‘IN’ and ‘OUT’ with the minimum of effort
operator sends message to the doctor for that and delay. The register consists of a board, at one or
particular bed. more entrances, on which all staff doctor, upon entering
or leaving, operates a switch opposite his name which
13.1.1.1 For emergency call of nurse by the patient
indicates whether or not he is in the building. The
when he/she is inside a bath or water-closet, suitable
switch controls a light at or back of the name on all
pull cord switches shall be provided inside bath and
boards connected in the system.
water-closet. These switches when operating will give
an indication at the central control panel from where 13.1.4.1 Except in very small hospitals, it is
intimation to nurse can be sent. recommended to install register system with a board
at two or more entrances and at the telephone
13.1.1.2 Nurses call system may also be of the switchboard. Such a system should include a recall
intercommunicating type with a microphone and feature which consists of a flasher unit, having a motor
loudspeaker at the bed connected to the nurses’ station. driven interrupter. This flasher unit, controlled at the
The patient can signal for a nurse or speak to her and telephone switchboard, will actuate a flashing light at
receive an answer. For maximum benefit and service, the doctors’ name on all register boards which indicates
this system should include all the features described there is a massage for the doctors, and attracts the
in 13.1.1 for the one-way signal system in addition to attention of doctor upon entering or leaving the
the inter-communicating features. building. Call back systems are used for nurses’ and
13.1.2 Doctors Paging System interns’ bedrooms. With such system the nurses and
interns can be awakened, called for duty, or called to
This may consist of loudspeakers located throughout the telephone by push-buttons in the office which
the hospital, clinics on which doctors’ numbers can be operate buzzers in the rooms. The room called can

240 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

answer by pushing a button which registers on an height of 1.5 m from the floor as anaesthetic gases are
annunciator in the office. The main office buzzers may heavier than air and gravitate to the floor.
be connected through a selector switch so that serial
13.3 Clocks
rooms or sections may be called by one button.
Electric clock system when provided, should have
13.2 Telephones clocks at nurses’ stations, main lobby, telephone
13.2.0 A centralized EPABX System with adequate switchboard, kitchen, laundry, dining room and boiler
number of P&T lines shall be installed for internal and room, as well as in the operating and delivery rooms.
external communication. Interconnecting telephones The clocks should be of the recessed type, preferably
should be provided for each important department and with a narrow frame. Clocks in operating and delivery
at patients’ bed. These shall be interconnected to permit rooms should have sweep second hands. The general
internal communication without operator’s assistance. guidance provided in Part 1/Section 11 of this Code
Facility shall be provided for external communication shall apply.
with these departments through operator’s assistance.
13.4 Other Special Installations
Some of the most important departments shall have
direct access facility for external communication. At all The list of other special circuits in installations in
special and important beds, telephone jacks should be hospitals are given below:
installed so that a telephone may be plugged in any time.
a) Closed-circuit television in surgery depart-
13.2.1 In case of operation theatre and rooms where ment (for teaching purposes);
surgical operations and dressing is done, concealed b) Television sets in wards;
wiring should be provided to avoid risk of c) Short-wave, ultraviolet rays or sterile ray
contamination. In other places, any type of general lamps in ceilings of operating and delivery
wiring may be acceptable. rooms around the operating light, to reduce
13.2.2 The concealed wiring and switch-socket outlets the bacteria count; and
in the operation theatres shall be kept at a minimum d) Luminous signs.

PART 3 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS IN NON-INDUSTRIAL BUILDINGS 241

SP 30 : 2011

ANNEX A
(Clauses 3.2 and 8.1.1)
ZONES OF RISK IN THE OPERATING THEATRE WHEN USING FLAMMABLE ANAESTHETIC
MIXTURES OF ANAESTHETIC GASES AND CLEANING AGENTS

Legend Legend
1 = Ventilation system 6 = Foot switch
2 = Ceiling outlet with sockets for electric power gases 7 = Additional zone M due to use of flammable
(for example, oxygen), vacuum and exhaust disinfection and/or cleaning agents
ventilation system for medical electrical equipment 8 = Anaesthesia apparatus
3 = Operation lamp 9 = Exhaust system for anaesthesia gases
4 = Equipment 10 = Exhaust ventilation system
5 = Operating table 11 = Parts unprotected and likely to the broken

242 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

ANNEX B
[Clauses 3.3.11, 7.1.3.2(b) and 7.1.4]
PATIENT ENVIRONMENT

(1) Operation Table

(2) Medical Electrical Equipment.

PART 3 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS IN NON-INDUSTRIAL BUILDINGS 243

SP 30 : 2011

ANNEX C
(Clause 6.1.4)
EXAMPLE OF AN ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION IN A MEDICAL ESTABLISHMENT

Legend Legend
1= Heating pipes 13 = Main earthing bar
2= Water supply 14 = Joint
3= Gas supply 15 = Water meter
4= Distribution board 16 = Gas meter
5= General ward 17 = Waste water
6= Hospital bed 18 = Earth electrode
7= Heating and water pipes 19 = Lighting protective system
8= Medical IT-system for Operation Theatre 20 = From public electric power system
9= Insulation monitoring device L1, L2, L3 = phase conductors
10 = Medical isolating transformer N = neutral conductors
11 = Socket outlet EC = bonding conductor
12 = Main distribution board. PE = protective conductor

244 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

ANNEX D
(Clause 7.1.4.1)
SCHEMATIC PRESENTATION OF PROTECTIVE CONDUCTORS AND EQUIPOTENTIAL
BONDING IN OPERATING THEATRES

Legend Legend
01 = Feeder from the main service entrance 17 = Operating lamp
(main distribution board) 18 = Ampere meter for special safety
02 = Distribution of the floor supply system
03 = Operating theatre distribution panel 19 = X-ray equipment
04 = Safety supply system 20 = Sterilizer
05 = Medical isolating transformer 21 = Residual-current protective device
06 = Insulation monitoring device 22 = Protective conductor bar
07 = Special safety supply system, E2 23 = Equipotential conductor bar
08 = Special safety supply system E1 24 = Terminals for equipotential bonding
0 9= Central heating 25 = Operation
10 = Metal window-frame 26 = Warning
11 = Metal cabinet for instruments 27 = Green
12 = Meal washing-basin and water supply 28 = Red
13 = Ceiling stand with outlets for gas supply 29 = Buzzer
14 = Ceiling stand with mains socket outlets 30 = Stop button for buzzer
(with terminals for equipotential bonding, 31 = Test button
enclosure connected to the protective PE = protective conductor
conductor bar) EC = equipotential bonding
15 = Alarm device for the insulation monitoring L1, L2, L3 = phase conductors
device (example) N = neutral conductor
16 = Operating table (electrically driven)

PART 3 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS IN NON-INDUSTRIAL BUILDINGS 245

SP 30 : 2011

ANNEX E
(Clause 11.1.1)
SAFETY SUPPLY SYSTEM

E-0 GENERAL normally be restricted to the accident and emergency

entrance areas.
E-0.1 This Annex contains recommendations for the
design of the safety supply system in medical E-1.3 Three grades of emergency lighting are
establishments. suggested, namely:
Priority is given to all aspects ensuring safe working a) Grade A lighting of intensity and quality equal
conditions in medically used rooms. or nearly equal to that provided under normal
supply conditions;
Interruption of normal electrical service in medical
establishments may cause hazardous situations. b) Grade B reduced standard of lighting, for
Therefore, it is necessary to provide for continuity of example, about half the normal standard,
power supply for vital services at all times. sufficient to enable essential activities to be
properly carried out; and
In some medically used rooms a special safety supply c) Grade C safety lighting of a much reduced
system should be provided additionally. It supplies life standard but sufficient to allow the free
supporting equipment and the operating table lighting movement of persons, trolleys, etc.
for 3 h only, that is, for a relatively short time if the
mains supply or the safety supply system fails or the Levels for Grades A, B and C are under consideration.
switch-over time cannot be tolerated. E-1.4 Table 6 is intended as a general guide. Emergency
The safety supply system is intended to supply lighting may be needed in areas not mentioned in the
electrical energy for a longer period of time to essential table.
circuits of the medical establishment if the mains
E-2 ESSENTIAL CIRCUITS — SOCKET-
supply fails by external causes.
OUTLETS
E-1 ESSENTIAL SERVICES — LIGHTING E-2.1 Socket-outlets should be so distributed that in
E-1.1 Essential lighting requirements will vary each area where essential equipment will be used,
considerably in different locations, depending on the socket-outlets connected to at least two separate sub-
importance and nature of the work. In some instances, circuits are available.
for example, operating table lighting in operating Table 7 is intended as a general guide.
suites, and the critical working areas in the delivery
room and recovery rooms, the degree and quality of E-2.2 Socket outlets in operating rooms for the
emergency lighting should be approximately equal to connection of X-ray equipment for fluoroscopy should
that of the normal lighting. Even in these areas, be supplied from an essential circuit.
however, considerable reduction in the general lighting E-2.3 Electrical services, including automatic controls,
may be acceptable. Ample socket-outlets connected to which are essential for the safe operation of sterilizing
essential circuits should be available to enable portable equipment in operating theatre and the central sterile
lighting fittings to be used for any tasks outside the supply department should be supplied from an essential
critical working area-which require a higher standard circuit.
of lighting.
E-2.4 Blood banks and other clinical refrigerators are
E-1.2 No general recommendations can be made for usually equipped with temperature retaining facilities
the emergency lighting arrangements for stairs and which will satisfactorily safeguard against power
corridors as needs will differ considerably according failures of several hours’ duration. Nevertheless, they
to the design and size of the hospital. As a general shall be supplied from an essential circuit.
guide, safety lighting should be provided to enable
essential movement of staff and patients to be carried E-2.5 Motors of surgical suction plant should be
out in reasonable safety. Safety lighting should also connected to an essential circuit. It is desirable that
be provided in public waiting spaces, at entrances and the motors should be so arranged that once they are
exits, and in corridors used by members of the public, switched on they will restart automatically, following
ambulance staff, etc. External emergency lighting will an interruption of supply.

246 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

Table 6 Emergency Lighting Table 6 — (Concluded)

(Clause E-1.4)
Sl Department or Area Grade of
No. Location Lighting
Sl Department or Area Grade of (1) (2) (3) (4)
No. Location Lighting
(1) (2) (3) (4) Corridors and — Grade C
circulating spaces of
i) Major Operating deep planned designs
Suites ii) Assembly Areas
Operating theatre Critical working area Grade A
Assembly rooms and — Grade C
Operating theatre General working area Grade B associated exists
Anaesthetic rooms General working area Grade A Public waiting space — Grade C
Post operative General working area Grade A Plant rooms housing Working area Grade B
Intensive care room Circulating areas Grade C essential plant
ii) Delivery Suites Kitchens Essential working areas Grade B
Critical working area Grade A
Delivery rooms Other nursing areas Grade B
Circulating areas Grade C
iii) Accident and Table 7 Socket-Outlets in Essential Circuits
Emergency (Clause E-2.1)
Departments
Operating theatres Critical working area Grade A
Intensive care rooms Critical working area Grade A Sl Department Number of Socket-
General working area Grade B No. Outlets Connected to
Circulating areas Grade C Essential Circuits (see
iv) Out-Patient Note)
Department (1) (2) (3)
Operating theatres Critical working area Grade A i) Operating suits All
Treatment rooms General working areas Grade B ii) Intensive care room and All
Consulting rooms General working areas Grade B operating rooms in accident
Circulating areas Grade C and emergency department
Pathological Essential working areas Grade B iii) Delivery rooms All
department iv) Post-anaesthetic recovery All
Blood bank Grade A rooms
Transfusion laboratory Grade A v) Intensive therapy units All
Diagnostic X-ray General working area Grade B vi) Radiological diagnostic room All
department (where portable X-ray vii) Ward accommodation set aside All
machines may be used) for patents dependent on
Circulation areas Grade C electrically driven equipment,
Radiotherapy Treatment areas Grade A for example, respirators,
department Public circulating areas Grade C rocking beds, artificial kidney
Pharmacy Dispensing areas Grade B machines, etc.
Laboratory Grade B viii) Special baby care units All
v) Ward Areas ix) Pathology laboratories 2
Intensive therapy Intensive nursing area Grade A x) Wards where essential 2 sockets outlets for wards
units Other nursing areas Grade B equipment such as suction containing 1 to 4 beds and,
Nurses’ station or duty Grade B apparatus will be used pro rata, where the number
room of beds exceeds 4.
vi) Special Baby Care NOTE — It is reasonable to assume that only essential
Units equipment will be used in these areas during periods of power
Nurseries General working area Grade B failure. The recommendation that all socket are connected to
Psychiatric wards General working area Grade B the Essential Circuits provide the most convenient choice of
Treatment rooms General working area Grade A sockets outlets at any time, and to simplify installation.
Other nursing areas General working area Grade C
(night-
lighting)
vii) Central Sterile Supply General working area Grade B
E-2.6 Safety supply systems for facilities for ventilation
Department and air-conditioning purposes will usually apply only
iii) Telephone Exchanges Essential working area Grade B to plants which serve areas which are entirely
ix) Operators Room Grade B
x) Lifts
dependent on mechanical ventilation and have no
Lifts cars Grade A facilities for natural ventilation or where mechanical
Entrance and exit of Grade A ventilation services are essential for clinical reasons.
elevators
xi) General circulating
Where ventilation requirements are met by duplicate
Areas plants it will usually only be necessary for one of the
Public entrances and — Grade C plants to be supplied from the emergency source, thus
exits
ensuring air supplies of approximately 50 percent of
Corridors and — Grade C
staircases forming the normal rate. Changeover switches, however, should
recognized means of be provided, to enable either of the plants to be
escape connected to the emergency service.

PART 3 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS IN NON-INDUSTRIAL BUILDINGS 247

SP 30 : 2011

E-2.7 Any mains-energized alarm and control circuits energized from float charged batteries having sufficient
should be so arranged that they are automatically capacity for at least 24 h normal working.
connected to the safety supply system in the event of a
E-3.5 Where lifts are provided for the movement of
power failure.
patients it is desirable that one lift in each separate
E-2.8 In biochemical laboratories and in the pharmacy section of the hospital should be so arranged that it is
about 50 percent of the normal load should be supplied normally connected to the essential circuits of the
from essential circuits. installation having automatic changeover facilities.
These lifts will be regarded as emergency or fire lifts,
E-3 PARTS OF ESSENTIAL CIRCUITS
and should be suitably indicated by markings at each
E-3.1 Deep-freeze refrigerators and food storage landing.
refrigerators will normally operate within a temperature
Suitable manually-operated switching arrangements
range of –10 to –23°C and be fitted with a temperature
should be provided to enable the general safety supply
alarm device to give a warning when the refrigerator
system to be switched from the emergency lift to each
temperature approaches the upper safety limit. It may
be desirable for one deep-freeze refrigerator at each of the other lifts in turn to eliminate the possibility of
hospital to be supplied from the essential circuits where occupants being trapped in the lifts during power
this can be conveniently arranged. failures. Under normal supply conditions the
emergency lifts only will be connected to the essential
E-3.2 In milk kitchen, all refrigerators should be circuit of the installation.
supplied from an essential circuit.
E-3.6 Communication equipment should be connected
E-3.3 Where electrically operated pumps are used to to essential circuits.
maintain essential water supplies (including that for
fire fighting purposes) it will be necessary to make E-3.7 All boiler house supplies should be fed from
suitable arrangements for the pumps to be connected essential circuits.
to the safety supply system. E-3.8 Emergency supplies for computers should be
E-3.4 Telephone exchange equipment is usually examined in each case.

248 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 ANNEX F
(Clause 10.1.6)

PART 3 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS IN NON-INDUSTRIAL BUILDINGS

SAFETY SUPPLY SYSTEM OF A HOSPITAL (EXAMPLE)

Legend Legend
1= Mains 70 = Mains transformer
2= Starting equipment 80 = Special safety supply system (motor-generator or inverter with batteries switch-over time < 15 s)
3= Safety supply system 90 = Special safety supply system supply for operating lamp (switch over time < 0.5)
4= Less essential circuit 10 = Operating lamp
5= Essential circuit 11 = Supply circuits for life supporting equipment
6= Supply circuit 12 = Equipment > 5 kVA, lighting, X-ray equipment.
SP 30 : 2011

249
SP 30 : 2011

SECTION 5 HOTELS

0 FOREWORD 3 TERMINOLOGY
Hotels lodging or rooming houses are of a wide variety, For the purpose of this Section, the definitions given
ranging from simple dormitory type accommodation in Part 1/Section 2 of the Code shall apply.
for guests, where only a common bath is provided with
no facility for dining/kitchen to the sophisticated star 4 CLASSIFICATION
hotels. Increasing competition in the hotel industry as 4.1 The electrical installations covered in this Section
such, coupled with the demand by guests for a variety are those in buildings intended for the following
of comforts, calls for an electrical installation in a hotel purposes:
with increased sophistication.
a) Lodging or rooming houses — These include
The electrical needs of a hotel depend on the type and any building or group of buildings in which
extent of facilities being provided and the rating of the separate sleeping accommodation for a total
hotel. The system design would in general be identical of not more than 15 persons on either transient
with that of any other large building, the actual power or permanent basis with or without dining
requirement expressed in terms of per-unit area or per facilities, but without cooking facilities for
guest room. individuals, is provided.
Specific requirements for installations in swimming NOTE — The above is distinct from single or two family
private dwellings which are covered in Part 3/Sec 1 of
pool are covered in Annex A to this Section. These this Code.
requirements also apply to swimming pools in other
occupancies, say sports buildings. For editorial b) Hotels — These include any building or group
convenience, these specific requirements form part of of buildings in which sleeping
this section of the Code. accommodation is provided with or without
dining facilities for hire to more than 15
1 SCOPE persons, who are primarily transient such as
hotels, inns, clubs and motels.
This Section 5 of the Code covers requirements for
NOTE — For the purpose of this Code, restaurants other
electrical installations in buildings such as hotels and than those forming part of a large hotel are treated as
lodging houses. assembly buildings and are covered in Part 3/Sec 3 of
this Code.
2 REFERENCES
4.2 The electrical installations in hotels covered in this
This Part 3/Section 5 of the Code should be read in Section include the following services:
conjunction with the following Indian Standards:
a) Supply intake,
IS No. Title b) Main distribution centre,
3646 (Part 2) : 1966 Code of practice for interior c) Ventilation and exhaust systems,
illumination: Part 2 Schedule for d) Kitchen,
values of illumination and glare e) Laundry,
index f) Cold storage,
8061 : 1976 Code of practice for design,
g) Health club,
installation and maintenance of
h) Swimming pool and filtration plants,
service lines upto and including
650 V j) Restaurants and bars,
IS/IEC 60309-1 : Plugs, socket-outlets and couplers k) Interior lighting,
2002 for industrial purposes: Part 1 m) Telephones,
General requirements (first revision) n) Channelized music,
IS/IEC 60309-2 : Plugs, socket-outlets and couplers p) Service lifts and passenger lifts,
2002 for industrial purposes: Part 2
q) Offices,
Dimensional interchangeability
r) Fire protection and alarm systems,
requirements for pin and contact
tube accessories (first revision) s) Banquet halls and conference facilities,
SP 7 : 2005 National Building Code of India t) Gardens and parking lots and illumination
SP 72 : 2010 National Lighting Code systems therein,

250 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

u) Illuminated signs, display lights and Utilization Characteristics Remarks

decorative illuminations, and (1) (2) (3)
v) Emergency system.
Capability of Ordinary, A major
5 GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS OF persons uninstructed proportion of
INSTALLATIONS persons occupants in
Hotels
General guidelines on the assessment of characteristics
Persons Applies to areas,
of installations in buildings are given in Part 1/Sec 8 of
adequately such as building
this Code. For the purposes of installations falling under
advised or substation and for
the scope of this Section, the characteristics defined supervised by operating and
below generally apply (see also SP 7). skilled persons maintenance staff
5.1 Environment Contact of Persons in non-
persons with conducting
5.1.1 The following environmental factors apply to earth situations
hotels: potential
Condition of Low density Applies to lodging
Environment Characteristics Remarks evacuation occupation, easy houses
(1) (2) (3) during conditions of
Presence of Probability of Majority of emergency evacuation
water presence of water locations in hotels. High density Large hotels, high-
is negligible Traces of water occupation, rise buildings.
appearing for short difficult
periods are dried conditions of
rapidly by good evacuation
ventilation. Nature of No significant
Possibility of jets Applies to gardens processed of risks
of water from any stored
direction material
Possibility of Locations such as Contamination Applies to
permanent and swimming pools risks due to kitchens
total covering by presence of
water unprotected food
Presence of The quantity or stuffs
foreign solid nature of dust or
bodies foreign solid
bodies is not 6 SUPPLY CHARACTERISTICS AND
significant PARAMETERS
Presence of The quantity and For hotels situated
6.0 Exchange of Information
corrosive or nature of corrosive by the sea or
polluting or polluting industrial zones, 6.0.1 Proper coordination shall be ensured between the
substances substances is not other architect, building contractor and the electrical engineer
significant categorization on the various aspects of installation design. In addition
applies (see to the general aspects which require coordination and
Part 1/Section 8 of identified in other sections, information shall be
this Code) obtained on the following services:
Mechanical Impact and —
stresses vibration of low a) Whether central air-conditioning system is
severity intended. If so, layout of air handling units,
Seismic Depends on the fan coil units, ducting, false ceiling and chilled
effect and location of the water lines should be obtained.
lighting building b) Whether centrally controlled fire-fighting is
intended. If so, layout of fire-fighting
installation should be obtained.
5.2 Utilization
c) Whether telephone and TV facilities are
5.2.1 The following aspects of utilization shall apply: intended in each room. If so, layout of the

PART 3 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS IN NON-INDUSTRIAL BUILDINGS 251

SP 30 : 2011

telephone installation and TV circuits should equipment such as floor cleaning appliances. They
be obtained. should be of the 3-pin type, suitably rated with one-
d) Whether centrally heated out water system is pin earthed.
intended. If so, layout of hot water pipe-line Heavy duty sockets should also be provided in pantries,
be obtained. kitchens, toilets and utility rooms for use of appliances.
6.1 Branch Circuits Adequate plug-in sockets at proper locations should
be provided in banquet halls and other meeting places
6.1.1 The general provisions for the design of wiring
for flood lights and other appliances.
of branch circuits shall conform to those laid down in
Part 1/Section 9 of this Code. However, for special 6.2 Feeders
cases such as for communication networks, fire-alarm
system, etc, as well as in areas such as kitchen, laundry, The general provisions laid down in Part 3/Section 9
etc, the recommendation of the manufacturer shall of this Code shall apply.
apply. 6.3 Service Lines
6.1.2 The branch circuit calculations shall be done as The general provisions laid down in IS 8061 shall
laid down in Part 1/Section 1 of this Code. The specific apply.
demands of the lighting, appliance and motor loads,
as well as special loads encountered in hotel building 6.4 Building Substation
shall be taken into account.
6.4.1 If the load demand is high which requires supply
6.1.3 In hotel buildings, the interior décor normally at voltage above 650 V a separate indoor
includes false ceiling, carpets and curtains. Any wiring accommodation, as near the main load centre of the
laid above the false ceiling should be adequately hotel as possible shall be provided to accommodate
protected, such as by drawing the wires in metallic switchgear equipment of supply undertaking and
conduits and not run in open. Wires shall not be laid indoor/outdoor accommodation for the transformers.
under carpets. They shall be run at skirting level and The main distribution equipment of the hotel shall
encased for mechanical protection. preferably be located next to the substation. Separate
feeders shall be provided for major loads like central
6.1.4 Panel Boards and Switch-boards
air-conditioning, kitchen, laundry, swimming pool,
The provisions of Part 1/Section 9 of this Code shall lighting of main building and other essential loads.
apply.
6.4.2 The supply line should preferably be brought into
6.1.5 Socket-outlets and Plugs the building underground to reduce the possibility of
interruption of power supply. The accommodation for
6.1.5.0 These should be provided in all places where
substation equipment as well as for main distribution
plug-in service is likely to be required, to reduce the
panel shall be properly enclosed so as to prevent access
need for alterations and extensions of wiring after the
to any unauthorized person. It shall be provided with
hotel building is completed. Duplex or other suitable
proper ventilation and lighting arrangement.
outlets should be provided as required in the offices
and work places for fans, lamps and appliances. The 6.4.3 The location and layout of building sub-station
socket-outlets shall preferably have covers. Corridors and emergency diesel generating set(s) shall be in
and staircases shall be provided with sufficient socket- conformance with Part 2 of this Code.
outlets for floor cleaning appliances. These shall be
connected in a circuit separate from the circuits for 6.5 System Protection
the guest rooms. 6.5.1 General
6.1.5.1 If provided, use of a central radio receiving The general rules for protection for safety laid down
system wired with multi-channels piped music system in Part 1/Section 7 of this Code shall apply. Reference
to each room is recommended so that the occupant may should be made to SP 7 for guidelines for fire protection
choose one of the broadcasts. For such reception, of buildings.
special aerials and related wiring are required. Aerial
outlets at rooms are required for portable radios in areas 6.5.2 For lodging and rooming houses of 3 storey and
above, with a floor area more than 200 m2 with central
and buildings where reception is poor but in general
corridor and rooms on either side, besides fire fighting
the aerial built in the set may be adequate.
equipment, manually operated electric fire-alarm system
6.1.5.2 Special convenience outlets in corridors at shall be provided. Both manually operated and automatic
suitable locations are desirable for use of portable fire-alarm systems shall be provided in large hotels.

252 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

6.6 Building Services 6.6.3 Lifts and Escalators

6.6.1 Lighting 6.6.3.0 The general rules laid down in Part 1/Section 14
of this Code shall apply. However, the design of lifts
6.6.1.1 The general rule laid down in Part 1/Section 14
shall take into account the following recommendations.
of this Code shall apply. The choice of lighting fittings
and general lighting design together with power 6.6.3.1 Occupant load
requirements shall be planned based on the
For hotel buildings, an occupant load of 12.5 gross
recommended values of illumination and limiting
area, in m2 per person is recommended.
values of glare index given in Table 1 [see also IS 3646
(Part 2) and SP 72]. 6.6.3.2 Passenger handling capacity
The passenger handling capacity expressed in percent
Table 1 Recommended Values of Illumination
of the estimated population that has to be handled in
and Glare Index for Hotels
the 5 min peak period shall be 5 percent for hotel
Sl Building Illumination, Limiting Glare buildings.
No. lux Index
(1) (2) (3) (4) 6.6.3.3 Car speed — This shall be as follows:
i) Entrance halls, lobby 150 —
ii) Reception and accounts 300 — Occupancy Floors Served Car Speed
iii) Dining rooms (tables) 100 — m/s
iv) Lounges 150 — (1) (2) (3)
v) Bedrooms:
a) General 100 — Passenger lifts for low — 0.5
b) Dressing tables, bed 200 — and medium class
heads, etc. lodging houses
vi) Writing tables 300 — Hotels 4-5 0.5-0.75
vii) Corridors 70 —
viii) Stairs 100 —
ix) Laundries 200 25 6.6.3.4 For hotel buildings, it is desirable to have at
x) Kitchens 200 25 least a battery of two lifts at convenient points of a
xi) Goods/passenger lifts 70 —
building. If this is not possible, it is advisable to have
xii) Cloakrooms/toilets 100 —
xiii) Bathrooms 100 — at least two lifts side by side at the main entrance, and
xiv) Shops/stores 150 - 300 22 one lift at different sections of the building for
NOTE — The lighting of some of these locations is intercommunication.
determined primarily by aesthetic considerations and the
above values should be taken as a guide only. 7 TESTING OF INSTALLATION
The various tests on the installation shall be carried
6.6.1.2 In guest bedrooms, it shall be possible to switch out as laid down in Part 1/Section 10 of this Code.
the general lighting not only from the entrance but also
from the bedside (see also 8.4.2) 8 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS
6.6.1.3 In bathrooms, the lights should be mounted at 8.1 Call System
head level on both sides of the mirror. Care shall be
The general provisions for electrical bells and call
taken to ensure that there is no glare.
system shall conform to those laid down in Part 1/
6.6.1.4 Lighting in banquet halls shall be given special Section 14 of this Code. The call system should be a
consideration in view of its multipurpose utility such wired electrical system whereby customer may signal
as fairs, dances, fashion shows, conferences, exhibition for attendance from his room. Two types of systems
or concerts. Sufficient number of controlled socket- are recommended:
outlet circuits shall be combined in a switching station
a) A simple one-watt signal system which
from which the entire hall shall be visible.
connects the room side call stations with a
6.6.1.5 In designing outdoor lighting installations, care signal at the attendant station. It
shall be taken to ensure that disturbing glare does not simultaneously lights a dome light over the
reach the rooms of the guests. door of the room from which the call is
originated. The signal at the attendant station
6.6.2 Air-conditioning
may be in the form of an annunciator with a
The provisions of Part 1/Section 14 of this Code shall buzzer or a light with a buzzer.
apply. b) A central control panel shall, be set up

PART 3 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS IN NON-INDUSTRIAL BUILDINGS 253

SP 30 : 2011

preferably on the ground floor incorporating 8.4 Emergency Supply

a set of indicating panels according to the
See also Part 2 of this Code.
number of wings. Each indicating panel
should have a set of small lamps according to 8.4.1 In the event of a failure of supply, a large standby
the number of rooms. After-attending the power supply usually a diesel driven generating set
customer, the attendant presses the resetting could be used to partly or entirely supply the loads in
button which puts the whole equipment to the the hotel. Emergency lighting shall be confined to
original condition. essential areas, and the standby power supply shall feed
essential and safety installations in the hotel.
8.2 Telephones
8.4.2 Part of the kitchen, storage and refrigeration
A centralized EPABX System with sufficient P&T lines rooms in the hotel shall also be supplied by the
shall be installed for internal and external emergency supply. A part of the lighting in each room,
communications with the help of operator’s assistance corridor, staircases and other circulation areas shall be
as well as directly through this system. These may be connected to emergency supply.
connected on a dial system which permits internal
communication through the hotel switchboard without 8.5 Other Special Installations
the assistance of the operator. At all the rooms,
The list of such installations is given below:
telephone jacks shall be installed so that a telephone
may be plugged in any time at any convenient location. a) TV sets at main assembly areas and in guest
Parallel telephones may be provided in the bedrooms. rooms,
Each room shall also be provided with jacks for Broad b) Lighting in banquet halls,
Band Multi Service facility/internet facility. c) Fire-fighting system,
8.3 Clock Systems d) Swimming pool (see Annex A),
The general provisions for clock systems shall conform e) Cold storage,
to those laid down in Part 1/Sec 14. The following f) Sauna Heaters (see Annex B), and
locations may be provided with clocks: g) Broad Band Multi Service facility/internet
facility.
a) Guest rooms,
b) Main lobby, 8.6 For particular requirements for locations containing
c) Telephone switchboard, a bathtub or shower basin, see Annex A of Part 3/
Section 1 of this Code.
d) Dining room,
e) Banquet halls, 8.7 Luminous Sign
f) Kitchen, and
Photo luminescent safety signage should be provided
g) Restaurant and bar rooms. at different strategic locations.

254 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

ANNEX A
(Clause 8.5)
PARTICULAR REQUIREMENTS FOR SWIMMING POOL

A-1 SCOPE c) Zone 2 : IP X 2 for inside swimming pools.

IP X 4 for outside swimming pools.
This Annex applies to the basins of swimming pools
and paddling pools and their surrounding zones where A-4.2 For Zone 1 and Zone 2, water jet is likely to be
susceptibility to electric shock is likely to be increased used for clearing purpose : IP X 5
by the reduction of body resistance and contact with
This requirement does not apply to instantaneous water
earth potential.
heaters complying with IS 302 (Part 2/Sec 35).
A-2 CLASSIFICATION OF ZONES
A-5 WIRING SYSTEMS
A-2.1 Reference is drawn to Fig. 1 and Fig. 2.
A-5.1 In Zone 0 and Zone 1, wiring systems shall be
Zone 0 — is the interior of the basin. limited to those necessary to the supply of appliances
situated in those zones.
Zone 1 — is limited by a vertical plane 2 m from the
rim of the basin by the floor or the surface expected to A-5.2 Junction boxes are not permitted in Zone 0 and
be occupied by persons and the horizontal plane 2.50 m Zone 1. In Zone 2, they are permitted provided they
above the floor of the surface. have the necessary degree of protection as given
in A-4.1.
Zone 2 — is limited by the vertical plane external to
Zone 1 and a parallel plane 1.50 m from the former, A-5.3 In Zone 0 and Zone 1 no switchgear and
by the floor or surface expected to be occupied by accessory shall be installed. In Zone 2 socket-outlets
persons and the horizontal plane 2.50 m above the floor are permitted only if they are either:
or surface.
a) supplied individually by an isolating
NOTE — Where the pool contains diving boards, spring boards, transformer, or
starting blocks or a chute, Zone 1 comprises the zone limited
by a vertical plane situated 1.50 m around the diving boards, b) supplied by safety extra low voltage, or
spring boards and starting blocks, and by the horizontal plane c) protected by a residual current protective
2.50 m above the highest surface expected to be occupied by device.
the persons.
A-5.4 If it is not possible to locate socket-outlets
A-3 PROTECTION FOR SAFETY may be installed only if they are complying
A-3.1 Where safety extra-low voltage is used, whatever a) Outside 1.25 m from the Zone 0 border, and
the nominal voltage, protection against direct contact
b) protected by residual current protection device.
shall be provided by barriers or enclosures affording
at least a protection of IP2X, or insulation capable or A-5.5 The socket-outlets shall comply IS/IEC 60309
withstanding a test voltage of 500 V for 1 min. (Part 1) and IS/IEC 60309 (Part 2).
A-3.2 All extraneous conductive parts in Zones 0, 1 A-5.6 An electric heating unit embedded in the floor
and 2 shall be bonded with protective conductors of in Zones 1 and 2 shall incorporate a metallic sheath
all exposed conductive parts situated in these Zones. connected to the local supplementary equipotential
bonding and shall be covered by the metallic grid
A-4 SELECTION OF EQUIPMENT
required by A-3.2.
A-4.1 Electrical equipment shall have at least the
A-5.7 In Zone 2, only water heaters are permitted
following degrees of protection:
excepting that other equipment supplied by SELV
a) Zone 0 : IP X 8 (Safety Extra Low Voltage) at a nominal voltage not
b) Zone 1 : IP X 4 exceeding 12 V may be installed.

PART 3 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS IN NON-INDUSTRIAL BUILDINGS 255

SP 30 : 2011

FIG. 1 ZONE DIMENSIONS FOR BASINS ABOVE GROUND

FIG. 2 ZONE DIMENSIONS OF SWIMMING POOLS AND PADDLING POOLS

256 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

ANNEX B
(Clause 8.5)
PARTICULAR REQUIREMENTS FOR LOCATIONS CONTAINING SAUNA HEATERS

1 SCOPE a) insulation capable of withstanding a test

voltage of 500 V ac, rms for 1 min.
The particular requirements of this Annex apply to
locations in which hot air sauna heating equipment is b) barriers or enclosures, affording at least
installed. degree of protection IP 24.
B-3.2 All extraneous conductive parts shall be bonded
B-2 CLASSIFICATION OF TEMPERATURE with protective conductors of all exposed conductive
ZONES parts situated in these zones and earthed.
B-2.1 The assessment of the general characteristics of
B-4 SELECTION OF EQUIPMENT
the location shall take due consideration of the
classification of the four temperature zones which are B-4.1 All equipment shall have at least the degree of
illustrated in Fig. 3. protection IP 24.
B-3 PROTECTION FOR SAFETY B-4.2 Equipment should be selected in accordance with
the temperature zones as depicted in Fig. 3 as per the
B-3.1 Where Safety Extra Low Voltage (SELV) is following details:
used, irrespective of the nominal voltage, protection
against direct contact shall be provided by one or more a) Zone A: only the sauna heater complying with
of the following: relevant safety standard and equipment

FIG. 3 CLASSIFICATION OF TEMPERATURE ZONES

PART 3 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS IN NON-INDUSTRIAL BUILDINGS 257

SP 30 : 2011

directly associated with it shall be installed. protected cords complying with appropriate standard,
b) Zone B: there is no special requirement suitable for 150°C should be used.
concerning heat resistance of equipment. B-5.2 Switchgear not built into sauna heater, other than
c) Zone C: equipment shall be suitable for an a thermostat and a thermal cut-out shall be installed
ambient temperature of 125°C. outside the hot air sauna.
d) Zone D: only luminaries and their associated
B-5.3 Except as permitted in B-4.2 and B-5.2
wiring, and control devices for the sauna
accessories shall not be installed within the hot air
heater and their associated wiring shall be
sauna.
installed. The equipment shall be suitable for
an ambient temperature of 125°C. B-6 OTHER FIXED EQUIPMENT
B-5 WIRING SYSTEMS B-6.1 Luminaries shall be so mounted as to prevent
overheating.
B-5.1 Flexible elastomer insulated and mechanically

258 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

SECTION 6 SPORTS BUILDINGS

0 FOREWORD 3 CLASSIFICATION OF SPORTS BUILDINGS

The design and erection of electrical installation in a 3.1 The buildings for the purposes of conducting sports
sports building have to take into account a multitude and games are characterized by the criteria that large
of factors that are unique to the type of use to which it number of people congregate. Sports complexes not
is put. In a way the electrical power needs and the basically meant for exhibition purposes, and not likely
external influences in a sports building are quite to be utilized for other purposes, such as for staging
identical to those for theatres and other multipurpose special or cultural events, shall however conform to
buildings for cultural events excepting that for the special requirements of this Section. The type of
international events exacting standards of services and building shall therefore be classified as follows:
flexibility had to be provided in a multipurpose sports
a) Based on type of building:
stadia.
1) Indoor stadia.
Several stadia, especially those of the indoor type are 2) Outdoor stadia: Stadia meant for use in
meant for staging a variety of games which between daylight. Stadia meant for use during
themselves require varying standards of lighting levels. night under artificial lighting.
The design of illumination system in a sports building
b) Based on type of game/sport:
therefore requires consultations with a specialist and
the guidelines provided in this Section are purely 1) Single game sports hall/stadia.
recommendatory in nature in this respect. 2) Multigames hall/stadia.
In indoor stadia where large number of people c) Based on utility:
congregate it is essential to inbuild adequate fire 1) Stadia meant for games only.
precautions from the point of view of safety. Assessing
2) Multipurpose stadia for other amuse-
the need for adequate strength of a standby supply for
ments as well.
essential services requires special consideration.
d) Based on audience-factor:
It is to be noted that a sports stadia should preferably
be designed for use for other purposes as well, such as 1) Stadia/halls meant for exhibition pur-
the staging of cultural events and this aspect shall be poses — where groups of people con-
borne in mind while designing the electrical needs of gregate.
the complex so as to ensure optimum utilization of the 2) Stadia/halls meant for training and pass-
facilities. time — where audience may not normal-
ly be present.
With the advent of sophisticated stadia in the country NOTE — Classification d (1) includes stadia meant for
as well as keeping in view the accent on sports, this staging tournaments and events, and d (2) includes
Section of this Code has been set aside to cover such games halls in educational institutions and the like
of those specific requirements applicable to sports where normally no exhibition is intended.
buildings from the electrical engineering point of view. 3.1.1 Reference should be made to 5.5.1.2 for
Taking note of the fact that the type of buildings and classification from lighting consideration.
their needs for the purposes of sports and games would
be quite different between them, only broad guidelines 3.2 The electrical installation needs in sports buildings
are outlined in this Section. It is recommended that would therefore be governed by the type of use
assistance of experts shall be sought in the design of indicated in 3.1(a) to (d). A large sports complex may
the installation at the early stages itself. include the following sub-units:
a) Supply intake/voltage of supply;
1 SCOPE
b) Main substation and satellite substations, if
This Part 3/Section 6 of the Code covers requirements any;
for electrical installations in sports buildings and stadia, c) Central control room/switch rooms;
indoor and outdoor.
d) Electrification of restaurant, health clubs;
2 TERMINOLOGY hospitals, offices and other support structures;
e) Communication facilities (telephone, telex,
For the purpose of this Section, the definitions given telegraph, data processing TV, radio and press
in Part 1/Section 2 of this Code shall apply. facilities);

PART 3 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS IN NON-INDUSTRIAL BUILDINGS 259

SP 30 : 2011

f) Fire protection services; Environment Characteristics Remarks

g) External electrification of gardens and (1) (2) (3)
parking lots, service routes, lake fountains (if
any); Indirect exposure Installations
to lighting, where supplied by
h) Emergency electric supply system including
hazard from overhead lines.
uninterrupted power requirements; supply
j) Audio systems, public address/security; arrangements
k) De-watering arrangements, sewage disposal, exists
water supply systems; Direct exposure or Lighting towers
m) Gas/oil arrangements for sports flame if hazard from in outdoor stadia.
required; and exposure of
n) Miscellaneous requirements for power- equipment is
socket, microphone outlets, score-boards, etc. present

4 GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS OF SPORTS 4.2 Utilization

BUILDINGS
The following aspects utilization shall apply:
General guidelines on the assessment of characteristics
of installations in buildings are given in Part 1/Section 8
Utilization Characteristics Remarks
of this Code. For the purposes of installations falling (1) (2) (3)
under the scope of this Section, the characteristics given
Capability of Uninstructed In sports stadia the
below shall apply.
persons persons sportsmen and
4.1 Environment spectators fall under
this category. However,
4.1.1 The following environmental factors apply to electrical operating
sports buildings: areas are accessible to
instructed persons only.
Environment Characteristics Remarks Conditions of Low density Training halls and the
(1) (2) (3) evacuation in occupation, easy like where people do
an emergency conditions of not congregate.
Presence of Submersion, Locations such as evacuation
water possibility of swimming pools
High density Large multipurpose
permanent and total where electrical occupation, stadia for exhibition
covering by water equipment is difficult conditions purposes.
permanently and of evacuation
totally covered
Nature of Existence of fire- Due to furniture and
with water under
processed of risks. false floor for playing
pressure greater
stored area
than 0.1 bar.
material
Presence of The quantity or Indoor stadia.
foreign solid nature of dust or
bodies foreign solid bodies 5 SUPPLY CHARACTERISTICS AND
is not significant PARAMETERS
Presence of dust in Outdoor stadia. 5.0 Exchange of Information
significant quantify
5.0.1 Proper coordination shall be ensured between the
Presence of Negligible Covers majority architect building contractor and the electrical engineer
corrosive or of cases. Stadia on the various aspects of the installation design. In
polluting and games addition to the general aspects which require
substances complexes coordination and identified in other sections, the
situated by the sea following data shall specifically be obtained:
or industrial zones
require special a) The total electrical power needs of the stadium
consideration. including the standby power arrangements,
which will decide the voltage of supply,
Lighting Negligible Covers category number of substations and their preferred
d(2) (see 3.1) type locations, capacity of diesel engine generating
of installations.
260 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE
 SP 30 : 2011

sets for standby supply, transformers, be prepared in coordination with civil and
switchgear, voltage stabilizers, uninterrupted structural engineers;
power supply requirements, etc; c) Wiring diagrams showing switching sequence
b) In case of indoor stadia, whether air- of luminaries, firealarm system, public
conditioning is required and if so, the capacity announcement systems, etc;
and locations of main plants, air-handling d) In case of air-conditioning, layout of plants,
units, pumps, ducting, layout, route of chilled chilled water piping routes, ducts/grill layout,
water lines, etc. In case of outdoor stadium, etc;
the covered portions like offices, restaurants, e) Layout of public address system envisaged;
are to be air-conditioned or not and their and
details as above; f) Site plan indicating the location of pump
c) Details of fire fighting system/fire alarm houses for storm water drains, water supply,
system envisaged; sewage and fire fighting systems, with the
d) Details of water supply arrangements, storm proposed source and route of power supply.
water drainage, sewage disposals and pump
5.1 Branch Circuits
capacities, locations, etc;
e) Locations of substations, switchrooms, 5.1.1 The general rules as laid down for other large
distribution boards, etc; assembly buildings (see Part 3/Section 3) and as laid
down in Part 1 of this Code shall apply.
f) Requirements of audio-communication
system for the stadium which includes public 5.1.2 Wiring installations for general purpose lighting
address system, car calling system, ambulance and ventilation needs of the sports buildings shall
call, fire service call, intercom stations, conform to the requirements laid down in Part 1/Sec 1
wireless paging system, inter-stadia commu- of this Code. It is preferable to avoid temporary wiring
nication facilities, computer-aided results in electrical central control room.
information, etc; Whenever floodlight luminaries of more than 1 000
g) Details of score-boards — that is whether and W are installed, it is preferable to have individual
their power etc, centralized manual or branch, circuits to each of the luminaries after
automatic, etc, needs, voltage stability, clock considering the economic aspects.
system, etc; Junction boxes shall be installed near the luminaries
h) Special requirements of press, TV, Radio, from which connection to the light source may be taken
telecommunication, games federations, etc; by flexible conduits. This will help maintenance work
j) Requirements of lighting, the location of to be carried out without disturbing the positioning of
lighting luminaries, type of light source, level the lighting fittings.
of illumination required for various stages like 5.1.3 Panel Boards and Switchboards
training, TV (black and white or colour)
coverage, etc; The provision of Part 1/Section 9 of this Code shall
apply. In large stadia, the areas covered by the
k) Requirements for power outlets, speaker
services shall be segregated into zones and the sub-
outlets, microphone outlets, etc., in playing distribution and distribution boards shall be so
arena and field; and arranged and marked keeping in view their
m) Other miscellaneous items like electrification accessibility in times of need.
of ancillary buildings in the sports complex,
5.1.4 Socket-outlets and Plugs
restaurants, gas/oil requirements for flame
and their controls, fountain lighting system, For small stadia/halls, the provisions of Part 3/Section 3
car park, path way and external electrifi- of this Code shall apply. The need for special
cation. convenience outlets shall be considered for services
enumerated in 3.2(e). Utility socket outlets shall be
5.0.2 The following drawings are recommended to be
provided at a height of about 0.3 m from the floor
prepared before commencing the installations work:
except in field/arena. These shall be of weather-proof
a) Single line diagram for electrical distribution; type.
b) Complete layout drawings indicating type and
mounting of luminaries and conduit/cable 5.2 Feeders
installations for various services. This shall 5.2.1 The utility shall be consulted as to the type of

PART 3 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS IN NON-INDUSTRIAL BUILDINGS 261

SP 30 : 2011

service available, whether primary or secondary, Description Fire Detection System

single-phase or three-phase star or delta. (1) (2)
5.2.2 Outdoor floodlighting installations can be made Big halls for over 5 000 Automatic sprinkler and
with either overhead or underground distribution persons alarm system
feeders. From the point of view of appearance and Small halls, health clubs, Automatic sprinkler
minimum interference, the underground system is more arena, gymnasiums, etc, Automatic fire alarm
desirable where large playing areas are involved. indoor with or without system
5.2.3 The underground system shall either be cables
fixed seats corridors for
about 1 000 persons
directly buried or cables in conduits.
Same as above, Same as above
5.3 Building Substation occupancy for less than
1 000 persons
5.3.1 The electrical needs of sports stadia may vary Small indoor games halls Automatic fire alarm
from 30 kVA to 1 000 kVA, according to the size of for less than 300 persons system
the installation. Usually HV supply is used for large Grandstands, stadia for Manually operated fire
multipurpose stadia where power demand is in excess outdoor gathering alarm systems, in offices
of 500 kVA. The design of location of substation and and automatic fire alarm
the diesel generating set, if provided, shall conform to system in stadia, machine
the requirements specified in Part 2 of this Code. room, control room, etc

5.3.2 The main substation for a sports building shall

5.5 Building Services
preferably be located in such a place that does not
interfere with the movement of people congregating. 5.5.1 Lighting
All electrical operating areas, and control rooms shall
5.5.1.0 The general rules laid down in Part 1/Section 11
preferably be segregated from public routes for the
of this Code shall apply (see also SP 72).
sporting events.
5.5.1.1 Special design features
5.3.3 Some installations may justify a separate
transformer on each pole of the floodlighting tower Design of sports lighting, especially in large stadia
with primary wiring to each tower. In smaller require considerations of not only the objects to be
installations, it may be more economical to reduce seen, the background brightness, etc, but the observer’s
the number of transformers by serving several location in the grandstand as well. The following shall
locations from a single transformer through secondary be taken into account:
wiring.
a) Observers have no fixed visual axis or field
5.3.4 For buildings staging national and international of view. During the shifting of sight, even the
sports events, it shall be provided with duplicate power ceiling and luminaries are likely to come into
supply so that in the event of failure of one power the line of vision.
supply, other one can be able to cater the total load b) While the game is in play, the objects of regard
intended to serve. The changeover should be are not fixed, and mostly moving in a three-
automatic. dimensional space.
5.3.5 Emergency power supply by DG set/s shall be c) It is important for observers to be able to
provided at strategic locations to keep the general estimate accurately the object velocity and
lighting and ventilation of the sport buildings in case trajectory.
of normal ac power failure. The changeover should be 5.5.1.2 For the purposes of artificial lighting design, it
automatic. is recommended to divide the location of sport play
into general areas for more than one sport and areas
5.4 System Protection for particular sport.
5.4.0 The general rules for the protection of safety laid General areas include field houses, gymnasiums,
down in Part 1/Section 7 of this Code shall apply. community centre halls and other multipurpose areas.
5.4.1 Sports buildings are classified as ‘assembly For the purposes of lighting design, the nature of sports
buildings’ (Group D) from fire-safety point of view. shall be divided as follows:
Besides fire fighting equipment fire-detection and a) Aerial sports (sports which are aerial in part
extinguishing system shall be provided as or whole) — Badminton, basketball,
recommended below (see also SP 7): handball, squash, tennis and volleyball.

262 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

b) Low level (games which are close to the 5.5.1.4 Selection of light sources
ground level) — Archery, billiards, bowling,
For sports lighting, the following light sources are
fencing, hockey, swimming and boxing.
advantageous together with the considerations
5.5.1.3 Levels of illumination indicated against each:
For some representative types of sport, the a) Incandescent lamps (including tungsten
recommended values of illumination are as given in halogen) — Where necessary, over-voltage
Table 1. operation can be used to advantage especi-
ally as in sports installations, the lighting
Table 1 Recommended Values of Illumination systems are used for less than 500 h a year.
b) Fluorescent lamps — Advantageous where
Sl Sport Illumination, lux mounting heights are low and short projec-
No.
(1) (2) (3) tion distances are acceptable, for example
tennis, bowling, trampoline and a variety of
i) Archery
Target 540
indoor sports.
Shooting line 220 c) High intensity discharge lamps — These are
Badminton 320 characterized by long life and high human
Basketball 540
Billiards (on table) 540 efficiency. However, the inherent time delay
Boxing and wrestling 540 for full glow when first energized or when
ii) Football (see Notes 1 and 2) there is power interruption may necessitate
Class I 1 100
II 540
use of incandescent lighting system to provide
III 320 emergency standby illumination in spectator
IV 220 areas.
iii) Gymnasiums
Matches 540 For sports events, where colour rendition is important,
General exercising 320 use of fluorescent mercury lamps is recommended.
Hockey (field) 220
iv) Racing 5.5.1.5 Miscellaneous considerations for lighting
Bicycle 320
Horse 220 a) While selecting and installing high intensity
v) Rifle (outdoor) discharge or fluorescent lamps in multipur-
Targets 540 (vertical)
Firing point 110 pose stadia, it is necessary to connect lamps
Range 54 on alternate phases of supply to avoid flicker
vi) Swimming on rapidly moving objects. Where a quite
a) Indoor Exhibition 540
Underwater1) 100 W/m2 of surface
surrounding is required in order to avoid
area ballast hum, remote mounting of ballasts shall
b) Outdoor Exhibition 220 be considered.
Underwater 60 percent of indoor
Tennis (laws) Indoor 540 b) Efforts shall be required to coordinate the
Outdoor 320 lighting design for sports events with the
Table tennis 540 illumination requirements for TV or film
Volleyball 220
coverage. A horizontal illumination in excess
NOTES of 300 lux is considered adequate for
1 It is generally conceded that the distance between the operation of black and white TV and film
spectators and the play is primary consideration for recording. Colour recording calls for more
football, as well as the potential seating capacity of the
stand. The following classification is therefore described. stringent requirements. Colour filming may
Class I — 30 000 spectators, over 30 m minimum also need lamps having correlated colour
distance. temperature of between 3 000 K to 7 000 K.
Class II — 10 000-30 000 spectators, over 15-30 m
minimum distance. For film/TV coverage, data on the following
Class III — 5 000-10 000 spectators, over 10-15 m shall be necessary:
minimum distance.
Class IV — 5 000 spectators, over 10 m minimum 1) Camera sensitivity,
distance.
2) Exposure time, and
2 For football, uniform illumination shall be provided at
ground level as well as vertically for 15 m above ground. 3) Effective aperture.
1)
Levels recommended are for incandescent lamps. For c) Group switching — Group switching of
discharge lamps W/m2 would be reduced depending upon luminaries is recommended to have maximum
the efficiency of light source. In order that the installed
flux.
energy saving, after considering the following
factors as well:

PART 3 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS IN NON-INDUSTRIAL BUILDINGS 263

SP 30 : 2011

1) Separate switching for lighting outside Section 11 of this Code.

the stadia,
In large grandstand stadia, the effect of time delay for
2) Requirement of lighting for training the sound from the loudspeakers to reach different
purpose, sections of the audience would be significant. This shall
3) Requirement of lighting for tournaments be avoided in taking proper precautions in the design
with film and TV coverage, and of electrical audio systems.
4) Separate switching for playing arenas.
7.2 Control Room
5.5.2 Air-conditioning
The various communication needs of large stadia is
5.5.2.1 The requirements for air-conditioning and normally met with by electronic equipment centrally
ventilation as laid down in Part 1/Sec 14 of this Code controlled, requiring specific power supply, and other
shall apply. installation conditions. This would call for special
5.5.3 Lifts and Escalators wiring systems with synchronizing systems. The
technical requirements for these systems concerning
The general rules laid down in Part 1/Section 14 of voltage and frequency stability are very high. These
this Code shall apply. shall be considered before designing the electrical
services of the same.
6 TESTING OF INSTALLATIONS
7.3 Electrical/Electronic Score Board
The various tests on the installation shall be carried
out as laid down in Part 1/Section 10 of this Code. The power requirements for such equipment would
depend on the type of equipment to be installed.
7 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS Guidelines of the manufacturer shall be adhered to.
7.1 Electrical Audio Systems 7.4 Clock System
The general provisions for the installation of public Reference shall be made to the provisions in Part 1/
address systems shall be as laid down in Part 1/ Section 11 of this Code.

264 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

SECTION 7 SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL

INSTALLATIONS IN MULTISTORIED BUILDINGS

0 FOREWORD 4 SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS

The design and construction of electrical installations Special considerations shall have to be given in respect
in multistoried buildings call for special attention to of the following requirements for the electrical
details pertaining to fire-safety of the occupancy. installations in multistoried buildings:
While on the one hand, the civil design aspects are
a) Internal wiring for lighting, ventilation, call
more stringent for high-rise buildings than for
bell system, outlets for appliances, power and
buildings of low heights, the electrical design
control wiring for special equipments like
engineer, on his part had to ensure that the fire hazards
lifts, pumps, blowers, etc;
from the use of electric power is kept to the lowest
possible limit. b) Distribution of electric power;
c) Generators for standby electric supply;
In drafting the requirements of electrical installations
d) Telephone wiring;
in various occupancies it was felt that a separate
compendium giving the specific requirements e) Fire safety;
applicable to multistoried buildings should be brought f) Lightning protection;
out. For editorial convenience, such details have been g) Common antenna system;
stated in this Section where the major non-industrial h) Clock system;
occupancies have been covered. j) Building Management System (BMS);
In applying the provisions of this Section, note shall k) EPABX with P&T lines; and
also be taken of the nature of occupancy of the high- m) Broad Band Multi Service facility.
rise buildings and a judicious choice of alternative
features shall be made. 5 EXCHANGE OF INFORMATION

1 SCOPE 5.1 The detailed requirements of the owner shall be

assessed at the planning stage.
1.1 This Part 3/ Section 7 is intended to cover specific
requirements for electrical installations in multistoried 5.2 It is necessary that right at the planning stages, the
buildings. requirements of space for accommodating the
distribution equipment for the various electrical
1.2 The requirements specified here are in addition to services and openings required in slabs for vertical
those specified in respective sections of the Code, and risers for such services are assessed and incorporated
are specifically applicable for buildings more than 15 m in drawings in due coordination with the architect and
in height. structural designer. Care shall be taken to provide
adequate and where necessary, independent spaces for
2 REFERENCES
the equipment for electrical services for different
This Part 3/Section 7 of the Code should be read in functions.
conjunction with the following Indian Standards:
5.3 Multistoried buildings are usually in framed design.
IS No. Title Coordination with the architect is required in evolving
suitable layout of lights, fans and other outlets and the
SP 7 : 2005 National Building Code of India
position for their switch controls to take care of
2309 : 1989 Code of practice for the protection
functional utility and flexibility.
of buildings and allied structures
against lightning 5.4 While designing the electrical services, due
10028 (Part 2) : Code of practice for selection, consideration should be given for conservation of energy.
1981 installation and maintenance of
5.5 The voltage of supply and location of energy meters
transformers: Part 2 Installation
(especially in multistoried buildings meant for
residential purposes) shall be agreed to between the
3 TERMINOLOGY utility and the owner of the building. Spaces for
For the purposes of this Section, the definitions given accommodating the distribution and metering
in Part 1/Section 2 of the Code shall apply. equipment of utility should be accordingly provided
for by coordinating with the architect and licensee.

PART 3 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS IN NON-INDUSTRIAL BUILDINGS 265

SP 30 : 2011

5.6 The telephone authorities shall be consulted for supply should be obtained from the licencee and fault
the requirements of space for accommodating the levels at salient points in the distribution system
distribution equipment, battery, etc, for the telephone assessed. Distribution system component should be
services. selected to satisfy the same.
5.7 The local fire brigade authorities shall be consulted 7.1 Building Substation
in the matter of system layout for fire detection and
alarm systems to comply with local bye-laws. The 7.1.1 The provisions contained in Part 2 of this Code
locations of control panel and indication panel shall shall apply.
be decided in consultation with the owner. 7.1.2 A substation or a switch-station with apparatus
5.8 Runs of roof conductors and down conductors for having, more than 2 000 litre of oil shall not ordinarily
lightning protection shall be coordinated with the be located in the basement where proper oil drainage
architects of the building. The requirements as laid arrangements cannot be provided. If transformers are
down in Part 1/Section 15 of this Code shall be housed in the building below the ground level, they
complied with. shall necessarily be in the first basement in a separate
fire-resisting room of 4-h rating. The room shall
6 ASSESSMENT OF CHARACTERISTICS OF necessarily be at the periphery of the basement. The
MULTISTORIED BUILDINGS entrance to the room shall be provided with a fire-
resisting door of 2-h fire rating. A curb (sill) of a
6.0 The general characteristics of buildings depending
suitable height shall be provided at the entrance in order
on the type of occupancy are assessed based on me
to prevent the flow of oil from a ruptured transformer
guidelines given in relevant sections of this Code,
into other parts of the basement. Direct access to the
together with those given in Part 1/Section 8.
transformer room shall be provided, preferably from
6.1 For the purposes of multistoried buildings in outside. The switchgears shall be housed in a room
addition to other external influences depending on the separated from the transformer bays by a fire-resisting
type of occupancy, the electrical installation engineer wall with fire resistance of not less than 4 h.
shall specifically take note of characteristics BD2, BD4
7.1.3 The transformer, if housed in basement, shall be
and CB2 given in Table 1 of Part 1/Section 8 of this
protected by an automatic high velocity water spray
Code.
system. The transformer may be exempted from such
7 DISTRIBUTION OF ELECTRIC POWER protection if their individual oil capacity is less than
5 000 litres.
7.0 Load Assessment and Equipment Selection
7.1.4 In case the transformers are housed in the
7.0.1 The electrical load shall be assessed considering basements, totally segregated from other areas of the
the following: basements by 4-h fire-resisting wall/walls with an
a) Lighting and power loads; access directly from outside, they may be protected
by carbon dioxide or BCF (bromochloro difluro
b) Special loads of equipments as in laborato-
methane) or BTM (bromotrifluro methane) fixed
ries, hospitals, data processing areas, etc;
installation system.
c) Air-conditioning/evaporative cooling/heating
services; 7.1.5 When housed at ground floor level, it/they shall
d) Water supply pumps; be cut off from the other portion of premises by fire-
resisting walls of 4-h fire resistance.
e) Fire fighting pumps;
f) Electric lifts; and 7.1.6 Oil-filled transformers shall not be housed on
g) Outdoor and security lighting. any floor above the ground floor.

The anticipated increase in load shall also be given 7.1.7 Soak pit of approved design shall be provided
due consideration. where the aggregate oil capacity of the apparatus does
not exceed 2 000 litres. Where the oil capacity exceeds
7.0.2 Suitable demand factors and diversity factors shall 2 000 litre, a tank of RCC construction of capacity
be applied depending on the operational and functional capable of accommodating entire oil of the
requirements. The distribution equipments shall be transformers shall be provided at a lower level to collect
selected by adopting standard ratings. Adequate spare the oil from the catch-pit in case of emergency. The
capacity should be provided for every component in pipe connecting the catch-pit to the tank shall be of
the distribution system. non-combustible construction and shall be provided
7.0.3 The fault level at the point of commencement of with a flame-arrester [see IS 10028 (Part 2)].

266 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

7.1.8 Only dry type of transformers should be used for g) In the cases of certain high rise buildings,
installation inside the residential/commercial buildings. provision of substation at intermediate floors
may be necessary for case of distribution. In
7.2 Distribution System such cases, non-inflammable cooling medium
7.2.0 Capacity and number of system components and shall be used for substation equipment from
the electrical distribution layout should be decided the point of view of fire safety.
considering the likely future requirements, security, 7.3.2 The vertical distribution mains should be located
grade of service desired and economics. The choice considering the following aspects:
between cables and metal rising mains for distribution
of power should be done depending on the load and a) Proximity to load centre;
the number of floors to be fed. b) Avoiding excess lengths of wiring for final
circuits and points;
7.2.1 In multistoried buildings where large number of
c) Avoiding crossing of expansion joint, if any,
people gather (for example office buildings), there shall
by horizontal runs of wiring;
be at least two rising mains located in separate shafts.
Each floor shall have a changeover switch for d) Avoiding proximity to water bound, areas like
connection to either of the two mains. toilets, water coolers, sanitary/air-
conditioning shafts, etc;
7.2.2 When cables are used for distribution to different
e) Easy maintainability from common areas like
floors, it may be desirable that cables feeding adjacent
lobbies, corridors, etc; and
floors are interconnected for use when distribution
f) Feasibility to provide distribution switch-
cables in either of the floors fail.
boards in individual floors vertically one over
7.2.3 It is essential to provide independent feeders for the other.
installations such as fire lift, fire alarm, fire pumps,
etc. 7.4 Wiring Installation
7.2.4 In the case of residential buildings, submain 7.4.1 The electrical wiring shall be carried out in
wiring to the flats/apartments shall be independent for conformity with Part 1/Section 9 of this Code.
each flat/apartment. 7.4.2 Aluminium conductor may be used for wiring
7.2.5 Twin earthing leads of adequate size shall be cables, but copper conductor may be preferred for fire-
provided along the vertical runs of rising mains. alarm, telephones, control circuits, etc.
7.4.3 Where excessively long lengths of wiring runs
7.3 Siting of Distribution Equipment
are inevitable to suit the building layout, the conductor
7.3.1 The following aspects shall be considered in sizes shall be suitably designed to keep the voltage
deciding the location of electric substation for drop within limits (see Part 1/Section 9 of this Code).
multistoried buildings:
7.4.4 The type and capacity of control switches shall
a) Easy access for purpose of movement of be selected to suit the loading, such as room air-
equipment in and out of the substation conditioners, water coolers, group control of
including fire fighting vehicles; fluorescent lights, etc.
b) Ventilation;
7.4.5 All switchgear equipment used for main-
c) Avoidance of flooding by rain water; distribution in multistoried buildings shall be metal
d) Feasibility of provision of cable ducts (keep- enclosed. Woodwork shall not be used for the
ing in view the bending radius of the cable), construction of switchboards.
oil soak pits (for large transformers) and entry
7.4.6 The electric distribution cables/wiring shall be
of utility’s cable(s);
laid in a separate duct. The duct shall be sealed at every
e) Transformer hum (and noise and vibration
alternative floor with non-combustible materials having
from diesel generating sets where provided
the same fire resistance as that of the duct. Low and
as part of the substation);
medium voltage wiring running in shaft and in false
f) Where a separate building for substation is ceiling shall run in separate conduits.
not possible, the same should preferably be
at ground floor level of the multistoried 7.4.7 Water mains, telephone lines, intercom lines, gas
building itself. In the case of a complex with pipes or any other service line shall not be laid in the
a number of buildings, the substation should duct for electric cables.
be located, as far as possible, near the load 7.4.8 Separate circuits for water pumps, lifts,
centre; and
PART 3 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS IN NON-INDUSTRIAL BUILDINGS 267
SP 30 : 2011

staircases and corridor lighting and blowers for 8 PROVISION OF STAND-BY GENERATING SET
pressurizing system shall be provided directly from
8.1 A centralized EPABX System with P&T lines shall
the main switchgear panel and these circuits shall
be installed for internal connection as well as for
be laid in separate conduit pipes, so that fire in one
external communication with essential services. The
circuit will not affect the others. Master switches
following loads shall be fed from the stand-by
controlling essential service circuits shall be clearly
generating set, to enable continuity of supply in the
labelled.
event of failure of mains:
7.4.9 The inspection panel doors and any other opening
a) Lighting in common areas, namely corridors,
in the shaft shall be provided with airtight fire doors
staircases, lift lobbies, entrance hall, common
having the fire resistance of not less than 1 h.
toilets, etc;
7.4.10 Medium and low voltage wiring running in b) Fire lift;
shafts, and within false ceiling shall run in metal c) Fire fighting pump, smoke extraction and
conduit. Any 230 V wiring for lighting or other damper systems;
services, above false ceiling, shall have 660 V grade
d) Fire alarm control panel;
insulation. The false ceiling, including all fixtures used
for its suspension, shall be of non-combustible material. e) Security lighting;
f) Obstruction light(s);
7.4.11 An independent and well-ventilated service
g) Water supply pump; and
room shall be provided on the ground floor with direct
access from outside or from the corridor for the purpose h) Any other functional and critical loads.
of termination of electric supply from the licensees, 8.2 The norms specified in Part 2 of this Code is
service and alternative supply cables. The doors applicable for locating DG sets.
provided for the service room shall have fire resistance
of not less than 2 h. 9 TELEPHONE WIRING SYSTEM
7.4.12 If the utility agree to provide meters on upper 9.1 On the basis of assessment of demand of direct
floors, the utility’s cables shall be segregated from telephones and EPABX lines, the conduit runs for
consumers’ cable by providing a partition in the duct. telephone wiring should be designed in consultation
Meter rooms on upper floors shall not open into with telephone department. Where telephone wiring
staircase enclosures and shall be ventilated directly to is intended to be taken on any other method, this should
open air outside. be coordinated with the architect and the telephone
department.
7.4.13 The staircase and corridor lighting shall be on
separate circuits and shall be independently connected 9.2 Lighting, ventilation and flooring in battery rooms
so as it could be operated by one switch installation on should be designed in accordance with the guidelines
the ground floor easily accessible to fire fighting staff in Part 2 of this Code.
at any time irrespective of the position of the individual
9.3 Suitable provisions should be made for cable entry
control of the light points, if any. It should be of MCB
and spaces for distribution components.
type of switch so as to avoid replacement of fuse in
case of crisis. 9.4 Where the layout of intercom telephones is known
in advance, provisions for wiring for the same may
7.4.14 Staircase and corridor lighting shall also be
also be made.
connected to alternative supply as defined in 8.1 for
buildings exceeding 24 m in height. For assembly 10 FIRE SAFETY
institutional buildings of height less than 24 m, the
alternative source of supply may be provided by battery 10.1 Consideration in respect of the following
continuously trickle charged from the electric mains. provisions is necessary from fire safety point of view:

7.4.15 Suitable arrangements shall be made by a) Fire detectors and alarm system;
installing double throw switches to ensure that the b) Fire fighting arrangements;
lighting installed in the staircase and the corridor c) Fire lift;
does not get connected to two sources of supply d) First-aid and fire fighting appliances;
simultaneously. Double throw switch shall be e) Construction of lift shafts, cable and rising
installed in the service room for terminating the main shafts, lobbies, substation, etc, from fire
standby supply. safety considerations; and
7.4.16 Emergency lights shall be provided in the f) Provision for pressurization of stairwells, lift
staircase/corridor. shafts, lobbies, etc.

268 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

10.2 Provisions contained in Part 1/Section 11 of this to a control panel in the control room in
Code and SP 7 shall be applicable in respect of the accordance with good practice so located that
above aspects. Any regulations of fire safety by local the floor number/zone where the call box is
municipal/fire authorities shall also be complied with. actuated is clearly indicated on the control panel.
The circuit shall also include one or more
10.3 The following specific guidelines shall be kept in
batteries with a capacity of 48 hours normal
view.
working at full load. The battery shall be
10.3.1 All buildings with heights of more than 15 m arranged to be continuously trickle charged from
shall be equipped with manually operated electrical the electric mains. The circuit may be connected
fire alarm (MOEFA) system and automatic fire alarm to alternative source of electric supply.
system. However, apartment and office buildings d) The call boxes shall be arranged to sound one
between 15 m and 24 m in height may be exempted or more sounders so as to ensure that all
from the installation of automatic fire alarm system appropriate occupants of the desired floor(s)
provided the local fire brigade is suitably equipped for
shall be warned whenever any call box is
dealing with fire above 15 m height and in the opinion
actuated.
of the Authority, such building does not constitute
hazard to the safety of the adjacent property or the e) The call boxes shall be so installed that they
occupants of the building itself. do not obstruct the exit-ways and yet their
location can easily be noticed from either
10.3.1.1 Manually operated electrical fire alarm system direction. The base of the call box shall be at
shall be installed in a building with one or more call a height of 1 m from the floor level.
boxes located at each floor. The call boxes shall
conform to the following: 10.3.1.2 The installation of call boxes in hostels and
such other places where these are likely to be misused,
a) The location of call boxes shall be decided shall as far as possible be avoided. Location of call
after taking into consideration the floor plan boxes in dwelling units shall preferably be inside the
with a view to ensuring that one or the other building.
call box shall be readily accessible to all
NOTES
occupants of the floor without having to travel
1 Several types of fire detectors are available in the market,
more than 22.5 m. but the application of each type is limited and has to be carefully
b) The call boxes shall be of the ‘break-glass’ type considered in relation to the type of risk and the structural
where the call is transmitted automatically to features of the building where they are to be installed. For
guidelines for selection of fire detection reference may be made
the control room without any other action on to relevant Indian Standard.
the part of the person operating the call box. 2 No automatic detector shall be required in any room or portion
The mechanism of operation of the call boxes of building which is equipped with an approved installation of
shall preferably be without any moving parts. automatic sprinklers.
However, where any moving part is
incorporated in the design of the call box, it 11 LIGHTNING PROTECTION
shall be of an approved type, so that there shall Provisions of lightning protection of multistoried
be no malfunctioning of the call box. buildings shall be made in conformity with Part 1/
c) All call boxes shall be wired in a closed circuit Section 15 of this Code and IS 2309.

PART 3 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS IN NON-INDUSTRIAL BUILDINGS 269

NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE
PART 4
 SP 30 : 2011

PART 4 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS IN

INDUSTRIAL BUILDINGS
0 FOREWORD
Electrical networks in industrial buildings serve the purpose of distributing the required power to the consuming
points where it is used for a multitude of purposes in the industry. The design of electrical installation in industrial
premises is therefore more complicated than those in non-industrial buildings.
Industrial installation has to take care of load requirements and supply limitations in a simple and economic
manner, ensuring at the same time full protection to human life and loss of property by fire. The network layout
should also facilitate easy maintenance and fault localization. Keeping in view the tariff structures as also the
economic necessity of conserving power to the maximum extent, power factor compensation assumes special
importance.
A particular feature of electrical installations in industrial buildings is the reliability of supply to essential operations
for which standby and emergency supply sources/networks had to be designed. The needs of such systems would
depend on the type and nature of the industrial works.
Locations in industrial buildings which are by their nature hazardous, require special treatment in respect of
design of electrical installations therein. Such special rules for hazardous areas are covered in Part 7 of the Code
and these shall be complied with in addition to the general rules specified in this Part (see also Part 7 of this
Code).
In clause 4 of this Part, an attempt has been made to classify industrial installations depending on the specified
criteria therein. Such a classification, it is hoped would help identify the specific nature of each industry and the
locations therein, assisting the design engineer in the choice of equipment and methods.

PART 4 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS IN INDUSTRIAL BUILDINGS 273

SP 30 : 2011

1 SCOPE a) Subdivision G-1 — Buildings used for low hazard

industries — Includes any building in which the
1.1 This Part 4 of the Code covers the guidelines for
contents are of such low combustibility and the
design and construction of electrical installations in
industrial processes or operations conducted
industrial buildings.
therein are of such a nature that there are no
1.2 This Part 4 does not cover specific areas in industrial possibilities for any self-propagating fire to occur
sites, such as office buildings, workers rest rooms, and the only consequent danger to life and
medical facilities, canteen annexe, etc, for which property may arise from panic, fumes or smoke,
requirements stipulated in the relevant sections of Part 3 or fire from some external source.
of the Code apply. b) Subdivision G-2 — Buildings used for
1.3 This Part 4 also does not cover locations in moderate hazard industries — Includes any
industrial sites that are by nature hazardous for which building in which the contents or industrial
the provisions of Part 7 of the Code apply. processes of operations conducted therein are
liable to give rise to a fire which will burn
2 REFERENCES with moderate rapidity and give off a
considerable volume of smoke but from which
This Part 4 should be read in conjunction with the
neither toxic fumes nor explosions are to be
Indian Standards listed at Annex A.
feared in the event of fire.
3 TERMINOLOGY c) Subdivision G-3 — Buildings used for high
hazard industries — Includes any building in
For the purpose of this Part 4, the definitions given in which the contents or industrial processes or
Part 1/Section 2 of the Code and the following shall operations conducted therein are liable to give
apply: rise to a fire which will burn with extreme
3.1 Pollution — Any condition of foreign matter, solid, rapidity or from which poisonous fumes or
liquid or gaseous (ionized gases), that may affect explosions are to be feared in the event of fire.
dielectric strength or surface resistivity NOTE — SP 7 includes Group J buildings for such
location where storage, handling, manufacture or
3.2 Pollution Degree (of Environmental Conditions) processing of highly combustible or explosive materials
— Conventional number based on the amount of or products are being carried out. Such installations
including such high hazard locations in Group G
conductive or hygroscopic dust, ionized gas or salt and classification shall comply with the special rules of
on the relative humidity and its frequency of Part 7 of the Code.
occurrence, resulting in hygroscopic absorption or
condensation of moisture leading to reduction in 4.1.2 Typical list of industries for different class of fire
dielectric strength and/or surface resistivity. hazard are given in Annex B.

4 CLASSIFICATION OF INDUSTRIAL 4.2 Classification Based on Power Consumption

BUILDINGS 4.2.1 Industrial buildings are also classified depending
Industrial buildings by definition include any building on the quantum of electric power requirements for its
or part of building or structure, in which products or services as given in Table 1.
materials of all kinds and properties are stored, 4.2.2 Loads within the industrial site could be divided
fabricated, assembled, manufactured or processes, for depending on their nature and size. For guidance, the
example, assembly plants, laboratories, dry cleaning classification given in Table 2 shall be referred to.
plants, pumping stations, refineries, dairies, saw mills,
chemical plants, workshops, distilleries, steel plants, etc. 4.3 Classification Based on Pollution
Industrial installations are of various types and in a For the propose of evaluating creepage distances and
single industrial site, electrical loads of varying clearances, the following four degrees of pollution in
requirements are to be met. For the purpose of this the micro-environment are established:
Part, industries are classified based on three criteria as a) Pollution degree 1 — No pollution or only
given in 4.1 to 4.3. dry, non-conductive pollution occurs. The
4.1 Classification Based on Fire Safety pollution has no influence.
b) Pollution degree 2 — Only non-conductive
4.1.1 Industrial buildings are classified into Group G pollution occurs except that occasionally a
from the fire safety point of view in SP 7. Buildings temporary conductivity caused by
under Group G are further subdivided as follows: condensation is to be expected.

274 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

Table 1 Classification Based on Power which becomes conductive due to

Consumption condensation — which is to be expected.
(Clause 4.2.1) d) Pollution degree 4 — Continuous
conductivity occurs due to conductive dust,
Sl No. Description1) Average Examples
Power
rain or other wet conditions.
Requirement NOTES
(1) (2) (3) (4) 1 Clearances and creepage distances according to the different
i) Light Up to 50 kVA Hosiery, tailoring and pollution degrees are given in Tables 13 and 15 of IS/IEC
industries jewellery 60947-1. Unless otherwise stated by the relevant product
ii) Average Above 50 kVA Machinery, engine standard, equipment for industrial applications is generally for
industries up to 2 000 fitting, motor cars, use in pollution degree 3 environment. However, other pollution
kVA aircraft, light pressings, degrees may be considered to apply depending upon particular
furniture, pottery, glass, applications or the micro-environment.
tobacco, electrical 2 The pollution degree of the micro-environment for the
manufacturing and equipment may be influenced by installation in an enclosure.
textile (see Note) Means may be provided to reduce pollution at the insulation
iii) Heavy Above 2 000 Heavy electrical under consideration by effective use of enclosures,
industries kVA equipment, rolling encapsulation or hermetic sealing. Such means to reduce
mills, structural steel pollution may not be effective when the equipment is subject
works, tube making, to condensation or if, in normal operation, it generates
foundries, locomotives, pollutants itself.
ship-building and 3 Pollution will become conductive in the presence of humidity.
repairing, chemical Pollution caused by contaminated water, soot, metal or carbon
factories, factories for dust is inherently conductive. Small clearances can be bridged
metal extraction from completely by solid particles, dust and water and therefore
ores, etc.
minimum clearances are specified where pollution may be
NOTE — Average factory installations are set apart from present in the micro—environment.
heavy industries in that the former has no conditions
requiring specialized or exceptional treatment. 5 GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS OF
1)
Terminology based on IS 732. Where different degrees of INDUSTRIAL BUILDINGS
hazard occupancy exist in different parts of building, the
most hazardous of those shall govern the classification for General guidelines on the assessment of characteristics
the purpose.
of installations in buildings are given in Part 1 of the
Code. For the purposes of installations falling under
Table 2 Load Groups in Industrial Buildings the scope of this Part 4, the characteristics given below
(Clause 4.2.2) shall apply.
Sl. Groups Type to Load Examples Corrected 5.1 Environment
No. Power
Factor 5.1.1 The following environmental factors shall apply
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
to industrial installations:
i) 1 Small and large loads Repair shop, >0.85
fairly evenly distributed automatic
over the whole area and lathe, Environment Characteristics Remarks
loaded constantly during workshop, (1) (2) (3)
the working day spinning
(precision mechanical mill, Presence of Presence of water Depends on the
engineering) weaving mill water negligible, or location. For
ii) 2 Loads fairly evenly Tool making do possibilities of free further details
distributed over the Press shop do falling drops or see Part 1/Sec 8
whole area, but varying
loads and with peak load Machine do sprays of the Code
shop
at different times (for
do
Presence of These conditions Depends on the
example metal working Welding foreign solid include possibilities location. For
industry) shop
bodies of presence of further details
iii) 3 Loads having very high Heat do
power requirement in treatment
foreign solid bodies see Part 1/Sec 8
conjunction with smaller shop, steel of various sizes of the Code
loads of negligible size works, likely to affect
compared to the total rolling mills electrical equipment
load (for example, raw
material, industry)
(such as tools,
wires, dust, etc.)
c) Pollution degree 3 — Conductive pollution Presence of Atmospheric where Industrial
occurs or dry non-conductive pollution occurs corrosive the presence of installations,

PART 4 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS IN INDUSTRIAL BUILDINGS 275

SP 30 : 2011

Environment Characteristics Remarks Utilization Characteristics Remarks

(1) (2) (3) (1) (2) (3)
polluting corrosive or situated by the Contact of Persons are Locations with
substances polluting substances sea, chemical persons with frequently in touch extraneous
is significant works, cement earth with extraneous conducting
works where the potential conductive parts or parts, either
pollution arises stand on conducting numerous or
due to abrasive, surfaces large area
insulating or Persons are in Metallic
conducting permanent contact surrounding
ducts with metallic such as boilers
Intermittent or Factory surroundings and and tanks
accidental laboratories for whom the
subjection to boiler rooms, possibility of
corrosive or etc. interrupting contact
polluting chemical is limited
substances being Conditions Low density This category
used or produced of occupation, easy applies to
Continuous Chemical works evacuation conditions of buildings of
pollution evacuation normal or low
Mechanical Impact and Household and height
stresses vibration of low similar Nature of Existence of fire- Wood-working
severity conditions processed or risks, where there shop, paper
Impact/vibration of Industrial stored is manufacture, factories, textile
high severity installations material processing or mills, etc
subject to severe storage of
conditions flammable
materials, including
Seismic — Depends on the presence of dust
effect and location of the
lighting buildings Processing or Oil refineries,
storage of low- hydrocarbon
flash-point stores
5.2 Utilization — The following aspects utilization materials including
shall apply: presence of
explosive dust
Utilization Characteristics Remarks
(1) (2) (3)
5.3 Compatibility
Capability of Instructed persons, Majority of
persons adequately advised persons utilizing In industrial installations, an assessment shall also be
or supervised by the industrial made of any characteristics of equipment likely to have
skilled persons installations are harmful effects upon other equipment or other services
(operating and in this category. (see Part 1/Section 8 of the Code).
maintenance staff) However specific
zones or 5.4 Maintainability
operations
involving Assessment shall also be made of the frequency and
uninstructed quality of maintenance of the installation (see
persons shall also Part 1/Section 8 of the Code).
be kept in view
6 SUPPLY CHARACTERISTICS AND
Persons with Closed operating PARAMETERS
technical areas
knowledge and 6.0 General
sufficient
experience 6.0.1 The arrangement of the electrical system in
(engineers and industrial plants and the selection of electrical
technicians) equipment depends largely on the type of

276 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

manufacturing process, the reliability of supply and 6.1.3 In cases where the load currents are very high,
adequate reserve of electrical capacity are the most and the transformers are located just outside the
important factors to avoid interruption of supply. building, a bus-trunking arrangement may be desirable.
These trunkings should, however, be straight, as far as
6.0.2 All electrical installation shall be suitable for the
possible, and also as short as possible on economic
voltage and frequency of supply available.
grounds.
6.0.3 For large loads, the relative advantage of high 6.1.4 Location of Transformers and Switchgear
voltage three-phase supply should be considered.
Though the use of high voltage supply entails the Oil filled transformers are preferably located outdoors
provision of space and the capital cost of providing a while the associated switchgear is located in a room of
suitable transformer substation on the consumer’s the building next to the transformer. In certain cases,
premises, the following advantages are gained: however, it may be considered desirable to locate the
transformer inside the room.
a) Advantage in tariff,
For reasons of safety, however, it may be considered
b) More effective earth fault protection for heavy
desirable to locate the transformer also inside the room.
current circuits,
The transformer could be connected to the switchgear
c) Elimination of interference with supplies to by cables for small loads, however it may often be
other consumers permitting the use of large found desirable to avoid cable joints and connect the
size motors, welding plant, etc., and transformer directly to the switchgear placed on either
d) Better control of voltage regulation and more side of the transformer. For oil-filled transformer,
constant supply voltage. special means should be available for remote operation
of the main switches/circuit-breakers in an emergency
6.0.4 In very large industrial buildings where heavy
created by explosion/fire in the transformers.
electric demands occur at scattered locations, the
economics of electrical distribution at high voltage 6.1.5 In order to ensure the reliability and safety of
from the main substation to other subsidiary industrial sub-station, it is desirable to have circuit
transformer substations or to certain items of plant, breakers as the main switching elements on both sides
such as large motors, furnaces, etc, should be evaluated. of the transformers. However, a high voltage sizes,
The relative economy attainable by use of medium or switches and fuses may also be used for this purpose
high voltage distribution and high voltage plant is a upto the limit specified under Rule 50, sub-rule 1 of
matter for expert judgement and individual assessment Indian Electricity Rules, 1956.
in the light of experience by a professionally qualified 6.1.6 For small substations up to 1 600 kVA capacity,
electrical engineer. it is also possible to locate the substation at the load
centre, without a separate room. This yields
6.1 Industrial Substations
considerable economies in cost. In such cases, the
6.1.0 The general requirements for substation transformer shall be of dry type.
installations given in Part 2 of the Code shall apply in
6.1.7 Isolation of Switchgear
addition to those given below.
For installations where the system voltage exceeds
6.1.1 If the load demand is high, which requires supply
650 V, the typical circuits and the recommended
at voltages above 650 V, a separate substation should
location of isolating switches in such circuits are
be set up. For an outdoor substation general guidelines
illustrated in IS 732. Reference should be made to the
as given in Part 2 of the Code shall apply. For bringing
same for guidance regarding isolation depending on
the supply into the factory building, a separate indoor
the type of supply system.
accommodation, as close as possible to the main load
centre, should be provided to house the switchgear 6.2 Distribution of Power
equipment.
6.2.1 From the main receiving station, power is taken
6.1.2 The supply conductors should preferably be to the loads, either directly as in the case of small
brought into the building underground to reduce the factories, or through further load centre substations as
possibility of interruption of power supply. The would be the case with bigger installations.
accommodation for substation equipment as well as
Distribution is done on HV through circuit breaker/
for main distribution panel shall be properly chosen
load break switches depending on quantum of load to
so as to prevent access by any unauthorized person.
be transferred, distance to be covered, and on similar
It shall be provided with proper ventilation and
factors. MV/LV distribution is possible through one
lighting.
of the following:

PART 4 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS IN INDUSTRIAL BUILDINGS 277

SP 30 : 2011

a) Wall-mounted distribution boards, 6.2.3.4 Switchboards should, preferably, be located in

b) Floor mounted distribution boards, separate rooms to ensure:
c) Local fuse distribution boards, and a) adequate protection against weather elements
d) Overhead bus bar system with tap-off holes. like heat, dust, corrosion, etc; and
6.2.2 In every layout, however, specific care shall be b) protection against entry of factory material
taken for: like cotton, wood dust, water during clean-
ing, etc.
a) Human safety,
b) Fire/explosion hazards, Where necessary the control rooms should be designed
c) Accessibility for repair/checking, to avoid wide fluctuations in ambient temperature, and
d) Easy identification, and against entry of excessive dust or corrosive gases.
e) Fault localization. 6.2.3.5 Certain applications may necessitate location
6.2.3 Switchgear of the switchboards on the factory floor itself, without
separate rooms. In such cases, the switchboards shall
6.2.3.0 All switchgear equipment used in industrial be specifically designed and protected against hazards
installations shall be metal enclosed. Woodwork shall mentioned above.
not be used for mounting off switchboards.
6.3 Main Distribution
6.2.3.1 MV switchgear isolation and protection of
outgoing circuits forming main distribution system may 6.3.1 For power distribution from a substation or main
be effected by means of circuit-breakers, or switchfuse switchboard to a number of separate buildings, use shall
units mounted on the main switchboards. The choice preferably be made of;
between alternative types of equipment may be
influenced by the following considerations: a) metal-sheathed, bedded and armoured cable,
served, installed overhead/underground, or
a) In certain installations where supply is from
b) mineral-insulated metal-sheathed cable,
remote transformer substations, it may be
served with PVC, laid overhead/direct in the
necessary to protect main circuits with circuit-
ground, or
breakers operated by earth leakage trips, in
order to ensure effective earth fault protection. c) PVC-insulated, armoured and PVC-sheathed
cable installed overhead/underground, or
b) Where large electric motors, furnaces or other
heavy electrical equipment is installed, the d) XLPE insulated, armoured and PVC-sheathed
main circuits shall be protected by metal-clad cable installed overhead/underground.
circuit-breakers or contactors of air-break or 6.3.1.1 Cables shall not be laid in the same trench or
oil-immersed type fitted with suitable alongside a water main.
instantaneous and time delay over current
devices together with earth leakage and back- 6.3.1.2 Cable trenches shall be made with sufficient
up protection where necessary. additional space to provide for anticipated future
c) In installations other than those referred to in extensions.
(a) and (b) or where overloading of circuits 6.3.2 Cables at difference voltage levels should be
may be considered unlikely to occur, HRC laid with separation at least 250 mm and clearly
type fuses will normally afford adequate identified. Cables at voltages above 1 000 V should be
protection for main circuits. Where means for laid at the lowest level in trenches, and at the highest
isolating main circuits is required, fuse switch level on walls, keeping in view the requirements of
or switch fuse units shall be used or fuses with
human safety. The cable routes where buried should
switches forming part of the mean switch-
be properly identified by route markers, as a precaution
board shall be used.
against accidents. The marker should necessarily
6.2.3.2 It may be necessary to provide for connection indicate the voltage level. Cables laid underground or
of capacitors for power-factor correction; and when at low working levels, should either be with armouring,
capacitors are to be installed advice of capacitor and or should be adequately protected against mechanical
switchgear manufacturers shall be sought. damage, for example, by the use of conduits.
6.2.3.3 Adequate passageways shall be allowed so that 6.4 Sub-circuits
access to all switchboards for operation and
maintenance is available. Sufficient additional space 6.4.0 The sub-circuit wiring shall conform in general
shall be provided for anticipated future extensions. to the requirements given in IS 732.

278 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

6.4.1 In 3-phase distribution systems, a neutral motor is less than 20 percent of the total rating of all
conductor may preferably be provided in all sub- the ways of the distribution boards. Where the supply
main circuits even when there is no immediate is taken from such a distribution board, the motor
requirement for the supply of single-phase circuits. circuit shall be clearly labelled.
Control devices are often designed for connection
between one phase and neutral and considerable 6.5 Selection of Wiring Systems
extra cost may be involved, if a four-wire sub-main The selection of a wiring system to be adopted in a
has to be installed in place of a three-wire sub-main factory depends upon the factors enumerated in Part 1/
previously installed. Section 9 of the Code.
6.4.2 In workshops and factories where alterations and The wiring system available for general use are listed
additions are frequent, it may be economical and in Annex C. Selection from a group of alternative
convenient to install wiring in ducts or trunking. systems shall be made in accordance with Annex C,
Alternatively, cables may be conveniently run on keeping in view the particular circumstances of each
perforated metal cable trays. In this case earth circuit having regard to,
continuity conductor shall be bonded to each section
of ducts or trunking to provide permanency of the a) location, structural conditions, liability to
electrical continuity of the joints of the ducts. mechanical damage and the possibility of
corrosion;
6.4.3 In machine shops and factories where alterations
b) protection against corrosion, nature of the
in layout may repeatedly occur, consideration shall be
corrosive elements being taken into account
given to the replacement of local distribution boards
in conjunction with the protective coverings
by overhead bus-bar or cable systems, to which
available;
subcircuit are connected through fused plugs in tapping
c) occupancy of the building; and
boxes wherever required.
d) presence of dust, fluff, moisture and tem-
6.4.4 In industrial installations, the branch distribution perature conditions.
boards shall be totally segregated for single phase
wiring. 6.6 Earthing in Industrial Premises
6.4.5 Where more than one distribution system is 6.6.0 In factories and workshops all metal conduits,
necessary, the socket outlets shall be so selected as to trunking, cable sheaths, switchgear, distribution fuse
obviate inadvertent wrong connections. boards, starters, motors and all other parts made of
metal shall be bonded together and connected to an
6.4.6 In industrial premises, 3-phase and neutral socket
efficient earth system. The electricity regulations made
outlets shall be provided with earth terminal either of
under the Factories Act require that adequate
pin type or scrapping type in addition to the main pins
precautions shall be taken to prevent non-current-
required for the purpose.
carrying metal work of the installation from becoming
In industrial installations, socket outlets of rating 30 A electrically charged.
and above shall be provided with interlocked type
In larger installations, having one or more substations,
switch. These shall be of metal clad type.
it is recommended to parallel all earth-continuity
6.4.7 Where non-luminous heating appliance is to be system.
used, pilot lamps shall be arranged to indicate when
6.6.1 Earth Electrodes
the circuit is live.
Any of the earth electrodes as mentioned in Part 1 of
6.4.8 Final sub-circuits for lighting shall be so arranged
the Code except cable sheath, may be used in industrial
that all the lighting points for a given area are fed from
premises.
more than one final sub-circuit.
6.6.2 Earth-continuity Conductor
6.4.9 Individual sub-mains shall be installed to supply
passenger and goods lifts from the main or sub-main 6.6.2.1 Earth-continuity conductors and earth wires
switchgear, and the lift manufacturer shall be not contained in the cables
consulted as to the appropriate rating of cables to be
The size of the earth-continuity conductors should be
employed.
correlated with the size of the current carrying
The supply to small hoists and service lifts shall not conductors, that is, the sizes of earth-continuity
be taken from a distribution board controlling final sub- conductors should not be less than half of the largest
circuits for lighting, unless the maximum current, current-carrying conductor, provided the minimum size
including the starting and accelerating current, of the of earth-continuity conductors is not less than 1.5 mm2

PART 4 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS IN INDUSTRIAL BUILDINGS 279

SP 30 : 2011

for copper and 2.5 mm2 for aluminium and need not be 6.6.3.2 It shall be ascertained that the fixed wiring at
greater than 70 mm2 for copper and 120 mm2 for the appliance inlet terminals has been done correctly
aluminium. As regards the sizes of galvanized iron and and in accordance with relevant Indian Standard.
steel earth-continuity conductors, they may be equal to
6.6.3.3 A single pole switch shall not be connected in
the size of the current carrying conductors with which
the earth conductor.
they are used. The size of earth-continuity conductors to
be used along with aluminium current-carrying 6.6.3.4 No twisted or taped joints shall be used in earth
conductors should be calculated on the basis of equivalent wires.
size of the copper current-carrying conductors.
6.6.3.5 Additional security may be obtained by
6.6.2.2 Earth-continuity conductors and earth wires arranging the earth-continuity conductor in the flexible
contained in the cables cable between the socket outlet and the portable
For flexible cables, the size of the earth-continuity appliance in the form of a loop through which a light
conductors should be equal to the size of the current- circulating current provided by a small low-voltage
carrying conductors and for metal sheathed, PVC and transformer is passed when the appliance is in use. Any
tough rubber sheathed cables the sizes of the earth- discontinuity in this loop will interrupt the circulating
continuity conductors shall be in accordance with current and can thus be caused to operate a relay and
relevant Indian Standard. disconnect the supply from the portable appliance.

6.6.2.3 Conduits may be used as earth-continuity 6.6.4 Earthing of Electrically Driven Machine Tools
conductors provided they are permanently and securely
In all types of machine tools connected to medium
connected to the earth system. However, where by
voltage, the body of all motors and bed plate of the
nature of the process, metal conduits cannot be used
machine shall be earthed at two places by means of a
as earth-continuity conductor on account of corrosion,
strip or conductors of adequate cross-sectional area.
etc, the tough rubber or PVC sheathed cables may be
The strip or conductor shall be securely fastened to
used in which case they shall incorporate an earth-
the bed plate by means of bolts.
continuity conductor.
6.6.5 Earthing of Electric Arc Welding Equipment
6.6.2.4 Flexible conduits shall not be used as earth-
continuity conductors. A separate earth wire shall be 6.6.5.1 All components of electric arc welding
provided either inside or outside the flexible conduits equipment shall be effectively bonded and connected
which shall be connected by means of earth clips to to earth. The transformers and separate regulators
the earth system at one end and to the equipment at the forming multioperator sets and capacitors for power
other end. factor correction, if used, shall be included in the
bonding.
6.6.2.5 Earth leakage protection
Use of earth leakage protection shall be made where 6.6.5.2 All terminals on the output side of a motor
greater sensitivity than provided by overcurrent generator set shall be insulated from the car case and
protection is necessary. With a good earth electrode, control panel, as the generator is not connected
overload protective devices may be used as earth electrically to a motor and therefore the welding circuit
leakage protective device. is electrically separate from the supply circuit including
the earth.
In addition to the advantage of sensitivity gained by
such methods, the circuits may be relieved of the 6.6.5.3 In case of transformer sets, which for welding
thermal and mechanical socks associated with the purpose are double wound, an ‘earth and work’ terminal
clearance of heavy faults. shall be provided. In single phase sets this terminal
shall be connected to one end of the secondary winding
Some degree of discrimination may, in certain cases, and in case of three-phase sets this shall be connected
be introduced with advantage by providing the delay to the neutral point of the secondary winding.
in the operation of an earth-leakage trip, so that earth
faults on smaller subsidiary circuits protected by fuses 6.6.6 Earthing of Industrial Electronic Apparatus
have time to clear and prevent the opening of the circuit-
6.6.6.0 The earthing of these apparatus shall follow
breaker, controlling a larger part of the installation.
normal practice but attention shall be paid to the points
6.6.3 Earthing of Portable Appliances and Tools discussed below.
6.6.3.1 Good electrical continuity between the body 6.6.6.1 Any industrial electronic apparatus which
of a portable appliance and the earth-continuity derives its supply from two-pin plugs incorporates
conductor shall always be maintained. small capacitors connected between the supply and the

280 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

metal case of the instrument to cut down interference. interrupting any short-circuit current that may occur,
This capacitor shall be securely earthed. without danger. The ratings and settings of fuses and
the protective devices shall be coordinated so as to
6.6.6.2 When an oscilloscope is being used to examine
afford selectivity in operation where necessary.
the wave-form of a high frequency source, the
oscilloscope shall be earthed by a conductor entirely 8.1.2 Where circuit-breakers are used for protection
separate from that used by the source of high frequency of a main circuit and of the sub-circuits derived
power. However, when an oscilloscope is being used therefrom, discrimination in operation may be achieved
on a circuit where the negative is above earth potential by adjusting the protective devices of the sub-main
and also connected to its metallic case, the earthing of circuit-breakers to operate at lower current settings and
the oscilloscope is not possible. Precautions shall be shorter time-lag than the main circuit-breaker.
taken that in such a case the oscilloscope is suitably
8.1.3 Where HRC type fuses are used for backup
protected from other apparatus.
protection of circuit-breakers, or where HRC fuses are
6.6.6.3 High frequency induction heating apparatus used for protection of main circuits and circuit-breakers
shall be earthed by means of separate earth wire by as for the protection of sub-circuits derived therefrom, in
direct a route as possible. the event of short circuits exceeding the breaking
capacity of the circuit-breakers, the HRC fuses shall
6.6.6.4 Dielectric loss heating equipment work at
operate earlier than the circuit-breakers; but for smaller
frequencies between 10 MHz to 60 MHz according to
overloads within the breaking capacity of the circuit-
its use. These should not be directly earthed. At
breakers, the circuit-breakers shall operate earlier than
30 MHz, for example, a quarter wavelength is nearly
the HRC fuse.
250 cm and an earth wire of this length or odd multiples
of it is capable of being at earth potential at one end 8.1.4 If rewirable type fuses are used to protect
but several hundred volts at the other end. This is due sub-circuits derived form a main circuit protected by
to the presence of standing waves on the earth HRC type fuses, the main circuit fuse shall normally
conductors which besides being dangerous can result blow in the event of a short-circuit or earth fault
in energy being radiated to the detriment of occurring on a sub-circuit, although discrimination may
communication services. In such a case it is be achieved in respect of overload currents. The use of
recommended to mount the equipment on a large sheet rewirable fuses is restricted to the circuits with short-
of copper or copper gauze, the earth conductor being circuit level of 4 kA; for higher level either cartridge
connected to it at several points. or HRC fuses shall be used.
6.6.6.5 In case where direct earthing may prove harmful 8.1.5 Provision shall also be made for control of general
rather than provide safety, for example, high frequency lighting and other emergency services through separate
and mains frequency coreless induction furnaces, main circuits and distribution boards from the power
special precautions are necessary. The metal of the circuits.
furnace charge is earthed by electrodes connected at
8.1.6 If necessary, independent source of supply for
the bottom of the charge, and the furnace coils are
emergency service in particular installations may be
connected to the mains supply but are unearthed. A relay
provided.
is connected by a detection circuit which itself is earthed
to the coils. The object is to prevent dangerous break- 8.1.7 Search suppressors shall be provided at the
through of hot metal through the furnace lining, the earth incomers of the sub distribution boards as considered
detection circuit giving a continuous review of the necessary.
conditions for the furnace lining. When leakage current
8.1.8 Wherever necessary to control the harmonics
attains a certain set maximum it becomes necessary to
within permissible limits, passive/active filters may be
take the furance out of service and to re-line.
used.
7 EMERGENCY/STANDBY POWER SUPPLIES
8.2 Fire-safety Requirements
7.1 The provisions of Part 2 of the Code shall apply.
8.2.1 Besides fire fighting equipment, the fire detection
8 SYSTEM PROTECTION and extinguishing systems, as recommended in Part 4
of SP 7 shall be followed.
8.1 Protection of Circuits
8.2.2 Reference is also drawn to IS 1646 regarding
8.1.1 Appropriate protection shall be provided at rules and regulations relating to electrical installations
switchboards and distribution boards for all circuits from the point of fire safety. Annex D covers specific
and sub-circuits against overcurrent and earth faults, requirements for fire safety for representative
and the protective apparatus shall be capable of industries.

PART 4 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS IN INDUSTRIAL BUILDINGS 281

SP 30 : 2011

9 BUILDING SERVICES 2) Lifts serving many floors — 1 m/s

9.1 Lighting 9.3.2 The location of lifts in factories, warehouses and

similar buildings should be planned to suit the
9.1.0 Industrial lighting encompasses seeing tasks, progressive movement of goods through the buildings
operating conditions and economy. With each of the having regard to the nature of processes carried out,
various visual task conditions, lighting should be position of loading platform, railway slidings, etc. The
suitable for adequate visibility. Physical hazards exist placing of a lift in a fume or dust laden atmosphere, or
in many manufacturing processes, therefore, lighting where it may be exposed to extreme temperatures shall
contribute to the utmost as a safety factor in preventing be avoided. Where it is impossible to avoid extreme
accidents. The speed of many manufacturing environmental conditions. The selection of electrical
operations might also be hampered due to poor lighting. equipment shall be such that they are suitable to meet
The general considerations for design of lighting in the conditions involved.
industrial areas are enumerated in IS 6665 (see also
SP 72). 10 MISCELLANEOUS/SPECIAL PROVISIONS
9.1.1 Equipment for Lighting 10.1 Control of Static Electricity
The choice of light sources and luminaries shall be See IS 7689 regarding recommendations for controlling
governed by the guidelines given in IS 6665. The static electricity generated incidentally by processes
recommended values of illumination and limiting in industries which may pose a hazard or
values of glare index are given in Annex E for guidance. inconvenience. Specific control methods are also given
for some industries therein.
9.2 Air-conditioning, Heating and Ventilation
9.2.1 The electrical installation meant for the services 10.2 Safety in Electro-Heat Installations
such as air-conditioning heating and ventilation in Industrial process include in many instances, electro-
industrial buildings shall conform to the requirements heat installations such as;
given in Part 1/Sec 11 of the Code. The specific needs
of individual locations requiring these services in each a) Arc furnaces;
factory shall be ascertained in consultation with the b) Induction furnaces;
concerned personnel before designing the electrical c) Appliances for direct and indirect resistance
system. Reference should be made to the guidelines heating;
given in SP 7. d) Medium and high frequency induction
heating, radio frequency heating and
9.3 Lifts
dielectric heating appliances;
9.3.1 The general rules laid down in Part 1/Section 11 e) Infra-red radiatum heating appliances; and
of the Code shall apply regarding lift installations. f) Microwave heating.
However, the design of lifts in industrial buildings shall
take into account the following requirements: For safety requirements in such electro-heat
installations reference shall be made to IS 9080 (Parts 2
a) Occupant load — The occupant load ex- and 4) and IS/IEC 60519 (Parts 1, 3, 5 and 9).
pressed in terms of gross area in m2/person
shall be 10 for industrial buildings. 10.3 POWER FACTOR COMPENSATION
b) Car-speed for goods lifts — These shall be as 10.3.1 The provisions of Part 1/Section 17 of the Code
follows: shall apply. For specific guidance for installations
1) Normal load carrying lifts — 2-2.5 m/s covered by this Part (see Annex F).

282 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

ANNEX A
(Clause 2)

IS No. Title IS No. Title

732 : 1989 Code of practice for electrical 7689 : 1989 Guide for the control of
wiring installations undesirable static electricity
1646 : 1997 Code of practice for fire safety of 9109 : 2000 Fire safety of industrial buildings
buildings (general): Electrical — Pradio frequency paint and
installations varnish factories — Code of
2726 : 1988 Code of practice for fire safety of practice
industrial buildings: Cotton 9080 (Part 2/ Safety requirements in electro-
ginning and pressing (including Sec 2) : 1980 heat installations: Part 2 Particular
cotton seed delintering) factories requirements for resistance
3058 : 1990 Code of practice for fire safety of heating equipment, Section 2
industrial buildings: Viscose Protection in indirect resistance
rayon yarn and/or staple fibre heating installations
plants 9080 (Part 2/ Safety requirements in electro-
3079 : 1990 Code of practice for fire safety of Sec 4) : 1981 heat installations: Part 2 Particular
industrial buildings: Cotton textile requirements for resistance heating
mills equipment, Section 4 Protection in
installations used for drying
3594 : 1991 Code of practice for fire safety of
varnishes and other similar products
industrial buildings: General
IS/IEC 60519-1 : Safety in electroheat installation:
storage and warehousing
1984 Part 1 General requirements
including cold storage
IS/IEC 60519-3 : Safety in electroheat installations:
3595 : 2002 Code of practice for fire safety of
1988 Part 3 Particular requirements for
industrial buildings : Coal
induction and conduction heating
pulverizers and associated
and induction melting
equipments
installations
3836 : 2000 Fire safety of industrial buildings IS/IEC 60519-5 : Safety in electroheat installation:
— Jute mills — Code of practice 1980 Part 5 Specification for safety in
4226 : 1988 Code of practice for fire safety of plasma installation
industrial building: Aluminium/ IS/IEC 60519-9 : Safety in electroheat installations:
Magnesium powder factories 1987 Part 9 Particular requirements for
4886 : 1991 Code of practice for fire safety of high-frequency dielectric heating
industrial buildings: Tea factories installations
6329 : 2000 Code of practice for fire safety of IS/IEC 60947-1 : Specification for low-voltage
industrial buildings — Saw mills 2004 switchgear and controlgear: Part 1
and wood works General rules
6665 : 1972 Code of practice for industrial SP 7 : 2005 National Building Code of India
lighting SP 72 : 2010 National Lighting Code

PART 4 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS IN INDUSTRIAL BUILDINGS 283

SP 30 : 2011

ANNEX B
(Clause 4.1.2)
EXAMPLES OF INDUSTRIES BASED ON FIRE-SAFETY

B-l The following is a representative list of industries Sugar candy manufacturers

classified according to the degree of fire hazard Sugar factories
enumerated in 4.1.1: Tanneries
a) Low Hazard Industries Tea colouring factories
Abrasive manufacturing premises Umbrella factories
Aerated water factories Vermicelli factories
Agarbatti manufacturing premises Wire drawing works
Aluminium copper and zinc factories b) Moderate Hazard
Asbestos steam packing and lagging
Aeronaut/betelnut factories
manufacturers
Atta and cereal grinding premises
Battery manufacturers
Bakeries and/or biscuit factories
Bone mills
Beedi factories
Breweries
Book binders and paper cutting premises
Canning factories
Book sellers and stationers’ shops
Carbon dioxide plants
Boot and shoe factories and other leather
Cardamom factories
goods factories
Cement factories
Boat builders and ship repairing docks
Cement and/or asbestos or concrete products
Button factories
manufacturing premises
Candle works
Ceramic and crockery factories
Canvas sheet manufacturers
Clay works
Clock and watch manufacturing premises Cardboard box manufacturers
Confectionery manufacturers Carbon paper manufacturing premises
Electric generating houses Carpet and durries factories
Electric lamps and fluorescent tube Carpenter’s workshops
manufacturers Camphor boiling premises
Electronic goods manufacturing premises Cashew nut factories (using open fire)
Electroplating workshops Cloth processing works
Engineering workshops Coffee curing premises
Fruit products and condiment factories Coffee roasting and grinding works
Gold thread factories/gilding factories Colour/dyes mixing and/or blending factories
Glass factories Coir factories
Gum and glue factories Cork factories
Ice candy and ice cream manufacturing Cork stopper and other cork products
premises manufacturing premises
Ice factories Collieries
Ink factories (excluding printing inks) Chemical manufacturers
Milk pasteurising plants and dairy farms Cotton mills
Mica products manufacturing premises Dyeing and dry cleaning works
Potteries/tiles and brick works Electric wire and cable manufacturing
Rice mills premises
Refractories works and firebrick kilns Enamel factories
Salt crushing factories and refineries Essential oil distillation plants
Silicate (other than sodium silicate) factories Flour mills
Soap and detergent factories Garment makers

284 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

Ghee manufacturing premises Alcohol distillers

Ginning and pressing factories Aluminium and magnesium powder plants
Grains and/or seeds disintegrating factories Bituminished paper/hessian cloth
Grease manufacturing works manufacturing premises
Gunning and pressing factories Bobbin factories
Hat and topee factories Cinematograph film production studies
Hosiery factories Calcium carbide plants
Incandescent gas mantle manufacturers Cotton waste factories
Jute mills and jute presses Coal/coke/charcoal ball and briquettes
factories
Mineral oil blending and processing works
Celluloid goods manufacturers
Mutton tallow manufacturers
Cigarette filter manufacturers
Manure and/or fertilizer works (blending,
mixing and granulating only) Cotton seed cleaning or deliniting premises
Mattresses and pillow making premises Duplicating and stencil paper manufacturers
Oxygen plants Fertilizer plants
Paper mills Explosive manufacturers
Pencil factories Fireworks factories
Plastic goods manufacturers Foam plastics and foam rubber goods
manufacturers
Printing press premises
Grass, hay, fodder and bhoosa (chaff) pressing
Pulverizing and crushing mills (hazardous
factories
materials)
Match factories
Rice mills
Oil mills
Rope factories
Oil extraction plants
Rubber goods manufacturers
Oil and leather cloth factories
Shellac factories
Paint (including nitrocellulose paints) and
Spray painting works
varnish factories
Starch factories
Petrochemical plants
Synthetic fibre manufacturing premises
Plywood factories
Tea factories
Printing ink manufacturers
Thermal power stations
Resin and lamp black manufacturers
Tobacco (chewing), zarda, kimam and pan
Rubber substitute manufacturers
masala making premises
Surgical cotton manufacturers
Tobacco grinding and crushing and snuff
manufacturing premises Tar distilleries
Tobacco curing and redrying factories Tar felt manufacturing premises
Tobacco pressing works Tarpauplin and canvas proofing factories
Upholsterers Timber and woodworkers’ premises
Weaving factories Tin printers (where more than 50 percent of
floor area is occupied as engineering
Woollen mills
workshop this may be taken as moderate
Wool cleaning/pressing factories hazard risk)
Yarn gassing plants. Terpentino distilleries
c) High Hazard Tyre retreading and resoling factories
Acetylene plants Woodmeal manufacturers

PART 4 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS IN INDUSTRIAL BUILDINGS 285

SP 30 : 2011

ANNEX C
(Clause 6.5)
SELECTION OF WIRING SYSTEMS
C-1 WIRING SYSTEMS FOR GENERAL or without protective sheathing with suitable
APPLICATION watertight glands.
a) Bare solid or tubular conductors supported on C-2 ADDITIONAL WIRING SYSTEMS
insulators in metal or incombustible structural PARTICULARLY SUITABLE FOR USE IN
ducts or chases (main connections). FACTORIES AND THE LIKE
b) Tough rubber-sheathed or PVC-sheathed n) PVC-insulated and steel tape or wire
cables protected as necessary against armoured and PVC-sheathed cable buried
mechanical damage, say, buried in plaster or directly in the ground or used in special
installed in concrete ducts. conditions.
NOTE — Polythene-insulated PVC-sheathed cable
provides an alternative having the advantage of high p) PVC-insulated steel tape or wire armoured
insulation-resistance. and PVC-sheathed cable with cleat or hook
c) Elastomer-insulated braided and compounded suspensions.
or PVC-insulated cable installed in heavy- q) PVC-insulated and PVC-sheathed cable,
gauge screwed conduit. installed in underground earthenware ducts
NOTE — The use of galvanized conduit and PVC- or metal pipes.
insulated cable is to be preferred where the situation
may be damp or long life is required. r) PVC-insulated and PVC-sheathed cable,
d) Elastomer-insulated braided and compounded mounted on porcelain or hardwood cleats or
or PVC-insulated cable installed in light- in trenches or ducts, and so installed as to be
gauge steel conduit with lug grip. protected against mechanical damage.
e) Elastomer-insulated braided and compounded s) Tough rubber-sheathed or PVC-sheathed
or PVC-insulated cable installed in PVC or cable mounted on insulating non-hygro-
other insulated conduit and provided with a scopic cleats affixed to treated, teak
bare copper or copper-alloy earth-continuity battens by screws of corrosion-resisting
conductor as necessary. material, such as Monel metal or phosphor-
f) Grid suspension wiring system comprising bronze.
elastomer-insulated or PVC insulated cables t) Elastomer-insulated braided and compounded
laid around a galvanized steel catenary wire, or PVC-insulated cable installed in galvanized
braided overall or otherwise protected to solid-drawn screwed conduit with flameproof
withstand corrosive conditions where couplings and inspection fittings.
necessary. u) Varnished-cambric insulated, lead-alloy or
g) Elastomer-insulated braided and compounded aluminium-sheathed cable.
or PVC-insulated cable installed in metal v) Elastomer-insulated, tough rubber-sheathed
trunking or ducts. cable, steel wire armoured.
NOTE — Incombustible insulated trunking and ducts NOTE — Varnished cambric insulated cables without
provide an alternative and where these are used a bare metal sheath should be used only for short connections
copper or copper-alloy earth-continuity conductor may on switchboards and the like in dry situations.
be required.
h) Elastomer-insulated braided and compounded w) Cross-linked polyethylene insulated
or PVC-insulated cable installed on cleats, thermoplastic sheathed, armoured cable.
with appropriate protection where cable C-3 SELECTION OF WIRING SYSTEMS FOR
passes through floors or walls. FACTORIES
j) Elastomer-insulated lead-alloy-sheathed
cables incorporating an earth continuity C-3.1 Wiring systems suitable for installations in
conductor, or elastomer-insulated aluminium- different categories of factories are given in Table 3.
sheathed cable, protected as necessary against C-4 SPECIAL RESTRICTIONS
mechanical damage and corrosion.
NOTE — Where a lead-sheathed cable has plumbed C-4.1 Even though guidance may be taken from the
joints a separate earth-continuity conductor may not be selection chart (see Table 3) for wiring systems, the
required.
following restrictions to their use apply:
k) Mineral-insulated metal-sheathed cable with

286 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

Wiring Restrictions Wiring Restrictions

System (see System (see
C-1, C-2) C-1, C-2)
(1) (2) (1) (2)
b) and g) If the ducts are in the form of under 2) they are exposed to corrosive
floor trenches then the following vapours.
provisions should be observed: 3) where atmosphere is likely to
1) Cables shall preferably be so contain flammable gases or
mounted on suitably earth cracks vapours,
or other supports and has to be at 4) where wet processes are carried
least 75 mm above the bottom. out, or
2) Top of trenches shall be covered 5) in concealed spaces.
with chequered plates or concrete Ordinary steel conduits shall not be
slabs, permitted in areas where flammable
3) In case of long trenches, it is vapour may be present, unless it is of
recommended that trenches of type conforming with wiring system (t)
more than 1 000 cm2 cross- and shall not be permitted in locations:
sectional area be divided by 1) where wiring height is less than
incombustible barriers at 2.5 m above working floor level,
intervals not exceeding 45 m. unless protected against
The barriers shall be at least mechanical damage,
50 mm in thickness and of the 2) where ambient temperature is
same height as of cable trench. likely to be above 55°C at
The cables shall be carried sometime or other during the year,
through holes in the barriers,
which shall be made good 3) in concealed spaces of
thereof to prevent the passage of combustible construction,
fire beyond the barriers, 4) where atmosphere is likely to
4) The combined cross-sectional contain flammable gases or
area of all conductors or cables vapours, or
shall not as far as possible exceed 5) where conductor operates at
40 percent of the internal cross- voltage above 650 V.
sectional area of the trench, and d) It shall be permitted only where voltage
5) The cable trenches shall be kept is below 650 V and in locations where
free from accumulation of water, the atmosphere is unlikely to contain
dusts and waste materials. any flammable vapours or gases.
c) Trunking or ducting systems for cables e) Same as in case of wiring system (d).
above ground shall not be used where: This system shall not be permitted in
1) they are exposed to physical locations:
damage, 1) where exposed to severe physical
2) they are exposed to corrosive damage,
vapours. 2) where exposed to corrosive
3) the atmosphere is likely to vapours,
contain flammable gases or 3) where wet processes are carried
vapours, out, or
4) the wet processes are carried out, 4) in concealed places.
or h) and s) These systems should only be
5) in concealed spaces. permitted for voltage below 250 V and
Ordinary steel conduits shall not be that too only if use of such system is
permitted in areas where flammable essential.
vapour may be present, unless it is of j) Same as in case of wiring system (d).
type conforming with wiring system (t) m), n), p) Armoured cables shall not be permitted
and shall not be permitted in locations: and v) in following locations unless the cable
1) where wiring height is less than is of PVC-sheathed type, and shall not
2.5 m above working floor level, be permitted in locations exposed to
unless protected against corrosive fumes or vapour; and battery
mechanical damage, rooms.
PART 4 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS IN INDUSTRIAL BUILDINGS 287
SP 30 : 2011

Table 3 Selection Chart for Wiring Systems for Installations in Factories

(Clauses C-3.1 and C-4.1)
Sl No. Section of Installation Category of Factory

Average Factory Heavy Industry Light Industry Chemical Industry Factories

Involving
1st 2nd 1st 2nd 1st 2nd 1st 2nd Fire Risk
Choice Choice Choice Choice Choice Choice Choice Choice
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11)
i) Main distribution at w
medium or low voltage a c a c c p s n k
w
k g k g g v p n
w w
n r n r k q p
w
n
p v p v r r q
q q t
w
ii) Sub-main distribution to a g a g c h f b k
local distribution boards
w w
c c v f s q t
f f g r
k k k
w w w
p p p
v r v
iii) Sub-circuit wiring c b c g b c k
f h f h f t
g j k j s
k v
v
NOTE — For description of a, b, c……. w, see C-1 and C-2.

ANNEX D
(Clause 8.2.2)
REQUIREMENTS FOR FIRE SAFETY IN SPECIFIC INDUSTRIES

Type of Industry Ref. IS Motors Other Equipment Fittings Miscellaneous

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
Jute spinning and 3836 All motors shall be All equipment shall Lighting fittings Supply shall be at <
weaving, jute rope, totally enclosed type be metal clad, dust- shall be dust-tight 250 V in jute
carpet making factories and in wet locations tight godowns
shall be drip-proof
Cotton ginning cotton 2726 All equipment shall
seed delintering and be metal clad, dust-
pressing factories tight
Plants making viscose 3058 All equipment in the Vapour-proof All current carrying
rayon yarn or staple Xanthation lighting fittings in parts, contacts liable
fibre or both disulphide plant areas where for corrosion shall
shall comply with corrosive gases are be cadmium plated
Part 8 of the Code evolved

288 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

Type of Industry Ref. IS Motors Other Equipment Fittings Miscellaneous

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
Textile mills using 3079 Totally enclosed Metal clad and dust- Dust-tight lighting Machines for
cotton, cotton waste type, the cooling air tight. Equipment fittings at willowing, singeing yarn shall
regenerated cellulose, for variable speed shall be flameproof lap breaking, waste be protected to
man-made fibres or motor taken from in gas singeing opening, mixing, ensure that heating
any grouping of these outside the building rooms. Stop motion blow and raising elements are not
devices provided on rooms switched on while
frames shall be dust- yarn is stationary
tight
Places where paints 9109 — — Wiring in steel Provisions shall be
and varnishes are conduits. Lighting made for switching
stored or processed fittings of enclosed off the whole factory
type at more than one
control point
Factories where 4226 Motors shall be All equipment of Wiring in steel Provisions shall be
powders of aluminium, flameproof dust- the enclosed type conduits. Enclosed made for switching
magnesium and their protected (see Part 7 lighting fittings off the whole factory
alloys are processed or of the Code) at more than one
used control point.
Coal pulverizing mills, 3595 Totally enclosed, Lighting fittings Use of flexible
as also equipment flameproof, dust- shall be dust-tight. cables to be kept to
therein for power proof (see Part 7 of Only conduits; the minimum
generation cole or the Code) armoured or mineral
briquette making insulated type of
wiring
Tea factories 4886 Where practicable, — — Fan motors of
totally enclosed dryers and
type withering troughs
and other control
equipment shall be
dust proof tape
Godowns, ware-houses, 3594 Driving motors for All switchgear Screwed steel All control
outdoor storage sites overhead cranes equipment metal conduits mineral equipment switches,
forming part of totally enclosed enclosed. For mains insulated, copper or etc., outside
industrial complexes or operated electrical aluminium sheathed godown where
others; cold storage stackers, switch and cable. Lighting fibrous goods,
buildings socket shall be fittings to be flammable liquids,
water-tight. Flexible positioned not nitro-cellulose, fire
connection to the below 45 cm below works or explosives
stacker through roof. A clearance of are stored
rubber compound not less than 75 cm
sheathed trailing to be provided from
cable with hard cord highest stacking
braiding level. Flexible
lighting pendants or
portable lamps not
allowed
Saw mills, furniture 6329 Motors shall be All equipment shall Electrical heaters
factories, coach and totally enclosed or be dust-tight and shall be metal cases,
body build works, up- pipe ventilated where spray painting totally enclosed,
holsteries and other is done shall comply immersion type or
wood working shops. with Part 7 of the totally enclosed low
Plywood hard-wood, Code temperature type
wood wool, insulation with external
boards, wood flour, etc surface below 92°C

PART 4 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS IN INDUSTRIAL BUILDINGS 289

SP 30 : 2011

ANNEX E
(Clause 9.1.1)
RECOMMENDED VALUES OF ILLUMINATION AND LIMITING VALUES OF
GLARE INDEX — INDUSTRIAL BUILDINGS

Sl No. Industrial Buildings and Processes Average Limiting Glare

Illumination, lux Index
(1) (2) (3) (4)
i) General factor areas:
a) Canteens 150 —
b) Cloakrooms 100 —
c) Entrances, corridors, stairs 100 —
ii) Factory outdoor areas:
Stockyards, main entrances, exit roads, car parks, internal factory roads 20 —
iii) Aircraft factories and maintenance hangers:
a) Stock parts productions 450 25
b) Drilling, riveting, screw fastening, sheet aluminium layout and 300 25
template work, wing sections, cowling welding, sub-assembly,
final assembly, inspection
c) Maintenance and repairs (Hangers) 300 25
iv) Assembly shops:
a) Rough work, for example, frame assembly, assembly of heavy 150 28
machinery
b) Medium work, for example, machined parts, engine assembly, 300 25
vehicle body assembly
c) Fine work, for example, radio and telephone equipment, typewriter 700 22
and office machinery assembly
d) Very fine work, for example, assembly of very small precision 1 5001) 19
mechanisms, instruments
v) Bakeries:
a) Mixing and make-up rooms, oven rooms, wrapping rooms 150 25
b) Decorating and icing 200 25
vi) Boiler houses (industrial):
a) Coal and ash handling 100 —
b) Boiler rooms:
1) Boiler fronts and operating areas 1002) —
2) Other areas 20 to 25 —
c) Outdoor plants:
1) Catwalks 20 —
2) Platforms 50 —
vii) Bookbinding:
a) Pasting, punching and stitching 200 25
b) Binding and folding; miscellaneous machines 300 22
c) Finishing, blocking and in laying 300 22
viii) Boot and shoe factories:
a) Sorting and grading 1 0003) 19
b) Clicking and closing, preparatory operations 700 22
c) Cutting table and presses, stitching 1 000 22
d) Bottom stock preparation, lasting and bottoming, finishing 700 22

290 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

Sl No. Industrial Buildings and Processes Average Limiting Glare

Illumination, lux Index
(1) (2) (3) (4)
e) Shoe rooms 700 22
ix) Breweries and distilleries:
a) General working areas 150 25
b) Brewhouse, bottling and canning plants 200 25
c) Bottle inspection Special lighting —
x) Canning and preserving factories:
a) Inspection of beans, rice, barley, etc 450 22
b) Preparation: kettle areas, mechanical cleaning, dicing, trimming 300 25
c) Canned and bottled goods: retorts 200 25
d) High speed labelling lines 300 25
e) Can inspection 450 —
xi) Carpet factories:
a) Winding, beaming 200 25
b) Designing, Jacquard and cutting, setting pattern, tufting, topping, 450 22
cutting, hemming, fringing
c) Weaving, mending, inspection 450 22
xii) Ceramics — See pottery and clay products
xiii) Chemical works:
a) Hand furnaces, boiling tanks, stationery driers, stationery or gravity 150 28
crystalizers, mechanical driers, evaporators, filtration plants,
mechanical crystallising bleaching, extractors, percolators,
nitrators. electrolytic cells
b) Controls, gauges, values, etc 100 —
c) Control rooms:
1) Vertical control panels 200-300 19
2) Control desks 300 19
xiv) Chocolate and confectionery factories:
a) Mixing, blending, boiling 150 28
b) Chocolate husking, winnowing, fat extraction, crushing and 200 25
refining, feeding, bean cleaning, sorting, milling, cream making
c) Hand decorating, inspection, wrapping, packing 300 22
xv) Clothing factories:
a) Matching-up 4503) 19
b) Cutting sewing:
1) Light 300 22
2) Medium 450 22
3) Dark 700 22
4) Pressing 300 22
c) Inspection:
1) Light 450 19
2) Medium 1 000 19
3) Dark 1 500 19
d) Hand tailoring:
1) Light 450 19
2) Medium 1 000 19
3) Dark 1 500 19
PART 4 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS IN INDUSTRIAL BUILDINGS 291
SP 30 : 2011

Sl No. Industrial Buildings and Processes Average Limiting Glare

Illumination, lux Index
(1) (2) (3) (4)
xvi) Collieries (surface buildings):
a) Coal preparation plant:
1) Working areas 150 —
2) Other areas 100 —
3) Picking belts 300 —
4) Winding houses 150 —
b) Lamp rooms:
1) Main areas 100 —
2) Repair sections 150 —
3) Weigh cabine 150 —
c) Fan houses 100 —
xvii) Dairies:
a) General working areas 2002) 25
b) Bottle inspection Special lighting —
c) Bottle filling 450 25
xviii) Die sinking:
a) General 300 —
b) Fine 1 000 19
xix) Dye works:
a) Reception, ‘grey’ perching 700 —
b) Wet processes 1502) 28
c) Dry processes 2002) 28
d) Dyers’ offices 7003) 19
e) Final perching 2 0003) —
xx) Electricity generating stations: Indoor locations
a) Turbine halls 200 25
b) Auxiliary equipment; battery rooms, blowers auxiliary generators, 100 —
switchgear and transformer chambers
c) Boiler houses (including operating floors) platforms, coal conveyors, 70-100 —
pulverizers, feeders, precipitators, soot and slag blowers
d) Boiler house and turbine house 100 —
e) Basements 70 —
f) Conveyor houses, conveyor gantries, junction towers 70-100 —
g) Control rooms:
1) Vertical control panels 200-300 19
2) Control desks 300 19
3) Rear of control panels 150 19
4) Switch houses 150 25
h) Nuclear reactors and steam, raising plants:
1) Reactor areas, boilers, galleries 150 25
2) Gas circulator days 150 25
3) Reactor charge/discharge face 200 25
xxi) Electricity generating stations: Outdoor locations
a) Coal unloading areas 20 —
b) Coal storage areas 20 —

292 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

Sl No. Industrial Buildings and Processes Average Limiting Glare

Illumination, lux Index
(1) (2) (3) (4)
c) Conveyors 50 —
d) Fuel oil delivery headers 50 —
e) Oil storage tanks 50 —
f) Catwalks 50 —
g) Platforms, boiler and turbine decks 50 —
h) Transformers and outdoor switchgear 100 —
xxii) Engraving:
a) Hand 1 000 19
b) Machine (see Die sinking) — —
xxiii) Farm buildings (dairies)
a) Boiler houses 50 —
b) Milk rooms 150 25
c) Washing and sterilizing rooms 150 25
d) Stables 50 —
e) Milking parlours 150 25
xxiv) Flour mills:
a) Roller, purifier, sifting and packing floors 150 25
b) Wetting tables 300 25
xxv) Forges: General 150 28
xxvi) Foundries:
a) Charging floors, tumbling cleaning, pouring, shaking out, rough 150 25
moulding and rough core making
b) Fine moulding and core making, inspection 300 25
xxvii) Garages:
a) Parking areas (interior) 70 28
b) Washing and polishing, greasing, general servicing, pits 150 28
c) Repairs 300 25
xxviii) Gas works:
a) Retort houses, oil gas plants, water gas plants, purifiers, coke 30-504) 28
screening and coke handling plants (indoor)
b) Governor, meter, compressor, booster and exhauster houses 100 25
c) Open type plants: —
1) Catwalks 204) —
2) Platforms 504) —
xxix) Gauge and tool rooms: General 7005) 19
xxx) Glass works and processes:
a) Furnace rooms, bending, annealing lehrs 100 28
b) Mixing rooms, forming (blowing, drawing, pressing, rolling) 150 28
c) Cutting to size, grinding, polishing, toughening 200 25
d) Finishing (bevelling, decorating, etching, silvering) 300 22
e) Brilliant cutting 700 19
f) Inspection:
1) General 200 19
2) Fine 700 19

PART 4 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS IN INDUSTRIAL BUILDINGS 293

SP 30 : 2011

Sl No. Industrial Buildings and Processes Average Limiting Glare

Illumination, lux Index
(1) (2) (3) (4)
xxxi) Glove making:
a) Pressing, knitting, sorting, cutting 300 22
b) Sewing:
1) Light 300 22
2) Medium 450 22
3) Dark 700 22
xxxii) Hat making
a) Stiffening, braiding, cleaning, refining forming, sizing, 150 22
pouncing, flanging, finishing ironing
b) Sewing:
1) Light 300 22
2) Medium 450 22
3) Dark 700 22
xxxiii) Hosiery and knitwear:
a) Circular and flat knitting machines universal winders, cutting 300 22
out, folding and pressing
b) Lock stitch and overlooking machines:
1) Light 300 22
2) Medium 450 22
3) Dark 700 22
c) Mending 1 500 19
d) Examining and hand finishing, light, medium, dark 700 19
e) Linking or running-on 450 19
xxxiv) Inspection shops (Engineering)
a) Rough work, for example, counting, rough checking of stock 150 28
parts, etc.
b) Medium work, for example, ‘Go’ and ‘No-go’ gauges, 300 25
sub-assemblies
c) Fine work, for example, radio and telecommunication equipment, 700 22
calibrated scales, precision mechanisms, instruments
d) Very fine work, for example, gauging and inspection of small 1 500 19
intricate parts
e) Minute work, for example, very small instruments 3 0002) 19
xxxv) Iron and steel works
a) Marshalling and outdoor stockyards 10-20 —
b) Stairs, gangways, basements, quarries, loading docks 100 —
c) Slab yards’ melting shops, ingot stripping soaking pits, blast 100 28
furnace working areas, picking and cleaning lines, mechanical
plants, pump houses
d) Mould preparation, rolling and wire mills, mills motors rooms, 150 28
power blower houses
e) Slab inspection and conditioning, cold strip mills, sheet and plate 200 28
finishing, tinning, galvanizing, machine and roll shops
f) Plate inspection 300 —
g) Tinplate inspection Special lighting —

294 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

Sl No. Industrial Buildings and Processes Average Limiting Glare

Illumination, lux Index
(1) (2) (3) (4)
xxxvi) Jewellery and watchmaking
a) Fine processes 7001) 19
b) Minute processes 3 0001) 10
c) Gem cutting, polishing, setting 1 5003) —
xxxvii)Laboratories and test rooms
a) General laboratories, balance rooms 300 19
b) Electrical and instrument laboratories 450 19
xxxviii) Laundries and drycleaning works
a) Receiving, sorting, washing, drying, ironing (calendering), despatch 200 25
b) Drycleaning, bulk machine work 200 25
c) Fine hand ironing, pressing, inspection mending, spotting 300 25
xxxix) Leather dressing
a) Vats, cleaning, tanning, stretching, cutting, fleshing and stuffing 150 28
b) Finishing, staking, splitting and scrafing 200 28
xl) Leather working
a) Pressing and glazing 450 22
b) Cutting, scarfing, sewing 700 22
c) Grading and matching 1 0003) 19
xli) Machine and fitting shops
a) Rough bench and machine work 150 28
b) Medium bench and machine work, ordinary automatic machines, 300 25
rough grinding, medium buffing and polishing
c) Fine bench and machine work, fine automatic machines, medium 700 22
grinding fine buffing and polishing
xlii) Motor vehicle plants
a) General sub-assemblies, chassis assembly, car assembly 300 25
b) Final inspection 450 25
c) Trim shops, body sub-assemblies, body assembly 300 25
d) Spray booths 450 —
xliii) Paint works
a) General automatic processes 200 25
b) Special batch mixing 450 22
c) Colour matching 7003) 19
xliv) Paint shops and spraying booths:
a) Dipping, firing rough spraying 150 25
b) Rubbing, ordinary painting, spraying and finishing 300 25
c) Fine painting, spraying and finishing 450 25
d) Retouching and matching 7003) 19
xlv) Paper-works:
a) Paper and board making:
1) Machine houses, calendering pulp mills, preparation plants, 200 25
cutting, finishing, trimming
2) Inspection and sorting (over hauling) 300 22
b) Paper converting processes:
1) Corrugated board, cartons, containers and paper sack 200 25
manufacture, coating and laminating processes

PART 4 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS IN INDUSTRIAL BUILDINGS 295

SP 30 : 2011

Sl No. Industrial Buildings and Processes Average Limiting Glare

Illumination, lux Index
(1) (2) (3) (4)
2) Associated printing 300 25
xlvi) Pharmaceuticals and fine chemicals works:
a) Raw material storage 200 28
b) Control laboratories and testing 300 19
c) Pharmaceuticals manufacturing: grinding, granulating, mixing 300 25
and drying, tableting, sterilizing and washing, preparation of
solutions and filling, labelling, capping, cartoning and wrapping,
inspection
d) Fine chemical manufacture:
1) Plant processing 200 25
2) Fine chemical finishing 300 25
xlvii) Plastics works:
a) Manufacture (see Chemical works) — —
b) Processing:
1) Calendering, extrusion 300 25
2) Moulding-compression, injection 200 25
3) Sheet fabrication:
i) Shaping 200 25
ii) Trimming, machining, polishing 300 25
iii) Cementing 200 25
xlviii) Plating shops:
a) Vat and baths, filter pressing, kin rooms, moulding, pressing, 150 28
cleaning, trimming, glazing, firing
b) Enamelling, colouring, decorating 4503) 19
xlix) Printing works:
a) Type foundries:
1) Matrix making, dressing type, hand and machine casting 200 25
2) Front assembly, sorting 450 22
b) Printing plants:
1) Machine composition, imposing stones 200 25
2) Presses 300 25
3) Composing room 450 19
4) Proof reading 300 19
c) Electrotyping:
1) Block-making, electroplating, washing, backing 200 25
2) Moulding, finishing, routing 300 25
d) Photo-engraving:
1) Block-making, etching, masking 200 25
2) Finishing, routing 300 25
e) Colour printing: Inspection area 7003) 19
l) Rubber processing:
a) Fabric preparation creels 200 25
b) Dipping, moulding, compounding calendars 150 25
c) Tyre and tube making 200 25

296 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

Sl No. Industrial Buildings and Processes Average Limiting Glare

Illumination, lux Index
(1) (2) (3) (4)
li) Sheet metal works:
a) Benchwork, scribing, pressing, punching shearing, stamping, 200 25
spinning, folding
b) Sheet inspection Special lighting
lii) Soap factories:
a) Kettle houses and ancillaries, glycerine evaporation and
distillation, continuous indoor soap making, plants:
1) General areas 150 25
2) Control panels 200-300 25
b) Batch or continuous soap cooling, cutting and drying, soap milling,
plodding:
1) General areas 150 25
2) Control panels, key equipment 200-300 25
c) Soap stamping, wrapping and packing, granules making, granules
storage and handling, filling and packing granules:
1) General areas 150 25
2) Control panels, machines 200-300 25
d) Edible products processing and packing 200 25
liii) Structural steel fabrication plants:
a) General 150 28
b) Marking off 300 28
liv) Textile mills (cotton or linen):
a) Bale breaking, blowing, carding, roving, slubbing, spinning
(ordinary counts), winding, heckling, spreading, cabling 150 25
b) Warping, slashing, dressing and dyeing, doubling (fancy), spinning 200 25
(fine counts)
c) Healding (drawing-in) 700 —
d) Weaving:
1) Patterned cloths, fine counts dark 700 19
2) Patterned cloths, fine counts light 300 19
3) Plain ‘grey’ cloth 200 19
e) Cloth inspection 7001) —
lv) Textile mills (silk or synthetics):
a) Soaking, fugitive tinting, conditioning or setting of twist 200 25
b) Spinning 450 25
c) Winding, twisting, rewinding and coning, quality slashing:
1) Light thread 200 25
2) Dark thread 300 25
d) Warping 300 25
e) Healding (drawing-in) 700 —
f) Weaving 700 19
g) Inspection 1 0003) 19
lvi) Textile mills (woollen):
a) Scouring, carbonizing, teasing, preparing, raising, brushing, 150 25
pressing, back-washing, gilling, crabbing and blowing

PART 4 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS IN INDUSTRIAL BUILDINGS 297

SP 30 : 2011

Sl No. Industrial Buildings and Processes Average Limiting Glare

Illumination, lux Index
(1) (2) (3) (4)
b) Blending, carding, combing (white), tentering, drying, cropping 200 25
c) Spinning, roving, winding, warping, combing (coloured), twisting 450 25
d) Healding (drawing-in) 700 —
e) Weaving:
1) Fine worsteds 700 19
2) Medium worsteds, fine woollens 450 19
3) Heavy woollens 300 19
f) Burling and mending 700 19
g) Perching:
1) Grey 700 —
2) Final 2 0003) —
lvii) Textile mills (jute):
a) Weaving, spinning, flat, jacquard carpet looms, cop winding 200 25
b) Yarn calender 150 25
lviii) Tobacco factories: All processes 3003) 22
lix) Upholstering, furniture and vehicles 300 22
lx) Warehouses and bulk stores:
a) Large material, loading bays 100 28
b) Small material, racks 150 25
c) Packing and despatch 150 25
lxi) Welding and soldering:
a) Gas and arc welding, rough spot welding 150 28
b) Medium soldering, brazing and spot welding, for example, 300 25
domestic hardware
c) Fine soldering and spot welding, for example, instruments, radio 700 22
set assembly
d) Very fine soldering and spot welding, for example, radio valves 150 19
lxii) Woodworking shops:
a) Rough sawing and bench work 150 22
b) Sizing, planning, rough sanding, medium machine, and bench 200 22
work, gluing, veneering, cooperage
c) Fine bench and machine work, fine sanding and finishing 300 22

1)
Optical aids should be used where necessary.
2)
Supplementary local lighting may be required for gauge glasses and instrument panels.
3)
Special attention should be paid to the colour quality of the light.
4)
Supplementary local lighting should be used at important points.
5)
Supplementary local lighting and optical aids should be used where necessary.

298 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

ANNEX F
(Clause 10)
POWER FACTOR IN INDUSTRIAL INSTALLATIONS

F-1 The general guidelines for power factor compensation installations are given in Table 4. The recommended
is given in Part 1/Sec 17 of the Code. For guidance, the capacitor ratings at rated voltage, for direct connection
natural power factor for some three phase electrical to ac induction motor in industries are given in Table 5.

Table 4 Power Factor for Three Phase Electrical Installations

(Clause F-1)

Sl Type of Installation Natural Power Sl Type of Installation Natural Power

No. Factor No. Factor
(1) (2) (3) (1) (2) (3)

i) Cold storage and fisheries 0.76-0.80 xviii) Flour mills 0.61

ii) Cinemas 0.78-0.80 xix) Gas works 0.87
iii) Metal pressing 0.57-0.72 xx) Textile mills 0.86
iv) Confectionery 0.77 xxi) Oil mills 0.51-0.59
v) Dyeing and printing (textile) 0.60-0.87 xxii) Woolen mills 0.70
vi) Plastic moulding 0.57-0.73 xxiii) Potteries 0.61
vii) Film studios 0.65 to 0.74 xxiv) Cigarette manufacturing 0.80
viii) Newspapers 0.58 xxv) Cotton press 0.63-0.68
ix) Heavy engineering works 0.48-0.75 xxvi) Foundries 0.59
x) Rubber extrusion and moulding 0.48 xxvii) Tiles and mosaic 0.61
xi) Pharmaceuticals 0.75-0.86 xxviii) Structural engineering 0.53-0.68
xii) Oil and paint manufacturing 0.51-0.69 xxix) Chemicals 0.72-0.87
xiii) Silk mills 0.58-0.68 xxx) Municipal pumping stations 0.65-0.75
xiv) Biscuit factory 0.60 xxxi) Oil terminals 0.64-0.83
xv) Printing press 0.65-0.75 xxxii) Telephone exchange 0.66-0.80
xvi) Food products 0.63 xxxiii) Rolling mills 0.72-0.60
xvii) Laundries 0.92 xxxiv) Irrigation pumps 0.52-0.70

Table 5 Capacitor Ratings at Rated Voltage

(Clause F-1)

Rated Output Capacitor Rating in kVAR for Motor Speed

of Motors
kW 3 000 1 500 1 000 750 600 500
rev/min rev/min rev/min rev/min rev/min rev/min
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)
2.25 1 1 1.5 2 2.5 2.5
3.7 2 2 2.5 3.5 4 4
5.7 2.5 3 3.5 4.5 5 5.5
7.5 3 4 4.5 5.5 6 6.5
11.2 4 5 6 7.5 8.5 9
15 5 6 7 9 11 12
18.7 6 7 9 10.5 13 14.5
22.5 7 8 10 12 15 17
37 11 12.5 16 18 23 25
57 16 17 21 23 29 32
75 21 23 26 28 35 40
102 31 33 36 38 48 55
150 40 42 45 47 60 67
187 46 50 53 55 68 76
NOTES
1 The reference to speed of motor has been made since the manufacturers provide information on that basis.
2 The capacitive current supplied by condensers directly across induction motor terminals should not exceed the magnetizing current of
the induction motors, to guard against excess transient torques and overvoltages.
3 Should a consumer desire to improve the power factor beyond a value which is limited by considerations of magnetizing kVAR of the
motor as stated in Note 2, then he may install the calculated capacitor kVAR as a separate circuit with its independent controlgear.

PART 4 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS IN INDUSTRIAL BUILDINGS 299

NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE
PART 5
 SP 30 : 2011

PART 5 OUTDOOR INSTALLATIONS

0 FOREWORD
As compared to the various types of indoor installations covered in other Parts of this Code, outdoor installations
are distinct in nature by virtue of their being exposed to moderate to heavy environmental conditions. In addition,
electric power in outdoor installations is normally utilized for specific purposes such as, lighting or for meeting
the needs of heavy machinery (example, open cast mines). In the case of the latter, the duties would be more
onerous than those normally encountered in indoor situations, thereby calling for special considerations in their
design.
Keeping the above in view, Part 5 of this Code deals with installations erected outdoor. Some outdoor installations
are erected to serve for a small duration of time after which they are meant to be dismantled. Such installations
are called temporary installation. For convenience, and keeping other aspects of safety provisions in view, this
duration is defined as not exceeding six months. Permanent outdoor installations are those which are generally in
use for longer periods of time. This Part 5 of this Code basically deals with these two types of outdoor installations.
Part 5 consists of the following Sections:
Section 1 Public Lighting Installations
Section 2 Temporary Outdoor Installations
Section 3 Permanent Outdoor Installations
Even though installations for lighting of public thoroughfares are permanent in nature, they are dealt with separately
in Section 1.
It may, however, be noted that small outdoor locations around building installations (example, gardens around
hotel installations or storage yards in industries) do not fall under the scope of Part 5. For requirements pertaining
to this, reference should be made to relevant parts of this Code.

PART 5 OUTDOOR INSTALLATIONS 303

SP 30 : 2011

SECTION 1 PUBLIC LIGHTING INSTALLATIONS

0 FOREWORD IS No. Title

One of the most common forms of permanent outdoor 1944 (Part 5) : 1981 Code of practice for lighting of
installations is the public lighting installations intended public thoroughfares: Part 5
for lighting of public thoroughfares. With the Lighting of grade separated
availability of variety of light sources for such junctions, bridges and elevated
installations and the need for proper illumination of a road (Group D)
variety of traffic routes and city centres it has been 1944 (Part 6): 1981 Code of practice for lighting of
found necessary to lay down guidelines for designing public thoroughfares: Part 6
on efficient and economical lighting installation. Lighting of town and city centres
and areas of civic importance
This Section of this Code is intended to cover general
(Group E)
principles governing the lighting of public
thoroughfares and to lay down recommendations on 3 TERMINOLOGY
the quantity and quality of lighting to be provided. The
actual details of design would entirely depend on the 3.0 For the purpose of this Section, the following terms
local circumstances. together with those provided in IS 1885 (Part 16/
Section 2) shall apply.
The requirements given in this Section are, as far as
practicable aligned with the recommendations of the 3.1 Terms Relating to Highways
International Commission on Illumination (CIE)
3.1.1 Highway — A way for the passage of vehicular
modified to suit the local conditions and regulations.
traffic over which such traffic may lawfully pass.
1 SCOPE 3.1.2 Layout — All those physical features of a highway
other than the surfacing of the carriageway, which have
1.1 This Part 5/Section 1of the Code covers requirements
to be taken into account in planning a lighting
of public lighting installations in order to provide
installation.
guidance to those concerned with the preparation of
public lighting schemes, their installation and 3.1.3 Carriageway — That portion of a highway
maintenance (see also SP 72). intended primarily for vehicular traffic.
1.2 This Section deals only with electric lighting 3.1.4 Dual Carriageway — A layout of the separated
sources and does not include gas or other types of carriageways, each reserved for traffic in one direction
lighting. only.
1.3 This Section also does not cover exterior lighting 3.1.5 Central Reserve — A longitudinal space dividing
installations, such as those which apply for parks, a dual carriageway.
shopping enclaves, flood lighting of routes and
3.1.6 Service Road — A subsidiary road between
structures of architectural importance, etc.
principle road and buildings or properties facing
2 REFERENCES thereon or a parallel road to the principal road and
giving access to the premises and connected only at
This Part 5/Section 1 of the Code should be read in selected points with the principle road”.
conjunction with the following Indian Standards:
3.1.7 Cycle Track — A way or part of a highway for use
IS No. Title by pedal cycles only.
SP 72 : 2010 National Lighting Code 3.1.8 Footway — That portion of a road reserved
1885 (Part 16/ Electrotechnical vocabulary : Part exclusively for pedestrians.
Sec 2) : 1968 16 Lighting, Section 2 General
illumination lighting fittings and 3.1.9 Verge — The unpaved area flanking a carriageway,
lighting for traffic and signalling forming part of the highway and substantially at the
1944 (Parts 1 Code of practice for lighting of same level as the carriageway.
and 2) : 1970 public thoroughfares: Part 1 3.1.10 Shoulder — A strip of highway adjacent to and
General principles; Part 2 level with the main carriageway to provide an
Lighting of main roads (first opportunity for vehicles to leave the carriageway in an
revision) emergency.

304 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

3.1.11 Refuge — A raised platform or a guarded area 3.2.7 Spacing — The distance, measured along the
so sited in the carriageway as to divide the streams of centre line of the carriageway, between successive
traffic and to provide a safety area for pedestrians. luminaires in an installation (see Fig.1).
3.1.12 Kerb — A border of stone, concrete or other NOTE — In a staggered arrangement, the distance is measured,
along the centre line of the carriageway, between a luminaire
rigid material formed at the edge of a carriageway.
on one side of the carriageway and the next luminaire, which
is on the other side of the carriage. It is not the distance
3.2 Terms Relating to Lighting Installation measured on the diagonal joining them, nor the distance
between successive luminaires on the same side of the
3.2.1 Lighting Installation — The whole of the
carriageway.
equipment provided for lighting the highway
comprising the lamps, luminaires, means of support 3.2.8 Span — That part of the highway lying between
and electrical and other auxiliaries. successive luminaires in an installation.
3.2.2 Lighting System — An array of luminaires having 3.2.9 Width of Carriageway — The distance between
a characteristic light distribution sited in a manner kerb lines measured at right angles to the length of the
concordant with this distribution. (Lighting systems carriageway (see Fig. 1).
are commonly designated by the name of the 3.2.10 Arrangement — The pattern according to which
characteristic light distribution, for example, cut-off, luminaires are sited on plan, for example, staggered,
semi-cut-off, etc.) axial, opposite.
3.2.3 Luminaire — A housing for one or more lamps, 3.2.11 Geometry (of a Lighting System) — The inter-
comprising a body and any refractor, reflector, diffuser related linear dimensions and characteristics of the
or enclosure associated with the lamp(s). system, namely the spacing, mounting height, width,
3.2.4 Outreach — The distance measured horizontally overhang and arrangement.
between the centre of the column or wall face and the
centre of a luminaire (see Fig.1). 3.3 Photometric Terms

3.2.5 Overhang — The distance measured horizontally 3.3.1 Luminous Flux — The light given by a light
between the centre of a luminaire mounted on a bracket source or a luminaire or received by a surface
and the adjacent edge of the carriageway (see Fig. 1). irrespective of the directions in which it is distributed.
The unit of the luminous flux is the lumen (1m).
3.2.6 Mounting Height — The vertical distance between
the centre of the luminaire and the surface of the 3.3.2 Lower Hemispherical Flux or Downward Flux
carriage (see Fig. 1). — The luminous flux emitted by a luminaire in all
directions below the horizontal.

o = location of columns p = outreach

h = mounting height of luminaires s = overhang
d = width of the carriage way c = clearance

FIG. 1 SITING OF LUMINARIES: CHARACTERISTIC DIMENSIONS

PART 5 OUTDOOR INSTALLATIONS 305

SP 30 : 2011

3.3.3 Luminous Intensity — The quantity which the directions for which the intensity is 90 percent of
describes the light-giving power of a luminaire in any the maximum in a vertical plane through the maximum
particular direction. The unit of luminous intensity is and on a conical surface through the maximum.
the candela (cd).
3.3.16 Isocandela Curve — A curve traced on an
3.3.4 Illumination — The luminous flux incident on a imaginary sphere with a source at its centre and joining
surface per unit area. The unit of illumination is the all the points corresponding to those directions in which
lumen per square metre (lux). the luminous intensity is the same or a plane projection
of this curve.
3.3.5 Luminance (at a Point of Surface and in a Given
Direction) — The luminous intensity per unit projected 3.3.17 Isocandela Diagram — An array of Isocandela
area of a surface. If a very small portion of a surface has curves.
an intensity I candelas in a particular direction and its
3.3.18 Polar Curve — Curve of light distribution using
orthogonal projection (that is, its projection on a plane
polar co-ordinates.
perpendicular to the given direction) has an area D, the
luminance in this direction is I/D candelas per unit area. 3.4 Terms Relating to Luminaires
The usual unit is the candela per square metre (cd/m2).
3.4.1 Street Lighting Luminaire — A housing for a light
3.3.6 Luminosity — The attribute of visual sensation source or sources, together with any refractor, reflector,
according to which an area appears to emit more or dispersive surround or other enclosure which may be
less light. It is some time called brightness. associated with the source in order to modify the light
NOTE — Luminosity is the visual sensation which correlates distribution in a desired manner and protect the light
approximately with the photometric quantity ‘luminance’. source from weather conditions and insects and/or for
3.3.7 Light Output — The luminous flux emitted by a the sake of appearance, brightness and other lighting
luminaire. characteristic the source.

3.3.8 Light Distribution — The distribution of luminous 3.4.2 Cut-off Luminaire — Luminaire employing the
intensity from a luminaire in various directions in technique used for concealing lamps and surfaces of
space. high luminance from direct view in order to reduce
glare.
3.3.9 Symmetrical (Converse Asymmetrical)
Distribution — A distribution of luminous intensity 3.4.3 Semi-cut-off Luminaire — Luminaire employing
which is substantially symmetrical (conversely the technique for concealing lamps and surfaces of high
asymmetrical) about the vertical axis of the luminaire. luminance from direct view in order to reduce glare
but to a lesser degree than cut-off luminaire.
3.3.10 Axial (Converse Non-axial) Distribution — An
asymmetrical distribution in which the directions of 3.4.4 Integral Luminaire — Luminaire with all its
maximum luminous intensity lie (do not lie) in vertical accessories such as ballasts, starters, igniters,
planes substantially parallel to the axis of the capacitors, etc. However integrally with the body of
carriageway. the luminaire.
3.3.11 Peak Intensity Ratio — The ratio of the 3.4.5 Post Top Luminaire — Luminaire with
maximum intensity to the mean hemispherical intensity arrangement for mounting the same symmetrically on
of the light emitted below the horizontal. the top of the column.
3.3.12 Mean Hemispherical Intensity — The 4 CLASSIFICATION
downward flux divided by 6.28 (2π ) (This is the
4.0 Ideally, both from the points of view of traffic safety
average intensity in the lower hemisphere).
and comfort, a high standard of lighting is advisable
3.3.13 Intensity Ratio (in a Particular Direction) — on all roads. The system of lighting, from good
The ratio of an actual intensity from the luminaire (in engineering point of view as well as economy should
a particular direction) to the mean hemispherical take into account all the relevant factors, such as the
intensity. presence of factories, places of public resort, character
of the street (whether a shopping area or a ring-road in
3.3.14 Beam — The portion of the light output of the non-built-up area), aesthetic considerations, the
luminaire contained by the solid angle subtended at properties of the carriageway surface, the existence of
the effective centre of the luminaire containing the lumps, bends or long straight stretches and overhanging
maximum intensity, but no intensity less than 90 trees.
percent of the maximum intensity.
4.1 The classification of lighting installations in public
3.3.15 Beam Centre — A direction midway between thoroughfares given in 4.2 is based on volume, speed

306 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

and composition of the traffic using them. It is left to 5.1.3 Roads in City Centres
the local engineer to decide upon the category of the
lighting for the given road. Further amplification of The main consideration while designing the lighting
the types of thoroughfares can be had from Annex A, in city centres (Group E) is proper illumination of
wherein description of terms are given for guidance. footpaths for pedestrians, besides the comfort of the
drivers. Also care is required to easily identify flow of
4.2 Types of Roads traffic and road dividers, islands, roundabouts, etc.
For the purposes of this Section, roads are classified 5.1.4 Roads with Special Requirements (Group F)
as given in Table 1.
Separate considerations are required to be given for
5 GENERAL PRINCIPLES each of the following:
5.1 Aims of Public Lighting Installations a) Airports — The main consideration in
5.1.1 Main Roads designing lighting of roads in the vicinity of
airports is to ensure that under no
The aim of public lighting along main roads, bridges circumstances, would a pilot mistake the
and flyovers (Groups A, B and D) is to permit users of stretch of the road as airport landing strip at
the roads at night to move about with greatest possible night time. Also the lamps should not cause
safety and comfort so that the traffic capacity of the glare to the pilot either while taking off or
road at night is as much equal to that planned for day more specifically while landing, which may
time as possible. Towards this end consideration has interfere with his/her judgement.
to be given while designing the lighting on road b) Railways and docks — The driver of the
junctions and pedestrian crossings so that these can be railway is required to observe a number of
easily identified by the drivers. signals along the tracks in the course of his
5.1.2 Roads in Residential Areas work. It is necessary that none of the street
lamps cause either glare to the driver or is
The principle aim of public lighting along roads in mistaken by the driver for track signals.
residential areas (Group C) is to provide light along Similar considerations are applicable to
the stretch of carriage way and footpath for safety and navigators in the vicinity of docks.
comfort of road users mainly the pedestrians;
consideration has to be given to ensure that the lighting 5.2 Principles of Vision in Public Lighting
is soft and does not cause glare. 5.2.0 Though public lighting has to satisfy both drivers

Table 1 Road Classification

(Clause 4.2)

Sl Group Description
No. {as in IS : 1944
(Part 1 and 2)}
(1) (2) (3)

i) A Main Roads:
A1 Very important routes with rapid and dense traffic where safety, speed of traffic and comfort to drivers
are the only consideration.
A2 Other main roads with considerable mixed traffic like main city streets, arterial roads, etc.
ii) B Secondary roads—Roads which do not require lighting up to Group A standard.
B1 Secondary roads of considerable traffic such as principal local traffic routes, shopping streets, etc.
B2 Secondary roads with comparatively light traffic.
iii) C Residential and unclassified roads. These are roads not included in Groups A and B.
iv) D Grade separated junctions, bridges and elevated roads (see Note 2).
v) E Town and city centres and areas of civic importance (see Note 2).
vi) F Roads with special requirements (see Note 3).
vii) G Tunnels (roads underground).
NOTES
1 For the purposes of lighting installations, bridges are classified short or long when their lengths are less than or greater than 60 m.
2 Such areas are set apart in view of the fact that their standard of lighting is different from and higher than that described for other
groups. Group E also includes important shopping streets, boulevards, promenades and such other places which are the focus of
special activities after dark.
3 Group F includes roads in the vicinity of aerodromes, railways, docks and navigable waterways; where special lighting requirements
are to be met in addition to compliance with general principles.

PART 5 OUTDOOR INSTALLATIONS 307

SP 30 : 2011

and pedestrians, it is in practice the requirements of safety and sufficient visual comfort. It is obvious that
the drivers which are more stringent. The following it is the road surface luminance rather than the
principles are considered essential [see also IS 1944 illumination level which provides for an accurate
(Parts 1 and 2)]. measure of the effective light in a street lighting
installation. However, with the present state of
5.2.1 Requirements of Drivers
technique and the knowledge of reflection properties
These are as follows: of road surfaces, the calculation and measurement of
luminance are likely to present difficulties. Reference
a) Visibility of the whole of the road and its
may be made to 8.1 regarding illumination values to
details such as entry of side-roads, traffic
be provided on the road surfaces.
signs, etc;
b) Visual guidance on the alignment of the road; 5.3.2 Uniformity of Luminance
c) Clear visibility of objects in time; This provides visual comfort for the driver.
d) Good seeing condition by silhouette vision;
5.3.3 Limitation of Glare
e) Continuity and uniformity of lighting; and
f) General or special lighting of signs. It is required to control the glare due to luminaires at a
value which keeps the visual discomfort below an
5.2.2 Visual Field of the Driver acceptable level.
The visual field of the driver comprises, in order of 5.3.4 Visual Guidance
decreasing importance:
A good visual guidance is required especially in long
a) The carriageway; stretches of the road and even more on complicated
b) The surrounds to the road, including signs; and intersections, roundabouts, etc. Most of the long range
c) The sky, including the bright luminaires. guidance is offered by the luminaires.
5.2.3 Visibility 6 DESIGN
The phenomenon of visibility is directly related to 6.1 Layout for Roads
contrast. Good contrast should always be produced:
The design, spacing and column heights are governed
a) between the carriageway and all objects which by the road-width and the classification of the roads.
indicate its boundaries; and Typical layouts for various road width are given in
b) between any obstacles which may be present Table 2.
and the background against which it appears;
since the characteristics of the obstacles may Table 2 Classification of Roads and
vary over a very wide range, any factor which Recommended Arrangement of Columns
tends to increase contrast should be exploited.
Sl Width of Group Arrangement Column Spacing
5.2.4 Glare and Visual Comfort No. Carriage as in Fig. Height
Way H S
Glare in public lighting is generally caused by the m m
luminaires. Other factors that can lead to glare are (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
presence of undesirable large surface of high reflection i) 24 A1 2F 9-14 2.5-3.0 H
factor, specular surfaces, excessively bright shop ii) A2 2E 9 2.5 H
iii) 18-20 A1 2D 9-14 2.5-3.0 H
windows, advertisement signs or road direction signs. iv) 2C 9 2.5 H
v) A2 2D 9 2.5 H
5.3 Criteria of Quality vi) 2C 9 2.5 H
vii) B1 2C 9 3.0 H
5.3.0 The following four factors contribute to the viii) 12 A2 2C 9 2.5 H
fundamental criteria of quality of public lighting: ix) B1 2C 9 3.0 H
x) B2 2B 9 3.0 H
a) Level of luminance, xi) C 2B 9 2.0 H
xii) 9 B2 2B 9 3.0 H
b) Uniformity of luminance, xiii) C 2B 7 3.5 H
c) Limitation of glare, and xiv) 6 C 2C 7 3.5 H
d) Optical guidance.
5.3.1 Level of Luminance 6.2 Layout for Flyovers
The level of luminance should be adequate to provide The design and column heights for flyovers are
visibility which guarantee for the user a maximum of governed by the layout of flyovers, height above

308 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

FIG. 2 STANDARD LAYOUTS FOR ROADS (SIX ALTERNATIVES)

PART 5 OUTDOOR INSTALLATIONS 309

SP 30 : 2011

normal ground level and the width of the low level junction could be lit by HPSV lamps or vice
roads. The spacing may be governed by the structural versa.
design of the flyovers. The layout of typical flyovers
is given in Fig. 3A to 3D. Table 5 Recommended Variation in Height of
Columns of Junctions
6.2.1 The layout with recommended arrangements,
(Clause 6.3.1)
column heights and spacing for various road widths
on flyover are given in the Table 3. Sl No. Height of Columns Recommended Height of
on Roads Columns at Junctions
Table 3 Recommended Arrangement of Columns (1) (2) (3)
on Flyovers i) 7 9
ii) 9 14
Sl Width of Group Arrangement Column Spacing iii) 14 High mast
No. Carriage as in Fig. Height1
Way H S
m m 6.3.2 The different types of junctions commonly
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) encountered are discussed below in details as they
i) 12 D 3C 9 2-2.5 H require special consideration:
ii) D 3B 9 2H
iii) 9 D 3A 9 2H a) Simple two road junction — This type of
1)
Above the flyover road level. junction should be illuminated by locating the
columns in such configuration that the
junction is noticed by fast moving traffic. The
6.2.2 The layouts with recommended arrangements, design would depend upon existence of traffic
column heights and spacing for various road widths of islands at the junctions. Typical layout of such
low level road are given in Table 4. junctions are shown in Fig. 4A to Fig. 4C.
Table 4 Recommended Arrangement of Columns
b) Junction of two major roads — These
on Flyovers (Low Level Roads)
junctions would generally be provided with
Sl Width of Group Arrangement Column Spacing traffic island at suitable locations to regulate
No. Carriage as in Fig. Height1) flow of traffic. The lighting columns could
Way H S be located in the islands to advantage.
m m
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
However, if the junctions are too wide or the
islands do not permit planting of poles within
i) Over 20 D 3C 9 2.5 H the desired spacing, special considerations are
ii) 10 - 20 D 3D 14 1.5 H
iii) Upto 10 D 3A 9 2.5 H required.
1)
Above low level road Typical layout of such junctions are shown in
Fig. 5A to 5C.
6.3 Junctions
c) Multiple road junctions — The lighting of
Spacing of the junction columns should be 50 to 75 multiple road junction would depend upon the
percent of the normal spacing of columns on the main geographical layout of the roads, the width
roads. These columns may be installed on the traffic of the various roads and most important, the
islands located at the junctions. traffic conditions. At such junctions invariably
6.3.1 The level of illumination of the junction should entry for traffic may not be permitted on all
be substantially different from the nearby roads. The the roads. Similarly, the traffic islands design
junctions may be lighted by either of the following would change from location to location.
methods: Special consideration will have to be given to
the design of lighting of such junction.
a) Higher level of illumination — In case this
scheme is adopted the level of illuminations Typical layout of such junctions are shown in
should be 150 percent of that of the roads. Fig. 6A to 6D.
b) Change in height of columns — The size of
6.4 Roundabouts
columns adopted at the junction should be
higher than those adopted on roads. 6.4.0 Multiple road junctions with roundabouts are
Recommended sizes are given in Table 5. much easier to design as a definite central roundabout
c) Change in the colour of the light source — In is available to locate the columns. Two types of
case the main road is lit by HPMV lamps, the roundabouts are discussed below:

310 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

FIG. 3 STANDARD LAYOUTS FOR FLYOVERS (FOUR ALTERNATIVES)

PART 5 OUTDOOR INSTALLATIONS 311

SP 30 : 2011

a) Islands which are clear or have only parking lighting as in Fig. 7C and Fig. 7D.
lots — The lighting of these could be b) Islands which have gardens or other
advantageously achieved by use of high mast construction which would be obstruction to
as given in Fig. 7A and 7B or semi-high mast line of vision of traffic — The lighting of these

l = Locations of Columns
FIG. 4 SIMPLE TWO ROAD J UNCTIONS (THREE ALTERNATIVES)

312 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

could be either by semi-high mast as in 6.5 Road Lighting in the Vicinity of Aerodrome
Fig. 8A or conventional lighting as in Fig. 8B
6.5.1 General Requirements
and 8C.
When a proposed road lighting scheme is within 5 km
of the boundary of an aerodrome it is essential that

o Location of Columns

FIG. 5 JUNCTION OF T WO MAJOR ROADS (T HREE ALTERNATIVES)

PART 5 OUTDOOR INSTALLATIONS 313

SP 30 : 2011

appropriate aviation authority is consulted regarding designing lighting scheme in the vicinity of the
any restrictions and precautions to be observed that aerodromes:
may be necessary.
a) The light provided in the vicinity of an
6.5.2 The aviation authority may have a specific interest aerodrome shall be properly screened so as
in the pattern of the layout, the mounting height, the to avoid any glare which may otherwise
colour and intensity, distribution of light emitted above endanger safety of an aircraft arriving and
the horizontal so that lighting installation does not departing from an aerodrome.
present any danger to the air navigation. The following b) Lights mounted on the electric poles/pylons
points should, therefore, be kept in view while shall not cause an obstruction to the arriving

FIG. 6 M ULTIPLE ROAD JUNCTIONS (FOUR ALTERNATIVES)

314 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

FIG. 7 USE OF HIGH MAST, SEMI-HIGH-MAST LUMINAIRES IN ROUNDABOUTS (FOUR ALTERNATIVES)

PART 5 OUTDOOR INSTALLATIONS 315

SP 30 : 2011

F IG. 8 USE OF SEMI -MAST OR CONVENTIONAL L IGHTING IN ROUNDABOUTS (THREE ALTERNATIVES)

316 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

and departing aircraft from an aerodrome in If these cannot be avoided by re-siting, it may be
terms of obstacle limitation specified by the necessary to employ screening to obviate the
airport authorities. interference even though the colour of the light source
c) It is particularly important to ensure that is not objectionable.
lighting of the road cannot ever be confused 6.6.5 Screening
with the ground lighting of the flight paths
by the pilots. Following conditions should be In all cases where screening of a light source is required
ensured: this should preferably be achieved by means of
1) In case roads are not parallel to landing properly designed luminaires and not by addition of
strips, unsightly screens to normal luminaires.
i) Uniform design and spacing of 6.6.6 Siting
columns is not recommended.
If the road is bordered by water (lake, river or canal)
ii) Arrangement of mounting columns and if the lighting is single sided, it is recommended
on opposite as in Fig. 2D is not that the columns be sited, if possible, on the waterside.
recommended.
2) In case roads are parallel to landing strips, 7 SELECTION OF EQUIPMENT
no lighting should be provided on the
stretch of road near the landing strip. 7.1 Electric Light Sources

6.6 Road Lighting in Vicinity of Railways, Docks 7.1.0 The choice of source for public lighting is guided
and Navigable Waterways by the following considerations:

6.6.0 General a) Luminous flux,

b) Economy (determined by lumens/watt and
In lighting for roads in the vicinity of railways, docks life),
and navigable waterways, because of the colour of the
c) Dimensions of the light sources, and
light source may interfere with the proper recognition
of signal system, it is essential that this interference is d) Colour characteristics.
avoided, but local conditions vary so widely that it is 7.1.1 The sources normally used in public lighting are:
not possible to lay down any rigid code applicable to
all circumstances. a) Incandescent lamps,
b) Mixed incandescent and high pressure
6.6.1 Requirements
mercury vapour lamps,
The following requirements are likely to apply in all c) High pressure mercury vapour lamps with
places where roads are so located that their lighting clear or fluorescent bulbs,
installation may affect the operation of railways, docks d) Tubular fluorescent lamps,
and navigable waterways.
e) Sodium vapour lamps,
6.6.2 Consultations f) Mercury-halide lamps, and
It is essential that prior consultation is made with the g) High pressure sodium vapour lamps.
appropriate authorities regarding any special provision 7.1.1.1 Incandescent lamps
that may be necessary. These provisions should be met
in a way that is mutually acceptable so that they may For new installations the employment of incandescent
be incorporated at the design stage. lamps is very limited in practice. They are sometimes
used for residential streets when initial cost is to be
6.6.3 Colour kept low. They are not usually employed in traffic
Where any form of road lighting is employed there is routes.
a risk of confusion with signal light. This may 7.1.1.2 Mixed incandescent and mercury vapour lamps
necessitate careful selection of light source, siting of
luminaires or the use of appropriate screened luminaire These lamps may sometimes be employed in
at certain points and heights. modernising an installation to obtain higher levels
without the need for ballasts required for discharge
6.6.4 Glare and Masking lamps.
The position of individual light source on the road may 7.1.1.3 High pressure mercury vapour lamps (HPMV)
fall in line with signal lights and even when fairly
remote may mask them or make them difficult to These lamps have higher luminous efficacy and longer
recognise or may hamper the vision because of glare. life than mixed incandescent and mercury lamps. These

PART 5 OUTDOOR INSTALLATIONS 317

SP 30 : 2011

are suitable for installations where colour rendering is one solution rather than another, but the attention of
of lesser importance and where high powers are lighting designers may be drawn to the fact that the
needed. most economical installation can be achieved only by
the choice of the most suitable luminaire, selected
7.1.1.4 Tubular fluorescent lamps
according to the relative importance of the above
These lamps have high luminous efficacy and long life. mentioned factors. There is, however, one essential
They are suitable for installations where colour characteristic of luminaires the choice of which directly
appearance and colour rendering are important and influences the quality of the lighting, that is, the general
where large multiple lamp luminaires are acceptable. form of its distribution curves of luminous intensity
The choice between high pressure mercury vapour particularly in directions near the usual directions of
fluorescent lamps and fluorescent tubes is in general vision.
determined by local considerations of aesthetics and
7.2.1 The following general forms of light distribution
cost of installation.
are considered according to the degree of glare which
7.1.1.5 Sodium vapour lamps is acceptable:
The use of sodium lamps is convenient when colour a) Post top integral luminaires,
rendering is not important and when a high luminous b) Post top non-integral luminaires,
efficacy is desired. Their colour is sometimes useful c) Cut-off integral luminaires,
to provide visual guidance. It is also particularly
d) Cut-off non-integral luminaires,
suitable under foggy conditions.
e) Semi-cut-off integral.
7.1.1.6 Mercury halide lamps f) Non-cut-off tubular luminaires, and
These lamps are improved versions of HPMV lamps g) Flood-lighting luminaires.
and having very much higher efficiencies in the order
7.2.1.1 Cut-off luminaire
of 80 lm/W combined with good colour characteristics.
A luminaire whose light distribution is characterised by
7.1.1.7 High pressure sodium vapour lamps
a rapid reduction of luminous intensity in the region
These lamps are improved versions of sodium vapour between 80° and the horizontal. The intensity at the
with efficiency of the order of to 100 lm/W with colour horizontal should not exceed 10 cd per 1 000 lm of flux
rendering satisfactory and of dimensions suited to from the light sources and the intensity at 80° is of the
fittings of small size and accurate light control. order of 30 cd per 1 000 lm. The direction of the
maximum intensity may vary but should be below 65°.
7.2 Luminaires
The principal advantage of the cut-off system is the
7.2.0 The luminaire has double role of protecting the reduction of glare and its use is favoured under the
light source from the weather and redistributing the following conditions:
luminous flux of the source.
a) Matt carriageway surfaces;
In the choice of the luminaire the following points
b) Absence of buildings;
should be considered:
c) Presence of large trees;
a) Nature and power of the source or sources; d) Long straight sections;
b) Nature of the optical arrangements and the e) Slight humps, bridges; and
light distribution which they provide;
f) Few intersections and obstructions.
c) Light output ratio;
d) Whether the luminaire is open or closed type; 7.2.1.2 Semi-cut-off luminaire
e) Resistance to heat, soiling and corrosion; A luminaire whose light distribution is characterised
f) Protection against collection of dust and by a less severe reduction in the intensity in the region
insects; 80° to 90°. The intensity at the horizontal should not
g) Resistance to atmospheric conditions; exceed 50 cd per 1 000 lm of flux from the light sources
(see Note) and the intensity at 80° is of the order of
h) Ease of installation and maintenance;
1 000 cd per 1 000 lm. The direction of the maximum
j) Presence or absence of auxiliaries; and intensity may vary but should be below 75°. The
k) Fixing arrangements, the weight and area principal advantage of the semi-cut-off system is a
exposed to wind pressure. greater flexibility in siting, and its use is favoured under
The influence of all these factors varies according to the following conditions:
local circumstances and it is difficult to recommend a) Smooth carriageway surfaces;
318 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE
 SP 30 : 2011

b) Buildings close to carriageway, especially 8 GUIDELINES FOR SPECIFIC LOCATIONS

those of architectural interest; and
8.1 Several factors contribute to good public lighting
c) Many intersections and obstructions. and those are enumerated for guidance in various parts
NOTE — Subject to a maximum value of 1 000 cd whatever is of IS 1944. Recommendations are made on the various
the luminous flux emitted. components of design of public lighting installations
7.2.1.3 Non-cut-off luminaire and those require detailed calculations of the level and
uniformity of illumination on the road surface and of
A luminaire whose luminous intensity in directions glare. Several criteria may not be satisfied for want of
making an angle equal to or greater than 80° from the data such as characteristics of surface, etc. To get some
downward vertical is not reduced materially and the idea of the extent to which the installation would
intensity of which at the horizontal may exceed the values perform, it may be preferable to make a temporary trial
specified for the semi-cut-off distribution, but should not installation of a few luminaires on a stretch of road to
nevertheless exceed 1 000 cd. Non-cut-off luminaires are be lighted.
permissible only when a certain amount of glare may be
accepted and when the luminaires are of large size and 8.2 Tables 6 to 8 give a summary of recommendations
of reduced brightness. In certain cases they have some on the various types of thoroughfares. These shall be
advantages in increasing the illumination of facades. used as ready reckoners, though for a detailed guidance
reference should be made to the relevant part of
7.2.1.4 Inclination IS 1944.
Attention should be given to the inclination of NOTE — Recommendations for Groups C, F and G lighting
luminaires. An upward inclination which is generally are under consideration.
called for reasons of aesthetics, should be employed
with care. Too great an inclination of the luminaire 9 POWER INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
may modify, particularly in certain directions, the cut- 9.1 The electrical design aspects of public lighting
off qualities of the luminaires and in certain situations installations not only take into account the illumination
(for example, when there are roads at several levels, principles, but also economic considerations giving
bends, roundabouts, etc) this inclination may lead to allowance for cost of electrical control units, cable
unexpected glare. ducts, switching, etc.

Table 6 Lighting Installation in Group A and B Roads

(Clause 8.2)

Sl No. Description Group A1 Group A2 Group B1 Group B2

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
i) Average level of illumination on road surface, lux 30 15 8 4
ii) Ratio minimum/average illumination ratio 0.4 0.4 0.3 0.3
iii) Transverse variation of illumination, percent 33 33 20 20
iv) Preferred Cut-off Cut-off Cut-off or Cut-off or
Type of luminaire: Semi-cut off Semi-cut-off
Permitted Semi-cut-off Semi-cut-off Non-cut-off Non-cut-off
v) Mounting height, m 9-10 9-10 7.5-9 7.5-9
vi) Maximum spacing of luminaire/height ratio Cut-off = 3 Cut-off = 3
Semi-cut-off = 3.5 Semi-cut-off = 3.5
Non-cut-off = 4
NOTES
1 In Group A lighting, the level and uniformity of illumination shall be as high as possible and the glare strictly reduced.
2 In Group B lighting, greater tolerances on uniformity and glare are admitted, which may be justified by the character of the roads
and by the presence of facades.
3 Mounting heights less than 7.5 m are undesirable except in special cases, such as lighting of residential roads or roads bordered by
trees.

PART 5 OUTDOOR INSTALLATIONS 319

SP 30 : 2011

Table 7 Lighting Installations in Group D Roads

(Clause 8.2)

Sl No. Description Remarks

(1) (2) (3)
i) A. Grade Separated Junctions
1) Lighting by conventional street lighting
technique
Complex junctions:
a) General principles As in IS 1944 (Parts 1 and 2)
b) Mounting height, m 10-12
c) Luminaire cut-off
d) Light sources HPMV or HPSV lamps
2) Lighting by high-mast lighting
a) Minimum service level value (lux) 30

EMin
b) Uniformity ratio 0.4
EAvg
c) Height of masts, m Not less than 20
d) Choice of luminaire see IS 1944 (Parts 1 and 2)

ii) B. Bridges
1) Short bridges (≤60 m) Normal street lighting techniques with minor adjustments
[see IS 1944 (Part 5)]
2) Long bridges (> 60 m) See IS 1944 (Part 5)
3) Bridges of historical importance Special considerations apply
4) Parapet lighting
a) Mounting height, m Not greater than 1
b) Separation between rows of lighting, m Not greater than 12
c) Choice of lamps Tubular fluorescent lamps, HPSV lamps or other linear
sources of luminance weatherproof, dustproof, verminproof,
robust
5) Foot-bridges
a) Illumination, lux Not less than 6

iii) C. Elevated Roads

a) General lighting Similar to heavy traffic roads
b) Choice of luminaire Cut-off

9.1.1 Lamps and Luminaires operated contactors of suitable current rating. Auxiliary
9.1.1.1 All lamps and luminaires and other fittings used terminals of these contactors could provide facility of
in public lighting installations shall conform to the return indication in case of supervisory remote control.
relevant Indian Standards. The contactor circuits shall be provided with externally
mounted switches for local manual operation. A typical
9.2 Cables street lighting pillar with control circuit is shown in Fig. 9.
9.2.1 Underground cables shall be laid for power supply 9.2.2 The cable circuits for each section of the roads shall
to the street lamps. For roads under Groups A, B and D, be so designed as to prevent important section of the roads
separate mains shall be laid for group control of lamps from being completely off in case of a fault on the
on these roads. The street lighting cables shall be underground cables. For roads under Groups A1, A2 and
terminated in separate junction boxes or street lighting D, each stretch of road shall be lit by two independent
pillars. The pillars shall be provided with electrically circuits, preferably emanating from two separate street

320 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

Table 8 Lighting Installations in Group E Roads

(Clause 8.2)

Sl No. Description Remarks

(1) (2) (3)
i) Main squares [see IS 1944 (Part 6)]:
1) Average level of illumination, lux 20
2) Mounting height, m 10-15
ii) Shopping streets/promenades Special considerations
iii) Pedestrian precincts
1) Average horizontal illuminance (footway level), lux 20
2) Average horizontal illuminance (under canopies), lux 50
3) Mounting height, m 5-6
4) Luminaires Special considerations
iv) Public car parks (above ground)
1) Average horizontal illuminance, lux 10
2) Luminaires preferred Floodlight luminaries on high masts
v) Pedestrian stairways/footbridges
1) Average level of illuminance (surface of footbridge), lux 6
2) Average level of illuminance (sub-ways), lux 10

lighting pillars. For junctions also, the lamps shall be purposes. In case overhead wires are employed these should
divided into at least two circuits in such a way that in also be suitable for street lighting purposes.
case of fault on one circuit the entire junction or a section
of it does not become completely dark. 9.4 Control of Street Lighting Installations

9.2.3 In case of roads in groups A, B and D, the cables 9.4.1 The contactors may be provided with additional
shall preferably be terminated into the column junction circuitry for remote/automatic control. Following
boxes by looping rather than ‘T’ joints. schemes for remote control are recommended:

9.2.4 Underground cables of suitable sizes should be a) Special relay control — This may be achieved
utilised for the purpose of control. The recommended by special control cables laid up to the street
sizes of the cables for various installation are shown lighting pillar. Special relays operated by
in Table 9. normal supply or electronic impulses may be
provided. This scheme enables return
Table 9 Recommended Types and Sizes of Cables indication of the operation by auxiliary
contacts of the contactors.
Sl Road Minimum Size Type of Cables b) Ripple control — This may be achieved by
No. Group of Cables
mm2
injecting audio frequency impulse through
suitable power supply network and installing
(1) (2) (3) (4)
suitable sensors at control points.
i) A1 16 3-phase, 4-core
ii) A2 16 3-phase, 4-core 9.4.2 Automatic Control
iii) B1 16 3-phase, 4-core
iv) B2 16 Single phase/3-phase, 4-core The contactors may, alternately, be controlled
v) C 16 Single phase/3-phase, 4-core automatically by use of auto-control devices. The
vi) D 16 3-phase, 4-core following controls are recommended:
a) Photoelectric control — This may be achieved
9.2.5 The junction boxes with suitable sized contactors by installing suitably mounted photoelectric
with independent fuses shall be provided for each phase. switches near the control points. The
The contactors shall be controlled by electrically operated photoelectric switch shall be mounted so as to
switches mounted for external manual/local operation. be free from the glare caused by headlights of
motor vehicles and protected from the weather.
9.3 Power Supply
b) Time Switches — The local electrically
The supply to the street lights may be either through
operated contractors may be controlled through
overhead wires or underground cables. The supply to lamps
time switches. The time switches may be
on roads under Groups A, B and D, should preferably be manually spring would or electrically operated.
by underground cables laid specially for street lighting In case of electrical operation the time switches

PART 5 OUTDOOR INSTALLATIONS 321

SP 30 : 2011

9A Typical Street Lighting Pillar 9B Inside Layout

9C Typical Contactor Wiring (Manual)

9D Typical Wiring For Remote/Auto Control

FIG. 9 A TYPICAL STREET LIGHTING PILLAR

322 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

should be of electrically-wound mechanically- or by separate ripple control signals. In case of

operated variety so as to prevent their being necessity, either one or two phases could be
affected by variations in supply frequency. switched off, or alternately alternate lamps be
However, these would need to be regulated switched off by suitable ripple control signals.
from time to time due to seasonal variations. d) Replacement of lamps — In case of prolonged
c) Electronic Control Switches — It should be brown-out operations, the wattage of the lamps
possible to install pre-programmed electronic could be reduced by replacing the same with
micro-processors, with one year seasonal lower wattage lamps. This, though could not
variations. These could be installed for each be achieved on short notice is recommended
individual lamp. With suitable design these in case of prolonged operations.
could also be utilised to switch off unwanted
10 MISCELLANEOUS CONSIDERATIONS
lights after peak traffic hours are over.
8.4.3 Black-out Control — Black-out control may be 10.1 Aesthetics
required to be adopted in case of war in vulnerable areas. The aesthetics of a lighting installation are principally
This could be achieved by either of the following schemes: judged by day. Half of the time, the lighting installation
a) Remote Control — Special control cables are serves no useful purpose; an attractive or at least a non-
laid (alternatively, use of telephone cables) disturbing daytime appearance which harmonises well
to give control impulse to group control with the surroundings is, therefore, of great importance.
points. The control could then be utilised to Aesthetic considerations should relate to the unit
switch off the lamps instantaneously on formed by the luminaire and its support and the
demand by civil defence authorities. situation in which it is placed.
b) Ripple Control — In case special control cables Firstly, the unit formed by the luminaire and its support
are not available, ripple control equipment could should be considered. Secondly, the siting of the
be used with suitable sensing devices at the control luminaires in the scene may lead to unpleasant effects
points. When the need arises, the entire area could even if the luminaires themselves considered in
be switched off by ripple control impulse. isolation, are aesthetic.
c) UHF control — Electronic relays responding There are no simple or universal rules for aesthetically
to pre-determined control frequency could be satisfactory design and layout since every city, town
installed at each switching point. This could and village has its own character and what may look
be programmed to switch off on demand by a well in one place may be incongruous in another.
pre-determined control frequency signal.
The points of general application are:
9.4.4 Brown-out Control
a) Design and siting;
Brown-out control is necessary in vulnerable cities with
b) Columns and surroundings:
heavy vehicular traffic at the time of war, where
complete black-out is not practicable. Even in such c) Size and type of luminaire;
cases, complete black-out would be necessary at the d) Form of bracket;
time of possible air raids. Following alternatives for e) Assembly of column, bracket and luminaire;
brown-out control are recommended: f) Arrays of luminaires; and
a) Voltage control — This could be advantageously g) Material and colour.
adopted in areas where the source of lighting is 10.2 Lighting Columns as Hazards
filament lamp. Applying reduced voltage to such
lamps would automatically reduce the illumi- A motor vehicle involved in an accident frequently
nation to any desired level. In case of discharge leaves the carriageway and the probability of this
lamps this scheme would not be suitable. happening increases with the speed of the vehicle. If
b) Ripple control — In case ripple control is the vehicle collides with a lighting column the severity
adopted, it would be possible to programme of injuries to the occupants is likely to be increased.
alternate (or any other combination) lamps to There is evidence to suggest that the number of such
respond to specified ripple control signals. In collisions decreases with the increase of distance of
case of necessity, brown-out could be effected the column from the edge of the carriageway.
by switching off alternate lamps and complete Normally the clearance between column and
black-out by switching off all the lamps. carriageway should be at least 1.5 m. Where there is a
c) Multiple Lamp Luminaires — On main roads footway close to the carriageway, the column should
the luminaires adopted could have two or more be sited behind the footway. In exceptional cases a
lamps, each controlled either by different phase smaller clearance may be used.

PART 5 OUTDOOR INSTALLATIONS 323

SP 30 : 2011

ANNEX A
(Clause 4.1)
TYPES OF ROADS

Sl No. Term Description of Type of Road Sl No. Term Description of Type of Road
(1) (2) (3) (1) (2) (3)
i) Road A general term denoting any x) Commercial Street with frontages comprising
public way for purposes of street a high proportion of commercial
vehicular traffic premises (usually unlit at night),
and with a high proportion of
ii) Street A road which has become partly
heavy goods vehicles in the
or wholly defined by buildings
traffic stream
along one or both frontages
xi) Shopping Street with frontages comprising
iii) Motorway A road reserved for motor traffic,
street a high proportion of shops or
accessible only from interchanges
other premises which may be lit
and on which, in particular,
at night and with heavy
stopping and parking are
pedestrian (and possibly pedal
prohibited. Roads of this type
cycle) traffic
should have two or several separate
and one-way carriageways xii) Resident street Street with the majority of
frontages comprising private
iv) Express road A road similar to, but lacking
houses
some feature of a motorway, for
example: xiii) Collector road/ A link between the radial or ring
a) not dual-carriageway Distributor road roads and the local access streets
b) not fully access-controlled
xiv) Local street Street giving direct access to
c) not all intersections grade-
buildings and land with a
separated
minimum of through traffic
v) All purpose Road usable by all traffic (includ-
xv) Service road A subsidiary road between
road ing pedestrians and cyclists)
principle road and buildings or
Used to distinguish other roads properties facing thereon or a
from motorways parallel road to the principal
road and giving access to the
vi) Trunk road/ A main route in the through com
premises and connected only at
Major road munication system of a country
selected points with the
vii) Minor road A road which has, or to which principle road
is assigned, a lesser traffic value
xvi) Footway That portion of a road reserved
than that of a major road
exclusively for pedestrians
viii) Ring road A road round an urban area
xvii) Cycle track A way, or part of a road, reserved
enabling traffic to avoid the
for use only by bicycles
urban centre
ix) Radial road A road providing direct
communication between the
centre of an urban area and the
outer districts

324 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

SECTION 2 TEMPORARY OUTDOOR INSTALLATIONS

0 FOREWORD 3.1 Temporary Installations (Outdoor) — An

electrical installation open to sky or partially covered,
Electrical installations are often required to be designed
intended to be used for a temporary period not
and erected for use for short periods of time ranging
exceeding 6 months.
from a few hours to few months and are connected to
the supply source in open ground. Such installations NOTE — In special cases, the guidelines specified in this
Section shall be applicable for longer durations subject to fresh
are generally unprotected from environmental hazards
inspection and tests with the prior approval of the supply
as compared to installations in buildings. authority (see also 9.3).
The major risks in the use of power in such installation
4 CLASSIFICATION
arise from short circuit resulting in fire accidents and
exposure to live wire resulting in shock. It is, therefore, 4.1 The temporary outdoor electrical installations
imperative to lay down the necessary precautions to covered in this Section are those intended for the
be observed for such installations from the point of following purposes:
view of safety.
a) Temporary installations for durations not
Temporary installations covered in this section are exceeding 6 months — Outdoor installations
enumerated in 5 and are classified based on the duration open to sky or partially covered, erected in
of their existence in use. It may be noted that this the vicinity of construction sites solely for the
section basically intends to lay down additional safety purposes of supplying the electrical needs of
measures to be adopted in the design of temporary building construction work such as lighting
installations, and the general guidelines for outdoor and power loads.
installations under heavy conditions from the point NOTES
of view of selection and use of equipment given in 1 Construction site installations for very long periods
Part 5/Section 3 shall also be referred to. of times, where the equipment are quite similar to those
in heavy conditions shall conform to the requirements
1 SCOPE in Part 5/Sec 3 of this Code.
2 Construction site installations are those which include
This Part 5/Section 2 of the Code covers the sites where the following are carried out:
requirements for outdoor electrical installations of a) Construction of new building;
temporary use. b) Works of repair, alternation, extension or
demolition of existing buildings; and
2 REFERENCES c) Public engineering works.
The construction site installations are also characterised
This Part 5/Section 2 of the code should be read in
by frequent modifications.
conjunction with the following Indian Standards:
b) Temporary installations for durations not
IS No. Title
exceeding 45 days — These include fairly
5613 (Part 1/ Code of practice for design, large loads such as for exhibitions, fairs, etc.
Sec 1) : 1985 installation and maintenance of NOTE — Exhibition or fair site lighting installations of
overhead power lines: Part 1 the permanent type shall conform to the requirements
Lines up to and including 11 kV, specified in Part 5/Section 1 of this Code.
Section 1 Design c) Temporary installations for durations not
5613 (Part 1/ Code of practice for design, exceeding 7 days — These include
Sec 2) : 1985 installation and maintenance of installations site of temporary nature intended
overhead power lines: Part 1 Lines for a week long public function or outdoor
upto and including 11 kV, Section lighting installations of buildings and parts
2 Installation and maintenance
in view of festival and other reasons.
SP 7 : 2005 National Building Code of India
d) Temporary installations for durations not
exceeding 24 hours — These include
3 TERMINOLOGY
temporary installations which cater to loads
For the purpose of this Section 2, the following for the purposes of marriages, reception,
definition in addition to those given in Part 1/Section 2 religious and other public function, etc.
of this Code shall apply.

PART 5 OUTDOOR INSTALLATIONS 325

SP 30 : 2011

5 GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS OF Utilisation Characteristics Remarks

TEMPORARY INSTALLATIONS (1) (2) (3)
General guidelines on the assessment of characteristics Capability of Uninstructed Majority of
of installations in buildings are given in Part 1/Sec 8 persons persons occupants say in
of this Code. For the purposes of installations falling an exhibitions
under the scope of this section, the characteristics circus fairs
defined below generally apply. Instructed persons Applies to
adequately advised operating staff
5.1 Environment
or supervised by
The following environmental factors shall apply to skilled persons
temporary outdoor installations: Contact of Frequent Construction sites
persons with
Environment Characteristics Remarks earth
(1) (2) (3) potential
Presence of Possibility of External lighting Conditions of Low density Small gatherings,
water splashes from any fittings, evacuation occupation easy such as for
direction construction site during conditions of marriages and
equipment, etc emergency evacuation similar functions
Possibility of jets of Temporary High density Circus, large
water in any installations in public gatherings
occupation, difficult
direction parts conditions of inside an
Partial or total evacuation enclosure, etc.
covering by water Nature of Fire risk Shamianahs,
Presence of Presence of small processed tents
foreign solid objects Construction Combustible The nature of
bodies of structure construction
Presence of dust in materials used in
significant quantity temporary
installations may
Impact High severity Construction be combustible.
demolition sites
Such as wooden
Vibrations Medium severity Constructions, cloth structures in
demolitions sites tents
Presence of No harmful hazard Structural design Structures which
flora/mould flexible or unstable are weak or
growth subject to
Presence of Hazard from fauna movement, such
fauna (insects, birds, small as tents,
animals) removable
Solar Solar radiation of partitions etc.
radiation harmful intensity
and/or duration
6 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR
Seismic — Depends on the TEMPORARY OUTDOOR INSTALLATIONS
effects location of the
installation 6.1 Temporary installation shall in general conform to
Lighting Hazard from Generally the requirements stipulated in the relevant Section of
exposure of applicable for Part 1 of this Code, in respect wiring of circuits,
equipment installations location and installation of equipment, etc. Additional
located outdoors requirements are given in 7 (see also SP 7).
6.2 If the equipment used in temporary and provisional
5.2 Utilization places of work in the open, such as building sites are
similar to those used in surface mining applications,
The following factors of utilization apply: references shall be made to the guidelines contained
in Part 5/Section 3 of this Code.

326 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

7 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS FOR 7.1.2.2 Means of emergency switching shall be

TEMPORARY OUTDOOR INSTALLATIONS provided on the supply to all current using equipment
on which it may be necessary to disconnect all live
7.1 Supply Intake Arrangements conductors in order to remove a hazard.
7.1.0 The type of outdoor installations will depend 7.1.2.3 The enclosure or the cupboard in which the
on the magnitude and duration of the installation. main-switch is installed shall be such that the
Depending on the availability of spare capacity, of equipment within shall be unaffected by the
the existing distribution system, the supply intake environmental conditions (see 5.1).
arrangements could be through either of the
following: 7.1.2.4 The main switch on the installation shall be
connected to the point of supply by means of an
a) A HV feeder, armoured cable or insulated wires and the termination
b) A HV feeder and step-down transformer, of this cable shall be adequately protected from rain
c) A service line at voltages below 250 V, or water.
d) A tapping form one of the existing service 7.1.2.5 The main switches shall be located at a height
connection. not exceeding 1.5 m so as to be accessible in
One construction site may be served by several sources emergencies.
of supply, including fixed or mobile power generators. 7.1.2.6 The cable shall be laid either underground or
All the circuits supplied from the same point of supply supported in the air. Precautions shall be taken to ensure
comprise one installation and it is important to clearly that this cable when laid underground is done so with
differentiate them; in particular, a single distribution the same meticulous care as is, done for a permanent
point, cabinet or distribution board shall consist of only installation. In case the cable passes underneath the
components belonging to one and the same installation passages, it shall be laid in whole or split pipes. When
except for circuits for standby supplies, signalling or laid over ground, the cables shall either be cleated with
control. saddles of proper size along the walls of a permanent
7.1.1 Commissioning of Substation structure if available, or alternatively, it shall be
supported on rigid poles. The height of the cable shall
In case the loads at construction sites or to exhibitions, not be less than 2 m when run inside the compound
circuses, etc, are large and the power supply authority and at least 5 m when run along or across road.
has no network in the vicinity of the temporary Crossing of the road shall preferably be avoided. An
installation that could be utilised then it would be independent earthing shall be established inside the
necessary to establish a temporary substation where installation premises. In case overhead wires are used
the switchgear and transformer can be installed. The in the installation they should conform to the relevant
substation site shall be so selected that it is as close to Indian Standards mentioned in 7.1.1.
the load centre as possible.
7.1.2.7 In selecting the equipment and cables, the rating
The power supply authority’s line should be brought shall be decided taking the environmental conditions
up to the substation in a separate enclosure. If overhead into account.
line is laid up to the temporary substation, then the
supporting poles, conductors, materials of the line, 7.1.2.8 The supply intake point shall be placed outside
insulation and the method of stringing the conductors the periphery of area which is accessible to the general
and the mechanical strength of the line as a whole shall public.
conform to the relevant provisions of IS 5613 (Part 1/ 7.1.2.9 In cities, towns and thickly populated localities,
Section 1) and IS 5613 (Part 1/Section 2). In case it is advisable to wire up the installation with insulated
supply at voltages above 650 V is required, a suitable wires including for main circuits in open compounds
enclosure to install the switchgear and the metering or running along or across roads. For main circuits,
arrangement shall also be erected. cables shall be used, preferably laid underground.
7.1.2 Power Distribution Alternatively, they shall be cleated along the walls of
structures with proper saddles. When laid underground,
7.1.2.1 At the origin of each installation a unit the cable shall be laid at a depth of 900 mm, covered
containing the main control gear and the principal with sand, bricks and earth for providing mechanical
protective device shall be provided. The main switch protection.
shall be installed in an earthed metallic enclosure and
as close to the metering point as possible (see 7.1.2.10 For temporary installations in cities and towns
also 7.2.1.1). for purposes described under 4.1(b), (c) and (d), bare

PART 5 OUTDOOR INSTALLATIONS 327

SP 30 : 2011

conductors shall not be used. Only in the case of load 7.2.2.2 The outgoing wires from the sub-circuit
for purposes mentioned under 4.1(a) especially outside switches inside the enclosure shall be cleated firmly
cities and town bare conductors are permitted. on wooden battens or taken through conduits which
are fixed by means of saddles to the masonry wall or
7.1.2.11 In cities and towns, if the premises where
wooden partition wall. The lead wires connected to
temporary electric supply required is isolated, then:
the sub circuits switches shall be suitably supported
a) mixed wiring of insulated and bare conductor on wall with clips and shall not be left hanging. Spans
— overhead wiring, and more than 2 m shall have guide wire support.
b) mixed wiring, partly underground and partly 7.2.2.3 The distribution boards the sub-circuits shall
overhead may be used. be at an accessible height but not less than 1 m. The
In such an event, the underground part of the distribution boards shall be fixed on firm supports or
installation and the overhead part of the installation on pole firmly planted in the ground.
shall separately conform to the requirements as 7.2.2.4 Taped joints shall not be used at heights less
mentioned in this Section. than 3 m. The taped joints shall be properly supported
and preferably clamped on either side of the joint so
7.2 Control of Circuits
that the joint is not subject to a strain. For series lights
7.2.1 Main Circuit used for decorative purposes no taped joint shall be
used.
7.2.1.1 A device shall be provided on the incoming
cable to each supply unit and each distribution unit for 7.2.2.5 A broken bulb of a lamp in a series circuit is a
switching and isolating. With this type of arrangement risk and therefore series lamps shall not be strung or
it shall be possible to switch off the supply at the intake hung at heights less than 3 m. A defective series lamp
point or at the distribution point. shall not be allowed to remain in its position and shall
be immediately removed.
7.2.1.2 The main switch shall be adequately protected
from ingress of water. The incoming and outgoing 7.2.2.6 Installation at construction sites
cable/wires of the main switch shall be firmly supported
The entire area where the temporary supply will be
so that cable and wire ends connected to the main
used, shall be indicated beforehand and in case the
switch shall not be subjected to any mechanical force,
electric supply is required at construction site for pipe
transmitted to it from any portion of the cables and
lines, then a drawing may also be given to the electric
wires.
supply authority. On this drawing various points from
7.2.1.3 The main switch shall be installed on a firm where different appliances/equipment are intended to
and vertical surface, which can withstand the be used, may also be indicated. All switches, sockets
mechanical vibrations created at the installation site and fixed appliances shall be protected from rain by
as well as the wind pressure at the location. enclosing these in cubicles. Sub-circuit distribution
board shall be installed, at a place where it is safe from
7.2.1.4 There shall be adequate ventilation in the room
atmospheric conditions. If such a place is not available,
where main switches are installed and there shall be
the distribution board shall be placed in a cubicle. In a
operational space around the switch in accordance with
3 phase circuit the loads on the 3 phases shall be
good practice. The switch room shall be accessible at
balanced. At the point of supply the load on the neutral
any time of the day or night to authorised persons.
shall not be more than 20 percent of the computed value
7.2.2 Sub-circuit of the load in the phases.
7.2.2.1 On large temporary installations like those on 7.2.3 Earthing
construction sites, at exhibitions, circuses, etc, the
7.2.3.1 All appliances and equipment on temporary
outgoing end of the main switch shall be connected to
installation shall be connected to a system of duplicate
busbar of adequate size and various sub-circuits shall
earthing—one of the power supply Authority and one
be connected to this busbar through double or triple
local. Wherever armoured cables are used, the
pole switches, depending upon whether they are single
armouring shall be connected to earthing arrangement
phase or 3 phase circuits. The switches shall be
of power supply Authority. For local earthing, an
mounted on a firm support and shall be at a height
independent earth continuity wire shall be used.
between 1 m and 2 m from the floor level. The sub
circuit switch shall be so spaced that there shall be a 7.2.3.2 For local earthing the earth electrode shall be
minimum clear distance of 60 mm between the buried near the supply intake point. The earth
switches for ease of operation. continuity wire shall be bare round conductors/strips

328 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

and shall be a single core insulated wire and shall be disconnection of supply appropriate to the system
connected to the local earth plate and taken along the of earthing. Socket outlet shall either be protected
cable connecting the supply intake point and the main by residual current devices having operating current
switch in the installation. The connection from this not exceeding 30 mA or be supplied by safety extra-
earth continuity wire shall be taken to various sub- low voltage or electrical separation of circuit each
distribution boards and terminated on a busbar. All socket outlet being supplied by a separate
appliances and equipment connected to sub- transformer.
distribution board shall get their duplicate earth
connection from the earth continuity busbar on the sub- 9 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING
distribution board. 9.1 Supply to all temporary installations should be
connected by a specific date for the user and therefore
8 PROTECTION AND SAFETY
the installation work meant for types of installations
8.1 The installation as a whole shall be protected in 4.1(a), (b) and (c) shall be ready at least 24 h prior
against overload, short circuit and earth leakage by to connection of supply, so as to properly test the
suitable protective devices. installation and find the loads in different sub-circuits.
8.2 Temporary supply is generally used at public places In the case of installation described in 4.1(c) there
and for public functions and, therefore, extreme care should be a period of at least 6 h after completion of
shall be taken to ensure that there is no risk of any type the work and prior to connecting supply for the purpose
of hazard either from electrical shock or fire. of testing the installation and visual inspection.

No flammable material shall be stored near the service 9.2 The various tests on the installation shall be carried
intake point or the operational area of electrical out as laid down in Part 1/Section 10 of this Code.
equipment or appliances. For large public functions, 9.3 When the specified duration of use of the
exhibitions, etc, suitable fire extinguishers shall be kept installation as defined in 3.1 is required to be extended
at the supply intake point and near the main switch of beyond the stipulated period of 6 months, the guidelines
the installation. specified in this Section shall be applicable subject to
In construction sites, protection of persons against fresh inspection and tests as above, with the prior
indirect contact shall be assured by automatic approval of the supply authority.

PART 5 OUTDOOR INSTALLATIONS 329

SP 30 : 2011

SECTION 3 PERMANENT OUTDOOR INSTALLATIONS

0 FOREWORD 6 months for which reference shall be made to Part 5/

Section 2 of this Code.
Outdoor installations of the permanent nature require
special treatment as compared to temporary NOTE — However this Section shall be applicable to building
sites and earth-moving sites as far as the equipment used therein
installations of short durations (less than 6 months)
are similar to those used in surface mining application.
primarily owing to the continuous exposure of the
former installation and equipment forming part of it to 2 REFERENCES
heavy conditions of service at site. The design and
selection of equipment and components have to take This Part 5/Section 3 of this Code should be read in
into consideration the expected loading, operating conjunction with the following Indian Standards:
characteristics and cycle duty, as well as the special IS No. Title
and arduous environmental, operational, transportation 1255 : 1983 Code of practice for installation
and storage conditions. and maintenance of paper
This Section of the Code attempts to cover the general insulated power cables (up to and
requirements applicable to equipment and auxiliaries including 33 kV)
for a variety of permanent outdoor site installations 10028 (Part 2) : 1981 Code of practice for selection,
which are enumerated in 4. It is intended to provide installation and maintenance of
necessary guidelines for such installations in this transformers : Part 2 Installation
Section for the purposes of the practicing engineers IS/IEC 60947 Specification for low voltage
and the relevant authorities. (Part 1) : 2003 switchgear and controlgear: Part 1
General rules
The general characteristics of permanent outdoor
installations are enumerated in 5. The object of this 3 TERMINOLOGY
Section is to set out the guiding principles so as to 3.0 For the purpose of this Section, the definitions given
ensure the safety of persons, livestock, property and in Part 1 along with the following shall apply:
the proper functioning.
3.1 Operations (:
In the preparation of this Section considerable
assistance has been derived from IEC 60621 : 1987
‘Electrical installations for outdoor sites under heavy
conditions including open-cast mines and quarries’,
issued by the International Electrotechnical
Commission.

1 SCOPE
1.1 This Part 5/Section 3 of this Code covers
requirements for permanent outdoor installations, for
operations of equipment and machinery therein used
for the purposes such as:
a) Winning, stacking and primary processing;
b) Secondary processing;
c) Transport conveying;
d) Associated pumping and water supply
systems;
e) Haulage trucks;
f) Power generating and distribution systems;
g) Control, signal supervisory and
communication system; and
h) Ancillaries.
1.2 This Section does not cover temporary and
provisional places of work of durations less than

330 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

uncovering or detaching materials from the earth’s 3.14 Haulage Truck — An electrically powered
surface or stacking such material. These machines are vehicle usually operating on rubber tyres used for
designed to be able to change location according to transport of materials and which may have a self-
operational requirements. They include the following: contained or external power supply.
a) Excavators, namely: bucket-wheel excavators, 3.15 Movable Railway System — A railway system
bucket-chain excavators, draglines, shovels which is designed to be movable to another location
and other excavators, reclaimers, ditch bunker without dismantling.
loaders, etc;
3.16 Self-Contained Power Supply — An electrical
b) Spreaders and stackers; installation in which the generation and utilization
c) Mobile conveyor bridges; plants are housed within the same structure.
d) Mobile conveyors, including tripper carriages;
3.17 External Power Supply — An electrical
e) Loading stations, including hoppers and surge installation in which the generation and utilization
bins; plants are not housed within the same structure.
f) Floating dredgers; and
3.18 Exposed Conductive Part — A conductive part
g) Mobile electric drills.
which can be touched readily and which normally is
3.7 Transport Conveying System — A movable or not live but which may become live under fault
stationary mechanical item of plant designed for the conditions.
conveying of materials continuously from one location NOTE — Typical exposed conductive parts are walls of
to another. enclosures, operating handles, etc.

They include the following: 3.19 Earthable Point — That point of the power
a) Belt conveyors, system, for example, of the transformer and/or
generator, which would be connected to earth if the
b) Chain conveyors,
system were to be earthed.
c) Bucket conveyors,
NOTE — The earthable point may be the neutral point
d) Paddle or scraper conveyors, depending on the type of power system.
e) Screw conveyors, and
3.20 Insulation Monitoring and Warning Device —
f) Hydraulic conveyors systems. A device which causes a signal to be given in the event
3.8 Primary Processing Machinery — Any of reduced insulation resistance to earth.
machinery necessary to prepare material won from the 3.21 Movable Distribution Cable — An insulated
earth prior to its transport to the final processing or cable that may be moved from time to time according
utilization areas. to the operation without necessarily following the
3.9 Secondary Processing Machinery — Any movements of the machinery.
machinery necessary to process at a point remote from 3.22 Drum Cable — An insulated cable specially
the open cut or quarry, material won from the earth. designed to be frequently reeled on and off a cable
3.10 Fixed Apparatus — An apparatus or assembly of drum or reeler mounted on a mobile machine.
apparatus which is permanently installed in a determined 3.23 Trailing Cable — An insulated cable specially
place and which is not normally moved during or between designed to be towed by a mobile machine.
periods of use.
3.24 Overhead Traction (Trolley) Wire — An
3.11 Portable Apparatus — An apparatus or assembly electric line having bare conductors used for supplying
of apparatus intended to be normally held in the hand vehicles (for example, locomotives) by means of a
during use and which can be carried by a person. collector or pantograph.
NOTE — Cables are not included as part of apparatus.
3.25 Overhead Traction Distribution Line (Feeder)
3.12 Mobile Apparatus — An apparatus or assembly — An electric line having bare conductors used for
of apparatus which is too heavy to be portable but which the interconnecting line between the power source and
is capable of being moved without discontinuity of traction wire.
electric power during use.
3.26 Overhead Collector Wire — An electric line
3.13 Movable Apparatus — An apparatus or assembly used for supplying moving machinery, such as a
of apparatus which is too heavy to be portable, but reclaimer, by means of a collector.
which is moved between periods of use, with its electric
power source disconnected.

PART 5 OUTDOOR INSTALLATIONS 331

SP 30 : 2011

3.27 Overhead Distribution Line (Feeder) — An 5.1 Some of these conditions, are listed below which
interconnecting electric line between distribution may differ from their normal values:
substation and load point.
a) Altitude;
3.28 Return Conductors — Conductors (which may b) Low and/or high ambient temperature;
be rails) used for carrying the return current. c) Supply voltage variations;
3.29 Safety Circuits and Devices — Circuits and d) Supply frequency variations;
devices designed to prevent danger to personnel or e) Insecure power supply and transients;
livestock and damage to plant in the event of abnormal f) High or low humidity;
or unintentional operation. g) Environment (dust, wind pressure, marine
atmosphere, etc);
4 TYPES OF PERMANENT OUTDOOR
INSTALLATIONS h) Flammable and/or explosive material/or
atmosphere;
The types of permanent outdoor installations covered j) Vermin, including rodents or other small
by this Section are given in 4.1. The general animals;
characteristics and service conditions enumerated in 5.1 k) Localities prone to natural calamities; and
cannot be made uniformly applicable to all such
m) Ecological impact.
installations. Depending on the site conditions and the
nature of the operation involved, a judicious estimate 6 RULES FOR EQUIPMENT AND AUXILIARIES
has to be made of the environmental factors that
influence the performance of the installation. 6.0 General
4.1 The following are the types of permanent outdoor 6.0.1 Exchange of Information
installations covered by this Section: Before ordering electrical equipment for outdoor sites,
a) Open-cut or open-cast mine — An open air information regarding the duties, location and
site for the extraction of materials or minerals installation conditions under which they would operate,
such as coal, bauxite, iron-ore, etc. should be gathered by the engineers responsible for
NOTE — Underground mines are excluded from the their procurement, installation and maintenance so that
scope of this Section. However surface installations of the electrical equipment or apparatus is procured to
underground mines are covered by this Section, to the suit those conditions. Necessity for special measures
extent that the operations therein are identical with those may be decided in consultation with all concerned.
described in 1.1.
6.0.2 Relevant Standards
b) Quarry — An open air site for the extraction
of materials such as limestone, gravel, clay, The electrical specifications of all components shall
etc. be not less than that required by the relevant Indian
Standard.
c) Dockyards — Includes loading and unloading
areas, container terminal, railway yards, repair 6.0.3 Materials
docks, passenger berths, jetty’s, etc.
Materials used in component construction shall be
d) Airport aprons — A defined area on a land appropriate for the environmental conditions, including
aerodrome, intended to accommodate aircraft temperature, altitude, moisture, etc.
for the purposes of loading and unloading
passengers, mail or cargo, refuelling parking 6.0.4 Protection
or maintenance. Protection shall be provided against damage and/or
e) Railway marshalling yards — A yard with overheating during normal operation or in expected
facilities for receiving classifying and fault conditions.
dispatching railway rolling stock.
6.0.5 Operating Conditions
5 GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS OF
Components shall be designed to meet such conditions
PERMANENT OUTDOOR INSTALLATIONS
as vibration, acceleration, deceleration, slewing and
The design and the selection of components shall be angles of inclination (tilting and mounting) which may
on the basis of expected loading, operating occur under expected operational conditions.
characteristics and cyclic duty taking into consideration
6.0.6 Site Conditions
the protection required in special and arduous
environmental, operational, transportation and storage Components shall be installed so that design features
conditions.

332 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

such as cooling systems shall not be impaired by b) Protection against interference with
external factors such as position, blocking of ventilation communication or electrical control
ducts, hostile environment, etc. equipment;
6.0.7 Combustible Materials c) Protection against spurious operation due to
electrical coupling with other apparatus;
If combustible material (for example, gas, dust or d) Protection against interaction between
liquid) is present in such quantity as to create a hazard earthing systems of the input, output and
and contact is possible between any exposed part of control circuits;
the component and the combustible material, the
e) Feedback supervision, where necessary; and
temperature of the exposed part shall not exceed the
limits specified in Part 7 of this Code. f) Measures to limit harmonics.

6.0.8 Noise Limitations 6.1.4 Switching Devices

Consideration shall be given in the design to limit the The following measures are recommended for
noise level in accordance with local rules. switching devices for outdoor sites:
a) Selection of proper design that no uninten-
6.1 Selection of Equipment and Ancillaries
tional switching may be caused under
6.1.1 Rotating Machines expected operational and risk conditions;
b) Ensuring, where required suitable means to
Rotating machines used in applications where high
enable isolators to be locked;
acceleration, overspeed, reversing or braking may be
employed shall be so selected that they are capable of c) Suitable labelling of switching devices which
withstanding the expected stresses on parts such as are not meant for interrupting load or fault
rotor windings or cages, stators, stator end windings, currents; and
shafts and couplings, rotating machines shall be so d) Suitable installation precautions to prevent
located or guarded to prevent inadvertent contact with hazards to personnel from electric areas,
moving parts. automatic movement of the mechanism,
etc.
6.1.2 Transformers
6.1.5 Cables
Transformers shall be so selected that:
6.1.5.1 Phase conductors
a) the bracing of the core, coils, internal leads
and the tank of transformers on mobile and Selection of phase conductor size should take into
movable installations are capable of consideration the expected load current, short-circuit
withstanding vibrations; current and duration of fault, voltage drop and the
b) they are totally enclosed; and mechanical strength required for the expected method
of handling. The voltage drop should be calculated for
c) dry type transformers including cooling
both starting and maximum load conditions. Where
system are protected against harmful ingress
supplying cyclic loads, the current-carrying capacity
of dust.
should be based on the long time (for example, 10 min)
The following additional protective measures are rms current expected.
suggested from fire:
6.1.5.2 Protective conductor
a) Use of dry type transformers,
All multicore cables of the movable distribution, drum
b) Use of flame-retardant cooling medium, and
and trailing types, shall contain a protective conductor.
c) Protective measures as specified in IS 10028 In high voltage systems, special measures shall be taken
(Part 2) for transformers with flammable to guard against deterioration of the earthing circuit.
cooling medium. This may be achieved by either:
Adequate precautions shall be taken to prevent spillage a) monitoring the protective conductor against
of the cooling medium causing pollution. increase in resistance by the use of pilot cores,
6.1.3 Static Converters high frequency monitoring or other means,
or
The following precautions are recommended: b) cables should be specially designed and used
a) Protection against harmful effects of over- in accordance with the requirements of
voltage, and transient over-voltage relevant Indian Standard whether or not they
conditions; are used on a drum.

PART 5 OUTDOOR INSTALLATIONS 333

SP 30 : 2011

The protective conductor may be in the form of core(s) In cases where cables are handled only by means of
and/or screen(s). special insulated tools, these requirements shall apply
only for voltages above 3.8/6.6 kV.
For certain classes of movable distribution cables, the
armouring may, subject to the requirements of 6.1.5.3, 6.1.5.8 Identification of protective conductor
form the protective conductor.
Unless otherwise required, the following applies:
6.1.5.3 Armouring as protective conductor
a) For cables rated at up to and including 1 000
Where the cross-sectional area of a single composite V, in which the protective conductor is
strand of the armouring is greater than 6 mm2, the insulated, such insulation, or outer taping,
metallic armouring of a movable distribution cable may shall be distinctly and indelibly coloured
be used as a protective conductor provided that the green and yellow also (see Part 1/Section 4
security against breakage of the armouring (taking into of this Code) over its whole length so that in
account strength, elongation, lay, etc) is at least equal any 15 mm length one of these colours shall
to that of all the conductors; and provided that the cover at least 30 percent and not more than
armour conductivity is at least equal to that of a 70 percent of the surface, the other colour
protective conductor of the required nominal cross- covering the remainder of the surface; and
sectional area which would otherwise be required. b) For cables rated at above 1 000 V, in which
6.1.5.4 Limiting temperatures under short circuit the protective conductor is insulated, such
insulation or outer taping shall at least be
Cables shall be selected so as to ensure that the identified at each end by the green/yellow
maximum allowable conductor temperature, colour combination applied in accordance with
considering the type of insulation, is not exceeded the foregoing paragraph. Suitable
under expected short-circuit fault conditions. supplementary identification may also be used.
6.1.5.5 Protection against partial discharge 6.1.5.9 Partial discharge performance
For flexible cables having nominal voltages greater For cables rated at above 3.8/6.6 kV each production
than 3.8/6.6 kV, measures shall be provided to length (minimum length 150 m) of movable distribution
minimize internal partial discharge or to render such cable, drum cable and trailing cable shall be tested by
effects harmless (for example, field gradient control). the cable manufacturer for partial discharge.
Suitable protective measures shall be applied to reduce 6.1.5.10 Terminations of flexible cables
the touch and step voltages. Such measures may consist
of: Flexible cables shall be terminated in such a way that
their ends are not under stress or under tension effects,
a) metallic screens, or and that excessive bending and compressing are
b) substantial semi-conductive elements in avoided.
contact with the protective conductor.
6.1.5.11 Power cable twist limitation
6.1.5.6 Semi-conducting layers
Where the normal mode of operation of the machine
Where cables are fitted with substantial longitudinal requires infrequent rotation through an arc of up to
semi conducting layers for the purpose of providing a 360º in either direction, the distance between the
current path to the protective conductor in the event of clamping supports of the cable shall be not less than
a fault, the resistance between the semi conducting 50 times the largest cable diameter in the cable run.
element and the protective conductor should be tested Where the normal mode of operation of the machine
to ensure that it is suitable to carry the prospective fault requires frequent rotation through an arc of up to 360º
current. in either direction, the distance between the clamping
supports of the cable shall be not less than 100 times
6.1.5.7 Provision of screens and/or armouring for
the largest cable diameter in the cable run. Where cables
cables above 1 000 V
designed specially for this purpose are used, the above
Where flexible cables are handled manually while ratios may be reduced to 25 and 50 times respectively.
energized, they shall have metallic screens and/or
6.1.5.12 Sheathing
armouring or shall be provided with conducting
elastomeric screens of substantial cross-sectional area Cables may be laid directly on or in the ground
and so placed as to limit the touch and step voltages provided that the outer sheath is designed for the
that may arise in the event of a cable fault. operating conditions.

334 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

Cables having extruded metallic sheaths, for example, control or supervisory cores may be used for
cables with lead alloy or aluminium sheaths or mineral- reeling drum applications, subject to the
insulated metal-sheathed cables, shall not be used voltage limitations given in (b) above
where fatigue may occur, due to vibration, frequent provided that the cable is specially designed
handling or ground movement. for such reeling duty.
6.1.5.13 Segregation of power and control cores 6.1.5.14 Separation of cables in racks
a) Single-core cables — Single-core cables Where power and control cables, multicore and single-
which are installed in a common duct, conduit core are used on a common rack, tray or duct, the
or sleeving may be used for several circuits, degree of mutual interference shall be considered.
both power and control.
6.1.5.15 Bending radius for flexible cables over 25 mm
All such cables (except bare earthing diameter
conductors) shall be insulated for the
maximum voltage applied to any cable in the The recommended minimum bending radius for
duct, conduit or sleeving. flexible cables during installation and handling in
service is six times the cable diameter for cable not
When using single-core cables for alternating
constructed in accordance with 6.1.5.5(a) or (b), and
current circuits, all conductors of a given
eight times the cable diameter for cables which are
circuit shall follow the same magnetic path
constructed in accordance with 6.1.5.5(a) or (b).
to neutralize the resultant magnetic flux.
b) Multicore cables — For voltages up to and 6.1.6 Cable Connectors
including 1 000 V, multicore cables may be 6.1.6.1 Use of plug/socket connectors
used for several circuits, both power and
control. Where plug and socket connectors are used at voltages
above 1 000 V, measures shall be taken to prevent the
For voltages above 1 000 V, the only control
plug from being engaged with, or disengaged from,
core(s) which may be included in a multicore
the socket while the circuit is energized.
cable, shall be the earth continuity check pilot.
Multicore cables containing power and The measures shall consist of one or both of the
control cores shall comply with the following following:
requirement as appropriate: a) The provision of isolating switches which are
1) Any cable containing pilot, control and, interlocked with the plug/socket so as to
supervisory cores shall have such cores prevent connection or disconnection while the
insulated from all other conducting ele- circuit is energized and to prevent switching
ments of the cable; the circuit when the plug/socket connection
2) Cables operating at above 1 000 V in an is incomplete.
unearthed system shall have either b) The provision of protective conductor
metallic screens or individual conductive monitoring by means of either a pilot core,
rubber screens separating the power cores by high frequency monitoring, or by other
from the pilot core(s); means.
3) Cables operating at above 1 000 V in an
The measures under (b) are intended as a safety feature
earthed system shall have metallic
and should not be used for normal isolation purposes.
screens separating the power cores from
the pilot core(s); and 6.1.6.2 Use of bolted plug/socket connectors and bolted
4) Cables operating at up to and including connections
1 000 V shall have pilot, control or Where bolted plug/socket connectors or bolted
supervisory cores separated from power connections are used, interlocking is not required
cores by conductive rubber screens if on provided suitable and adequate operational procedures
an unearthed system or metallic screens are implemented.
if on an earthed system. Alternatively, for
either system, the pilot, control or 6.1.7 Control Circuits and Control Devices
supervisory cores shall be insulated to a Control circuits and control devices shall not
voltage level equal to that of the power automatically reset after tripping unless resetting of
cores. the control device either does not cause automatic
c) Composite multicore cables on reeling drums restarting of the device or there is no hazard to
— Multicore cable which contain power, pilot, personnel created by automatic restarting or fire.

PART 5 OUTDOOR INSTALLATIONS 335

SP 30 : 2011

For unearthed control circuits, measures shall be taken 7.1.1.4 Where access to the installation is necessary
to limit the leakage and capacitance currents that they by removal of barriers, opening of enclosures, etc, these
shall not exceed 70 percent of the drop-out currents. shall:
For unearthed control devices, an insulation monitoring
a) necessitate the use of key or tool; or
device shall also be provided for safety.
b) involve provision of an interlocking device
6.1.8 Safety Circuits and Safety Devices such that the removal, opening or withdrawal
Any safety circuits shall incorporate fail-safe principle without the use of a key or tool necessitates
as far as reasonably possible. Some of the principles previous switching off of all live parts; or
suggested are: c) ensure automatic disconnection when
removal, opening or withdrawal without the
a) closed circuit principle, use of a key or tool is attempted.
b) proving function operation principle, and
7.1.2 Partial Protection by Placing Live Parts Out of
c) fail-safe principles with solid state switching
Reach (see Table 3)
devices.
7.1.3 Partial Protection by the Provision of Obstacles
7 GENERAL RULES FOR PROTECTION IN (see Table 3)
OUTDOOR INSTALLATIONS
7.2 Protection Against Indirect Contact
The general rules for protection for electrical
installation inside buildings, as enumerated in Part 1/ 7.2.1 The provisions of Part 1/Section 7 of this Code
Section 7 of this Code are applicable for outdoor shall apply.
installations of permanent nature covered by the Scope
of this Section. The additional requirements applicable 8 REQUIREMENTS FOR PERMANENT
for permanent outdoor installations are given in the OUTDOOR INSTALLATIONS
following clauses. 8.1 Winning, Stacking and Primary Processing
7.1 Protection Against Direct Contact Machinery

7.1.1 Complete Protection by Means of Barriers or 8.1.1 Mounting of Components

Enclosures For the mounting of motors, limit switches, sockets, etc,
7.1.1.1 The minimum electrical clearances in air special protective connections to the structural parts of
between field installed bare conductors and between the installation are not required if the connecting surfaces
such conductors and earthed parts (such as barriers between the electrical equipment housing and structural
and enclosures) shall be in accordance with Table 1 parts provide an adequate conducting area. In such cases,
or 2. the normal mounting bolt or screw connection is adequate.
NOTES This is also applicable for the mounting of all types of
1 These tables need not apply within electrical apparatus wiring electrical equipment in cubicles, termination boxes, etc.
devices or manufactured assemblies nor when the installation
is covered by other sections of this Code. Where the equipment is required to operate under
2 Tables 1 and 2 take into consideration the fact that the system corrosive atmospheric conditions or extreme vibrating
voltage may vary up to 20 percent from the rated operating conditions, a separate protective conductor shall be
voltage. connected to motors, limit switches, etc.
3 Tables 1 and 2 may be used to indicate clearance distances
between conductors and earth in a TN or TT system by using 8.1.2 Off-Board Mobile and Movable Auxiliary
the phase-to-earth voltage. Equipment
4 These minimum clearance distances in Tables 1 and 2 do not
take into consideration such factors as creepage distances, For mobile and movable off-board auxiliary equipment
different voltage levels in the same area nor extreme (such as welding equipment, vulcanising transformers,
environmental conditions, etc. etc.) where the protective conductor is not monitored
7.1.1.2 All live parts shall be inside enclosures or nor visible, a visible main equipotential bonding
behind barriers providing at least the degrees of conductor shall be provided between such auxiliary
protection in accordance with Table 3. equipment and plant.

7.1.1.3 Barriers and enclosures shall be firmly secured 8.1.3 Insulation Monitoring Device for IT Systems
in place, and taking into account their nature, size and In the case of an IT system, an insulation monitoring
arrangement, they shall have sufficient stability and device is not required for power circuits which are
durability to resist the strains and stresses likely to supplied by a power source from within the machine,
occur in outdoor conditions.

336 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

Table 1 Clearance Distances for Indoor Installations

(Clause 7.1.1.1)

Maximum rms value of rated operating voltage, kV 1 3 6 10 20 30 45 60 110

Minimum distance for installations subject to 40 65 90 115 215 325 520 700 1 100
overvoltages, mm
Minimum distance for installations protected 40 60 70 90 160 270 380 520 950
against overvoltages or connected to cables, mm

Table 2 Clearance Distances for Outdoor Installations

(Clause 7.1.1.1)

Maximum rms value of rated operating voltage, kV 10 20 30 45 60 110 150 220

Minimum distance for installations subject to 150 215 325 520 700 1 100 1 550 2 200
overvoltages, mm
Minimum distance for installations protected 150 160 270 380 520 950 1 350 1 850
against overvoltages or connected to cables, mm

Table 3 Minimum Protection Against Direct Contact by Barriers or Enclosures

(Applicable to Live Parts Only)
(Clauses 7.1.1.2, 7.1.2 and 7.1.3)

Sl Voltage Band Within Operating Areas Within Electrical Operating Within Closed Electrical
No. (ac) Areas Operating Areas
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
i) 50 < U ≤1 000 V Complete protection IP2X1) or IP4X Partial protection IP1X1) if U No protection IP0X if U ≤ 660 V
for top surfaces or barriers or ≤ 660 V or no simultaneously
Partial protection IP0X1) if
enclosures which are readily accessible parts at different
accessible. This applies in particular U > 660 V or no simultaneously
voltages are situated within
to those parts of enclosures which accessible parts at different voltages
arm’s reach
are situated within arm’s reach
might serve as a standing surface
See Note 1 Complete protection IP2X if See Note 1
U > 600 V or IP4X if
U > 660 V for top surfaces or
barriers or enclosures which
are readily accessible
This applies in particular to
those parts of enclosures
which might serve as a
standing surface
See Note 1
ii) U > 1 000 V Complete protection IP5X within Complete protection IP5X1) Partial protection IP1X1)
arm’s reach within arm’s reach
Partial protection IP2X beyond arm’s Partial protection IP1X1)
reach beyond arm’s reach
U = rated voltage of the installation between lines

NOTES
1 The use of floor plug and socket connector is not precluded but such sockets shall be covered when not in use.
2 For details on IP classifications, see IS/IEC 60947 (Part 1). As used in the present standard, the IP classification is intended to
specify only the degree of protection required to protect persons from contact with live parts. Additional protection may be required
for protection from contact with moving parts or to prevent ingress of solid foreign bodies, such as dust.
3 In the case of dc voltages, the voltage bands in the above table may be increased in the ratio of 1 : 1.5, namely, up to 1 500 V and
above.
——————————
1)
For electrical operating areas and closed electrical operating areas, protection equivalent to IP1X is also considered to be achieved by
placing out of reach or by the interposition of obstacles, for example, by means of protective barriers or handrails.

PART 5 OUTDOOR INSTALLATIONS 337

SP 30 : 2011

such as by a transformer having electrical isolated 8.1.8.4 System voltage

windings or by a generator or storage battery.
It is important that the equipment manufacturer and
8.1.4 Insulation Monitoring Devices for Vulcanising user mutually understand whether the voltage specified
Heating Platens is under no-load or full load conditions.
In IT systems, insulation monitoring devices are not 8.1.9 Self-Contained Power Systems
required for vulcanising heating platens where the
power circuit is supplied from a transformer having 8.1.9.1 System design
electrically isolated windings.
The power generation systems shall meet the
8.1.5 Electric Hand Tools requirements of motor starting, regeneration, peak load,
rms load and frequency stability.
Under consideration.
8.1.6 Electric Hand Lamps 8.1.9.2 Fire protection

Under consideration. Consideration should be given to the need for special

and/or additional fire protection due to the fuels used
8.1.7 Drives (see 6).
The following recommendations apply to drives with 8.1.9.3 Earthing
a periodic or cyclic duty as well as to certain other
drives with a continuous duty. When the supply of electrical energy is self-contained
within stationary, mobile, or movable items of
8.1.7.1 Effect on voltage levels equipment and there is no external supply, such
The effects of equipment starting and of the duty cycle equipment need not be connected to the general mass
on voltage levels, which may result in damage or the of the earth.
malfunction of equipment, shall be taken into 8.1.9.4 Supply to off-board equipment
consideration to ensure the safety of personnel and
equipment. When power is supplied to off-board mobile and
movable equipment conditions given in 8.1.2 are
8.1.7.2 Supply systems applicable.
The effect of load fluctuations on the supply system 8.1.10 Cable Types
shall be considered, taking account any restrictions
imposed by the electricity supplier. Under consideration.
8.1.8 External Power Supply Systems 8.1.11 Control Circuits and Control Devices
8.1.8.1 System design 8.1.11.1 Shock vibration and voltage fluctuations
The supply system shall meet the requirements of cyclic The effect of shock, vibration or voltage fluctuations
or periodic loads, motor starting, and inherent ac motor on control devices shall be taken into consideration,
oscillations due to transient load changes. For ensuring that safety of personnel and equipment is not
protection requirements, see 7. endangered by inadvertent operation of control
devices.
8.1.8.2 Overcurrent protection
When mechanically latched control devices are used
Overload and short-circuit protection for transformers, and re-energisation following loss of supply power
cables, etc, shall take into consideration the starting would endanger personnel or equipment, means shall
requirements and cyclic nature of the load. be provided to automatically trip the latched control
8.1.8.3 Automatic reclosing or transferring device on loss of supply power. The device shall also
be tripped on operation of protective devices.
Where regeneration may delay the operation of
8.1.11.2 Synchronous motor control
undervoltage devices, automatic reclosing or
transferring devices should not be used in the power a) Automatic field removal — Where
distribution system unless such device has sufficient synchronous motors are used to drive any part
time delay to allow motor disconnection, the device is of the installation, automatic motor field
fitted with ‘out of step’ protection, or the combination removal on disconnection is required.
of supply system and motor design characteristics is b) Automatic field excitation control — Where
such as to permit automatic re-energisation. synchronous motors are used to drive periodic

338 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

or cyclic loads, an automatic field excitation may be a manually or remotely operated power circuit-
control is recommended. breaker, contactor, etc.
c) Power loss protection — Where synchronous Emergency stopping can be accomplished by means
motors are used to drive loads which may be other than disconnection of power, provided that such
regenerative, means shall be provided to trip means otherwise comply with the intent of 8.1.11.3.
the motor starting switch or incoming line For example, when rotation conveners are used,
switch upon loss of power supply. Frequency disconnection of the external excitation is permitted if
sensitive devices are recommended. When protection against self excitation is provided.
automatic reclosing or transferring devices are
used in the distribution system, conditions 8.1.12.2 Emergency devices
given in 8.1.8.3 are applicable. Where the cut-out devices are actuated remotely they
8.1.11.3 Stop control will be arranged as series tripping system. However,
shunt tripping devices may be used providing the
The devices described in the following paragraphs shall tripping device and its stored energy tripping supply
not be used for purposes of isolation or immobilisation are monitored and regularly maintained.
to allow work to be carried out on parts which would
otherwise be electrically energised or moving: Emergency devices may be arranged to operate
simultaneously in a number of different circuits. A
a) Stop control circuits — The circuits of stop number of emergency devices may be arranged in
control and of other safety protection devices groups; each group may operate in single or multiple
should be as simple, reliable and direct acting circuits.
as is practical.
b) Location of stop controls — A stop control Where several circuits are divided the respective
shall be located near each start control, except contact elements shall be connected in series. However,
for lift call control. Additional stop controls shunt tripping systems may be used providing the
may be provided. abovementioned conditions are maintained.
c) Locking of stop controls — Where required, The emergency device may use remote control systems,
provision shall be made to guard against for example, audio-frequency of time-multiplex
unauthorised starting. Acceptable methods operations, providing at least the same protective
include locking of stop controls in the ‘off’ measures as for the above devices are applied to ensure
position or ensuring that only the person positive and reliable operations. However, the
operating the stop control has access to the simultaneous existence of two or more faults within
start control. the remote controls system need not be expected.
d) Pullwire stop controls — Stop controls 8.1.13 Provision for Supply Isolation
operated by a pullwire shall be arranged so
that a pull on the wire in any direction will A means of mains supply isolation shall be provided
stop the controlled equipment. The stop to isolate the power circuits from the equipment or parts
controls shall be of a type in which the thereof inclusive of control and motor circuits.
contacts are opened by a positive mechanical However, separate means of isolation may be provided
action and can only be reclosed by a further for control circuits, which may remain energised after
mechanical action. disconnection of power circuits, provided special
8.1.11.4 Interlocking of start controls measures for the safety of personnel and equipment
have been implemented.
Where equipment can be started from more than one
location, the control system shall permit operation from 8.2 Secondary Processing Machinery
only one nominated location at anyone time, unless
Under consideration.
start-up alarms are used, the equipment is in sight from
all starting locations, or the equipment is guarded 8.3 Transport Conveyor Systems
against inadvertent access.
8.3.1 Mounting of Components (see 8.1.1)
8.1.12 Emergency Stopping and Emergency Devices
8.3.2 Equipotential Bonding Conductor and
8.1.12.1 Emergency stopping Conductivity of Structural Parts
Disconnection of power or other equally effective Where electrical equipment supplied at a voltage in
means shall be provided for stopping the drive under excess of 50 V is mounted on a conveyor structure
emergency conditions. The power disconnect device and the cable to the equipment does not include a

PART 5 OUTDOOR INSTALLATIONS 339

SP 30 : 2011

protective conductor, an equipotential bonding On very long conveyor systems, however, the operation
conductor shall be provided to the electrical equipment of a stop control within one stop zone need not stop all
unless the structural parts of the conveyor are upstream conveyors beyond that zone, provided that
mechanically fastened and/or electrically bonded the conveyor upstream of the zone is proved to be
together. The conductivity of the metallic structural unloaded, such as by sensors.
parts of the conveyor and its fastenings shall be at least Although the stop control may be reset automatically,
equal to that of the otherwise necessary equipotential restarting shall be initiated manually.
bonding conductor.
8.3.9.2 Location of stop controls
8.3.3 Off-board Mobile and Movable Auxiliary
Equipment (see 8.1.2) Stop controls shall be provided. It is recommended that
stop controls be located at the head and tail ends of a
8.3.4 Insulation Monitoring Device for IT Systems conveyor and that pullwire stop controls be used along
(see 8.1.3) the length of the conveyor. All accessible points along
8.3.5 Insulation Monitoring Devices for Vulcanising the pull wire operated stop control are considered as stop
Heating Platens (see 8.1.4) controls. Where individual stop controls are used, they
shall be located not more than 15 m from any accessible
8.3.6 Electric Hand Tools point along the conveyor. Stop controls shall be accessible
Under consideration. from any side of a conveyor to which there is access.
8.3.7 Electric Hand Lamps NOTE — Manually operated stop controls may also provide
the function of an emergency stop.
Under consideration.
8.3.10 Stopping of Downhill Conveyors
8.3.8 Cables
Under consideration.
8.3.8.1 General
8.4 Pumping and Water Supply Systems
Where cables without semi conductive sheaths,
metallic screens or armouring are suspended from 8.4.1 Deep-well Type Pumps
structures or frames of movable conveyors, such 8.4.1.1 Risers as protective conductors
structures and frames shall be considered as extraneous
conductive parts and shall be included as part of the Where a continuous metallic riser pipe is fitted between
whole plant in the design of the protective measures the motor and the well head, no protection conductor is
against indirect contact, that is, by ensuring that all required between the motor and the protective conductor
connected directly to the fixed riser provided that:
metallic parts are linked together.
a) the supply cable is terminated close to the well
8.3.8.2 Power supply cables
head,
Under consideration. b) the conductivity of the metallic riser (stand
8.3.9 Stop Controls pipe) and the connections (couplings) shall
be at least equal to the conductivity of the
The devices described in the following clauses shall protective conductor which would otherwise
not be used for purposes of isolation or immobilisation be necessary, and
to allow work to be carried out on parts which would c) personnel do not have access down the well.
otherwise be electrically energised or moving.
8.4.1.2 Continued operation after first earth fault
8.3.9.1 Stopping sequence
Operation may continue after the first earth fault only
The operation of a stop control on a conveyor shall when all of the following conditions are met:
stop that conveyor and:
a) An IT system is used,
a) all upstream conveyors to a controlled loading
b) Personnel do not have access down the well,
point,
and
b) cause the material from all upstream conveyors
c) Equipotential bonding is provided.
to be diverted to an alternative route,
c) initiate braking to stop the conveyor in safe NOTE — Electrically initiated explosive devices should
not be stored or used in the vicinity of such installations
time, and as hazards may exist due to fault currents flowing in the
d) prevent run-back. ground when systems continue to operate following the
first earth fault.

340 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

8.4.1.3 Equipotential bonding 9.0.2 Guidance from relevant experts shall be taken in
respect of specific areas before installation work
An equipotential bonding conductor shall be installed
begins.
between the main earth terminals of the supply and the
well head(s), where the conductor shall be connected 9.1 Lighting of Aircraft Aprons
directly to the fixed riser. Where transformers are located
at the well head, their enclosures shall be connected to The provisions of relevant Indian Standards shall apply.
this bonding conductor. 9.2 Lighting of Ports and Harbours
The equipotential bonding conductor shall be so The provisions of relevant Indian Standards shall apply.
dimensioned that the voltage drop between any two
points (of resistance value R) that may be contacted 9.3 Lighting Installations in Railway Marshalling
simultaneously shall not exceed 50 V. That is: Yards
9.3.1 Classification
50
R≤ ohms
K × In 9.3.1.1 The classification in respect of yard area is
based on the speed and intensity of traffic both
where In (in amperes) is the rated current of the power vehicular and otherwise.
fuses or, in the case of circuit-breakers, 0.2 times the
a) Multipurpose yard — A marshalling yard with
releasing current for the instantaneous or short-time
facilities for receiving, classifying and
delay trip; and K is a multiplying factor.
despatching vehicles to their several
NOTE — A value of K = 2.5 is suggested for the time being. destination. They also deal with traffic
8.4.14 Exemption from insulation monitoring device originating at or destined for centres.
b) A reception yard — A yard in which the loads
An insulation monitoring device (or earth fault of incoming trains may stand clear of running
detector) is not necessary. lines while waiting for their turn to be dealt with.
8.4.1.5 Double line to earth faults c) A classification yard — A yard in which trains
are broken up on the different lines for the
Protection shall be provided to disconnect the supply
various directions or stations irrespective of
in the case of a double fault (phase-earth-phase).
station order, so as to form them into trains
A device such as one which detects a change in neutral and prepare them for correct marshalling.
displacement on the occurrence of the first and second
9.3.1.2 The railway yards are also classified into five
earth faults, may be provided. Disconnection follows
main categories depending on their handling capacity
the second fault.
and way of working:
8.5 Pumps Other than Deep-well Types a) Gravity yard — A yard where natural
Under consideration. gradient is available. It is utilized for
classification and sorting of loads. Shunting
8.6 Power Supply Cables is done without engine.
Under consideration. b) Hump yard — Hump yard created by raising
track levels in specified crest of 2 to 2.5 m
8.7 Control Circuits and Control Devices height. Hump yards are those where shunting
necks have shape of a camel hump. These
Under consideration.
yards are mechanized where wagon level
8.8 Safety Circuits and Safety Devices crosses 2 500 wagons/day. Normally one
hump handles 1 000 to 1 500 wagons/day. The
Under consideration. number of humps can be increased depending
on the work-load.
9 ADDITIONAL GUIDELINES FOR
INSTALLATIONS IN SPECIFIC AREAS c) Flat yard — Yards with flat shunting neck are
called flat yard. It deals from 300 to 700 wagons/
9.0 General day. It is mostly suitable for metre gauge.
d) A sorting yard — This is a yard in which
9.0.1 The requirements given in 4 to 8 are applicable
wagons are separated in station order and
to the specific areas described in this Section in so far
reformed into trains in special order to meet
as the operations are identical with those described.
the requirements of the section ahead or any

PART 5 OUTDOOR INSTALLATIONS 341

SP 30 : 2011

other special transportation requirements. Each luminaire may be provided with 2

e) A departure yard — This is a yard in which lamps of 400 W or 1 lamps of 1 000 W.
loads are kept waiting for departure. b) Luminaires — Flood lighting types of
luminaires are recommended for yard lighting
9.3.1.3 Each yard can be of anyone of the three
installation.
formations based on method of construction:
9.3.3.3 Levels of illumination would depend on the
a) Baloon or classification type,
type of marshalling yard. The levels given below are
b) ladder type, and recommendatory:
c) Grid type.
NOTE — Yards with grid type formation are reception- Type Minimum Maximum Special Location
cum-despatch yards.
Like Shunting
9.3.1.4 For the purpose of illumination, most important Neck, King
locations are ‘king points’ and ‘queen points’ and order Points, etc
of priority for lighting is determined accordingly. (1) (2) (3) (4)
NOTES Important 1.2 lux 5 lux 10 lux
1 King points are the first pair of points that the wagon meets yard
after passing over the hump summit and these divide the hump Small yards 0.5 lux 1.2 lux 5 lux
yard into two portions.
2 Queen points are the second pair of points the wagon meets
on either of the two diverging lines taking off from the king 9.3.4 Power Installation Requirements
points and these divide the classification lines into four sub-
portion. These are two in each hump yard. 9.3.4.0 The source of electric supply shall be located
at a suitable place nearest to the yard.
9.3.2 Different segments (functions) of yards are:
9.3.4.1 The power supply to the towers shall be through
a) classification yard — zone-wise,
underground armoured cables.
b) sorting yard — station-wise,
c) reception yard, Minimum size of cable shall be 10 to 16 mm2 4 core.
d) despatch yard, and 9.3.4.2 Means shall be provided to control supply to
e) through goods yard. group of towers with controlgear located in feeding
substation/switching substation.
9.3.3 Design
9.3.4.3 The cables shall be preferably terminated on
9.3.3.1 For the purpose of designing the lighting column junction boxes by looping joints, rather than
system, the recommended height of tower is 30 m. ‘T’ joint.
9.3.3.2 Selection of equipments 9.3.4.4 The junction boxes shall be provided with
a) Light sources — The following sources of suitable sized contactors with independent fuses for
light are recommended for the purpose of yard each phase. The contactors shall be controlled by
lighting. electrically operated switch mounted for external
1) High pressure mercury vapour lamps. manual local operation.
2) High pressure sodium vapour lamps. Laying of cables in yard, along the track and across
the tracks should be done in accordance with IS 1255.

342 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE
PART 6
 SP 30 : 2011

PART 6 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS IN

AGRICULTURAL PREMISES
0 FOREWORD
This Part of the Code is primarily intended for covering the specific requirements of electrical installations in
agricultural premises which include premises where livestock are present and farm produce are handled or stored.
With the increase in sophistication in organising the farm output of the country, and the use of electricity for
certain essential purposes, it has been felt necessary to cover the requirements of such installations as a part of the
Code.
Installations in agricultural premises are different from those covered in other Sections of the Code in that the
external influences on the electrical services are quite different from those encountered elsewhere. Even though
the overall power requirements for such installations would be small, the presence of livestock and other extraneous
factors necessitate laying down specific requirements.

PART 6 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS IN AGRICULTURAL PREMISES 345

SP 30 : 2011

1 SCOPE Animal/Bird Sub-Classification

1.1 This Part 6 of the Code covers requirements for Housing
the fixed electrical installations in agricultural premises calves and pair of bullocks)
excluding dwellings or similar locations situated in Cattle sheds for rural milk
these premises. producer (average of about 20
animals)
1.2 This Part applies to premises where livestock are Organized milk produces (130
present. animals)
NOTE — Examples of such premises are stables, cow houses, Large dairy farm (about 500
sheepfolds, stalls, hen-houses, piggeries, etc. animals)

2 TERMINOLOGY
4 GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS OF
For the purpose of this Part, the definitions given in AGRICULTURAL PREMISES
Part 1/Section 2 of the Code shall apply.
General guidelines on the assessment of general
3 CLASSIFICATION characteristics of buildings are given in Part 1/
Section 8. For the purpose of installations covered by
3.1 Installations in agricultural premises shall be this Part the conditions given below apply.
broadly classified into:
4.1 Environment
a) Farm houses and agricultural processing units,
and The following conditions generally apply:
b) Livestock houses.
Environment Characteristics Remarks
3.1.1 Farm Houses and Agricultural Processing Units (1) (2) (3)
Farm houses and agricultural processing units are Presence of Possibility of Locations where
premises where livestock are not normally present and water splashes from equipment may
are those utilized solely for the purposes of handling, any direction be subjected to
processing or storing farm inputs and produce. splashed water,
3.1.2 Livestock Houses for example
external lighting
Livestock houses are premises where livestock are fittings
present for long periods of time during the day (such Possibility of jets Locations where
as in a dairy farm) with or without associated farm units. of water from hose-water is
3.1.2.1 Livestock houses are further classified any direction used regularly
depending on the type of climatic conditions: Presence of Presence of dust Applies to barns,
foreign solid in significant stores and stalls
a) Plain areas with moderate rainfall, bodies quantity
b) Arid areas and high altitude areas, and Presence of a) Intermittent
c) Heavy rainfall areas and high rainfall corrosive or or accidental Applies to
humidity areas. polluting subjection to locations in
substances corrosive or which livestock
3.1.2.2 Livestock houses can also be classified
polluting are present or
depending on the type of animal or bird housed. For
substances fertilizers or plan
example:
b) Continuously protective
subjected to products are
Animal/Bird Sub-Classification
corrosive or stored or handled
Housing
polluting
Layer house Stationary substances
Poultry housing Brooder house Portable Presence of Harmful hazard —
Sheepfolds — flora and/or present
(sheep and goats) mould growth
Piggeries — Presence of Harmful hazard Insects, birds
Horse stables or — fauna present and small animal
equine houses Electromagnetic Harmful presence
Cattle housing Cattle sheds for average farmer influences of induced
(3 milch animals with their currents

346 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

4.2 Utilization 5.1.2 In sheepfolds, the following sub-units are present:

The following conditions apply: a) Sheds such as flock shed, ram or buck shed,
sick shed, etc;
Utilization Characteristics Remarks b) Sheering and store room; and
(1) (2) (3) c) Shepherd house.
Electrical Low to resistance — 5.1.3 In cattle housing, the following sub-units are
resistance due to wet present:
of human conditions
body a) Sheds for animals,
Contact of Persons are b) Milk recording and testing room,
persons frequently in c) Utensils room,
with earth touch with
d) Ration room,
potential extraneous
conductive parts e) Stores, and
or stand on f) Office.
conducting
5.1.4 In meat houses and abattoirs, the following sub-
surfaces
units are present:
Conditions Low density Special
of occupation precautions to a) Animal sheds before slaughter,
evacuation difficult be taken where b) Slaughter shed,
during conditions of animals are
c) Flaying, dressing and washing,
emergency evacuation present
High density d) By-products handling,
occupation easy e) Inspection,
conditions of f) Laboratory, and
evacuation g) Office.
Nature of Flammable Barns
processed material 5.2 Wiring Systems
or stored including dust
materials 5.2.1 Main switchgear shall not be installed
Building Propagation of a) within reach of livestock, or
design fire is facilitated
and risks due to b) in any position where access to it may be
structural impeded by livestock.
movement of 5.2.2 Where an installation serves more than one
structures which building, it shall be possible to isolate and control the
are weak buildings individually.

5 SUPPLY CHARACTERISTICS AND 5.2.3 Means of access to all live parts of switchgear
PARAMETERS and other fixed live parts where different nominal
voltages exist shall be marked to indicate the voltages
5.1 Information shall be exchanged among the people present.
concerned on the electrical needs of the premises before
installation work begins. Each installation may have 5.2.4 Cables
to cater to the services required in the subunits of the 5.2.4.1 All cables shall be placed out of reach of
premises which depend on the type of agricultural livestock and clear of all vehicular movement.
premises as enumerated in 4.
5.2.4.2 Where additional protection against mechanical
5.1.1 In agricultural farms the following sub-units are damage to cables is required, it shall, wherever
present: possible, be provided by the use of non-metallic
a) Outdoor processing, materials.
b) Indoor processing, 5.2.4.3 Where long runs of cable must be placed along
c) Heating/cooling, the sides of buildings, they shall wherever possible be
d) Cold storage, placed on the outside of the buildings, and as high as
e) Stores, and practicable.
f) Office. 5.2.4.4 Where conductors or cables are carried

PART 6 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS IN AGRICULTURAL PREMISES 347

SP 30 : 2011

overhead supported by buildings or by poles, the present or situated outside, protection against direct
minimum height above ground shall be 6 m. contact shall be provided by:
5.2.4.5 Cable couplers shall not be used in agricultural a) barriers or enclosures affording at least the
premises. degree or protection IP2X, or
5.3 Selection and Erection of Equipment b) insulation capable of withstanding a test
voltage of 500 V for 1 min.
Equipment shall be so selected that they suit the
environmental conditions of use and shall be installed For achieving protection by automatic disconnection
in such a way that their normal functioning is not of supply, the conventional voltage limit in locations in
affected by the external influences enumerated in 4. which livestock are present or situated outside is UL =
25 V. These conditions are also applicable to locations
5.3.1 It is recommended to protect final sub-circuits directly connected through extraneous conductive parts
by residual current devices, the rated operating residual to the locations where livestock are present.
current not exceeding 30 mA and as low as practicable
but avoiding nuisance tripping. Where electrical equipment is installed in livestock
building, supplementary equipotential bonding shall
5.4 System Protection connect all exposed conductive parts which can be
touched by livestock and the protective conductor of
5.4.1 Protection Against Electric Shock
the installation.
For the application of protective measure by safety NOTE — A metallic grill connected to the protective conductor
extra-low voltage in locations in which livestock are laid in the floor is recommended (see Fig. 1).

1. Earth conductor 8. Feeding apparatus

2. Sheet metal and foil partitions 9. Milking apparatus
3. Water pipe 10. Steel structure
4. Manure removal device 11. Protective earth conductor (PE)
5. Potential equalization, for example, 12. Earth electrode
structural steel mat 13. Busbar for equipotential bonding
6. Tethering device 14. Earth electrode for lightning protection
7. Automatic watering device 15. Earth electrode for electric fences

FIG. 1 EXAMPLE OF EQUIPOTENTIAL BONDING ON AGRICULTURAL PREMISES

348 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

5.4.2 Protection Against Fire 6.2 Abattoir

Heaters used in the rearing and tending of livestock In meat houses and abattoirs, in halls where meat or
shall be secured or hung on a safe mounting so that an carcasses are hung, a temperature of not greater than
adequate spacing from both animals (risk of burns) and 10°C would be required and air-conditioning may be
combustible materials (fire hazard) is assured. Due required. In unrefrigerated work rooms, ample artificial
consideration shall be given to the evacuation of light and ventilation shall be provided by electrical
animals in case of emergency. Due considerations shall means. The overall intensity in every abattoir shall not
also be given to locations presenting fire-risks. be less than 200 lux throughout the slaughter hall and
workroom and at places where meat inspection is
5.4.3 Isolation and Switching
carried out, the illumination shall be at least 500 lux.
For fire safety purposes, a residual current protective
6.3 Farm Cattle Housing
device shall be installed having a rated residual
operating current of 0.5A. Devices for emergency In large dairy farms, roof-lights shall be provided to
electrical switching including emergency stopping shall give 50-200 lux of artificial lighting. The lamps shall
not be installed within reach of livestock or in any be hung at a height not less than 2 m above floor level.
position where access to them may be impeded by
livestock, account being taken of the condition likely 7 TESTING OF INSTALLATION
to arise in the event of panic by livestock. Before commissioning the installation shall be tested
and inspected as given in Part 1/Section 13 of the Code.
6 SERVICES IN AGRICULTURAL PREMISES
8 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS
Farm houses and livestock houses do not in general
require sophisticated electrical services, but in the case 8.1 For large scale livestock keeping, such as in a dairy
of the latter, lack of proper ventilation or lighting leads farm, it shall be essential to provide:
to insanitation and discomfort to the livestock thereby a) a warning device for indicating failure of air
leading to retarded growth, high mortality or poor circulation system; and
fertility. The houses are required to be maintained
b) for continuity of supply, a fast acting
reasonably cool in summer and warm in winter, with a
emergency supply system is recommended.
regular supply of fresh air and light. The guidelines
given in 6.1 to 6.3 shall be adhered to. 8.2 Electric Fences
6.1 Poultry Housing Where electric fences are in the vicinity of overhead
lines, appropriate distances shall be observed to take
A minimum of 14 h day length shall be provided to account of induction currents, falling lines, etc.
the birds and artificial lighting shall be provided for
the same. For the purposes, 1 W (GLS) or 0.75 W Any earth electrode connected to the earth terminal of
(fluorescent) per bird or 1 W per 28-38 cm are an electric fence controller shall be separate from the
considered adequate. The light sources shall be hung earthing system of any other circuit and shall be
at a height not less than 1.8 m above floor. For poultry situated outside the resistance area of any electrode
sheds of 6 m width and below, one row of bulbs in used for protective earthing.
the centre shall be adequate. For sheds of larger width 8.3 Circuits of wirings which are only occasionally
two rows of lamps properly interspaced may be used, for example, during threshing time, shall be fitted
desirable. with a separate switch marked accordingly.

PART 6 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS IN AGRICULTURAL PREMISES 349

NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE
PART 7
 SP 30 : 2011

PART 7 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS

IN HAZARDOUS AREAS
0 FOREWORD
Explosive gas atmosphere is the atmosphere where mixture with air, under atmospheric conditions, of flammable
substances in the form of gas or vapour, which, after ignition, permits self-sustaining flame propagation. Area in
which an explosive gas atmosphere is present, or may be expected to be present, in quantities such as to require
special precautions for the construction, installation and use of equipment is referred as a hazardous area and has
to be treated in a special manner from the point of the design of electrical installation.
Many liquids, gases and vapours which in industry are generated, processed, handled and stored are combustible.
When ignited, these may burn readily and with considerable explosive force when mixed with air in the appropriate
proportions. With regard to electrical installations, essential ignition sources include arcs, sparks or hot surfaces,
produced either in normal operation or under specified fault conditions.
This Part 7 of the Code is intended to provide guidelines for electrical installations and equipment in locations
where a hazardous atmosphere is likely to be present, with a view to maximising electrical safety. The scope of
this Part therefore includes installations in hazardous areas such a petroleum refineries and petrochemical and
chemical industries. The requirements laid down herein are in addition to those specified in Part 4 of this Code.
It is recognized that when electrical equipment is to be installed in or near a hazardous area, it is frequently
possible, by taking care in the layout of the installation, to locate much of the equipment in less hazardous or
non-hazardous areas and thus reduce the amount of special equipment required.
NOTE — Hazardous areas can be limited in extent by construction measures, that is, walls or dams. Ventilation or application of
protective gas will reduce the probability of the presence of explosive gas atmosphere so that areas of greater hazard can be transformed
to areas of lesser hazard or to non-hazardous areas.

This Part includes generalised statements and recommendations on matters on which there are diverse opinions.
It is, therefore, important that sound engineering judgement should be exercised while applying these guidelines.

PART 7 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS IN HAZARDOUS AREAS 353

SP 30 : 2011

1 SCOPE under atmospheric conditions, of flammable substances

in the form of gas or vapour, which, after ignition,
1.1 This Part 7 of the Code covers recommendations
permits self-sustaining flame propagation.
for electrical installations in chemical industries,
petroleum refineries and other similar areas where 3.5 Hazardous Area — Area in which an explosive
hazards of explosion due to gases and vapours exist, gas atmosphere is present, or may be expected to be
and in which flammable gases and volatile liquids are present, in quantities such as to require special
processed, stored, loaded, unloaded or otherwise precautions for the construction, installation and use
handled. of equipment.
1.2 In addition to the recommendations given in this 3.6 Explosive (Flammable) Limits — The extreme
Part 7, the electrical installations in hazardous areas values for the concentration of a flammable gas or
shall comply, with the requirements for industrial vapour in air under atmospheric conditions, under
installation in non-hazardous areas laid down in Part 4 which flammable gas-air mixture can be ignited by an
of this Code. electrical arc or spark. These limits are called the ‘lower
explosive limit’ (LEL) and the ‘upper explosive limit’
1.3 This Part does not apply to installations in
(UEL).
hazardous areas having ignitable dusts and fibres. As
distinct from the hazardous areas on the surface, 3.7 Flammability Range — The range of gas or
environmental conditions in mines demand special vapour mixtures with air between the flammable limits
consideration. This Part of the Code does not include over which the gas mixtures are continuously
provisions for installations in underground mines. explosive.
1.4 In any plant installation, irrespective of size, there 3.8 Flammable Gas or Vapour — Gas or vapour
may be numerous sources of ignition apart from those which, when mixed with air in certain proportions, will
associated with electrical apparatus. Precautions may form an explosive gas atmosphere.
be necessary to ensure safety but guidance on this
aspect is outside the scope of this Part. 3.9 Flammable Liquid — A liquid capable of
producing a flammable vapour, gas or mist under any
NOTE — Some examples of industrial locations which require foreseeable operating conditions.
application of the guidelines in this Part are given in Annex A.
3.10 Flammable Mist — Droplets of flammable
2 REFERENCES liquid, dispersed in air, so as to form an explosive gas
A list of standards for electrical equipment for atmosphere.
explosive atmospheres is given at Annex B. Some of 3.11 Liquefied Flammable Gas — Flammable gas
these standards deal with particular construction which, under normal ambient pressures and
techniques, others with aspects of standardization temperatures, is in gaseous state but which is handled
which are relevant to more than one technique. in a liquid state under the applied conditions of pressure
3 TERMINOLOGY and/or temperature.

For the purpose of this Part, the following definitions 3.12 Flash Point — The temperature at which the
shall apply, in addition to those given in Part 1 of this liquid gives so much vapour that this vapour, when
Code. mixed with air, forms an ignitable mixture and gives a
momentary flash on application of a small pilot flame
3.1 Flammable Material — A flammable material is under specified conditions of test.
a gas, vapour, liquid and/or mist which can react
continuously with atmospheric oxygen and which may 3.13 Boiling Point — The temperature of a liquid
therefore, sustain fire or explosion when such reaction boiling at an ambient pressure of 101.3 kPa.
is initiated by a suitable spark, flame or hot surface. NOTE — For liquid mixtures the initial boiling point shall be
considered. ‘Initial boiling point’ is used for liquid mixtures
3.2 Flammable Gas-Air Mixture — A mixture of to indicate the lowest value of the boiling point for the range
flammable gas, vapour or mist with air, under of liquids present.
atmospheric conditions, in which after ignition,
3.14 Ignition Temperature — The lowest temperature
combustion spreads throughout the unconsumed
at which ignition occurs in a mixture of explosive gas
mixture.
and air when the method specified in IS 7820 is
3.3 Hazard — The presence, or the risk of presence, followed.
of a flammable gas-air mixture.
3.15 Source of Release — A source of release is a
3.4 Explosive Gas Atmosphere — Mixture with air, point or location from which a gas, vapour, mist or

354 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

liquid may be released into the atmosphere so that an the surrounding flammable atmosphere.
explosive gas atmosphere could be formed.
3.27 Inert Gas — A gas which cannot be ignited when
3.16 Restricted Release — A release (normal or mixed with a flammable gas or vapour in any
abnormal) of flammable gas or vapour which can be concentration.
diluted below the lower flammable limit.
4 STATUTORY REGULATIONS
3.17 Unrestricted Release — A release (normal or
4.1 In following the recommendations of this Part 7,
abnormal) of flammable gas or vapour which cannot
the various statutes and regulations in force in the
be diluted below the lower flammable limit.
country, applicable to the installation and use of
3.18 Adequate Ventilation — Adequate ventilation is electrical apparatus in hazardous areas shall be kept in
that which is sufficient to prevent accumulations of view.
significant quantities of gas-air mixtures in
4.2 Attention is invited to the fact that the manufacture
concentration over one-fourth of the lower flammable
and use of equipment in hazardous areas is controlled
limit.
by the statutory authorities listed below for the area of
Adequately ventilated area could be naturally their jurisdiction:
ventilated or artificially ventilated. a) The Directorate General of Mines Safety,
3.19 Relative Density of Gas or Vapour — The Dhanbad (Bihar);
density of a gas or a vapour relative to the density of b) The Chief Controllerate of Explosives,
air at the same pressure and the same temperature. Petroleum and Explosives Safety
Organisation, Nagpur (Maharashtra); and
3.20 Non-hazardous (Safe) Area — Area in which
an explosive gas atmosphere is not expected to be c) The Directorate General Factory Advice
present in quantities such as to require special Services and Labour Institute, Mumbai
precautions for the construction, installation and use (Maharashtra).
of equipment 4.3 Testing
3.21 Electrical Apparatus for Hazardous Areas — Equipment to be installed in hazardous area have to be
Electrical apparatus which will not ignite the certified by a recognised testing authority.
surrounding flammable atmosphere in which it is used.
4.4 Marking of equipment shall conform to
3.22 Ignition Capable Apparatus — Apparatus which IS/IEC 60079-0.
in normal operation produces sparks, hot surfaces, or
a flame which can ignite a specific flammable mixture. 5 FUNDAMENTAL CONCEPTS

3.23 Safety Measures — Measures taken to ensure 5.1 Flammable gases and vapours may cause a fire or
that electrical apparatus cannot cause an explosion. explosion when the following three basic conditions
are satisfied:
3.24 Type of Protection — Specific measures applied
to electrical equipment to avoid ignition of a a) Presence of sufficient quantity of a flammable
surrounding explosive atmosphere. gas or vapour,
b) Mixing of flammable gas or vapour with air
3.25 Maximum Surface Temperature — Highest or oxygen in the proportions required to
temperature which is attained in service under the most produce an explosive or ignitable mixture, and
adverse operating conditions (but within recognized
c) Occurrence of ignition.
tolerances) by any part or surface of the electrical
equipment, which would be able to produce an ignition In applying this principle to any potential hazard, the
of the surrounding explosive atmosphere. quantity of the substance that might be liberated, its
NOTES physical characteristics and the natural tendency of
1 The most adverse conditions include recognized overloads vapours to disperse in the atmosphere shall be
and fault conditions recognized in the specific standard for recognised. Flammable substances, the potential
the type of protection concerned. release of which shall be considered in area
2 The relevant surface temperature may be internal and/or classification of electrical installations (see 6) include
external depending upon the type of protection concerned.
the following:
3.26 Flame Arrester — A device for releasing gas
a) Non-liquefiable gases,
from an enclosure in such a way that in case of an
internal explosion there is no appreciable increase in b) Liquefied petroleum gas, and
internal pressure and the released gas will not ignite c) Vapour or flammable gas.

PART 7 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS IN HAZARDOUS AREAS 355

SP 30 : 2011

5.2 It is recommended that plants and installations in flammable atmospheres (explosive concentrations of
which flammable materials are handled or stored be combustible gas or vapour) may arise in installations
so designed that the degree and extent of hazardous in terms of both the frequency of occurrence and the
areas are kept to a minimum. Similarly consideration probable duration of existence on each occasion.
should be given to design and operation of process
equipment to ensure that even when it is operating 6.1 Area Classification
abnormally, the amount of flammable material released The area classification is given in Table 1.
to the atmosphere is minimized in order to reduce the
extent of the area made hazardous. 6.2 Extent of Hazardous Area
Once a plant has been classified, it is important that no 6.2.1 A complete knowledge of the physical properties
modification to equipment or operating procedures is of the flammable materials involved is essential for
made without discussion with those responsible for the classifying a hazardous area. Properties of primary
area classification. Unauthorized action may invalidate interest from an ignition standpoint are:
the area classification.
a) relative density,
It is necessary to ensure that process equipment which b) flammable limits,
has been subjected to maintenance shall be carefully c) flash point,
checked during and after re-assembly to ensure that
d) volatility,
safety aspect or integrity of the original design has been
maintained before it is returned to service. e) ignition temperature, and
f) ignition energy.
5.3 Where it is necessary to use electrical apparatus in
an environment in which there may be an explosive Some of these characteristics have a direct influence
gas atmosphere and it is not possible to: on the degree and extent of hazardous areas while the
others affect the design of electrical equipment.
a) eliminate likelihood of an explosive gas
atmosphere occurring around the source of 6.2.1.1 Relative density
ignition, or Where a substantial volume of gas or vapour is released
b) eliminate the source of ignition. into the atmosphere from a localized source, a relative
Then measures should aim at reducing the likelihood density less than one, that is, lighter-than-air, for the
of occurrence of either or both of the above factors so combustible indicates the gas or vapour will rise in a
that the likelihood of coincidence is so small as to be comparatively still atmosphere. A vapour density
negligible. greater than one, that is, heavier-than-air, indicates the
gas or vapour will tend to sink, and may thereby spread
5.4 In most practical situations where flammable some distance horizontally and at a low level. The latter
materials are used it is difficult to ensure that an effects will increase with compounds of greater relative
explosive gas atmosphere will never occur. It may also vapour density.
be difficult to ensure that the electrical apparatus will
NOTE — In process industries, the boundary between
never give rise to a source of ignition. Reliance is compounds which may be considered lighter-than-air is set at
therefore placed on using electrical apparatus which has a relative vapour density of 0.75. This limit is chosen so as to
an extremely low likelihood of creating a source of provide a factor of safety for these compounds whose densities
ignition in situations where a flammable atmosphere has are close to that of air and where movement may not, therefore,
be predicted without a detailed assessment.
a high likelihood of occurring. Conversely where the
likelihood of an explosive gas atmosphere is reduced, 6.2.1.2 Flammable limits
electrical apparatus which has an increased likelihood
The lower the ‘lower flammable limit’ the larger may
of becoming a source of ignition may be used.
be the extent of the hazardous area.
6 CLASSIFICATION OF HAZARDOUS AREAS 6.2.1.3 Flash point
6.0 General A flammable atmosphere cannot exist if the flash point
is significantly above the relevant maximum
The objective of the hazardous area classification is to
temperature of the flammable liquid. The lower the
ensure an adequately safe level of operation of
flash point, the larger may be the extent of the
electrical apparatus in flammable atmospheres using
hazardous area.
the fundamental concepts outlined in 5.
6.2.1.4 Volatility
The basis for hazardous area classification recognizes
the differing degrees of probability with which Boiling point can be used for comparing the volatility

356 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

Table 1 Area Classification

(Clause 6.1)

Sl No. Area Classification Description Remarks

(1) (2) (3) (4)
i) Zone 0 Place in which an explosive atmosphere This classification is applicable only where the
consisting of a mixture with air of hazard will exist continuously. In the petroleum
flammable substances in the form of gas, industry such a condition is rarely encountered
vapour or mist is present continuously or except in confined spaces, such as the vapour
for long periods or frequently space of closed process vessels, storage tanks or
closed containers. In Zone 0, any arc or spark
would almost certainly lead to fire or explosion.
Any electrical apparatus must afford a degree of
protection as near as practicable to absolute. It is
recommended to avoid installing electrical
equipment in Zone 0 areas to the extent possible.
ii) Zone 1 Place in which an explosive atmosphere In Zone 1, the hazard is likely to occur at any
consisting of a mixture with air of time requiring fullest practicable application of
flammable substances in the form of gas, measures.
vapour or mist is likely to occur in normal
operation occasionally
iii) Zone 2 Place in which an explosive atmosphere Zone 2 is applicable to areas where hazard is
consisting of a mixture with air of unlikely and may be caused only by the highly
flammable substances in the form of gas, improbable and simultaneous occurrence of an
vapour or mist is not likely to occur in arc or spark together with a hazardous
normal operation but, if it does occur, will atmosphere arising out of failure of conditions of
persist for a short period only control. It presupposes that any abnormal
occurrence is rapidly dispersed so that possible
contact with electrical apparatus is of minimum
duration.

NOTES
1 Earlier, classified areas were called divisions.
2 This area classification deals only with risks due to combustible gases and vapours and combustible mists. It does not deal with
dusts since these material can be quiescent for long periods of time until they are disturbed into suspension by a suitable mechanism
(see also 1.3).
3 By implication, an area not classified as Zone 0, Zone 1 or Zone 2, is deemed non-hazardous or safe and no special precautions are
necessary.

of flammable liquids. The more volatile a liquid and normal operation but leakages which entail repair or
the lower its flash point, the more closely it shut down are not part of normal operation.
approximates a flammable gas.
Some examples of persistent risk points are as follows:
6.2.1.5 Ignition temperature and ignition energy
a) Interior of pressure vessels and pipes
Ignition temperature and ignition energy of a containing gas-air mixtures;
flammable gas or vapour are taken into account in the b) Free space above liquid level in tanks;
design of electrical apparatus for hazardous areas so c) Free space immediately above open dipping
that these do not present an ignition risk. baths, etc; and
6.2.2 Factors Affecting Extent of Hazard d) The immediate vicinity of vapour exhausts
and liquid outlets where these are designed
6.2.2.0 In addition to the properties of flammable
to discharge as part of normal plant function.
materials involved, the following factors need to be
considered for determining the degree and extent of Examples of occasional risk points are the immediate
hazardous areas while applying the guidelines given vicinity of mechanical glands, seals relying on wetting
in IS 5572. by the fluid being pumped and other localized spillage
points and of vapour exhausts and liquid outlets
6.2.2.1 Risk points
designed to discharge only on plant malfunction.
Normal operation is the situation in which all plant
6.2.2.2 Temperature of process liquid
equipment is operating within its design parameters.
Minor releases of flammable material may be part of The extent of a hazardous area may increase with

PART 7 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS IN HAZARDOUS AREAS 357

SP 30 : 2011

increasing temperature of process liquid provided the 6.2.2.9 For vapours released at or near ground level,
temperature is above the flash point. It should be noted the areas where potentially hazardous concentrations
that the liquid or vapour temperature after the release are most likely to be found are below ground, those at
maybe increased or decreased by the ambient ground are next most likely, and as the height above
temperature or other factors (for example, a hot ground increase, the potential hazard decreases.
surface). NOTE — For lighter-than-air gases, the opposite is true, there
NOTE — Some liquids (such as certain halogenated being little or no potential hazard at and below ground and
hydrocarbons) do not possess a flash point although they are greater potential hazard above ground.
capable of producing a flammable atmosphere; in these cases,
the equilibrium liquid temperature corresponding to saturated
6.2.3 Internal Hazards
concentration at lower flammable limit should be compared
6.2.3.0 In cases where electrical apparatus, like those
with the relevant maximum liquid temperature.
used for measurement and control of process variable,
6.2.2.3 Concentration of vapour are connected directly to gas or a liquid process
For flammable liquids, the concentration of the released equipment, this may introduce additional source of
vapour is related to the vapour pressure at the relevant internal and/or external release and consequently
maximum liquid temperature. The lower the initial influence the external area classification.
boiling point, the greater the vapour pressure for a given 6.2.3.1 The hazards created inside the electrical
liquid temperature and hence the greater concentration apparatus by an internal release of flammable gas or
of vapour at the release source resulting in greater vapour may be compared to the external area
extent of hazardous area. classification as follows:
6.2.2.4 Rate of release a) Where pressurization with inert gas is applied,
The extent of hazardous area may increase with the internal releases cannot create a flammable
increasing rate of release of flammable material. gas atmosphere, because no oxygen is present.
b) Where dilution with air is applied in case of a
6.2.2.5 Release velocity restricted normal release the internal hazards
Due to an improved dilution for release of flammable are comparable to those in a safe area. This
gases, vapours and/or mists in the air, the extent of applies also when the abnormal release (when
hazardous area may decrease if, with constant release occurring) would be restricted. When, however,
rate, the release velocity increases above that which the abnormal release would be unrestricted, the
causes turbulent flow. internal hazards are comparable to the external
hazards in Zone 2.
NOTE — Elevated or depressed sources of release will alter
the areas of potential hazard. c) In all other types of protection, the internal
hazards are comparable to the external
6.2.2.6 Air current hazards in Zone 2, provided that there is no
Air currents may substantially alter the outline of the normal release and that an abnormal release
limits of potential hazard. A very mild breeze may serve would be very infrequent and of a relatively
to extend the area in those directions to which vapours short duration. When there is a normal release,
might normally be carried. However, a stronger breeze the internal hazards are comparable to the
may so accelerate the dispersion of vapours that the hazards in Zone 0 and the abnormal release
extent of potentially hazardous area would be greatly is not relevant.
reduced. 6.2.3.2 When apparatus in which the internal hazards
6.2.2.7 Ventilation are comparable to Zone 2 is installed in a safe area or
in Zone 2, the internal hazards determine the actual
With an increased rate of ventilation, the extent of hazard condition, but when the same apparatus is
hazardous area may be reduced. The extent may also installed in Zone 1 or Zone 0 the external hazards
be reduced by an improved arrangement of the determine the actual hazard condition. When an
ventilation system. apparatus in which the internal hazards are
6.2.2.8 Obstacles comparable to Zone 1 is installed in a Zone 0
hazardous area, the area classification would
Obstacles (for example, dykes, walls) may impede the determine the actual hazard.
ventilation and thus may enlarge the extent. On the
other hand, they may limit the movement of a cloud of 6.2.4 Extent of Zones of Hazard
an explosive gas atmosphere and thus may reduce the 6.2.4.1 The treatment of hazardous area, from the point
extent. of view of determining the extent of hazardous zones

358 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

(and their classification) around the source of hazard be bonded to the appropriate metal-work of the
differ in the following broad situations: apparatus and to the earthing pin of the plug.
a) Open-air situations (freely ventilated process 7.1.2.4 Efficient bonding should be installed where
area): protection against stray currents or electrostatic charges
is necessary.
1) Source of hazard located near ground
level, and 7.1.2.5 Earthing and bonding of pipelines and pipe-
2) Source of hazard above ground level, racks
b) Enclosed premises and surrounding area Unless adequately connected to earth elsewhere, all
(process area with restricted ventilation). utility and process pipelines should be bonded to a
c) Storage tanks: common conductor by means of earth bars or pipe
clamps and connected to the earthing system at a point
1) Floating roof, and where the pipelines enter or leave the hazardous area,
2) Fixed roof tank with vent. except where conflicting with the requirements of
6.2.4.2 Detailed guidelines on the above situations can cathodic protection. In addition, it is recommended that
be had from IS 5572. steel pipe racks in the process units and off-site areas
should be earthed at every 25 m.
7 SPECIFIC GUIDELINES FOR ELECTRICAL
7.1.3 Automatic Electrical Protection
INSTALLATIONS IN HAZARDOUS AREAS
7.1.3.1 It is essential that the severity and duration of
7.1 General faults internal or external to the electrical apparatus be
7.1.1 Mechanical Strength limited, by external means, to values that can be
sustained by the apparatus without disruptive effect.
All apparatus shall be installed with due regard to the
possibility of external mechanical damage. Where 7.1.3.2 All circuits and apparatus in hazardous areas
adequate protection cannot be ensured, for example, shall be provided with means to ensure disconnection
by location, reference should be made to the impact quickly in the event of excessive overloads,
test requirements according to IS/IEC 60079-0 for the overcurrent, internal short-circuit or earth-fault
apparatus before deciding on any additional measures conditions. In case of distribution systems with isolated
such as the provision of guards for transparent parts. neutral, an automatic earth-fault alarming device may
be considered adequate, in addition to overload/
7.1.2 Earthing and Bonding overcurrent and short-circuit protection.
7.1.2.1 Earthing shall be in accordance with Part 1/ 7.1.3.3 Protection and control apparatus shall be
Section 14 of this Code. The connection between metal normally located in a non-hazardous area. Where its
part to be grounded and the grounding conductor shall installation in a potentially hazardous area cannot be
be made secure mechanically and electrically by using avoided, such apparatus should be provided with the
adequate metallic fitting. The earthing conductors shall appropriate type of protection.
be sufficiently strong and thick, and the portions of
7.1.3.4 Apart from self-powered apparatus and hand
conductor which are likely to be corroded or damaged
lamps, earth-leakage protection or earth monitoring,
shall be well protected. Grounding conductors which
or both should be included in the protection of the
shall not reach a hazardously high temperature due to
portable and transportable apparatus. Protection, of the
the anticipated maximum earth fault current flowing,
circulating-current type, which automatically cuts off
shall be used.
the supply in the event of the earth continuity conductor
7.1.2.2 Protection against lightning shall be provided becoming disconnected, may, with advantage, be
in accordance with Part 1/Section 15 of this Code. adopted as the earth-monitoring device.
Specific guidelines for installations in hazardous
7.1.4 Isolation
locations are given in Annex C. Interconnection system
with other buried metal services and/or earth 7.1.4.1 All electrical circuits should be provided with
terminations for equipment earthing for the purpose an effective means of complete circuit isolation,
of equalizing the potential distribution in the ground including the neutral. Such means of isolation should
should preferably be made below ground. be provided for each item of electrical apparatus and/or
each sub-circuit.
7.1.2.3 Portable and transportable apparatus shall be
earthed with one of the cores of flexible cable for power 7.1.4.2 The means of isolation, when located in a
supply. The earth continuity conductor and the metallic hazardous area, shall be a switch which breaks all poles,
screen wherever provided for the flexible cable should including the neutral, and which is provided with an

PART 7 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS IN HAZARDOUS AREAS 359

SP 30 : 2011

appropriate type of protection against explosive The diameter of each strand of the conductor shall be
hazards. This applies equally to single phase sub- not less than 0.300 mm of copper or equivalent size of
circuits. When the means of isolation is located in a conductor in the case of aluminium conductors as
non-hazardous area, the switch shall break all poles, specified in relevant Indian Standard.
the neutral being isolated by a removable link. The
For (b) the following types of cables may be used in
means of isolation shall be capable of being locked in
principle:
the ‘OFF’ position.
1) Lead-sheathed and armoured cable;
7.1.4.3 When the means of isolation is not
immediately adjacent to the associated apparatus, 2) Plastics or rubber-sheathed steel screen
effective provision should be made to prevent the protected or armoured cable, with overall
restoration of supply to the apparatus while the risk sheath;
of exposure of live conductors to a flammable gas- 3) Cables enclosed in a seamless aluminium
air mixture continues. sheath with or without armour, with an outer
protective sheath;
7.1.5 Operation and Maintenance
4) Mineral insulated metal sheathed cable; and
7.1.5.1 None of the protection techniques for electrical 5) Braided screen-protected flexible cables.
equipment for explosive gas atmospheres are effective
unless the apparatus is operated within the limits Unarmoured lead-covered cable is not acceptable. The
indicated by its nameplate marking and is properly sheath of a metal-sheathed cable should not be used as
maintained according to the recommendations of the neutral conductor.
appropriate Indian Standards. 7.2.1 Factors Affecting Choice of Wiring System
7.1.5.2 Care shall be taken when inspecting equipment 7.2.1.1 Screwed steel conduit systems are satisfactory
in hazardous areas; circuits shall be made dead before for many situations but should not be used where
removing covers. Flexible cables are a potential source vibration might cause fracture or loosening of joints
of hazard; they should be frequently inspected, together and where excessive stress may be imposed as a result
with the portable apparatus. Equipment should be of its rigidity or where corrosion or excessive internal
examined for mechanical faults, cracked glasses, condensation of moisture is likely to occur.
deterioration of cement, slackened conduit joints and
corrosion. Electrical tests should be carried out at fixed 7.2.1.2 Lead-sheathed and armoured cables are suitable
intervals. for underground installation. Steel-wire/flat armour is
preferred for underground use.
7.2 Wiring Installation
7.2.1.3 PVC-insulated and armoured cable, complying
7.2.0 General with IS 1554 (Part 1) with an extruded plastic outer
sheath may be used for above ground or underground
Types of wiring and systems which may be used for
installation. Lead-sheathed cable should be used where
installation in hazardous areas are:
spillages may affect the integrity of the cable and or
a) cables drawn into screwed, solid drawn or allow migration of the liquid through the cable.
seamless conduits, and
7.2.1.4 For telecommunication circuits, plastic-
b) cables which are otherwise suitably protected insulated and armoured telephone cables may be used.
against mechanical damage.
7.2.1.5 In Zone 0 areas only intrinsically safe circuits
Requirements for the installation of general power shall be installed and its use shall be kept to an
systems may not apply to the installation of apparatus unavoidable minimum. Wiring of circuits which have
and systems with type of protection ‘i’ (intrinsic safety). been approved as intrinsically safe may follow the
For intrinsically safe circuits, there is normally no need requirements of general electrical wiring except that
to have special enclosures for the conductors. However, the following requirements shall be observed:
some protection will have to be afforded to such
conductors primarily to prevent contact between a) The conditions of use laid down on the test
conductors of intrinsically safe circuits and those of certificate issued by the approving authority
any other system, to avoid the possibility of arcing shall be observed,
occurring at the point of contact or invasion of the b) The wiring shall be so made as to avoid
intrinsically safe circuits by current arising from contact with other circuits,
contact or electrostatic or electromagnetic induction. c) The wiring shall be so made as to avoid
In addition, the conductors should be protected against electromagnetic or electrostatic induction
mechanical damage (see 7.2.1.5). from other circuit(s).

360 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

d) The wiring shall be adequately protected terminated outside the hazardous area and be fitted at
against mechanical damage, and or near the terminal pole with an effective surge-
e) Aluminium armoured or sheathed cable shall protection apparatus. The cable used to connect the
not be used in Zone 0 areas. overhead line with the installation in the hazardous area
should comply with the recommendations for wiring
7.2.2 Wiring Design systems in hazardous areas. Conduit should not be used
7.2.2.1 Correctly designed terminations complete with if it is likely to be subjected to vibration. The casing,
armour clamps shall be provided for armoured cables. armouring or sheathing and armouring should be
The armouring should be carried into the clamps to electrically continuous and the end adjacent to the point
provide mechanical support to the cable and to ensure of connection with the overhead line should be bonded
electrical continuity. Where such cable is lead covered to the earth electrode of the overhead line. In addition,
and armoured, the lead-sheath should be plumbed or the casing or sheathing should be independently
mechanically gripped and sealed and the armouring earthed as near as possible to the junction of the cable,
should be carried over the lead joint. with the installation and bonded to the earthing lead
of any lightning protective system associated with the
7.2.2.2 Where circuits traverse a hazardous area in hazardous area. If convenient, a common electrode may
passing from one non-hazardous area to another, the be used for this independent earth and for the lightning-
wiring in the hazardous area should comply with the protective system of the installation.
requirements of this standard.
Where the overhead line supplying a building forming
7.2.2.3 Where practicable, contact either deliberate or a hazardous area is supported by the building, and the
accidental, should be avoided between electrical connecting cable to the installation consequently is
apparatus, conduit or cables, and any equipment or short, the earth electrodes for the surge-protection
pipework used for carrying combustible gases, vapours apparatus on the overhead line may be used for earthing
or liquids. the cable sheath or casing and for any lightning
7.2.2.4 Where, owing to particular circumstances, protective system associated with the hazardous area.
contact between components referred to in 7.2.2.3 is 7.2.2.8 The wiring entry to the apparatus, direct or
unavoidable, the armouring, conduit or sheathing of indirect, should maintain the type of protection used.
the cable should be bonded to the equipment or
pipework in such a manner and at such intervals as to 7.2.2.9 Unused cable entries in electrical apparatus
ensure that under the worst fault conditions, the passage should be closed with plugs suitable for the type of
of any current will not give rise to incendive sparking protection used.
or bring about a temperature rise approaching the 7.2.2.10 Where cable terminals are used in apparatus
ignition temperature of the combustible gas, vapour and accessories with the type of protection ‘e’ or ‘n’
or liquid which may be present. Alternatively, in the they shall be fixed in position so as to ensure
case of cable, the insulation of the sheath may be maintenance of the creepage and clearance distances
sufficient to prevent danger. as specified in IS/IEC 60079-7 and IS /IEC 60079-15.
7.2.2.5 Where cables or conduits pass through a floor, 7.2.3 Laying of Conduits
wall, partition or ceiling, the hole provided for them
should be sealed with cement or similar incombustible 7.2.3.1 Conduits shall be solid-drawn or seamless,
material to the full thickness of the floor, wall, partition screwed and galvanized.
or ceiling, so that no space remains around the cable Conduit, having an external diameter of more than
through which combustible gas liquid or vapour might 25 mm, should be fitted with a stopper box at each
spread. Alternatively cable glands may be used for this point of connection with apparatus or fittings, unless a
purpose. self-contained assembly, independent of external
7.2.2.6 Where trunking, ducts, pipes or trenches are connections, has been certified.
used to accommodate cables, precautions should be 7.2.3.2 Elbows of the solid type may be used for the
taken to prevent the passage of combustible gases, immediate connection of conduit to apparatus.
vapours or liquids from one area to another, and to
prevent the collection of combustible gases, vapours 7.2.3.3 The lengths of the screwed part of any conduit
or liquids in trenches. Such precautions may involve should be in accordance with the requirements of
the sealing of trunking, ducts and pipes, and the IS/IEC 60079-1.
adequate ventilation or sand filling of trenches. 7.2.3.4 Where, in a run of conduit, it is necessary to
7.2.2.7 Where an overhead supply line is used for either employ a joint other than a screwed coupler, certified
power or telecommunication circuits, it should be unions approved for flame-proof purposes should be

PART 7 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS IN HAZARDOUS AREAS 361

SP 30 : 2011

used. The use of running couplings is not recommended 7.2.4 Laying of Cables
but where it is impracticable to avoid their use, factory
7.2.4.1 Cable systems include cables laid above ground
made assemblies should be used and the running
or cables laid underground directly buried, in concrete
coupling should be secured by locknuts.
trenches, or in cable ducts. The types of the cable for
7.2.3.5 All screwed joints should be pulled up tight use in hazardous areas shall be as specified in this
and should, in addition, be provided with locknuts. Section.
7.2.3.6 Surface-mounted conduit should be supported 7.2.4.2 Cable runs should, where practicable, be
by spacing saddles. uninterrupted, that is, continuous and therefore, free
from intermediate joints. Where discontinuities cannot
7.2.3.7 Elbows or tees, other than those of the
be avoided, either during installation or subsequently,
inspection type, should not be used except for the
the apparatus used for interconnection should be
immediate connection of conduit to apparatus, and all
provided with the type of protection appropriate to the
inspection fittings should be of the flameproof type.
zone.
7.2.3.8 All joints in an assembly or conduit should be
7.2.4.3 All cables shall be provided with adequate
painted after assembly with moisture-resisting paint
mechanical protection. Cables shall be adequately
to inhibit the development of rust.
supported throughout their length, care being taken to
NOTE — It is important to ensure efficient earthing and avoid excessive pressure when clamp supports are used.
bonding in a flameproof installation. In view of the operating
Horizontal cables may be carried on supports, cable
conditions associated with the use of flameproof apparatus,
attention is drawn to the necessity of ensuring that the resistance trays or through protective troughs or tubes. Rising
of all joints, including those in or between flameproof cables should be clipped, cleated or otherwise attached
enclosures and conduit, or cable sheaths and armour, is such to suitable supports which provide adequate
as to prevent a dangerous rise of temperature or voltage from
mechanical protection.
the passage of fault current, and that the total resistance of the
earth-fault current path, measured from any point in the 7.2.4.4 Where paper-insulated armoured cables are
installation, is such as to ensure reliable operation of the
protection devices in all seasons.
used, and particularly where such cables may be
exposed to high temperature, preference should be
7.2.3.9 Where a run of conduit, irrespective of size, given to non-draining cables. In the case of other types
passes from a hazardous area to a non-hazardous area, of paper-insulated armoured cables, vertical runs
a stopper or sealing box or appropriate sealing device should be avoided.
shall be inserted on the side remote from the hazardous
area. There shall be no union, coupling, box or fitting 7.2.4.5 The passage of cables from a hazardous area
in the conduit between the sealing fittings and point at to a non-hazardous area should, if necessary, be
which the conduit leaves the hazardous locations. provided with adequate means to prevent the
transmission of flammable material into the non-
7.2.3.10 Seals shall be provided within 450 mm where hazardous area consideration should also be given to
conduit run is terminated on the apparatus. the treatment of cables against fire transmission.
7.2.3.11 Metal conduit containing no unions, 7.2.4.6 Where trunking, ducts, pipes or trenches are
couplings, boxes or fittings that passes through a used to accommodate cables, precautions should be
hazardous location with no fittings less than 300 mm taken to prevent the passage of combustible gases,
beyond each boundary may not be sealed if the vapours or liquids from one area to another, and to
termination points of the unbroken conduit are in non- prevent the collection of combustible gases, vapours
hazardous locations. or liquids in trenches. Such precautions may involve
7.2.3.12 For canned pumps, process connections for the sealing of trunking, ducts and pipes and the
instruments, etc, that depend upon a single seal adequate ventilation or sand filling of trenches.
diaphragm or tube to prevent process fluids from 7.2.4.7 Cables capable of transmitting gases or vapours
entering the electrical conduit system, an additional through the core shall be sealed in the hazardous
approved seal or barrier shall be provided with an location in such a manner as to prevent passage of gases
adequate drain between the seals in such a manner that or vapours into a non-hazardous location.
leaks would be obvious.
7.2.4.8 Correctly designed terminations complete with
7.2.3.13 Where there is a probability that any vapour armour clamps shall be provided for armoured cables,
or moisture in the air may be condensed into liquid the armouring should be carried into the clamps to
within the conduit runs, boxes or sealing fittings, proper provide mechanical support to the cable and to ensure
means shall be provided to prevent accumulation of or electrical continuity. Where such cables are lead
to permit drainage of such liquid periodically. covered and armoured, the lead sheath should be

362 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

plumbed or mechanically gripped and sealed and the d) Plastic insulated cables equivalent to ordinary
armouring should be carried over the lead joint. tough rubber sheathed flexible cables.
7.2.4.9 Cable glands, where used, shall be flameproof Use of screened cables is also permitted.
type for flameproof enclosure and double-compression
All flexible cables shall be provided with braiding for
type for enclosure having type of protection other than
mechanical protection.
flameproof.
7.2.6.2 An effective cable clamping device so designed
7.2.4.10 Cable fittings for mineral insulated cables shall
as not to damage the insulation of the flexible cable,
be suitable for use with the appropriate apparatus to
should be provided at the points of entry of the flexible
which they are to be attached. Fittings should be
cable to the apparatus and plug. In addition, means
arranged for sealing the cable insulation and be
should be provided to prevent sharp bending of the
provided with means for ensuring adequate earth
cable at both points of entry.
continuity.
7.2.7 Protective Measures from Dangerous Sparking
7.2.4.11 Where electrolytic corrosion of copper sheath
of mineral insulated cable may result from contact with 7.2.7.1 Dangers from live parts
walls or other surfaces to which the cable is attached,
In order to avoid the formation of sparks liable to ignite
it should be kept clear of such surface or covered with
the explosive gas atmosphere, any contact with bare
a protective sheath.
live parts other than intrinsically safe parts shall be
7.2.4.12 Where there is risk of mineral-insulated cables prevented.
being exposed to excessive voltages such as inductive
Where this requirement is not met by construction other
surges; surge suppression devices should be fitted.
precautions shall be taken. In certain cases a warning
Where surge suppression devices are installed in
label such as ‘Isolate elsewhere before opening' may
hazardous areas, they should be suitably explosion-
be sufficient.
protected.
7.2.7.2 Dangers from exposed and extraneous
7.2.4.13 Aluminium sheathed cables, unless sheathed
conductive parts
with a protective covering, should not be installed in
contact with walls or floor. Consideration should be It is impracticable to cover all possible systems in this
given to the avoidance of frictional contact with such case but the basic principles on which safety depends
cables. are the limitation of earth currents (magnitude and
potentials on equalizing conductors).
7.2.5 Plugs and Sockets
NOTE — The term extraneous conductive parts is defined as a
7.2.5.1 Plugs and sockets for installation in Zone 2 conductive part likely to propagate a potential and not forming
areas shall be flameproof type. Those shall be of part of the electrical installation.
interlocked switch type. Guidance on permissible power systems is given below:
7.2.5.2 Plugs and sockets shall be of the type that a) If a power system with an earthed neutral is
provides for connections to the earthing conductor of used, the type TN-S system with separate
the flexible cables. The contacts of the grounding neutral (N) and protective conductor (PE)
conductor shall be mechanically and electrically of at throughout the system is preferred.
least the same quality as the main contacts and when
The neutral and the protective conductor shall
the plug is inserted it shall make connection before or
not be connected together, or combined in a
at the same time as the main contacts are made.
single conductor, in a hazardous area.
7.2.6 Connections to Portable and Transportable A power system of type TN-C (having
Apparatus combined neutral and protective functions in
7.2.6.1 Flexible cables of the types specified below a single conductor throughout the system) is
may be used for connection between a fixed source of not allowed in hazardous areas.
supply and the portable transportable apparatus through b) If a type IT power system (separate earths for
flameproof plugs and sockets: power system and exposed conductive parts)
is used in Zone 1, it shall be protected with a
a) Ordinary tough rubber sheathed flexible cables, residual current device even if it is a safety
b) Ordinary tough polychloroprene sheathed extra-low voltage circuit (below 50 V).
flexible cables, The type TT power system is not permitted
c) Heavy tough rubber sheathed flexible cables, in Zone 0.
and

PART 7 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS IN HAZARDOUS AREAS 363

SP 30 : 2011

c) For an IT power system (neutral isolated from 7.2.7.5 Electromagnetic radiation

earth or earthed through impedance), an
Account should be taken of the effects due to strong
insulation monitoring device should be used
electromagnetic radiation.
to indicate the first earth fault. However
equipment in Zone 0 shall be disconnected 7.3 Selection of Equipment
instantaneously in case of the first earth fault,
either by the monitoring device or by a 7.3.1 General
residual current operated device. 7.3.1.1 The selection of electrical apparatus for
d) For all power systems installed in Zone 0, explosive gas atmospheres is based on the general
irrespective of the voltages, due attention should principle that the likelihood of the simultaneous
be paid to the limitation of earth fault currents presence of a hazardous atmosphere and a source of
in magnitude and duration. Instantaneous earth ignition is reduced to an acceptably low level.
fault protection shall be installed.
7.3.1.2 When the electrical apparatus does not have an
NOTE — It may also be necessary to provide internal release of flammable material, the
instantaneous earth fault protection devices for certain
applications in Zone 1.
classification of the hazardous area surrounding the
electrical equipment decides the selection of an
7.2.7.3 Potential equalization adequate type of protection.
To avoid dangerous sparking between metallic parts 7.3.1.3 When the electrical apparatus has an internal
of structures, potential equalization is, always required release of flammable material, the actual hazard is a
for installations in Zone 0 and Zone 1 areas and may combination of the external and internal hazards and
also be necessary for installations in Zone 2 areas. both must be taken into account when selecting an
Therefore, all exposed and extraneous conductive parts adequate type of protection.
shall be connected to the main or supplementary
equipotential bonding system. 7.3.1.4 The selected apparatus will normally have a
recognized type of protection and should also be
The bonding system may include normal protective selected for the appropriate temperature class and the
conductors, conduits, metal cable sheaths, steel wire appropriate apparatus group applicable. Where gases
armouring and metallic parts of structures but shall not of different degrees of hazard exist in the same area,
include neutral conductors. The conductance between the type of protection appropriate for the highest degree
metallic parts of structures shall correspond to a cross of hazards shall be applicable.
section of at least 10 mm2 of copper.
7.3.1.5 The selected electrical apparatus shall be
Enclosures need not be separately connected to the adequately protected against corrosive and solvent
equipotential bonding system if they are secured to and agencies, and against water ingress and thermal and
are in metallic contact with structural parts or piping mechanical stresses as determined by the
which are connected to the equipotential bonding environmental conditions. These construction
system. For additional information, see relevant Indian requirements should ensure that the protection against
Standards. explosion is not reduced when the apparatus is used in
However, there are certain pieces of equipment, for the specified conditions of service.
example some intrinsically safe apparatus, which are 7.3.1.6 Particular consideration shall be given to the
not intended to be connected to the equipotential location of apparatus which incorporates aluminium
bonding system. or light alloys in the construction of its enclosure. These
NOTE — Potential equalization between vehicles and fixed have been outlined in IS 5571 reference to which
installations may require special means, for example, when should be made (see also IS/IEC 60079-1).
insulated flanges in connecting pipelines are used.
7.3.1.7 As electrical apparatus for flammable gas
7.2.7.4 Cathodically protected metallic parts atmospheres requires special safety maintenance after
Cathodically protected metallic parts located in they are installed, the selection of electrical apparatus
hazardous areas are live extraneous conductive parts shall be made with full considerations to the facility
which shall be considered potentially dangerous and frequency of inspection and maintenance,
(especially if equipped with the impressed current preparation for spares and repairing materials and the
method) despite their low negative potential. No extent of allowable interruption of power supply during
cathodic protection shall be provided for metallic parts maintenance work.
in Zone 0 unless they are specially designed for this 7.3.1.8 It is advisable that the selection of electrical
application. apparatus be made after full considerations have been

364 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

given not only to the initial cost of installation but also c) Chemical compatibility.
to the expected life and expenses for operation and
7.3.2.2 Selection of type of protection
maintenance of the apparatus.
The selection of type of protection of the equipment
7.3.1.9 Unless otherwise specified for particular
for different zone of hazardous areas shall be made in
equipment, the guidance provided in Table 2 shall be
accordance with Tables 2, 3 and 4 as applicable.
followed in the selection of equipment for hazardous
areas. However, any equipment which in the opinion 7.3.2.3 Temperature classes
of the authorised inspector affords a degree of safety
Besides the danger of explosion caused by an electric
not less than that afforded by the equipment specified
spark or arc, there is also a danger of ignition at a hot
may be accepted as an alternative.
surface exposed to a flammable atmosphere. The
7.3.1.10 The necessity for equipment with flameproof maximum surface temperature of any unprotected
enclosures or other enclosures may sometimes be surface of electrical equipment should not exceed the
eliminated by the adoption of special design, such as ignition temperature of the gas or vapour.
pressurised equipment.
Flammable gases and vapours fall into fairly well-
7.3.2 Selection Procedure defined groups when classified with reference to their
ignition temperature. To simplify the manufacture of
7.3.2.1 In order that electrical apparatus may be
apparatus, therefore, the permitted maximum surface
selected for use in hazardous area, the following
temperatures have been classified in IS/IEC 60079-0
information is necessary:
as follows:
a) The classification of the area, that is, the zone
(see 7.2.1.1). Temperature Ignition Allowable
b) The ignition temperature of the gas or vapour Class Temperature Temperature
involved, or the lowest values of ignition Required by of Gas or Classes of
temperature if more than one combustible the Area Vapour Equipment
material is present. Classification (°C)
This will permit determination of the T1 >450 T1-T6
temperature classification required for the
apparatus, or the upper-limit temperature T2 >300 T2-T6
for any unprotected surface according to T3 >200 T3-T6
IS/IEC 60079-0 (see 7.3.2.3). T4 >135 T4-T6
c) The characteristics of the gas or vapour T5 >100 T5-T6
involved in relation to (see 7.3.2.3). T6 >85 T6
1) Ignition current or minimum ignition
energy in the case of installations of
intrinsically safe apparatus, or If the marking of the electrical equipment does not
include an ambient temperature range, the equipment
2) Safe gap data in the case of installations
shall be used only within the temperature range
for flameproof enclosures.
–20 °C to +40 °C. If the marking of the electrical
Apparatus certified to the constructional and design equipment includes an ambient temperature range, the
requirements for a particular group may also be used equipment shall only be used within this range.
with compounds of lesser risk and which would be
allocated therefore to a lesser group, subject again to If there is an influence from an ambient temperature
consideration of temperature classification and outside the temperature range, the process temperature
chemical compatibility. or exposure to sun light, the effect on the equipment
shall be verified as suitable for the application and
Similarly electrical apparatus which is designed so that documented.
it may be used with certain flammable materials in a
particular zone may be used with flammable materials Ambient temperatures do not consider solar radiation.
in zone of lesser risk without restriction provided it is Where applicable, additional factors should be applied.
determined that the flammable materials likely to be
Junction boxes and switches in intrinsically safe
present are compatible with the following
circuits, however, can be assumed to have a temperature
characteristics of the apparatus:
classification of T6 because, by their nature, they do
a) Apparatus grouping (where this is applicable). not contain heat dissipating components. Simple
b) Temperature classification. apparatus used within an intrinsically safe circuit shall

PART 7 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS IN HAZARDOUS AREAS 365

SP 30 : 2011

Table 2 Types of Protection for Different Hazardous Areas

(Clauses 7.3.1.9 and 7.3.2.2)
Sl No. Area Type of Protection Description
Classification
(1) (2) (3) (4)
i) Zone 0 Electrical equipment and
circuits can be used in Zone 0,
if they are constructed in
accordance with following:
a) Intrinsic safety Intrinsic Safety (Ex-i)
(category “i a”) according A circuit or part of a circuit is intrinsically safe when any spark or thermal
to IS 5780 effect produced normally (that is, by breaking or closing the circuit) or
accidentally (for example by short-circuit or earth fault) is incapable, under
prescribed test conditions, of causing ignition of a prescribed gas or vapour.
b) EPL “Ga” EPL “Ga”
Equipment for explosive gas atmospheres, having a “very high” level of
protection, which is not a source of ignition in normal operation, expected
malfunction or when subject to rare malfunction. Such equipment will have a
form of protection which will remain effective even in the presence of two
potential faults (for example, intrinsic safety, level of protection ia), or will
have two independent means of protection (for example, Ex-e and Ex-d acting
independently of each other).

ii) Zone 1 Electrical equipment can

be used in Zone 1 if it is
constructed in accordance
with the requirements for
Zone 0 or one or more of
the following types of
protection:
a) EPL “Gb” EPL “Gb”
Equipment for explosive gas atmospheres, having a “high” level of protection,
which is not a source of ignition in normal operation or when subject to faults
that may be expected, though not necessarily on a regular basis
b) Flameproof enclosures Flameproof enclosures (Ex-d)
“d” according to An enclosure for electrical apparatus that will withstand when the covers or
IS/IEC 60079-1 other access doors are properly secured, an internal explosion of the flammable
gas or vapour which may enter it or which may originate inside the enclosure,
without suffering damage and without communicating the internal flammation
to the external flammable gas or vapour for which it is designed, through any
joints or structural openings in the enclosure.
c) Pressurized enclosures Pressurized Enclosure (Ex-p)
“p” according to IS 7389 An enclosure for electrical apparatus in which the entry of flammable gas or
vapour is prevented by maintaining the air (or other non-flammable gas)
within the enclosure at a pressure above that of the external atmosphere.
This type of protection has the following categories (for choice see Table 3):
1) Pressurization with air and alarm in case of loss of air pressure
[Ex-p (1)].
2) Pressurization with air and automatic switching off from electric supply
in case of loss of air pressure [Ex-p (2)].
3) Pressurization with inert gas and alarm in case of loss of inert gas
pressure [Ex-p (3)].
4) Pressurization with inert gas and automatic switching off from electric
supply in case of less of inert gas pressure [Ex-p (4)].
5) Dilution with air and alarm in case of loss of air supply [Ex-p (5)].
6) Dilution with air and automatic switching off from electric supply in case
of loss of air supply [Ex-p (6)].
d) Powder filling “q” Sand-filled apparatus (Ex-q)
according to IS 7724 Electrical apparatus which has all its live parts entirely embedded in a mass of
powdery material, in such a way that under the conditions of use for which the
apparatus has been designed no arc occurs within the outer explosive
atmosphere either by the transmission of flame or by the overheating of the
walls of the enclosure.
e) Oil immersion “o” Oil Immersed Apparatus (Ex-o)
according to IS 7693 Electrical apparatus in which all parts in which an arc may occur in normal
service are immersed in oil to a sufficient depth to prevent ignition of an
explosive gas mixture that may be present above the surface of the oil, and all
live parts in which arcs do not occur in normal service are either immersed in
oil or protected by some other recognised techniques (see Notes 3 and 5).

366 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

Table 2 — (Concluded)
Sl No. Area Type of Protection Description
Classification
(1) (2) (3) (4)

f) Intrinsic safety “ib” Intrinsically Safe Apparatus (Ex-i b )

according to IS 5780 Electrical apparatus in which all the circuits are intrinsically safe.
g) Encapsulation “m” Encapsulation “m” (Ex-m)
according to IS/IEC Type of protection whereby parts that are capable of igniting an explosive
60079-18 atmosphere by either sparking or heating are enclosed in a compound in such a
way that the explosive atmosphere cannot be ignited under operating or
installation conditions.
h) Electrical Heat Tracers
and equipment which
are certified for use in
Zone 1 areas
iii) Zone 2 a) Electrical equipment can EPL “Gc”
be used in Zone 2 if it is Equipment for explosive gas atmospheres, having a “enhanced” level of
constructed in protection, which is not a source of ignition in normal operation and which
accordance with the may have some additional protection to ensure that it remains inactive as an
requirements for Zone 0/ ignition source in the case of regular expected occurrences (for example failure
Zone 1 or one or more of a lamp).
of the following types of
protection:
EPL “Gc”
b) Non-sparking “n” Non-sparking Apparatus (Ex-n)
according to IS/IEC Apparatus which in normal operation is not capable of igniting a surrounding
60079-15 (see Note 2) explosive atmosphere, and a fault capable of causing ignition is not likely to occur.
c) Intrinsic safety “i c ” Intrinsically Safe Apparatus (Ex-i c )
according to IS/IEC Electrical apparatus in which all the circuits are intrinsically safe.
60079-11
d) Increased safety “e” Increased Safety (Ex-e)
according to IS/IEC A method of protection in which measures additional to those adopted in ordinary
60079-7 (see Note 2) industrial practice are applied, so as to give increased security against the possibility
of excessive temperatures and the occurrence of arcs or sparks in electrical
apparatus which does not produce arcs or sparks in normal service.
e) Electrical Heat Tracers
and equipment, which are
certified for use in Zone 2
NOTES
1 Special protection category is reserved for those types of protection that cannot be classified as belonging wholly to anyone of the
above types. It may be that a combination of several types of protection is incorporated within one piece of apparatus.
2 For outdoor installation, the apparatus with type of protection ‘e’ and ‘n’ should be used with enclosures providing at least the
following degree of protection:
a) IP 55 where there are uninsulated conducting parts internally, and
b) IP 44 for insulated parts.
3 Oil-immersed apparatus may be used only in case its security will not be impaired by tilting or vibration of the apparatus.
4 For apparatus with type of protection ‘p’, ‘c’, ‘n’ and where applicable, ‘q’ only area classification and ignition temperature are
required. However, where apparatus is protected by Ex-‘i’ or Ex-‘d’ in addition to one of these types of protection, it is necessary to
determine the appropriate apparatus grouping according to IS/IEC 60079-11 and IS/IEC 60079-1 respectively.
5 Type “o” equipment shall not be used in Zone 1 area in Oil mines.
6 Even though, in general, use of increased safety equipment in Zone 1 area is not permitted, certain equipment having a combination of Ex-i,
Ex-e and Ex-d protection may be used in Zone 1 areas, provided the Ex-e protection is limited to the termination of cables / wires only.
7 Various Indian standards for electrical equipment for hazardous areas have been aligned with IEC Standards to facilitate
manufacturers and testing bodies. However selection and installation of these equipment in hazardous areas shall follow IS 5571.
8 Requirements of diesel engines for hazardous areas are covered in Annex D.

Table 3 Minimum Actions on Failure of Protective Gas for Type of Protection ‘p’
(Clause 7.3.2.1)

Sl. No Area Classification Enclosure Does not Contain Ignition- Enclosure Contains Ignition-Capable
Capable Apparatus Apparatus
(1) (2) (3) (4)
ii) Zone 1 Alarm Alarm and switch off
ii) Zone 2 No action required Alarm

PART 7 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS IN HAZARDOUS AREAS 367

SP 30 : 2011

Table 4 Adequate Types of Protection for Electrical Apparatus with an Internal Source of Release
(Clause 7.3.2.1)

Sl No. Internal Release Area Type of Protection

Classification
Normal Abnormal d e ia ib n P(1) P(2) P(3) P(4) P(5) P(6)
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12) (13) (14) (15)
Restricted NH, Zone 2 2 ü ü ü ü 2 2 ü ü ü ü
Zone 1 2 — ü ü — 2 2 2 ü 2 ü
i) None
Unrestricted NH, Zone 2 2 ü ü ü ü 2 2 ü ü 2 2
Zone 1 2 — ü ü — 2 2 2 ü 2 2
Restricted NH, Zone 2 1 — ü — — — — ü ü ü ü
Zone 1 1 — ü — — — — 2 ü 2 ü
ii) Restricted
Unrestricted NH, Zone 2 1 — ü — — — — ü ü 2 2
Zone 1 1 — ü — — — — 2 ü 2 2
iii) Unrestricted Not relevant NH, Zone 2 1 — ü — — — — ü ü — —
Zone 1 1 — ü — — — — 2 ü — —
iv) Not relevant Not relevant Zone 0 — — ü — — — — — — — —

NOTE
NH : Non-hazardous area.
ü : Adequate.
1 : Adequate, if the internal components of circuits have type of protection adequate for Zone-1.
2 : Adequate, if the internal components of circuits are not ignition-capable during normal operation.
— : Not adequate

be temperature classified in accordance with IS 5571. Appara- Represent- Maximum Minimum

Cable glands in normal service do not create a heat tus ative Gas Experimental Ignition Current
Sub- Safe Gap Ratio
source and therefore do not have a temperature class
group
or ambient operating temperature range marked on
(1) (2) (3) (4)
them. In general cable glands will be marked with
service temperature. If no marking exists it is assumed IIA Propane ≥0.9 mm Above 0.8
that the service temperature is –20°C to +80°C. IIB Ethylene Greater than Between
NOTE — Consideration of the capability of the equipment 0.5 mm less 0.45 and 0.8
and cables to operate in the required temperature range should than 0.9 mm
include normal operating limits as well as temperature rise.
IIC Hydrogen ≤ 0.5 mm Below 0.45
7.3.2.4 Apparatus groups
For the purpose of flameproof enclosures and intrinsic Various gases and vapours, for which a particular group
safety, gases and vapours have been classified of enclosure is suitable are listed in IS 9570.
according to the groups or sub-groups of apparatus
NOTE — For flameproof enclosures, gases and vapours are
required for use in the particular gas or vapour classified according to their maximum experimental safe gap
atmosphere. The groups of the apparatus are: (MESG). For intrinsic safety, gases and vapours are classified
according to the ratio of their minimum igniting currents (MIC)
a) Group I — for mining applications, with that of laboratory methane (see also IS 9735).
susceptible to fire damp
b) Group II — applications in industries with 7.3.3 Individual Features of Electrical Equipment for
an explosive gas atmosphere, Hazardous Areas
other than mines susceptible to The essential features of individual equipment for
firedamp installation in hazardous areas are indicated in Table 5.
c) Group II — apparatus is sub-divided
according to the requirements 7.4 Miscellaneous Requirements
appropriate to the nature of the 7.4.1 Exceptional Circumstances
flammable atmosphere for which
the apparatus is intended. These 7.4.1.1 In exceptional circumstances (for example,
sub-groups with a representative research, development or repair-work, and in
gas and the design parameters are emergency situations) apparatus may be used which is
as follows: not specially designed for use in Zone 1 or Zone 2

368 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

hazardous areas, provided that adequate measures have into the room, by filling tightly the space
been taken to ensure an adequate level of safety. around conduits or pipes with cement or
similar incombustible materials.
7.4.1.2 Apparatus which is intended to be used for short
periods only may be of normal industrial design but NOTE — Elevated ambient temperatures can be
expected in pressurized rooms. Accordingly, it is
only when operating in Zone 2, it is either regularly advisable that due account be taken while selecting
supervized by trained personnel or gas-free conditions electrical equipment for installation in pressurized
are regularly monitored. rooms.

7.4.2 Static Electricity (See IS 7689) 7.4.3.2 Prior to commissioning apparatus protected by
pressurization or continuous dilution, it shall be verified
7.4.3 Pressurized Rooms
by competent personnel that the installation of the
7.4.3.1 Where unavoidable, electrical switchgear and equipment fulfils the requirements of relevant Indian
equipment may be located in a pressurized room within Standards, either by inspection of the reference
a hazardous area meeting the following requirements: documents, or by tests if necessary.
a) The pressurized room shall be situated in such The following shall be considered:
area within a hazardous location, which is least
a) the protective gas supply is suitable, that is,
hazardous and from which the operators
impurities in the protective gas will not reduce
working in the room can easily evacuate in
the level of safety such as by attacking the
the event of an accident.
enclosure or ducting material or introducing
b) Main structural parts such as wells, pillars, flammable material into the enclosure.
ceiling, floor, doors and the like shall be on
b) The apparatus design and safety provisions
non-combustible materials and shall be
are such that purging can be completed
sufficiently resistant to explosion blasts or
satisfactorily.
other mechanical effects.
c) The minimum pressure required is maintained
c) Structural materials and construction of the
with the minimum protective gas supply stated
room shall be such as not to allow gases or
by the manufacturer.
vapours to penetrate easily through them.
d) The maximum temperature limits stated are
d) More than one doorway shall be provided, and
not exceeded.
at least one of them shall face the direction of
no source of hazard as for as practicable. NOTE — Satisfactory completion of purging would
include passing a volume of protective gas of at least
e) The design of the doorway facing the five times the free internal volume of the protected
hazardous area shall be such that the doors enclosure and associated ducting, prior to energizing
can only be opened outwards from the interior the electrical apparatus.
and they shall be double doors. With regard to installation practices, the following shall
f) In case it is necessary to provide a window be considered:
facing the hazardous area, the window shall
have enough strength to resist an explosion a) For wiring systems:
blast, blowout of gases or other possible 1) When cable wiring systems are used, the
mechanical effects. cable entries shall prevent excess leakage
g) The source of air shall be free of hazardous of the protective gas and ensure that
concentrations of flammable gases and sparks or incandescent particles do not
vapours contaminants and any other foreign escape from the enclosure.
matter. It shall be determined from the nature 2) When conduit wiring systems are used,
of the process and the physical layout. it is recommended that all conduit
h) The volume and pressure of supply air shall entrances to an enclosure be sealed to
be such that the air pressure in the vicinity of prevent excess leakage of protective gas
doorways is maintained higher than the unless the conduit system is being used
atmospheric pressure outside the room. as a duct for supplying the protective gas.
j) An alarm or other device shall be provided b) The point at which the protective gas enters
so that any disorder in the pressurization the supply duct or ducts should be situated in
system may be assuredly noticed. a non-hazardous area.
k) Openings to lead wirings or pipings from the c) Ducting should, as far as possible, be located
hazardous locations into the room shall be so in a non-hazardous area. If ducting passes
constructed as not to admit explosive gases through a hazardous area, it shall be checked

PART 7 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS IN HAZARDOUS AREAS 369

SP 30 : 2011

Table 5 Features of Electrical Equipment

(Clause 7.3.3)

Sl. No. Equipment Zone 0 Zone 1 Zone 2

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
i) Motors No motor shall be a) Motor with type of a) Motor suitable for Zone-1 area.
used in this area protection ‘d’
b) Motors with type of protection ‘n’ and ‘e’. However,
b) Motors with type of all normally sparking parts such as slip-rings and brushes
protection ‘p’ shall be provided with type of protection ‘d’ or ‘p’.
Motors provided with a combination of the above forms
of protection. For example, slip-ring motors in which the
main enclosures and windings are of type ‘e’ but the
normally sparking parts of type ‘d’ protection
ii) Transformers No transformer or a) All power and distribution Transformers and capacitors suitable for Zone 1 area.
and capacitors capacitor shall be transformers and capacitors Transformers and capacitors that are dry type or
used in this area with type ‘d’ protection. containing liquids need not have any special enclosure
b) Type ‘i’ protection for provided that the following requirements are satisfied:
control and instrumentation, a) Cable boxes shall be suitable for specified level of
with transformers and current and fault clearing time.
capacitors forming part of b) Only off-circuit manually operated tap changers shall
flameproof or intrinsically be allowed with provision for locking the operating
safe equipment. handle in position.
c) Auxiliary devices shall be intrinsically safe or if they
have sparking contacts, these shall be:
1) Type ‘d’
2) Under adequate head of oil.
3) of mercury in glass type with adequate mechanical
protection.
4) of enclosed break type or, alternatively, auxiliary devices
may be deleted or installed in a safe zone.
d) Any other sparking accessories or switches shall
comply with the requirements for Zone 1 area. Where oil
filled transformers are used, necessary precautions against
spread of fire (see IS 1646) shall be complied with.
iii) Lighting fittings No lighting fitting All switches, circuit a) Lighting fittings for Zone 1.
(see Notes 1 and shall be used breakers, fuses and other b) Lighting fittings with type of protection ‘e’ or ‘n’.
2) equipment shall be housed in
an enclosure with type ‘d’
protection.
iv) Switchgear and No switchgear and All switches circuit breakers, All equipment where arcing may occur under normal
control gear control gear shall fuses and other equipment, conditions of operating shall be of type ‘d’, unless the
be used. When not the enclosure together with current interrupting contacts are oil-immersed, or the
practicable use the enclosed apparatus shall switches are enclosed break type with flameproof
type ‘i’ protection be type ‘d’ protection. breaking chamber or having mercury in glass switches or
enclosed break micro switches.
v) Generators No generator shall Generators with Type ‘d’ Equipment suitable for Zone 1 areas. Generators with
be used and ‘p’ protection type ‘n’ protection or ‘e’ and having brushless excitation
system and sparking parts, if provided shall comply with
Zone 1 requirements.
vi) Diesel engines Unacceptable The use of permanently a) The use of permanently installed diesel engines to be
installed diesel engines to be avoided.
avoided.
Where necessary, they shall b) Equipment suitable in Zone 1 areas.
satisfy the requirements as
given in Annex D.
vii) Storage batteries Shall not be used Storage batteries shall not be Storage batteries shall be of type ‘e’ protection (see also
installed in Zone 1 areas, except Annex E).
those in portable torches where
the enclosures housing the bulb,
switch and battery shall be
flameproof type.

NOTES
1 Low-pressure sodium lamps shall not be used in a hazardous area owing to the risk of ignition from the free sodium from a broken lamp.
2 If luminaires with fluorescent lamps are used in a hazardous area, then the area should be confirmed to be free from group IIC
gas/vapour before lamps are transported through the area or changed, unless suitable precautions are taken to prevent tubes being broken.

370 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

for leaks prior to start-up of the electrical the earthing terminal of the safety barrier should be as
apparatus to ensure that the requirements of short as possible. The cross-section of the connecting
7.4.3.2 (a) are met. load shall take account of the short circuit current to
d) Exhaust ducting shall vent to a non-hazardous be expected, and shall have a minimum value of 1.5 m2
area or otherwise be designed to prevent the copper.
emission of sparks or hot particles such as by Consideration should be given to the need for earthing
the use of spark arrestors or baffles. Care of the supply system connected to the barrier input
should be taken to ensure that the exhaust does terminals.
not result in a secondary hazardous source in
an otherwise non-hazardous area. 7.4.4.3 In installations with intrinsically safe circuits,
for example, in measuring and control cabinets, the
7.4.4 Intrinsically Safe Installations
terminals shall be reliably separated from the non-
A fundamentally different installation philosophy has intrinsically safe circuits (for example, by a separating
to be recognized in the installation of intrinsically safe panel, or a gap of at least 50 mm). The terminals of the
circuits. In comparison with all other types of intrinsically safe circuits shall be marked as such. All
installations, where care is taken to confine electrical terminals shall satisfy the requirements of relevant
energy to the installed system as designed so that a Indian Standards.
hazardous environment cannot be ignited, the integrity
of an intrinsically safe circuit has to be electrically Where terminals are arranged to provide separation of
protected from the environment in order that the safe circuits by spacing alone, care shall be taken in the
energy limitation in the circuit is not exceeded, even layout of terminals and the wiring method used, to
when breaking, shorting or earthing of the circuit prevent contact between circuits should a wire become
occurs. disconnected.

As a consequence of this principle the aim of the 7.4.4.4 Enclosures and wiring of intrinsically safe
installation rules for intrinsically safe circuits is to circuits should meet the requirements which would be
maintain separation from other circuits. applied to similar types of equipment which are
intended to be installed in non-hazardous areas
7.4.4.1 Intrinsically safe circuits may be installed otherwise having the same environmental conditions.
either; If an enclosure contains both intrinsically safe circuits
a) isolated from earth, or and non-intrinsically safe circuits, the intrinsically safe
b) connected at one point to the potential circuits shall be clearly identified.
equalization conductor if this exists in the In installation containing both intrinsically safe
whole area of the installation of the apparatus and apparatus having another type of
intrinsically safe circuits, or protection, the intrinsically safe circuits shall be clearly
c) connected to earth at one point only, if marked.
earthing is required for functional or
protective purposes. 7.4.4.5 Marking may be achieved by labelling or colour
coding of enclosure, terminals and cables. Where a
The installation method shall be chosen with regard to colour is used for this purpose it shall be light blue.
the functional requirements of the circuits according
to the manufacturers’ instructions. 7.4.4.6 Where intrinsically safe circuits may be exposed
to disturbing magnetic or electric fields, suitable
If the circuit is isolated from earth, particular attention attention shall be given to transposition or shielding to
should be given to any possible danger due to static ensure that these fields do not adversely affect the
charges. intrinsic safety of the circuit.
More than one earth connection is permitted on a
7.4.4.7 Unless specifically permitted, conductors of
network provided that the network is galvanically
intrinsically safe circuits and conductors of non-
separated into circuits each of which has only one earth
intrinsically safe circuits shall not be run together in
point.
cables, cords, conduits, or bundles. In cable ducts and
7.4.4.2 Where a safety barrier is used, the maximum trays, intrinsically safe cables shall be separated from
fault voltage in apparatus connected to the barrier input non-intrinsically safe cables by a mechanical barrier.
terminals shall not exceed the fault voltage rating of Such a barrier is not required if all cables are provided
the barrier, for example, 250 V. Where a safety barrier with additional protective sheathing or sleeves which
requires a connection to earth, the connecting load to provide equivalent separation, or if the cables are

PART 7 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS IN HAZARDOUS AREAS 371

SP 30 : 2011

securely fastened to ensure that physical separation is or marked. They will be subject, however, to the
maintained. requirements of relevant Indian Standard, if they are
connected to a device which contains a source of energy
7.4.4.8 A flexible cable may contain more than one
which could cause the circuit to exceed these parameters.
intrinsically safe circuit if the cable installation is such
as to minimize the risk of damage which could cause 8 TESTING OF INSTALLATION
interconnection between different circuits.
8.0 All equipment intended for use in hazardous areas
7.4.4.9 The installation of intrinsically safe circuits shall be approved by a recognized, testing and
shall be such that the extreme permitted values, such certifying authority (see 4.2).
as capacitance, inductance and inductance to resistance
ratio, are not exceeded. The permissible values shall 8.1 Installation tests should include insulation
be taken from the certificate, the nameplate of the resistance and earth continuity resistance and the
apparatus, or from the installation instructions. checking of fused ratings and other protection devices,
settings and operation.
7.4.4.10 Where intrinsically safe circuits are
interconnected to form a system, due account shall be 8.2 For periodical electrical testing, the following
taken by calculation or by measurement of the resultant precautions shall be followed:
combination of electrical parameters, such as a) Insulation tests should, in general, be carried
inductance, and capacitance, which may affect the out with certified intrinsically safe insulation
intrinsic safety of the system as a whole. tester for use in hazardous areas.
NOTE — In addition to electrical sparking due account should b) Earth continuity tests, in general, be carried
be taken of thermal effects particularly where non-certified out with certified intrinsically safe earth tester
apparatus is used.
embodying a hand-driven generator suitable
7.4.4.11 The following equipment is considered to be for use in hazardous areas.
intrinsically safe without certification: c) The rating of fuses and the settings of
Devices whose electrical parameters, according to the protective devices, where practicable, and the
manufacturer’s specification, do not exceed any of the operation of other protective devices should
values 1.2 V, 0.1 A, 20 J or 25 mW need not be certified be checked.

372 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

ANNEX A
(Clause 1.4)
EXAMPLE OF INDUSTRIES AND THEIR WORKING PLACES WHICH REQUIRE
CONSIDERATIONS IN REGARD TO HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
A-1 Though it is difficult to determine hazardous 11) Vegetable oil industry, solvent extraction
locations merely according to kind of industries or kind plants — Working places where extraction
of working places, typical industries and working or recovery is conducted using volatile
places, which require considerations in regard to flammable liquids. Storage of volatile
hazardous locations are listed below: flammable liquids. Hydrogeneration plants.
1) Ammonium sulphate manufacturing 12) Fatty acids, hardened oil and glycerin
industry — Places where gaseous raw manufacturing industry — Working places
materials are produced, electrolysis of water where hydrogen is produced or added. Other
is conducted or synthesis of ammonia is working places where flammable gases or
carried out. volatile flammable liquids are used in large
quantity.
2) Soda manufacturing industry — Working
places of electrolysis, synthetic hydrochloric 13) Wood dry distillation industry — Working
acid manufacturing and liquid chlorine places where dry distillation or rectification
handling. is conducted. Places where volatile flammable
liquids are filled or stored.
3) Electric furnace industry — Working places
where calcium carbide is pulverised and stor- 14) Drugs and medicine manufacturing indus-
age of it. try — Working places where flammable gases
or volatile flammable liquids are handled in
4) Compressed or liquefied flammable gas
large quantity. Storage of the gases and liquids.
industry — Working places where flammable
gases are produced, compressed or filled. 15) Paints manufacturing industry — Working
Storage of containers filled with flammable places where volatile flammable paints or
gases. thinners are produced. Places where volatile
flammable raw materials or finished products
5) Coal tar products industry — Working places
are stored.
where coal tar is fractionally distilled or light
oil extracted from coal is refined or 16) Insecticides and germicides manufacturing
fractionally distilled. Places where benzene industry — Working places where flammable
or the other volatile flammable liquids are gases or volatile flammable liquids are
filled or stored. handled in large quantity.
6) Dyestuffs and their intermediates 17) Perfumes and cosmetics manufacturing
manufacturing industry — Working places industry — Working places where volatile
where flammable gases or volatile flammable flammable liquids are added, prepared,
liquids are handled in large quantity. distilled or extracted. Storage of these liquids.
7) Fermentation industry — Working places 18) Photographic sensitive materials manufactur-
where volatile flammable liquids are distilled ing industry — Working places where volatile
or filled. Storage of volatile flammable flammable liquids are added, prepared,
liquids. applied, recovered or distilled. Storage of
these liquids.
8) Acetylene, ethylene or methanol derivative
manufacturing industries — Working places 19) Oil refining and petrochemical industry —
where gaseous raw materials or volatile Working places where various refining pro-
flammable liquids are produced, refined cesses or chemical reactions are conducted.
reacted, distilled, filled, or stored. Places where volatile flammable liquids are
transported, filled or stored.
9) Synthetic resin and plastic manufacturing
industry — Working places where flammable 20) Gum products industry — Working places
gases or volatile flammable liquids are hand- where gum arabic is produced or applied.
led in large quantity. Storage of volatile flammable liquids.
10) Synthetic fibres manufacturing industry — 21) Brewing industry — Places where alcohol is
Working places where flammable gases or distilled, added or stored.
volatile flammable liquids are added, reacted, 22) Processed paper or coated cloth
produced, recovered or stored. manufacturing industry — Working places

PART 7 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS IN HAZARDOUS AREAS 373

SP 30 : 2011

where volatile flammable liquids are added, deposits or residues from such paints, lacquers
applied or recovered. finishers may occur.
23) Dry-cleaning industry — Working places 25) Printing industry — Working places where
where washing using flammable liquids and printing is done using inks with addition of
recovery of the said liquids are conducted. volatile flammable liquids.
Storage of the said liquids. 26) Aircraft hangars — Location used for storage
24) Finishing processes — Working places where or servicing of aircraft in which gasoline, jet
preparation of volatile flammable paints, fuels or other volatile flammable liquid or
locations where paints, lacquers or other flammable gases are used.
flammable finishers are regularly or 27) Petrol bunks and service stations — Location
frequently applied by spraying, dipping, where petrol or other volatile flammable
brushing or by other means, where flammable liquids, or liquefied flammable gases are
thinners are used, and where readily ignitable transferred to the fuel tanks of vehicles.

ANNEX B
(Clause 2)
INDIAN STANDARDS FOR ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT FOR
USE IN EXPLOSIVE ATMOSPHERES

IS No. Title IS No. Title

1554 (Part 1) : 1988 PVC insulated (heavy duty) electric 2002 enclosures “d” — Method of test
cables: Part 1 For working voltages for ascertainment of maximum
upto and including 1 100 V experimental safe gap
1646 : 1997 Code of practice for fire safety of IS/IEC 60079-0 : Explosive atmospheres: Part 0
buildings (general): Electrical 2004 General requirements
installations IS/IEC 60079-1 : Explosive atmospheres: Part 1
2309 : 1989 Code of practice for the protection 2007 Equipment protection by
of buildings and allied structures flameproof enclosures “d”
against lightning IS/IEC 60079-2 : Explosive atmoshperes: Part 2
5571 : 2009 Guide for selection and 2007 Equipment protection by
installation of electrical pressurized enclosures “p”
equipment for hazardous areas IS/IEC 60079-6 : Explosive atmospheres : Part 6
5572 : 2009 Classification of hazardous areas 2007 Equipment protection by oil-
(other than mines) having immersed “o”
flammable gases and vapours for IS/IEC 60079-7 : Explosive atmoshpheres :
electrical installation 2006 Part 7 Equipment protection by
7689 : 1989 Guide for the control of
increased safety ‘e’
undesirable static electricity
IS/IEC 60079-11: Explosive atmospheres : Part 11
7724 : 2004/ Electrical apparatus for explosive
2006 Equipment protection by intrinsic
IEC 60079-5 gas atmoshperes — Powder filling
safety “i”
“q”
IS/IEC 60079-15 : Explosive atmospheres: Part 15
7820 : 2004/ Electrical apparatus for explosive
2005 Construction, test and marking of
IEC 60079-4 gas atmospheres — Method of test
type of protection “n” electrical
for ignition temperature
9570 : 1980/ Classification of flammable gases apparatus
IEC 60079-12 : or vapours with air according to IS/IEC 60079-18 : Explosive atmospheres: Part 18
1978 their maximum experimental safe 2004 Construction, test and marking of
gaps and minimum igniting type of protection encapsulation
currents “m” electrical apparatus
9735 : 2003/ Electrical apparatus for explosive
IEC 60079-1-1 : gas atmospheres — Flameproof

374 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

ANNEX C
(Clause 7.1.2.2)
LIGHTNING PROTECTION OF STRUCTURES WITH EXPLOSIVE OR HIGHLY
FLAMMABLE CONTENTS

C-0 The presence of explosives or highly flammable one horizontal conductor only is used, the protective
materials in a structure may increase the risk to persons angle adopted should not exceed 30°. If two or more
or to the structure and the vicinity in the event of a parallel horizontal conductors are installed, the
lightning stroke. For this reason higher degree of protective angle to be applied may be as much as 45°
protection is essential for these structures. Protection within the space bonded by the conductors, but it
of a different degree may be secured in the case of should not exceed 30° outside that space. The height
both inherently self-protecting and other structures by of the horizontal conductor should be sufficient to avoid
installation of various types of protection equipment, all risk of flashover from the protective system to the
such as vertical and horizontal air terminations and structure to be protected. The supports of the network
other means. The recommendations given in C-1 should be adequately earthed.
to C-5.4 should be followed for structures in which
C-2.3 Where the expense of the method given in C-2.2
explosive or highly flammable solids, liquids, gases,
is unjustified, and where no risk is involved in
vapours or dusts are manufactured, stored or used or
discharging the lightning current over the surfaces of
in which highly flammable or explosive gases, vapours
the structure to be protected, a network of horizontal
or dusts may accumulate.
conductors with a spacing of 3 m to 7.5. m, according
C-1 PRECAUTIONS to the risk, should be fixed to the roof of the structure.

C-1.1 Following precautions should be taken for the C-2.4 If the vertical conductor is separate from the
protection of structures and their contents from structure to be protected, the minimum clearance
lightning. between it and the protected structure shall be not less
than 2 m; this clearance should be increased by 1 m for
a) Storage of flammable liquids and gases in all- every 10 m of structure height above 15 m to prevent
metal structures, essentially gas-tight, side flashes. Also the minimum clearance between the
b) Closure or protection of vapour or gas suspended horizontal air termination and the highest
openings against entrance of flames, projection on the protected structure shall be 2 m.
c) Maintenance of containers in good condition, C-2.5 A structure which is wholly below ground and
so far as potential hazards are concerned, which is not connected to any services above ground
d) Avoidance, so far as possible, of the may be protected by an air termination network in
accumulation of flammable air-vapour accordance with C-2.2 by virtue of the fact that soil
mixtures about such structures, has an impulse breakdown strength which can be taken
e) Avoidance of spark gaps between metallic into account when determining the risk of flashover
conductors at points where there may be an from the protective system to the structure to be
escape or accumulation of flammable vapours protected, including its services. Where the depth of
or gases. burying is adequate, the air termination network may
f) Location of structures not inherently self- be replaced by a network of earthing strips arranged
protecting in positions of lesser exposure with on the surface in accordance with expert advice. Where
regard to lightning, and this method is adopted, the recommendations for
bonding between metal in the structure, or metal
g) For structures not inherently self-protecting, the
conductors entering the structure given in C-4, should
establishment of zones of protection through use
be ignored.
of earthed rods, masts, or the equivalent.
C-3 TYPES OF LIGHTNING PROTECTION
C-2 GENERAL PRINCIPLES OF PROTECTION
SYSTEM
C-2.1 For the protection of structures with explosives
C-3.1 These should generally be of the integral
or highly flammable contents the general principles
mounted system with the horizontal air terminals
are given below. In case of doubt, expert advice should
running along the perimeter of the roof in all cases
be sought.
except for buildings containing highly sensitive
C-2.2 An air termination network should be suspended explosives and very small buildings. The following
at an adequate height above the area to be protected. If types of protection are recommended:

PART 7 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS IN HAZARDOUS AREAS 375

SP 30 : 2011

Type of Building Recommended Type of C-4.3 Electrical conductors entering a structure of this
Protection category should be metal-cased. This metal casing
(1) (2) should be electrically continuous within the structure.
It should be earthed at the point of entry outside the
Building with explosives Integrally mounted
structure on the supply side of the service and bonded
dust or flammable system with vertical air
directly to the lightning protective system.
vapour risk terminals 1.5 m high and
horizontal air terminals C-4.4 Where the electrical conductors are connected
spaced 3 to 7.5 m from to an overhead electric supply line, a length of buried
each other depending on cable with metal sheath or armouring should be inserted
the type of storage and between the overhead line and the point of entry to the
processes involved structure and a surge protective device, for example,
Explosives storage Integrally mounted of the type containing voltage-dependent resistors,
building and explosives system with vertical air should be provided at the termination of the overhead
workshops terminals 0.3 m high and line. The earth terminal of this protective device should
horizontal air terminals be bonded direct to the cable sheath or armouring. The
spaced 7.5 m. spark over voltage of the lightning protective device
Small explosives storage Vertical pole type. should not exceed one-half the breakdown withstand
buildings voltage of the electrical equipment in the structure. On
Buildings storing more Suspended horizontal air account of the low impulse strength of mineral-
dangerous types of terminations at least 2 m insulated metal-sheathed cable, such cables are not
explosives, for example, higher than the structure recommended for the above purpose.
nitroglycerine (NG) and and with a spacing of 3 m.
C-4.5 Metallic pipes, electrical cable sheaths, steel
for initiatory explosives
manufacturing ropes, rails or guides not in continuous electrical
contact with the earth, which enter a structure of this
kind, should be bonded to the lightning protective
C-3.2 Each separate structure protected in accordance system. They should be about 75 m away and the other
with C-2.3 should be equipped with twice the number a further 75 m away.
of down conductors recommended in Part 1/Section 15
of this Code. C-5 MISCELLANEOUS REQUIREMENTS
C-3.3 The earth terminations of each protective system C-5.1 For a buried structure or underground excavation
should be interconnected by a ring conductor. This ring to which access is obtained by an adit or shaft, the
conductor should preferably be buried to a depth of at recommendation in C-4.5 as regards extra earthing
least 0.5 m unless other considerations, such as the need should be followed for the adit or shaft at intervals not
for bonding other objects to it, testing, or risk of exceeding 75 m.
corrosion make it desirable to leave it exposed in which
C-5.2 The metal uprights, components and wires of
case it should be protected against mechanical damage.
all fences, and of retaining walls in close proximity to
The resistance value of the earth termination network
the structure, should be connected in such a way as to
should be maintained permanently at 10 Ω or less. If
provide continuous metallic connection between
this value proves to be unobtainable, the methods
themselves and the lightning protective system.
recommended in IS 2309 should be adopted, or the
Discontinuous metal wire fencing on non-conducting
ring conductor should be connected to the ring
supports or wire coated with insulating material should
conductors of one or more neighbouring structures until
not be employed.
the above value is obtained.
C-5.3 The vents of any tanks containing flammable
C-4 BONDING gas or liquid and exhaust stacks from process plants
C-4.1 All major members of the metallic structure, emitting flammable vapours or dusts should either be
including continuous metal reinforcement and services, constructed of non-conducting material or be filled with
should be bonded together and connected to the flame traps.
lightning protective system. Such connections should C-5.4 Structures of this category should not be
be made at least in two places and should, so far as is equipped with a tall component, such as spire or
possible, be equally spaced round the perimeter of the flagstaff or radio aerials on the structure or within 15 m
structure at intervals not exceeding 15 m. of the structure. This clearance applies also to the
C-4.2 Major metalwork inside the structure should be planting of new trees, but structures near existing trees
bonded to the lightning protective system. should be treated in accordance with IS 2309.

376 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

ANNEX D
[Table 5, Sl No. (vi)]
RECOMMENDATIONS FOR THE PROTECTION OF DIESEL ENGINE FOR PERMANENT
INSTALLATION IN HAZARDOUS AREAS

D-0 To ensure a maximum degree of safety in the event D-7 To prevent over speeding of the engine due to
of a permanently installed diesel engine being induction of flammable gases or vapours, means shall
necessary in Zone 1 or Zone 2 it is recommended that be provided to stop the engine. It can be either:
it should have the following protection.
a) a valve to close the air intake, or
D-1 The starter shall be either of flameproof electrical b) a system to inject carbon dioxide into the air
type (usually operated from the mains supply) or of intake.
the following non-electric types:
D-8 Alarms or automatic shutdown devices shall be
a) Pneumatic, provided, activated by excessive water temperature and
b) Hydraulic, low lube oil pressure
c) Spring recoil,
D-9 A system using an alarm or trip device to protect
d) Inertia, or the engine from excessive vibration should be
e) Hand start. considered.
Any other electrical equipment associated with the D-10 An engine having a crankcase volume of over
engine shall be flameproof, Electrical equipment shall 0.5 m³ shall be provided with relief devices. Relief
be effectively earthed and bonded. valves or breathers on engines shall be fitted with flame
D-2 Cooling fan blades shall be made from non- traps or discharge into the induction system
metallic materials, which do not accumulate downstream of the flame trap, if fitted, and upstream
electrostatic charge. of the shut-off valve, if fitted, as specified in D-7.
Dipsticks and/or filler caps should be screwed or
D-3 All belts shall be of antistatic fire resistant type. effectively secured by other means.
D-4 In order to contain discharge of sparks or flames D-11 Intake and exhaust system design shall meet the
from the exhaust system; a gas conditioner box and a following minimum requirements:
flame trap shall be installed. Alternatively, the exhaust
a) The length of the flame path through or across
should be designed to discharge to a location within a
any joint shall be not less than 13 mm;
safe area.
b) Suitable metal-clad or other acceptable jointing
D-5 To prevent flash back through induction system, material shall be interposed between all joint
wherever possible, air intakes for engines shall be faces to ensure that leakage does not occur;
located in a safe area. Alternatively, a flame trap should c) Where valve spindles pass through the walls
be installed. of any component of the induction system.
D-6 The surface temperature of the engine and exhaust The diametrical clearance shall not exceed
system shall not exceed 250°C, when tested under full 0.13 mm for an axial length of not less than
load conditions. In some situations cooling of the 25 mm unless end caps are fitted; and
exhaust manifold and piping may be necessary, using d) No screw, stud or bolt hole shall pass through
water-jacketing or finned coolers and/or high the wall of any component of the system.
temperature cut outs or alarms should be provided. D-12 Decompression system should not normally be
However, when either the free movement of air is provided. However, if they are essential, then the
restricted by thermal or acoustic shielding or the decompression parts should be provided with flame
ignition temperature of the surrounding flammable traps and ducted away to safe area.
atmosphere is below 200°C, exposed surface D-13 The fuel injection pump land governor, where
temperature of engine shall not exceed the minimum fitted, should be so designed that reverse running of
ignition temperature of the gases involved. the engine is not possible.

PART 7 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS IN HAZARDOUS AREAS 377

SP 30 : 2011

ANNEX E
[Table 5, Item (vii)]
RECOMMENDATIONS FOR STORAGE BATTERIES FOR USE IN ZONE 2 AREAS

E-0 Storage batteries for use in Zone 2 areas shall be voltage exceeds 24 V, the creepage distance shall be
of increased safety type. These shall meet the following correspondingly increased by 1 mm/2 V.
requirements.
Where voltage of batteries is not less than 50 V either
E-1 Celluloid and similar combustibles shall not be the battery case shall be sub-divided by partitions or
used as constructional materials. the batteries shall be grouped into containers so that in
no grouping does a voltage exceeding 50 V occur. In
E-2 Battery containers as well as fittings and insulating these cases, the partitions or the containers shall have
parts outside the enclosed cells shall not consist of heights at least half that of the battery case.
porous materials, for example, wood or other
flammable materials and shall be resistant to flame and E-6 The battery case shall be so constructed as to ensure
the action of electrolytes. sufficient ventilation in order to prevent accumulation
of gases given off from the battery, and the free space
E-3 Openings of cells necessary for the escape of the within the case shall be as small as possible.
gases given off shall be so constructed as to prevent
splashing of the electrolyte. E-7 The metallic cover of the battery case shall be lined
with materials resistant to electrolyte.
E-4 The exterior of the cells shall be so constructed as
to resist impact, and the cell cases shall be firmly fixed. E-8 The cover of the battery case shall have special
fastenings.
E-5 The cells shall be so built into the containers that
working loose of connection of the cells with one E-9 Exposed live parts of battery contained in a case
another is impossible and normally a discharge voltage shall be protected with rubber or equivalent insulating
exceeding 24 V shall not appear between adjacent rows materials. However, the opening for checking voltage
of cells. may be provided.
NOTE — Charging of storage batteries shall be conducted in
The creepage distance between two poles of adjacent non-hazardous location, while the cover of the battery enclosure
cells shall not be less than 35 mm. Where the discharge is kept open.

378 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE
PART 8
 SP 30 : 2011

PART 8 SOLAR PHOTOVOLTAIC (PV) POWER

SUPPLY SYSTEMS
0 FOREWORD
Solar energy is a natural resource which is, for practical purposes, free, renewable and inexhaustible and can
supplement/augment the depleting fossil fuel resources. Greenhouse gases and pollutant emissions which result
from fossil fuel generation can be offset by solar photovoltaic power generation. It can be used in decentralized/
distributed mode. The energy converter (namely, solar photovoltaic cells which convert solar energy directly in
dc electric power) does not have moving parts and has a comparatively long lifetime. It is expected that such
advantages would lead to further growth of solar photovoltaic power supply systems.
This Part 8 of the Code is primarily intended to cover the requirements relating to electrical installations of power
supply system based on the solar photovoltaic energy.

PART 8 SOLAR PHOTOVOLTAIC (PV) POWER SUPPLY SYSTEMS 381

SP 30 : 2011

1 SCOPE control and other such components, to form a dc power

producing unit.
This Part 8 of the Code covers essential requirements
for electrical installations for power supply system 3.5 PV Array Junction Box — Enclosure where all
based on the solar photovoltaic energy including PV strings of any PV array are electrically connected
systems with ac modules. and where protection devices can be located if
necessary.
2 REFERENCES
3.6 PV Generator — Assembly of PV arrays.
This Part 8 of the code should be read in conjunction
with the following Indian Standards: 3.7 PV Generator Junction Box — Enclosure where
all PV arrays are electrically connected and where
IS No. Title protection devices can be located if necessary.
2309 : 1989 Code of practice for the protection 3.8 PV String Cable — Cable connecting PV modules
of buildings and allied structures to form a PV string.
against lightning
3034 : 1993 Fire safety of industrial buildings: 3.9 PV Array Cable — Output cable of a PV array.
Electrical generating and 3.10 PV dc. Main Cable — Cable connecting the PV
distribution stations — Code of generator junction box to the dc terminals of the PV
practice inverter.
3043 : 1987 Code of practice for earthing
8623 (Part 1) : 1993 Specification for low voltage 3.11 PV Inverter — Device which changes dc input
switchgear and controlgear into an ac output.
assemblies: Part 1 Requirements 3.12 PV Supply Cable — Cable connecting the ac
for type-tested and partially type terminals of the PV inverter to a distribution circuit of
tested assemblies the electrical installation.
8623 (Part 2) : 1993 Specification for low voltage
switchgear and controlgear 3.13 PV ac Module — Integrated module/inverter
assemblies: Part 2 Particular assembly where the electrical interface terminals are
requirements for busbar trunking ac only. No access is provided to the dc side.
systems (busways) 3.14 PV Installation — Erected equipment of a PV
8623 (Part 3) : 1993 Specification for low voltage power supply system.
switchgear and controlgear
3.15 Standard Test Conditions (STC) — Reference
assemblies: Part 3 Particular
testing values of cell temperature (35 °C), in-plane
requirements for equipment
irradiance (1 000 W/m 3), air mass solar reference
where unskilled persons have
spectrum (AM = 1.5) for a PV module or PV cell testing.
access for their use
IS 14153 : 1994 Guide for general description of 3.16 Open-Circuit Voltage under Standard Test
photovoltaic(PV) power generat- Conditions UOCSTC — Voltage under standard test
ing systems conditions across an unloaded (open) PV module, PV
string, PV array, PV generator or on the dc side of the
3 TERMINOLOGY PV inverter.
The following terminology related to solar photovoltaic 3.17 Short-circuit Current under Standard Test
energy systems will apply. Conditions ISCSTC — Short-circuit current of a PV
3.1 PV Cell — Basic PV device which can generate module, PV string, PV array or PV generator under
emf by the absorption of photons from source such as standard test conditions.
solar radiation. 3.18 dc Side — Part of a PV installation from a PV
3.2 PV Module — Smallest complete environmentally cell to the dc terminals of the PV inverter.
protected assembly of interconnected PV cells. 3.19 ac Side — Part of a PV installation from the ac
3.3 PV String — Circuit in which PV modules are terminals of the PV inverter to the point of connection
connected in series, in order for a PV array to generate of the PV supply cable to the electrical installation.
the required output voltage. 3.20 Simple Separation — Separation between
3.4 PV Array — Mechanically integrated assembly circuits or between a circuit and earth by means of
of PV modules, together with support structure, but basic insulation.
exclusive of foundation, tracking apparatus, thermal NOTE — The abbreviation ‘PV’ is used for ‘solar photovoltaic’.

382 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

4 CLASSIFICATION cables shall be selected and erected so as to minimize

the risk of earth faults and short-circuits.
The major PV power-generating configurations are as
follows: NOTE — This may be achieved for example by reinforcing the
protection of the wiring against external influences by the use
a) Stand alone system — an independent power- of single-core sheathed cables.
producing system that is not connected to 7.2.2 Wiring systems shall withstand the expected
utility. external influences such as wind, ice formation,
b) Utility connected system — a power temperature and solar radiation.
producing system interconnected with an
electric power utility. 8 EARTHING
NOTE — The term ‘utility’ is also referred to as the 8.1 The provision of 17 of IS 3043 shall apply (see
‘grid’. also Part 1/Section 14 of the Code). Earthing of one of
the live conductors of the dc side is permitted, if there
5 GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS OF
is at least simple separation between the ac side and
INSTALLATIONS
the dc side.
General guidelines on the assessment of NOTE — Any connections with earth on the dc side should be
characteristics of installations in buildings are given electrically connected so as to avoid corrosion
in Part 1/Sec 8 of the Code. An overview of PV
8.2 Earthing Arrangements, Protective Conductors
power-generating systems including functional
and Protective Bonding Conductors
description of major components and interfaces and
also possible configurations is given in IS 14153. Where protective equipotential bonding conductors are
PV modules shall comply with the requirements of installed, they shall be parallel to and in close contact as
the relevant equipment standard where such possible with dc cables and ac cables and accessories.
standards exist. PV modules of class II construction
or with equivalent insulation are recommended if 9 PROTECTION FOR SAFETY
UOC STC of the PV strings exceeds 120 V dc. The PV
9.1 Protection Against Electric Shock
array junction box, PV generator junction box and
switchgear assemblies shall be in compliance with PV equipment on the dc side shall be considered to be
IS 8623. energized, even when the system is disconnected from
NOTE — General information on solar photovoltaics is given the ac side. The selection and erection of equipment
at Annex A. shall facilitate safe maintenance and shall not adversely
affect provisions made by the manufacturer of the PV
6 OPERATIONAL CONDITIONS AND equipment to enable maintenance or service work to
EXTERNAL INFLUENCES be carried out safely.
6.1 Electrical equipment on the dc side shall be suitable
9.2 Protection Against Both Direct and Indirect
for direct voltage and direct current. PV modules may
Contact
be connected in series up to the maximum allowed
operating voltage of the PV modules and the PV 9.2.1 Protection by Extra-low Voltage: SELV and PELV
inverter, whichever is lower. Specifications for this
For SELV and PELV systems, UOC STC replaces Un and
equipment shall be obtained from the equipment
shall not exceed 120 V dc.
manufacturer
6.2 As specified by the manufacturer, the PV modules 9.3 Fault Protection
shall be installed in such a way that there is adequate 9.3.1 Protection by Automatic Disconnection of Supply
heat dissipation under conditions of maximum solar
radiation for the site. On the ac side, the PV supply cable shall be connected
to the supply side of the protective device for automatic
7 WIRING disconnection of circuits supplying current-using
7.1 All cabling and electrical wiring of the installation equipment.
shall be done in accordance with the practice Where an electrical installation includes a PV power
recommended in Part 1/Sec 9 of this Code. supply system without at least simple separation
between the ac side and the dc side, a Residual Current
7.2 Selection and Erection in Relation to External
Device (RCD) installed to provide fault protection by
Influences
automatic disconnection of supply shall be Type B
7.2.1 PV string cables, PV array cables and PV dc main according to Indian Standards.

PART 8 SOLAR PHOTOVOLTAIC (PV) POWER SUPPLY SYSTEMS 383

SP 30 : 2011

9.4 Protection Against Overload on the dc Sides 10 ISOLATION, SWITCHING AND CONTROL
9.4.1 Overload protection may be omitted to PV string 10.1 To allow maintenance of the PV inverter, means
and PV array cables when the continuous current- of isolating the PV inverter from the dc side and the ac
carrying capacity of the cable is equal to or greater side shall be provided.
than 1.25 times ISC STC at any location.
9.4.2 Overload protection may be omitted to the PV 10.2 Devices for isolation and Switching
main cable if the continuous current-carrying capacity 10.2.1 In the selection and erection of devices for
is equal to or greater than 1.25 times ISC STC of the PV isolation and switching to be installed between the PV
generator. installation and the public supply, the public supply
9.5 Protection Against Short-circuit Currents shall be considered the source and the PV installation
shall be considered the load.
9.5.1 The PV supply cable on the ac side shall be
protected by a short circuit or an overcurrent protective 10.2.2 A switch disconnector shall be provided on the
device installed at the connection to the ac mains. dc side of the PV inverter.

9.6 Protection Against Electromagnetic Interference 10.2.3 All junction boxes (PV generator and PV array
(EMI) in Buildings boxes) shall carry a warning label indicating that active
parts inside the boxes may still be live after isolation
9.6.1 To minimize voltages induced by lightning, the from the PV inverter.
area of all wiring loops shall be as small as possible.
11 FIRE-SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
9.7 Lightning Protection
9.7.1 The provisions of IS 2309 shall apply. The provisions of IS 3034 shall apply.

ANNEX A
(Clause 5)
GENERAL INFORMATION ON SOLAR PHOTOVOLTAICS
A-1 SUN AS AN ENERGY SOURCE A-1.3 Solar photovoltaic effect is the phenomenon that
occurs when photons, the ‘particles’ in a beam of solar
A-1.1 The sun is a spherical mass of hot gases, with a
radiation (light), knock electrons loose from the atoms
diameter of about 1.39 × 109 m and at an average
they strike. When this property of solar radiation (light)
distance of 1.5 × 1011 m from the earth. Energy is
is combined with the properties of semiconductors,
being continuously produced in the sun through
electrons flow in one direction across a junction, setting
various nuclear fusion reactions, the most important
up a voltage. With the addition of circuitry, current
one being where four protons combine to form a
will flow and electric power will be available.
helium nucleus.
H2 + H2 → He + 15 MeV A-2 SOLAR RADIATION AT THE EARTH’S
SURFACE
The mass lost in the process is converted into energy.
These reactions occur in the innermost core of the sun, A-2.1 Solar Constant (G0)
where the temperature is estimated to be (8-40) × 106 K.
It is the radiant flux density incident on a plane normal
The various layers of differing temperatures and
to the sun’s rays at a distance of 1.49 × 108 km from
densities emit and absorb different wavelengths making
the sun and is given by the area under the curve in
the solar spectrum quite composite. However, the sun
Fig. 1. It has a value of 1 367 W/m2 in space and about
essentially acts as a black body having a temperature
1 000 W/m2 at sea level at the equator at solar noon.
of 5 800 K. The spectral distribution of solar radiation
at the earth’s mean distance is shown in Fig. 1. NOTE — The received flux density varies by ±1.5 percent
during the day’s course due to variations in the sun’s output,
A-1.2 Photon is a particle of light that acts as an and by about ± 4 percent over the year due to the earth’s elliptic
individual unit of energy. Its energy depends on orbit.
wavelength. Solar radiation is in the form of photons. Irradiance is the solar power incident on a surface. It

384 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

FIG. 1 SPECTRAL DISTRIBUTION OF THE SUN'S RADIATION

is usually expressed in kW/m 2 . The product of by volume and is beginning to rise with pollutants being
irradiance and time equals insolation. let off into the atmosphere. The water vapour
concentration can very greatly (up to 4 percent by
A-3 CLASSIFICATION OF SOLAR SPECTRUM volume). Dust, water droplets and other molecules
The solar spectrum can be classified based on spectral scatter the sun’s radiation.
distribution; the basis of type of radiation or the energy
A-3.2 Classification Based on Beam and Diffuse
received.
Radiation
A-3.1 Classification Based on Spectral Distribution A-3.2.1 The sun’s radiation at the earth’s surface is
The solar spectrum can be divided into three main composed of two components: beam radiation and
regions: diffuse radiation. Beam or direct radiation consists of
radiation along the line connecting the sun and the
a) Ultraviolet region : 9 percent receiver as shown in Fig. 2A. Diffuse radiation is the
(λ < 400 µm) radiation scattered by the atmosphere without any
b) Visible region : 45 percent unique direction as in Fig. 2B. There is also a reflected
(400 nm < λ < 700 nm) component due to terrestrial surface. Total radiation is
shown in Fig. 2C.
c) Infrared region : 46 percent
(λ > 700 nm) It follows from these figures that

The radiation in the wavelengths above 2 500 nm are Gbc = Gb * cos θ

negligible. For a horizontal surface, the relation becomes
The earth’s atmosphere absorbs various components Gbh = Gb * cos θz
of the radiation to different levels. The short wave UV
and X-ray regions are almost completely absorbed by Here Qz (called the Zenith angle) is the angle of
oxygen and nitrogen gases and irons; the ozone absorbs incidence of beam component of solar radiation for a
UV rays. The atmosphere unaffected by dust or clouds horizontal surface. Zenith Angle is the angle between
acts as an open window for the visible region. Up to 20 directly overhead and the line intersecting the sun.
percent of the IR (Infrared) radiation is absorbed by (90°-zenith) is the elevation angle of the sun above the
the water vapour and CO 2. The carbon dioxide horizon.
concentration in the atmosphere is about 0.03 percent Gb* is intensity of beam component of normally

PART 8 SOLAR PHOTOVOLTAIC (PV) POWER SUPPLY SYSTEMS 385

SP 30 : 2011

A Beam Component Gbc B Diffuse Gdc C Total Gtc

FIG. 2 COMPONENTS OF SOLAR REACTING EARTH

incident solar radiation on a surface. Adding the beam hence an important specification for design of fixed
of the diffuse components, or non-tracking collectors. The following relation is
used to calculate the optimum tilt using the available
G = Gtc = Gbc + Gdc
solar radiation data,
A-3.2.2 Equation Used to Determine Monthly Average
Daily Global Radiation: ⎧ ⎡ 12 ⎤ ⎡ 12 ⎤⎫
βopt = tan −1 ⎨ ⎢∑ ( H b × tan(Φ − δ )⎥ ⎢∑ H b ⎥⎬
⎩ ⎣ i =1 ⎦ ⎣ i =1 ⎦⎭
Hg ⎛ S ⎞
= a + b⎜
H0 ⎝ SMax ⎟⎠ where Φ is the latitude of the location and δ is the
angle of tilt of the beam. Optimum tilt for the entire
where
year typically for Bangalore is βopt = 11.7º.
H g = monthly average daily global radiation, in The optimum tilt for any location for the whole year is
kWh/m2day; almost equal to 0.9Φ and is equal to 11.7º and it is also
nearly equal to latitude of the location Φ. For practical
H 0 = monthly average daily extraterrestrial considerations the optimal tilt is taken as latitude +15º.
radiation, in kWh/m2day; and
The following relation is used to calculate monthly
S = the monthly average sunshine h and S Max is average total radiation on tilted surface:
the monthly average maximum sunshine h.
H t ⎡ Hd ⎤ Hd
A-3.2.2.1 Monthly average daily diffuse radiation = ⎢1 − ⎥ × Rb + × Rd + Rr
H g ⎣⎢ H g ⎦⎥ Hg
For Indian cities linear equation used to compute
monthly average daily diffuse radiation is.
H t = monthly average daily global radiation on
Hd Hg Hg tilted surface,
= 1.411 − 1.696 × and is valid for 0.3 < < 0.7
Hg H0 H0 Hg = monthly average daily global radiation on
horizontal surface,
A-3.2.2.2 Monthly average total radiation on tilted
surface H d = monthly average daily diffused radiation on
The tilt angle or slope of collector governs the amount horizontal surface, and
of energy intercepted by the flat plate collector and is Rb = conversion factor for beam solar radiation.

386 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

A-3.3 Classification by Energy with increase in cloud cover the global solar radiation
is reduced. Relative humidity (0-100 percent) and dry
A-3.3.1 Solar energy as an energy source has the
bulb temperature (-2 to 45 ºC) do not affect the solar
following characteristics: radiation significantly but affects the performance of
a) The peak global (beam + diffuse) solar SPV cells negatively.
radiation received in India is ~ 1 kW/m2. A-3.3.4 Effect of Latitude and Longitude
b) The power output follows a parabolic trend
with the maximum value at noon. The effect of location on the optimal collector tilt angle
is already given above.
c) The maximum daily load factor (PAverage/PMax)
is 33 percent. This implies that if the capacity A-3.3.5 Effect of Altitude
of the SPV panel is 100 kW the maximum
The effect of altitude on solar radiation is not very
average power input over the day (12 h)
significant.
cannot exceed 33 kW. The maximum annual
load factor (ΣPAverage/ΣPMax) is 25 percent. This A-3.3.6 Effect of Wind Velocity
implies that if the capacity of the SPV panel Average wind velocities range between 0 and 20 m/s.
is 100 kW the maximum average power input Wind does not directly affect solar radiation but affects
over the year (12 h/day × 365 days/year) the performance of SPV cells in a positive way by
cannot exceed 25 kW. increasing the heat removal from the top cover.
d) The total annual global energy input (beam +
diffuse radiation) in India is typically A-4 CLASSIFICATION OF CELLS
1970-2 100 kWh/year. a) In terms of materials: non-crystalline silicon,
e) An average of 0.5 kWh/m2 day of energy polycrystalline silicon, amorphous silicon,
available for over 300 days per annum. gallium arsenide, cadmium telluride,
Even the hottest regions on earth, have solar radiation cadmium sulphide, idium arsenide, etc.
flux rarely to exceed 1 kW/m2 amounting to 7 kWh/ b) In terms of technology for fabrication: single
m2/day. Typical solar radiation profile for Bangalore crystal bonds (or cylinders), ribbon growth,
is given at Annex B. Annex C gives typical daily, thin-film, etc.
monthly and annual data for Bangalore. Typical daily A-4.1 Some of the definitions under this section are as
solar radiation is in the range of 5-6 kWh/ m2/day. The follows:
measured solar radiation data is recorded by mainly
by the Indian Meteorological Department using a) Amorphous Semiconductor — A non-
Thermo-electric Pyraonometer with sensor placed at a crystalline semiconductor material that has no
distance of 19.2 m from ground level. long-range order.
b) Amorphous Silicon — A thin-film PV silicon
A Pyranometer is an instrument used for measuring cell having no crystalline structure.
global solar irradiance. A Pyrheliometer is an Manufactured by depositing layers of doped
instrument used for measuring direct beam solar silicon on a substrate.
irradiance. It has an aperture of 5.7° to transcribe the
c) Cadmium Telluride (CdTe) — A
solar disc.
polycrystalline thin-film photovoltaic
Peak sun hours is the equivalent number of h per day material.
when solar irradiance averages 1 000 W/m2 . For d) CIS (Copper-Indium-Diselelide) — A base
example, six peak sun hours means that the energy material for SPV cells.
received during total daylight h equals the energy that e) Crystalline Silicon — A type of PV cell made
would have been received had the irradiance for 6 h from a single crystal or polycrystalline slice
been 1 000 W/m2. of silicon.
A-3.3.2 Effect of Cloud Cover f) Czochralski Process — A method of growing
large size, high quality semiconductor crystal
Cloud cover is measured in Okta [0 Okta: clear sky; 8
by slowly lifting a seed crystal from a molten
Okta:fully covered sky]. Cloud cover directly reduces
bath of the material under careful cooling
solar radiation. There are between 20 and 100 cloudy
conditions.
days in an year in different Indian locations.
g) EFG (Edge defined Film Growth) — A
A-3.3.3 Effect of Rainfall, Relative Humidity and Dry method for making sheets of polycrystalline
Bulb Temperature silicon in which molten silicon is drawn
Rainfall is normally associated with cloud cover and upward by capillary action through a mold.

PART 8 SOLAR PHOTOVOLTAIC (PV) POWER SUPPLY SYSTEMS 387

SP 30 : 2011

h) EVA (Ethylene-Vinyl-Acetate Foil) — It is a s) Wafer — A thin sheet of semiconductor

material to be used by module production for material made by mechanically sawing it from
covering the cells. a single-crystal or multi-crystal ingot or
j) GaAs (Gallium Arsenide) — A crystalline, casting.
high-efficiency semiconductor/ photovoltaic Some of the important characteristics of various types
material. of SPV cells, measured at normal temperature (25 ºC)
k) MOS-FET (Metal-Oxide-Silicon Field Effect and under illumination level of 1.0 kW/m2, are listed
Transistor) — used as semiconductor power in Table 1.
switch in charge regulators, inverters etc.
A-5 BASIC STRUCTURE OF PV CELL
m) N-Type Silicon — Silicon material that has
been doped with a material that has more A-5.1 The basic structure of typical PV cell is shown
electrons in its atomic structure than does in Fig. 3A and 3B. Various layers from top to bottom
silicon. and their function are as follows:
n) Polycrystalline Silicon — A material used to a) Top layer is glass cover, transparency 90-95
make PV cells which consist of many crystals percent. Its purpose is to protect the cell from
as contrasted with single crystal silicon. dust, moisture, etc.
p) Single Crystal Silicon — Material with a b) The next is a transparent adhesive layer which
single crystalline formation. Many PV cells holds the glass cover.
are made from single crystal silicon. c) Underneath the adhesive is an antireflection
q) Silicon (Si) — A chemical element, atomic coating (ARC) to reduce the reflected sunlight
number 14, semi-metallic in nature, dark gray, to below 5 percent.
a semiconductor material. A common d) Then follows a current carrier bus (aluminium
constituent of sand and quartz (as the oxide). or silver) Fig. 3B which collects the charge
Crystallizes in face-centered cubic lattice like carriers, generated by the cell under incidence
a diamond. This is the most common of sunlight, for circulating to outside load.
semiconductor material used in making e) Under the lower side of the metallic grid lies a
photovoltaic cells. p-layer followed by n-layer forming a pn-
r) Thin Film PV Module — A PV module junction at their interface. The thickness of the
constructed with sequential layers of thin film top p-layer is so chosen that enough photons
semiconductor materials. cross the junction to reach the lower n-layer.

3A Cross Sectional View

FIG. 3 BASIC STRUCTURE OF TYPICAL PV CELL — (Continued)

388 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

3B TOP VIEW
FIG. 3 BASIC STRUCTURE OF TYPICAL PV CELL

f) The follows another bus in contact with the (when load is connected across the cell terminals).
lower n-layer. This forms the second terminal There is also the thermally generated small reverse
of the cell. saturation current Is (minority carrier flow in same
direction as IG) also called dark current as it flows even
Table 1 Characteristics of SPV Cells in absence of light. IG flows in opposite direction to
(Clause A-4.1) ID, the forward diode current of the junction. The cell
feeds current IL to load with a terminal voltage V.
Sl SPV Cell Fill Conversion
No. Factor Efficiency (percent) The above operation suggests the circuit model of a PV
(1) (2) (3) (4)
cell as drawn in Fig. 4. The following can be written from
i) Mono-crystalline silicon 0.85 13-14 the circuit model and the well-known expression for:
ii) Polycrystalline silicon 0.85 9-12
iii) Amorphous silicon 0.66 5-6
e
iv) Gallium arsenide 0.87 20-25 ID = Is (eλV – 1); λ =
kT
where
A-5.2 Operation and Circuit Model for Analysis
k = Boltsman constant,
The incidence of photons (sunlight) causes the
generation of electron-hole pairs in both p and n-layers. e = electronic change and
Photons generated minority carriers (electrons in T = cell temperature in K.
p-layer and hole in n-layer) freely cross the junction.
This increases the minority carrier flow manifolds. Its IL = IG – ID = IG – Is (eλV–1)
major component is the light generated current IG

F IG. 4 CIRCUIT MODEL OF PV CELL

PART 8 SOLAR PHOTOVOLTAIC (PV) POWER SUPPLY SYSTEMS 389

SP 30 : 2011

Hence, exposure meters and automatic exposure diaphragm.

Silicon response also overlaps the visible spectrum but
1 ⎛ IG ⎞
VOC (IL = 0) = λ ln ⎜ I + 1⎟
has its peak at the 0.8 µm (8 000 Å) wavelength, which
⎝ S ⎠ is in the infrared region. In general, silicon has higher
conversion efficiency and greater stability and is less
and ISC (V = 0) = IG subject to fatigue. It is therefore widely used for present
where Voc is the open circuit voltage and Isc is the short day commercial solar cells.
circuit current.
A-5.5 Fabricating Silicon PV Cell
Solar radiation generated current IG is dependent on
The most commonly used methods of manufacturing
the intensity of light. The I-V characteristics of the cell
silicon PV cell from purified silicon feedstock are as
are drawn in Fig. 5A for various values of intensity of
follows:
solar radiation. One typical I-V characteristic of the
cell is drawn in Fig. 5B. Each point on this curve a) Single crystal silicon with a uniform chemical
belongs to a particular power output. The point Q structure.
indicated on the curve pertains to the maximum power b) Polycrystalline silicon-series of crystalline
output at which the cell should be operated. At this structures within a PV cell.
point. c) Amorphous silicon with a random atomic
PMax = VP, Max IP, Max chemical structure.
The fill-factor (ff) of a cell is defined as: Most PV power uses flat-plate modules of cut and
polished wafer like cells of crystalline silicon, which
PM ax are now have an efficiency of about 12 percent.
FF = I V
SC SC A-5.5.1 Thin-film technologies
The cell efficiency is given as: There are two main reasons why thin film offers
promise of significant cost reduction. These are as
Pout follows:
η= P
in a) Thin-film cells use only a few microns of
direct material, instead of tens of mills used
where Pout is the power delivered to load (W) and Pin is
by crystalline, polycrystalline or ribbon
the solar power incident on the cell (W).
silicon modules.
A-5.3 Effect of Temperature on Solar Cell Efficiency b) Construction of monolithic thin-film modules
can be done at the same time that the cells are
As the temperature increases, the diffusion of electrons
formatted, thus eliminating most of the cost of
and holes in the length of Si (or GaAs) increases
module fabrication. These two aspects of thin-
causing an increase in the dark current and decrease in
film technology are further explained below:
V OC. The overall effect causes a reduction in the
efficiency of solar cell as the temperature increases. Cadmium telluride can absorb 99 percent of
The practical efficiency of Si solar cell is about 12 the sun’s energy in less than 0.5 µm thickness
percent and that of GaAs solar cell is 25 percent at the as opposed to the 0.2 mm requirement for
normal temperature of 300 K. With each degree rise in crystalline silicon. In conventional
temperature, the efficiency decreases by a factor of technologies, cells cut into individual parts
K = 0.004 2 percent. are then circuited back together as discrete
elements. Monolithic interconnection during
Δη = – 0.0042ΔT
cell fabrication eliminates labour and in
where ΔT is the rise in temperature above 300 K and addition produces a superior looking product
Δη is the change in efficiency. The factor K may vary because of its uniform finish.
depending on the type of cell.
A-6 TESTING OF SPV CELLS
A-5.4 Spectral Response
A-6.1 Typical Procedure for Testing of SPV Cells
It is seen from the spectral response curves of Fig. 6
that the Selenium cell response curve nearly matches Some of the definitions under this section are as
that of the eye. The spectral response of the human follows:
eye is 550 nm. Because of this, Se cell has a widespread a) NOCT (Nominal Operating Cell Temperature)
application in photographic equipment such as — It is the estimated temperature of a SPV

390 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

5A
(A)

(B)
5B

FIG. 5 CURRENT-VOLTAGE CHARACTERISTICS OF A PV CELL

module when operating under 800 W/m2 b) Standard test conditions — Conditions under
irradiance, 20°C ambient temperature and which a module is typically tested in a
wind speed of 1.0 m/s. NOCT is used to laboratory:
estimate the nominal operating temperature 1) Irradiance intensity of 1 000 W/m2,
of a module in its working environment. 2) AM 1.5 solar reference spectrum; and

PART 7 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS IN HAZARDOUS AREAS 391

SP 30 : 2011

3) Cell (module) temperature of 25°C, 4) Vload, Iload.

± 2°C. c) Calculation of parameters from the above
c) System operating voltage — The array output measured data:
voltage under load. The system operating
1) PMax,
voltage is dependent on the load or batteries
connected to the output terminals. 2) Fill factor,
d) Rated module current — The current output 3) Cell efficiency, and
of a PV module measured at standard test 4) Module efficiency.
conditions of radiation level of 1 000 W/m2 A-7 APPLICATION OF SPV PANELS FOR BULK
and a cell temperature of 25°C. ENERGY CONVERSION
e) Short circuit current — The current produced
SPV cell produces dc power which is maximum at a
by an illuminated PV cell, module, or array
particular point on its I-V characteristics (which
when its output terminals are shorted.
responds to solar radiation input). There are several;
f) Full sun — The full sun condition is the
ways in which this power can be used:
amount of power density received at the
surface of the earth at noon on a clear day — a) Direct use for applications such as lighting,
about 1 000 W/m2. Lower levels of sunlight pumping, mechanical power, conversion to ac
are often expressed as 0.5 sun or 0.1 sun. A for ac loads, etc.
figure of 0.5 sun means that the power density b) Conditioning of power: SPV power is used
of the sunlight is one-half of that of a full sun as ac after conditioning. The process of
(that is 500 W/m2). conversion and re-conversion into ac with
The procedure for testing of SPV panels is as follows: solid stage devices like SCR (Silicon
Controlled Rectifier), IGBT (Insulated Gate
a) Soaking in natural sunlight for 7 days.
Bi-polar Transistor) is called power
b) Measurement of the following parameters conditioning.
under condition of 1 Sun (1000 W/m2) from
c) Storage in batteries and used for mobile power
a solar simulator (with a non-uniformity of
plants.
light source within ± 3 percent) at 25°C:
d) Hybrid system which is a SPV system that
1) Voc, Isc;
includes other sources of electricity
2) Vmaximum power point, I maximum power point; generation, such as wind or diesel generators.
3) Rseries, Rshunt; and

F IG. 6 SPECTRAL RESPONSE OF Si, Se AND THE N AKED EYE

392 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

e) Combination of stationary plants with battery envelope, typically replacing conventional

storage which can be of two types: building materials. This integration may be in
vertical facades, replacing view glass, spandrel
1) Minigrids:
glass, or other facade material; into semi-
i) dc bus (because many renewable transparent skylight systems; into roofing
sources generate dc power). systems, into shading “eyebrows” over
ii) ac bus windows; or other building envelope systems.
iii) ac and dc bus
Usually the SPV panel is the costliest element in the
2) Generalized ac and dc bus based system SPV system. Balance of system (BOS) which is
can also be connected to conventional composed of the parts or components of a SPV system
power grid at the LT (0.415 kV) or HT other than the photovoltaic array usually const only a
(11 kV) level. small fraction of the total cost. Hence it is economical
f) BIPV (Building integrated SPV) — It is the to install the most efficient sub-systems (inverters,
design and integration of PV into the building battery bank, etc.) in the BOP.

PART 7 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS IN HAZARDOUS AREAS 393

 ANNEX B

394
(Clause A-3.3.1)
TYPICAL PROFILE OF SOLAR RADIATION DATA (kW/m2) FOR BANGALORE
SP 30 : 2011

Sl No. Time (h) → 06:00 07:00 08:00 09:00 10:00 11:00 12:00 13:00 14:00 15:00 16:00 17:00 18:00
Month
↓
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12) (13) (14) (15)
i) January 0.00 0.03 0.20 0.43 0.64 0.78 0.85 0.85 0.76 0.62 0.43 0.23 0.04
ii) February 0.00 0.05 0.24 0.46 0.64 0.80 0.84 0.85 0.78 0.65 0.45 0.23 0.05
iii) March 0.00 0.07 0.29 0.53 0.73 0.87 0.94 0.92 0.83 0.69 0.49 0.27 0.07
iv) April 0.00 0.08 0.30 0.53 0.73 0.86 0.92 0.90 0.83 0.67 0.48 0.25 0.07
v) May 0.00 0.09 0.28 0.49 0.68 0.82 0.87 0.85 0.78 0.64 0.46 0.26 0.09
vi) June 0.00 0.10 0.25 0.44 0.59 0.70 0.74 0.74 0.67 0.55 0.42 0.24 0.09
vii) July 0.00 0.07 0.21 0.36 0.47 0.55 0.60 0.60 0.56 0.48 0.34 0.19 0.07
viii) August 0.00 0.06 0.19 0.35 0.46 0.55 0.61 0.62 0.57 0.47 0.33 0.19 0.06
ix) September 0.00 0.05 0.19 0.37 0.54 0.63 0.68 0.67 0.62 0.50 0.35 0.19 0.06
x) October 0.00 0.04 0.20 0.41 0.54 0.71 0.76 0.76 0.67 0.54 0.37 0.16 0.04
xi) November 0.00 0.03 0.16 0.34 0.52 0.64 0.70 0.69 0.61 0.52 0.36 0.18 0.04
xii) December 0.00 0.02 0.15 0.33 0.50 0.61 0.66 0.66 0.60 0.48 0.32 0.17 0.03
Average 0.00 0.06 0.22 0.42 0.59 0.71 0.76 0.76 0.69 0.57 0.40 0.21 0.06

NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

 SP 30 : 2011

ANNEX C
(Clause A-3.3.1)
TYPICAL PROFILE OF DAILY, MONTHLY AND ANNUAL SOLAR RADIATION DATA (kW/m2)
FOR BANGALORE

Sl No. Month Days in a Month Total Daily kWh/Day Total Monthly kWh/Month
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
i) January 31 5.860 5 181.674 6
ii) February 27 6.045 1 163.216 5
iii) March 31 6.717 0 208.227 9
iv) April 30 6.630 4 198.911 7
v) May 31 6.322 9 196.009 6
vi) June 30 5.548 4 166.450 8
vii) July 31 4.503 7 139.613 7
viii) August 31 4.457 0 138.166 1
ix) September 30 4.852 3 145.570 0
x) October 31 5.189 6 160.876 2
xi) November 30 4.765 1 142.954 2
xii) December 31 4.539 9 140.738 3
Average Total annual 5.452 7 1 982.409 53

PART 8 SOLAR PHOTOVOLTAIC (PV) POWER SUPPLY SYSTEMS 395